THE PUBLICATIONS OF IvisoN, Phinney, Blakeman & Co. THE AMERICAN EDUCATIONAL SERIES OP SCHOOL AND COLLEGE TEXT BOOKS, THE MI0N READERS, SPELLERS, PRIMER MD SPEAKER, By Prof. CHAS. W. SANDERS, ■ CONFORMINa ENTIRELY TO Webster's ITew Illustrated and Eevised Dictionaries. UNION READER, Number Thres. UNION READER, Number Four. UNION READER, Number Five. UNION READER, Number Six. ANALYSIS OF ENGLISH WORDS. UNION PICTORIAL PRIMER. UNION PRIMARY SPELLER. UNION SPELLER. UNION READER, Number One. UNION READER, Number Two, UNION SPEAKER. SANDERS' SERIES OF READERS, &c. Sanders' Primary Hand Cards. Sanders' German and English Primer, Sanders' Primary School Charts, Large, for Sanders' First Reader. the School Room, 8 Nos. on 4 Cards. Sauiders' Second " Sanders' New Speller, Definer and Analyzer. Sanders' Third " Sanders' Test Speller. Sanders' Fourth " Sanders' Old Spelling Book. Sanders' Fifth " Sanders' Primary School Primer. Bandera' High School Reader. Sanders' Elocutionary Chart (on Rollers). Sanders' Young Ladies' Rfiader. Sanders' Pictorial Primer. Sanders' School Spealcer. ROBINSON'S FULL COURSE OF MATHEMATICS. Graded to the wants qf Primary, Intannediato, Grammar, Normal and High Schools, Academics and Ciillogo5. This Sbuies has already ac<^uired an Annual &ale of nearly Half a Million, which is rapidly increasing. Progressive Table Book. New Geometry and Trigonometry. Progressive Primary Arithmetic. Robinson's Geometry, separate. Progressive Intellectual Arithmetic, Robinson's Trigonometry, separate. Rudiments of Written Arithmetic. New Analytical Geometry and Conic Sections. Progressive Practical Arithmetic. New Surveying and Navigation. Progressiva Higher Arithmetic. New Differential and Integral Calculus. Arithmetical Examples. Kiddle's New Elementary Astronomy. New Elementary Algebra. University Astronomy. New University Algebra, Mark's First Lessons in Geometry, ^^W" KEYS to the Arithmetics, Algebras, Geometries, and Surveying, are published for the use of Teachers only, and will be furnished at Retail price, postage paid. aET THK BEST. ■WEBSTER'S UNABRIDGED 8000 Engravings ; 1840 Pages Quarto. Price $12. G. & 0. MERfctlAM, Publishers, Springfield, Mass. WEBSTER'S SCHOOL DICTIOI^AEIES. Richly and profusely illostbated, and embellished with "Wood Cuts, assisting immeaeurably in the definition of the words under which they occur. Webster's Primary School Dictionary. I Webster's High School Dictionary. Webster's Common School Dictionary. I Webster's Academic Dictionary. ^ Moflt valuable Text-Bookb for ayslomatic instruction in spelling and pronunciation in Schools. Webster's Counting-Houss and Family I Webster's Pocket Dictionary. Dictionary. 1 Webster's Army and Navy Dictionary. BRTMT & STEATTON'S BOOK-KEEPING SEEIES. The liest TEXT-BOOKS ever prepared on this subject, i^ommon School Edition. High School Edition. Counting-House Edition. WILSON'S SCHOOL HISTORIES. Primary American History. American History, School Edition History of the United States. Outlines of General History. Parley's Universal History. Cornell University Library The original of tliis book is in tine Cornell University Library. There are no known copyright restrictions in the United States on the use of the text. http://www.archive.org/details/cu31 924031 281 854 Cornell University Library arV16195 A new method of learning the German lang 3 1924 031 281 854 olin.anx NEW MET-HOD OF LEABNINO THE GERMAN LANGUAGE: EMBEACINQ BOTH THE ^nalgtic onI> ggntljetic Mohes of Instrnction ; Bsnra A PLAIN AND PRACTICAL "WAT OF ACQUIRING THE ARl OF READING. SPEAKING, AND COMPOSING GEMAN. B7 W. H. "W;OODBURy, A.M., iUTHOR OP "SHORTBR COURSE WITH QERMAH," "ELEMENTARY GERMAN READIE, " ECLECTIC GERMAN READER," " OERMAN-ENQLISH AND BNOLISH-OBRMAIT HEADER," " NEW METHOD FOB GERMANS TO LEARN ENGLISH," OR : " Steue 3Rf:t(«tie )Ut Srtetnuns ber cRsUf^'it Sprai^e," km. SBet ftembe ©urac^en nlc^t tennt, meig ntc^t* son ffinet elgnen. (SoetH NEW YOKE : IVISON, PHINNEY, BLAKEMAN & CO., CmCAGO : S. C. GRIGGS & CO. 1869. /tOf ^NELL\ UM!V ERSITY \ LIBRARY^ Entered, according to Act of Congress, ta tHe year 1868, Irr W E. WOODBUET, DiBtrictof New York STBE«OT»PBD BT Bhith & MoDoxraAi, 82 & 34 Beekman-tt. JAMES N. MoELLlGOTT, LL.D. XK WHOM ABS FOTTND mOH MORAL WOBTH, SABG PHILOLOQIOAL ATTAHHIEXT^ EXTRAORDINAEY SUCCESS AS A PRACTICAL EDUCATOl^ AND AN ABLB AND IXOQUENT ADVOCATE OF THE CAUSE OF GENERAL EDUCATION, ai)iB toolume IS MOST OOBDTAI,LT DEDIOATKD IT BIB FBIBND, THE AUTHOR. WOODBURY'S GERMAI SERIES. L NEW METHOD WITH GERMAN. 623 pp. 12mo. — Price, II. KEY TO NEW METHOD 80 pp. 12mo. — Prio III. SHORTER COURSE WITH GERMAN. 230 pp. 12mo. — Price IV. KEY TO SHORTER COURSE. 80 pp. 12mo. — Prio V. ELEMENTARY GERMAN READER. 250 pp. 12mo. — Price, VI. ECLECTIC GERMAN READER. 280 pp. 12mo: — ^Price, Vfl. GERMAN-ENGLISH AND ENGLISH-GERMAN READEB. 10 pp. 12mo. — Price |ttt ©rlernung bcr englifc^cn @^r«^e. 5>rei8 < .« » ■♦♦- lasqntilt's Ixtnc\) 0cric0. L FRENCH COURSE. 500 pp. 12ino. — ^Price XL KEY TO FRENCH COURSE. 140 pp. 12nio. — ^Priee, IIL COLLOQUIAL FRENCH READER. 260 pp. 12mo. — Price IV. TELEMAQUE. 890 pp. 12mo. — Price, V. NAPOLEON 274 pp. 12ino. — Price, PREFACE. The German Language is now deservedly ranked amwig ibe leading studies in many of our High Schools and Academies. Its treasures in every department of knowledge, in every variety of composition, are certainly among the wonders of literary achievement. Among European tongues it holds a decided su- periority of rank ; surpassing them all in the abundance of its words, in the richness of its internal resources, and in its wonderful flexibility. Hence the propriety of its place among liberal studies. But the motives to the study of this language reach far be- yond the circles of literary life. Celerity and cheapness of travel, growing out of recent improvements in navigation, have united in producing an easy intercourse between Germany and America. Besides, we have already in our midst an immense and daily augmenting German population. The language of this people is spoken extensively among us, and has hence come to have a high practical value. It is often set down as an in- dispensable qualification even for a common clerkship. Such being the character and importance of the German lan- guage, various attempts have been made, as was natural, to give greater facility in learning it. Some of these are unques. tionably excellent works ; executed, according to the plan which they have adopted, in a manner skillful and judicious. But just here, in plan, as it seems to the present writer, all of them are more or less lacking; and out of this conviction has aiisen the present volume. The grounds of this conviction may be briefly stated. Years ago, when the author, with something of enthusiasm, resolved, if possible, to master the language, and for that, arcong other VI PREFACE, purposes, resided for some time in Germany, he found his ar dor not a little abated by the circumstance, that, in no one of the numerous grammars which he had collected about him, was he able to pursue his studies on what he deemed philosophical principles. The methods of the books were in one sense va- rious ; but all were plainly divisible into two extremely oppo- site classes. In one class theory held the sway ; in the other wact^ce was supreme. The one seemed bent upon grounding he pupil in set rules and forms, and anxious chiefly to present and impress the language, as a thing of science, a systematic whole. The other appeared to deal almost exclusively in sep- arate and independent facts ; intent only on exhibiting and teaching the German tongue, as a thing of art, a medium of com- mon communication. That such a knowledge of the language as he had proposed to himself to acquire, could never be obtained by either of these methods exclusively, was perfectly evident. That not only the surest, but even the shortest route to his ob- ject, might be found in the due combination of the two, seemed not less obvious. For art has her only just basis in the science that lies underneath ; without which she is liable to frequent failure and perpetual uncertainty. The attempt, then, in this book is to unite and narmonize more fully two things, which, in teaching a language, ought never to be separated : the theoretical and the practical. This leading feature being announced, we now proceed to specify some details of the plan. It assumes in the outset, as ever afterward, the position of the careful and considerate living teacher ; that is, introduces one by one the easier forms and usages of the language, and directs attention to the more obvious differences between the German and the English. It here seeks to avoid the error of frightening the beginner with a formidable array of rules, de. clensions and conjugations, which he is, as yet, in no wise pre pared to entertain. After a certain amount of progress in these prelirr'aary steps, the pupil is put upon the exercise of composing ii, Ger- man. To this end he is taught to regard every German sen- tence, given him for translation, as a model cm which he is to PBEFACE. VU build one of his own. lie is in no wise trammeled as to the thought ; he is under no necessity of divesting it of some par- ticular English dress, given it by the hand of another ; but ia encouraged to take any thought which may suggest itselfj and, under the guidance of his model sentence and what other light he has received, to put it into a German garb. In this way, he comes gradually to feel the difference between the English wid the German modes of expression, and thence derives ac- curacy and readiness in making them. Conjointly with this process, and in order to its more complete success, the practice of turning English sentences into German, as well as German into English, is carried on in a series of exercises at once pro- gressive, comprehensive and systematic. . It supplies the learner throughout all these various exercises with the materials necessary to their due performance. Every lesson is headed with the statement and illustration of all new principles involved, an explanation of difficult words and phrases, and a vocabulary alphabetically arranged. Nothing, indeed, is left unsupplied, which the student can not readily obtain for himself. It does not, however, in regard to grammatical instruction, leave the learner here. For, although it embraces somewhere or other in the previous course, all the leading facts and fea- tures of the language, it purposely deals with them rather as individuals than as components of a grammatical system. It takes them analytically, not synthetically. But now, having accomplished its purpose in this respect, it invites the attention of the student to a new and more soientifio aspect of them. They come before him now, not as new things, but in new re- lations. He has all the advantage of an impressive review, and at the same time gives discipline to his miud, by giving order to its acq^uisitions. It furthermore, as is plain, adapts itself to all classes of teachers and learners. Those who insist upon the more purely practical method, who regard every thing beyond as superflu- ous, if not pernicious, will find the course contained in the first part, all-sufiicient, it is believed, to answer their demands. To those, on the other hand, who can tolerate nothing short of YlU PREFACE. a Strictly systematic course, first and last, the second part will it is hoped, be found no unacceptable offering. To those, finally, who sympathize with the author in the view that these two methods can and ought to be united in teaching a language, the entire work is presented with all the confidence of expe- rienced success. To render it yet more complete in itself, a carefully selected series of Reading Lessons, from the best German writers, has been added, together with a full vocabulary (pp. 411 and 505). Throughout the volume, great care has been taken to furnish in every particular, however trivial it might seem, the most reliable instruction. And in this respect, as in others, it is hoped, the work will be found especially acceptable to that large class of students who aim at the acquisition of the lan- guage mainly without the aid of a teacher. Indeed, for their purposes, many features in the system will prove peculiarly serviceable. In the matter of declension and conjugation — in the account of derivatives and compounds — in the tabular views of verbs, regular and irregular, simple and compound — in the illustra- tions of the powers and uses of the prepositions and other par- ticles — ^in short, in all leading points, the author has sought to present those views only which are now recognized as the best and truest by the highest German authorities. To the labors of Bkokeb and Heyse especially is he indebted ; though numerous are the works on German grammar, which have been consulted in view of this publication. Finally, with the sincere desire that this course of study may subserve the purpose of rendering the German language and literature more easy of access, and with a grateful acknowledg ment of the friendly aid which has been received from several gentlemen of known ability in linguistic scienre, the work ia respectfully submitted. Niw YoEK, October, 1866. tUlViEOTS OF THE LESSONS. liESSON I.— German Alphabet 19 LESSON IL— Sounds of letters.— L Vowels.— IL Umlauts.— III. Diphthongs. — lY. Consonants. — V. Compound Conso- nants. — ^VI. Accent 20 LESSON III.— Current hand , 23 LESSON IV. — 1. Forms of definite article. — 2. $a6cn present sin- gular 23 LESSON V. — Singen and SSSarten present singular. — 1. Root. — 2. Form of Conjugation 24 LESSON VL— Interrogative Conjugation 26 LESSON VII. — 1. Verbs irregular present singular. — 2. Gender of Nouns 27 LESSON VIIL— 1. Cases.— 2. Declension of Nouns.- 3. Nouns of Old decL ending in e, el, en, er, c^eii, tein. — 4. Old decl. with de£ Art. Agreement of article with noun. — 5. Verbs with dat. and ace. 29 LESSON IX. — 1. Genitive, how rendered. — 2. Nouns adding e^ in gen. Occasional omission of e in gen. and dat 31 LESSON X. — 1. Demonstrative pronouns iJierer and 3ener. — 2. Often rendered by latter— former. — 3. The word one. — 4. DeoL of btefcr, etc. — 5. Setrt and SBergeffen pres. sing 33 LESSON XI. — 1. Dative with prepositions. — 2. Dative with verbs of motion. — 3. Omission of prep. — i. Of, how expressed in Ger- man. — 5. Position of Prep , 3d LESSON XIL— 1. ludef. Art.— 2. 3. Poss. Prons. — i. Deel. of indef. Art., etc. — 5. e when often dropped. — 6. Words in apposition. . . 88 LESSON XIII. — 1. Interrogative Pronouns. — 2. SCiig fitr separat- ed. — 3. aBcW)er and vxxi fiir in exclamations. — 4. SDel(| in ques- tions. — S. ©in rendered by a one. — 6. Sag for ttJttrum. Decl. of tBer and »a«. — 7. Gen. of Viai, — 8. aBemit, etc. 41 LESSON XIV. — 1. Adjectives used predicatively. — 2. Used attri- butively.— 3 Old decl. of Adjs. — 4. Agreement of Adj. with Nouns. — 5. Attributive and predicative forms of Adj. — 6. Adjs. preceded by ctraaa, waS and w.i)li. — 7. Adjs. referring to noun understood 44 CONTENTS OF THE LESSONS. pAsa LESSON XV.— I. New decl. of Adjs.— 2. Form of Nm> deoL iu nom. — 3. Final syllable of mimt^er, etc., sometimes dropped. — 4. Adj. placed after noun. — 5. Adj. formed from nouns. i1 LESSON XVI.— 1. Mixed decl. of Adjs.— 2. Adjs. following mein, etc. — 3. Sigtn. Endings of Mixed decl. nom. — 4. Ein as nu- meral. — 5. Inflection of ein and teiit. — 6. ®in preceded by def. art. 5Q LESSON XVII.— 1. Connected view of Old, New and Mixed de- clensions. — 2. Words requiring adj. in New deoL — 3. Words r&- quii4ng adj. in Mixed decl 54 i JiSSON XVIII.— 1. Indefinite pronouns.— 2. 3. Scbcrmantt. — t. 3e» mani. — 5. Sliemdnb. — 6. ??tc^t with Semanb and StwaS. — 7. Sitter ' and .Reiner 66 liESSON XIX. — 1. 2. Indefinite pronoun tttatt. — 3. ©ar, and gattj unb gar 69 LESSON XX. — 1. Prepositions with dat. — 2. Prepositions with aec. — 8. Prepositions with dat and aoc.— 4. Preps, and def. art. contracted. Examples of ait; Don, aufi ttuS and na(| 61 LESSON XXI.— 1. Negative conjugation.— 2. Position of 9Jtc^t.— 8. In interrogative sentences. — 4. ©onbevti and 5t6er. — 5. 6. Jti^t IBa|r ?— 7. ?!i(^t with 9io(^.— 8. S(«(| nt^t, awi) tein, etc 64 LESSON XXII. — 1. A'isuideel. ending in tmacoented ar, e, er, el. — , 2. Nouns not ending in at:, etc. — 3. Adj. or Part, used substan- tively. — 5. For determining decl 67 AiESSON XXIII. — Feminine gender. — 1. Decl. of bie, bieft and mettle. — 2. DecL 't Adjs. in fem. gen. Old decl. — 3. New decl. — 4. Decl. of Fem Nouns. — 5. 6. Appellations of Females. — 7. Sf, c, a, umlauted before the suffix in 70 LESSON XXIV.— 1. Formation and Gen. of Diminutives.- 2. Use of Diminutives. — 3. graulein and 9Jtdbi|en. — i. 5. Compound Nouns. Nouns with Nouns. — 6. With Preps., etc. — 7. With Adjs. — 8. Compound Adjs. — 9. 10. Nouns separated by hyphen. — 11. 12. IS. Gender of Compound Nouns 74 LESSON XXV.— Plan of Composing German.— 1. Art., and adj. Prons., Plural. DeoL in all GendSrs of Plur. — 2. Adjs. — 3. Old ^sel. — 4. 5. Plural of Nouns of Old decl., Neuter. — 6. 7. Maec. — !, Fem. — 9. Decl. of Nouns in Plural. — 10. ^e|lo and je-ie. — 11. Position of subject and verb 109 LESSON XXXIII. — 1. Adjs. used substantively. — 2. As abstract Nouns.— 3. ffleji. — 4. Comparative of 3{a|e. — 5. Formation of Adjs. from Proper Names of Countries and Cities. — 6. From Pro- per Names of Persons. — 7. Denoting a sect 113 LESSON XXXIV.— 1. Eitel and Sauter, omission of inflectional endings. — 2. Several Adjs. qualifying the same noun. — 3. In nom. and ace. Neut. — 4. Adj. denoting a language. — 5 Form of the New decl. — 6. Sentences used adjeotively. — 7. Adjs. used adverbially. — 8. 9. Adverbs. — 10. Compai-ative of SBiel, etc.. .. Hi LESSON XXXV.~1. Absolute Poss. Prons.— 2. 3. Used substan- tively. — 4 SPJeinc^gleic^en, etc. — 6. Oleii^Eit. 12i LESSON XXXVI.— 1. Conjugation of ^aten.-'-2. Moms with $a6en. — 3. Position of the main verb in aompoimd tenses. — 4. Verb with two objects connected by a conj. — 5. Two or moio nouns in sing. — li. With collective nouns. — 1. With words aa titles, in sing. 125 XU CONTENTS OF THE LESSONS. pAai LESSON XXXVIL— Conjugntion of IHeten.— 1. Present Parti- ciple.— 2. S. Perfect Particip .6. — i. Inflection of the Participles.— 5. Preaint, sing. — 6. Plur. — 1. Imperfect, sing. — 8. Plur. — 9. Per- fect ani Pluperfect.— 10. Future.— 11. 12. Orthographic and euphonic changes. — 13. Imperative 129 LESSON XXXVm.— Use of the Tenses.— 1. Present.— 2. Imper- fect. — 3. Perfect. — L Future Tenses. — 5. 6. Imperative. 2)u and 3|t, Sit.—I. Verb repeated or wholly omitted 184 •F/SSON XXXIX.— 1. Relative Prons.- 2. Decl. of the relative ber. — 3. Use of gen. — i. Sct^ev, t, eg, used in the sense of some, any. — 5. Construction of sentences with rel. Prons. — 6. Words requiring the same construction. Principal and Subordinate Sentences. — 1. Relative clause and principal sentence. Exam- ples of 138 LESSON XL.— 1. JBtr and fSiai as relative.— 2. Set for Semant).— 3. Use of Wai, — 4. Pronominal Adverbs. — 5. Agreement of the Verb with relative.— 6. Position and omission of relative.- - 1. Relative repeated. — 8. Omission of Copula 142 LESSON LXI. — 1. Determinative Pronouns. — 2. Seijentge. — 3. ttt for Serjenigt. — 4. ®erfeI6c.— 5. ©ol(^eri followed by a relative.— 6. Followed by trie. — 7. Omitted. — 8. Used with indef. art. — 9. Used as a substitute for a demonst. or a pers. Pron 1 45 LESSON XLIL— L Def art.— 2. Art. with Jetbc, ^ali, fo, foti^er, luie and ju. — 3. Indef. art 149 '.ESSON XLIII.— 1. Omission of art— 2. 9Jac^ ^aufc, etc.- 3. Omis- Bion or retention of art. — 4. Before the substantively used in- nnitivo. — 5. Omission formerly more common. — 6. With ju be- fore the dat 1S3 LESSON XLIV. — 1. Demonstrative Pronouns. — 2. Demonstiat. S)er with noun. — 3. Rendered by pers. pron. — 4. Used before the gen. — 5. Scffen, !Deten. — G. "hig in compouuds.^7. SiefeS and tt)elcl)e3 with the verb Sein. — 8. Sitn 166 LESSON XLV. — 1. Auxiliaries of m^de. — 2. Conjugation of the mode auxiliaries. — 3. Formation of Plur. — 4. Surfetl, — 5. SHH" nen. — 6. Um^tn with .ffonnen. — 1. SRSgen. — 8. 3)tiiiTen. — 9, SoUett.- 10. aDoKen.- 11. Satreit- 12. Conjugation of.— 13. Form of Per- fect an i Pluperfect. — 14. Position of infinitive form of the Par- ticiple. — 16. Omission of main verb im LESSON XLVL— 1. Conjugation of ©ein.— 2. Idioms with ©ein.— 3. Conjugation of iffierben. — 4. fflerbcn as an independent verb. . 167 LESSON XLVII.— 1. "Irrejulat" Verbs.— 2. Form of infinitive CONTENTS OF THE LESSONS. XIU PAQl & 4. 5. Foi-raation of Imperfect Tense and Perfect Participle. — ■ 6. Irregular in Present tense. — 7. Formation of second and third pursocvE) 172 LESSON XLTIII. — Use of the auxiliaries liakn and Sein. — 1. ©a* ten. — 2. ©ein -with what verbs nsed. — 3. ©alien or ern, 09.17. ©leit^v 69.18. ©alien, conjugation of, 36. 1. Idioms with, 36. 2. "When and liow used as an auxili- ary, 48. 1 8. §alb, :^atOtn or falter, 60. 4. ©albtn, wegen and urn— iBilten with the gen. of pers. prons., 60. & §«uS, nac^ or ju, 43. 2. ^eijjtn, 49. 1. oJ». kitx and [;in, 82. 2. 3. |)evr, 70. 1 2. 4>tit, 52. 2. 8, |)oIen laffeu, 49 6. Smmer, 69. I9i, INDEX TO THE LESSONS. XVll Lessons. Imper. mood, past part, in place of, 50. 3. ObservationB on the several uses of, 50. 5 Imperfect, how formed, 37. 7. 8. 0">servations on the use of, 38. 2. Impersonal verbs 67. 3n, 68.4. Indefinite numerals, 65. Indefinite pronouns, 18. Indefinite pronoun man, . .19. 1. 2. Indicative mood, for imper., 38. 1. u. Infinitive mood, use of, in place of past part., 45. 13. With- out ju, 49. 1. Aa a neuter noun, 49, 4. Active form used passively, 49. 6. An- swering after feleiOeiti ge^en, &a., to our present part.,. .49. 1. Interrogative conjugation, ... 6. 1. Interrogative pronouns, 13. Sigcnb, 65.6. Irregular verbs 47. 3a, 69.20. St, 69. 21. Before compara- tive 32. 10. Scncr aiid btEfcr, distinguished, 10. 1. ^etn, 69,22. .Reiner, 18.7. Stimi von teibeii, 65. 2. ^pnnen, remarks on 45. 6. Congg, 60.2. Caffen, remark on 45. 11. fietn, diminutives in, 24. 1. Rep- resented by a pron. masc. or fern 28.4, Stan, its use, 19. 1. 2. fflitt, 66.6. SKil, with verb.^ G6. 7. Mixed declension of adjectives, 16. SBtogcn, remarks on 45. 7 Moods, indicative, 37. Infini- tive, 49. Subjunctive, 55. Conditional, 5 6. Imperative, 50. 5, SBiiffen, remark on 45. 8. 9Ja4 - .66.8. 9Jtt(i, following the word it governs 66. 9. 16. Negative conjugation 21. SRi^tma^r? 21.5. ?loij, 69. 2.3. Nouns, dec!, o^ 8. 2 Old form of, 8. 4. New form of, 22. Old iecL plur., 25. 9. Irreg. Lessons plnr., 26. New deel. plur., 30. 2. Fem. plur., 30. 3. Pro- per names, decl. of, 30. 4. Foreign proper names, 30. 7. 8. Irreg. decl. of nouns, 31. (Numbers, §44. § 45.) 9Jim, 69. 24. 9Jlir, 69.26. D6, 66.10. D^ttc, 67. 4. Followed by the infinitive 49. 5 (Ordinal numbers § 45.) Paradigm of |a(a«, 65.5. ©oI(i)er, 41. 5. ©oHen, remarks on, 45. 9. As imper. 50. 5. obs. Some 39. 4. ©oni^, 69.28. ©tjajtren ge^en, fa^ren, &a.,.. .49. 2. Subjunctive mood, observa- tions on the several uses of, 55. Tenses, use o^ present, 38. 1. Imperfect, 38. 2. Perfect, 38.3. Futures, 38.4. %X!>'i, 60.2 Ucbtr, 68.5. UJr, 65.7. Urn, _, 67.5. ttm» in oompoimds, 67. 6. Lessons, IXxn, ace. with 67. 7. Urn— wiircn, 60.6. Um^in, with Fonnett, 45. 6. Umlauts, sounds o( 2. II. Unb, 69, 29. Unre($t ^aben, 36. 2 Hnter, 68. 6. Untet Bier Slugcn, 68. 8. Verbs, reflex., 29. 9. 10. Aux., 45. Irreg., 47. Compound, Sep., 51. Insep., 54. Impers., 57. Passive, 68. SJiel, when declined, . . .65. 7. 8. 9. fflicaetdit, 69. 30. ©on, 61.3. ajon, 66. 12. With the dative, instead of the genitive, ... 1 1. 4. 35or, _ 68.7. Vowels, classification and pro- iiunoiation of, 2. 1. aBa«, interrog., 13. Rel., ... 40. 2Da«, for warum, 13. 6. 3Ba« fiir ein, 13. SBejen, 60.4. 6. SBcIci^er, interrog., 13. ReL, . . 39. Sffienig, when declined,. .65. 7. 8. 9. SBer, interrog., 13. Rel 40. SBerben, paradigm of, 46. 3. As an independent verb, 46. 4. With the dat., 46. 4. obs. SBevt^. 61.6. aSic, 69. 31. 33. SBie siel, ... 65. 7. Ste tepinbert ©ic fid) ? 29. 10. aSiffen, before an infinitive, 49. 7. 2Do, compounded with other words, 52. SBp^I, 69.84, SDo^I, denoting doubt, suppo- sition, a«fe, 43. <^' WOODBURY'S NEW METHOD LESSON I. Section I. THE LETTERS. German Alphabet. ©eut ^6iiti aip^flit Sernun. English Pronnnclatlon Examples. 2r a a ah 2«t. S & b bay SBeten. S c tsay Sebcr. D i) d day S5e|ncn. @ e e e (as in prey) ®6en. S f f eff gctt. ® fl g gay ®e6en. ^ ^ h hah Jpfl^n. 3* i i i (as in pique) 3^ttcn. 3*1 J yote 3ota. « f k kah Ra% 2 I 1 ell Wt. W m m emm ®m))or'. 91 n n enn (Snbe. D oh D|r. f )) P pay 3)eter. O q q koo aual. 3t r r err (as in error) 1 ®rjt. © fa (21. @.) s ess effen. Z t t tay S^ee. U M u (as in do) Ufer. » » T fow (as in fowl) 3So«. SB tt) W vay SBefen. 3e j: X ix Sir. g V J ipsilon ©9jlcm'. 3 a z tset Settel. * 3 before a consonant answers to ^ as in ffn; before a yovrel it ■aswers to Y, as in Sojt. 20 SOUNDS OF THE XETTERS. COMPOUMD CONSONANTS. ch, (l^=tsay-liah; ck, cf=tsay-kah ; sch, f(^=es-tsay-hah, ss, {[=68-68; st, jl=es-tay; sz, 5=es-tset; tz, |=tay-tset. LESSON II. fcettion n. SOUNDS OF THE LETTERS. 1. Vowels. . 21, a sounds like a in ah, marl : 3l6n, :§, flf and jl sound like b, A f, h, k, 1, ni,n, p, q, x, ck, ph, ss and st. 2 S, c before e (or a), i and 9 in the same syllable bounds like J (fe) ; otherwise like I : Seber, cioil', SopoC, 3. ®, g at the beginning of a syllable sounds like y in gun. After tt, in the same syllable, it sounds like oar g hard in like position : Slngjl, Sftan^, gav. Otherwise its sound usually approaches that of d) : Sag, regnen, 3J?flgb. 4. §, :^ in the midst or at the end of a syllable ig silent, but serves to lengthen its vowel : «Ke|r, So^n, ZXm, '^nt^. 5. 3, i sounds like y consonant : 3a|r, 3ut>c, 3i, 2iil)t, U^auifee'. (f^) ©c^oft, gleif*, (f .D SReip, mtpn. ft, s) *Io6, futj. r Jt ? m n- e X p ^ y yr , --?: / / / / / ^J^^/^.J. el o u of A./ysch/ss' / st^ z' sir ,^^^- 0.cet lassici.de^J. ^iSi-t^'^/^u^C^ <^,^^T«-j^^%e-^ (^>t^'^^n^ ;^M'^«"-»«f5»^*'^ >-/' (y€'^/M--Or^'f-p^ t^.^'i'^P'i'tf'^-T^'no c-^^/^t^-'i-^.^^t jf^jr-- ra/^U£< .^^yty^t. 4it'^i, ^.-•:^/^c.^4^»^/^!^/^f*^^''/'#^^^ '^ .V ;*^ y / /-A-x-/ - '^y^^//^.;-, /^. FOSMB OF IBH UJCFItnTB ARTICLE, BTC. 23 LESSON I\. Cection IV. FORMS OP THE DEFINITB ARTICLE. 1. In German the definite article has, in the uominativs singular, a distinct form for each gender : Mascultne, bet, the ; feminine, bit, the ; neuter, ba^, the. 2 ^ a t e n , TO have, in the present tense singulah. Interrogatively. ^aU i^? have I? laBcn ©ie ? have you 1 |at cr ? has he ? Affirmatt 1st. prs. td^ f^abt, I have ; 2d. prs. ©ic ^abcn, you have ; 3d. prs. cr ^at, he has; Sctf))tclc. $)aiEnSiebaa fiebet? SJetn, ii^ 5a6t ba« Srob. «iatbet k5>taferba«®Ia8? 3a, et Ijat ba8 ®tqs unb Hi ®oIb. Examples. Have you the leather i Ko, I have the bread. Has the glazier the glass t Yes, he has the glass and the gold. VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. ®a8 Srob, the bread; ®08,thei ,, ®cr, the J seel), (Sr, he; m, it; ®a« ®ta«, the glass; ®a3 ®olb, the gold; ^ttben, to have (see 2); 3i^, I; Sa, yes; Exercise 4. 1)118 Seber, the leather. SIctn, no; Dbcr, or; Der ©flttler, the saddler, Set ®c^mteb, the smith; ©ie, you; ScSStlber, the silver; Unb, and; aBa8, what; SBer. who. 2lttfga6e 4. 1. fBaS '^oSen ©le ? * 2. 3^ ^aU Srob.* 3. 2BaS :§at bet ©attler? 4. (£r ^at iag ®Io3. 5. SSag |a5c i(| ? 6. ©ie|aBen ®ott>. Y. §akn ©ic iai mai ? 8. 5«ein, ic§ •§aBe tag Seber. 9, §at cr iai ©ilBcr? 10. Jflcin, cr f^atiaS ©olb. 11. Jpabe ic^ bag Srob ? 12. 3a, ©tc f^ahn ti. 13. SBcr |at ba« Seber? 14. ©cr ©attler '^at t§. 15. 2Ber |at bas ©ilBer? 16. ®er ©(^mieb |at es. It. §at ber ©attter iai ®Ia3 ober ba« ®oIb J 18. ©r :§at baa ®oIb unb iai ©iKer. * For use of capitals in writing German, see p. 267, note. Writing in the Get- -an chara;:ter (L. III.) will soon render it familiar, and at the same *'me be v eU t%pted to fix in the memory the forms and meanings of the words. a« coNjuGATioif OF ©ingcn and SBarten. Exercise 5. 3tufga6e 5. 1. Have you the tread ? 2. Yes, I have it. 3. Has he the glass ? 4. No, he has the bread. 5. Who has the bread ? 6. I have it. 7. Have I the glass or the gold 1 8. You have the glass and the gold. 9. Has the saddler the bread or the leather 1 1 0. He has the bread and the leather. 11. What has the smith ? 13. He has the gold and the glass. 13. What has the saddler 1 /t. He has the gold. 15. Who has the silver? 16. I have it It. Have you the gold? 18. No, the saddler has it. ^ ■■ » »■ » LESSON V. Ccction V. ©ittgcnAND 2D art en m thk present tense siNauLAii. i(^ luart-e, I wait ; Istprs.i&i flng-e, I sing; 2d. prs. ©ic (ing-cn, you sing ; Sd.prs. et fing-t, he sings; ®te wavt-eit, you wait ; er tt)art-ct, he waits. 1. Thus the present tense singular is indicated by e for ti.a first person, cit for the second, and t (or ct*) for the third: that part preceding these endings being the root. 2. Eor the three forms common in English, the German Las but one: thus, ic^ jtnge, 1 sing, I do sing, I am singing. 3. Like ftngen and tuarten are conjugated in the same tense and number, unless otherwise designated, the verbs in this and subsequent exercises. Setfpiclc. Examples. 35ct SPJann fingt iai Sleb. The man is singing the song. 3i^ ^iite Wai Ste fagen. I hear what yon are saying. ®a8 flinb ftielt unb fingt. The child is playing and singiig. ©ie ^oten nui ii) fage. Ton hear what I say. 3c^ faufe iai 9)ttpler'. I am buying the paper. S)cr iDIMet tttttft flaffce itni %1)tt. The miller drinks coffee and tea. * When the root ends in b or t, the 3d. person adds c to the t; thns, ttflrt-et/ instead of toart-t; e is also often added or omitted according to the choice of different writers. FORMS OF THK AKTICLB, CONJUGATION QW ^ttbCn, KIC. 25 VOCABTILAET TO THE EXERCISES. !Da« Suc^, the book; 23et 8if4,tlie fish; glieg'cn, (see 3.) to fly; 5Da3 gleift, the meat; Der glcifc^cr, the butcher ; ^oren, to hear; .Raufen, to buy; Vtx So^, the eook; Cd^ Som, the grain; Oa«3)tc^I, the flour; Ser 3»ulter, the miller; ©agett, to say ; 'Sijniim, to write ; ■Bet ©(filler, the scholar ; Ser ©4wttn, the swan; ©4»tmmen, to swim; ©ingen, to sing ; S^ttntcn, to drink; SSSarten, to wait; ®a« SBalftr, the water. Exercise 6. SlufgaBe 6. 1 . T)er ©c^aier tauft iai 33u(^. 2. Dfr STOMer fauft bas ^ora. 3. aUer lauft t)o3 Srob? 4. S)er ^odb fauft baS 33rob unb bo8 gkifi^. 5. 3i| ^bre »a3 ©tefagen. 6. 3(^ trtitfc aCaffcr. 7. S)et gifc^ f^wimmt, ber ©^wan fltegt. 8. 25er ©i^iiler fc^reiM was er |ijrt. 9. ®r Prt wos ©ie fagen unb wai ii^ fage. 10. 3^ f^'ixi toai ber WiiUtv fagt. 11. 3Cer wartet? 12. 3^ wartc. 13. 2Ca3 fogt ber ©i^mieb? 14. 2Ber fttigt? 15. Titv gteifi^er fingt unb trtntt. 16. 2Bcr tauft iai gleifi^? ll.Vev ^KuQct obcr ber ©c^micb lauft es. 18. ®ie faufen 33rob, er Jauft gleifc^, unb ic^ faufe 2«e^I. Exercise 1. Slufgabe 7. 1. The miller is writing.' 2. Who is buying the meat ? 3. The cook is buying it. 4. I hear what you say. 5. The miller buys the grain and the cook buys the flour. 6. The butcher is singing. 7. Who is singing? 8. Who sings 1 9. The cook is singing. 10. The saddler is buying the book. 11. Who buys bread? 12. The miller is drinking water. 18. The fish Bwims, the swan flies and swims. 14. The butcher buys flour, you buy meat, and I buy bread. 15. Who hears what I say? 16. 1 hear what you say. 17. You hear what lie says. 18. Who is buying meat ? 19. The saddler or the smith is buy Ing it. 2 se INTEKROGATIVB CONJUGATION. LESSON VI. £ection VI. INTERROGATIVE CONJUGATION. 1, German verbs in the present and imperfect, when used interrogatively, precede the subject, like have and be in English : SBaa ^aben ®ie ? What have you ! fBai fogen Sic ? What do you say ! (What say you ) gBo iiJ er ? Where is he ? 15o m^vX et ? Where does he live ? (Where lives ha t) 2. PRESENT TENSE SINGULAR OF THE IRREGULAR VERB 2S t f f £ Jl Interrogatively. ivelf t(^ ? do I know ? tBijfen ©ic ? do you know ? I roet^ er ? does he know ? Self)) tele. Examples. aBtffen ©ie Wtt« t^ fe^e ? Do you kno-w vhat I see? SBet§ bet SRann tto ©ie too'^nen? Does the manknowwhereyoul' rel 2>ort jie^t ber Soger ; Derile^en ©ie Tonder stands the huuter, do yoti toai er fagt ? understand what he says ? VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. tcb reeig, I know ; @{e noijyen, you know ; er wci^, he knows ; 35cr Sader, the baker; I)er Sauer, the peasant; SeHcn, see p. 474. ©ae Eifcn, the iron ; llaiQelb, the money; S)et Oolbf^mteb, the goldsmith; liammertlj to hammer; ^eulen, to howl; !Det ^unb, the dog ; i^er Soger, the hunter; Exercise 3. ®oa tl {or Det, L. 2. U. 2.) the oil , S)a« ^o))ier', the paper; S)oa 9)illt, the desk; !Do«©olj, the salt; iBertou'fen, to sell (L. 2. "VX 4); SJerflc'^en, to understand; SSBonn, when; SBorum', why; SSJo, where ; Der Solf, the wolf. •Slufgabc 8. I . aCaa l^abtn ©ic ? 2. 5Ba3 laufcn ©it ? 3. ^at ber ^od) bua 5>apier ? 4. .Sauft ber ^o^ iai SSrob ? 5. SCas '^at bet Wader, unb »aa lauft er? 6. SCaS lauft ber SSiider, unb wai »er* tauft er? 7. SBarum serfauft ber ©ottfi^mieb bag ©liter? 8. Jtauft ber ^od; bas Del unb tai ©dj ? 9. SBattn unb wo fngt !>" a3(luer? 10. aCaS pngtber 3ager? 11. .Sauft ter ©filter baa ?iult ? 12. SSerjle:^! ber SSauer mi Ic^ fage ? 13. SSBarum ^m* «crt ber ©c^mleb bas Stfeit ? 14. ^ai ocr ©attler boa glfen? 15. GENDER OF NOUNS. 27 SBarunt teUt ier J^unl) ? ] 6. SSBarum '^eult bcr SSoIf? 11. SBctg bcr ©c^iiler warum ic^ warte? 18. Dort jie^t tvc Sauer, serflc ^ctt ©ie mi er fagt ? Exercise 9. SlttfgaBe 9. 1. What has the baker? 2. What does the baker buj ? 3. What does the baker sell t 4. Is the dog barking? 5. Why is he barking ? 6. Where does he stand, and what does he understand ? 7. Why is the goldsmith waiting ? 8. Does the peasant buy the grain ? 9. When does the smith hammer tha iron? 10. Where does the scholar sell the desk ? 11. Does the goldsmith hammer the gold ? 12. Where does the cook buy the salt? 13. Does the saddler sell the oil?. 14. Is the wolf howling ? 15. Why is he howling ? 16. When and where does the hunter sing? 17. Is the baker or the peasant waiting? 18. Does the peasant know what the baker says? LESSON VII. Section VII. VERBS IRREGULAR IN THE PRESENT SINQUIAR INDICATIVE. 1. In the third person singular of several verbs, the root vowel e is changed to i or it, while in that of some others a, Q and u, take the Umlaut (L. 47. 6. and § 78, p. 346) : tc^ ixi&it, I break ; ©ic ired^en, you break ; er M(^t («ott« Srob, SBet tttuft baa 3)fetb? S)er Sionntr roUt, ber SRenen foillt. Examples. Does the jhild read the booi f What does the teacher say t The child has the bread. Who is buying the horse ? The thunder rolls, the rain falls. SJerfauft bet Sauer baa Sali unb ba« Does the peasant sell the calf aul £amm? the lamb! VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. SKC^etl, to break ; (L. il. 6.) 2)onnctn, to thunder; Sntwe'ber, either; !Det (Efftg, the vinegar; gaUtn, tofall; (L. 4Y. 6.) ©et ^cffee, the coffee; S)a« Sali, the calf; iDer ^ttufmann, the merchant ; Cai^cn, to langU ; 35a8 Sowm, the lamb ; !Det Secret, the teacher; Scfen, to read; (E. 47. 6.) tlod), nor; ■Der 9)feffer, the pepper; 33aa ©c^af, or ©c^ttttf, the sheep; I)et ©i^nee, the sno\r; ©4nttben, to cut; Set ©cnf, the mustard; ®et S^ee, the tea; SBcbet, neither; SBte, how ; I D« Suilet, the sugar. Exercise 10. SIufgaBe 10. 1. SBarum ln6^m ©ie iai SBrob? 2. 2efen ©ie bas SSuc^? 3. ^auft ber glctfc^er iai ®^aaf obcr bas Satnm? 4. Sr faitft ttjeier kos ©d^aof no(^ ta3 Samm, cr tauft iai Rdi. 5. JErinft ber ^aufmann entoeber ^affec obet 2:^ee ? 6. SSas tauft ber ^oc^ ? 1. Sr !auft Sffig, ^feffcr, ©enf unb Qudn. 8. SBann faUt ber ©c^nee? 9. SBorum trtn!en ©ie SBajycr? 10. SJJarum trlnltber ^aufmanit 33ier? 11. 25erjlet)en ©te teas ber Scorer fagt? 12. §bren ©ic wai iai ^inb fogt? 13. SCer serTauft ^affee, a|ce unb 3ticfer? 14. SBorum !au|t ber Soger Srob? 15. SScrjlc^en ©ie mi ber gieifi^er llejl? 16. SCarum lad^t ber ©^iikr ? 11. Doa ^inb f^neibet boS ^Jaficr. 18. S3 bonnert. Exercise 11. 3Iufga6e 11. ] . Is the teacher reading 1 2. What is he reading 1 3. Is tho cook breaking the bread] 4. No, he is cutting it. 5. Why does the butcher buy the calf, the sheep and the lamb ? 6. What does the child sing ? 7. Is the hunter drinking tea or coffee? 8. Why is the cook buying mustard, pepper, sugar and vinegar? 9. Do you know when the snow falls? 10. Whj are you laughing ? 11. Do you know how the child sings? CASES, DECLENSION OF NOUNS AND DEFINITE ARTICLE. 29 12. Does the child know how you read? 13. Does the child break the bread? 14. The scholar understands what you say. 15. Do you know why I am laughing 1 16. Does it thundp-r? 11. What are you buying, bread or flour? 13. I am buying Deilher bread nor floiir. LESSON Vm. Cection VHL CASES. 1. There are in German four cases ; namely, the NoMiNATryE, which answers to our nominative ; the Gknitivb, which answers mainly to our possessive ; the Dative, for which we have no exact equivalent ; and the AccusATrvE, which answers to the English objective. The dative denotes the object for or in relation to which an action is performed, and is usually rendered by our objective governed by a preposition. declension of nouns. 2. Nouns have two forms of declension, called the old and the new. 3. Nouns of the old declension that end in e, el, en, er, d^ejt and Icin, form the genitive by adding i ; the dative and accusa tive remaining like the nominative. • 4. OLD DECLENSION OP ITOUNS, MASCULINE AND NEUTER, WITH THa DEFINITE ARTICLE. N. fecr SJJaler, the painter; G. tea SKalcra, thepaijVr's; D. bent 5KaIer, to tht, ■ .. 'nier ; A. ien SKaler, the painter. taa Stfcn, the iron; te« Stfcni3, of the iron (L. 9) ; bent Sifen, to or for the iron ; baS Sifcn, the iron. $ttien ©ie be* SBfatera Sui^ ? Have you the painter's boot ? 9f(in, i^ '^aie bea ©^iiler^ Suc^. No, I have the scholar's book. Doa Cebet ge^dtt bem ©attler. The eather belongs to the saddle! Tha arti jle agrees with its noun in ger ier, case anii number. 80 VEKBS CONSTRUED WITH THE DATIVE AND ACC0SATIVB. VEIIBS WITH THE DATIVE AlfD ACCUSATIVE. 5 When the dative and accusative are both governed by the same verb, the dative comes Jirst ; except that the accusative, if it be a personal pronoun, precedes the dative. S)er greunb Setipti^t bem ©ttttlcr iai The friend promises (to) thesaddlei Oclb. the money. SBrtntm gieSt cr ti bem ©c^neibet ? Why does he give it to the tailof ffir mai^t beat fic^tet ein 3)utt. He is making (for) the teacher desk. Self))iele. S)a8 SBer! loJt ben affeijiei. ®tt« ^inb $at be« ©cIjuIei* Sleijlip. saJer fi^icft bem SBoiaer ben SRtng ? SSBarum tabctn ©ie ben Siguier ? ®eprt bo« Zviii bem SEBebei? SBcrtauft et ti bem ©^neiber ? Examples, The ■work praises the master. The child has the scholar's pencil Who sends the baker the ring f Why do you blame the scholar ? Does the cloth belong to the weavert Does he sell it to the tailor ( VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. ®et SBall, thebaU; S)et Slcifltft, the pencil; ©erSBrtef, the letter; Bet Srubei, the broUier; S)ei 5)etfel, the cover ; Oeben, to give; (L. il. 6.) ® e^ii'ren, to belong (L. 2. VL 4) ; Set (9Iafei, the glazier; S>er $ut, the hat ; Set ^eUner, the waiter; Exercise 12. X)ei Wlaxm, the man ; Sa^^ferb, the horse; 5)er SReif, the rice ; 33er Sling, the ring; ©c^i^en, to send; S)er©ta^I, the steel; £)ei ©tod, the cane ; Set ©tu^i, the chair; ®er %x\cSj, the table; 2)er SBJeijen, the wheat. SlufgaBc 12. 1. S)as mrii gieM bem it\tX AND fetter. 1, f)iefer (this,) refers to the nearer, and jener {thai,) to the more remote of two objects. When not contrasted with {enetj however, biefer may often be rendered by that : 'Differ Coffee iji icfTcr oXi jener. Tliis coflfee is better than that, ©iefea SBrob t|} Scffer ata icnea. This bread is better than that. aCie ttit i|l Vxihi fferb ? How old is that horse i 2* 34 LESSON X. 2. £)iefcr may often be rendered by the latter and {cncr by the former : 2(1) feime ben fiaafmann unb ben Strjt; I kno-w the merchant and the f\j- biefet ijl ieic§, jener tfl arm, sician ; the latter is rich, the former is poor. 8. For the word one after a pronoun or adjective no corres- ponding word is employed in German : itiefer £ifc^ gc^Brt bem Si^ulet unb This table belongs to the scholar jener bem Setter. and that (one) to the teacher. 3 '.net ijj alt, biefet i|i neu. That one is old, this one is ne-w. 4. DECLENSION OP ©icfet COMPAKED WITH ARTICLE %tX, Masc. Neut. (Lesson VIII.) N, tief-cr, blcf-ca, this; (N. bcr, iai), G. tief-e8, Mcf-e3, of this; (G. bc3, tti), D. bicf-em, Mef-em, to or for this ; (D. bem, bem). A. bicf-en, blef-eS, this; (A. ben, ba«). Like bicfcr are declined the following indefinite numerals and adjective pronouns, which, like the definite article, have a dis- tinct form for each gender (the characteristic of the nominative masculine being r, and that of the neuter g) : Masc. Neut. oBcr, ones, all (§53. 3.); etnigcr, einigc^, some ; etlii^er, ctli^eS, some ; Jeter, jebeS, every; Ma^c. Neut. jener, Jene«, that ; manc^er, mand&es, many a; foli^er, foI^cS, such ; iBcI^er, tcel^e^, which, what. 5. ©ettt AND SSergcffen in the present tense singular. i&i itn, I am ; ©te |inb, you are ; cr i^, he is. ic^ sergeffe, I forget ; ©Ic sergeffen, you forget ; er Sergi^t, he forgets. Scifptelc. Examples. 5D(efer SKaTtn ifi reic^, jener ijl arm. This man is rich, that one is poop. !Cer Sru'^ting unb «U(fi ber |ier6|} ^at Tlie spring and also the autunin has felne greuben, biefet btingt Stuf^te, its pleasures, the latter brings itnet SSlumcn. fruits, the former floirera. ©citt AND SBijfen in thb pebsbnt tense singular. S5 iDiefer SKann ifl etn SSfalet. That man is a painter. Si) Jilt wm, aitx ic^ iin juftieben, I am poor, but I am contented. Sc^ lefe biefnt Srief. I am reading (L. V. 2.) this lett«r VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. Snicr, all (see decl. biefer); Strm, poor; ©tefct, this (see 1.); Eh ©ovtner, the gardener; 5Df t ®aul, the horse, nag ; ®ro§, large; Out, good ; liart, hard; Ibtii ^mi, the house; 3eberf every ; Sener, that; S)a« ^Ini, the child ; 3)fanc|et, many a; S?t^t, not ; Stctc^, rich ; ©etn, to be (infinitive L, X S^ 2)cr ©c^neiber, the tailor ; ©4''lt> beautiful ; ©olivet, such; jDet SBater, the father; SBa^r, true ; SBeli^er, which, what; SSSiifett, to know (p. 368.) Exercise 10. 8lufga6e 16. 1. ©tefer SKutttr tfl in @o|n }cite« 33auers, 2. ^txm Sauer i^ bcr SSater iiefca Sauer«. 3. Sener ®ouI ge'^Brt {cnem SJliittcr. 4. ©e|cn ®ic iiefen ©arten unt jenes §au8? 5. Mtx ©ta^l Ijl ^art. 6. 9'li(^t aUti (Sifen i^ gut. 1. ipat }cbcr ©c^mici fol^cji @ta|I «nt> fetches (Sifeit ? 8. 9fli(|t jebcr ^uni) ifl grog. 9. Wtam c^cr Ttann tfl arm. 10. ^aufen,®fe Mefett iRing ober jcnen? 11. SCarum !aufen ©ie {ejien Sting nnb ntd^t Mefen? 12. 2Cets c^em ©c^nclter [t^iden ®ic Mcfea Surf) ? 13. 3Belc^c3 JEuc^ fi^iden ®ie Mefem ©c^nelbcr ? 14. 9Bas blefer 9Rann fagt ifl'toaSr. 15. Stc^ bcr Scorer bicfen SBricf ober Jenen ? 16. 9Jic^t jeber Wlam ijl rcte^, ntc^t icke« 33u(^ t(l gut. 17. SCtffcn ®ie mi biefcr ®artner tterfprte^t bicfcm .Sttnbe? 18. ©oli^er ©ta'^I iji ni(^t gut. 19. 3|l foI(^e« 5)a)jier fi^bn? 20. SCett^ent ©attler Berfauft bicfer «Kfl«n biefc^ Sebet ? 21. 2Cas Bcrgipt cr ? Exercise 11. Slufgate 17. 1. Which paper has this scholar 1 2. lie has the paper oi that child. 3. Which pencil has this child ? 4. It has the pen- cil of that scholar. 5. To which teachei does this man send the book ] 6. Which steel and which iron does this smith buy ? 7. Is every house large and good ? 8. Is every horse beautiful 1 9. What tree is large? 10. Whal tree do you seel 11. Has LESSON XI. every miller such wheat and such flour 1 12. Is not many a manrichi 13. Is all iron hard? 14. Is all steel hard and good? 15. Does this garden belong to this gardener, or to that miller? 16. Is the father of this scholar reading the book of the smith? 17. Which tailor is poor, this one or that one? 18, .Who is rich ? 1 d. Who is singing ? (L. V. 2.) 20. That child says you have the ball, is it true ? 21. That tree is large and beautiful. 22. That tree is falling. LESSON XI. Cettion XI. DATrVE WITH PREPOSITIONS. 1. The dative is often preceded by prepositions, and then answers to our objective : (£r fommt aM bem $aufe. He is coming out of the house, ©er SWann ijl in bent ^laufe. The man is in the house. S)(i8 flinb fpiett mtt bem liunbe. The child is plajring with the dog. SJer SBauBi (le^t »cr btm |)aufe. The tree stands before the house. DATIVE WITH VERBS OF MOTION. 2. After verbs denoting direction toward, j u must be placed before the name of a person, and n a d^, before the name of a place or cotmtry ; ju and nO(^ being both rendered by to : £r ge^t JU bem ^mtmann (§ 13. 3). He goes to the magistrate. £r gc^t nnc^ bem Sotfe. He goes to the village. 3. Where in English the preposition may be omitted, it is not usually employed in German : tt , „, . . „, t^m^ jl send the teacher the book. S<* mSt bent Secret ba« SBuc^. \ j ^^^^ ^^ ^^^^ ^^ ^^^ ^^^^^^^_ Er steit bem ©^neibcr ba« ©elb. -i ^« ^""^^ ^^^ **^<"" *^« ™°"«y- ( He gives the money to the tailor. Si^ fe^itfe baa fltttb j« bem Ce'^tcr. I send the child to the teacher. !Da« ^inb ge^f jU bem Sc^netbcr. The child goes to the tailor. 4. Of, when denoting relation (instead of possession L. 9. 1.), must be expressed in German by a corresponding preposition ? Sc^ fijie^e DOM bem ®cirtner, I am speaking of the gardener. loot, ii) fpici^e iti @artner$). (Compare Iicsson 9. 1.] POSITION OF PEEPOSITIONS. 37 POSITION OF PREPOSITIONS. 5. Prepositions precede the words which they govern, and can not, as in English, stand at the end of a sentence : tKit tuelc^em Sleiflift f^tciit ft? 3n ttel^em liaufe tfl er ? SBtifcn©te sonwelc^em With what pencil is he writing ? In which house is he? Do you know of which book he speaks ? What pencil is he writ- ing with ? Which house is he in ? Do you know vhiub book he speaks :f ? Seifpiele. Sei Sc^mieb flc'^t j« bem ®Iaftr. fSSai fc^icEl erbemOlafer? SBet ^at bai SBuc| bt« it^mi ? SSStt? fageii Sie son bem Se'^te.r? SBiffenSie in toel^em 4iaufe bcr ®U' fer too^nt? Coten ©ie ben ©c|n be« WWtxi ? Examples. The smith goes to the glazier. What does he send the glazier ? Who has the book of the teacher ! What do you say of the teacher ? Do you know which house the glazier lives in ? Do you praise the miller's soul VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. Ser Sfbter, the eagle, Stl^, than, as; Der SImbog, the anvil; Bcr Stnfer, the anchor; Der Stpfcl, the apple; Sltiei'ten, to work; Set Slrbei'tet, the laborer; S)er Strm, the arm; 5Dct Strjt, the physician; 2)a« Stuge, the eye; S(u«, out of; Oe^en, to go; 35er Ixsntg, the honey; .Sommen, to come; 3)tt3 rntjt, the candle ; SHc^r, more; a»it, with; 9Jac§, to, after; ©Ijre^en, to speak; ^L. VIL) ®e^ti very ; SSon» of, from ; 3u, to (see 2.). Exercise 18. sautgaie 18. I . ^ommt. ter ^aQn a\xi bem §aufc, ofcer ge^t cr na^ bem ^aufe? 2. aBer f^rciBt me|r al3 ier SIrjt? 3, 3Bonn gc:§en ®ie na(^ bem SCafte? 4, 2BaS fagt ber Sauer son bicfem Sid^te ? 5. SDantt ge'^t iai ^inb ju bem Slrieiter unb wann nac^ bem £)orfe ? 6. S5o3 ^inb ge'^t weber ju bent Slrteiter noi^ nac^ bem SBelbc. 7. 3u tBc^em Slr^tc ge:^t bev ©lafer? 8. SCarum fattt ber 2lpfel Son bem Soume ? 9. SCiffen al)terunb tnetnenSaH. I hare my paper and my ball ©01 S^r grennb bai SBu^ mtmi SJet» Hae your friend the book of m fcra obct S^re^ Dntcl^ ? cousin, or of your uncle ? ©i^neiben ©ie 3^t 33vob mit metnent Are you cutting your bread with SWelfcr? my knife} 3. The indefinite article and the possessive pronouns (unlike Mefer, L. X. 4.) add by inflection, except in the nom. and aco. neuter, another syllable to the form of the nominative : S)er ©o^tt unfet-ca 3Jtti^bar9 ijl ein The son of our neighbor is a friend greunb biefe* Sager*. of this hunter. 4. DECLENSION OF INDEF. ARTICLE COMPARED WITH DEFINITK Masc. Neut. {Lesson VIII. 3.) N. dtt, ein, a; (N. In, iai.) G. ein-cS, dn-ti, of a; (G. iti, iti.) D. etn-etn, citt-ent, to or for a ; (D. tern, bent.) A. eln-cn, ein, a; (A. ten, iai.) Like the indefinite article ctn,,are declined: mein, my ; fein, his, its ; unfcr, our ; i^r, their ; bcin, thy; i'^r, her; euer, your; fetn, no. 5. When a word which ends in el, en, cr, takes an additional syllable beginning with e, one e is often dropped : unf-crg, for unfer-eS ; unf-erm, for unfer-em ; etc. WORDS IN APPOSITION. 6. Words in apposition must agree in case (§ 138) : ttnfer ^ladiUx, bet ©attler, :^ttt bttS Our neighbor, the saddler, hos thd 9)fert fettle* Sfre«ttbe«,be« OetJet*. horse of his friend, the tanner. 40 LESSOK xn. (El ge|t mit fetaem Setter, beat iJlalet, Ha is going 171111 his consin. th< nac^ ^arid. painter, to Paris. iBeifpiele. Examples. 3$r grcunb ^at Sf^ren Sticf unb S^t Tour friend has sent your letter fdaS) S^rcm Sruber gefiliidt. and yonr book to your brother. aBa« Ijat fcin gieu«b in fcinem Coffer? What has his friend in his trani I 5d) ^abt tctii eifen unb tcinen ©ta^I. I have no iron and no steeL SKcin Stfi^ flc^t in melnem Bimmer. My table is standing in my room. S)ct Sttum flc^t Jttifi^en iinferm ^aufc The tree stands between our house unb S^rcm ®arten. and your garden. 2)tt« Sinb ^at fein 3Refrer unb feinen The child has its knife and its ball SBaH in fcinem 4)ute. in ito hat VOCABUI^RT TO THE EXERCISES. STn, at; Sluf, on; ®cnn (conjunebonj, for; E^e (adverb), ere, before; Sin (mase. or neut.), a, an; Sad gcucr, the fire; S)er greunb, the friend; SJer jammer, the hammer; Winter, behind; S^r (masc or netit.), your; 3n, in, into; ficin (m. or n.), not any, no; Ciegen, to He; 3Jf ein {masc. or neut.), my • S)er Dfen, the stove; ©ein {masc or neitt.), his, its; ©IJcn, to sit; ©te^cn, to stand; Ue6er, over; Unfer {masc or neut), our; Unter, under, among; 35or (preposition), before; Sfld Simmer, the room ; Brotfc^en, between. Exercise 20. ?lufgaBe 20. 1. 5Kcin Sruter ^at ciit ^ult, eincn Sifc^ unb cinen ©tu'^1 In feinem ^mmtx. 2. Sr fi^t an fcinem ^ulte, unb fein SBIeijlifl liegt auf bem Sifc^e. 3. JpaBen ©ie ein geuer in 3^rem ^^mmtvt 4. 5flcin, benn i6j %ah fcincn Dfen in ntcincm Siinncr. 5. SJei ©c^mieb |at feinen jammer unb fein Sifen. 6. S3 ijl ber greunS fcines 5Ja(^tar«, bes ©attlerS. 1. Unfer greunb ^at unfern Jpunb. 8. 3il ber ®o^n unfreg ^aS^bari in unfrem ®arten? 9. aufe wo^nen Sie? In whose house do you live? V$o«on fliti^t bcT SSlauiet ? What is the mason speaking of ? DECLENSION OP SBix AND SSJaa, 43 VOCABULART TO THE EXERCISES. ErtJ ©etfett, the basin; iDct Sigbor, the white bear: ftiiul, idle, lazy, indolent; Der Suffer, the trunk; S)et SorlJ, the basket; 'Bai Mxohbi'l, the crocodile ; Vai Conb, the country; Stben, to lire ; 3Kact)en, to make, do; S5o8 SWeffer, the knife ; ®er ©^u^, the shoe ; Ser ©4KW'"l)tfi tli^ shoemaker; ®cr ©tra«B< the ostrich; Set Siger, the tiger; Ser Unterfcfjieb, the difference; Set SSogel, the bird, fowl; £te6en, toleve; SBo^nen, to reside, live; £()6en, to praise; I SSBoDtn, see 8. Exercise 22. 3tufgaBc 22. 1 . SBcr lott ben ©c^iiler, unb mn Mt ber ©chiller ? 2. aBcpn SBu(^ Icfen ©ie ? 3. SJcm f(^reiben ®te einen SSrtcf ? 4. SEijfen ©ie tteffen ^WeflTer ber ©(^u'^mac^er "^at? 5. SBaS fiir cin SReffer ^at er ? 6. 2Sa« fiir cin mann |at mein JWeffer ? 7. ?Kit tueijen Sleijlift fc^reiben ©ie ben SBrief ? 8. 5Kit teai fiir eincm Sleifliftc unb fluf tuaa fiir ^^apier fii^reibt ber Se^rer ? 9. 3n iros fiir eincm eanbe tebt berSi^bar? 10.3" t»a« fiir einem lebt ber Siger? 11. 3tt tteli^em Sonbe tett ber etsbiir ? 12. fBijfen ©iein luelc^ent ISanbe bag ^rofobtl lebt ? 13. mai lefen ©ie ? 14. 2Sa« fiir ci* nen ©d)u^ mac^t ber ©c^u^mad^er ? 15. 2Cem fi^iift ber ©djneiber iai Secfen? 16. 3n weffen §aufe wc'^nen ©ie? 11. S&ai fiir ein Sogel iji ber ©trauf ? 18. SBijfen ©ie ben Unterf^ieb jwifi^en "SeJen" unb "SS5oI)nen?" 19. Siebt bas ^inb ben 3«ann? 20. ffiScpn ^or6 lat ber ©^u^mai^er? 21. SBijfen ©ie tcai fiir cinen Coffer ii^ ^obe ? 22. Bon mm fprc^e i^, unb mwn fpred)cn ©ie? 23. 34 fi"^f ^E ""J* i'fw SJliilter ; er i(l faul. Exercise 23. Slufgobe 23. 1. Whose horse has the tailor? 2. With whose pencil are you ■writing? 3. To whom does the saddler send the money t 4. To which merchant does this anchor belong ? 5. What kind of an Mimal is the white hear ? 6. In what kind of a country does he live? 1. In what kind of a house does the shoer^ker live ? 8. Do you know what kind of a bird the ostrich is ? 9. In what kind of a country does the tiger live? 10. What are you doing with my knife? 11. Why is the child la&ghingi H ADJECTIVES — LESSON XIV. 12. TiVnoin does the shoemaker praise? 13. Is he making a shoe? 14. Who is making the captain a trunk ? 15. In what kind of a country does the crocodile live ? 16. On whose table is my hook lying ? 11. Whom does the child love ? 18. To whom is the child going ? 19. To whom does the peasant send the basket? 20. Of whom are you speaking? 21. Of what am I speaking ? 22. Whose basin has the cook ? 23. Is our neighbor not idle ? LESSON XIV. Ccrtion XTV. ADJECTIVES. 1. Adjectives when used predicaiively* undergo no change of form ; thus, Masc 3>tr ©ta'^I ifl gut. The ateel is good. Neut. SaS Eifcn i|l gut. fUe Iron is good. ATTRIBUTm: ADJECTTiTES. 2. Adjectives, when used attributively* are subject to three modes of inflection, called the old, the new and the mixed de- clensions. 3. Adjectives, when not immediately preceded by biefcr, eitt, or some other word of that class (L. X. 4. and L. XII. 4.) are Inflected according to the OLD DECLENSION. Masculine. Neuter. _ Masc. Neut. N. gut-cr, 0«t-c3, good; (N.bief-er, Mef-c3.) G. 9ut-e« (en),gut-ei3(en), ofgood; (G. Mef-e3 Mef-e«.) D. gut-em, gut-em, to or for good; (D.iicf-em, ticf cm.) A. gut-en, gut-c8, good. (A. fcief-cn, blcf-te.)" * The terms predicative and attributive, which in grammar have a Btrictly conventional sense, should, by the pupil of German especially, be MI7 understood. Thus in the sentence, $iivt-er ©ta^l ift gut, hard steel _!s good ; hard is regarded as a known attribute of tlie steel, while good is that which is predicated or affirmed of it. Denoe hard is attrib- uUve, and good predicative. ATTRIBUTIVE AND PREDICATIVI! FORMS OF THE ADJECTIVE. 4fc 4. The adjective, like the article, must agree with its noun. 5. Tlie genitive of the old form is now seldom used ; that of the new being preferred : Die garte guteit (instead of galea) The color of good gold is yellow. ®»li)c« ifl seli. ATTRIBUTIVE AND PREDICATIVE FORMS OF THE ADJECTIVB. Attributive. Predicative. 4iart-et ©to^t ifl niijlti^. Hard steel is usefuL $art-ea Eifen ijl nu6tt^« Hard iron is useful. SWu^lii^-et ©ta|l ifl ^art Useful steel is hard. SJiifeU^-ee eifcn ijl ^att. Useful iroir is hard. 6. Adjectives preceded by etroal, tn&i and m&iii, and used substantively, are of the old declension, and written with a capital initial : ^aSeit ©ie titaai SReitct Have you any thing new? ©ie ftredjen »on ettta* 9(eatm, You speak of something new J Sr fagt miili ©^lec^te^. He says nothing bad. 1. An adjective, when referring to a noun understood, ha.<3 the same ending as when the noun is expressed : Er ^at felnea %Vi^, xij '^oBe groBea. He has fine cloth, I have coarse, flatter ©ta^I tjl gut, ttcic|er t|i fi$Ie($t. Hard steel is good, soft is bad. Give the gender of the nouns in the following examples, as indicated by the adjective. State also which adjectives are attributive, and which predicative. Scift;ie(e. Examples. SBeti^et ©tajl ijl ntc^t gut. Soft steel is not good. ®ute« SSIet t(i Weic^. Good lead is soft. $ttt fcer Sauer guten Sffieijen unb gute« Has the peasant goo i wheat ana jDtjl? good fruit? SBer^atfetneUu^«nbfetnen©ammet? Who has finecloth and fineveheti ©utcr ©enf ifl geli, guteS ©alj ifi Good mustaid is yellow, good salt tteig. is white. ®t ft)tt(|t fflit iittem 4)o?ne. He speaks with bitter scorn. (£r raft in Httrem $«rme. — Xit He cries (or calls) in bitter sorrow 46 FORM OF THE ADJECTIVE LBSSON XIV. TOCABULAKT TO THE EXERCISES. Sfngene^m, pleasant ; ©ku, blue; Ba8 SWci, the lead; gun, fine; ®elb, yeUow; Orau, gray; ®rob, eoarse; (Sim, green ; 38iaitr> always; Sifet. now; JDtx SOTanfet, the cloak; 33er SRotf, the coat; atot^, red; ©(^warj, black; Slrotfen, dry; Saa %n(^, the cloth; ®ei SSetter, the cousin; 2Barm, warm; SSeip, white; t)(ii SBetter, the weather. Exercise 24. 3lufgo6e 24. 1. 3(1 3|r Suc^ fcin otfr groB ? 2. 3<^ ^a^e groBeS S:uc^, uno kcr ©^nelter '^at feines Sui^. 3. SJiefer SRocE ifl son feinent Zvtd^t, iener ijl son gro6em. 4. Ser ©ta:|I ifl f^axt, iai Slel iji wcii^. 5. garter ©ta^l ifl gut, loeic^eg IBIei ijl gut. 6. ®uter @ta'§l iji :^art, gutes SSIei tfl weii^. t. ®utc3 ®oIt ift gelB, guter ai :^att-( etfen ijl gut. The hard iron is good. Diefei fc^iin c SJogcI ijl tBcip. This beautiful bird is white. Tie^ei %m-t Zai) ijl Weij. This beautiful cloth is whita Sebet gut-e SKann tji £|rli(|. Every good man is honest. <» Namely : aller, fctr, eintger, etlic^er, jeber, jener, matt(i)er, fold^t and ttel(|et, (L. X. 4 § 31. § 32). 48 LESSON XV. Attrihuiivt. Predicative. Stbea gut-e Jfinb ifl c^rlic^. : Sencr f^tlicM 3Ratui t|l flut. '. 3ene8 {|rli;^e Jttnb ifl 9«t. aSan^ct fiut-t 3Raim i|l arm. 3»anc^e« Sut-e Stnb tfJ tttm. ] SBJeli^er fiUlse SWann ijl 9«t? sn$i4es> liolje flinb ijl But? Every good child is honesti Tliat honest man is good. That honest child is good. Many a good man is poor. Many a good child is poor. What proud man is good f What proud child is good ? 3. The final syllable of manner, folder and writer, which by Its characteristic ending, denotes the gender of the noun, is sometimes dropped ; in which case the adjective that follows is inflected according to the old declension (L. XIV. 2.) : Wlmii gut-et SBlanit instead of 3)lanc^et gut-e SKann. ©ol(^ gtoS-eS %xii) instead of ©ol^ea grob-t Xviii. 4. The adjective with the article is often, for the sake of special emphasis, placed after the noun : ®«« Siininip/ ba« setbetHtdJe. The ruinous trtaty (the treaty, the ruinous). 5. Adjectives denoting the material of which a thing is made, are formed from nouns by suffixing t, cn, em. In such case a, and u often take the Umlaut : Tebtrn, leathern from itbtx, leather; golbeitf golden, gold (made of gold) from @Dlbf gold ; ^Bljerit, \rooden from ^olj/ wood ; gldfcnlf glass (made of glass) from @IaS, glass. ^at ber Raii ben pljenten ober ben Has the cook the wooden or the fleinernen £if(^ ? stone table ? !Der ©(|utft ^at baa jltJerttC a;tnten» The scholar has the silver inkstand, fap unb ic^ ba^ gidferne. and I the glass one. 33eif))iele. Examples. StffcS gnte ©c^reitpatjlcr i(i gttttt. All good writing-paper is smoofli. fcaien Sic baS rot^e ©tegeUai? Have you the red sealing-wax? ©E^ijrt biefe^ alte 9)ferb bem alten Does this old horse belong to the gteifc^er ? old butcher ? 3ebcr wtrflic^ gutc unb nii^Txi^e SKenfii^ Every really good and useful tisn ill fleiptg. (human being) is diligent, ©e^en ®te btt« gifinjenbe ®t« unb ben Do you see the glittering ice and tteipenSc^neeaufjencm^o^en Serge? the white snow on yonder high mountain % DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. 49 JDer iunge fStam fc^reiSt bem altett The young man is writing the old Scorer eincn Sricf. teacher a letter. Setsweijlunj ip ber clttjise iictjte Stt^c Despair is the only genuine athe- t*mua. — SR. ism. VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. aier, but; Set 3Rctgel, the chisel; Silt, old; 2)h aRenW, the man, human bemg Strtig, polite, agreeable; 9ttv., new; Sraun, brown ; ©djarf, sharp; ©tolj, proud; ®umm, stupid; gleipig, dUigent, industrious ; S)er Sifc^ler, the cabinet-maker; ®tm3, enough; Unjufmben, discontented, di» Suns, young; Bttng, long; satisfied ; aJielteic^t, perhaps ; X., ee^rltng, the apprentice ; Suftiebeii, contented. £>u $laaxex, the mason ; ExERCItB 26. StufflflBe 26. 1 . j^ ^ale ias feine 2:uc^ unb fcct ©c^neiicr fjat bas gro6e 2:uc^. 2. 'LW\ix Sftod tfl »on tern feinen Zu6^t, {cncr ifl tton bem groicn. 3. £)er ^urtc ©ta^I ijl gut, iai weic^e SBIet ifi gut. 4. 2)icfer Junge iBIaurer laaft ienc« jungc i)fcri. 5. 3eite3 jungc 5)ferti geprt bte* fern jungen dourer. 6. ©c^reikn ©ie icn kngcn SSrtef mit kcm dten Sleiftifu ieS armcn Sel^rlingS? 7. ©e^ort Mefer fd)arfc 5Kets ^el tern flet^igcn 3:if(^Icr ? 8. 3fl jcb« rci(^e fWarni jufrieten ? 9. Sji nii^t jcbic jufrietene SKann vcic^ genug ? 10. aBeId)et flel* gige SKann ijl unjufrieien? 11. ©^relW Jencr armc ©4uler mit tern neuen SStcifufte? 12. SKanc^er jlolje 5Kenf^ iji bumm, okr sietteii^t nic^t jeCvr. (L. X. 3.) 13. Sjl otleg troctcne SBetter an* gcne^m ? 14. ajet^es gute Scier :^at ier olte ©attter, ia3 geBe, tai griinc, kas Wuuc, ober iai fi^warje? 15. aSerlauft ier artigc ftaufmonn las ma^e 3)apicr, oter iai Haue? 16. 3^ atle'^ 9«te ©tail ^art, unt aUti gute Slei roeif ? it. 3tt wel^em faltm gflttte lett ber Si^bar ? 18. 3P: nii^t jeter faule ©(^u(er unjufrte fcm, ober wiffen ©ie nii^t ? Exercise 21. SlufgaBc 21. 1.. This warm weather is very pleasant. 2= Is that young cabinet-maker the good friend of the old mason? 3. Is every 50 MIXED DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES LESSON XVI. proud man stupid 1 4. Is not every industrious man contentedl 5. Is not that indolent apprentice very discontented ? 6. la the new chisel of the young cabinet-maker sharp 1 1. Who has the sharp chisel of the poor glazier ■? 8. This polite scholar is writing the old teacher the long letter. 9. Has every con- tented man money enough ? 10. Has this friend, the old gla- zier, the green, the blue, or the red glass'? 11. Is the new loak of the old mason of the fme cloth, or of the coarse 1 12. s the new cloth of the saddler gray, green, blacK, or blue? 13. The old saddler has the blue, the gray, the green and the black cloth, and the tailor has the red, the white, and the yel low. 14, Do you understand what that poor old man says? 15. With what old pencil is he writing that long letter ? 16. Does any body know in which new house the rich miller lives 1 17. Why does the poor peasant buy the fine cloth? 1 8. The new cloak of the old baker is very good. LESSON XVI. Cection XVI. MIXED DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. 1. Adjectives, when following mein, or a word of that class,* and referring to the same noun, are of the MIXED DECLENSION. Ma^c. Neut. N. mcin gut-er, tncin gut-ca, my good ; G. tncineS gut-cn, ntcineS gut-en, of my good; D. meinent gut-en, meinem gut-en, to or for my good ^ A. iiteinen gut-en, mcin gut-e«, my good. 2. As mcin, tein, etc., have the same form for each gender (i e. in nom. masc. and neut.) the adjective following them takes the characteristic ending (L. X. 4.), thus indicating the gender of its noun : o Namely: bein, tin, fein, t^t, unfer, euet and fein; (L XU 1- S 32 §33). MIXED DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. 51 Ein alt-er Wtam, an old man. ®tn alt-ea 3)fcrb, an old horse. iWetn nc«-et Jifi^, my new table. e3 9)ferb unb einen aU ten aCagen. 3. S)a« ^ameet ift ein groges, fiarfc.^ unb fe^r ii% itches Slier. 4. Der treue, wadji'ame §unb unferes guten SrcunbeS tfi tott. 5. 3ft unfer alter greunb noc^ in unfcrm neuen ©arten ? 6. 3|r alter greunb iji in felnem fdjonen, alien ©arten. 7. ^oBen (tic einen guten, reifen 3I|)fetl 8, 3c^ ^ak teinen reifen Slefel. MIXED DECLENSION OP ADJECTIVES. 53 9. 2Dcm titrlauft tcr ^aufmann fetn gropes neues ©(^ijf? 10, (£r Bcrtouft ti fcincm otten greunte, tern ^opitan. 11. $at ntflit junger SSctter tnein Halted, nietn getbte, oJer metn iuei§c5 papier? 12. Sr lot 3t)r wei^c^, uno fein gutcr greunb ^at 3^r HaucS. 13. 3ft tctn falter SBetter angcnet)m ? 14. ©(|reikn 3ie mit meincm alten Steiftifte oier mit 31)1^" Reuen? 15. 3Bog fiir ein 3;l)ter ifi 3t)r alter Jpuui? 16. 2Ba3 fiir ein neues ©djiff fauft t>er ^apitaii, ein gropes oJer ein ilcines? IT. 3ft fin wlrKii^ e^rlii^er, gutct Wlann je faul ? 18. 3fl tin \mUx Wlann je »lrlli(^ jufrieCen ? 19. £;er ^lempner '^ot ^l^x altti fleffer un5 auc^ 3^rfn fltten fibffel. Exercise 29. 31 uf gate 29. 1. Our old friend is still in our new house. 2. Your young friend has our old horse, and also our old carriage. 3. What kind of black cloth has our old friend, the merchant 1 4. He has no black cloth, but he has his good blue cloth. 5. Does the camel live in a warm or in a cold country ? 6. Is the camel a large, strong and useful animal t t. Has your good friend a faithful, watchful dog 1 8. Has our old friend, the cap- tain, a new ship, or an old one ? 9. Have you a large tree in your new garden 1 10. I am writing with your new pencil ; have you my old one? 11. Is a faithful, watchful dog a useful animal 1 12. Is an indolent scholar faithful, honest and useful? 13. Has the son of the old peasant a ripe apple? 14. The cap- tain is selling the merchant his beautiful new ship. 15, Are you buying a young horse, or an old one ? 16. I am buying a young horse, and my old friend is selling an old one. 11. Has the scholar my white papw or your blue ?• 18. He has my blue paper and you? new pencil, 19. Has the child a small spoon 1 54 LESSON xvn. LESSON XVII. f eclion XVIL 1. CONNECTED VIEW OF THE OLD, NEW AND MIXED DECLENSION* Masculine. OU) DEOIMJSIOir. JfEW DECLENSION. MIXED DEOLENSION. (L. XIV. 3.) N. g'ttt-er; ter gut-c; ntein gut-cr; (Mef-cr.) G gut-cS (en) ; tea gut-en ; meineS gut-en ; (tlcf-c3.) D. gut-cm ; bent gut-en ; nteincm gut-en ; (iief-cm.) A. gut-en ; fcen gut-en ; meinen gut-en ; (kief-en.) Neuter. N. gut-es ; bas gut-e ; metn gut-c3 ; (Mcf-ca.) G. gut-cS (en) ; ke« gut-en ; meinea gut-en ; (bief-cfl.) D. gut-em; tem gut-en; meincm gut-en; (lief-em.) A., gut-ee ; bas gut-c ; mein gut-cs ; (Mef-cS.) 2. WORDS REQUIRING THE ADJECTIVE IN THE NEW DECLENSION. Masc Neut. Masc. Neut. Mase, Neut. Masc. Neat. atter, aKcS; einigcr, elnigc« ; jener, jenea; welc^er, tuelt^cS. ber, baa ; etlic^er, cttidjea ; manii^er, manc^cg ; (L. 15.) biefcr, btcfes; jeber, {ebeS; fot(|er, fotd)c3; 3. WORDS REQUntING THE ADJECTIVE IN THE MIXED DECLENSION. ketn, cin, cucr, i^r, Icin, mein, fcln, unfcr. (L. 16.) SclfpicIC. ExAMPIJIB. Ecr juitge SKalet tjl cin gcfi^Wt'et The young painter is a skillful a^ ^unfttcr. tist. ©iefer gefc^-dte Sunpiet ifi tin gutet This skillful artist is a good friend. Bttunb. Ser alle ©attter beSt ben floffer mtt The old saddler coTers tiie trunk neiifm Ecbcr. with new leather. Sr beat ben %\.\i^ mlt eincm grflnen He covers the table with a green Zui^t, cloth. VIEW OF THE OLD, NEW AND MIXED DECLENSIONS. 65 VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. SBiife, cross, ill-natured; Eifcrn, iroa (adjective); T>ai Qdcfag, the vessel; ®Ufcrn, glass (adjective) ; Oktt, smooth; •&a|Teti, to hate; ^dpii^, ugly, ill-formed,' ijiiljeni, wooden; ©ei flcffcl, the kettle; 5)er Snopft the button, knob. Eer .Snec^li the servant, slave; t)et .Rrug, the pitcher; jfuvfern, copper (adjective), SJtel'fingcn, brass (adjective); 23cr 9fagcl, the nail; Sag 3)ul»er, the powder; Sag ©(JIojj, the lock; 23aS ©tl)tetl);)a))ict, the -writing- paper. ©c^cn, to see (lefen, It 7.) ; S)M SBetvdt^cr, the traitor. Exercise 30. 3(ufgaBc 30. 1. ^i) "ijalt 3^r feine« Zu^ unb ben grofen ^nopf iti ^aur* manner. 2. Ttdt ber alte ©attler ben altm Zii&i mit griinem ob« ntit Hauent Su^e ? 8. (Sr bedt ben Sifc^ mit biefem groBen grii-j nen Suc^e. 4. Unfcr junger greunb ^at unfcr junge« 55ferb. 5. S^er junge 9Jlann serfauft ba« ^apli(^e 55ferb. 6. §at ber Bijfc ©d^mieb elnen gro^en 9lagel, ober ben fupfernen ^ejfel be^ ^auf* manned ? 7. Sr :^at !etn gutcs (Sifen, ahr er |at guten ©ta^l unb guteS ^u)jfer. 8. Scner alte 9)tann ijl mcin alter Siac^bar. 9, SBem getjort biefe^ neue (5(^(o§ ? 10. 3(^ l^aBe fein neue^ ®cl)tof . 11. $aben <3ie meipeg 9)aptcr ober Bloue^? 12. 3c^ |aBe iai luei^e 93apicr inetne« SSrubers, unb er :^at metn Btaue^ papier. 13. Mti gute ©d^reiBpapicr iji glatt, aBer ni^t atleg gtatte 9)apler ifl gut. 14. Jpa^t ni(^t jeber gute fKenfd) einen 35errat^er ? 15. Da3 gap ijl eln :^btjerne« (Sefap. 16. £:er ^effel iji ein eiferne«, lupfer* mi, ober mejftngencs ©efiig. 17. SBo ijl ber glafernc ^rug ? 1 8, 2)er ^necl)t '^at einen ^rug, aBer nid)t einen gliifernen. 19. 3c^ f^aU gutcs 3)ulBer, aBer lein gutes Slei. Exercise 31. SlufgaBc 31. 1. The ill-natured tailor has his fine cloth and the pretty but ton of his good friend. 2. Is all smooth writing-paper good ? 3. Is not all good writing-paper smooth ? 4. To whom does this coarse powder belong ? 5. The hunter has fine powder, but he has no coarse. 6. The iron kettle of the servant is large, his copper kettle is small. 1. Do you know where my glass 56 LESSON xvir.. pitcher is 1 S. I see your glass pitch.^r on your new table 9. Does not every honest man hate a traitor 1 10. This agree- ahle child has a wooden horse and a large iron ring. 11. Have you a brass nail or an iron one 1 12. A cask is a large vi'ooden vessel ; a kettle is an iron, a copper, or a brass one. 13. I have my white paper and the white paper of the scholar. 14. The young saddler is covering the old trunk with black leather. 15. Does the ugly man cover his table with the blue Joth, cr with the green 1 16. He covers his old table with a red cloth. It. Which new book have you ? 18. I have no uew book. 19. I have white paper and he has yellow. LESSON XVin. Cection XVffl. INDEPINITB PKONOUUS. 1. The words jebcrmanrt, jemanb, man, nitmanb, nii^tS and Ctoo^ or was, are indefinite pronouns. -• 2. 3f^C'^i'"Jwn is declined like a noun of the old declension ; jcrnanS and niemanD may be declined in the same way, or like an adjective of the old declension (§ 59). SUJan, nic§t3 and ttwai are indeclinable : ©ie fprec^en son etwaS Steucm. Ton speak of something new. 5i) fptec^e »on tti^tS. I do not speak of any thing. 3. Sfi'fl'tnantt answers in signification to even/ body : SebEtwaim ^at feine f^toa^e ©cite. Eyery body has his weak side. 4. Scrnani answers to any body, somebody, and etisas to any thing, something : ©f ^en ©te Scmanb ? Do you see any boay(or somebodj) I 3a, ii) fe^e Semanb. Yes, I see somebody. fiBitn ©ie m(^t EtmaJ? Do yon not hear something? 3tt, i^ ^iJrc ttKai, or »««. Yes, I hear something. 5. S'licmanl) answers to nobody, not any body ; and nid^te t« nothing, not any thing : gilemanb loit tni^, «nb l^ loie SRic Kobody praises me, and I do not Btanben. praise any body. INDEFINITB PRONOUAS. 57 ©^iden ©ie SJrem Sruber nii^ti ? Do you not send your brother ai.j thing. 6. The negative particle, nic^t, is used with iemanb and ctwafi only in interrogative sentences ; hence for the twofold formt of expression in English, there is but one in German • 3^ fc^e Sftentanben. Ei fauft nlc^ta. il do not see any body. laterally ; I see nobody. {He does not buy any thing, LiteraUy: He buys nothing. 1. Sitter, {one), and leiner, {no one, nobody), are also called indefinite pronouns : 3u rein i|i ni^t Stnet tm SReic^. — 2;. Ifot one intheiingdom is too purs. Reiner wupte ben Jtatnen. H'o one knew the name. Scifplele. Sc^ ?Bte Semanben, aier ii^ fe^c JiU' manbett. Saufen ©ie nic^t etwa*? Jfein, i(% !aiife 5ft^t«. iJttbcn ©ie etwaa ©c^Snea ? 3(^ ^cAt tixoo.i ©(|Sne«. Sebermann ^agt unb »etttii|tct SSerrdt^cr. Examples. I hear somebody, but I do not see any body. Do you not buy something ? Ko, I do not buy any thing. Have you any thing beautiful ? I have something beautifuL etnen Every body hates and despises a traitor. VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. SBefu'ct)trtr to visit; ®ei SBo^tct, the auger; 35er Suc^pnbtcr, the bookseller; Eigennfl^tg, selfish; 6t»a«, something, anything; 35et Bit^rer, the guide, leader; Set ^o6eI, the plane; Sebermann, everybody; 3emanb, any body, somebody; SDei Safe, the cheese ; ©ttS ^tetb, the dress, gaiment; Dtt^ £icb, the song; 33er 2)?at3, the maize, Indian corn 91t(|t^, nothing, not any thing , 3[iemanb, nobody, not anybody SRttUclen, to smoke ; Det ©cftu^nttt^er, the shoemaker; tier Slaia'f, the tobacco; !Eer SeDet, the plate; Eer Uekrf(|«^, the overshoe. Exercise 32. Slufg-oBc 32. 1. 2Barum loW Sebermantt biefen ©(^iiler? 2. Seiifntann '(l cigcitnii^ig. 3. Jpat Scmant' !«""£" UcBerfc^u^? 4. IDcr ©d)u'^« macfjer moi^t Stmflnl'Etn f'^'f^^ Mierfcbitt). 5. Slicnimtt toH tctt 8* t)8 LESSON xvm. Suc^^onWcr, unb in 33u(^|antter loM S'llcmaniien. 6. Scntani fiiicft tent ^nec^te cincn neucn JpoicI unti einen neuen SC^rcr. 1. ©^idcn ©ie tern ©(^netber ben ^nopf ? 8. Stietnanb ft^icEt bent ©^neiJer ben ^nopf unb tai ^Icib. 9. Sefudien ©ie Scmanbcn ? 10. 3i^ 6efu(^e Scntanbcn, akr mein greunb befuc^t Sfliemonbcn. 11. ^aufen ©ie nic^t dtoai ? 12. 3{^ taufe nii^tS, ofcer mein Svubcr lauft etoas. 13. Sauft er ctmag ©d)bne^? 14. Sr fauft ehvai 9ZugIi(^e«, aier nid)t-5 ©clones. 15. Siaud)t Semanb |icr ZaM i 16. Sfletn, 5Iiemanti rau(^t. 17. Scmanb |at ten Seller, ben ^rug unb ben ^afe uuferc^ gut)rerS. 18. 3emanb (tngt, |oren ©ie bo3 Sieb ? 19. ^affen ©ie S'emanben? 20. 9]ein, i^ |affe Silicman^ ben. 21. Jtauft Semaiib ten Jponig, ben SSJlaiS unb ben ^ejfet ? Exercise 33. SlufgaBe 33. 1. Somebody is visiting our old guide. 2. Does any body hate the bookseller ? 3. No, and the bookseller does not hate any body. 4. To -whom does the peasant send the honey, the maize and the cheese % 5. He does not send any body the maize, but he sells somebody the honey. 6. Why does every body praise this child ? 7. Is every body very selfish ? 8. Has not somebody my plane? 9. No, nobody has your plane, but somebody has the auger of the servant. 10. Is any body smok- ing? 11. Is somebody singing a song? 12. Somebody has my pitcher and my plate. 13. Do you not send somebody the money ? 14. No, I do not send any body (I send nobody ; see 6) the money. 15. Does any body send the tailor the dress and the button? 16. The tailor sends somebody the dress. 11. Has the cook any body's kettle ? 18. Yes, he has one. (L.16. 5) 19. 1 have somebody's nail. 20. Have you any body's tobacco? 81. Is any body every body's friend ? mDEriNiii! PBONOOTsr JKon. 59 LESSON XIX. Cection XIX. INDEFINITE PRONODN 51? tt tt, 1. The pronoun man (like the French on) indicates persona in a general and indefinite manner : 3Ra« barf nt«t ju »iel f(|Iafen. \ ^"' ^""'^ ""^ ^'««P ^o" •"^'''' : <" ( People should not sleep too much. ESaS ttlntt man in ©ronlnnb ? i '^''''' '^'' '^''J' '^""'^ '° Greenland » ( What does o«« drink in Greenland i SRan ip fetten ju wenfs. .^ -P^'o^Z. seldom eat too little; or ( Cms seldom eats too littla, Stan Mi cincn E^tanncn. ^ \'"' hates_ a tyrant ; or t A tyrant is hated. 3Kan f(|metct)elt i^r ju fcf r. < i'jo^?^ flatter lier too much; or { She 18 too much flattered. 2. sot an is used only L the non(iinative ; the oblique oases being supplied by other woids : Stan ipt urn fein SeJen ju etialtcn. One eats in order to preserve orae"* (his) life, fir win ctnen nie ^oren. He will never listen to one. SRan foil feinen 9?a(^|ltn »le pi^ feltji One should love on^s (his) neigh- lieBen. bor as on^s self (himself). 3. ®ar (as also the more emphatic ganj uni gar), before a negativn or tendency toward any place or object is indi- cated : ®i lauft lit %■ a ®atteM, He is rnnning in tlie garden. 6t !(iuf^ ift ten Oarttlti be is rupning into the garden. 63 PKEPOSITIONS LESSON XX. St lauft auf bcm Etfe. etittuft «uf baa ®ia. Sr ijl in bent §aufe. (Et itljt in ba« ^ani. He is mnning on the ic& He is rnnning on ("ontol") the «♦ He is in the house. He goes into the house. 4. Prepositions are frequently contracted with the defmit« article into one word : Km (for an 5In3 (for on a«f8 (for auf ffieim (for M ©itri|S (for burc^ gflr« (for fur §interm (for Winter Sra (for in SnS (for in a?om (for Bpn Bunt (for }u 3ut (for ju bem). ©r fifet am Sifa^e. baa). (£r ge^t an3 Senjlet. baa), etlegteaaufa Stett. bem). Sr ifl 6etm SStuber. baa). Er gc^t buri^a Sclb. baa), ea ijl fiira Slnb. bem). Er jje^t ^interm Saune. bem). Et i|l im §aufe. baa). £r gc^t ina ^aai. bem). Et tommt uom 9Rarfte. bem). £r ge^t jum gteunbe. bet; feminiiie gender, L. 23.) He sits at the dble. He goes io the window. He lays it on the board. He is with the brother. He goes through the field. It is ybr the child. He stands bekindthe fence. He is in the house. He goes into the house. He eomea/rom the markeu He goes to the friend. EXAMPLES OF Ott, SOH, iXttf, ttUS AHD K tt d^. Et benft « n feinen Srcunb. Et fptii^t son feincm gtcunbe. Et ijl flolj auf feinen SReW)t^um. SBaa ttutbe aua bem £r SettlEt, the beggar ; 'E)ixi Sinbenjovt, the conjunction; Surd), through; 2>a3 gcnffer, the window; giir, for (preposition) ; ©egen, toward, to, about; Jifr ®rolien/ the ditch; Cegcn, to place, lay. Stelien, beside; Dft, often; D^ne, without; SRojlig, rusty; ©pringen, to spring; Urn, around, near; Un^ijflic^, impolite; DaS SJerI)ntt'ntpn)ort, theprepMitio I)et RtUtx, the cellar; i jffiiber, against. Exercise 36. SluigoBe 36, 1. T>ix Tlam fle'^t an tern genjler, unb ba« ^int ge'^t an iai gcnfter. 2. (£r ft^t auf tern ©tu^Ie unb legt fein S8u(^ auf iai Sett. 3. Da3 EinJ ifi Winter tern Dfen; ier §unb ge^t Winter ten Dfen. 4. "Baa papier Itcgt neben bent Sui^e ; ber ©(filter legt ben S3(fl« ftift neben iai Sud). 5.Xai §au3 jlc'^t iiber bem teller; iai $ferb fprtngt iibet ten ©raben. 6. X)er jnngc 9Kann fle^t unter bem SBflumc; fein greunb ge^^t unter ben Saum. 1. ®er itauf* mann fle'^t eor bem Jpaufe ; ber alte ©attler fotnmt »or bas $au«. 8. !Der 33aum jietit jwtfi^en bem Jpoufc unb bem ®arten ; ber SJJann gc'^t gwifi^en baa §au« unb ben ©arten. 9. Der tleine SSoget fliegt in Ba^ Siniiner; fliegt er auc§ in bem SimmEi^? 10. "Eer 3ai)ier. paper. 5i* ^a6c nit^t ben Slei jlifl, fonbcrn bae I have not the pencil, bu t the paDCw Sdtiler. *^ SiaATIVK CONJUGAIIOIf. 65 8. In interrogative sentences, ni^t frequently precedes the object of the verb : $aten ©ie ntc&t ben SttifJift ? Have you not the pencil? 4. Sonbcrn occurs only after a negative, of which it intro' 3uces the opposite; while Slber is less strongly adversative ; often merely marking eonaething additional, and may follow either an afRrmation or negation : 6 ifl ni^t reii^ fonbctn arm. He is not rich but poor. ®r t|l nic^t reic^ aiet flolj. He is not rich but proud. Si ifi freigeiig aiet nic^t retc^. He is generous but not rich. £i ifl nii^t nur reic^ fonbern auc^ ftci' He is not only rich but also gen- geMg. erous. 2)ai8 SRefTer ijl nic^t fc^arf fonbctn The knife is not sharp but dulL jhimtjf. 5. 9lt^t Wa'^r ? not true ? (is it not true 1 like the French n'esi-ce pas?) answers to our various interrogative phrases after an assertion : Bit fennen t'^n, \ Ton kuoTsr him, do you not? 6r ijl S^t ©ruber, | He is your brother, is he not? ©ie Wirb ge^cn, / She will go, will she not ! ®r ^at ti ge^a'St, \ riii^t wa'^r ? He has had it, has n't he ? SClr tottncn |oren, I We can hear, can we not? ©te jtnb ret^, I They are rich, are they not? ©is finb nic^t retc^, / They are not rich, are they ? 6. 9?ic^t tcair sometimes precedes the assertion ; and, occa- sionally, the latter word is not expressed : ?Sii$t toi^, tr ijl fe^r rei^? He is very rich, is he not? ®ie {emeu ben Viann, nii^t ? Tou know the man, do you not? apier. Ba« Setter t|i ni^t troffen fonbern feui^t. Examples. Why do you not visit us oftener f Do yon not know why he is weep- ing? I do not know the painter, neither does my brother know him. Have not you my paper and my pencil I I have the pencil, but not the paper. The weather is not dry, but moist: VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. Staiifcn, to roar ; Slufmcrffam, attentive; EaS 2)orf, the village; Engltfi^, English ; Dcr glu§i the river; granso'fifc^, French ; greigebig, generous; ^eute, to-day; Snterelfnnt, interesting; Congrocilig, tedious; Cc^rreid), instructive; Exercise 38. 1. ^Brcn <5tc nid^t wie bcr SBtnb iraufl? 2. 3c^ fe^e telt IaS Rint jtttcrt. 3. 3il md>t jetea le^netdjc S3u(^ intereffant ? 4. 3jl nl^t mani^eg te^rretiSe 33u(^ langmeilig? 5. SJelc^en Unterf(^tcJ fintcn ©ie 3tDif(^£n " SfJid;t jetcs Ic^rretc^c Sud^ ijl intereffant," uni ■'Setes It^xxti&ie Sui^ ijl nii^t intereffant?" 6. Xlefcr SerJrecfecr SJJorgen, to-morrow ; 9k(^la|fig, negligent; 3Jie, never; tin SBorwegett the Norwegian; ©onbcrn, but; ©tumpf, dull; !Der lau^er, the diver ; Der SStthit'djtx, the criminal ; Det SBinb, the wind; Bittern, to tremble; Butvet'Ienr sometimes, 3lufgaic"38. NOUNS OF THE NEW DECLENSION. 61 fpri^t franjotifi^, nid)t tua'^v ? 1. 'Eer Qt\6^idte Saucier ktiigt l'§n flits tern gtujTe. 8. Slkr, wer f))ri(^t letn eitgtifd^, itni tcer fpric^t !eta frangbftfc^ ? 9. 9)Jein SHcffer ift ntc^t neu, fcntiern alt. 10. Ss ift neu, aBcr nic()t fd)avf. 11. Ss i|l nld)t fc^arf, fonlevn jiumpf. 12, SCarutn lokn ©Ic jencn ®d)utcr nii^t? 13. 3(^ lobe j;cnen, aber nid)t Jicfcn, 14. 3jl cr nid)t jumeilen fe^r noc^Iiiffig ? 15. yiein, er ijl nte nad^Iajfig, fonbern immer aufmertfam. 16. ®e^en ®ie nid)t |eutc nac^ bent 'Dorfc? 11. ^a, ic^ gel^e jc^t, unb metn Sru* ter ge^t morgen. 18. 2Carum fprei^en ®te nt^t englifc^? Exercise 39. Slufgabc 39. 1. Have not you my book 1 2. No, I have not the book. 3. This child is not industrious, but idle. 4. Not this child, but that one is attentive. 5. You speak French, do you not ] 6. I speak English, but not French. 7. Why do you not write to-day ? 8. I write French, but I do not write English. 9. You .do not find this book tedious, do you ? 10. I do not find it very interesting. 11. Is every instructive book tedious? 12. Do you never go to the village with your brother? 13. My brother is going to-day, and I am going to-morrow. 1 i. Is that scholar sometimes very idle and very negligent? 15. This new knife and the new chisel are not sharp, but dull and rusty. 16. Our old neighbor, the old Norwegian, is not only a very rich, but also a very generous man. 11. Your new book is not interesting, neither is it instructive. 18. My new book is not only instructive, but also interesting. LESSON XXIi. Section XXII, NOUNS or THE NEW DECLENSION. 1. Nouns of the new declension ending in unaccented flt e^ et, el, form all their oblique cases by adding n (for fern, sing, however, see L. XXIII. 4) : N. ber Ungar, bcr Sfleffe, ber SSalcr, G. bes Ungar-n, iei 5lejfe-n, be« S3aier-n, D. bent Ungar-n, bent Stejfc-n, bem 5Balcr-n, A. ben Ungar-n, ben 5Jejfe-n, ben Satct-n, 68 LESSON xxn. 2. Nouns of this declension not ending in or, etc., as above, form the oblique cases by adding en; N. ter ®raf, ier ©sicat, bcr ^elb, G. in ®raf-en, beS ©olSat-en, tti Jpett-cn, D. tem ®raf-en, bent ®oItiat-en, tern ^elJ-cn, A. ien ®raf-en, ten <5ol5at-cn, ben §eti-cn. 3. When an adjective or a participle is used substantively! it still follows the declension of its original word : iDicfer SDeutfc^e tjl ein ®efttnb'ter. This German is an embaEsador. Siefer ®efani)t'c ifl ein Scutfi^ct. This embassador is a German. 4. To the new declension belong most names of males end- ing in e, many names of nations, as also various foreign nouns (§18): Set SB«5e, the lion ; Set Dc^S (or, D^fe), the ox; ®er liafe, the hare; Der Slisoc'at, the advocate; 2)er Saier, the Bavarian; Ser Ungor, the Hungarian. . 5. To ascertain to which of the two declensions a noun be- longs, the pupil has only to observe the endings of the genitive, as given in the vocabularies ; e^ (or &) denoting the old declen- sion, and n (or en) the new; thus, !E)er STffe, -n, Scr ©olf, -e«, Ser |)crb, -en, Set SRuf, -ea, Set Saier, -n, the ape; the wolf; the hero ; the call; the Bavarian ; Set Jfcife, Set Sar, Set getnb, Set ®raf, Set Dejire ^et, -8, the cheese; -en, the bear ; -eS, the enemy; -en, the count; -ii the Austrian. Self)) iele. Examples. SSSatum i(l bet granjcre bet Srcunb Why is the Frenchman the friend beS CEnglonbera unb bc8 Siirfen? of the Englishman and the Turk? 3|l bet Defhretc^er bet geinb bea Stup" Is the Austrian the enemy of ihe fen ober be« SJtttnjpfen ? Russian or of the Frenchman ? HSui fut ein Sanbamamt i(l bet R'ixai What countryman is the king of Don ®riec^cnlanb ? Greece? Set ®cltt»e ttebt feine ©clasere'i ni^t. The slave does not love his slavery. Set Ungai liebt ben Deflvei^et nic^t; The Hungarian does not love the ber 5>oIe auc^ nt^t. Austrian; neither does the Pole. Set Unsar Ueit ben Dejlrei^et n'd^t. The Hungarian does not love the ben SJufTen mi) mijl. Austrian, nor the Russian either. NOUNS OF THE NEW DECLENSION. 69 VOCABULARY. TO THE EXERCISES. Bet 5tmtrifa'ner,-a,tkeAmerieaii; SlnllrcKg'tnb, toilsome ; ©er Saicr, -n, the Bavarian ; Eeutfc^/ German (adj.); S5er (Englnnber, -«, the Englishman ; 33et Seinb', -e3, the enemy; Eet grnnjo'fe, -n, the Frenchman ; gij|ren, to lead ; t)aS ®rie^entanb, -8, (the) Greece; Cet Stalie'ncr, -«, the Italian; De knait, -it, the boy; Uei fionij, -e«, the king; Sa8 Ceficn, -S, the life Set SRatro'fe, -n, the sailor; Ser 3fe|fe, -n, the nephew ; 1)er Dfcim, -i, the uncle; S)Er Deflretdjct, -8, the Austrian; ■Der 9)dIc, -n, the Pole; S)er 3iuffe, -n, the Russian; S)er ©oibat, -en, the soldier; •Der Stiivte, -n, the Tmk; S)er Ungar, -n, the Hungarian; Unfti^er, insecure; KntetbrUcEett, to oppress. Exercise 40. Slufgaic 40. 1. 'Ln SJJatrofe fii'^rt cin un|i(^ere3 unb anjlrengentics ScBett. 2. ©as SeBen eineS 5Btatrofen ijl anjhcngcnii imb unfi^er. 3. "Dei 9Jep bcs often ©otbntcn ^at eincn Sricf »on fcinetn D'^cime. 4. £:er otte ©otJat fc^reitt fetncm yit\\in, bent jungen ©olbaten, cinen Srtef. 5. '£)tx ^nabt loM nic^t ben ©otbaten, fonbcm ben Sfltatro* fen. 6. 3fl ber ^bntg son ©rie^enlanb cin Dcutf(^er? T. 3^ ber Deutfi^e ber f5reunb beg Softeners ? 8. 3|1 ber gronjofe ber greunb iei ©eutfc^en? 9. SOBarum ^aft ber Surfe ben SRujfen? 10. "Der Sluffe unterbriidt ben ZMm unb ben 9)oIcn. 11. SBarunt unterbviidt ber Deftreic^er ben 3talicner, ben Ungarn unb Jen ^O' ten? 12. SBen nnterbrudt ber Slmerifaner? 13. 3Cen nntcrbrM ber (SnglSnber? 14. 2Cer ^^t ben (Sngtanber unb ben 2lmeritaner? 15. §aft ber Sftuffe ben Sngtiinber, ben granjofen, ben Ungarn, ben 9)oIcn unb ben ^iirfen ? Exercise 41. 3lttfga6e 41. 1. Why is the Pole the enemy of the Austrian? 2. Is the ETungarian the friend of the Pole, or is he his enemy ? 3. The Pole is the friend of the Hungarian, and the enemy of the Aus trian and of theEussian. 4. Is the king of Greece a Bavarian ? 5 Is the soldier the nephew of the sailor ? 6. No, the sailor is the nephew of the soldier. 7. Does the Englishman hate the American ? 8. The Englishman does not hate the Ameri- can. 9. Who oppresses the Italian, the Hungarian and the 70 LESSON xxni. Pole ? 10. Is this old sailor a Russian, a Turk, an Italian, or a Frenchman? 11. That old soldier is the uncle of this boy. 12. Who leads a toilsome and insecure life ? 13. Is this German a soldier, or a sailor 1 is this sailor a Geraian or a Russian 1 14. The boy is writing his uncle, the old soldier, a letter. 15. The Hungarian is the neighbor of the Ausn-ian, of the Pole, of the Russian and of the Turk. LESSON XXIII. Ccction XXffl. FEMrsriNE GENDER. 1. DECLENSION OF S) i C , 'Lit\t AND 2JlCttte. Feminine. N tic, the; tief-e, this; niein-c, my; G. ber, of the ; tief-er, of this ; mcin-cr, of my ; D. icr, to or for the; tief-cr, to or for this; mein-er, toorfor my; A. tie, the; tief-e, this; tnein-e, my. The article, definite and indefinite, as also, the adjective pro- nouns (which in the other genders have different endings, and are differently declined), here all end in c, and are inflectei alike; namely, bicf-c, tie, all-c, etntj-e, ctlic^-e, jcb-e, manc^-e, foli^c, tuel^-r ; as also, mein-e, ein-e, tein-e, euer-e, t^t-c, feln-e, unfcr-e, tcin-e, (cons pare L. X. 4. and L. XII. 4). DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES IN THE FEMININE GENDER. 2. Feminine adjectives, unless they follow bie, einc, or soip« word of the above list, and refer to the same noun, are of lh» OLD DECLENSION. N 8wt-fi good; (ttcf-e, mfin-e, :in-c. ) G. gut-er, of good; (tief-er, mcln-cr, ein-er.) D. gut-cr, to or for good ; (rlcf-er, mctn-er, eiit-cr.) A. gut-e, good; (bief-c, mein-r, ein-e. ) DECLENSION OF FEMININE NOUNS. 71 3. Feminine adjectives, when they follow btefe, ijtc, mand}e, mclne, or any word of that list, and refer to the same noun, are of the NEW DECLENSION. N. lit gute, the good ; G. tcr gutcn, of the good ; D. tcr gutcn, to, for the good; A. Mc gute, the good ; meine gute, my good ; melner guten, of my good , meiner guten, to, for my g.xjd ; meine gute, my good. Ob3. As bttf-e, tnetlt-c, etc. {feminine), equally denote the gender of the noxin, the mixed declension, in the feminine, is nnt required; hence we have here but two declensions of the adjective, the old and the new. DECLENSION OF FEMININE NOUNS. 4. Feminine nouns, except proper names, are, in the singular, indeclinable : * 3c^ ^tt6e bit Sfcber meiner SKutter. Sr i|l ber ©D|n bicfer alten Same. SJoKfommeneS Oliiil ifj nic^t ber SKenfiJj^eit Cooa.— Sffi. ©c^itxJrmerei i|i fttanf|eit bei ©ecle. — SS. I have the pen of my mother. He is the son of that old lady. Perfect (prosperity) happiness ia not the lot of mankind. Fanaticism is sickness (disease) of the souL 5. Appellations of females are formed from those of males by means of the suffix in {or inn) : ber ©i^neiber, the tailor; bte ©^neiberin, the tailoress; bei greunb, the friend ; bte greunbin, the (female) friend; ber Snglcinber, the Englishman; bic Snjlcinbertn, the English-woman ber ©(^iiter, the scholar; bie ©cl)itlcrin, the female scholar; ber ®ema'|I, the consort (husband); bie Ocma'^Un, the consort (wife); bit SoWC, the lion; bte SSluin, the lioness. 6. Appellations of women, formed from titles of men, n;ay * It may be observed, however, that in poetry and certain pli rases the endings of the new declension (in which the feminine noun was formerly declined) are still sometimes found in the genitive and dative ; ®S iti feinet grouen ©(|»c|let. It is his wife's sister. 6iJ tjl belTct arm mtt ®|ren, benn It is better (to be) poor with honor, rei^ mit ©^aitben. than rich with disgrace. li xxm. signify either the wife of an oflScer, or a female who holds an office herself: tcr 9)ra|tbmt', the president; bte 9)rd|tbenttn, the female presi- dent, or the president's wife. 7. The vowels a, o, U, usually take the Umlaut ; i. e. are changed to ii, o, ii, before the suffix in: iet ©i^waget, the brother-in-law ; bte ©c^tuagettn, the sister-in-law ; 5« Svij, the cook ; bie Sijt^itii the (female) cook. Scifpicle. 3i^ '^aie bte neue geber meinet 3Jfuttct. 2)tt ftc^ll bet aRuttet Slug' in X^ta- ncit. — ©. Stnbcn ©te btefe ©ijra^e fi^tnet ? £)ie Steunbttt unferer ©i^ttejlcr tfl un» fere fie^reritt. S^re fletne Soujtne i|l cine au^ett' fame ©^iiterin. Examples. I have the new pen of my mothec Thon seest the mother's eye in tears. Do yon find this language hardl The friend of our sister is oar teacher. Your Uttle eousin is an attentive scholar. VOCABULAKT TO THE EXERCISES. ®ie Slptlfo'fe> ~i the apricot (see 4.) ; Sie Slumc, -, the flower; ®ic ©utter, -, the butter; Eie SJame, -, the lady ; S)ie Snglanbettn, -, the Englishwo- man; S)ie gebet, -, the pen; 5)te fictte, -, the chain; Sie Sixdjt, -, the church; 2)ie Sirf(^e, -, the cherry; Ste 5DteIo'ner -» the melon; SteSWtliJ^,-, the milk; Ste SKutter, -, the mother; Sie Slelfe,-, the pink; 2)er ©c^tuager, -i, the brother-in- law; 2)te ©(^Wefler, -, the sister; SieJinte, -, the ink; S>te Xoi^ter, -, the daughter; 2)te U^t, -, the watch. Exercise 42. Slufgabe 42. 1. ^aUn (Bit fc^warjc Sintc, ober Blauc? 2. 3d^ ^ali bUut, nrii ntetne ©cbwe^cr :§at f^warje. 3. fficr t^at meinc neue gcbcr mi meinc gutc Sinte ? 4. 3|rc junge greunMn ^at 3^rc neue geter, afcer irfi t»ei§ nic^t, tuo tic 3;inte ffl. 5. SBeflten neue gcier ^at riefc (gt^iilertn ? 6. S;ic (Ec^iiferin :^at !eine neue geier, fon* tern cine alte. 7. fBarum |'(|rei6en ®lc mit 6Iauer 3;tntc ? 8. 3c^ fdjrciBc ni(^t mit Btaucr Sinte; Idi fi^reiBe mit mciner f^marjcn DECLENSION OF FEMININE NOUNS. 13 Sintc. 9. aSer lauft bie 5KiIc^, bie SButter, We SKelone, Me «lrfd)e unb blc Slpvilofe ? 10. Die Jtijdjin laitft bie 9«it^, bie Sutter ttub bic Wtdont, unb bie alte 5Dame louft bie 2l))vifofe. 11. Die 3lofc ifl erne fc^one SSIume. 12. SCer fi^ictt ber Soc^ter Jener alien ©ome cine aiofe ? 13. SBaS fiir eine 3tofe fc^icEt bie ©i^iilerin ber Se:§res tin, eine toeife ober cine rot^e ? 14. SBem fi^icEt bie 2e:brerin bie toei^e aiofe? 15. SSai fiir cine Slume ift bie 5»cl!ef 16. Der ©(^mager unb bie ©(^tragerin biefer Sngliinberin ftnb in jener alttn ^ird^e. 11. §ot ntcinc junge greunbtn meinc U^r unb weiue ^ctte? 18. S^re greunbin f^at bie U^r, aUv nii^t bie ^ette. 19. Unfere SKuttcr ijl unfere Se^rerin Exercise 43. SlttfgaSe 43. 1. Are you writing with my new pen 1 2. No, I am writing with the new pen of my sister. 3. Has the sister-in-law of yom- friend a new watch ? 4. Whose watch and chain has your mother ? 5. My mother has my watch, and my sister has my chain and my pen. 6. The sister of your teacher is our teacher. 7. In which church is the daughter of our old friend 1 8. What kind of a flower have you, a rose, or a pink ? 9. I have a beau- tiful pink, and my sister has a rose. 10. This milk is good, but the butter is not good. 11. Have you a ripe melon and a ripe apricot 1 12. 1 have a ripe apricot and a ripe cherry, but 1 have no ripe melon. 13. What kind of ink has your sister, black or blue 1 14. With what kind of a pen, and what Idnd of ink is your mother writing ? 15. Has your friend a white rose, or a red one? 16. Is the pink a beautiful flower^ If, Is not every flower beautiful? 18. You have my watch, you? chain, the pen of our teacher and the ink of the scholar. 19. Is your mother your teacher ? 20. No, the daughter of that old lady is our teacher. 74 LESSON xxrv. LESSON XXIV. Cection XXIV. FORMATION AND GENDER OF DIMINtFTIVBS. 1. The syllaMes c^en and lein,* suffixed to nouns, give rise to a large class of words, called diminutives. These din.iau- tives are always of the neuter gender, and their radical vowelj if capable of it, takes the Umlaut : S/ttS Samm the lamb; bai Sammc^en, the lambMn (little lamb) S)er ©o^R, the son ; ba« ©o^n^en, the (dear) little son ; 3)et Slug, the river; ba8 glug^en, the rivulet (little riTer); Set iJiigel, the hill ; baa liugel^en, the hillock (little hiU) ; S)te Slume, the flower; bai Slum^en, (or SBlumletn) the floweret. 2. The diminutives are also used as terms of endearment, or to indicate familiarity ; and are often employed where in English no idea of diminutiveness would be expressed : " 2)enn SBrUbcrc^en unb ©^iBefictd^en For brother dear and sister dear tie fommen oft ju mtr." (they) often come to me. 2)aa SSogelc^en (or SSogleitt) fingt eiit The little bird siugs a gladsome fte^ci Ciebc^en. (little) song. 3. The words Si^liuTein and SJJdtdlcn though regularly formed, as diminutives, have lost their strictly diminutive signification. SrSuletn signifies a young (unmarried) lady ; and also serves as a title of address : answering to Miss. iKabd^en is rendered by ffirl, or maiden ; 5Kagb, from which it is derived, being now- employed chiefly in the signification of servant : grMetit Vt. t|i eine greunbin bicfea Miss If. is a &ieud of this girl. Wlab^mi. Soiittib bai SRcib^en 9l6f(|teb najm, As soon as the maiden took leav^ «. f. tt). — ©. etc. JDierea SWabt^en fiiielt mit feincm Sra- This girl is playing with her little ber^eji. brother. o Other forms, chiefly provincial or vulgar, and confined mostly to conversation, which sometimes perplex the learner, are el, 11, eleven; aa «lR»eI,«for3Rabc&en; " aSii^elc&en,'' forSBuc^Ietn; ''3Jep,''forSRcpIeini ete. FORMATION OF COMPOUND NOUNS. 15 FOEMATEON OF COMPOUND NOUNS. N0UN3 ■WITH NOUNS. 4 In German two or more nouns are often united in one word, -where the English equivalents are joined by a hyj hen, or several separate words are used : 3ugtMcr, draught-animal, (Sug/ draught; Z^tx, beast) Oajlt^icvi beast of burden J (Caji, burden; Kilter, beast) St^abenfieubc, malicious pleasure; (Si^obe, injury; greube, joy.) 95ref frci^eit, freedom of the press; (grei^cit, freedom; 35rc|Tt, presa) SRu^miegierbe; ambition, thirst of fame; (Siu^m, fame; Segierbe, desire.) DrbnungSlteSe, love of order ; (Drbnung, order ; fiie6e, love.) ©i^u^mac^er, shoemaker ; {©^u^/ shoe ; SOJac^er, maker.) ^lanbweri, avocation; trade; ($anb, hand; SSSetti work.) ©c^u^ma(^er^anbB)ert, shoemaker's trade or calling. 5. The first noun is sometimes put in the plural : flleibetfi^tanf, clothes-press; (^Ictbet, clothes; S^ranf, case, press.) iBfic^erf(|rattt, book-case; (Silver, books.) SaSorteriuc^, dictionary; (SBottet, words; S5uc|, book.) NOUNS WITH PREPOSITIONS, PRONOUNS, VERBS, ETC. 6. Compound nouns are also formed by uniting several parts of speech : egress; (ttu8, out of; SBcg, way.) gitrwort, pronoun; (gut, for ; SEBott, word.) SRitfi^iilct, fellow-scholar; (mttf with; ©i^ulcr, scholar.) ©c^veiblMUJtet, writing-paper; (f($tetfien, to write; 9)a))iet, paper) flttufmann, merchant; (laufen, to buy; 3)tantt, man.) ©tiitcnfrieb, agitator; (jliircn, to disturb; gtiebe, peace.) ©Ijringinaftib, romp; fly-about; (frtingen, spring; in, into; gelb, field.) XanitmiftS, good-for-nothing; (tttltgcn, to be fit for; ni^t?, nothing.) aJcrgifmeitt' the forget-me-not; (DetgefTEtt, to forget; mctn (L. 28. 2.); nii^tr and ntc§t, not) NOUNS WITH ADJECTlVJfiS. 7. Nouns are sometimes formed by uniting adjectives (unde- clined) with nouns ; in BauexfUt, the sheep's sorrel; (fauer, sour; ^tee, clover.) ber Itninunjiai, the crosier; (ttHmm, crooked; ©ta6, stafiO baS SBtiProbf the white bread ; (weij, white; Srob, breaJJ V6 LESSON xxrv. COMPOUND ADJEOnVES. 8. Compound adjectives are formed by uniting two adjeo tives, or a noun and an adjective : ©unfelgriin dark green; (bunlel, dark; griiit, green.) 5Raf)enf4»aij»black asararen; (0ia6e, raven; f^ttorj, black.) Seben«fatt, tired of life; (Seben, Ufe; fatt, satiated.) liSajfenfa^ig, capable of bearing arms; (aSaffen, arms; fd^ig, capable.) B$unbtrfc^6n, extremely beantiful; (SEBunber, miracl^ fi^on, beautifuL 9. Nouns, instead of being wntten as one word, are some- times separated by a hyphen ; ©0 flati ttla ®oiXti ®ttnt>ert*$ag As strong as God's hatred of sin, is Sjl feine ©unber*8teie, — §. his love for sinners. 10. The latter member of a compound may refer to words preceding those with which it is united ; the first word beuig followed by a hyphen : Dcr ©rtefel* unb ©d^i^mac^et. The boot and shoemaker. Iiojl* u«i plfijiebiirftig. Weeding consolation and help. GENDER OF COMPOUND NOUNS. 11. The first word of the compound takes the accent, while the latter usually determines the gender : (Eiit Slumengarten, A flower^arden. Sine (Sattenilume, A garden-flower. 12. Proper names of places, formed by suflSxing the mascu line noun 33erg, or the feminine Surg, to other words, are, like aU proper names of places, neuter ; S)aS flflrl tefejiigte SKagbeiurg. The strongly-fortified Magdebnig. 13. The word Wtvit^ is masculine; the words 23cmut1, ©rof* mut:^, Sangmut^, ©anftmut:^, ©^mermut^ are feminine. a;^eil is masculine; ©egent^eit, ^intcrt^cil and SSorbert^cit are neuter, ©^eu is femmine; Slbfc^cu is masculine. Scifplele. Examples. DiefcS Heine fSRaiijtn^ai einen ritSct- This little girl baa a silver thimbl* ncn gtnger^ut. FORMATION OP COMPOUND NOUNS. 11 SBm i|l icneS griSulcin ? ®a i|l 5?rdulctn 5». Die Oert^taiilbung tfi bet ©tjtegel ber Seele. Bet Suc^itniK »at metn 3Ritfc^uIet. ©tau6 foltjl bu effen beta SeJenltmg, (Gen. iii 14.) 35et Suc^'^cinbter settauft gutcg ®^tei6' unb Stiefpttfjiet. SKttrt nennt biefe Slume baa SJctgtp- mcinntc^t. Etttgtlat unb fijiegetrein unb eien glie^t baa iert9vlfii^t« Seben. — S. Who is that young lady ! It is Miss N. The expression of the countenance is the mirror of the soul. The bookbinder was my fellow- scholar. Bust shalt thou eat all une days of thy life. The book-dealer (seller) sells good writing and letter-paper. This flower is called the forget-me- not. Ever clear and pure as a mirrot flows life light as zephyr (literallf zephyr-light life) VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. Set, by, with; !Det Setg, -ea, the mountain; ®et S8u(^Mnbet, -8, the bookbinder; S)aa Selb, -e8, the field; Stoiuletn, (see 3.) Saa 55ititt)Ott, -ca, the pronoun; ^ai 3a'^r, -ea, the year; S)te Safteajeit, -, the season of the year; ®et Simiijt -ea, the crane; ®aa Safit^iet, -ea, the beast of bur- den; 35ie Cet^e, -, the lark; 3Kttb(^en, (see 3.) S)ie 9?a^t,-, the night; 2)ie 9Jac^ttgat[, -r the nightingale; 2)aa !D6f}, -ea, the fruit; SJet Dbjlgattcn, -a, the orchard; 23et SRaubSogcl, -it the bird of prey; 2)ie ©(I)itbwa^e, -, the sentinel ; Set ©ommet, -a, the summer; Set ©uni))f, -ea, the swamp; £)et ©untpfsogel, -a, the wader, mo- rase-bird; Set Jag, -ea, the day; ®ie 3eit, -, the time; Saa Sugt^iet, -ea, the draaght-ani- maL Exercise 44. SlufgaSe 44. 1. SBa0 fiir ^apkx fauftn ®ie, ©c^rciBtjapiw oitr SBrtefpaptct ? 2. ^abm the desk; bie ^vXtt, the desks. Masculine. 6. Masculine nouns ending in the nominative singular in e d, en er, have the same form in the nominative plural : Der ©attler, the saddler; bie ©attler, the saddlers; S)er J^offer, the trunk; bie fiofet, the trunks; Set SBrunnen, the well; bie SBnmnen, the wells. 1. Masculine nouns not ending in the nominative singular in e, et, en, er, form the nominative plural by adding e, and tak- ing the Umlaut, if capable of it: ®er ^amm, the comb; bie Stantc, the combs ; Set ©trom, the stream; bie ©troitie, the streams; ®et |)ul, thehat; bie ©iite, the hats; 2)et Saum, the tree; tie Saume, the trees. Feminine. 8. Feminine nouns ending in the nominative singular in IuU|t and nip, as also those in list page 276, form the plural by add- ing e and taking the Umlaut, if capable of it : ©ie SBitbnip, the waderness; bie SSSilbmlfc, the wildernesses; Sie |>ttnb, the hand; bie §anbe, the hands; Sie giuc^t, the fruit; bie grU(^te, the fruits. Note. — ^Most feminine nouns belong to the new declension (L. XXX. 3). DECLENSION OF NOUNS IN THE PLUEAL. 9. Nouns whose nominative plural ends in en, have all cases "n this number alike ; those of other terminations have the genitive and accusative like the nominative, and add n in the dative : N. Me "Degcn; Me ^JoBel; tic ©tii'^Ie; tic ^iinbe; G. ter !Degen; tcr §oW; ter ©tii'^Ie; ber $anbe; D. ben Degen ; ten^oBeln; benStiipn; ben^anben: A. bie Xeg^n; bie ^^M-, bie ©tiitjie; bie §anbe. 4* 82 LESSON XXT. 10. $a,Bett Sctn and the kbgulak verb Soien in thi FLnBAL. Present Tense. Bit Ioi~en; ■we praise; t^r Io6-t, you praise; (te to6-eni they praise. air ^aien, we have; wlr ftni)i we are; ijr ^a6t, you have; i^r feifai you are; |te 5o6en, they have; |ie (tnb, they are; Thus regular verbs form the first and third persons in tha present plural, by adding to the root en, and to the second pen' son t (or ct. See L. V, 1.) SSeifpiele. Die Sif^Iet ^aJen gute iJoJet. Examples. The cabinet-makers have good planes. S)ie 3Jle|rer ber Siic^e ftnb f^atf. The knives of the cooks are sharp. SBet veifauft' beir^ijc^en bie ©anfe Who sells the cooks the geese and unb bte SEBuifie? thesanst^es? S)ie genflcr in btn Siwwent bet ©c^fl* The windows in the rooms of the let ftnb ;u flein* scholars are too small. VOCABULAKT TO THE EXERCISES. t>\t Strt, -, pL Sterte, the ax ; Sa« SBeifl/ -ti, -i, pL -c, the leg; ©ei Sefen, -i, pi. -, the broom; tin S)ic6f -til pi- -e, the thief; Set (Einiso^net, -i, pi. -, the inhab- itant ; 35et (Efel, -i, pi. -, the ass, donkey Set ginget, -i, pi. -, the finger; 35ct guj, -£«, pL Suge, the foot; 33ie lianb, -, pL |)dnbe, the hand; Bet 4>«lS^a«. The various naHons of Europe. IRREGULAR ILTTRAL OF NOUWa. 85 *!. Several masculine nouns form an exception to Rule 6, Lesson XXV., in that they take the Umlaut ; as plural, Slepfel, instead of Slpfct; ^antmel, instead of Jjammet, For entire lis! see § 13. 4. Exceptions. 8. The feminine nouns 5!Jluttcr and Zo^tex form their plural by takitg the Umlaut : ©ttte Wtiittt unterri^ten i^te Z-'iS^ttt, Good mothera instruct their daugh ters. 9. The masculine nouns 3(al, 2lrm, etc. § 13. 6. Exceptions, 6. omit the Umlaut ; thus forming an exception to Rule 1, Lesson XXV. 10. In German the singular is employed to denote some ob- jects, which require in English the plural form (§ 15) : 5Dte ©^cere ijl rtjltg, ik Sti^Hiu^e i(i The shears are rusty, the snuffers tittnl. are bright 6r faufte eine Siille unb eine Banst. He bonght a pair of spectacles and a pair of tongs. 3§ '^ait ir»tl l.-e, the evening; SBauen, to l uild; 5)a« a3latt,-t«,pLSlottet,theleaf;2; S)a« 1>tii),-ei, pi. Sadler the root 2; 3)et Soli, -ti, pL -e, tte dagger 9; £)er ©Eifl, -e«, pL -ci, the spirit, 3; t)ai Qixaii-ti, pi. ©rdbtr, grave, 2 ; ®raicn, to dig; S>er |>afen, -i, pL §afen, harbor, 7 ; S)aa frnrn, -c#> pi. |>6rner, horn, 2 ; ^U^I, cool, cold; Str fieib, -ti, pL -ai S^mert, -c#, pi. -er, sword, 2; Sie ©tabt, -, pL ©tabic, the city; ©teil, steep; ©terblii^, mortal; Sief, deep; Unjierbti^r immortal, S}ei SBoiter, -4, pL -, the waiter; Ser 3tinMtnnnim, -t8, pL -teutti the carpenter, 6. Exercise 48. SlttfgaBe 48. 1. S!te Tiadsev tiefcr ^aufcr fini jlctl. 2. Sic SSBgel Baucn Stcfler in ten SDalJcrn. 3. fitefe Sliittcr (tnb noc^ griin ; jene |tni fc^on gelB. 4. ^lid^t alte ©iibcl jtnb f4arf. 5. 25a3 uerfer* tigen tiefc ©^lojfer ? 6. 3ene SDlanner^aten langc ©4»crter unb fc^mere Xolc^e. 7. Dicfe ^unbe ftnS aijt Ttonatt alt. 8. SBarunt graBt man tiefc Sb^er? 9. "Unfere Siiter ru^en fi^on in fit^Ien ©rabcrn." 10. Xte ©riiten urn liefe ©tatt [inS fe^r tief. 11. Unfere 2ciber ftnr jler6It(^ ; unfere ®ei[ler unjlerbiti^. 12. £ic ©artcn uni geltcr fint jc^t fc|r f4bn. 13. ^ie ©c^ijfe liegen in ten $afcn. 14. Siicfe Slbenie jlnb fe^t angcnc^m. 15. ©ingen biefe jlinter fcbbne £icter ? 16. fSarum jle^en ©ie urn fie Defen? 17. ©pielen He tinier in ben ©arten? 18. 3n luclc^c ©arten ge^en biefe SJtonner ? Exercise 49. SlufgaBe 49. 1. The water in the harbors is deep. 2. Which men Lava swords and daggers ? 3. These houses have very steep roofe. 4. Those men are digging holes and ditches. 5. The graves of our fathers are already green, 6. The leaves of tliis tree are white. 7. The nests of the birds are in the forests. 8. The evenings are now very long. 9. The sheep are standing around DECLENSION OF THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 87 the house; where are the dogs? 10. Are not our spirits im- mortal? 11. The locksmiths have hammers and anvils. 12. Are those men building houses ? 13. These are building houses, and those are building ships. 14. These anvils are not heavy enough. 15. Our bodies are not immortal. 16. What men have strong arms ? It. Those merchants and these carpenters are my countrymen. 18. Eagles are birds of prey, and wolves are beasts of prey. LESSON XXVII. £ettion XXVH. 1. DECLENSION OF THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. N. tc^, I; btt, thou; (®ie, you;) G. tnciner, of me; beiner, of thee; (3^rcr, of you;) D. mtr, to, for me; Mr, to, for thee ; (3^nen, to, for you ;) A. inic^, me; M(i, thee; (®ie, you.) N. tutr, we; %, you; (@ie, you;) G. unfer, of us ; cuer, ofyou; (S^rer, of you;) D. una, to or for us ; cud, to or for you ; (3^iTeit, to, for you ;) A. uni, us; cu^, you; (®ic, you.) Masculine, Femimne, Neuter. N. cr, he; fie, she; c3, it; G. fciner, of him ; t^rer, of her"; fcittcr, ofit; D. i^m, to, forhim; i|r, toorforher; U)m, to or fcr it; A. tin, him; ^\t, her; eS, it. FLUBAI. OF AU GEKSEES.' N.flt, they; G. i^rer, ofthem; D. i^nen, to or for them ; A. fie, them. — — 88 1E8S0N xxvn. SECOND PERSON SINGULAR. 2. The pronoun of the second person singular is employed, as in English, in addressing the Supreme Being ; in proTerbial phrases, and in serious and sublime styles of composition. It is likewise used in addressing relatives, intimate friends and children ; as, also, servants and other dependents : S)eiii fRdi) fomme. Thy kingdom come. Ztaue feinem gteunbe, wenn bu i^n Trust no friend if thou hast n-ii nic^t seyiuft' :jail.— §. tested him. ei|l autgt bu fcien, Krst thou must sow, t>am lannjl bu tna^m. Then thou canst mow. fBai ^ttjl b« ge^ii"' ? '^^^^ ^^"^ y°" ^^^^^ ' So^ttnn, bein Secret IcSt bt^ nic^t. J"!^". yo"r teacher does not praisa you. SECOND PERSON PLURAL. 3. The second person plural * denotes, mainly, in this num- ber, the same class as that to which bu is applied in the singu- lar. It is employed in addressing religious assemblies : SBann Icrnet ijr euete SECtionen? When do you learn your lessons t flinber, euet Stirrer Io6t euc^ nic^t. Children, your teacher does not praise you. Obs. — Formerly (as at present in French and English), the prevailing form, as being the more polite and respectful, was that of the second, instead of the third person plural, and in some portions of Germany, among the peasantry, its use is still retained. Usually, however, when addressed to a single individual, it implies his inferiority of position : 33aS glaubt ijr tttrtti^ ? fagtt bet Do you really believe that ? said flijntg. the king. THIRD PERSON SINGULAR. 4. The pronouns of the third person singular are sometimes used as the second, and indicate the . inferior position of the person addressed : (Bx ifi tin gluifH^er SSJcnfc^. You are (he is) a happy man. *> This form is still retained in the syllable Sw. (contraction of Ewer, an obsolete orthography of euei), which is now used only with titles, and is followed by a plural verb : (EtB. (eure) ^ajejlat jtnb »i'l Wijiget Your majesty is (are) much more al^ tc^. wittr than L BECLENSION- OF PKRSONAL PRONOUNS. 89 THIED PERSON PLURAL, 5. In ordi. ary address, the form of the third person plural oi the pronoun is applied, as well to one, as to more individuals ; hence, when spoken, the person and number intended must he inferred from the context, or the manner of the speaker. In writing, however, ®te and 3^1^, except at the beginning of a sentence, are made to designate the second person by means of capital initials (§ 57). Do you praise me ? No, I do not praise yim. Do yow praise your friends! No, I do not praise them. SoScn Sie atic^ ? 9Jein, tc^ loie Sie nl^t. Scien ©ie 3^te Stcunbe? Slcin, ti^ UH jle nic^t. 4)ttim ®ie 3^tc Sitc|er? ^Jttfcen bie S^iiler i^re Suc^cil Die ®c^ulettn ^at t:^te Suiter, 2)ie Sinbet ^aien i^re SB«(|er, Have you yawr books ? Have the scholars their books i The scholar has her books. The children have their books. Sclfpicle. ©tngjl Su? (fingen ©ie? jtngt i'^t?) ©e^en ©ie btefe Saume ? 3a, »ir fe^eit (te, ©e^en ©ie v.ni ? Sfl; »ii fe^en ©ie. ©e:^en ©ie jene Sngtonbetin? 3Jcin, xoxx fe'^ett jle ni^t. ©ic-^t lie Sui^ ? Sletn, jte jle^t mi nl(|t. Examples. Do you sing ? Do you see these trees ! Yes, we see them. Do you see us ? Tes, Tve see you. Do you see that Englishwoman! No, we do not see her. Does she see you ! No, she does not see us. VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. Die ©ttnt, -, pi. SBanfe, the bench; Sein, thy, your; ®ucr, your ; J)ei gather, -i, pL -, the fan; gerttg, ready, prepared ; 2)er ginget^ut, -ti, pL -pte, the thimble; greunbtlc^, kind, friendly; ®ie ®an«, -, pL Oanfe, the goose; S)er ®crt>er, -i, pi. -» the tanner ; JDer 4ianbf4)uJ, -e«,pL-e,theglove; $oc&, high; 3?r, her, their; 35{e fluj, -, pL ^itfie, the cow; £a(|eln, to smile; 35er Seudjtet, -it pi. -, the candle^ stick ; Slag, wet; S)a« SRegtmcnt', -e«, dL -et, the re^ iment; ©c^Ie^t, bad; 23cr ©^leter, -i, pL -, the vail- 2)cr SBeg, -tit pL -«, the way. 90 LEssoir xxvn. Exercise 60. Slufgate 50. 1 . §a^ ttt beinc Jpanbfiu^e ? 2. ^Wcin, tncin Srutcr ^t jle. 3. S55o |inS) Seine grcutiDe ? 4. ©te jtnt in i^ren Siwnicrn. 5. ©inl) 3^rc ©tii^le in ^f^vtm Simmer ? 6. 3*, |te ftni) in meinent Simmer, T. ^abt i^r eure ginger^iitc ? 8. 9lcin, eure greuntte ^a6en fte. 9. ®urc greunte loicn euc^. 10. ©ei6 i|r rcic^ ? 11. SJcr lo6t ben ©filler ? 12. SBarum liic^clt feinc SJIuttcr unb laifcen i^re Winter? 13. fflBer tobt tic ©(^iilerin? 14. S5ic Se^rcrin iji freuntlic^ gegen baS ^inb. 15. SScr Io6"t bic ^inber ? 16. 3:^re greunte loben fie. It. ®er Slrjt Mt ©ie. 18. 3Qai fc^idt tie Se^rerin il^rer 9Jiuttcr? 19. ©ie f(^i(ft t^^r cincn ©c^Ieier unb einen giidier. 20. 3&ai scrfpre^cn ©ic mir ? 21. 3(^ Berfprc^c 3^ncn ni^ti. 22. 2CaS Derfpred^cn ©ie ^^xm ©c^iilem ? 23. 3<^ »fr* fprec^e i|ncn ni(^t«. 24. SDSaS fd^iden ©Ic bem ®erkr ? 25. 3ii^ fc^ide i^tn jaS ®elr>. 26. iffier fauft bie ®anfc unb bie ^ii|e ? 21. tit ®erkr taufcn fte. 28. ©inb bie SBege troden unb gut? 29. 9lein, fte finb na^ unb f^Iec^t. 30. ©inb bie SSiinle fc^on fer* tig? 31. 2Bem ge^^orcn biefe Eeud^ter? 32. ©tngen bie Soc^ter 3^rer Stoc^tarin? 33. ^ommtS^r greunb ms bcin 3iegimcnte ? Exercise 51 SlufgaBe 51. 1. Have you my gloves 'I 2. No, your friends have them. 3. Do you see your mother 1 4. No, I do not see her. 5. Do your brothers knowwhere the. candlesticks'are? 6. Yes, they know where they are. 1. Has the scholar her books and her pencils'? 8. Yes, she has them in her desk. 9. Are your benches too high 1 10. Yes, they are too high. 11. What do you promise your scholars ? 12. I do not promise them any thing. 13. Do your brothers promise you any thing'? 14. Yes, they promise me something. 15. What does the scholar send her teacher? 16. She sends her a vail. 17. Are your fans too small? 18. No, they are too large. 19. Do the tan- ners buy the cows 1 20. No, the butchers buy them. 21. Are the scholars friendly toward the children ? 22. Yes, they are playing with them. 23. Have you the knives ? 24. Yes, 1 have then. 25. Are they on your table? 26. No, they are PERBOAAl, i-lvU^OUNS. 91 on my desk. 2T. Are your friends reading ? 28. No, they are writing. 29. What are they writing ? 30. They are writ- ing letters. 31. Are you writing your father a letter 1 32. Yes, I am writing him a letter. LESSON XXVIII. Cection XXVIIL PERSONAL PRONOUNS., The genitive of the personal pronouns does not (like tha« o! nouns, L, IX. 1) indicate possession, but simply answers tc our objective with (and sometimes without) a preposition : 64 finb unfet (jtet. There are four ofii$ (of us four). SSergtg' m e i n e r nic^t. Forget me not 5Daa i|l beinct uniBUtbig. That is unworthy o/' ut ijl fi^ijit, aJet e t t|l flein. The hat is fine, but it is smaU. Die aJiiJe iji fi^on, aitr fie i(l ftetit. The cap is fine, but it is small. S(^ ^it ben 4>ut nii^t, jic §ttt i ^ n. I have not the hat, she has it. ©ie $ttt fcie 3Ru|e ni^t, er ^at fie. She has not the cap, he has it. 6. In German a pronominal adverb (applied to things) an- swer to a preposition and a pronoun, as commonly employed in English : Sc6 ^ttie etnen Dfen, abet fein geuer I have a stove, but no fire in it b tt I i n [not in i^m) . (therein). Er fd^ncibet feinen Stpfel unb gibt mir He cuts his apple and gives me a ein StftdE ba»»n {not son i^m). part of it (thereof). 6:t 5at i^te geber unb f(^reiit bamit. He has her pen and writes leilh U (therewith), 7. The neuter pronoun, e3, employed as a grammatical sub- ject, may represent nouns of all genders, and in both numbers. The verb, however, must agree in number with the noun, whUe in English it agrees with the jtronoun : 5Berifle«? Who is it f e 3 i |1 ein grember. It is a stranger. ea finb unfere olten gteunbe wel^e It is (are) our old friends that we ttit fc^en. see. ©inb e a ©tentt ! Is it stars! (are they stars ?) 8. When the logical subject is itself a personal pronoun, ii follows the verb ; this being exactly the reverse of the English construction : 3c^iine«. It is L Erijiea, It is he. ©tnbSiee?? Isityouf ©eib ijr e8? Jjitjoul ©inb fie e8? /sitiAey/ 2B i r finb e 8. /i! is »«. 9. ® 8 before a verb followed by its subject, frequently an swers to there, but is often used for the sake of emphasis, wheie in our language a like construction is not admissible : ©9 i(l niemanb im (L. 20. i) §aufe. There is nobody in the house. 6* jtnb brei SBiic^er ia. There are three books there. 6 i jie^t ein jlillet (Engtl. TTiere moves a quiet angeL 6 i f)a\itt ber ® oimer fo laut (instead There resounds the thunder so loud ofitx Sennei pallet fo laut). (The thunder resounds so loud). (E« leuc^tet ble ©onne liter Sof unb The sun shines upon (the) bad and ®ute (bit ©onne leui^tct, tc). — ®. (the) good. PERSONAL PRONOLKS. 93 10. @ i sometimes refers to a previously expressed noun, or adjective, and may be rendered one or so; ti is likewise some- times so used as not to require translation : et tft ©c^mtcb, aBet i^ iin e « ni(|t. He is (a) smith, tut, I am not one. aSit fmb nii^t alle glcii^ unb fentien 1 8 We are not all alike and can not ni(|t fein.— ®. be so. S<^ weif e i3 bag et gcjt. I know (it) that he ia going. 11. When pronouns of several different persons are the sub- jects of a plural verb, the first person is preferred to the second, and the second to the third ; often, however, the plural of the pronoun is employed after others which are in the singular : S)u unfa faer Smit fa'^en ti. Ton and the boy saw it. S^ tteig nt^t was bu unfa ic^ fa:^en. I do not know what you and I saw. S)u \xri> ic^ h)tr fa^cn e«. Ton and I (we) saw It 12. For the sake of additional emphasis, a pronoun is some- times repeated, or placed after its noun in apposition with it : ©0 Dteler Sc^weben eblcS Stut, U The noble blood of so many Swedes i|l urn ®otfa unb ©it6er nii^t ge* (it) has not flowed for gold and Polfen. — ©. silver. Unb bic Slugcnfa [le ift fein leerer And virtue (it) is no empty sound. ©d)aa.— ©. 13. The genitive of the personal pronouns, when deferring to individuals, is often used before numerals (like the French en), in which position it seldom requires translation : (£t ^ttt brei Siiibet unfa t^ H a trois frSres, et moi He has three brothers, ^aie i^rer nut Sinen, je n'e» ai qu'un. andlhavecnly one. SScifpiete, Examples. e« t|l nic^t aUti ®olfa M)tt« gtanjt. Ifot all is gold that glitters (see 10). £f miberffl^rt' Kan^cw me^r S^re, There happens to many a one more ali er serfaient' honor than he deserves. SCir ^aben faeiner gcwar'tet (see 1). TVe have waited for thee. 3§ ilieb meiner ni^t me^r moic^ttg. I remained no longer master of myself, ©atuntet leibet fetne StgEntteic. His self-love sufifersbythis (thereby), ©r ifl tin SJeriranbtci son una. He is a relative of ours. (£« ftnfa unfer brei, unb ijrer fitnf. There are three of us, and five ot them. 94 LESSON XXVlll. 3c^ 5aJe ben Satt tii^t, ©te ^aSett t^n. I have not the ball, yon haTs il. <£r ^al metne Sebtt unb fci)rci6t bamtt. Hehasmy penandiswrltingwithit e« fc^EUCt ba« Wfe ®c»t|f en Sii^t unb The guilty conscience shun» lioht Sag. — ®. and day. SBcr tlopft? Se^ itn e8. Who is rapping? It is I. Sinb Sie ti ? 3a, ttir ftnb ti. Is it you 1 Yes, it is we. VOCABULAKT TO THE EXERCISES. It JBanminoIIe, -, pL -, the cotton ; -5it Srude, -, pi. -n, the bridge; Samit, with it; 3)arauf, on it; S)arin, in it; S>ott, yonder; 55er Srefc^er, -*, pL-, the thrasher; S)et gcirier, -8, pL -, the dyer; S)er glac^'g, -e«, pL -, the flax; £)er Itanf, -ed, pL -, the hemp; 35er fiaaim, -»«< pi. .'ttame. comb Sic Slobel, -, pL -n, the needle; Sloven, to sew; Ste ©eibe, -. pi -n, the silk; SaS ©eil, -ti, pL -e, the rope ; ® er ©etier, -«, pL -, the ropemaler ; Sie ©telle, -, pL -n, place, situation ®er SBeber, -8, pL -, the weaver ; ®ie SEBoIIe, -, pL -, the wool ; Set 36toet> -*» pL -» toll-gatherer. Exercise 52. - SlufgaBe 52. 1. ^auft ier ai SKiibc^en bic ©eibe? IT. 9lcin, jtc fauft fie nid^t. 18. ©e^en ©ic ben SiJCter bort ouf bcr Sriidc? 19. 9tein, ic^ fc^e i^n ni^t, fie:§t cr barauf ? 20. Dcr SBcBcr ijt flci^ig, oScr fein fjlac^bar, bcr garBer, ift ti ni^t. 21. ©pred^cn ©ic ntit bej ©c^ulem ? 22. 3^, i^ fprc^c mtt i^ncn. 23. ©c^reifccn ©ie ntit ten Sleifliften ? 24. 3a, i(^ fi^rcibc bamit. 25. §at 3^r Sruier cine angene^mc ©telle? Exercise 53. 3lufgaBe 53. 1. Who sells the cotton ? 2. The weaver buys it, but he does not sell it. 3. Have the children their ball ? 4. No, the girls have it. 5. You often play with the childre'i, and your REFLEXIVE USB OF PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 95 ■brother often teaches them. 6. I am not playing with them now, T am teaching them. "J. Are the scholars writing with our pencils ? 8. Yes, they are writing with them. 9. Who buys the wool ? 10. The weaver buys it. 11. Does he buy the hemp 1 12. No, the roperaaker buys it. 13. Does the dyer tuy the flax? 14. No, our friend, the merchant, bnys it fijr the weaver. 15. What is lying on tha table yonder ? 16, The needle and the silk are lying on it. 17. What have th« loll gatherers in their trunks? 18. They have their money and their clothes in them. 19. Are the girls sewing with the m»eJles ? 20. Yes, they are sewing with them. 21. Whom do you see on the bridge ? 22. I do not see any body on it. 23 Doea the sailor buy the rope ? 24. No, the merchant buys it 25. Has the thrasher the cotton ? LESSON XXIX. Cection XXIX. RBFLEXrVE USB OF PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 1. The personal pronouns of the first and second persons are often used reflexively ; answering to our compound persona] pronouns in the objective case : Sifloitmi^. 1 Tpr^iae myself. S)u lotjJ b i 1^, Thou praisest thyself. SJtJcit eitc^. You Tpraise yourselves. 3(^ gcben'te m e i n e r. I think of myself. S)u gebent'fl beiner. Thou thinkest of thyself. 3il) 'on^pxt^'t mit nt^ta, I do not promise myself any thing. fiSttiS »erf))re^t' ijr eu^? What do you promise yourselves f 2. There is in the third person a pronoun (f ic^) which is ased only reflexively. It is indeclinable, and occurs only in the dative and accusative ; answering to all our compound per- sonal pronouns of the third person : S)et 3Sann loit ft ^. The man praises himself. S)te Srau loit f i ^. The woman praises herself. t>ai fltilb Io5t f i c^ . The child praises itself. 96 LESSON XXE. 68 foimen fti^ ratr SBcirigt regte'teii, There can but few gover' tf-wi* beii SJtrjlanb' Detjloiit'bij geSrou'' «efoes,(can)usetheiwiuerstanding (j^en. — ©. nnderetandingly. ®r serftjric^t' fi(§ ettuaa. He promises himself BomeiMng. SRan f^mctc^elt fi^ op. One often flatters om«'» «i/'. 5)ie Sinber »etfpred^'enfi# etwaS. The chUdren promise thematlvea something. 3^ t):n!e bctti; tvenn fi^ iti SItonbeS Ithink of thee when the moon's glit- Slimmer in DueHen malt. — ®. ter paints itself m fonntains. 3. When our compound personal pronouns are used merely to give emphasis (and not reflexively) they should be rendered byfelBjl, or fclber, a/fer the word ■which it is intended to emphasize : (£t relo'^iUe ben Hejtling felijl. He rewarded the apprentice Aim- sdf. (E: rcI6|l Jelo'^nte ben fie^rltng. He Mmtdf rewarded the appren- tice. ©ie f e 1 6 [I Befui^'te bte firante. She herself yisited the patient ©ie gins j« ber firan!en fel J |l. She went to the patient herself. 4. ©cIBjl often follows the reflexive pronouns, and may be rendered own, or entirely omitted in translation ; ©ie Io6t ftc^ f elB |l. She praises her (oum) self SBir loiett un8 felBfL "We praise onr ^um) selyes. SBer fennt jic& felb jl?— ®. Who knows himself? (one's sel£) 5. © C 16 jl before a noun answers to the adverb even : © e I B |l fcine geirtbe tti^tcn i^n. Even his enemies esteem him. ©elb(l feine gteunbe Jtltcn tl^n fur Even his friends consider him (hold fi^ulbig. him for) gnilly. 6. The reflexive pronouns, of all persons, in the plural, are frequently employed, where the signification is sufficiently ob- vious, instead of the reciprocal pronoun einanber t fBirloicnunS. (instead of) 'We praiae us (i. e. each other). ffBir Io6en e i n a n' b e t. "We praise one another. Sot enter 5Kuttet Slug' serjlStt' eu d^. Before your mother's eye destroy — ©. each other. SBit werben una ttiebetfe^en.— ®. "We shall see each other again. Die S^tan'nen tei^en ft c^ bie $anbe. The tyrants extend to each other their hands (t. a. are forming a ae). REFLEXIVE VERBS. 97 7. © t (^ , after a preposition, is often besi rendered by a j> ,'sonal pronoun : ©rapt ©eelen fatten f I c^ an ben |>im' Great souls hold firmly to Heaven, mci fejl nnb laffen Me Etbe unter andlet the earth roll on beneath fl « fortvsllen. — 35. them (selves). ©te ^atte tttn ®elb 6ci ft c^. She had no money with her. tflt er (Vise U ft Jet f i c^ ? Has he his wateh with him ? 8. ^a interrogative sentences, the personal pronoun, in tie dative or accusative, is often placed between the verb and ita subject (when the subject is a noun) : Coieni^a fclne Stcttnbe? insteadof fioSen feine grtunbe i^tt ? SiJtta fagi i^ m ber Sel^re t ? " Stt« fagt bcr Secret i^m ? SBie Bepnvtt f 1 1^ S^r gtcunb ? " SfBie Scpn'bet S^r greunb fic^ ? REFLEXIVE VERBS. 9. The number of verbs that are used exclusively as reflex ive, is much larg«r in German than in English : ©t£ icge'Ben ftc^ in bie ^lixiji. They betate themselves to flight ®t ic'^itft' ft^ ttitt Sflgcn. He resorts to falsehoods. Set iifeinb iemac^'tigte ft^ ber ©tabt. The enemy took possession (possess- ed himself) of the city. Si icfinnt' fi(^ px Ittnge. He bethinks himself too long. Et icflreJt' rt^ e* 8« '?««• He tries (exerts himself) to do it SnJaium' etci'fErt \\x «tt(^ ? Why are you becoming angry S Wnen ? all my plans S Unterjle^fl' bu btc^ mtt baS ju fagen? Do you venture (presume so far as) to tell me that ? 10. Many verbs are used reflexively whose equivalents in English are employed intransitively or passively : Etc ©olb'tett fammetten (lc| um t^ren The soldiers assembled (themselve*) SSJrer. around their loader. 5 98 LESSON XXIX. ©a« SBetter "^ellt flii auf. The weather is elearJDg (itself) up SBtr l^ttlten una in SSerlin' auf. We stopped (ourselves) in Bftrfin. 3)ie Erie bre^t ftc§ on i^ter 3tc^fe. The earth turns (itself) on its axis. ®er $immel tebcift' |i^ mit fi|loatien The sky is being covered (covers SBtttcn. itself) with black clouds. ®«a SBolf emljoit' jt^ gegen bie SJe* The people rebel against the gov- gie'rung. 'ernment. St^ frmt mi(i^ bag er ge^t. I rejoice (myself) that he is going. iSte iaitn ft^ entfc^IofTen ja fomnten. They havedetermined (themselvss) ' to come. Kic Befin'ben ©ie ftc^? How do yon do ? (find yourself !) 3(% iefin'be mii^ fe^r Wo^I. I am (iind myself) very weU. di finbct ft4 «ft cine ©ele'gcn^ttt. An opportunity is often found. ®aS loigt ftc^ Ict(^t bcnfen. That is (may be) easily imagined. Seron'bert ft(^ nidjt^Vid inberSBclt? Does not every thing change (itself) — ®. in the world? Sin fil));i3 lafierSoUe^ Seien iiigt fid) A luxurious vicious life repents (it- in SKangel unb Srnte'brtgung aHein'. self) alone in want and degrada- , — ©, tion. X)er Sungttng t|l au« SEiKtit^r fonber' The youth is singular, by choice, iar nnb freut fii^ ; ber SRann ijl e3 and is delighted ; the man is so nnaijic|t'It(^ unb argert ft^. — fH. uuintentionally,and is mortified. 11. Some transitive verbs in taking the reflexive form, un- dergo a change of signification (§86 6) : Er fi^iitt jli^ in bie Umfioinbe. He adapts himself to eircumst'-' a^. E« fc^tcft fii^ nid^t fo ju ^anbeln. It is not proper to act thus. ®r ueijie^t' pc^ auf SDIufiP. He is a judge of music 3^ SErlaPfe mic^ auf fie. I depend upon them. Ea setjle^t' fi(^ bag ti wal^r i|i. Of course (i. e. evidently) it i • riia. Sag Sjerfle^t' ftc§ »on felSfi. That is a matter of course. Scifpielc. Examples. *2)ie §attb am©^Wtrtc,fd|ttuen ftc fi^ The hand on the sword, they gaze broSenb cm." threateningly at each other. eoratbcrftjrec^'cn bieDrttfelftc^. — ©. So do the oracles contradict eait other. »®8 seriet'gen fi(| noi^ SJicIeinblc Many still conceal the jr-ssl-res with- fen SRaucrn." in these walls. 3^ frtue mi^, bag ©te ntd^l ge^en. I am glad that you do not go. aJetflt^'en ©ie ^li) auf Xni) ? Are you a judge of cloth ? Sr 6roc6 in bie Sitteiflen SJorWiirfe ge* He broke out in (into) the bitterest jfn fic^ felber au4. — 31 — i. reproaches againsi hiouelf. REFLEXIVE VERBS. 99 VOCABTJLART TO THE EXERCISES. Die STi^re -. pL -n, the axis; Stf^ttn, to esteem ; Set, in, with; SBefi^ei'beit, modest; Settrt'gm, to behave; E)« S)iener, -i, pi. -, the servant; ©rc'^en, to turn; Einan'ber, each other; >'; Srbe, -, pi. -n, the earth; ettoil'tctf, to take cold; Sie StaUi -, pL -ett, the woman; ®itt, (adv.) well; ©tijlagen, to strike, to beat; 'BSjmnd^tlttr to flatter; ©ettfl, see 4. 5 ; ©id^, see 2; S^abetn, to blame; Ser aBunbttrjt, -e«, pL -dirite, ih« surgeon. Exercise 54. SufgaBc 54. 1. aOarutn loBji bu Mi^ ? ■ 2. 3^ Me tni(^ ttii^t. 3. SB^r loBt flc^ ? 4. Setter Slebttcr loBt fii^. 5. aBarutn tabelt i^x c«(^ ? 6. 9Btr taietit utts tttdfet. 7. Scne grau loBt (Ii^. 8. "Diefc ^itt* ber fd^Iagett ftc^. 9. SBaruttt fc^Iagctt fie fid) ? 10. Sette ©critter :^affeti cittattier. 11. 2Barutn fc^tneicfeeltt ®ie f'^? 12. 3(^ f^tnei^Ie ttttc^ tti(^t. 13. ©e'^eit ®ie ju bettt SButtbarjte felBfl, oter ju feiitetit Sruber? 14. ®e|ett @ie felifl ju beitt SCuttbarjtc, ober fiflidett ®ie 3'§rett 3^tciter ? 15. ©eltfl bie geitibe biefea 5Waiitie3 ad^tm unb Toktt t:^tt. 16. ®ttt iefi^eibetter SWatttt loBt fi^ feltfl ttii^t. It. 5Kait erfattet fic| leic^t M foI(^citt SBetter. 18. Iliefe ^itiber ktrageit fii^ tti*t gut. 19. SCie oft bre'^t fi(^ btc Srbe uttt i^re 3l^fe ? 20, SBie erfdltet ft* 3^r l;ieiter? 21. Sr cr!altet fli^ ni^t. 22. Setragen fli^ bie ©(filler gut ? 23. Unfere ©cottier tetragett fic§ itttitter fe|r gut. 24. ©ie fitib tti(^t ^'^x eigencrf5rcuttb, betttt ©ie fd^mei^ettt fi(^. 25. ®itt wa'^rer greunb fd^metf^elt ttic. Exercise 55. 3lufga6e 55. 1. The idle scholar blanjes himself. 2. Do you praise your- self? 3. Why does not the boy behave himself well ? 4. Do you take cold easily? (do you easily take cold ?) 5. Do you see yourself? 6. Do you see the surgeon himself? t. Do you see the surgeon yourself? 8. ReSly good men flatter themselves sometimes. 9. The earth turns on its axis. 10. Even the enemies of a good man esteem him. 11. In what kind of weather does one take cold easily ? 12. Does this 100 LESSON XXX woman blame herself 1 13. She blames nerself, but her friends do not blame her. 14. Those children strike each other. 15. Do modest men praise themselves? 16. Dost thou blame thyself? 17. I do not blame myself. 18. Does the servant praise himseF? 19. No, he blames himself. 20. Do you flat- ter yourselves 1 21. We do not flatter ourselves. 22. Why do you blame each other ? 23. Do those men understand each other ? 24. They do not hear each other. 25. We visit each , Other very often. LESSON XXX. j:ection XXX. NEW DBCLEWHON PLUKAL. 1. Adjectives in the plural, when they follow biefc, letnc, or a word of that class (L. XXV. 1) end. in all their cases, in en, and are of the NEW DECLENSION. N. bicfe gut-m (iOZanncr); feinc gut-en (SRonner); G. biefer gitt-en (5i)'lanncr) ; !einer gut-en (9Kiinncr); D. biefcn gut-en (SRannem) ; !cincn gut-en (9Kanncm) ; A. itefe gut-en (9Rantter): Icinc gut-en (SKiinncr*). 2. Nouns of the new declension have all cases of the plural BKw the oblique cases of the singular (L. XXII.), except §err, wbiuk takes only n in the singular, and e n in the plural : N. tic Ungor-n, bie 9lejfc-n, btc ®clbat-en, G. ber Ungar-n, ber Stcjfc-n, ber ®oItiat-en, D. ben Ungar-n, ben 9lejfe-n, ben ©olbat-en, A. bie Ungar-n, bie 5Rejfe-n, bte ©olbat-cn. * In whatre8pectiBtheform3Kiiltner,an exception to Enle7 L.XXVI Bee L. XXVL 3. BBCLEHSION OF PROPER NAMES. 101 FKMTNIME NOUNS. 3. Feminine nouns, except those ending in tunft and n{§, and those contained in the list page 276, form their plurijl ac- cording to the new declension. Those ending in the suffix in double the n in the plural ; as, greunbln, gteunbinnen. N. btc Slume-n, ile U^r-en, bie ©li^mejler-n, iic 9label-n G. Jer S3(ume-n, tcr U|r-cn, in (Sc^tDejler-n, ier Statel-n D. ben Slume-n, ien U^r-cn, ben ®d)tBc^er-n, ben 9tabet- it A. btc Slume-n, bfc U:§r-cn, bie ©(^toefler-n, bie Staiel-n DECLENSION OF PROPER NAMES. 4. Proper names of persons usually take i in the genitive^ except feminines ending ill e, which add ni i Norn. §etnri(^, Henry, Gen. ^dmi&i-i, Henry's, Nora. ®bt|e, Goethe, Gen. ®ijt'^e-«, Goethe's, Nom. ©ertrub, Gertrude, Gen. ®ertrub-3, Gertrude's, Nom. S,|arIotte, Charlotte, Gen. S^arlotte-n«,Charlotte's. 5. Masculine nouns ending in such a letter that euphony will not admit of an additional i, add in the genitive e n 3 : Nom. SDf% Opitz, Gen. Dpi^-en«, Opitz's, Nom. granj, Francis, Gen. gronj-ena, Francis'. 6. Masculine nouns -whose endings would admit of S in the genitive, sometimes (though rarely) add ni or txii, and n or en in the dative and accusative : flennt i^r 3tb«I6er't-en {instead of Do yon know (are you acquaint- SrbalJert) ? ed -with) Adalbert ! FOREIGN PBPPER NAMES. 7. Fjreign proper names, if the final letter admit of 11, usually form the genitive by adding g, frequently preceded by the apostrophe ; those of other terminations generally indicate the case by means of the article; the noun being unchanged: (St liefl S^ron^ OeMi^'tc. He is reading Byron's poems. Ete Stebeit bti SemoS'tJette? ffni) The orations of Demosthenes ar« BcItJerit'l^mt. world-reuowned. ©it^ ia ! fie^ ba, 3;imo't^cH?, bit fittt' See there 1 see there, Timothen^ nlie be^ 3i»fit8. — 'S. the cranes of Ibvcus. 102 LESSON XXX. 8. Proper names of places and countries form their geiiitive by adding S, if the final letter admit of it, otherwise the case is indicatid by the article : SJie beutfc^e grci^eit er^ot fl(^ mi The German freedom rose tcoui ^aiMnxi'i Stfd^e. — ©. Magdeburg's ashes. S)te Sinwo^ner bet Stabt 3)ari3'. (L. The inhabitants of the city ( j^ LIX. 1.) Paris Setfpiele. Examples. iDte ©ac^fen jlanben imij etitcn irttten The Saxons stood separated oy 4 S»tfc^enrttiim son ben ©i^tDcben ge* wide intervening space from tkt trennt'. — ©. Swedes. Snie ®uteii, allc Sojen folgen t^rer All (the) good, all (the) bad follov SJofenfijur. — ©. her rosy path. 25te S)oinen finb gefi^td'te SBJatro'feit. The Danes are skillful sailors. ®te Sfirfen ftnb gute ©olba'ten. The Turks are good soldiers. Ste SRuffen unb 3)re»Bfll unterbrud'cit The Russians and Prussians op- bie 3)»Ien. press the Poles. VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. S>le Slcne, -, pL -tl, the bee ; Sie StrnCf -, pi. -n, the pear ; S)ie Eouft'ne, -, pi. -n, the cousin; Set ©fl'ne, -nr pL -n, the Dane; Suftig, fragrant ; gett, fat; Stiebli^, peaceful; Sie ®a6el, -, pL -n, the fork; ®ef(^ii!t', skillful; 35er |)eJTe, -n, pL -n, the Hessian ; 25te fianjcl, -, pi. -n, the pulpit; Set Di)i, -en (ot- D4fe,-n), pL -en, the ox; 9)atriij'tifc^, patriotic; 3)te 9)flaume, -, pL -n, the plum, 3)a« 3)ot}eI[ttn', -i, pL -e, the porce- lain; ®er 3)reu6e,-n, pi -n, the Prussian; Ste SRebe, -, pi. -n, the oration ; Die SRcfe, -, pL -n, the rose; ©(i)Ia(^ten, to slaughter; ■Bet ©(^mebe, -n, pL -n, the Swede; ®ie Xflffe, -I pL -n, the cup; Vai 3)oIf,-e6, pi. ajoltcr, the people; 3Belt6etu^mt/ world-renowned. Exercise 56. SlufgaBc 56. 1. Tiit 3)rcu§cn, ^cffeit, Satern unb ©o^fen finb ©eutfc^e. 2. T)ic ©cutfd^en pnb eln fleipges, frleMtc^eg SBoK. 3. Die grattjo* fen, f oleit, SMen unb Ungarn ftnb gcinbc ber SRuffen. 4. ©ie ©otbaten laufcn nnb fiStai^tcn tie fettcn Di^fen. 5. 5)iefe Heincn ^naBcn ^alm SBtrnen, 5)flaumen, ^trfd^en imb iprilofen. 6. Die (Sd^ulerinncn ge'^en ju ben Se^rerinncn. "?. 3^re ©d^iilerinnen (inb unfere Soufinen. 8. Die patriotifc^tn SReben bcS Demojl^cttea DECLENSION OP PEOPBR NAMES. 103 (!nti n)cltkru'()mt. 9. Die neucn U'^ren unb Jlcttett unferer greun* tinnen ^ini »on ®ot6. 10, Jiicfe 3lo|m ttni Sletten finb fi^onc SSlumcn. 11. ®ie .Sanjeln in jcnen ^irt^en fini ju ^oc^. 12. £)te fleigigen SSienert licieit bie buftigen Slumen. 13. SKeine ©c^wcftem ^aben tneinc neuen gebern. 14. t)k\t Za^m fmb »on SJorjellon, bie ®akln son ©ilter. 15. "Die ©c^tueben unb Vanm pnb gefi^idfte SJlatrofen. Exercise 51. ^ufgate 5T. 1. These Germans are Bavarians, Hessians, Prussians and Saxons. 2. Those boys sell pears, plums and cherries. 3. The cups are of porcelain. 4. The French are a patriotic people. 5. Who buys and slaughters the oxen of the soldiers? 6. Are these sailors Danes, Swedes or Russians ? 7. Are the Russians and Turks skillful sailors 1 8. Who sells the soldiers the fat oxen? 9. Are these roses and pinks fragrant and beautiful flowers 1 10. Are not the pulpits in these new churches high enough? 1 1. Do the industrious bees love all beautiful flowers ? 12. Are the Danes an industrious, peaceful people ? 13. Have our cousins our pens and our books ? 14. The boys in our schools read the world-renowned orations of Demosthenes. 15. These cups and those forks belong to the nephews of those old sailors. Remark. — By means of the appended table the pupil will be enabled to compare at one view the various terminations which have been separately given him in the preceding Lessons. This arrangement will both serve the purpose of a more^eMeraZ review, and at the same time be well adapted to fix in the mem- ory the peculiarities of the different declensions. The endings of the adjective, especially, in its various modes of inflection, as well as the words by which those endings are affected, should receive a patient attention. 104 LESSON XXX. 9. CONNECTED VIEW OE THE AETIOUS, DEMONSTKATIVB IN Ali SINGULAR. Mate. Fem^ Jfeat. Masc. Fern. Neut. Masn. Fern, Neut. K ber, tie, bag, Mefcr, biefe, btefeg, mein, metne, ntein, G iti, ber, be«, biefe^, btefer, biefeS, nieincg, meiner, meincg, t) bem, ber, itm bicfem, biefer, biefem, mctnem, meiner, meinem, A. ben, bte, ba«, btefen, biefe, biefeS, nieinen, meine. ntein. OLD DECLENSION OF THE ADJECTIVi: AND NOUN. Mate Fern. Neut, Mase. Maxc. Neut. Neut, N. guter, girte, gutc?, Soffer, $ut, Sa^r, SKittel, G. gutca (en), guter, gate? (en), fioffera, ^utee, 3«^tt3» SWitteW, D. gutem, guter, gutem, Sojfer, .^ute, Sa^re, SKtttel, A. gaten, gute, gute«, flofer, §ut, Sa^r, SKtttel. NEW DECLENSION OF THE ADJECTIVE (l. XV.) AND NOUN (l. XXII.). Mate Fern. (L. xxra. 3. obs.) Neui. Maxc Mase, N. ber gute, bie, or meine gute, ba8 gute, Saier, ®raf, G. bea guten, ber, or meiner guten, be« guten, SBaiern, ©rafen, D. bem guten, ber, or meiner guten, bem guten, Saiern, ®raf«n» A. ben guten, bie, or meine gute, baa gute, Saiern, ®rafcn, MIXED DECLENSION OF THE ADJECTIVE (l. XVI. 1, 2). Ma»c Neut Mase. Neut, N. mein guter, mein gute«, tein alter, feiu ttlte3, G. meine« gaten, metnea guten, feineS altcn, fcinc« altcn, D. meinem guten, meinem guten, feincm alten, feinem olten, A. meinen guten, mein gatea, feincn atten, fein alte«. WORDS REQUIRING THE NEW DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. Mase Fern. Neut. Mase. Fern. Neut Fern. Fern. «aer, aHe, alTea; jebcr, jebe, jcbea; beine; feine; *cr, bie, baa; jener, _ jcne, jeneS; eine; unferej biefer, biefe, biefea; manc^er", mani^e, manc^ea; eure; feine: einiger, einige, einigea; fold^er, fol^e, foli^ca; i^re; (L.23.3oV) etlic^er, etli^e, etli^ea; welder, tuelc^e, mlii)ti; meine. WORDS REQUIRING THE MIXED DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. bein, ein, euer, i^r, mein, fein, unfer and fein. (L.ZV11. note) CONNECTED VIEW OF THE ARTICLE, ETC. 105 4ND POSSESSIVE PEONOUNS, ADJECTIVE AND NOUNS DECIJENSIONS. AU Genders. Me; Mefe; nteine; bet; bicfet; aieiner; ben~ biefen; meinen; bii; i-efe; meine. OLD DECLENSION OF , THE ADJECTIVE AND NOUN. Ml Send. gute; gutet; 8«tcn; SUte; Masc. Coffer; &ffct; fioffein; Masc §ule; |)ute; ^uten; 4>utc; Neut. Sa^ie; Sa^ie; Sa^ren; Sa^te; Neut. 2»tttcl; 5KitteI; 3«itteln; SBJittel; Fern. SMe; ©ante; SBantcn; ©ante; Fern. SBtlbnilfcj ffiilbniffe; SBilbmffcnj SilbnilTe. NEW DECLENSION OF THE ADJECTIVE (l. XXX. 1.) AND NOUN. AU Genders. Masc. Masc Fern. Nevi. bie guten; meine guten; Satern; ®tafcn; gebern; $crjen; bet guten; metnct guten; SBatern; ®tttfen; gcbern; §erjen; be« guten; meinen guten; SBaiern; ®rafen; gebern; ©etjcn; bie guten; meine guten; Saietn; ©tttfen; Sebetn; lietjen. MIXED DECLENSION OF THE ADJECTIVE, atle gute;* alter guten; alien guten; ttUe gute; All Genders. t»eH)e gute; xotii^ix guten; toetc&en guten; %i gute; einige grope; einiger gropcn; eintgen gropen; einige grtge. WORDS REQUIRING THE NEW DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. attc;<» bie; biefe; etmgc; etli^e; jene; mani^e; me^ren; folcbe; ttel^e; beine; eure; i^re; feine; unfere; teinc. * Note, that ifter affe, cintgc, ctUc|e, wait($e, me^rercorwE^tc, folc^eand leeldfei the adjective sometimes takes a mixed declension (L. XXXT. 91 106 LESSOF XXXI. LESSON XXXI. Cection XXXI. ntREGITLAB DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 1. The following nouns are inflected according to the lew declension, (except that they add 3 to e Jt of gen. sing.) : itx S3u(^jla6e, the letter; ber gelS, the rock ; ier gr«Sc, the peace; kcr gunle, the spark ; ber ©eJanle, the thought ; itx ©louBe, the belief; bcr ^aufe, the heap ; ber SfZame, the name ; ter ©ante, the seed ; ter ©c^abe, the damage ; ber 2BilIe, the will. N. ber gel3; ber griebe; ber 5Rame; G, beg %t^-tnS', its griebe-nS; be3 Stantc-nS; D. bent gclf-en; bent griebc-n; bent 5latne-n; A. ben gclf-en; ben griebe-n; ben Stame-n. 2. Some of the above words, however, sometimes take in the nominative singular en, and are regularly inflected accord- ing to the old declension ; as, ber gelfen, beg gelfenS, etc 3. geig and grlcbe sometimes follow the old declension in the singular; as, ber %tli, beg gelfeg, bent gelfe, ben %tli, ^a foSfl bu ben %tU fd^Iagen. Thou ghalt smite the rock. — ^Exodus xvii. 5. 4. £;er ©c^nterj forms the genitive by adding tni ; bag ,§crj adds ens in the genitive and en in the dative, and both form their plural according to the new declension (L. XXX. 2). 5. The following nouns take the old declension in the singular, and the new in the plural ; namely masculine, ber 2l^n, the an- cestor; ber 33auer, the peasant; ber Dorn, the thorn (§ 15. 3) ; ber glitter, the spangle ; ber gorji, the forest ; ber ®au, the coun- try; ber ®e»at'tcr, the god-father; ber 2orBeer, the laurel; ber ■ SRajl, the mast ; ber 9iad^6ar, the neighbor; ber 3)fau, the pea. cock; ber ®ec, the lake; ber ©pom, the spur; ber ©taat, the state ; ber ©tac^el, the sting ; ber ©tra:^I, the beam ; ber ©traup, the ostrich (§ 15. 3) ; ber Untert^an, the subject; ber SSetter, the cousin ; ber S^txat or 3ifrat^, the ornament Neuter, baS Slugc, the eje; bag 33ett, the bed; tag Snte, the end; bag §entb, the shirt; tag D§r, the ear. IRREanLAR DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 101 6. DECLENSION OF S3 fl U C T AND 31 U Q C. Singular (jM). Plurai («e«i). Singular {old). Plural (new). N. ier Saucr, ile SSauer-n, iaa 3luge, ile Sluge-n, G. tes 33auer-s,. ber Souet-n, teg 9lugc-s, icr 9luge-n, D. Kern Sauer, ben 33auer-n, bem 2luge, ten 3luge-tt, A. ten Sauer, tie 33auer-n, taa ^uge, tie 2(uge-n. t. SSett and Jpemt sometimes take the plural forms SBette and ^emter. 8. 2) cr ©ec signifies the lake; tie ®ee, the ocean; their form is the same in all cases except the genitive singular, ©porn frequently has the plural ©poren, instead of ©pome. For fiirther examples of nouns with a mixed declension see §19. MIXED DECLENSION OP ADJECTIVES. 9. After oEe, elnige, etllc^e, ntanc^e, me^rere or xat\)xt, fotc^e and ioeI(^e the nominative and accusative of the adjective some- times follow the old, and the other cases the new declension, thus forming in the plural also a mixed declension : Sr ^at einige gute {or guten) Sreunbe, He has a few good friends. S)«r^ tie ®itte einiget guten gteunbe. Througli the kindness of a few good friends. SBeifptete. Examples. £)ct 3fttme i(l tin ungtwb^nttdjer. The name is an uncommon one. Si^ tenne SRitmanb bicfe^ 9Jamen3. I know nobody by (of) this name, ©ute gurflen tffom'men letcf)t gute Un* Good princes easily obtain good lett^anen, nii^t fo leic^t biefe jene. subjects, the latter (do) not so — 3J. easily (obtain) the former. Die 3)olen unb Ungoin finb bie SJatI* The Poles and Hungarians are the 'bdvn ber Socmen. neighbors of the Bohemians. D, cine cble $tmmc[«ga6c i|i ba« Zxi)l 0, a precious gift of Heaven is the be« Sluge^.— ©. light of the eye. SCit finb einc^ |)evjcnS, eineS S3(ut«. "We are of one heart, of one blood. — ©. Sim Slugen fe^en IJeffer oXi jwci. Four eyes arc better than two (two heads are better than one). 64 iji tcine Slofe o^ne ©cvncn. There is no rose without thoma. 108 LESSON XXXZ. VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. ©ie Sarfe, -, pi. -it, the bark; Bet ®Dtn,-e«,pL{§15.3)thethom; Srei (see p. 299.) three ; ©rcf^en, to thrash; S5t r Slep^ont', -en/ pL -en, elephant; Erfi, first; Set Srieb:, -ni, pL -, the peace; E)ei giirji, -en, pi. -en, the prince; 3Dae (Bettet'be, -i, pL -, the grain; Scjt, last; Ccr Wiaft, -ei, pL -en, the mast; 2>er 9iame, -na, pL -n, the name; 92ennen, to call; name; Ser 9)fau, -e^, pL -en, thep«aooclc; CRufen, to call (see ncrnien) ; Set ©(^mcrj, -e« or -tni, pL -tn, the pain Set ©tuat, -e«, pL -en, the state; Set ©tai^el, -a, pL -n, the sting; Set ©totenfrieb, L. XXIV. 6; Set ©tbtet, -§, pL -, thedisttubei- Ue6eife|'en, to translate; Set Untctt^an, -^, pL -en, subject; SSetci'nigt, united; SJeiut'fcK^en, to cause; Sie SBJeSpe, -, pi. -n, the wasp. Exercise 58. 2lufga6e 58. 1. Man finbet in ten Serelntgtcn ©taoten fetnc giir|len uni feine Utttert|anen. 2. (Sine Sartc :^ot ttei SKa^en. 3. Siie Sauent trefc^en i^r ©etretfee. 4. 3i^ ^obe ten SSagen meineg 9lac^Bar« uni) Sie 3)feriic S^rer Sfla^Barn. 5. ®g finb feine Sflofen o^ne S)or* ncn. 6. SKeine SBcttem ^aBen irei fi^onc |)fancn. 7. 2)ie D^ren titi ci 6e(ie ^ut tji nii^t fe^t gut. The best hat is not very good. SCBeiTen |)ut ijl ber iejlc ? Whose hat is the best? SIBelfen fduS) ijl ba« beilc ? "Whose book is the best? 6. When the superlative is used predicativdy it usually stands in the dative after a tn (an itm § 38.) : SDlein |iut ijl a m Scjlcn. My hat is the best {lit at the best). aKein Su^ ijl am te^cn. My book is the best Sr ijl am oiltejlen wn alltn. He is the oldest of all. Sie lefcn a m Jejlen. You read the best. T. The superlative is often suffixed to the genitive plural of flit: Etefe. $ut i^ ber afferr^onjle, or 1 This hat is the finest of all. 35icfer |)ut ijl a m oUcrfc^on^en. 1 (Ein al[erliej|le« .Rinb, A most charming child. 8. When two qualities of the same object are compared, the adjective, without change of form, is qualified by some other word : Gr tjl me^r tatjfcr ali ftug. He is more valiant than prudent £r ijl ID enig ei tapfti ali Hug. He is less valiant than prudent Er tft tben fo tiipfer ata ttug. He is just as valiant as prudent 9. Participles are subject to the same rules of comparison COMPARISON OP ADJECTIVES. Ill and declension as the adjective, except that they do not take the Umlaut ; and in the present ft , instead of e f t , is added : ©in ru^tenbetcS ©(^aufijlct. A more touching spectacle. £)a« rii^renbjie ©i^aufpiet. The most touching spectacle. 10. 3e — 'it^O, or li — ^Jc (with the comparative) answers to the — the in English : Se &htt bejlo (or ie) clrttiiibigcr. The older the more venerable. Se e^er in Sote gc^t, urn beflo Seffer The sooner the messenger goes th fur nni. better for us. 3« langer je Iteier. The longer the better. 11. After the latter of these words ( — tiejio, or — jc) the verb precedes its subject : Se fletgtger ton flnb, bcjlo fi^ncttet The more industrious we are, the Icritcn toit (instead of mix lerntn). faster we learn (learn we). Se f)i^vc man ijl bepo tiefet tann wan The higher one is, the deeper one fflHen. can (can one) fall. Se longer tc^ mttt^m Jetanntitn, befto The longer I am acquainted with Itebet miri) cr inir. him, the more dear he becomes to me. S3eif))lelc. Examples. <£« ijl ni($ta aW etn Slower ffia^n. It is nothing (else) than a mere — O, illusion. Er i(! Vtiijti ttentger aXi meln He is nothing less than (he is) my greunb. friend. ■5ie me^r Oottea* unb SRenfc^enlieSe, The more (one's) love of God and bejlo Weniger ©el6er»SieJc. — St. .of man, the less (one's) self-love. !n jebcm eblen §erj Brennt ein cwiger In every noble heart burns an eter- ©urfl nai$ efnem ebltrn. — fH, nal thirst for (after) a nobler. Oa^fro'^ere J?inbi|ii:ierottbagbe|fere. The more joyous child is every — 5K. where the better (one). li i|l nti$tS erioirm'It(|er tn ber 3BeIt There is nothing more pitiable in aU etn unentfc^Iofrncr SKenfc^. — ®. the world than an undecided man (human being), Wtr grogte $«g ijl Wte bte gropte Zw ThegreatesthatredisliV.ethcgreat genb unb bie f(^ltmm|len ^unbc, jiitt. est virtue and the worst doga^ —St. still. li ifl mtt bent SBiffen Wie nttt bent It is with (the) knowing as with ©el^en, ii me:|r man fle^t, bepo itf' (tte) seeing, the more one sees, fet «nb angencl^met t|i e«. the better and the more agree- able it is. 112 LESSON xxxn. VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. Din Suc^e, -, pL -n, the beech; ®i(f, thick; Ebel, nohle ; 35ie (S,iijt, -, pL -tt, the oak; Entfenit', remote, distant; Dct gelb^crr, -n, pL -en, the com- mander-in-chief; ®cle^rt', learned; @Iu(Htc^r fortunate, ^iHg, prudent; %vt £uft, -, pL Suftt, the air; Set aJlonb, -ca, pL -e and --tn, th« moon; ■Die ©onnc, -, pL -n, the sun; Set ©perttn3,-«.pL-c,thesparro-w; ■Dei ©tamm/ -ti, pi. ©Mmme, trunk; 2)er ©tern, -8, pL -e, the star; S^apfer, brave, valiatt; ©ie 3;aube, -, pi. -it, the pigecji; Unrein, impure; iSerbte'ncn, to earn ; SJerfiJ^enl'en, to give away. Exercise 60. SlufgaBc 60. 1. Dcr Sauer i^ reii^, aBcr bcr ^aufmonn ijl rci(^cr. 2. %tt ^aufmaittt ijl ein reic^erer 9Jlattn ola bcr Saucr. 3. 3|l nt(^t bcr ^oxtfmaitn icr rcic^fle aWattn in biefer ©tait ? 4. 3<^ Hit ret(i|, jitcin Setter ijl reiser, itnt) fettt SSciter i|t am reic^jtett. 5. 3fl ber rcii^jlc SUJann am gufriebcnjien ? 6. 3jl nii^t ter flei^igjie 5JJattn tmmer bcr jufriebenjle SKattn ? 7. 3tt felc^cm Saitbe jtttb bas ^a* meet unb ber Slefjlant nu|tt^cr ol3 bai3 5)fcrb ? 8. SBeli^e Jt)terc fiitb am nii^li(^jien ? 9. SCelc^eS tft bas nii^lic^cre J^icr, ta« ©(^af ober bag 5^ferb ? 10. Eer cbcl^c 3Rcnfc§ ifl nic^t tmmer bcr gliicfs lic^jlc, unb bcr gele'^rtejlc nt(^t immcr ber tBeifcfte. 11. 1;ie Srbc ijl Reiner al3 bic Sonne, unb bie sted according to the sentence where it is employed. Thus it n'.ay be rendered by good; benefit ; or, by other parts of speech : 6^ ifl fiti bag aUgemetne SB c jle. It is for the general good. ©te fang gum SB t fie n ber 3tnnen. She sang for the benefit of tt« poor. £r gab un« ctroaa gum S e |l e n. Ke favored ns with something. ® cben ©te txni ein 8ieb gum S e fl e n. Give us a song for our eniertainTnent, With ^ab eit/ and sometimes with fallen, the same word is used to denote the advantage which a person seeks to gain by means of facetions irony, or playful ridicule: S)te 9?afet"eife ^al ©ie gum S e (i e n. The pert (girl) is rallying you. — £. 6r ^at ibn gum SBejlen, He is ridiculing (or, "befooling") Tiim , SJicfe beibeit greunbe ^ a b e it gent ettt» These two friends are fond of ral- anber gum S3 e ^ e n. lying each other. ©er Srgnet ^ttlt gem Stnbere gum The liar is fbnd of duping others. S e fl e u. 4. The comparative of 51 a '^c, is often used substantively in the signification of particulars, nearer details : 3Bi|Tcn©ic nit^t ba^ SRci^eie Don ber Do you not know the particulart ©a^e? of the affair! 9? a ^ e r e S tann er S^nen fogen. (The) nearer detaiU he can commu- nicate you. PORMATION OF ADXECTIVES FROM PROPER NAMES OF COUNTRIBS AND CITIES. 5. Adjectives are formed from names of coimtries and cities, by means of the sufiix i f (^ ; and those of the former frequently take the Umlaut, if capable of it. In place of an adjective of this ending, however, the name of the city with the suffix e t Is often employed, and is unde,olinnd ■ FORMATIOS OF ADJECTIVES FROM PROPER NAMES. 115 fflicle 9)oimncnttrotEn in r(^»ebif($cn Many Pomeranians entered into ©tenll. — ©. Swedish service. Die Utfadjc btefer SScriSn'bcrung i|i in Tlie cause of tliis cliange is to be eben bicfcm 3tU3«I)urgifd)en SSt" souglit for in this very Augsburg fennt'niffe ju fuc|en. — S. confession. 3)ie griei^tf^e Spra^c ijl Me gettl'* The Greek language is the most bet(}e bet SEBelt. — |i. cultivated in (of) the world. 6i fagte ti auf beutfi^ (L. rssiv. 4). He said it in German. et fagte e« im grttnjBltf^en. He said it in (the) French. 6ie6tn 3a1jn na§ bet 5>rag e r ©^lac^t Seven years after the battle o Wat aHe SRcUgto'n«b«Ibung gegen Prague all religious toleration bte gStotcjlant'en im fiomgtelc^e auf* toward the Protestants in the ge'^o'Seit.— ©. kingdom was abolished. Obs.- Note, that adjectives derived from the names of cities, are written with capital initials ; as are also those denoting a language, if ■ preceded by the article and used without a noun. FORMA! ION OF ADJECTIVES FROM PROPER NAMES OF PERSONS. 6. Adjectives are formsd from the names of persons by means of the suffix if(^ , and are usually rendered by a noun : ®an8 !Seutfi$Ianb fc«fjtc unter ^rie» All Germany sighed under the bur- gE«la|l,bocf) griebewar'a imSaKcn* den of war, but there was peace flcinif(|en Saget. — ©. in Wallenstein's camp. iDte ©ei'^flrb t f c^ e n Xrupljef Itcfertctt The troops of Gebhard gave up to bem getnbe einen 5>la6 "a"^ ^^^ ot' ^^^ enemy one place after an bern aM. — ©. (the) other. 7. Adjectives denoting a sect, derived from proper names are «>";en written with a small initial : t^iVX neunitt'^tigeit Suifutllen gai man To the nine years old eleoti r Cal- taliotnlfile Center. — ©. vinist teachers were given. StUca, tt)tt« bte lut:^erifc|e ^irc|e erjtelt' All that the Lutheran church ob- trat ©ulbung. tained was toleration. Scifpietc. Examples. Der Start e ijl am mSc^ttgjlcn allein. The strong man a most powerful — ©. alone. Cet © e ^ e n b « Segretft' ben Slinben, The seeing (man) comprehends tha ttStt ni^t btefer jenen. — fR, blind, but the latter does not tha former. 116 LESSON xxxrrr. 5JBrbtt«9JeBt fdjcmtgeWD'^nlt^wiiS^ Only the (that which is) n«o gen tig. O.' erally seems important. 9Ji^t ttlteS © c^ » e r e t|l beg teege:. ctn Not every thing difficult is therefore Sab^rtnt^ o^ne Seltfttben.— ^. a labyrinth without guide (guid- ing thread). SRebcn ©te ja meinem Seflen. Intercede (speak) in my behalt ©te ^aien bteftn grcmbcn jum Seflen. They are making (having) this stranger a laughing-stock, VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. Sebttu'cm, to pity; Scncilsen, to envy; SKnb, blind; ®er Soni, -e«, pi. -e, the cathedral; (SIcnb, miserable, wretched; golgltc^, consequently; ©a? ® ebaube, -4, pi. -, thebuilding ; ®cf($mtnb', quick, rapid ; 2)le §au8frau, -, pL -en, housewife; ^iilflDS, helpless ; Stt^m, lame; Cflufen, to run; SDfagbebaiget, see 5; Sfcibif*, envious; 3)roftiji^, practical; Sc^nei, fast; Saub, deaf; 3:ptig, active; t>u S^or, -en, pL -en, the fool sprint, foolish; Sraurig, sad, sorrowful; SSBeife, wise. Exercise 62. StufgoBc 62. 1. I^cr t^xW&ft ftetfige 9Irme tfl stcl nufeHd^cr uni> gluiHid^er, «l8 tcr faule SReid^e. 2. Stic^t jetcr Strme i^ traurig, nic^t jcfcer 5Rei(!^e ijt glittHtc^. 3. ^Ecr Sr^or Bencibct oft ten 3lct(^cn. 4. Sin !Rei* tifc^cr ijt nic jufrictcn, unb folglic^ nic^t glMi^. 5. 9licinaiib ijl elenter unb t^cric^tcr al3 bcr 5Retbif(^e. 6. J)a8 ©c^ijnc unb 2tn* gene^me i|l gut, o6er bas fRiigli^c unb ^^rattifc^e ijt noc^ bcifer. 7. 3jt j;ebcr JauBe ungtii(fli^ ? 8. 5Rid^t jcber ©ele^rte ijt ein SScifcr, unb ntc^t jcber SSeife ijl ein ©cle^rter. 9. "Eer SStinbe ijt no^ un* gliicfticber unb piflofer ds ber Zavit ober ber Sa^mc. 10. Sin ®ele^rter ijl nii^t immer ein t|atiger, nii^Iic^er 3Rann. 11. Sine ®ele^rtc ijl nic^t immer eine gute ^auSfrau, 12. 2CoS fiir ein SBu^ lejen ©ie, ein beutfdieg, ein fronjBftfdteS ober ein engtifics ? 13. 3c^ left tin franaoftfilcS. 14. 3cne ©c^iitcr Icfen beutf^e unJ englifc^e Sitd^er. 15. 5)er SRagbeBurger (see 5.) tim ijt ein 6^l» tiii ©eBaube. 16. Sr ijl gef^wtnb in 9lltem. Ekep.cise 63. 3lufga6e 63. 1. Who is more foolish and more miserable than the envious man? 2. Nobody is more foolish than an envious man. 3. OMISSION OP INFLECTIONAL ENDINGS OP ADJECTIVES. Ill lat, idle man is not useful, and consequently not happy. 4. Is only the useful man contented ? 5. Is the idle man ever really contented and happy ? 6. Is the industrious man never sad 1 f . Do you learn the praotipal, or only the agreeable ' 8. Why is the idle man unhappy ? 9. Is the blind man more helpless than the deaf or the lame one ? 10. Who leads a more miserable life than the envious man ] 11. The good man pities the poor, but he does not envy the rich. 12. Is the Magdeburg cathedral the largest building in the city ? 13. The idle man is not useful, and consequently not good, for only the useful man is really good and wise. 14. These German books are new, those French ones are old. 15. Who is more wretched than the envious man 1 LESSON XXXrV. f cttiott XXXIV. OMISSION OF INFLECTIONAL ENDINGS OP ADJECTIVES. 1. The adjectives cite! and tauter, in the signification of all, nothing but, mere, sometimes stand without inflection be- fore nouns : ®« Ijl I a u t c r Etgcnflntt. It is mere obstinacy. SEBtr (loljen 3Renfc^ntfinbEr ftnb eitel We proud sons of men are nothing ttrme Sunber. — EI. 6«* poor sinners. Untfr lauter gufen ©ingen i|l bie Among things that are all good SBu'^I fc^tter. the choice is difficult. 2. When several adjectives qualify the same noun, the in- flectional endings of all but the last, are sometimes dropped, and the omission indicated by a hyphen. In like manner the last syllable of compound adjectives is sometimes omitted : Cie fc|tt)arj»rot^*goIbene go^ne. The black red golden banner. Wiemanb war fo freubttt' unb f(|(ttf[o« NoboSy was as joyless and slee-o j])ie er.^SR. less (joy- and sleepless) as he. 3. In the nominative and accusative neuter, adjectives often omit the inflectional endings : 2)ca SKenf^en Sekn Wcint cin:^erttt(| The life of man seems a glorioM £oog, — ©. allotment. 118 LESSON Jtxxrv. 4. An adjective in denoting a language, when not preceded by the article, as exemplified in the preceding lesson, is also undeclined : Er fagte e« auf englifil. He said it in English. 5. When the latter of two adjectives is employed, conjointly with its nomi, to embrace as one idea that which ihn first qual- fies, it takes the form of the new declension : Eim geenb'tget nac^ lang e m serberi'* For, ended, after long ruinous strife^ Ud& e n ©treit,» war bte taiferlofe, was the emperorless, the terri- tie ^ijXtSlKijt 3cit, unb etn Sti^tet ble period, and there was a ruler ttai BjieDer auf (Erben. — ©. (jndge) again upon earth. Obs. — ^The above rnle, though extending to both the gen. and dat., is rarely applied, except in the mass, and neat, of the latter. Note^ also, that where the adjectives may be joined by u n b , or so separated as equally to refer to the same noun, the latter one also takes the old form (compare 1, 2. § 34.); thus, £t lofc^t feincn ®urjl mit Harem fatten (n, as euphonic) SJaJTer; or, mit Harem unb tattem SBafTer, as also mit Katcm, faltem SBajfet. 6. A clause or sentence is often used adjectively, sometimes requiring to be translated by a relative clause : 55ie ju 3>rdt)ojltio'ncn ge* The nouns that have (The to prepositions iDorbenen©u6jlanti'»en. become prepositions, become nouns). "S)te urftjriingli^auS oil The conjunction al3 (The originally from unb fo jufam'mengefe^te {as) originally com- oH and fo compound- Sonjunctton a.li !^at pounded of aH and fo ed conjunction aid ha» tmmer bte Sebeu'tung always has the signi- always, etc.) tines SRelatl'sa." fication of a relative. ADJECTIVES USED ADVERBIALLY. 7. Adjectives in all degrees of comparison, in the form in which they occur as predicate, are employed adverbially : (Er Ke|l fc^nelt ; errpii(^t langfam. Hereadsfast; he speaks slowly. !Der einjelne 9Rann entflic'^t a m I e i (^:» The single man escapes the easiest tcfien.— ®. 3e mc^t ©(^wa^e, je me^r Suge ; bie The more infirmity the more false- Staft ge^t gcra'be: cine Sani)'» hood; strength goes straight : a ncnfugel, bie $o^len obet ©ru6ett cannon-ball that has holes or cav- eat, ge^t ft umm. — SR. ities goes crooked. * 3Jerber6Hc^ e n ©treit ; t. e. contest : here aitfe. ten years in this house. ®a« tBUgt' ic^ I tt n g fl. — ©. That I knew long ago. SJot bicfer Sinbe fo§ tc^ jiing jl. — S. Recently I was sitting before that lime-tree. Sctf))ic(e. Examples. gr fagte ti auf fraitjoTtfi^- He said it in French. SfBtr ttollett beutfcj) furec^eit. We wish to speak German. ®ef£&e finb glatt (fanft) utib gefi$mci'« Laws are smooth and flexible, big, tDanbcISar Wte Saiiite nnb 8ci' changeable as humor and pa»- benfi^aft ; SReligio'tt iinbet flretig sion ; religion binds firmly and unb ewtg.— ©. eternally. ein unnu^ Cetttt ifl ein fritter 2;ob. A useless life is an early death. — ®. Se fi^nettet fii^ tin ffianbelflerit urn bte The more rapidly a planet movea ©onne ieti>egt', beflo langfantet bte^t around the sim, the more slowly et jii^ urn jti^. — SR. it turns onitsaxis(a'ound itself). 120 LBSSON XXXTV. VOCABULABT TO THE EXERCISES. SW^, pale; 33cittH^, distinct; gedjten, to fight, p. 348 ; Dag ®cbd^t'niB, -e^, pL -t, memory ; ®ere^t', just; 'ftageri haggard; ^anbeln, to act; Scjrcn, to sweep; fiitlt!, sick; Cange (adverb), long; Sangfam, slow; Sttut, loud; Set 0{o6e, -n, pL -n, the raven; gjeben, to speak; Bet Sicbncr, -8, pL -, the orator; !Die ©^tualbe, -, pi. -n, swallow Ungemeiii, uncommon ; S>ie Qavstt -, pL -n, the tongs. Exercise 64. StufgaBe 64. 1. Scrnen ©Ic fransojtfc6? 2. ^letn, luir Icmen beutfii^. 3. 3Bie fagt man int gnglifc^en, "bie ©c^wattc fitegt fi^neUcr olg ter 3laBe ?" 4. 38elc^e« »on biefen ^inbem Itefl am Bcflen, unit toc^cS am fc^Ic^* tejlen ? 5. Dcr ©iener ^at ite 3an9f> wer :^at ben neueftcn Scfcn ? 6. S5er glet§tge lernt fi^neH, ber gaule langfam. 1. %vaxx 3lebner fpric^t Beffer als er f(^reiBt. 8. SBarum lemen ©ie langfomer oU 3^r SSruter ? 9. Sr Icmt siel leic^ter ol3 ic^, cr :§at ein BejfcreS ©eta^tnip. 10. ©ie fprc(^en laut, aBcr ni^t bcutli^. 11. Dtr ^rante ijt ^eutc ungcmeiit BIet(^ unb '^agcr. 12. ®utc ©olbotcn fciitcn tapfer in alien gcred^ten ^ricgen. 13. 6r rebet aseife oBer cr '^anbelt t^ijrid^t. 14. Sr ijl reti^er afe fein "^ii^Kt, benn er or* Beitet fteiptger al^ cr. 15. 3(^ serjle^e @ie Bepr als t^n, benn ©ie fpred^en beutlic^er unb langfamcr. 16. "Sfleuc SSefen tcBren am Bcjlen;" ffiie fflgen ©ie bas im gnglifi^en ? (L. XXXTTL Obs.) Exercise 65. 3titfg Be 65. 1. Does your cousin spealc German ? 2. No, he speaks only English. 3. Does he learn more slowly than his friend ? 4. No, he learns fester, and spealis more distinctly. 5. Do all soldiers fight bravely in aU just wars ? 6. The old soldier is uncommonly pale and haggard, he is sick, is he not 1 1. I do not understand what the teacher says ; he speaks very rapidly, and not very distinctly. 8. The idle man acts very foolishly, but not every industrious man acts wisely. 9. That orator speaks much louder than this one, but not so distinctly. 10. Which one of your scholars writes the best, and which writes the worst? 11. Which flies the fastest, the eagle, the raven, or the swallow 1 12. Are all tout sdiolars learning German 1 ABSOLUTE POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS, 121 13. No, they are learning French. 14. 1 do not learn rapidly, for my memory is not good. 15. How do you say in German, " He spealcs very slowly 1" 16. How do you say in German, ** A. new broom sweeps the cleanest 1" LESSON XXXV. Cection XXXV. ABSOLUTE POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 1. When the possessive pronouns relate, attributively, to a noun understood, and are not followed by an adjective, they are called absolute possessive pronouns. They are of two forms ; as, jnein-er, c, ti, inflected like an adjective of the old declension; and ter, bie, iai meln--{ge, or the shorter form, ber, iit, iftS mcin-C, inflected like an adjective of the new declension : OLD DECLENSION. Masculine. N. meln-er; G. Tnein-e«; D. meiit-em; A. nictn-eit; Neuter. metn-cS ; mine ; tncitt-c8 5 of mine ; mein-emj to, oj-formme, miivr-ti 5 mine. Feminine. ntein-e ; tneitt-erj mcin-er; ntein-c ; NEW DECLENSION. N. tcr meitt-igc ; Me ntcin-ige ; kas metn-igc ; mine ; G. beS ntcin-igen; ter tnein-igen ; be^ nteln-igen; of mine, D. bent mcitt-igcn; bcr meln-tgen ; bent mcin-igen; to, for mine, A. ben tnetn-tgenj bic raetn-igc j ba« mein-ige; mine; or, bos ntetn-e N. ber ntcin-e; G. bcS mein-en; D. bent mein-en ; A. ben mein-en; bte mein-c; ber mein-en; ber mein-en; bie mein-e; be? mein-en; bem mefn-cn; bas mein-e; ALL GENDERS IN THE PLURAL. N, G. D. A.. OLD. metn-c ; mein-er ; mein-en ; racln-c; NEW. bie mein-igen ber mein-igen ben mein-igen bie mein-igen NEW. or bte mein-en; or ber mein-en; or ben mein-en; or bie mein-en; mine; of mine ; to, for mine , mine. mine; of mine; to, for mine ; mine. 122 LESSON XXXV. EXAMPLES OF THE ABSOLDTB POSSBSSIVI! PRONOIIIIS Form of old declension. Forms of new declension. SKein |)ut i|l f^marj uni) aKeiit «>Ht i|"t fi^wars, uni) My hat is black und hU fein-ct ifl meig. ier feme (or ber fcinise) is white, ijl weig. eein |)ut til f^ttarj imi ©ein |)ut ifi fi^isar} unfc HU hat is bla<*k and meiti-et ijl aeip. ier metrt-e (or bet mein- mine is white, ige) ijl toetg. ■^cin Sm^ ijl nett utib 3JictiiSui^ tjltieu unbbaS Mybookisnewandhis fein-eS ijl alt. fein-t (or i>a« fetn-ige) is old. ijl alt. e«in Suc^ ijl neu unb ©etn Suc^ ijl nea unb Hi His book is new and meiit-e« ip alt. weiit-t (or metn-ige) ifl mine is old. alt. (Etse^tiumeincmgreutt' Gtge^t jutnetnemgreunbe Heisgoingtomyfriend be unb niiit su beiii-ent. unb nl^t ju bem bein-en and not to yonrs. (or bem bein-tgen). 2. The absolute possessive pronouns are often used substan tively in the. neuter singular, to denote property or obligation : 3^ jle^e toiebet auf bem aTCeinigen. — I am standing again upon my own S. ground. (Sttibintt'I/ i^ f)iit ba« SReimge ge* Cardinal, I have done my duty (I t^a'n. Z^vta ©ic bai 3^re. — the brush ; Die (Eigen^eit, -, pL -en, peculiarity; Det gefler, -i, pL -, the fault; ©ie gliite, -, pL -n, the flute ; $ier, here; Etc ^relbe, -, the chalk; ®er Kalet, -i, pi. -, the painter ; ®et 9)infcl, -i, pi. -, the painter's pencil or brush ; 5Der SRegenfi^itm, -tit pL -e, the um- brella; Det ©^lupl, -i, pi -, the key; Cer ©c^Wttmm, -ti, pi. ©^woimmei the sponge; Set, iai ©ofa, -i, pL -i, the sofa; S)er ©omtcttfc^irw/ -ti, pi. -e, the parasol; V&i Slafc^entuc^r -ti, pi. -titii^er, th« handkerchief; DflS Etntenfag, -IfeS, pi. -ftilTet, the inkstand; ajcrlan'gen, todeirand, require; SaJ SBeltmeer, -?,pL -e, the ocean; 'Zai 2Biirter6uc^, -ti, pL -titi^er, the dictionary. 124 LESSON xxxr. Exercise 66, ittufgafec 66. 1. §at ber SKater fetnm fin\d ober ben meinigen ? 2. gr ^J ben feinigen unD ben S^rigen. 3. 3^ ^a6« mcinen Sflegen)'(|irm unt ben S^rigen, nteine gibtc unb ble S^rigc, mein Za\6^tnbi6^ wnb iat S^rtge, meinc SCbrterMi^er unO bie S^rigcn. 4. T>er 33au« mc.flcr ^at fctn Jintenfa^ unb tai incintge, meine ^et5e unJ bic feinigc. 5. Siegt ler ©onnenfc^irm auf nteincm ©ofa obcr auf bem S^rigen ? 6. gr Itegt auf bem meinigen. 1. 3fi 3^r ©d^Iiip tcffet al« ber meinige ? 8. S^lein, ber nteinige ifl fccjfer aU ber 3irige. 9. iJer SSatcr ^'^ni 2e|rera unb ber 35ruber bc« unfrigen ftnb Iran!. 10. 2lllc SKenf^en '^aBcn i:|rc ge|Ier unb gigen^eiten; i^ ^abt bie meinigen, ©ie |aben bie 3|rigen, unb cr ^at bie fcinl* gen. 11. 3c^ ^a^e |i« 3*»ci 2;offen, eine ge^ort 3^rem grcunbe, unb bie anterc ge^brt bem unfrigen. 12. Sebermann lieBt bie ©el* nigen unl Berlangt lai ©einige. 13. ^ai 2BcItmeer ifl jttifd^en mir unb ben 5!)'leinigen. 14. Tttim 9Jlutter fiat meinen ©^»amm unb ben i^rigen, meine SBiirjle unb bie ifirige. Exercise 67. 9lufgaSe 6T. 1. Have you my inkstand, or yours 1 2. 1 have mine, and the scholar has his. 3. My keys are new, yours are old. 4. My mother has my cup, and I have hers ; she has my handker- chiefs, and I have hers. 5. You have my parasol, and I have yours ; yours is new, and mine is old; 6. Your flute is lying on my sofa, and mine is lying on yours. 7. Your chalk is bet- ter than ours ; your sponge is smaller than ours. 8. Is your umbrella larger than mine ? 9. Mine is smaller than yours. 10. The painter has my paint-brush and his, my dictionary and his, my flute and his, my pencils and his. 11. Your friend has nis faults and unpleasant peculiarities ; but all other men have theirs — you are not without yours. 12. Here is your brush ; do you know where mine is ] 13. The architect has yours, and I have his, but ] do not know where yours is. 14. You are writing with your cousin's pencil, and he is writing with yours, or with mine. CONJUGATION OP §ai)en. 126 LESSON XXXVI. Section XXXVI. 1. CONJUGATION OF Jpaictt. INFINITIYE. Present. ftaben, to ha^e. Present. ■fiaBcnt, having. Perfect. ge^a6t |atcit, to have had. PABTICIPLBS. Perfect ge^aW, had Singular. ii^i '^a6e, I have ; btt '^ofl, thou hast ; fr ^at, he has ; ic^ '^atte, I had ; kit ^Ottcjl, thou hadst; cr ^Otte, he had; INDICATIVE. Plural. FBESENT. ttir |akn, we have; i'^r ^a6et, you have ; [tc %aUxi, they have. EUFERFBOT. ttir fatten, we had ; i^r ^attct, you had ; |lc l^atten, they had. PERFBOT. i^ ^a6c geljaJt, I have had; hjlr ^akn ge^aW, we have had; lu ^ojl ge|a6t, thou hast had; l^r |aM gc'^aM, you have had; ix lot ge^oW, he has had ; (Ic ^d&txi gelobt, they have had. PIUPEBFEOT. i&i 'featte ge'^aBt, I had had ; tuir fatten gc^aBt, we had had ; iu ^Ottcfl ge^aW, thou hadst had; i^r |attet ge^aBt, you had had ; cr ^fltte ge|aSt, he had had ; fie :^attcn ge^a6t, they had had. FIBfiT FUTUEB. ic^ tucrbc '^abcn, I shall have ; ipir wertcn ^aBen, we shall have ; tu wirfl |akn, thou wilt have ; i^x tDerict %aUv., you will have ; ,er wiri) :§aBcTt, he will have ; |5e wcrbcnl^oBeu, they will, hVe. 8ECX)5D FUTURE. I shall thou wilt ) he will IMFEBATIYXE. %dbt (tu), have (thou) ; :§aBct or ^aBt (f^r), have (ye, or yoj;) ii) werbc j „ ^ er jDtrb ) "'°" \ -i" ttJtt iuerben j ^ ^ . we shall \ -^ t [■ o t^"^ »"*«* f |-| yo" "^'^ [ o ) I fie toericn ) ^■°" they will ) | 126 LESSON XXXVt 2. IDIOMS WITH ^aBen. 23n ^ajl gut \!ot^tn. (See p. 446). Er ^at te(^t, fie ^at unrec^t. 4>«6tn Sie Ijunger ? id& ^a6e Duijl. £i ^at gem ein warmeS Simmtx. St ^at fctne Sieunbe gem. ©ie ^aSen i^it ^ifft lieb. SDit ^aten gro^e Sile S(^ 5abe i^n in Serbai^t". 3c& ^aJc Serbai^t' a«f i^n. SBir ^aitn iai (Selb not^^ig. 3d& toerbe Si^t ouf i^n ^aien. SBaS ^abcniSie? 3c^ $aie Sangeweite. 5Da« ^aien Sie bage'gen ? grttu 31. ^at Irauer. 3Ha« ^at i^n sum Sefien. (&i $at feine Sile. Yon may well langh. He is riglit, sho is wrong. Are you hungry ? I am thirttjf . He likes a warm room. He is fond of his friends. They love him very mnch. We are in great haste. I suspect him; or I am suspicions of him. We are in want of the money. I will attend to (take care of) him. What ails you? I feel ennuL What objectiou have you ! Mrs. N. is in mourning. They are bantering him. There is no hurry about it POSITION OF THE MAIS VERB IN COMPOUND TENSES. 3. In compound tenses and independent propositions the m finitive or participle is placed at the end of the sentence. In the second fiiture the auxiliary ^abtn {or fcin) follows the past participle : SBaS ^ttt er ge^ttSt ? What has he had? (Et ^at 3?i^ta ge^ttBt'. He has had nothing. (He has nothing had.) |>atten ©ie eS ge^oit' ? Had you had it t (Had you it hadi) Si^ tterbe e* ^aittl. I shall hare it. (I shall it have.) ®ie tterben c8 ge»i§' ge* You will certainly have (You wiU it certainly 1)lW ^aten. had it. had have.) 4. When a verb has two objects connected by a conjunction, Jie last may either precede or foUow the verb : &a6en ©ic metn Su^ ge'^aSt' ober btt« \ S^rigc? or \ fiabcn ©ie mein Suc^ obet iai S^tigc | ge^aBt'? ) The infinitive with ju, when depending on another verb, is placed last: Sr ^at ni^t f^tit ge|(tit' eineii Srief He has not had time to write • ui fi^reiifv. letter. Have yon had my book oryounl AGREEliENT OF SUBJECT AND VERB. 121 a. TVo or more nouns in the singular, as embracing but one i1)nt serlaf'fenea Your royal Highness leaves {leavey niftt Jeiteter. — ©. it not more joyful. ©ctfiJtetc. aBa«|fltte ber Sntenot^tg? SBtr ■^atte bie Sruitaabcl ? ^tttte S^t greunb fte &t^M? SSJet :^at iai Sof^Dapier ge'^ait'? SBttnn wetben ©ie bie Dbla'ten unb baa g)etf($aft :^a6cn? Si) '^aie gem einen gropcn Dfen. 2>ct Oliiilic^e, bet Se^a'alic^e ^at gut SReben,— ®. Examples. What did the old man need 1 Who had the breast-pin 1 Had your friend had it ? Who has had the blotting-paper ! When shall you have the wafers and stamp ? I like a large stove. The fortunate, the comfortable (per- son) may well tallc VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. S)te Stnget, -, pi. -n, the angle (fish- ing-tackle) ; Sttib, soon; ® te SIttttcr, -, pL -n, the sniall-pox ; Ste So^ne, -, pi. -n, the bean; 35te Brufhtabel, -, pi. -n, breast-pin ; ^ai !Dtcn|lniab^e«, -i, pL -< the servant-girl; ©ie (Erbfe, -, pL -n, the pea; 2)te ®Eif}e, -, the barley; ®c|lern, yesterday; !Der 4)ttfer, -i, the oats, L. xxvi. 10 ; Set ^ain, -ti, pi. ^a|ne, the boat; Da* 88fc^t"»t>ier, ~ei, pi. -e, the blot- ting-paper ; Cte SDlafern, -, pi. -, the measles/ S)te Oila'jtf -, pi. -Uf the wafer; 5)et aioggett, -«, the rye; ®er ©ad, -e8, pi. ©aSe, the bag; S)tta ©ii|arla^fte6et, -8, pi. -, the scarlet-fever; S)te ©i^aufel, -, pi. -tt, the shovel Da« 9)etfi$aft, -c8, pi. -e, the seal; UeSetmorgen, day after to-mor- row; S)«S aJaterlanb, -eS, pL -e, -lanbcr, the native country; Set or bie 3Jctwanbte,-n, pl.-n, the relative, j«lation; S5{t or bie Sttife, -n, -, pi ~lt, th« orphan. 128 LESSOH XXXVI. Exercise 68. SlufgaU 68. 1. SQai f^atti i)cr Saucr in ten grof en ©oden ? 2. Sr ^otte SSo'^nen, ©erfle, ^afer unb Sftoggen barin. 3. SSJcr ^t tneinen Ma1in unb meine Slngel ge^abt? 4. ®er altc Sifi^cr ^attc |!e ge^cm, unt i^ :§ak fte ^cute geiabt. 5. 2Bonn :^atte tit\ti ^inb Me Slattern ? 6. Sa ^at bie !Kafcm ge:^abt, okr nic^t bie Slattern. T. ^aben bicfc SBaifen feine SerttJanbten ge|abt I 8. ©ie |abcn S5erwanbtctt in i^rem SSatertanbe ge^abt, unb werben balb ^ier greunbe :§abcn. 9. fBann werben ©ie bie Dblaten, bos ^Jctfc^aft unb baa Sof^opier :|aben? 10. 3c^ wcrbc fte ntorgen ober iibermorgen ^a^ ben. 11. 3ene ^inbcr :^aben ben Sefen unb bte ©c^aufel be3 2)ien[t* ntabc^cng ge^abt. 12. Me lange :|atten ®ic bie Srujlnabel ge^abt ? 13. 3c^ latte pe nic^t langc ge^abt. 14. §aben ©ie je bag ©c^or* lac^fteber ge^abt? 15. 9lein, ic^ ^be ti nic ge^abt. 16. §obe i(^ rcc^t ober unred^t? IT. ©ie '^abcn unrest, unb er '^at re^t. 18. 3<| ^flk gem ein warmes Qimmtt. Exercise 69. iKufgabe 69. 1. Had the miller the barley, the oats and the peas 1 2. The miller had the wheat and the rye, and the peasant had the oats, the peas and the beans. 3. Have the diildren had the servant- girl's shovel and broom? 4. How soon shall you have the wafers, the seal and the blotting- paper 1 5. I shall have them to day or to-morrow. 6. These orphans have relatives in their native country, but Jiave had none in this. 1. Did you have my boat and my angle yesterday ? 8. No, but I have had them to-day, and shall have them the day after to-morrow. 9 How long will the boy have this hat 1 10. He will not have it long. 11. What has the miller had in those large bags 1 12. He has had wheat and flour in them. 13. My brother has had the measles. 14. Have you had the scarlet-fever ? 15. Has that man had the small-pox 1 16. When will the child have a new breastpin ? 17. Who likes a warm room ? 18. Who has had my blotting-paper ? CONJUGATION OF ij^tcceit. 129 LESSON ZXXVn. Cection XXX \^n. CONJUGATION OF S t C B C Jl. INFINITIVE. Present. Perfect I,.6cji, to love. gelleBt fjobm, to hive loved. PARTICIPLES. Present. Perfect. ttfbcnb, loving. geltcBt, loved. INDICATIVE. Singular. Plural. PRESENT* TENSE. i^ IleBc, I love; . wir Ue'6en, we love; tu ItcBjl, thoulovest; l|r lickt, you love; cr ticBt, he loves ; f!e liEien, they love. IMFEEFEOT TENSE. tc^ IteMe, I loved ; Wir lieWcn, we loved ; t)tt licBtejl, thou lovedst ; i'^r IteBtet, you loved ; cr ticBte, he loved ; (Ic lieWett, they loved. PERFE(7I TENSE. {&I late gelteBt, I have loved ; ttlr laBen gelicBt, we have loved; tu |ajl gellcBt, thou hast lov'd. % %M gettebt, you have I'v'd. cr |at geticBt, he has loved ; fie l^oien gelicBt, they have I'v'd, PLXre'EEFEOT TENSE. tc^ latte gelicBt, I had loved ; wir gotten gcttcBt, we had loved; tu '§attc|lgeUeBt,thouhadstlv'd. i^r '^attet gelleBt, you had I'v'd. er '^atU gcMt, he had loved; fie fatten ■gelicBt, they had I'v'd. FIHST FUTUEE TEN8B, \&i hjerbt HcBen, I shall love ; wir tuertcn lieBett, we shall love ; tu Wirfl HeBen, thou wilt love ; i'^r Weriet HeBen, you will love ; er Wirt licBcn, he will love ; fic werben HeBen, they will love. SECOND FUTURE TENSK ic6 tcerbej „ . I shall \ „ wirwerienj „ ^ we shall \ ku ttJlrfl til thou wiltt i| f^r werbet |-||youwill y || cr tttlrb ) "^^ he will ) "^ ° fie tocrBen) ^'^theywiU) "^^ IMPERATIVE. rti IMPERATIVE. lleBc (ill), love (thou) ; HeBet or ticBt (it)r), love (ye or you) 130 lESSON XKXVn. PRESENT PARTICrPLB. 1 The present participle is formed by suffixing f nfc to the root : 5off-cnb, hoping ; '^Br-enb, hearing ; jna^cnb, making ; Icb-cnb, living; lieB-cni, loving ; loB-cnb, praising. PERFECT PARTICIPLE. 2. The perfect participle is formed by sufiixing t to the root, and prefixing, to verbs that have the accent in the first syl- lable, the augment ge: gc-^off-t, hoped ; ge-'^Br-t, heard ; ge-mad^t, made ; ge-Ieb-t, lived ; gc-Itc6-t, loved ; gc-IoB-t, praised ; jiutiir-t, studied ; »erfauf-t, sold ; kjhraf-t, punished. 3. Verbs compounded with the particles 6c, cmpt, ent, etc, (§ 94. and 95.) do not take the augment g c; hence those com- pounded with the particle g c have the same form for the per- fect participle as the simple verb ; thus, gc^ort is the participle of lijven and ge^orenj geloBt c-f loBcn and geloicn, etc. : (£r l^at mi^ ge^Stt'. He has heard me. fErbe toufcn. He wishes to buy some {afew) horseu. Si| '^alJe ttnige ©to^lfebern, 'bxmxH^tn. I have some (afew) steel pens, do ©it ttel^c ? you need some (any) ! S^ ^oBt au^ VitXiit, aHx mein gtcunb I have some too, but my friend has ^at teine. none. CONSTRUCTION OF BENTBNCKS CONNECTED WITH THE RELATIVE PRONOUN. 5. When the members of a sentence are connected by a rel- ative pronoun, the verb is placed last ; and the auxiliary, vrhen used, follows the main verb ; 3($ 1 i e ben 5Dl«nn, ben I praise the man whom ©ie 1 i e n. you praise. S(^ loie ben SKann/ b e r I praise the man who I praise the man who ntic^ 1 i t. praises me. me praises. JfJi^l Stlle (tnb jufrtt'benj Not all are contented Not all are contented b t e reii^ jtnb. who are rich. who rich are. £t ^at baS SBu^f b a ^ i$ He has the book that I He has the book that I ge^lttt' ^ a & e. have had. had have, ©ie tto^nen in ben? ^aufe They live in the house They live in the house in welc^cm ttli B»V "^ which we shall in which we live nenttetben. live. shall. 6. Besides the relative pronoun, there are many connec'ing iirords which require the same construction (List L. 53.) : er aB«te uaitete, i\i ttti^'ixlt. 140 LESSON xxxrx. EXAMPLES OF PRINCIPAL AND SUBORDINATE BENl'ENCBS. Principal Sentence. SRtc^t Snie finl) iufrie'ben, Sicienigcn finb nii^t t!)eife> Sie Seute fitib ^eute ^xtx, Sebermann ma($t (ic^ Icii^erUc^, Subordinate Sentence. welc^e rei^ jtnb. Bjcl^e nid^W lernen. bit geflctn ^iei ttartn. bet ft^ fct6|i lobt. 1. A relative clause, as in English, may be placed betwe« the subject and predicate of the principal sentence, without changing the construction of the latter : Subject of the principal Sentence. SRt^t arte, gji^t SSUe, ©itjentgent Scbctmarm, Sie fieute, ■Die Seute, Relative Clause, bie lei^ finb, bie sufrie'bcn jinbi »el(^t ni^ts lernen, bet (tc^ fel6fi lo6t, bie flejletn ba waten, bie $eute ^ter finb. Predicate of the principal Sentence. finb jufrie'ben. fmb rei^. (inb nii^t tneife. ma($t jic^ Ia^er(ti$. jtnb ^eutc ^iet. isaicn geflem ba. EXAMPLES OF THE USE OF WORDS EMPLOYED AS INTERROGATTVK AND RELATIVE. Interrogative Sentences. SBer ^at bag Snc^ ge^aSt' ? SBa« fallen ©iege^ort'? aConn wetben ©ie ge^cn ? SBo tto^nen bie ©^Wer ? SBantm' ^tttte man ben ©olbat'en ie* iltaft'? aCie ^atte ber ©c^uler feine SlufgttJen gelenit'? Seifptele. fi0 gewa^rt' bie SteBe gat oft ein Pab* It(^ ®ut, toenn jte ben SBiHen be4 gorbernben me^t a\i fcin ®lu(I ie* bentt'.— ®. 3Ran^e* ®ute f^atet wai, tocil air eS miptau'c^en. teilig i|l btt« ®tW, fo bem flun|ller K ©cfi^ti^'tc, -e, pL-n, the story; S)aS ®cfi|i)pf, -ti, pi. -e, creature; ®efltnb, healthy; S)ie |)tn|td)t, pi. -en, the respect; 4i6c^|1, extremely; |)ofen, to hope; ffutj, short; S)er aHeifiet, -«, pL -, the master ; ©tegen, to conquer; S)er ©ttefel, -a, pL -, -n, the boot, ®ie UeSung, -, j)!. -en, the exercise the practice ; Unmo^rfc^einlt*, improbable ; SSersroet'feln, to despair; SfBetl, because ; Bweifeln, to doubt Exercise 74, 3lufgaBe 74. 1. ®1aubm ©tc Me ©ef^id^te, bic ber Wln^a mi crjii^tt fat? 2. 3c^ SBeip nic^t Bon »3cl(^er ®ic fpred^en, er ^at uns me'^rerc er* ja^It. 3. !Die ©ttefel, tie er getauft ^at, fJnb I'^m ju cnge uni jw {urj. 4. Seute, wetd^e jwetfcln, Dcrsweifeln ; aitv bie §offenben jle* gen. 5. SBos ®ie in ber ©tabt ge:§brt ^aben, ifl pc^jl unwa'^rs f(^einU(^. 6. ®r wirb bie Stai^rtc^t ge'^ort ^akn, c^e »tr i'^n )'e|en. 7. §let ijl ber SCogen, ben ^^x Sebicnte tefleUt l^at. 8. SJer SWann, in bejfen §aufe toir getnoint l^akn, Ijl fe^r frec^. 9. 3^ '^oAi Jtoct 2le)}fel, unb er |at beren brel. 10. S^ie SSIeiftifte, mit b'enen ®ie fi^rciBcn, gc'^&rcn bcm ^na6en, be([en Siic^er i(^ '^aBe. 11. Sin gefunber SJJenfc^, ber nie fleigig arBeitet, iji, in jeber §inf!(^t, ein ctenbea ®ef(^b))f. 12. Die gran, beren ©o'^n S^ven Sifc^ gemas^t ^at, iji unfcrc Sflac^krin. 13. Die ©cbiiler, bcnen blefe gebern ge'^Brcn, lernen tii^t »iel, tceil fte nic^t flei^tg i^rc Ucbungcn lefen. 14. SJijfen @ie, wer bie 3)ferbe je^t ^at, bie ii^ gejlern ge^^aBt ^aBe? 15. 3<^ wetg nic&t, tuelc^e 9)ferbc ©ie ge^ern ge'^aBt ^(iBen. 16. 2)iefe 3lufgaBe ijl bie fii^merflc, bie ii^ gelernt |aBe. Exercise 75. SlufgaBe 75. 1 . Where is the servant that has ordered these horses 1 2. I do not know who has ordered them. 3. Are the shoes that the boy has made too narrow ? 4. Tke boots that he has made 142 LESSON XL. are too short. 6. Why do you not believe the story that they told usl 6. I do not believe it because he has told me other stories that are not true. 1. Not every maii who is industri- ous is in every respect a good man. 8. Not all stories are untrue which are improbable. 9. Not all despair who doubt; not all conquer who hope. 10. Is a wise man ever unhappy because he is poor? 11. Is every healthy man discontented who is not industrious 1 12. Do you know where the man ives whose house we have bought 1 13. I know where he has lived, and I have a friend who knows where he now lives. 14. Have you my pens 1 15. Yes, I have three of them. 16. The lady whose books we have had is a sister of the scholars with whose pens we are writing. 17. Do you find these exercises more difficult than the others that you have learned ? ^ I • » » ■ » LESSON XL. fiertion XL. 3C c r ASD SB fl ^ AS relative. 1. 35B e r is used with the force of an antecedent and relative, or may be followed by the demonstrative pronoun itx, (L. XLIV.) in a succeeding clause : SB e t jtc^ nt^t feldfl Sejte^U', Unit (He) -who governs not himaelf re- immer eitt fine(^t. — ®. mains always a dave. SB t r nt^t ^Bren mitt, ber mup fii^Ien. He who will not hear must feeL 2. SB c r sometimes occurs in the signification of 3fnianB : £teg au^bic ew^'ge 3)fottE n>en juratfr Even if the eternal portal should ei f^Wiegt. — St. SB. ©. let any one return, he would keep silence. 3. 3B a 8, like what, is used with the signification "of an ante- cedent and relative ; it also stands as a simple relative after a neuter antecedent which does not refer to a previously expre.ss- ed noun : Iiopvett flifit' t»" Slfiii flitl't He who gives in:n.ediatelyw^«< one SB a « man wunft^' «nb lictt.— ® wishes and loves, gives twofold. SBaiSbu ^cute t^un tatinfl, iai set* Tf^ai thou canst do to-day defer f(^ie'ie ni^t auf morgcn. not until to-morrow. SUer AND 2Ca3 as -relative. ] i3 5nic3) IB a a li^ ^6te, rtnb ©rtntmen ber All that I hear are voices ofjoj Sreube «nb beS l;inf«. — ®eg. and thankfulness. %U(i, » aa tfl «nb geji^ie'^t, ge^iirl iu Every thing that exists and occurs einem 3)Ian, men bent l»it nii^tS belongs to a plan of -which wa Setjle^ett. understand nothing. 4. For further illustration of the use of the pronominal ad- verbs, compare with the following examples, § 103. 1. 2 : SRic^t bte S)jrai$e an unb fitr jt^ ifl Not (L. XT.TI. 1. a.) language in and Tti^tig tudjtig unb jtctlt(|, fonbetn of itself is correct, forcible and bcr ®el|l i|} c?, ber jtc^ b a r t n ttX' elegant, but it is the spirit that loi'ljett. — ®. is embodied in it. SB 1 1 n' ^at et Unrec^t ? In what (wherein) is he wrong ! 5. When the antecedent is a pronoun of the first or second person, the verb agrees with the relative in the third ; or the personal pronoun is repeated after the relative : SBaS fann ii| t^m, ber feXber piflo* What can I do, who myself am (is) tjl? helpless? I)aS wlffett Wit, b i e » ir bie ®em' That we know, who (we) hunt tha fen jagen. — ©. chamois. 6. The relative sometimes precedes the word to which it re- fers, which latter is sometimes omitted : ©ie e« genoffctt^aten, benen t|^ e8 Those who have enjoyed it, to them teener. — ©. it is dear. ® i e et geme^tt' ^at, ntSgen um i^n (They) whom he has aggrandized weinen. — S. niay weep for him. 1. The relative can not, as sometimes in English, be omitted, but must always be expressed : 3S) fc^cime mic^ bet SRoffe, bie ii^ I shame me of the part ( — ) I play- f^jtelte ; ed. — Scott. '© t|i ber Stienb iti Zeimi, b et mit 'T is the sunset of life (that) gives gE^cimnipsoIIeS SBiffen gieit. me mystical lore. 8, In subordinate sentfences the copula (auxiliary veib) is frequently omitted : Den Dutfl nfti$ felnet (Sttennt'ntg flittt The thirst after a knowledge of him geruii', ber ana mit biefem 2)utjl self, He will certainly satisfy who etjc^of fen (^at). — S. (has) created us with this thirst. ZPcnn bu bttS gro§E ©piel bet- SCelt When thou hast seen the great gjfe'^en C^aji), fo fe^tefi bu tetter game of the world (life), thoti re- lit bii^ felbji jutiid'. — ©. tumcst richer to thyself. 14i LESSON ■XL. Sctfpielc. ExAMPLBs. 6tn ftS^Itc^c* SJott t^ut SnieS, Vsai ti A cheerful people does aU that it ju t^un ^cU, mtt tefTerem aSillea, has to do, with (a) better will aI«etnbumme«obet f(|»ermut5t9ea. than a stupid or a melancholy — SB. one. aSer gut i|}, finbet ®ute8 im S?eicn mi) He who is good finds good (things) im Sob. — SB. in life and in death. Die aBiberWortisteiten Itnb fur Me (The) disappointments are to (for ©eele ba«, tt)a« etn Itnsettitter pit the soul what a thunder-storm bie Suft i|l. is to (for) the air. IBcr ni^t iuwei'IensuDiel uitb jawet^ He who does not sometimes feel empftn'bet, bet ennijtn'bet gewig' im* too much and too tenderly cer- »;t JU tpenig. — SR. tainly always feels too little. S^t, IJr fdlSfl feib ci, bie i^r euet eig^- It is you, you yourselves who rob Hc^ SJctetloitb SefHe'^It. — © your own fatherland. Oefe'gnet fei, bet bi(^ etfannt' 5**. — Blessed be he that did take know- ^, II, 19. ledge of'thee. VOCABULAKT TO THE EXERCISES. Segta'iin, b'uried; Sejla'tigenr to confirm ; t)cr SunbcSgenop, -en, pi. -en, the confederate, ally; Sarin, in, into it, therein, § 103. 2. ; Srmat'tcn, to expect; ®ct^tttt', done; OeiBtnn'en, to gain; p. 350. Z)le ®rube, -, pL -n, the pit; firtinEen, to grieve; t>it SRa^t, -, pL Wlii)tt, power, 33tt8 ©tJtti^Wort, -ti, pL -ttBrtet.the adage; ©u^en, to seek, look for; S)ei Xanb, -ti, the trash; Untei^t, wrong; ffiotgelletit, day before yester- day; SBttgen, to venture; 3BaIten, to act, rule; SBotin', in what, wherein. Exercise 76. StufgoBe 76. 1. S5Ber jwetfclt, serawcifclt; wcr ^ofP, ^ot gcftcgt. — fH. 2. gin aUei ©pric^ttjort fagt, " SDcr aiittern cine ©rute gra6t, fatit fcI* hex barcin." 3. 9ttte«, toai man uni sorgejlcm in tier ©tabt son tern j?riege erjii^Ite, ^at fic^ BejlSKgt. 4. SBiflen ©ie, ttorin ttir unrest 'i^cUn ? 5. C)u, ker bu fo ficigig iijt, loirjl f^ncH lernen. 6. "Du, tie bu fo fleigig bi|l, tcirjl Biel lernen'. 7. 3^r, iic i^^r fo ficipig feit, toerbet »iel lernen. 8. ©ie,tie |ie fo fleipig jtnc, wcrbcn 6ie( lernen. 9. SBijfen ®ie, wai fiir ein 33u(^ unb toai fiir fJapier i* gc!auft '^abt ? 10. Wan glauH Icic|t, tcai man l^offt unb toiinfii^t. 1 1 . ©ic finb begroBen 2ltte, mit benen ic^ gcwaltet unb gelieBt (^a6e DETERMINATIVE PRONOUNS. 145 see 8).—®. 12. Sffier ni&iti tvagt, gewtnnt ni6)ti. 13. Sflic^t was er gefagt, fonbern waa er gcf^an, }at f{e gelranft. 14. ©etnc 5Kac^t war gr5§er afe feine Sunteagenopn crwartct, grbf er nU fit flcteiinfci^t l)atttn. 15. SBer nte^ts ali ©elb fud^t, lieM STanl). Exercise 11. Slufgafic 71. 1. Do you kno^ -what the children have told me 1 2. I have upard all that they have said to you. 3. What has been said and done grieved the old man. 4. All that wastwd to our friends has been confirmed. 5. We do not know wherein the boys are wrong, do you'? (L. XXXVin. 7.) 6. They have learned less than we had wished and expected. 7. Do you knoT whom the scholars have been looking for 1 8. Who steals my purse steals trash. 9. Not all gain who venture ; do all ven- ture who gain ? 10. The power of the king was greater than hajiadyxpected, greater than his allies had wished. 11. What does the adage say of a man who digs others a pit 1 12. Do you understand what I have told you, and do you know why I have told it to you ? 13. The people I have been visiting are Americans. 14. Did you hear what the boys are speaking of? 15. Do you know whose pen he wUl write the letter with' 16. 1 have told you that I have heard. LESSON XLI. £ection XLI, determinative PRONODlfS. 1. The determinative pronouns are berieittgc, Hcjc* titgc, bagienige, (ber, see 3.) bcrfeUc, iiefelBe, iaif fe 1 6 e and f 1 (^ e r, f o I d) e, f o I (^ e S. eli^c)bteSBa^t« Those who do not love the truth ^eit nlc^t lieben, ft'* '^W Sit. are not good. Si^ metne Biijt biefeS Sui^, fonbent I do not mean this book, but that b a 8, welc^eg baaflinb ^at. (the one) that the child has. 4. 2)er[cl6e answers in use and signification to the same: S(^ ^abt benfelten SJJann gefe'^en, ben I have seen the same man that he et gefe'^cn ^at. has seen. SEBit ieibe lejcn biefeltcn Sitter. We both read the same hooks. SUBSTITUTION OF XcrfcIBc FOR THE PERSONAl PROKOUW. J; C r f e 1 1 c is substituted for the personal pronouns : a. After prepositions when the pronoun refers to animate, or inanimate objects : (£r |at mcinenSIeifUft unb fc^ieiitmtt He has my pencil and is writing b em f e 1 6 en {not mit i^m). with it (with the same). ftr fi^nitt ben Sti)fel unb gab mir einen He cut the apple and gave mo t S^eil b e f fe I b e n. part of it (of the same). b. To avoid ambiguity or the repetition of a pronoun : Diefe Seute ftnb unfere SJa^batn, fen* These people are our neighbors, ncn Ste biefelbeti? do you know them (the same)? (Er lobt ben ifnaben, well b c t f e lb e He praises the boy because he (the feine 312uUet e^it. same), honors his mother. DETERMINATIVE PRONOUNS. 141 (Et licit felnen SBrubcr, aSei ttic|t Me He loves his brotlier, but njt Am Jfinbei b e f f e IJ e It. (brother's) children . Er ^at bie ge|Iet tinea gropen SKan- He has the errors of a great man Jiea, o^iic bie SJerbien'^e beffel* without his merits (the mei;t» ten. of one), ©ie fc()rie6En i^rcn Sinbctit, bie f el* They wrote to their children tlal i c 11 mitijttn glftc^ alireifeit. they must start immediately. 5. © 1 d) C r is frequently followed by a relative pronoun, which in this position is rendered by as : S^ Icfe ttttr f 1 1 ^ e Sfic|er, bie le^r- I read only such boots as (which) rei(^ pnb. are instructive. 6. When folder marks similarity, rather than identity, it is followed by iu i c : $aien ©ie folc^e Sinte toleii^ b«=" Have you bought such jnk as 1 tauft'^aie? have? Stt, ii^ ^abe cien folc^e. Yes, I have just swh. ©oli^e ©<5tffe, »ie bie, son be«cn /SmcA ships os (those that) you speak Sie ftircc^en, ftnb unjt^er. of are unsafe. T. © I (^ e r is sometimes omitted (from a sentence) and a personal pronoun introduced after the subject : Sine St^rcfne (foI($e) tt)ie bie Itnfletb' A tear ««cAo« (the) immortals weep, liien f i e tscinen, trot in fein gto* entered his large, dark eye. pe« bunfleS Stuge.— Sr. 8. © I c^ C r, when used with the indefinite article, follows it; when, however, the final syllable is dropped (L. XV. 3.) foli^- precedes the article : Eitt folc^er 5tuftrag fc^retft miiS) Such a mandate frightens me not. nii^t.— ®. ©clt^-ein aSetter ifl feUettpfot* Such weather has seldom come to c^er ®rntc gefom'men. — ®. such a harvest. 9. © 1 ^ C r is sometimes used as a substitute for a demon- strative, or^a personal pronoun : t>'u Sc^nelligfett mit bet ©olc^eS The rapidity with which «Ats (such) ttUSgcfu^tt soar, liep bent geinbe was executed, did not leave the nic^t Sell, t« 5« ser^in'bern. — ©. foe time to prevent it. Stlf)5iele. Examples. S3tf} bit nut tepn 5?Kttnb, ber glucEIi^ Ait thou the friend of him only i|i? 9Jic§t bep, ben Elenb jliirst?— who is happy? Not of hin, fi. whom adversity overthrows ? 148 LESSON XLI. SBeije fHatuf, ttte ftlla Ifl bet, ;tr nie- Wise Nature, how Iiappyia he who maU ben SnbjiBeil bEtnei ©^on^eit never loses the design of thy oerlt'ert!— SB. beauty! Die 3;:^at — biefe Sunge beS |)erjena — Action — that tongue of the heart iji jugleic^ bet gtfuit'bepe Salfam —is at the same time ita most befelBen, unb iebcr gute fflotfttj iji -wholesome bala^ and every good eia Xtofl, — 0i. purpose is a comfort VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. ftti Sotti^ct, -, pi -, the cooper; Sauctn, to continue, last; 33le dnttt -, pi- -n, the duek; ®ie ®ule, -, pi. -n, the owl ; Die gotelle, -, pL -n, the trout; ®efe'^en, seen; S5cT ^Mi)t, -ti, pL -e, the hawk; Set ba[t, -n, pL -n, the hare; 33ct ^oiftg, -i, pi. -e, the cage; Set Sai)i, -c8, pL -t, the salmon ; Siigeit, to lie; 23tt 9KanbeI; -, pL -n, the almond ; Set SKefTetfc^mteb, -ti, pL -e, cutler; Dtbenlii^, orderly; Die 9>itt|t(^e, -» pL -en, the peach; Set SJutin', -8, pL -e, the ruby; Set SRu^m, -e8, the glory; ©oufen, to tipple, p. 352; Set ©matagb', -i, -ti, pL -tn, the emerald; ^et Xtwiij, -8, -ti, pL -t, carpet; . SDie 3;pi, -, pL -en, the door; Sugenb^aft, virtuous; jDie SBJa^i^cit, -, pL -en, the truth. Exercise tS. [ufgaic 78. 1. ©tejemgen, tic ung fc^mcii^etn, ftni) leine tua'^re grcunbe. 2. Unfer befler grcuni tfl terjcnige, ier uni iie SEi^r^eit fagt. 3. '£>as ®IM icpn (be^jenigen), ber fduft, bauert nj^t lange. 4. Vai' tenigc, toag ttjeber fc^bn noc^ nit^Hc^ ifl, ifl ni^i gut, 5. 3Bir lefen nur fol^e Siii^er, iueli^c nii^tii^ URt» le^ncic^ fmb. 6. 5)ie Scorer (oBen i^re ©c^iilcr, weil biefctien gut unb orbcntH^ finb. 1. ®3 finb jwci 2lbler, cin ^abic^t, einc Sule, ctn Slabe unb eine Saubc in icncn ^afigcn ; :^a6en ®ic biefelbett gefe^en ? 8. 3fl biefer Seppic^ berfelbe, ben ®ie gcfauft '^aben? 9. 9lctn, i(^ ^aSe benjenigcn ge* fauft, ben ©ie ^cute SKorgcn gcfc^cn |aben. 10. 3c^ fc|c bic Jpr DCS ^aufeS, abcr nic^t bic gcnflcr bcf[cI6en. 11. SWcine grcunbc faufcn bic Pftrfii^en 3|rer Stac^barn, abcr nic^t bie iSlanbcIn ber* fclben. 12. 3c^ \d^idt biefen ©maragb unb bicfcn SHubin bemfelben SOTanne, ber fte mix gcf^ictt |at. 13. 5Rur biejenigcn fmb wcife, tt>ef(^e tugcnb^aft finb. 14. Tier Ttam, ber ben Slat, ben £oc^S unb tic gorcHe gcfauft :^nt, ifl cin Sottificr; unb berjcnigc, ber tie Snt» unb ben §afcn lauft, ifi fin 9Ref[crf(^tnicb. DETERMINATIT6 PRONOUNS. 149 Exercise 19. 5l«fga'6e 79. 1. Have you bought these peaches, or those that belonged to cur neiglibors 1 2. Are these carpets better than those that the cooper has bought ] 3. He who does not speak the truth is not a good man. ^4. Those who love the truth are much more happy than those w^o do not love it. 5. Is this the same ruby that .the cutler had yesterday 1 6. No, the one that he had if arger than this one, but I have the same emerald that he had, 1. Those who lie are foolish and miserable. 8. True friends are those who tell us the truth, and do not flatter us. 9. The al- monds that you have bought are better than those that he has. 10. The shoes that the boy made are too small, and those that the man made are too large. 11. He who is proud and vain is foolish. 12. Those who do not make themselves useful are A not contented, and those who are discontented are not happy 13. It is not always those who have much money that are non- tented. 14. Those who are wise read only such books as are instructive and useful. "~ LESSON XLII. Cection XLn. USE OF THE ARTICLE. 1. The definite article is used : a. Before nouns, whether singular or plural, when taken in a general and unlimited sense : ®ct ®lam«nt i|l tin Ebelfletn. The diamond is a precious atone. 55 a a ®oIb i|l ein titUi SBJetaH'. tilanb ip ba* r»a1)xt£ii!jU The Saviour is the true light. Dei |)imwel ^ot ti gettoHt'. Heaven has (so) willed it. Die ®rte ijl fletntr «W fcic ©onne. The earth is smaller than the sun 150 LESSON xin. e. Before the name 3 of lakes, mountains, rivers and the masoiLine and feminine names of coimtries : 2) et Stfus' ijl ein SSuIfan'. Vesuyius is a volcano. Bit SurW i|l moic^ttget aXi won Turkey is more powerful than vaa jiauitc. supposed. d. Before the names of days, months and seasons : B t i«©amjlas tji mi angene^mer ttte Saturday is more agreeable to u bttSKontag. than Monday. £) e t Sebtuttr' i(i ber turjcjle Momt. February is the shortest month. «. Before the names of ranks, bodies and systems of dco- tiine : 2) a 8 9>atkment' scrur't^etlte ^arl bm Parliament sentenced Charles tha Bweitcn j u m Sobe. Second to death. 33 a a E^viflent^um i|l ber SCelt etn Christianity is a great blessing to gtojtr ©cgen, the world. f. Before the superlative of adjectives, hefore infinitives used substantively, as also before the words ^of, ^irc^e, iUlarft, SSlultc, @^ulc and ©tatt : 33 te metflen SUein fi^tilen i^te flin* Most parents send their children to ber In b t e ©c^itle unb in b I e Stride. school and to church. (£t gtf t oft in b I c ©tabt, aitx et ttojnt He often goes to town, but he does nt^t gem in b c t ©tabt. not lite to live in town. ff. Before the proper names of intimate friends, or servants, and when the name of an author is put for his works : SBannge'^tberSo^annaMfben^Btattt? Wben does John go to market! SSSit Icfen ben Slopjlod. We are reading Klopstock. h. Before proper names preceded by adjectives or titles, es also before those which do not by their ending indicate their case: Die fd^5ne Helena watbie Urfa^e bet The beautiful Helen was the causa 3er|l6'rung Xrojaa. of the destruction of Troy. Det arme SfBtl^elm aar untto'|Wid^ Poor 'WiUiam was inconsolable at u6er b e n iBerlu|l'. his loss. Bier Sa^i^un'bette lang finben mtr During the period of four centuries S8«ta'»ter in ben tomifi^en |)eercn, we find Batavians in the Boman aier no^ ben Seiten b e 8 ^onortua armies,, but subsequent to the serfc^Utn'bft ouc^ i^r Siame aui bet timeofHonorius,theirveryname ®cfi^ic^'te — ©. disappears from histoiv. USE pF THB ARTICLE. 151 t. Before nouns specifjing time or quantitj j where hi Ed" glish the indefinite article is used : 3^ fe^c i:^n swetmal b e § Sa'^teS. I see him twice a the) ji^r. ic ©proc^e ter Sctoenfi^aftcn.— SOB. 2. £te Unfc^ufi) ^at tnt ^Intmcl einen grexinb. — ^ 11. Poverty is not always the re- sult of idleness. 12. Why is the rose called the queen of flowers'? 13. March is a cold, unpleasant month; is May a more agreeable month than September? 14. The free love peace, but they love liberty still more. 15. Life is short, death is certain, eternity is long, Heaven is just. 16. Why has the boj' his hat in his hand ? LESSON XLin. Cection XLIIL OMISSION OF THE ARTICLE. 1. The article is omitted : a. Before the names of the cardinal points, when direction toward, or from them is indicated : "Zai cine SW fcgelte m^ Dflen, iai (The) one ship sailed toward the anbcre nai^ ©ubtn. east, the other toward the south. b. Before nouns used in a general sense, as the predicate cffetnoj-toerien, and before those standing in apposition after a I S, with a previously or subsequently expressed word : •Cet ©i^mElterttng tfl ©tnniWb ber The butterfly is (the or an) emblem Un|ler6'Ii^teit.— U. of immortality. etner wetnet Stuber i|i ^aufitwnn, One of my brothers is a merchant, bet attbere STrjt. the other a physician. StliS greunb tarn ii) ti nic^t tttt^en. As a friend I can not advise it. Sft8 t(l nidit Wibe, nii^tSittc tciuw?. That is not the fashion, notthecus torn with us (in our country). 1* 154 LESSON XLin. e. In legal reports and instruments, as also in many phrases befora crjlercr, (caterer, folgenber: lleiertrin'ger Mefe3 tjl eln Sieunb son The bearer of this is a friend of mir (L. XXVHL 3). mine. ScFIag'ter ii^anf'itt ia^, it. The accused maintains that, etc. riterjeti^'neter Ketpflt^'tetiii^ bag, }C. The undersigned pledges himself that, etc. d. Before nouns preceded by 3 u, indicating the purpose oi manner of an action : Er tei(l 5 tt S'fcrbe. He travels on horseback. Eftcifcn ©te ju C'ttnb obcr ju SBaffet? Do you travel by land or bj .rater! Er fa§ no^ jlt Xifij. He was still sitting at table. S3ic ^inber gel^en j u Sett. The children are going to bed. e. When two or more nouns joined by un b denote a single idea : SBir fmb mit lieijunb ©eelcbte feiniscn. We are his with heart and souL 2. The omission of the article, as in English, often gives the noun an adverbial signification ; thus, er ge'^t na(^ ^dufc, signi- fies, he is going home ; while, er ge'^t nai^ i e nt §aufc, signifies, he is going to the (specified) house. This difference is illus- trated by the phrases; to bed, to the bed; at table, a.t the table ; etc. : Um welc^e Sett ftnbeti Wir ©te } u ^ttU' At what time shall we find you a( fe ? (L. XXXVIIL 1. c.) home f SBann ge^en ®ic na c^ ^aufe ? When do you go home ! 3. When the dative of a noun, used in a general sense, is preceded by a preposition, the article is often omitted ; fi-e- quently, however, when the preposition and the article can be (iontracted into one word, the article is retained : fit ifl Etn SBIonn Don ©^re. He is a man of honor. S^itfe iie jur SRu^e. Send her to rest. Sr vxxx ougei pf| Bot ©t^merj. He was beside himself vith pain, er fagtc ea t m Some. He said it in anger. 4. Before the substantively used infinitive (L. XLIX. 4.), under the government of a preposition, the article is often omit- ted, as also before the cardinals, l^unbert, taufenl), etc. : SKani^fr SKcnfd) fc^eint mxx an Effcn Many a man seems to think only unb Xiiiitcii jU benftn. of eating and drinking. OMISSION OF THE ARTICLE. 155 ©le Sefi^ttrtigen ftc^ mil ©ctjrerten. Tliey busy themselves with writing. |)unbert Stiaimen riefen i^m naU). A hundred voices called after him. 5. The omission of the article was formerly more common than at present, and many phrases in which it occurs are still used : ®r tt(I)tete bte Stugett gen iitntmel. He directed his eyes toward heaven. S'iefer entfillolTene Son aia^te ffitn* This determined tone made (an) ttui, — ©« impression. 6. With ju, tefore the dative without the article are formed many idiomatic phrases ; as, ju ©runfce rli^tcn {lit., to direct or turn to the ground or bottom) to ruin; ju ©runie gel)ett, to perish ; etc. : 2)tr ruffifile Setbsug ticltett bte The Russian campaign ruined the "Grande Armee" (wie mail jte JU "Grand Army" (as it used to be ncnnen (Jflegte) ju Otunbe. called). ©ei bcm ruffifi^eit Selbsugt 8i«3 bie In the Russian campaign the Grand "Grande Arm^e" g« ©ritnbe. Army was destroyed. Seifpiete. Examples. Sit fegcltcit na§ SJcrben unb fie jt«^ We sailed to the north, and they Sfflcjlen. to the west. Sn Deutfi^Iartb ifl ti ©itte ben $ut In Germany it is the custom to aiium^mm, tt>etin wangreunben if take off one's hat when onemeets ge'gnet. - friends. fflJein Sruber tfi su |>aufe, unb xi) ge^c My brother is at home, and I am mSj §aufe. - going home, ^unfl iji bie re^tc |iatt» ber Sfatut'. Art is the right hand of Nature. 2)iefe ^at nur ®efi|6))'ft> J£ne ben The latter has made only crea- 9Renf(i)en geniiiil)t'.— ©. tures, the former (has made) man. Saufenb warncnbe Seifpiele fofften unS A thousand warning examples flu; gemadjt' |abcn. ought to have made us prudent. VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. Keinltc^, similar ; Btt Stfc&c, -, ashes (L. XXVI. 10); ffiluttg, bloody ; ©ic G|rijlen^eit, -, Christendom; Solgcn, to follow; Oanj, whole ; X)ci ®efang, -eS, pi.- ©efcinge, song; 23ie ®efunb'^eil, -, pi. -en, health; S)er ©runb, -ti, pi. ©riinbe, ground; Der SJorben, ~i, the North; t>ai gjilfen, -«, (the) Pilsen; 'Bit SBetfe, -, pi. -n, the journey, Sitdjten, see 6 ; 2)ie ©il)l(i(|t, -, pi. -en, the battle; ®cr ©iiben, -6, the South; 2)fr Kanj, -eg, pi. S£einje, thedancei Srttucrn, to nr.ourn ; SJerlafTen, to leave, p. 350; SBilb, wild; Silken, ' 5 migrate, go, p. ?58 156 lESSON XLIV. Exercise 82. Jtufga'Se 82. 1. 3n tte^er 3o|re«jett gie'^cn tie tuiftcn ©onfc nac& Shorten? 2. 3Bann jic:^en fte nac^ ©iiben? 3. Xlm tuelc^e 3cit jtnS ©ie tnor* gm p §aufc ? 4. 3(^ tin ntorgen ben gaitjen Sag ju §aufe. 5. 5Cantm gc:^t ber ^nate nic^t nac^ ^aufe ? 6. Sr gc|t ni^t nad| ^oufc, weil er fc^cn ju ^aufc ijl. 7. 9lcifen 3U gug rm* oft ange* ue:§mcr aU 3leifen gu f^txit ober ju SBagen. 8. 2Bir gie^cn fctH^ turcfe geinbes unb grcunbes Sanbe. — @. 9. !Dic S|riflen^cit trau» crt in ©acE unb Slfd^c.— @. 10. (Sin ©prii^wort fagt, "Uchmg ntad^t ben 9)^eijlcr." 11. Slnf Hutige ©^lac^tcn folgt ©efang unb Sana (L. 36. 5.). 12. SBir oerlaffen 3)ili'en noc^ »or SlBenb.— ©. 13. £)er 5Kater :|at Bei bicfen unb a^nlic^en SlrBeiten feine ©efunb* ^eit 3tt ©runbc gerid^tet. ExEECisB 83. 2lufgaBe 83. 1. Is your friend still at home ? 2. No, but he ■will soon be at home. 3. At what time do the scholars go home 1 4. They are already going home. 5. In what season of the year do the swallows migrate to the north ? 6. These and similar labors have destroyed the health of this man. 7. Shall you leave the city before evening 1 8. How do you say in German, " Pra& tice makes perfect?" .9. We shall soon have cold weather, the wild geese are flying to the south. 10. The boys waited a whole day. 11. Did you make the journey on foot, or by water 1 12. Have you not time to write your friends a letter? 13. At what time shall you be at home ? 14. I am now at home, and my brother is coming home. 1.5. This is one of the hardest exercises we have had. LESSON XLIV. Cection XLIV, DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 1. T)er, bi e, b as, often supply, as demonstratire pronouns, the place of btefcr and jcner, and when used with nouns. DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 157 aie distinguished from the article of like form, hy a greater emphasis : 3iS lobe b'en iSIann, nic^t bieftn, I praise that man, not this one. 3c^ loie b e n SKann, nii^t jcncn. I praiae.ttjs man, not that one. £)a4 39u(^ ^aSe ic^ fi^otl grie'fttt. This book I have already read. SBeriflbcr?* 'Who ie, that (or this) % 2. When the demonstrative t e r is used with a noun, it has he declension of the definite article ; used substantively, it foi> cws the inflection of the relative t cr (L. 39. 2.) : % txi SJtiitmetn '^aSe t^ba^ Oelb fc|on To those men I hare already sent gefi^ilit'. the money. S) en en ^aie tc§ e8 fi^on gefiltcEt'. To those I hare already sent it. Sebermann Wirb eu(^ lotcn, bap t^r Every body will praise you that bencn (i.e. the rulers) son SJJuttf you have declared war (feud) Scrg Be^b' ttngetunbigt ^ait. — ®. against those of Nuremberg. 3. The demonstrative t) e r may often he best rendered by a personal pronoun; its genitive, like that of the relative ber, always precedes the governing noun : "Cflgteu^ bet (that one) s'erfol'gen?" Does he cause you to be pursued? "Der fi^abet nic^t mtp., i^ ^aB' i:^tt He wiH do (L. 38. 1. c.) no mora etfc^Itt'gen." harm, I have slain him. Er lieit feinenSiubcr, ttbetntii^t bef« He loves his brother, but not his f e 11 Stnbct. , (that's) children. ' ffieffen SBrob bu tffefl, beffcn Sieb Whose bread thou eatest, his song btt jtngejl." thou singest. 4. ® e r is used before the genitive, as the substitute of a ? oun previously expressed, in which position it is rendered that before the objective with of; or, frequently, the English pos sessive is used and its governing noun is not expressed : S^ 1)0.it ntetncn Soil unb b en be8 I have my ball and that of tho JJnaBen. boy. 5t 1)at feine ^eber unb bie feiner He has his pen and t?iat of his S^Wefitr. sister.f " When thus used, b e r is often made still more significant by a sign or gesture : Ti a 8 (that at which I point) iji mein Su($, «nb b a 8 (that other one) tfi fetneg, that is my book, and that (yinder) is his. 2) e r ifl e^ (L. 28.8.), liefen |)unbert ©ttmmen, ber rettetc bie JJonigin/ Aeis the one, cried (a) hundred voices, he rescued the queen. •j- Or, I have my ball and the boy's (ball) ; or, he has his pen and hi" Bister's (pen). 158 LESSON XLTV. ©ie ^dim 3^re aSit'&er iinb b te S^rei Ton have your books and those ol Sruter. your brothers. ^abtn ©ie bic get tr S^rei SBruber, Hare you the pens of your broth- ober b i e ber meintgcn ? ers, or those of mine ! 5. The genitives icffen, ber en are often used (like the French en), as a substitute for a noun previously expressed, ind are sometimes rendered by some, any, and sometimes dc ftDt require translation (L. 39. 4.) : Cr Sat lein ®elb w.t^x, oSer i(§ ^ate He has no longer any money, but b t f f e It nod^. I still have some (of it). 3<^ '^abe ttine Sutler, bu ^afi be ten I have no books; you have (of ga »iel. them) too many. 6. The old form of the genitive t> e f (for i e f f e tt, as also Wef, for iBcfi'en) is stOl retained in several compounds, in the more elevated styles of composition, and in some proverb- ial phrases : (Er Iji beptocgen mein geinb. He is therefore my enemy. "S)ef rii^me ber itut'ge S^ianii' (tc^ Let not -the bloody tyrant boast Ittcflt." (himself) of this. - SS5 e 6 baa |>erj »ott i|l, b e g Muft ber Of what the heart la full, of thai SDZunb liter." the mouth runs over. 7. The neuter forms of the demonstrative pronouns (ilef C 3 being often contracted into b t C 6), as also ttelc^eS in conjunc- tion with the verb fetn (like the Trench ce), may refer to nout.s of all genders, and in both numbers : 2> i e « ftub unfere greunbe. These (this) are our iriends. SBer til b a a ? "Who is that ! 5C e I (^ e a jinb bie langfien 3Jdi$te ? Wliich are the longest nights ? ®inb baa nt^t Uttgatn? Are not those Hungarians ! 9ieinr t a jtitb aSii^men. (L. 28. 7.) No, they are Bohemians. 8. With the demonstrative and determinative pronouns Iha adverb c i e n is often used : 6v t|l e 6 e n berrcI6c. He is the very same, e i en biefea ^mi. This very (this same) house, ejen bet unb £etn Jfnbcret ^at mii^ Tnst he (ho himself) and ncbovly iU eu^ jefii^idt'. else has a mt me to you. DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 159 SJeijpiele. Examples. S)o8 fittb ik Sotaen unglflcEferger Those are the results of unfortunata X^aten. — ©. deeds. ®er Sine ^at bit, ber Stnbete onberc The one has these, the other (has) ®(iien.— ®, • ®i;fea Sud) ijl niit He*, tter ti fite^tt, bei i|l ein Diti." iBei fol^' ein lietj an fetnen Sufen bructt, bet tann fitt $evb unb |iof mit greuben fcc^ten. — ©.' other gifts. This book is dear to me, w1io steals it (he) is a thief. Who presses to his hosom such a heai-t, can joyfully (with joy) fight for hearth and home VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. S)cr Stermel, -i, pi. -, the sleeve ; ®ie Slrteit, -, pi. -en, the work; Ser EuropScr, -«, pi. -, European; ©a« gvantfurt, -8, (the) Frankfort; SaS ®emoilbe, -c«, pi. -, painting; ©ie Sadc, -, pi. -n, the jacket; Cei kutfiitr, -i, pi, -, coachman ; Der Dfficie't, -i, pi. -e, the officer; 3)ttri'fet, seeL. 33. 5; Tn 3iid)ttr, -«, pi. -, the judge ; ©aramein, to collect; ©egeln, to sail ; Stt^Slegel, -«, pi. -, the seal; Sa^StegcHacE, -cS, pi. -e, the seal- ing-wax ; ©Ixmifd), Spanish; Set Stan, -ea, pi. ©tfiUe, the stall, stable ; 35er ©tcm))el, -?, pi. -, the stamp, post-mark; ®ie Xante, -, pi. -n, the aunt; ■BaaUntrout, -e«, pi. -Muter, weed; Sie SSiiefe, -, pi. -n, the meadow; 2)ie Beitung, -, pi. -en, news paper. Exercise 84. SlufgaBc 84. 1. !Der iji tnein %dni, abev Mefer ijl rneln greunb. 2. Der a;tfc^ be« Se^rcriS ijl grB^er a\i ber beS ©(^iilera. 3. ©i^reiben ©ie mit ntfinem SSIeijlifte, ober mit bent tnetne« Srubera ? 4. 3c^ ^abe ben 3|ren unb ouc^ ben S^rea SruberS. 5. Si^ fi^rpik mit meinet geber, unb er f(^rei6t mit bcr feincS greunbes. 6. 2Co'()nfrt ®ie in ben Jpaufcrn ber Sauern, obcr in benen ber ,Raufleute ? 7. §aBcn ©ie bie S^in^^ 3^rc>^ 3:ante, ober bie ber meinigen ? 8. SBejfen ?)ferb ijl bas in ^^xtm clt bfltfte SBeben'fen tttt" Posterity might hesitate to sul jen Viti ttrt^cil ju unterf(|ret'Jen. scribe to (approve) this verdict e. Ditrfen (infinitive; see also Ibnnen, L. 58. 1.) precede by 3 tt often requires no translation in English : ®r iat urn Srtoiti'mp fie Jtfuc^'en jU He asked (for) permission to (be i b it r f e n. liberty to) visit them. • For complete conjugations of thess verbs, see § 83. 2, etc., (exoej of Ittffetl, which is not there because it is not of the mixed conjugatio § 81) See list of irreiriilar verbs, § 78. 162 LESSON XLV. 5. ^ on It en indicates: a. A posfiibilit J dependent on the capabilities of the subject T)n Sogrt Janit fitegen. The bird can fly. Bie foniten ti Iciest t^un. Tou can easily do it. b A logical possibility : 9)Jan t fl nn eg ff^on gct^an '^aBtn. It may have been done abieady Sc^ ge^e ni^t, ea fonnte regntn. I am not going, it miffht r»^ 5t tann Unrest Jabtn. He may be wrong. Obs. — S Bnncn is often used transitively in the sense of to nnder- stand, to know by heart : Er f ann sieic ptjc^e Stebet. He knows many pretty songsL ©ie f a iin cnglifi^. She understamk English. 6r f a n It »pn StIItm Ettta?. He knows a little of every thing. Um^in WITH ,Rbnnen. 6. U m 1} in (literally around thither) is used only with f Bn* n e n ; and here, as an exception, the particle j u is employed with the infinitive which follows : 3^ 1 nn t e ntc^t u m p n ti ijm j u I could not avoid {"get ramid") tell fagen. ing it to him. S(^ fttnn nic^t um^in ju la^en. I can not help laughing. A' n n e n with b a f ii r has likewise an idiomatic use : ffiaS lonnflSu bcnn bttfut? Ho-w can you help itf {lit, -what canst thou therefor ?) 7. 58? g e n indicates : a. A possibility dependent on the will of the jpeaker or the subject, and is frequently used transitively : 3)u m a g jl ben Srtef lefen. Tou may read the letter. 3i^ ma g nii^t ^ier tIetJen. I do not wish to remain here. 3c^ m a g ben SBctn nii^t. I do not like (wish for) the 'wine. ® ie m 6 9 c n una ni^t fe^en. They do not wish to see us. h. Wla^tn indicates a logical possibility as a concession on the part of the speaker : 6t mag ein tteucr Steunb fein. He may be a true friend. ©te m 5 g e n eS gcf^an ^abtn. They may have done it 8. 9R u ff tn is the equivalent oimust : SBlr m ii ff f n Snie (lerfen. "We must all die. 6t mujte e3 t^an He wo» o6%e(i to do it. THE AUXILIARIES. 163 9. ® ollcn indicates: a. A necessity dependent on the will of another, or on moral obligation : 25iere gutc^l fell cnMgenj i^r ^anft This fear shall end; her he»d ahaU foil fallen; id) WiU gtiebe ^aim. fall; I will have peace. 3^ 1 1 Hn bie ©tabt gcSen. I am to go to the city. Jtinbtt f c 1 1 e tl lerncn. Children should (shall) learn. b. ® It e n indicates a logical necessity resting on repoi t, and answers mainly to it is said, reported, they say^ or to phrases of similar import : ©te fo tien fe^t reii$ fcin. They are said to be very rich. fterjogSo^ann foil ttrctt im Oeiir'ge. Duke John is reported to be wau- — @. dering in the mountains. c. © D 1 1 e n, with another verb expressed or understood, often answers in relative sentences to our infinitive preceded by to: Sr Wei§ ntc^t Wtta er f^iin fo It. He does not know what to do. 8etge mit wte i(| ea mac^cn fo tl. Show me how to do it. jSa« fe U i^ ^ter ? "What am I to do here ! 10. 3B 11 en indicates : a. A necessity dependent on the will of the subject : 6a foU fo fein, i^ will e9 fo ^aien. It shall be so, I will have it sa ©tc to It e n ntc^t ge'^en. They will not (do not wish to) go, 3i^ Wott*' '* ''<"' "fMrpit. njer er I was going to explain it to him, ttolttc luiu; iiiu)i v"""* biit lie would not hear me. 6. A logical necessity dependent on the assertion of tl subject : St Witt ti fet6fl geft'Jen '^aieit. He^retemffctohave seen it himse ©It foltett in ber ©tabt fein; bie Seute They are said to be in the city; t! tu 1 1 c n fte gefe'^en ^a6en. people will ha/ve it that they ha seen them. 11. Saffctt signifies to let, leave, permit, command; als to get, or order any thing done : £ f t bttS gjuer awSgeVn. Let the fire go out. er |ttt baa S«c^ f a 1 1 e n t a f f e n. He has dropped (let fall) the bool ©I lagt baa genfler offcn. He leaves the window open. SBarum' I a f f c n ©ie i|n gel^tn ? Why do you permit him to go J 164 LESSON XLV. 5S) Iiif fe mtr elnen fHoS madicn. I am gettirnj a coat made (for me). S(^ ^aie i^m (or fur i^n) einen Otod I have ordered a cm WUfi). S^mii^te e3 6esW{i'feln(§83. 11). ExAMILES. The court causes the criminal to b« beheaded. He leaveshia friend in the lui'oh. He hoped to be able to wrest hie son from the danger. It might perchance be true. He ventiires not into the house. How can I help it ? I do not like to do it. What would he have me do ? I Kould fain go thither. He insists that he hag seen you. I would like to breakfast, landlord, I might (am inclined to) doubt it. VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 25a« SeifjJtEl, -tS, pi. -t, example; SleiSctt, to remain, continue; Sringen, to bring (p. 346.); Sag (conj.), that; Seg^alfi, therefore; S lit fen, see 4; Sffen, to eat (p. 348.) ; ®ie Sicube, -, pL-ni joy, pleasure; ©ie ®ebulb,-, the patience; ®Enie'6en, to enjoy to. 350.); SaS®ewurs, -eg, pL -e, the spice; !Die ^anne, -, pi. -n, the can; flonncn, see 6 ; £err°" *- ^ Exercise 86. 3)t«§tg, moderate, temperate; SJfiigen, see 1 ; Sltufftn, see 8; Dtgleic^', although; !Die Sicgel, -, pi. -n, the rule; S^Wicrtg, difScult; ©i^lafcn, to sleep (p. 354,) ; ©oHen, see 9 ; ®ie ©peife, -, pi. -n, the food; 3;a3li(^, daily ; Sanjcn, to dance; Um^inr see 6 ; SBenn, ii, when; aSoHen, see 10. Slufgaie 86. 1. @r mag get)en. 2. ©tcjenigen, tuelc^e iiii^ts niiffen, fotlen e wai lernen. 3. 2Ber franf ifl, barf nii^t arBcitcn. 4. SBer gefu iUibm tBiH, ntitg mSptg epn unb trinfcn. 6. 2Ber gut fc^Iofen mi muf fleigig arBetteit. 6. SBcr ntc^t flet^ig unb aufmerffam fein tut fann nic^t f(^ncll lerncn. 1. SBer einen IBrief fc^reiBcn totti, nti f)a))ier, Sints unb geber |oien. 8. ©te greuben ber @rbe foK nti tBie ©etuiirjc geniepen unb nic^t i»ic tSgltc^e ©pelfett. 9. ^bnti ef|at6 muf ier ©(^iilcr b c aSegcln unb Me SBetfpiele aufmerfi'am Iefen.J~14. 2Ber iiefe ©prac^e rcntcn tttH, barf nii^t faul otcr nai^Iajftg fein. 15. Wltin SBater '^at nti^ nic tangen lapn, er ^t nie tanjen wottcn, unb feine ^inber l^aBcn nic tanjcn biirfen. 16. 2Ctr wcrbeti BalS fprci^en fBnnen, t»enn ioir nur flci§tg fein moUeit. 17. SBae woUte bcr ^aufmann S^nen »er* !aufen ? 18. 3c^ fonnte iti^t« *£i i'^m finben, waS t(^ laufen ttoUte. 19. Sin gittcr it^xtx mu§ ®cbulb ^kit. 20. ©ie ^tnbcr wottcn (epfcl unb ^trf^en, ater fie fbnnen !etnc loufen, ienn fte |afcen fein ®elt. 21. ^annfi bu mir jene gro§c ^anne Bringen ? 22. JBir lijnncn nic^t um|in ju laien, oBglei^ wir toiffen, bag e« unrec^t ijl. 23. 3i^ tannnic^ts bafiir, bag ic& orm Bin. 24. FBnnen ©iebeutfc^, franjcrtf^ unb fpanifc^ ? Exercise 87. 3tufgaBc 87. 1. I wished to go with my frieiid, but I could not, for I was obliged to remain at home. 2. He who wishes to be rich or learned must be industrious. 3. Those who will not read can not learn. 4. I wished to buy good horses but could find none. 5. When shall you be able to write a letter to your friends i. _ 6. 1 shall be able to write one to-day. but I shall not wish to write one. 7. Will your friend^e oblige^ to stay in the house fliis evening ? 8. They will not wish to go out of the house. 9. We have been able to go, but we have not wisEed to go. 10. Have you been obliged to remain here? ^11. We have been at liberty to go, but we have wished to remain. 12. I can not read, for I am unwell. 13. You must be industrious if you wish to be healthy and happy. 14. These men are said to be very rich. 15. What shall I do with this money % 16. You may give it to your poor friends. 17. May I read your new ' books? 18. You may read them if you can. _ 19. You may goA;o your friend if you wish. 20. 1 do not wisii to go to-day, but I shall wish to go to-morrow. 21. Those boys s&y they can not help Janghing. 22. I shall probably be in the city ta moiTOw, what shall I buy for you? 23. I can not buy anj thing, for I have no money. 24. It-is said these ~childrei>,»i« derstand German and French. OONJUGATIOlf OF ©CUl. 161 LESSON XLVI. iLection XL VI. 1. CONJUGATION OF oP ju 3Rut^e. S« ifl i^m ®rn|l bamit. ea ifl St^abc, bttg er feincm ©egnet nid^t geWttc^fen ifl. S)a« 5>ferb ifl mir ni^t feil. SBemfinbbiefefiletbei? Sie ijl i^m einen ®itlben f^utbig. Sifl bu tm ©tanbe ti ju t^un? Sc^ Mn ti nic^t im ©tanbe. SBer ijl ©(|ulb batan, ba§ er noc^ ni^t angctommen ijl? ®ii felbfl iijl ©^ulb baran. (£« ifl ein foli^eg ®efe| sor^anben. SS ijl i^m barum ju t^un. iBoDoniflbie SRebe? 33a« ijl mir rcc^t. e« ijl i^nen IteB. Si^ Mn bir ^erjli^ gut. Sajfen ©ie ti gut fein. 3c^ tBcig ttie bu bijl. (£i3 fei nun, bag, u. f. ». SBag fein fott, f(i)ttft fic^ wo^t. ffi^ ijl mir fo, aW oi i^ ea geprt' l^atte. S'4 Witt bcS XiAti fein, tiocnrt e« nii^t tsa'^t ijl. gi ijl ttittenS fte }U iefui^en. £i ifl mein geuiefener Sreunb. Whose turn is it to read ! It is mine. I am very cold ; he is too warm. I do not feel well. What ails you? I don't know what ails me. Be of good cheer.- I do not feel well (mentally). He is in earnest about it. It is a pity that he is not equal tu his antagonist. My horse is not for sale. Whose clothes are these ! She owes him a florin. Are you able to do it ? I am not able to do it, Whose fault is it, that he has not yet arrived ? It is your own fault. There is such a law in existence. That is his object. What is being spoken of f I am satisfied with that. They are glad of it I love you heartily. That's enough of it, (leave off). I know you (your ways). Supposing now, that, etc. Whatever is to be, is proper. It seems to me as though I had heard it. I will (wish I may) die if it is not true. He is inclined (has the will) to visit them. He is my former (has been my) friend. CONJUGATION OF ffieritti. 16» L CONJUGATION OF SB C 1 1) E H, INFmiTIVB. tBvteett, to beooEi«, Vrrbetibf becomi&g. Perfect. getsoiWtt feiiti to have beconia ^i) jveiiKf I become ; bit tvic^f thou becomest; tt ttiri), he becomes; PARTICIPLBS. Perfect. flewotben, becomei INDICATIVE. PlwraU PRESENT TENSE. tttr werbctt, we become; i'^r tserbet, you become ; jte tterben, they become. CBIPEEFEOT TENSE. t(^ tBurbe or tuatb, I became; Wir teutben, Mre became; bu l»urbe|l or ttarbfl, thou ftecamest; i^r ttiurbet, you became; er tuttibe or tsarb, he became ; (te Burbett, they became. PEEFEOT TE^fSE. V^ iltl jetBorbtlti I have become; Wtr (tub geworben, we have becom* bu btfl gewotbcn, thou hast become; i^t fetb gewotbeni you have become ; tt t^ gewotben, he has become; jte ftnb geworbett/ they have become. PLUPERFECT TENSli. Ic^ t»M gcwotbctt, I had become ; ttti ttittren gettorben, we had become ; butB«figeWDrbcn, thou hadst become; t^t tBOTetgeWotben, you had become; er »« geworben, he had become ; fie WMCrt gemwben, they had become FIRST FUTURE TENSE. ii) tuerbe tterben, I shall become; air wcrben werben, we shall become; bu tDttfl werben, thou wilt become ; \^x IBcrbet werbctt, you will become; tx »irb ttetbcrt, he will become ; fte tterben merben, they wiU become. SECOND FliTCBE TENSE. Mb ttctbc 1 i £ I shall 1 _ 2 l»" Werben 1 » iS we shall \ . , . ( S S ., ... ( ? a .- , . I e -H bu wiijl > a tx witb ' •"^ thou wilt he will i?r werbet f f >si. you wiU [• t»erbe (bu), become (thou). ? i fie werben) « J they will) "^ J QIFERATIVE. werbet (t^r), become (you). 8 no LESSON XL^I. 4. 3C C r i C n, as an independent verb, answers mainly to ie. come. It may, likewise, be variously rendered by to grow, turn, be, obtain, or by words of similar import : The snow is hecom.ing deep. They are becoming {"getting^ rich, God said. Let there be light. "We are all grovntig old. The raven lives to a great age. Set ©c^nee B) t r ti ttef. ©ie werben retc^, ®ott ftjrac^, ti w e r b e £t(^t. 2Bir werben alle alt. Set 0Jak BJirb fe:^r alt. ®a*!SESajfcr wirb eten ju ®ta, au!SKic^t«»trbSi(^ta, The water is just turning to ice. Out of nothing nothing comes. Obs. — ^The dative governed bywerbcttis often best rendered by our nominative, and the subject in German by our objective; tvcrben being rendered by have or receive : 3)lctnen aimen ttntert^anen mup baf My poor subjects must A«»e(reccti)e) S^riS' B> etb cn> — ©• their property (L. 35. %.). Seif))iclc. Ex Sle aSerfe ®otte8 (tnb mamrigfalttg. The works of God are maniiola. griebrtc^ bet ®ro^e n>at Siinig son Frederick the Great was king of 9)reKpen. Prussia. (Et »itb fein ®clb fii^neller Io3 ala et He gets rid of his money faster than ti Dcrbieitte. he earned it. ©oBalb bie ©otme untctge'^t Wiib ti As soon as the sun goes down it i» Siflc&t. (becomes) night. Site ©tunbertttetbenguJagen, bit Sage The hours (become) grow to days, ja SEoc^en, bie SBo^en ju SKonattn the days to weeks, the weeks to «nb bie SKonate ju 3a:^ren. months, and the months to years. S)ie ©otme fatif in ba* SBfeer anb ti The sun sank into the sea, and it tt>atb 9{ai$t. was (became) night. VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. Sn^f as, when; 35a, there; 2)aa ®eutf(^la«b, -i, (the) Germany; Set Stud, -ti, pL -e, the pressure ; ®|er, sooner; 55tt« granfreic^, -«, (the) France; S)a« lieet, -ti, pL -e, the army ; •&tig, hot; 35et ^amerab', -en, pi. -en, comrade ; Bet Srieget, -i, pL -, the warrior ; ©a8 fiager, -g, pi. -, couch, camp ; £o8, free, rid; SPTitbe, weary, tired; ®te Siei^e, -, pi. -n, the turn , Set 9!ettet, -8, pi. -, the horseman 3)ie 9Jet)abItF, -, pi. -en, republio; ©4ulbtg, indebted, L. 61. 5 , ©eufsen, to sigh, groan- So, so, thus ; ©obttib, as soon ; ®er ©peer, -ti, pL -e, the spear; ® er Saglii Jner, -i, pi. • , day -laborer Saufenb, thousand ; llnBanbig, unmanageable; S)a« Siel, -ti, pL -e, limit, mark; Sa (adverb), too. THE AUXILIARIES ©ciit AND SBetbett. Ill Exercise 88. ?(ufgaBe 88. !♦ !l!iefcr retire 'Mann ijl fe'l)r arm geicefen. 2. ©inb ®te auf jencm ^ol)en (L. 32. 4.) Serge gcwefen? 3. ©tnb ®ie je in Stu^* lanb oier 'Dcut)'d)tflnt) getuefcn ? 4. SCer war ber gefc^idtefle 5lciter in bem §cerc tea franjBftfi^en ^atfcr« ? 5, 2Bann fmb ©ie in granfrei^ gcmefen ? 6. 2Bie langc jinb ©ic in bicfcm Sanbe ? T. ©inb ©te ntc unjufrieben unb trourig getpefen ? 8. SBanr merben »rtr rei^ feln ? 9. SBir werben alt unb Utter unb flnl e^er ain 3ietc unfereS £ekn3, aU unS angene^m t|l. 10. SBag tutrb au3 bir merben, ttenn bu nic^t flciftgcr njlrft? 11. 3i^ trerbe fleiiiger toerben, foBalb aU (L. 69. 8.) ic^ gefunb tuerbe. 12. Tier ift ni(^t gut, ber ni(^t fuc^t immer Bcjter ju luerben. 13. gran!retc^ wurbe im ^diixt cintaufenb Oi^t^unbert unb oi^t unb sierjig eine SftcpuWi!. U. &i tuirb eln ^eiger SEag merben, fagte ein alter ^rieger roenigc ©tunben »or ber ©d^lac^t ju feinem S^amerabcn. 15. Da« |>ferB tBurbc gans wilb unb unbdnbtg. 16. ©er ^ran!e feufjt auf feinem Sager: "rciUcabenn nie Stag merben?" unb ber SaglB^ner unter bem Drudc feiner 2lrteit: "mlrb ti benn nl^t klJ ^Jlac^t merben?" 17. "©0^, ba^afi bu mcinen ©peer! melncm 2lrm wirb er ju fc^mer." 18. Die 3flei|e i|l an S^ncn, marum lefen ©ie ni4t? 19. Die 3flei|e ju reben iji nic^t on 3|nen. Exercise 89. 2(ufga6e 89. 1. When were you in France 1 2. Have those people evei been at ytfur house?- 3. Had they been in Germany before they were in Russia ? 4. He will be in Russia before you will be in France. 5. The emperor of France was the "nephew of his uncle." 6. How long have you ]»e^ in this city 1 7 They have been rich, but have become very poor. 8. What has become o£-your friend 1 9. The weather isjbecpming very cold. 10. You can become learned if you will be diligent. 11. The young sailor has become healthy again. 12. The weather is becoming warm, and the days are becoming long. 13. The scholars in this school have been very idle, but they are i)ow becoming more industrious. 14. I wasj)bliged to wait so long that I became very tired. 15. The son gets rid of his money 1T2 LESSON XLVn. faster than his father earned it. 16. How much do I owe youl 17. Whose turn is it to read? 18. It is your fault if you do not know. 19. This man who is now so poor and wretched has been a very rich merchant. LESSON XLVn. Cection XLVIL IRREGULAR VERBS, OR VERBS OF THE OLD CONJUGATION. 1. Irregular verbs are such as do not form their imperfeel tense a,nA past participle according to the rules in L. 31. For complete alphabetical list of " irkeoulae vebbs" see § 78 ; also, for further remarks on the same, § 77. 2. The infinitive of these, as angen, to hang; 3)Je|fen, to measure; Sleimen, to take ; ©aufen, to drink (as a beast) ; ©i^citen, to scold; ©(^mcljen, to melt ; ©tec^en, to sting ; _ ©tct)Ien, to steal ; _©terbcn, to die; — Jragen, to bear, wear; — Ereffen, to hit ; .Serber'Sen, to perish, spoil; ._SJergef' fen, to forget ; >_ SBad^fen, to grow; — SCetfen, to throw It4 LESSON XLVU. Exercise 90. 31 uf gate 80. 1. SCertadttaSSrol? 2. £)er ©olbat Mrgt ftd^ Bor bemgcinte. 3. ®r blafl laS SBalt^orn. 4. £!er SBauer fcri^t Den §anf unb trifAt bcnaBet3en. 5. 2Ba« empfangt cr ? 6. Dae ®«te enti)fte:^It fii^ feltft. 7. £)cr SKann fa'fcrt auf tent SCagcn. 8. Der ©(^ncc fiillt. 9. !Der ^naBe fangt Me SSbgeL 10. ®er ©olDot ftc^t. 11. Sr flii^t ri(^ einen ^ut. 12. ©er D(^3 fript §eu uni fiiuft SBapr. 13. ®a« Ririo igt SBrot unto trlntt fWil^. 14. Sr giBt atir tai MUi Su(^. 15. gr grait ficfe cln 2o^. 16. Sr '^dlt Sag 9)fert). It. ®fr §ut Pngt an tent Sflagel. 18. Sr lauft unb lapt tie an* iem au(^ laufen. 19. @ie Itefl t^r S3u(^. 20. @ie ntip (or mijjEt) tai 5Eu^. 21. Sr nimmt mcin Suc^. 22. SBarum f^itt er ? 28. ®er §unt( fdjiaft, ter ^nak fc^Iagt iai 9)fert. 24. DaS 33Iet fc^milat. 25. a3a« fie^jl tu ? reag fpric^t er ? 26. Die SBxenc pic&t, ber J)ieb flie^It, ber ^rante jlirW. 27. ®r trogt f(^bne ^leiber; er trtp tmmer ba0 3iel. 28. SSarum pc^t er ? 29. Dag Sier uer* birbt. 80. Sr cergigt t»a« fte fprii^t. 31. Der SBaum tt)a(^fl. 32. @ie weig ni^t tuag fte wilt. 33. Sr tolrft ben Satt. 34. 3c^ »elp tuas er mir serfpri^t. Exercise 91. . ,, Slufgabe 91.' W« , Ynr- 1 ^ ^ 1. I do not know who is throwing the balls. 2. Does ho speak German 1 8. He does not forget what he reads. 4. The sun is melting owsnow. 5. The thief steals the shoes that he wears. 6. The bee stm^s and dies. 7. The soldier is beating the ,dog. 8. The bird sleeps on the tree. 9. She scolds because he takes her book. 10, The carpenter; is measuring the room. 11. The boy runs and lera the dog run too. 12. Who is hold- ing my horse 1 13. Where is the cloak hanging % 14. The man that is braiding hats gives us a book. 15. Who is digging this hole ? 16^ Why does the soldier & ht ? 17. What is this boy eating? 18. What animal f&al^ g ass? 19. What does the horse drink? 1^20. The tree is fallh g. 21. Who is catching the birds ? 22. Does he^ceive, any thing ? 23. Who thrashes t^e wheat and breaks the Kemp ? 24. Why dost thou conceal thyself? 25. What does he command? 26. Who is riding on your wagon ? 27. My friend recommends me to you. IKREOULAR VKKBS. 175 Setf))icte. ExAMifLES. Sr t)rtc8 feinc fBaaxt uni tiet^ mi fie He praised his goods auil advised ju laufen. us to buy them. Seine Sritbet ftaf ba« ©c^wert, »o The sword devoured thy brothers ba8 Slut in ©tr6aten flop. where the blood flowed in streams. !Der ©ttom fc^WoH, Weil bet S^nee The stream swelled because the f(?motj. snow melted. CiSfat fc^tteS nac§ SRom ! " ic^ Urn, Csesar wrote to Rome ' I came faS nnb fiegte." saw and conquered." . VOCABULAKT TO THE EXi^RCISES, Seipcn, to bite; SBetrii'gcn, to deceive; (Erttin'tctt, to be drowned ©rgrei'fen, to seize ; Slle^en, to flee ; gitepen, to flow; ®e6ie'teni to command; (Benc'fen, to recover; KSiegcn, to pour; |)e6enr to raise ; -^tt . SIteten, to tread, step .|)ei§en, to bid; ^lelfenj to help, assist; ^tied^cn, to ".reep; Sciben, to suffer; - SJetten, to iide on horsebapk; -©c^eincn, to appear; i6'*»*v>] ^ -©d)liepen, to shut, lock; JcJl^ys* ©c^reteni to cry, shriek; ©^wellen, to sweU ; ©infen, to sink ; -©tcigeni to ascend; ©treiteflj to quarre^ -Sreiben, to drive; - SJerlie'ren, to lose; i* .,SJcrfc^ttiin'bcn, to dispppear; V"*< ^SBafilett, to wash; yvv*^, uj^^ Swinsen/ to compel, force. ^B 93. Slufgate 93. 1. ®cr Sjtni Hf ben ®tc6. 3. ®er IBauot Brad). 3. (£r ent* ))fa|t mi(^ f^cra S^annc, ier ntii^ fe^r freunbU(^ cmpfing. 4. 3c^ btieb bftt ccnjen Slag. 5. ©ie crgriffcn feine Jpiinie. 6. ®r ftel in ba3 SSaffcr unt ertraiif. 1. ©ie af en bie Slepfcl, bie fte flo^^Ien. 8. SCir fu'^ren burc^ bie ©tobt. 9. ©ie ^ngen bie Siijel, weli^e mxi ben Stefiern flogen. 10. £;ie ©otbaten focbten nic^t t«))fer, [on« tern flo^en. 11. Sr ge6ot urns 3U get)cn. 13, ®r goB mir bag ®elb unb ging. 13. ®r genaf langfam. 14. SBir gcnojfen gejicm fe^r wcnig. 15. @r gcwann me'^r al« ii^ scrlor. 16. @r gog ben SBein in tas ®la«. 11. ©ie gruben einen tiefen ®roBen. 18. Sr |ob fcinen ©tocE unb ^ieb na(^ ntir. 19. ®r '§ief fte fommen, obcr fie famen nii^t. 30. ®r Ijotf unS, oBgteic^ cr una ni^t !annte. 31. SBir kfen bflS 58uc^, bas er un« gab. 33, Das ,Ktnt troc§, ber £)uni lief. 33. ©ie lagen auf i^ren Sctten unb litten. 24. ©ie 178 lEssov xLvn. no'Smctt ntetnen SCagen mi fu'^rcn in tic ©tabt. 25. Er ricf ten flrmen Wanti. 26. ©r fog unt fi^ricB ten ganjcn Sog. 27. 'Dai ^int jiant nnt f^ric. 28. S5er ©d^nce fc^molj, tec ©trom fi^woK. 29. ©ic tranlen unt fongcn; cincr fc^roantm unt ter anterc fant. 30. ©ie fc^Iugen i|n, too^rcnt er f(^tief. 31. ©r ricf mi^ unt fd^alt, jDcil i^ auf fcincm 3)fertc ritt. 32. ©ie fc^icn traurig. 33. Sr ging ^inaus unt fc^Iog tic SE^iirc. 34. Sr jileg auf ten Scrg. 35. ©ie Paiti)cn Bi3 fie (larfccn. 36. (Sr fhritt mit i^ncn unt tricb fte mi tcm gclte. 37. ©ie tratcn in iai §au« unt »erfc^»antcn. 38. ®r Dcrgog roai er ucrfprac^. 39. ®r traf tag Qid. 40. 63 tou^a fd^nelt. 41. (Sr wufc^ ten SEifc^. 42. Sr wugte, ta§ ic^ ten ©peei Wflrf. 43. Sr jog fein ©i^wert unt jwang jte ju ge'^en. Exercise 93. 2Iufga6e 93. 1. The trees broke, and the boys fell. 2.^i^ogs bit tho boys that stde^e apples. 3. The man to '^om you recom- mended me cfieated me. 4. We did not remain long, for they ■^id not receive us kindly. 5. The boy seSea my"hand. 6. "We called him. 7. Did you ride on the wagon 1 8. The soldiers ate bread and drank wine, and their hor^^Jfe hay and drank water. 9. Our soldierafS^htgalkmtly, and ttio^of our enemy fled. 10. The birds fl^*out of "fecage, but the boys caught them again. 11. We did not remain long. 12. They com- manded us to go tothe city, but we did not go, for they gave ' us no money. 13. Did your friends ^coverT 14. We won l.ess than our friends lost. 15. They ^ured thewine into the glasses.^ 16. They saw the horse, and I^SeSl their hands. 17- Why were they digraigltfet olidttT 18. He came to us while ■w% were'reading theoooks which you gave us. 19. He struck ftt them because they drank so much and sang^sa loud. 29. We crept berore we waJEed. 21 The boys slmSieQ, and the dogs ran. 22. We took the books that la^y on the Table. 23. Did you call him^hief ? 24. We'CneMhat itWlied. 25. We sat around tne table and wrote, and they Btooaaroufifl the •Btove. 26. He rode the horse and drove the oxen. 27. They called them friends. 28. Why did they seeim so sad? 29. Ho scolded me because I slept so long. 30. They threw their spears rRKEQULAB VERBS. 177 and drew their swords. 31. Djd you fiaget what he promised J ou t. 32. Did they hit a^ffiarE with the arrow ? 33. Who washed the gloves % 34. Did the trees grow rapidly t. 35. Did they lock the door? 36. Why did they quarrel with us? Seifptelc. Examples. Si:^ '^tCbt nic etn foIc^cS ©cfu^l' em* I have never experienced Buoh a l)fun'5 ;n. feeling. E- '^Mi (inenSrans Ptr fie gewun'bcn. He had wound a wreath for them, fiatte fein gteunb nic^ta son ber ©a(|c Had his friend known nothing ol gettJUpt'? the affair? 5Wan ^at ben SJerCrec^'cr ergtif fen. The criminal has been seized. aCer ^ttt ba« Sieb gefun'gen? Who has sung the soug ? 4>a[i bu and) Wo^I lebttc^t, Wa8 bu mir But have you well considered what rcitjll ?— S. you advise me ! ®ann :^a6en Sie an S^renSruber ge* When have you written to your Wtte'Sen? brother! VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 50!tt]^Ien, to grind; SWeiben, to avoid; 9)fetfen, to whistle ; 3)retfen, to praise; ,©^eren/ to shear ; ©c^iegen, to shoot; ©4tnben( to flay; ©(^leifen, to sharpen, grind; Boren, to swear; ©(jalten, to split: - ©IJtnnen/ to spin; — S^un, to do ; SJetbne'fen, to offend; r- SSerjei'^en, to pardon ; SBcben, to weave; _ SDinben, to wind. Exercise 94. Stufgabe 94. 1. ®er §unt) ^ai ben Tixtb geMlfen. 2. ®r ^t unS ktrogen. 3. §at er 3^nen ctreaS gegeben ? 4. @r ^atte an un3 geiac^t. 5. ^ofl Su t>en SCeijen geirofi^en? 6. Sr ^at un3 freunblic^ empfan* gen, aljcr niemant '^at una i^m ent))fD^Ien. 7. 3Caa |at er gefun* Den ? 8. SKan |at ben Eieb ergrtjfen. 9. ®r l§at ben Slpfel ges geffen; ^ot er ben SBogel gcfangen ? 10. 3(^ I)fl6e fte gefunbcn; fie |aBen gcfoc^ten. 11. 'Ltx §unb ^ot ba« gleifi^ gefre([en. 12. Sr |at mir ntc^ts gcgeien. 13. SCas :^ot er gefc:§cn? 14, ffitr^a* ben nid^ta gcnoffen. 15, SBaS ^at er genontmen? 16. SBer |ot ben ffiein tn ba« ®taa gegopn ? 17. SBer |at biefes Soc^ gegraben ? 18. ©r ■^at bas 3)ferb ge^dten. 19. SCa3 %ixt fie gefungcn? 20. ffr %ai xmi getonnt. 21. ®ie '^abcn mir eln 53u(^ gegebcn unb 14 l^obe a '^ckfcn. 22. T^ie gcbcrw '^aben anf bcm- Sifcfee gelcgen. 8* 178 LESSON xivn. 23. Sr ^at nti^t getogcn. 24. "Dcr flutter f^at iaS ©etreitc gcmcp fen unti gcmallen. 25. Sr ^ot \xni l^uh gcnannt, wcil iuir fcine S3ud)er genommcn |o6en. 26. SBarum fjat tx gepfiffen ? 27. ®ie ^akn i|re 3)ferie gepriefen. 28. Sr :^at fte gerufen. 29. SSarum l^aflbu unS gefc^olten ? 30. Sr :§atte tas ©c^af gefi^oren. 31. Sr f^at ten SBoIf gefi^opn unt) gcfi^unben. 32. ©ie fatten ju longc gef(|Iafen. 33. §ofi tu tie 5Weffer gef^Iiifen ? 34. S3ir ^aBen tic Spren gef(^(oj[en. 35. §at cr taS Srot gefc^nitten ? 36. 3(^ ^tte gefdjrieten, unt |ie 'fatten gefc^rieen. 37. ©ie ^at c3 gcfc^iBoren. 38. 2Bir ^ofcen i'^n gefe^en. 39. §at er tas Sict fc^on gcfungen ? 40. Sr '^at eine ©tunte gefepn. 41. Sr |at tas ^olj gefpaften. 42. Jpaten fic tie USoIIe gefponnen ? 43. 3Bas fte ge* fproi^en |at, :§at i^n gejloi^en. 44. 3)er 9)lann, ter ta gcflantcn iatte, ^t mein ^^fert gejto^Ien. 45. ©ie ^aBen lange genug ge* I'tritten, wai f^at er get^on ? 46. Sr |at iai Qiti getrofen. 47. $ajl tu nie SBein getrunlen ? 48. 3(^ |aBe »crgef[en. 49. 2Ba3 :^at er scrloren? 50. Ss |at t|n sertrcffen. 51. ^ot cr una »cr* jie^cn ? 52. Sr |at tag 3;u(^ gewoben uitt getoafi^cn ; ^t er clnen SBafl geworfen ? 53. 9lie f^aU i(^ fie gemieten. 54. 2Sa3 |at er geiuunten? Exercise 95. SfufgaBe 95, 1. He has beatpi the dog that has bitten him. 2. I have ofi ten thought oihirnu 3. Have you recommended this hook to us ? 4. Have you thrashed the wheat % 5. They have always received us kindly. 6. Who has ground your knife? 7. The boys have eaten the bread and drank the beer. 8. The dogs have eaten the meat and drank the water. 9. They have caught their horses. 10. What have you found ? 11. Why have the soldiers fought ? 12. I have shot a large bird. 13. Have you Been the books that I have read % 14. Into whicnglass have ' you poured the wine? 15. Why have they dug this hole? 16. Who has held my horse ? 17. Who has seen us ? 18. Have~ my books lain on your table? 19. Has any body lied ? 20. Who has ground the wheat? 21. Have you measiu-ed the eloth? 22. Why has he avoided his friends ? 23. Why have ■ they called hmi a thiif ? 24. Who has taken my pen ? 25. USB OF THB AUXILIARIES ^aljett AND ©cttt. 1T9 He has called me, but he has notTscolded me. 26. Who has sharpened my knife 1 21. Have you locked the doors 1 28. Who has out the bread? 29. Had you written him a letter? .30. Have you ever sung this song ? 31. (Have you sat longer than they have stood ? 32. I have spun the wool and he has • split the wood. 33. The bees have stung the horse. 34. Has any body stolen any thing f 85. He had not spoken at all. ^^6. Why have they quarreled ? 31. Who has worn the hat 1 _38 What have you lost 1 39. Who has thrown the apples? 40. Why have they drawn their swords ? 41.jHave you washed the cloth that he has woven ? 42. It vexes mm that he has los*!;' his money. 43. Have you forgotten what you have promised Kne? 44. Why have you slept so long? 45. Has any one ►compelled you to go? 46. Who has whistlgd? 4t. What have they praised ? 48. Have you ever known such a man ? 49. He has written, and they have spoken. < n » ■■ » LESSON XLVm. Cection XLVIH. USB or THE AUXILIARIES i^ tt 6 C tl AND ® C t tl. 1. § a B en is used as the auxiliary of all transitive, reflexive "• and impersonal * verbs ; as also of the verbs of mode * and of all objective verbs that govern the genitive •* and dative *, ex- cept icgegnen, folgcn and weii^en (see 2.). 2. Intransitive verbs indicating direction from or toward a place or an object, or a change from one condition to another, as also H ci 6 e n, to remain ; Begcgnen, to meet ; f o I g e n, to follow, and i» e i c§ e n, to yield, retreat, are conjugated with the auxiliary f c i n which is here rendered by have (§ 71. 5) : Btnb jie fc^on gegnn'gcn ? Have they already gone ! 3)er atme Snait iji gcfal'Ien. The poor boy has fallen. 3. The following verbs, when not expressing direction ^o»i or toward a given place, require the auxiliary l^altxi', namely, a. L.XXTX.9; i. L. LVII: c. L. XLV; dL. LXTI; e. L. I.XIV 180 LESSON SLVm. fil en, to hasten; fHcgen, to flow; iagcn, to chase, hunt ; ficttcrn, to climb; t r i e c^ e n, to creep, crawl; lanbcn, to land; lauf e n, torun ; q uellen, to spring; rctfcn, to travel; reiten, to ride; renncn, to run; fc^iffen, to navigate, f^Witnmcn, to swim; fcgeln, to sail; ftn!en, to sink; fprtngcn, to leap, spring; ^qgcn, to join; treibsn, to drive ; » tt i e r n, to wandei, travel : SSatam' ^aji bu fo geeilt' ? %ji tiH nti^t ■^EUte gcrit'Ien ? 6ic |a6cit nti^t »iel gereiji'. Why have you hastened so ? Have you not ridden to-day ! They have not traveled much. Some neuter verbs, as I i e g e n, to lie ; f i t J c n, to sit ; jl e* ^ c n, to stand, are sometimes used with the auxiliary [ e i n : ii^n ttJttr ftine Wtaiji trie gcpan'ben. His power never had stood higher Seifpielc. 3(1 et itm iwc§ nl^t gcforn'men? Ber SSogel t|l Btggcjlogen. ©le ftnb in iai gelb gejo'gen. 6r i|l mc^ Slme'rifa gereiji". ®t Bitb fc^on gegan'gen fein. ©r »ar nai) ber Stabt geei'It. aCanm' jtnb fie «uf baa Sanb getlt » ten? Examples. Has (is) he then not yet come ! The bird has (is) flown away. They have marched into the field. He has (is) gone to America. He will already have (be) gouft He had hastened to the city. Why have they ridden into the country. VOCABDLAKT TO THE EXERCISES. Sege'gnen, to meet; (Eilen, to hasten ; ©ntrin'nen, to escape, p. 346 ; ®ntfcf)Ia'fen, to fall asleep; ©er get«, -ena, pL -en, the rock; 2)er SIuSi -«*» pL SISfTeithe river; ®elin'gen, to succeed, p. 348 ; ®t\ijt^m, to happen, p. 358; SletterHr to climb ; SDltpn'gen, to fail, p. 352; Dej 9Un, -ti, pL Pane, the plan; SRetfen, to ripen ; S(f)ieti^en, to glide, steal away ®tta ©(^Iog,-c«,pl S^IBlJer, castle ■ Die ©(^Bn^eit, -, pi. -en, beauty ; 3)te ©eclc, -, pi. -n, the soul; ®er ©tein, -eS, pL -t, the stone; Ser ©trcm, -ti, pL ©trome, stream S)er Son, -e8, pL Sone, the tone; 95ie Ingcnb, -, pL -en, the virtue; S>aS UntenteVmen, -8, undertaking Setf^al'ten, to die away, p. 35S Exercise 96. 1. 3jt cr entfc^kfcn twtge iji er geBIicBcn ? 3|l fctr SKann gcfattcn ' SlufgaBc 96. 2. 9letn, er i|l vmi cntronnen. 3. 3Dle 4. <3ie ftn» na^ J)cr ©tabt gefa'^ren. 5, 6. 'Ln 25ogeI i[l geffogen. 1. Jjl HI USE OF THE AUXILIARIES ^flkjt AND ©eijt. 181 SBaffer itlier iio« Seft gcflopn? 8. ^er ^tan ifl gctttngen. 9. tn ^naBc i|t genefcn. 10. SSaa tjt gefi^e^n ? 11. (5« ijl a«« fcct Srbe gelrocbeit. 12. "Der Jpunb ifl na6^ bent SBalie gctoufen. 13. Da« Untcrne'^mctt tjlmlflungen. 14. "Lai SQafer iji am iem gelfcn geflojfen. 15. ®r iji na^ bcr ©tait geritten. 16. Sr tuat In tog Jpoug gefc^Hc^en. It. Sr tBat iikr ien ®raben gefprungcn. ■}H. ©ie warcn aue betn ©c^Iojfe geteeten. 19. !Der le^tc Jon war »erf(i§ottctt. 20. Dcr SBaum ifl fe'^r [(^ncU gewai^fen. 21. Da3 ^ou8 hjirb gefatten fein. 22. @ic mvim gefommcn fcin. 23. Sr max auf tern SWajt gellcttert. 24. "Der Mnabt ifl iiBer ben glii§ ge* fi^wommcn, 25. Siner war un^ gcfolgt, unb ber 3lnberc *oar xmi bcgegnet. 26. ®cr ©c^nec ifl gef^mo^cn unb bie ©trbmc fmb gc* fc^njoUcn. 21. ©ag Difl ifl fc^nett gercift. 28. Die Sugenb ifl bie ©c^iitt'^cit ber ©eele. 29. Sr war nac^ ber ©tabt geeilt. -jExERcisB 91. Slufgabc 91^ 1. Hare you remained long enougi 1 2. Who has gone to the city 1 3. Do you kpw what nas happened ? 4. The boy has sprung across tte dit^^ 5. Our plan has not succeeded. 6. The children had h^Eeiied into Wae houseSa.l.j'-Has the snow melted 'S. The hunters Haa climbed upon the trees. 9. Our soldierspadned, and the enemy had come into ^ufcoimtry. 10. He Has ridden (on horseback) to the forest, an4 she has ridden (in acarriage) to the city. 11. The patient has recov- ered. 12. Has he fallen .asleep ? 18. Howhave they escaped us 1 14. Our friend Ims fallen out of the wagon. 15. The young birds hayeflown out of tKe'nest. 1 6. The worms have ujrawled out of tne eayth. ' 11. The horse has run out i)f the stable. 18.^^e apples hadiTpened, I. 19. The water win have flowsd into wie house. -i^ 20. Why Ifflfe you follnwed us? | 21 ^ itare you met your friends? 22. He may already have gthie j^ 23. "Where ^^ve they remained so lon^? 24. The child has crept out of woe house. 182 LESSON XLIZ. LESSON XLIX. Cection XLIX. INFINITIVE WITHOUT 3 «• 1. When the infinitive is preceded by an auxiliary, or by one of the following verbs, the particle 3 U is omitted : tleiBem to remain; :^e if en, to command; I ernett, to learr ; fa|ren, to ride; ^elfeiti to help; m a (^ en, to make; fii^ r en, to conduct; ^.0 1 e n, to hear ; ncnnen, to call, name: fu^tn, to feel; , "^ a 6 en, to have; fe|en,tosee; f ittben, tc find; legen, tolay; t^un, todo; je^cn, togo; I e^ ten, to teach; reiten, to ride. The infinitive, when dependent on the above verbs, is frequently best rendered by our present participle : SIie6 er ftgen, 'jle^en obertie*. Didhe remain sitting, standing, or gen? lying? ?)et§ mi($ nti|t leben, Seif mi^ Do not bid me speak, bid me be fiiweigen. silent. ®tt« n e nn e t(^ f (| I a f e n. That I call sleeping. 3i$ fu^te ben 3)ul« fc^lagen. Ifeel the pulse (beat) heating. Si^ '^ijtf i^m atBeiten. I helpedhim work. Sc^^tSret^nfommen. I hear him coming. Er I e ^ r t e mic^ f i n 9 e n. He tawghi me to sing. Si) fa^ftelaufen. I saw them running. Sc^Ietne geic^nen. 1 am learning to draw. (Jr fanb mi(^ f(^I(l fen. B.e found me sleeping. ©ie m a d) t mtl^ I a c() e n. She is making me laugTi. Obs. — lieipcn, when used intransitively, often answers to the passive of to name, call, or to the noun name, with the verb to be : Er ^ t i p t Sari. He is named (or his name is) Charles. SBie ^ e i 5 1 boa tm Seutfi^en ? What is that called in German ! S)eipt baS arielten? Do you call that {is that called) working ! ©)5ajircn WITH galreit, gii^ren, SReitejtAND ®el)cn<. 2. © p a J { r c n is used chiefly with fa'^ren, fii^rcn, reiten and ^e'^Ctt, and implies exercise for the purpose of recreation or pleasure : 3(^ Se^e f))ttslren, ©ie f a ^ r e it I go walking, you ride (in a 0! rriage), f y a s i r e n, unb er t c i t e t ftjajiten. and he rides on horseback. 3^ iJCl^e ttlle %%( fjjajitcn. I go walking every day. INFINITIVE WITHOUT ^\1, 183 SBIr mac^tcn etnen langen ©tjajir'gang. "We took (made) a long wait Er t e i t e t oft, atet nie f )) a 5 1 1 e It. He rides often, but never for pleas- ure. 3. The infinitive (usually without ju) often stands as the subject or object of a verb : <£i ijl icffer Untei^t le'b en ali Un» It is better to suffer wrong than to rccl)tt6«n. do wrong, ©einen gtinben setje '^eni|lebel. To forgive one's (his) enemies is noble. i. The infinitive (commonly preceded by the article or a pronoun) is used as a neuter noun, and answers to the partici- pial noun in English : jDaS £ u 3 e n fc^abet bent Sujttcr ant (The) lying injures the liar the metjlett. most. S)aa Cefen 6et ttmm fi^wac^en Cti^te Reading by a feeble light is inju- ifl ben Stugen [(^cibti^. rious to the eyes. 5. The infinitive with 3 u follows attjiatt, o'^nc and urn. U m, denoting mere purpose or design, may be rendered in or- der, or often wholly omitted in translation : Erfpieltttn|iatt ju lefen. He plays instead of reading. £t i|l franf o ^ne c^ ju lutfTen. He is sick without knowing it. (Er Iie|l u m j u lernen He reads (in order) to learn. Et tt« JU fi^wac^ u m bie Slrkit j u He was too weak to finish the soUen'ben. work. 6. The infinitive active is often used in a passive sense : ©iefe^ §o«3 t|l JU setmiet^en unb je' This house is to let, and that one nti JU serfau'fen. is to be sold (to sell). Er lapt baS Srob ^olen. He has the bread brought. £t Icigl t^n iai SBrob ^clen. He has him go for the bread. 7. SCiffett often has the signification of io hnoiv kow, to be able, followed by an infinitive : (&t iBtip ji^ ju ^elfen. He knows how to help himstll Seifpicle. Examples. £)u oIj, -eS, pi. ^ijtjcr, the woci Ce^ren, to teach; Ste Sufi, -, pi. l*u|le, inclination; 23a« sWcitc^en, -i, pi. -, tale, story. ©pttji'ren, see 2; ©tubi'reit, to study; Unfdjulbig, innocent; ®ie Urfa(^c, -, pi. -n, the cause; Sietmit't|Ht, to let. Exercise 98. Slufgak 98. 1. ^eifen ®te t^^n gel)en oter HeiBen? 2.@incr Icl^rt mic^ fmn* j'Dftf^ fpre(^en, unb ber onbere lernt cs tefen. 3. Tjit Sflac^tigaH tuirb ftc^ Balb |bren Ia([en. 4. Diefe SRatrofen toerben tnorgcn ober u6erntorgen fifc^en ge^cn. 6. !Der atte Sauer t)at »tcl gutcn dteit aCetn im .Ketler ttegen. 6. SBefe^tcn ifl leii^t, get)or(^en fdiwer. 1. 3c^ Hebe iai Sefcn, aitx it^ '^ap bas ©i^reiBen. 8. 2Bir finb feinea un^bflid^cn S&etrageniS Ijerjlit^'mui',. 9. ©ie ifl ganj unfd)ulbig, ttelc^e Urfa^c |at fte benn traung ju fein ? 10. Si^ |a£>e aeber 3ett noc^ Sufi fein ©ingen ju Pren. 11. 3cber gute ©djiiter i»eip wann bie SRct^e an i^tn ift ju Icfcn. 12. Sin fo alknnti WaxdSjtn ifl nic^t ju glaufcen. 13. ©ie laffcn i^ren iBeticnten i^r B'lnmer fegen. 14. £)cr £fli(i)ter tiep ben SJertvec^er ini3 ©cflingnif werfen, 15. Sebe um ju lerneu, unb lernc urn ju leBen. 16. Sr t»ei^ ju leBen unb ft^ bag SeBcn angene^m gu mad)cn. 11. Die ^inbcr ftnb fpajiren gefa^rcn, unb bie ©d)iiler finb fpajiren gcritten, 18. @r ifj fifc^en gegangen, anftatt ju fiubiren. 19. §oIen ©ie ben a:^ee ? 20. 9iein, ic^ laffe i|n ^olen. 21. Sr liipt mi(^ bas S3ilb noi^ Uf l^atten. Exercise 99. StufgaJe 99. , 1. Who taught you to speak German? 2. I learned to speak It in Germany. 3. This stupid boy remained sitting the whole rARTICIPLES AND IMPERATITE. 185 evening. ■ 4. The man- had a small table standing beside his bed. 6. We shall not have time to see our friends this even- ing., 6. My mother taught me to sing and my brother teaches me to play. t. When shall you go a fishing, to-morrow, or day after to-morrow 1 8. Why have our friends been to the city without visiting us?^9. They went to their cousins instead of coming to us, 10. 1 am tired of his singing. 11. They have books enough but not time to read them. 12. These housea are to be let.>7 13. This man has something to^say\to\your friend. 14. The captain is getting a new coat made. .15. The general caused the innocent soldier to be thrown into prison. 16. This man'sconduct is not tobepraised. 17. This sillystory is not to be believed. 18. Is\jt| not your turn to read? 19. We must go immediately, there is no time to lose. 20. Why does he go for the wood ? «* * ''^ '^ - ^ LESSON L. Ceclion L. PAETICIPLBS AND IMPERATIVE. 1. Present participles attributively used have the same gov- ernment as the verbs, from which they are derived, and, when the object is expressed, precede it; when predicative, however, their character is simply that of an adjective : SKein QJoIb fu(|enbet greunb. My gold-seeking friend. S)tr t^n loienbe Secret. The teacher "jrho praises him. 2)ie StuiSflc^t war retjenb. The prospect was charming. Bie ^i^t »ai brudenb. The heat was oppressive. 2. The perfect participle sometimes answers to our present participle ; or, like many other words, it may often be varied or omitted in translation, according to the diiferent idioms . the two languages : 4>eulenb fommt ber ©tutm geflo'gen. — Howling comes the storm flying ©. (flown). Sr tarn btc ©trafc '^ergejo'ijen. He came (moving) along the street ©a8 ©elb i|l serio'tcn gegan'sen. The money is (gone) lost. 186 LESSON L. 3. Tlie past participle may be used as the imperative : DJic^t fo laut gefprjKi^'en. Do not speak so loud. glEtpig geatBeitEt. Labor diligently. 4. There is a third or future participle formed only from transitive verbs by adding b to the infinitive preceded by 3 M ; it always has a passive signification, and implies necessity or obligation : !t)te iu fiirdjtentie (Sefttjr'. The to-be-feared -fenger T>ai su Jauenbe §ttu«. The house (which is) to ht "amlt IMPERATIVE. 5. When the second person of the imperative is used, the subject is generally omitted ; when, however, the third person is used, the subject is expressed : Sttrt, iringe mtr bein S8u(^. Charles, bring me your book. fltnber, ge^t in tai ^aui. Children, go into the house. J?art, 6itngen © ie mit S^r Su^. Charles, bring me your book. ©c[)iife e I baiS 5>feri) morgEtt. Send the horse to-morrov. ©0 fEt £ i, fttgtB Et. So be it (so let it be), said he. Obs. — The present indicative of the auxiliary foil En is often best omitted in translation, and the main verb rendered by our imperative (see imperative L. 38.) : Su fcll|l e« t ^ u n. I>o it yourself (you shall do it). ®£r So^ann foil 1 m m e n. Xe< John come {have John come). 6. ©oburd), baf before a finite verb often answers to by before a present participle : 5DJan fi|ab£t eu^ bdbutc^, ba? man You are injured Jj/beingprtised to- eui^ ju fE^r lo6t. much. Literally, you are thereby injured, that you are too much praiseu Sctfpicle. Examples. ^(tt et no(^ ni(^t bie entfc^le'bene Stnt* Has he not yet received the final wort fv^al'ten? (determinate) answer? ©c^E bic^ jum wdrmEnben SeUEr. Seat thyself at the -warming fire. Rein Dorn ScrlejE bie EtiEnben gfipe, May no thorn wound thy (the) hast- «nb feine f(ileii|enbe ©c^Iangi brine ening feet, and no secret serpent getfe. thy heel. PARTICIPLES AND IMPERATIVE. 181 SRofen ouf ben SDJcj gejtreut unb iti Let roses on the path he strown, ^axmi Dergeffen. — |)lj. and Boraow be forgot. 23tt8 au^jugeicnbe Oelb tjl m^ mi$t The money to be spent has not yet et^al'tcn, been received. 6r fi^abet |1c^ babvct)) ba§ er jh Siel He injures himself in sleer'ng too fc^Wfl much, ^OCABULART TO THE EXERCISES. 3)et STOrtc^t, -8, (the) Albert ; tie SSnflalt, -, pL-en, preparation; SBe^an'beln, to treat; Scftvtt'fen, to pnnisli; SBIotcn, to bleat; Srennen, to burn, p. 346. SruHen, to low; ©ttbutc^, by this, thereby; ©rtted'eiti to awaken; S5aa Euro'fja, -8, (the) Europe; 33ie |m|l, -, the haste ; S)ct |iuf, -d, pL -e, the hoof; ^eu^en, to gasp ; Exercise 100. S)ie .ffno«l)e, -, pi. -n, the bnd; .Rii^n, bold; Set iBanbnwnn, -ea, pi. -Icutc, the peasant, husbandman ; 33er Caut, -tit pi. -e, sound, voice; 9Jtemal8, never; SRegie'ten, to govern ; ©^ciumcn, to foam ; i-,wu-i > c i Set ©i|Iag, -t8, pL ©i^Ioige, blow; ©(^Wanfen, to stagger, reel ; 3)a8 SJie^, -eiS, pi. -e, the cattle; 3)te SBJelle, -, pi. -n, the wave; Serlre'ten, to tread down, p. 356. SlufgaBe 100. 1, 3Dcr Braufenbc SBinb treiM bas fi^wanfenbe ©c^tff burd§ tie f(|Sumenben Snellen. 2. "2)ort fomntt cln SJJann in »olIer §0^ gc* taufen." 3. ®er alte SWann f^rtcB mit jitternier §anb, 4. (Er rcitet gefi^winb, unb |att in bcm 2lrm ba« feufjenbe ^inb. 5. ©o [■ei c0, fprlc^t Sltkec^t mit bonncrnbem Saut. 6. ©iefer Mann i(l cin ju bcftrafenber 35erbre(^cr. 7. iJer lac^elnbe grit'^[ing erwccEt bie fc^kfenben SBIumen. 8. !Dic brennenbe ©onnc [Amcljt ben gliittjcnben ©c^nee. 9. 3'^t 33ruber ijl ein ju benelbenbet SJlenfc^. 10. htx tii^nt Sourer mirft fK^ in bie braufenbe glut^. 11. Sringe mir mcinen fWontel unb meine ipanbfd^u^e. 12.®c^i(fen ®ie3t)ren ©ebienten ju ntir. 13. Sin fi^Iafenber Jpunb fangt leinen §afen. 14. Unb feuc^cnb lag i(^, wie ein ©tertenber, jertreten unite t|ver ^ufe ©c^Iag. 15. ©uubernimmfi bie fpanifi^cn Sftcgimenter, ntat^fl Immer Slnjlalt unb Bifl niemafe fertig, unb trelben |ie bii^ gcgen mi^ jU jiC^en, fo fagji bu ia, unb Meibfl gefept jle'^n (L. 38. d). Exercise 101. , Jl£*'f9'^^' ^^^' 1. The falling snow covers the fallen tree. 2. The horse jomes running, the bird comes flying. 3. Give the ti embling 188 LESSON LI. old man ajX-oat. 4. My frieud^is a.very learned man. 5.1 hear the singing birds and the beating sheep. 6. The smiling spring brings us beautiful flowers. 1. So Se'it, said the king smiling. 8. He has the jreejupg child in his arm. 9. The burning sun jonrcs tn? lo^'Bg cattle into ffie forest. 10. The foaming wavej^ies over Sie trembling ship. 11. The snow melts beiore the burnina sun. 12. A^mding tree is more beautiful than a falren'raneT 13. The hoping Iiusbandman sees ■with joy the swelling buds. 14. Do not sing so loud. 15. Who is the most learned man in Europe ? 16. These travelers • call themselves traveling artists. 17. He governs them bv treating them kindly. ^jt*' LESSON LI. Cfittion LL COMPOUND VERBS SEPARABLE. 1. Any of the following particles may be compounded with a verb ; and as they may stand apart from it, they are called separable particles or prefixes (§ 89) ; namely, ft 6, from, off, down ; a tt, to, at, in, on, toward ; a U f, on, up ; ft u ^, out, out of, from ; B c i, by, near, with ; b ft or tar, there, at ; c i tt, in, into ; e m p r', up, upward, on high ; fort, onward, away, for ward ; g e g e tt, toward, against ; ^ c i ttt, home, .at home ; | e T, hither, here ; ^ i tt, thither, there, away ; i tt, in, within ; tit i t, with; tlft^, after; ttiefc cr, down, downward, under; ob, on, over, on account of ; Dor, before, from ; it) eg, away, off; 3U, to, toward; and jttriicf, back,' backward (§ 89 — 91). 2. In compound tenses, formed from the infinitive and an auxiliary, and in subordinate sentences, the particle is placed before the verb : Sr tnirti iaib antommen. He will soon arriTe. SEBir muffen au^ge^en (§ 93) We must go out. Obs. — In like manner are used with verbs several noiinp [fi«netime» written with a capital and sometimes with a small initial^- aAfi adjec- tives; as, ba^ eoncett Wirb ©tatt finben (or fiattfinbcn), the cirv-sn wiD take place; ei Witb tint %xt% 61cten {or tro^titetcn), he will w inri de- fiance ; cr t»iib i^n tobtWlagen, he will kill him. COMPOUND VERBS SEPARABLE. 189 3. 3 W of the infinitive, when used, and the augment g C of the past participle, are placed between the particle and the verb : , te gelbfrui|t, -, pi. -fruc^te, the produce of the field ; Saa ®eMrge, -it pi. -, the chain of mountains ; Sa« ©cfi^ttiiv', -ti, pi. -,the ulcer; TOai §etl, -ea, the welfare ; ©a«ft, soft; ©(^affen, to create, produce ; 5a5egp:iegen, to fly away, p. 348 ; Sffiegge^cn, to go away, p. 348 ; SCeglaufen, to run away, 350 ; "men, to take away, 352. Stimattm, to weary; atifi^reiiisn, to copy, p. 354 ; Sl6|ictgen, to descend, p. 356 ; Sled^t, genuine ; Sfnfangen, to begin, p. 348 ; Slnjie^en, to put on, p. 358 ; Slufgcl^cn, to rise, p. 348 ; Sluff^netben, to cut open, p. 354; Sfuffpeic^ettt, to store up; 3tttf(letgcn, to rise, p. 356 ; 3[u«bref(|cn, to thrash out, 346 ; S[u«gE:^en, to go out, p. 348 ; S[u«|alten, to sustain, p. 350; SluSfptec^en, to pronounce, 356; 3)ie Selagerung, -,1)1. -en, the siege ; Exercise 102. 2lufflaic 102. I. §oien ®te 3^re Suiter iBcggenommen ? 2. 3a, i^ na^m |Ic tBcg ols i^ flusging. 3. ®e|en 3^i^e greimbe ^cutc au« ? i. Stein, |lc fittt \&ion. auSgegangen. 5. ®^reibt ler RnaU ben Srief o6 ? 6. 9lein, er ^t t^n fd)on geflern obgef^neBen. 1. Der flei* gige Sauer t^at feine gelifriti^tc eingefainmelt, ouSgebrofi^en unJ oufgefpeii^ert. 8. Urn weldje Qtit gc^t tie Sonne auf ? 9. @te ifi fc^on aufgegangen. 10. !Der SKonfc fleigt :§intcr bem ©ebirge ■ auf unb erfiiHt bie Srbe nttt fcinem fanften Si(^te. 11, £)ie tabelnbe SCa^r^eit bes ac^tcn greunbes ijl iai Wt\\a be« SBunbarjteS, tai etn eiternbe^ ©efc^wiir ouff^neibet ; ei [(^ajfct ©c^meqen, abtv jum Jpeile bfg Seinenben. 12. !Der SSogel ifi weggeflogen unb iai ^ferb i(l treggelaufen. 13. 3(^ ^ate meine Jpanbf^u^e angejogen, unb je^t jie^e id^ meine tleBerf(^u'^e an. 14. 2)te wiiben Eftciter ftnb Bon f^ren atgemattctcn 9)ferben atgejiiegen. 15. @ie fprec^en die beut* f(^en SBiJrter fe^r gut au3, 16. ©ic fatten bie SSelagetung nct^ aui. ADVERBS. 191 Exercise 103. SlufgaJe 103. 1. Who has taken away my gloves and your umbrella 1 2. Your brother took away your gloves yesterday:. 3. At what time do you go out this evening ? 4. I shall not go out this evening, I went out this morning. 5. When will your friends go away 1 6. They have already gone away. , 7. Can you pronounce these words well 1 8. I can pronounce them, but aot very well. 9. Have you already begun to read German? 1 0. No, but I shall begin to-morrow, my friend began yester- day. 11. Does he pronounce well 1 12. Yes, he pronounces very well. 13. Why don't you take away your table ? 14. I have not time to take it away.^ 15. 1 am copying letters for my friend who went away yesterday. 16. He understands what you say, but he can not pronounce the German words well. LESSON Ln. f ection LII. ADVERBS. 1. The adverbs b o, there ; tort, yonder ; ^ i e r, here, and to 0, where, are used with verbs of rest, or r/ith those indicat- ing action within specified limits : ffier tjlbtt? $ier flc'^e ic^. Who is there ? Here I stand, ©ert ftJielcn hie fiinber; tt o finti bte Yonder the children are playing^ Sltern ? where are the parents ? 2. §er, hither, and '^in, thither, when compounded with other words, as b a, etc. (§ 91) still retain their distinctive mean- ings ; I c r indicating motion or tendency toward, and t) i n, from the speaker. As, however, these particles in compounds have no precise equivalents in English, their force is often lost in translating : SOJet ifl b Ai unb iucr gc^t b a '^ t n' ? Who is there, and who goes thither f SIctk ^ter, erwtrbialb :^iet^cr' Remain here, he -will soon come toatmen. here (hither). SB B ifl bet Stwtmann, unb Wi^in' TF%«r« is the magistrate, and wheno je^t ei ? {whither) is he going ! 192 LESSON in. Direction toward the speaker. Er ftircms '^ e t au8'. He sprang out (hither). Et IJieg ^ e t a u f. He ascended (hither). (Sr ileigt ^txaV. He descends (hither). ©r tarn ^ e r u n' t e r. He came down (hither). Et tuberte ju mi J e r it' J e r» He rowed across (hither) to iul Direction from the speaker . Ct ijrang ^ i n a U «', He sprang out (thither). 8i jiteg ^ i t a u f . He ascended (thither). Ci fleijt ^ i n a J'. He descends (thither). El ging ^ i nu n't e t. He went down (thither). Et tuberte ju i^nm ^ in tt 'i e r. He rowed across (thither) to them. 3. Jp C r and 1§ i n are often separated from t» o, and placed at the end of the sentence. They are also sometimes used with verbs of rest ; 1^ in, in the signification of past, gone / and | c r, denoting proximity : 5D ge'^Ett ©te ^ i n? Whither are you going? 28 tommt et '^ e t ? Whence is he coming? a5cr ©ommer ifl fi^on ^ t n. The summer is already past. ©ie jlanben um i^n ^ e t. They stood round about him. 4. These compounds after the dative preceded by a prepo- sition, or after the accusative, are usually rendered by a prep- osition before the objective : Et flog jUttt Senjiet ^inauS'. He flew out of the window. Sie tamen Me Xxt)fiH ^erun'tet. They came down the stairs. FOKMATION OF ADVERBS. 5. Adverbs are formed by the union of nouns with nouns, nouns with pronouns, nouns with adjectives, nouns with prep- ositions, adverbs with prepositions and prepositions with prep- ositions : ©c^aarcnttclfe, in hordes; (©c^aar, horde; SBeife, manner), ©liictlii^etwcife, or I fortunatelv (8l«'IH4 fortunate; aBeirefmatt SRetnetfeite, for my part; (mein, my; ©ette, side), ©ttoniauf, up stream; (©ttom, stream; auf, up). SBobutc^, whereby; (WD, where; burii|, through), tteSetau*. exceedingly ; (iiBer, above ; a««, out of). ADVERBS. 193 6. Adverbs are foimed from various parts of speech by means of the suiExes li^, lingS, tB&rt^, i (§ 103 — 106) : tSglic^, daily; iKnblins?/ blindly; ttufwiirtS, upward; flug*, suddenly; tec^W, to the right ; linf«, left (to the left) ; morgEn?, in the morning; (iJenbS, in the evening ; anbera, otherwiaa Seifpicle. Examples. Dtt gettjett fl^t ttuf beat 9)fetbe «nb The general sits upon the horse and reitet ru^ig loijiga bctt Sttiljtn bet rides ealmly along the ranks of ©olbtt'ten ^in unb ^er. the soldiers to and fro. JDiefe Einwanbcrer tommen (mi So^' These immigrants come here (hith- men '^er. er) from Bohemia. Daa SeJen beg a)Ienf($en fc^wanft toie The life of man, like a skiff, -wavers ein Sta^ett/ ^inuber unb ^etuber. (vacillates) to and fro. Unb ^tnein' mit bebdc^tigemSii^rittetn And thither (therein) with consid- S'iwt tritt. — S. erate step a Hon strides. (Ein S^or fui|t Mtnbling? Stu^m tm A fool blindly seeks renown in the Cabstittt]^ bet S^anbe.— $-tt. labyrinth of infamy. VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. $tnauf', up; i)ina«3', out ; |)init'bet, over, across; S)ct Cauf, -eg, pi. ficiufe, the course, Tiai fSittx, -ti, pi. -e, the sea; 33et SDJctgcn, -i, pi.-, the morning; Sic gJerle, -, pL -n, the pearl; SJeifen, to travel; I)et ©tutm, -e«, pi. Stiirme, storm ■ %MXcl)en, to dive; JFj,.^,' ; ^ SBe;|I, well, probably. 3)al^in, thither, there; getnbtiil, hostile ; S3te ®cfa]^t', -, pi. -en, the danger ; 2)te ®en)alt', -, pi. -en, the power; |>er, hither ; ittan', on, near; lietit'bet, over, across; lienm'ter, down ; liiet^et, hither, here ; i>in, thither, away; ixmi'i down; Exercise 104. SlufgaBc 104. 1. 3Bo ifl bcr Simmermann ? 2. gr t|l in Dcutf(^tanb, fein greunb j(l and) t>a. 3. Sletfen ®ie auc^ ba'^itt ? 4. gntmeber rcife ic^ t»a# Jin, obet er forantt :^ie4er. 5, SCo gc'&en unferc greunbe :§ttt? 6. ©ie gc:§ctt nad^ bent Ijorfe; foHen mir aui^ ba^tn 0c:§en? 7. SBtr tpollcn ^cutc Iter Hetben unb morgen ba^in ge:|en. 8. aBoIIen ©ie ben 33erg linauf ge^en ? 9. SCo fontmt i^r |er unb ttto ge|t if^x. t;in ? 10. 2Gir fontmen aus ©i^roakn unb ge^en na&i 5)reu§en. 11. "Der SRann muf (L. 45. 15.) |ittau« in'g feinblid^c SeSott." 12. 2Btr totjfen wo^I tuo icne fleigigen Slrteiter '^ingegangcn [!nb. 9 194 LESSON LIU. 13. £)er 2:au(^e« taui^t iu iai 5Keer l)inat\ urn ^erlen ■^crauf^u^o* ten. 14. Set gropen ©titrraen fint Me ©'djiffe oft in ©efo'^r, benn Jie aCeHen fi^kgcn tnit ®tm\t ^eran, iai ©i^iff f^wanlt ^iniiber unt» l^eritBer. 15. ®es iKorgenS i%eiBt er unb be« Slbenia tie^ cr. 16. ^inab, I)tnauf ge'^t unfer 2auf. Exercise 105. Jlufgatc 105. I. Where are you going ] 2. I am going to the village, will fou go there t6o ] 3. I shall go there the day after to-morrow, but not to-day. 4. The boy sprang down in Hfie water. 5. Our friends are in Greece and we shall also go there. 6. Are your_ cousins coming here 1 1. No, for thevare already here- 8. Have you. ever traveledfrom Germany to Russia 1 . 9. The earpenter fell down from ^Ke" roof. 10. The horse rarfdown ffie-mountain. 11. The boys went up the street 13. We > must go to the forest, will you go there with us ? 13» No, we must remain where we are. 14. I will go up if you will coiiie dowii. 15. Have you ever been in Russia 1 LESSON Lin. Cection LIIl. COLLOCATION OF WORDS. WORDS REQUIRING THE VERBS AT THE END OP THE SENTENCE. 1. When the subordinate clause is introduced by either of the following words, the verb (as with the relative pronoun L. 39. 5.) is placed at the end of the sentence ; namely : 21 1 S, when, than ; 1} e » or, e^C, before; H 5, till ; fca, since; i am it, in order that; t)a§, that; f a 11 8, if, in case ; intern, while, in that ; i n )' f e r n, (with ali implied) in so far ; j e ( L. 32.11.) nad^iem, after that, when; ob, whether, if; feit, fcttbent, since; fo, thus, if; o:^ngeac^tet or ungcac^tct, notwithstanding; mii^renli, while; icann,when; tuarunt, why; wet I (Meweil) because; wenn, if; loic, as, when; IDO where if. COLLOCATION 01 WORDS. 1»6 COMPOUNDS UNDER THE SAME RB^E Are otglcic^, otfc^on, oBroo'^I, or 06 glcti^, 06 fiSott, 06 well, Jcenn aud^, wenn glcii^, reenn f(^on, although, even if ; taferit, it)o« fern, if, in case that ; auf bafj, so that; al3 06 and als ttenn, as if. Obs. — SBcnn ouc^, wctin jletcl and wenn f^on, though often reniered llthough, (like oS tto^t, and the words preceding it) are more strongly M cessive than the former, and usually best rendered by even though. WORDS FOLLOWED BY THE CORRELATITE tn ©te tntl^l fc^on than the English, you have prob- eingefe'^en. 3?ie ^aie ic^ |ie gemie'bcn unb fc^tuer* Uc^ iBcibc ii^ i^nen (L. 63. 3.) ganj entge^en. — ©, ably already seen. Never have I avoided them, and hardly shall I entirely escape them. SJem gttcblt(|cn gettii^rt man gem ben To the peaceful man one wiUiujr'v Srieben. — ©. accords peace. VOCABULARY TO THE KXEKCISES. Stnfommen, to arrive, p. 350 ; Si9, till ; 2)er Sitrger, -i, pi. -, the citizen ; titx 33am|)f, -eS, pi. S)am5)fe, steam, exhalation ; tmij, yet, however ; ®er 3)unjl, -ei, pL Siinflc, vapor ; Snbltci!, at last, finally ; 6nt|ie'^en( to arise, originate ; ®ott, -ti, God ; 3e-beflo, L. 32. 11 ; 3e nad^bem, according as ; Die firaft, -, pL ^rdfte. the force ; S>er VtaS^tn, -9, pi. -, the boat ; ©er 9?c6el, -i, pi. -, the mist ; Di, whether; S>er Slegen, -i, the rain ; ©titbem, since ; Eroige, idle ; Ungiudlic^, unhappy; UnStt^Ug, innumerable ; SJertnn'ben, to unite, p. 345'. aJert^^et'bigcn, to defend; ■Die SEBaffen, pL the arms, weapone- 3eigen, to show. P8 LESSON tm. Exercise 106. SIufgoBc 106. 1. (Sniti^ jetgten tie SBiirgcr i^re SCaffen, unS ftngcn an P^ jtt ftertltitigen. 2. 3(^ ^atte it)n gefeticn, e^e fctne greunCe angcfonti men waren. 3. 2Barten ©ie Ha ic^ ten SBrief gclcfen iaht. A, SCir tt)i|Jen, baf er ukrmorgen tommen ttjirt. 5. 3c mc^i^ ®ott til gegekn :|at, beflo me^r foll^ tu ten Slrmen geten. 6. 3e na^tcm man ge^onbett |at, toirti man glueflic^ otcr ungliicftii^ fcin. t. 34 tteig nic^t, ob er ba tjl. 8. ©eitbem fein Sater ^ier ifl, ifl er siel pfriebener. 9. 5Bir t»t|Jcn, wie cr iai gef^an ^at unb wo er |ina ficgangen t|l. 10. 2(uS Dampfcn unb Eiinfien ent|le:^en Sflctcl unb IRegcn. 11. ©ie wijfen nic^t, toarum id) MS gefagt ^abe. 12. 3ltle >ine ^rafte woUte er fammeln unb (ie mit bem geinbc »erHnben. 13. Unfer ©^ijf nennt er etnen 5^ad^en. 14. DBgleic^ er arm ifl, ijl cr ia&i glitdlii^. 15. SSeiI©ie!ran! finb, fo !bnnen ©ie ni^t luSge^en. 16. ©ie jtnb front unb Knnen bc§^aI6 nic^t au^gc^en. 17. Ueber una fc^en h)ir nur ben §immel unb unja^Itge ©tcme. Exercise 107. 9tufgabc 107. 1. He has written more books than he has bought. 2. They saw me before I saw them. 3. We will wait here till you can 50 with us. 4. You know that I have not seen him. 5. The longSS' a man lives the shortCT time has he yet to live. •/ 6. Ac- cording as one is idle or industrious will one be unhappy or contented. 7. I do not know whether he will come or not. 8. [ have seen him since I havfe been here. 9. Do you know how long he remained in the city 1 10. No, I know that he has been there, but I do not know how long he remained^ 11. We krow him, but we do not know where he lives. 12. This boy is sad because his father is sick. 13. Because he has not much money Jie is discontented. 14. I am tired and can, therefore,'^ write no longer. 15. They can not go out because they are sick. 16. Because he is sick he can not go out. 17. These books I have never read. '^' COMPOUNB VEKBS ISTSEPARABl*. 199 LESSON LIV. £ettion LIV. COMPOUND VERBS . INSEPARABLE. 1. The unaccented particles it, em)), cnt, er, gc, tnif, set, tt)<* fccr and jer, when prefixed to verbs, reject the augment ( g e) in the past participle, and take before them 3 u of the infinitive ; Et ^ttt fetn |>au« sertauft. He has sold his house. Et jttt ein |iau« ju settauftn. He has a house to sell. Sffiie Jat man eu^ cmpfangen ? How were you reoeived! 5)a« l^at mtt nte geprt'. That has never belonged to me. S5u '§ttjl ben ©piegcl 5er6ro'c|cn. You have broken the mirror. For a more complete survey ot the above particles than could here be properly introduced, see § 95. and following. 2. Timd), through ; Winter, behind ; iiBer, over ; utn, around ; Utttcr, under; tioU, full; wiier, against; wieter, again, back, when accented, are separable, and when unaccented, insepar- able: 6r ttieber^o'lte teas cr ge^iirt ^attt. He repeated what he had heard. Er :^olte iaS Bvtd) wieber. He brought the book again. "Daa SSSttlfet i(l bur^gelaufen. The water has run through. 3. The particle mif , in some words, takes the accent, and, in the infinitive and past participle, is treated like other sepa- rable particles : Ea ^ttt mtp'getiint; tS fc^eint mifiu* It has sounded wrong ; it seems to tonen. sound wrong (mis-sound). 4. In some verbs the augment is used before the prefix mi^ (but is oftener wholly rejected) : ©ic ^ttStrt t^n gesiig'^anbelt (or wig* They have maltreated (abused) l^an'belt. him. Scif))iele. Examples. 6t Sefa^I' il^nen (L. 62. 3.) i^re ^a\X' He commanded them to illuminate fcr JU itlmiSjUn. their houses. $ij, i^ '^ait euren Santniet nur i)er« Alas 1 I have only increased your grS'^ert. grief 6t 1)at mi ftBergefe^t. He has taken (ferried) us over. %t ^at ein 3;rtt«erfpiel CMi beat 2)eut* He has translated a fc-agedy from f*cn itteifett'. the German. 200 LESSON LI 7. Siefer flttu^ami scrfoigt' xmi mit fiaffee, S^ce, SudEct, u. Siefe 3)iTanjen ntiilfen aJe 3a^re »er» fefet njerben. S)ie lierrli^teit ber SSelt uetfi^nji'ntiet. ©0 serge^t aUei Srbifc^e. (Et ^ot Sllle* setlenU' tta« er »a§te. Tliis mercliaut supplies as with coffee, tea, sugav, etc. These plants must be trarsplanted every year. The glory of the world Tanislies. Thus perishes every thing eai-thly. He has forgotten every thing that he knew. VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. Segt'leH/ to commit, p. 348; Selo^'nm, to reward ; aSerau'icn, to rob; Sefc^tei'bcn, to describe, p. 354; Sauon, of it; ®ie Eltern, pL the parients; Erfin'beii, to invent, p. 348 ; Et^ttl'ten, to receive ; Etnior'ben, to murder; ©rfc'gen, to replace; £)ic ®ute, -, the goodnras; 2)ic Sugenb, -; the youth; Exercise 108. S)ie flanfl, -, pi. Jtanjle, the ait; S)te Sitit, the love ; 3RtB'»etjie^Ht, to misunder- stand, p. 356; 2)ie g>11ii^t, -, pi. -en, the duty; 3)oli'ren, to polish ; Ser ©tjicgeli-g, pi.-, looking-glass; 35er %i)nl, -Jeine ©(^iiter ^a6en fti^ gut Bctrflgen. 6. 9Kan ^at mtr iiefeg ©«^ empfo^Ien. T. 3* ^obe einen Sricf son etnent meiner greunte er|alten, toorin cr feiw Sleife Bcfc^rieten |at. 8. Siner ermartet ®el5 son feinem SJoter, unJ ber SlnJere scrbient fein ®eH>. 9. 3Bir mu§ten ben alien SJKann in iai Tim bcgraien. 10. Der Sauer l^at fetnen SJeigcn serlau^. 11. 3^r SBruicr |at mic^ migtjcrfianbcn, i^ ^aU i^^m nic^ts sers; [proven. 12. ©r :^at feinen ©picgel jerbrod^cn. 13. Unfcre Srcunte ^aben unS befuc^t, ftc oerfuc^ten beutf^ ju fprec^en, aber wtr fonnten fie nic^t ser^e^en. 14. Sag tapfere ^eer ^at ben geinb oertrieben. 15. Sr lot felnc 5>flt(^t erfiiUt uni feine greunte ^aben i^n belo^nt. 16. 2Bo3 fiir ein SScrbre^en ^aben biefe Scute begangen ? 17. ©ic ^abcn einen 9Rflnn beraubt unb crmorbct. 18. Tin Mait ^at feine Snopfc polirt, anftott fein Suc^ ju ftubiren. 19. "Bwei 33uc^ ^ken my knife. 9. We tried to speak German, but they could not understand us. 10. I can recommend this book to you, ] studied it in my youth. 11. The poor man was obliged to sell his bed. 12. This man has committed no crime. 13. The thief has buried the murdered man in the forest. 14. He has robbed his friend. 15. Have you sold any thing to-day 1 16. Yes, I have sold my horse. 17. What have you promised me I 18. 1 have not promised you any thing. 19. Either you have forgotten or I have misunderstood you. 20. Do your duty and I will reward you. 21. 1 have not yet received ttiat which vou promised me, but I have not forgotten it. LESSON LV. Cettion LV. SUBJUNCTIVB. 0ONJUGA.TI0N OF ©ciit, ^aBctt AND 2C c r t C It, I may be. ii) fei, bw fct£ll (or feifl), er fei, Wir feteu (or fein), i^i feiet, fit fc'tn (or fein). Jmigk. he. t^ tBcire, iu morejl (or warp)/ tr wore, Bit ttttten, l^t Bdret (or wntl)/ fie ttJBven, PEESENT TEH3E. I may have. I may become. xii ^aie, ti| tterbe, t)« |aie|l, bu werbeft, er i^tUt, er toerbe, ttir |a6en, ttir imerben, t|t JaBet, i^r wctbetr jtc laSen. Ite tterben. IMPEEFEOT TENSE. I might have. I might becom*. \ii ptte, xiS) wSrbe, bu idtteji, bu WiirbejT, er ptte, er wurbe, ttir fatten, Wii Wiirben, i^r pttet, i|r wiirbet, fte ptteit. fic witrben. o* 202 LESSON LV. J may hoje beeii. PEKFBOT TENSE. Im ly have had. I may have become. i* fei bu fetefl cr fei »ir feien i^r fciet fte feien gewefen. ic^ '^flbe bu l^abejl er |a6e wir ^aben i^r ^abet jtc ^aben gc^abt. t<% fei bu fetjl er fei wir feien ibr fciet fte feien geworbtn. PIDPERFECT TENSE. I might have Vi) ware bu wcirefl er ffiare wir Wnrcn i^r warct jie toaren beeTi. ■ gewcfen. I might have t<^-^dtte bu lattcjl er |dtte wir fatten i^r bdttct fie fatten had. ^ ge^abt. I might have beeoma, id) wore bu wdreji er ware gcWorbcn wir wdrcn or worben. ibr waret jie wdrcn FIEST FUTCEE TENSE. {If) I shall bt iij tuerbe bu werbefl er wcrbe B)ir werben i^r toerbet jtc wcrben fein. {If) I shall he K6i werbe bu Werbejl er Wtrbe Wir werbcn i^r werbet fie werben ive. '^ttben. (If) I shall be ii) werbe bu werbejl er werbe wir werben tbr werbet jie werben vom& wcrben. SECOND ruTDSE TENSS {If) I shall h ii) iDcrbe bu werbejl er werbe Wir wcrben t^r werbet fte wcrbctt ave been. gewefen fein. {If) 1 shall h li) werbe bu werbejl er werbe wir wcrben i^r werbet jte wcrben ave had. . gC^abt ' fabcn. {If) I shall h ii^ werbe bu werbejl cr werbe Wir wcrben ibr werbet fte werben ave becomes geworben ■ or worben fein. 1. The subjunctive is employed : a. To indicate a wish or a result, in which use it answers to our potential : !Darum cben let^t er ^ctncm, bamit cr For this very reason he lends t« fleta ju geben ^abe. — S. no one (viz.), that he may always have (something) to give. Son 3cit ju 3ett bebiirf ber SfBcifc, ba§ From time to time the wise man man i^m bie Outer, bic er beji^t, im needs that the endowments he rei^ten Si^te jeige. — ®. possesses should be shown to him in the correct light. h. It is used in citing a report or opinion, as also in indi- rect (questions : BUBJUNCirVE. 203 3 Be it (let it be) as you wished Sc^t Se^e Scber feinea fBt^ei, — ©. Now let each go his way. ^aScn Bit Oebulb' ! or Let us be patient I literally, Sa^t mi @ebulb ^alien ! Let us hare patience I Wtm iiitt i^n an bie Sinbe bsit 1 Let him be bound to the lii J at yonder. FOBMATION OP THE SpEJUUCTIVE. Present Tense. » The present subjunctive of all verbs is formed by sutfi t- ing to the root, c for the first and third person singular, and c 1^ for the second ; the first and third person plural add e n, and the second e t : i^to6-e, wtrIo6-cn; tc^ luoU-e, tt>ic woK-enj tu lob-cfl, i^x loi-tt; bu ttJott-ejl, i^i woll-et; er tot-e, jte loB-cn. cr woll-e, |te tuoH-fn. Imperfect Tense, 5. In regular verbs the imperfect of the subjunctive difit is from that of the indicative in taking e before the endings 1 e, tt^tenandtet(L. 37. 1. 8.): Indicative. Subjunctive. ic^ loB-te, toir loB-tcn; ic^ loB-e-te, ttir loB- e-tct ; tuIoMejl, i|r loB-tct; t)u loB-e-te|l, i^r lob -c-tet; cr lob-te, jte loMen. cr lob-e-te, jlc lot -e-tcn. 6. Irregular verbs add c to the form of the indicative, an 1 usually take the Umlaut, if capable of it : Indicative. Subjunctive. ic^ goB, tDirgaBen; i^ gate, tBirgaten; bu gatfl, t'^r goBt; tu gabcjl, ilix gabct; cr gaB, jte goBcit. cr gSBc, ftc giibcn. The other tenses are formed by means of auxiliaries. For compAfit list of irregular verbs see p. 346 ; also, remarks § 11. Sctfpietc. ExAJPLKS. SBtT ntc^t bie SEBcIt in fcinen gteunben He who does not see the world in fte^t »ttbtent nid^t bag bit SBelt son his Mends does not deserre that l^m (xfat)'xi. — ®. "'« world should hew of him. BCBJUNCrriVB. 205 !Da5 wan elnen SJogel fangen fann, iai That a bird can be eaugh-t (that) I JDtig ic^i aitt ti(ij) man i'^m fetlten know, but that his cage caa be Saftg anjene^nter ali iai frtie Welb made more pleasant to him than nta^en fSnne, iai »eip i^ tiic^t. — the open field (that) I do not £, know. VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. Se^auf'ten, to aflSrin; Vai aSert'n, -8, (the) Berlin ; SBill :it/ to cultivate ; Sinben, to bind, tie, p. 346 ; 33tta 2)re«ben, -8, (the) Dresden; Stagttt, to ask; Die ^anbtung, -, pL en, the action; Eer ^eri, - tt, pL -en, lord, master ; Sie Stnbe, -, pi. -n, linden-tree ; 3)tetncn, to think; ®ie ©einung, -i pi. -en, opinion; ®ie SJatur, -, pi. -en, the nature; tiai 5Rct»enftef)et, ~i, pi. -, the nerv- ous fever ; T)ai 3tow, -8, (the) Rome; 2)er S^rann, -en, pi. -en, tyi-ant; Umfonfl', in vain; 3598 Scne'btg, -8, (the) Venice; 2)ie aJerllel'Iung, -, pi. -en, the di» simulation ; SJiermal, four times ; S)ie SBelt, -, pi. -en, the world; SBieber, again; 35tt8aBien, -8, (the) Vienna ; Baax, indeed; Sweimal, twice. Exercise 110. Ittfgaic 110. 1. 3(| ^xk, t)of iiefer S^rann tn Serlin geiuefen, ahv iii^ »«pte tti^t, oB e^ ma^r fci. 2. Jpaten ®le auc^ gc^Brt, i^ fct »om 3)ferte gefatten? 3. 9lcin, tc^ |brte, ®ie felen am bent 2Bagen gefotten. 4. Die granjofen be^aitpten jte feicn ble ©eHIietflen in ter Sfficlt. 5, 3:§rc LESSON LVr. Exercise 111. SlufgaBe HI. 1. I lope I shall see them tomorrow. 2. He has promised that he wiU go w'.th us to-morrow to the city. 3. He made me beheve that he was my friend. 4. We heard that you were unwell. 5. Why do you think that he is your enemy 1 6. Because my friends told me that he hates me. 7. I have heard thit my brother has lost his horse. 8. They say these people are very poor. 9. He says we were in his garden. 10. Did you hear that I had found my money ? 11. I had not heard that you had lost your money. 12. This man says that he has been in Vienna. 13. It is said that the ship has arrived. 14. These people think that we are very rich. 15. A good scholar studies diligently that he may learn rapidly. 16. He thought I cottld not write. 17. They said that they miust have the mo- ney. 18. My brother says that'they have praised you. LESSON LVL tection LVL CONDITIONAL. CONDITIONAL ov © 6 1 It, ^otcji AND SBcrbeii. T shmMbe. i$ Wurbe bu wuTbefi er wurbe ir>tr wurben i^r wurbtt jle wiitbcn fein. FTEST oo:a>rnoNAL. / should have. iS) ttutbe bu »urbe(l ct ttiirbc IBir wurben i^t tBiirbct jte tttttbeii ^aicn. I should beeotne. iiS) wurbe bu wurbefl er Witrbe wtr wurben i^r wurbet fie wurben werben. / shoiUd liate teen iH) wurbe bu wiirbell er wiirbe Wir wurben t^r wurbet lie wurben BEOOND COHDinONAI,. I should have had. I should have become. gtwefen fein. i(^ wurbe bu wurbefl er wurbe Wtr witrben t^r wurbet fie WW ben' Se^abt laben. ii) wurbe bu wiirbeH er wiirbe wir wiirben i^r wurbet fie wiirben geworben or worbe« fein. 7ONDITI0IJAI.. 201 1. The conditional mode is employed where a cond'lion is supposed wliich is regarded as doubtful or impossible : 3(1) wutbc feli(l ge^en, Wenn t($ nt(|t I -would go myself if I were not fo ttit wavE. so old. ?Ba« wutben ©ie gef^an '^dim, wcnn What would you have done, if you ©ie ti gefe^en fatten ? had seen it ? fir aurbe ti t^un, wenn er fiinnte. He would do it, if he could. Sie ttutben ti get^an Ijaim, wenit fie They would have done it, if they in. gewcftn waren. had been there. 2. For the above forms of the conditional, the imperfect and pluperfect of the subjunctive are often substituted ; W e B tt being omitted, and the subject preceded by the verb : ®aS ware fdjoner, tocirc e^ ni^t fo That were more beautiful, were it gro§ ; instead of not so large ; instead of 2)08 ttiirbe f(^ijn« fein, ttenn ci ni^t That would be more beautiful, il fo gto5 Bare. it were not so large. Si) ^(itte e« ntc^t geglautt, ^citte ic^ e8 I had not believed it, had I not ttii^tgefe^eni instead of seen it; instead of Si) wurbe ti nii^t geglaubt ^aictl, ttenn I would not have believed it, if I ic^ ti nti^t gefe^en ^icitte. had not seen it. SCii|te ev, tto ic§ Sin, fo Mme er ju Bere our idiom does not admit of a mir ; instead of literal translation. aCcnn.er taw^U, wo ii) iin, fo ttiirbe If he knew where I am, he would er }U mir fommtn. come to me. EXAMPLES OF THE CONDITIONAL AND THE INDICATIVE. Conditional. Indicative. fir tturbe tommcn, He would oome^ fir lonnte fomwen, He could conr.«, locnn et burfte. ifhewereatlib- a6er fr ttoltc but he would erty to. nidjt, not. ©ie ttiirbe Bleiien, She would re- ©ie ttoUte ntc()t She would not toenn fie nii|t ge« main, if she Mciien, oiglcic^ remain, ' though '^cn m&pte. were not ob- fte md)t geSen she was not ob- liged to go. nmpte. liged to go. fir ttiirbe ti gcprt He would have fir ttar ba ^fat' He had been ^aicn, ttenn er ba heard it, if he fen, aJer er |atte there, but he had gtttefcn ttoire, had been there. eS tii^t geprt. not heard it. 3. The conditional mode is employed : a. Interrogatively to express surprise or dissent: Bu Wcirefl 3)»n 3Kanuel ? — ©. You are Don Manuel ? (.Do you sayf ) Srttume, 9)rinj? ©o ttiiren ti nur Dreams, Prince) Were they then Xrittmt gettefcn ? — ©. only (i. e. they were nort dreams I 208 LESSON LVL SKir ptte ei einfaHen foUen biefcn (Who pretends that) it oocnned to ©taot tm ©taate ju bulben?— ©. me to tolerate this state mthin the state i b. Sometimes the condition, or that on which it depends, it lot expressed : grommet ©tot! D ptt' ic^ ittmmet PeaceM staff 1 O, had I nerei mtt bent 'Sdftantt bic^ Dertaufc^t ! changed thee for the sword 1 Biea elcnbe SScrfjens fomtte mi(% ret'- This wretched vehicle (instrument) tjn, Jrdc^te mi^ fc^neU ju 6efreutibe» might save me — might soon eon- ten ©tdbten. — ©. vey me to friendly cities. Vm moc^t' i^ WilTeiii bet ber Xteupe I would like to know(theone) who niu »on OTcn i|l. — ©. is the most faithful of all to me. c. To express an opinion with caution or diffidence : ©(i»erIi^mo(%teerbc8getnbe«flunb=' He can (I think) scarcely escape ft^aft Jintetgejn. — ©. the search of the enemy. MUti fonnte jule^t nut falf(i^e4 ©))tel AU might (may) finally be decep- fein. — ®. tion (false play). 2)er 3)56el Tj&ttt mic§ fafl gejieimst. The rabble almost (was likely to — ®. have) stoned ma d. After a negative the conditional is used to give empha- sis or intensity to the sentence : ^ui) Bnnen air Per leine 9?euen:ng STor can we make complaint of any fllage ffi'^ren, welc^e tn biefet Qtit innovation that has been made ttgcnb Wo gemac^tworbenWate.-S. any where during this time. 3c^ "^in in mcinem Seben fo glfidlt^ I have not been so fortunate in my nic^t getBt'fen, bai ii^ b«« SJcrgnfigen life as often to have experienced oft emtjfunbcn ^dtte. — ^8. the pleasure. Obs. — ^To give additional prominence to what may be regarded as extraordinary, the imperfect of the indicative is sometimes substituted for the conditional : "$atte er in biefem STugenHide fi^ Had it ignited at this moment, the entjfin'bct, fo luar {far a>aie) bet best part of its effect would have Sejle S^etl felnerSIBirhmg serloten., been (were) lost. SBeifptcIe. Examples. f>dttc|i bu DonSRcnfd^en Sfffer jJetS ge* Hadst thou always thought better ba^t, bu 5«ttejl beffet auc^ gcjan- of men (mankind) thou wouldst belt. — ©. also have acted better. ai SSejlc, toaSbiefe ganje ©efeltfi^aft f^un tiinntc, tDore,gIeic^ flBjurcifen. 2. S55er l^atte gcglouBt, tag er ejn foIc§e« ^erj jetgctt ttiirtc ? 3. Tiefer grentfcc ^dtte es getBig nii^t get^an, wenn tutr i^n giitig Bc^anbelt fatten. 4. ^eltt ijerniinftiger 9Kcnf(^ wtoe fo ge^nbelt ^^aieit. 5. Sr ffinnte rei^t gut Icfcen, luenn er nid)t fo »cr* fi^wenberifi^ wiirc. 6. 3^ ioixxit glet^ ju i^m gc'^cn, wenit ic^ nur wiiftc, wo er ifl. 1. ®te tudre gewig son ber Sriidc t)ina6 ge* fallen, wenn i'^re greunbtn jte nii^t ge^alten tiotte. 8. ©r tBiirbe ctcnl fein, tuenn er fo lefcen miipe wte id^. 9. SBenn ic^ taa ges rouft latte, fo ware id^ gana anber^ oerfa^rcn. 10. 3i^ wm'tt mit S^nen ge|en, wenn i&i ni&it fo siel ju t^^un '^atte. 11. SBenn id) bag S3u^ gefe^en :§atte, fo wiirbe i&i cs gefauft lakn. 12. SBir ttitrbcn fi^on fprei^en tbnnen, wcnn wir flelfig flubirt l^fttten. 13, 2Dcnn |Ic 3eit ptten toiirben jlc nnS geteif Beglciten. 14. SCenn i6) engltfc^ fiinnte, fo wiirbe ii^ glcic§ nac^ Slmerifa auswanbem. 16. 3d^ glauk nic^t, bag bu lange bort HeiBen wiirbefl, wenn bu fluswanbcm folltefl. 16. 3<^ wurbc ias Jpolj laufen, wenn a gut ware. 17. "Da? ware ctne nttglic^e ©a^e. 18. D^^nc S^re witrbir ber 9Renf(^ ein clenbea 2Befen fein. Exercise 113. 3lufga6c 113. 1. What would you do with this book if it were yours? 2. I -would study and try to learn the language th/it it teaches. 210 LESSON Lvn. 3. What would you do if you were rich? 4. I would trave. and study. 5. I should be satisfied if I could speak as well as you do. 6. If I had had a teacher I should have learned n uch faster. Y. Would you sell this house if it were yours ? 8. No, I would live in it. 9. I do not believe you could sell it. 10. If the stranger had called, I should certainly have heard him. 11. You would have money enough if you were only industri- ous. 12. We could have bought the horses if we had had the money." 13. I would write you a German letter if I could. 14. We should have seen the company if we had been at home. 15. They would come if they had not so much to do. 16. If he were only here it would be quite a different affair. 11. It would not bo the business of a month. LESSON LVII. Ccction LVU. IMPERSONAL VERBS. 1. Besides the verbs denoting natural phenomena (as, ti ton* ncrt, ti rcgnet, etc.) which in both languages are alike imper- sonal (§ 88), there are many verbs in German impersonally used, for which the neuter or passive form is required in Eng- lish: £8 ^at jlatf geregnet. It has rained hard. e« ^agelt unb fd^neit. It hails and sno-ws. ®3 tifl^tet fi^on. It is already growing dark (night). e« grauet mir sor i^m, 6a»or. I have a horror of him, of it. di gelfifiet iijm md) Slllem Kai er fielt. He covets every thing that he seea (ES frcut mt^. I ani glad, lit. it rejoices ma. e« ■^ungctt unb burftet un«. We are hungry and thirsty. e« if} mir mit biefcr ©a^e ®rn|l. I am in eam-sst in this matter. (£? gelttng or gliidEte t'^nt eS }U f^un. He succeeded in doing it. ®a t^ut un3 Slllen fe'^r leib. AVe are all very sorry, es fi^Winbelt i^ltcn. They feel dizzy. (Bi 1)at t^m gettii gctrfiumt. He has certainly been dreaming. Um tselc^e Sett t«j t e8 ? At -what time does it dawn (ijro-w liffhtt? IMI'SRSONAI. VJSKsa. ill 2. Some impersonal verbs are sometiuoes preceded by the object ; the pronoun ti being omitted : miij ^ungert. SKit fi^wtnbclt. S^ncn ^at gctriiutnt. Un3 burjlet. 3. ©Su^teti; tiinlen impersonally used, take either the dative or accusative : SWi^ buntt lie fatten rec^t. Methinks they vere right. ®a8 bfinit mit boc^ ju gtfipic^. That really seems to me too hor- rible. 4. ®eben, impersonally used, indicates existence in a general and indefinite manner, and is rendered by to be; the object of geBen standing as the subject of to be : "Sa gt6t iijfe Oeiflet, Me in beSStctt' There are (exist) evil spirts that f(I)Ctl Srujl ftc^ i^ten SEBo^nftJ ne^' take (to themselves) their abode men*'' iii man's breast, ffiifct ti ^eute WHi 3feueS? Is there any thing new to-day f SSai siWi, waruai laufen ©te ? What's the matter, why do yon run I 5. f5e|len, gckec^cn and ntangeln are often used impersonally, gc^nerally followed by the dative of a person, with the dative of a thing ; the latter being governed by a n : e« fe^Ite i^m nic^t an gnteai SBiCen. He was not lacking in good will. "Dm ©tiitlti^en fann ti an 9Zic|t8 The happy man can be in want of geJred^en." nothing. Sin Seicnamitteln mangelt ti i^nen. There is a lack (scarcity) of provi sions with them, 6. Verbs, intransitive as well as transitive, are frequently used impersonally and reflexively, to denote an action in pro- gress, or what is customary : e« fragt |tc^, oJ er ti ttirb t^un Ion* It is qnestionable whether he will Itetl. be able to do it. •■ Sc^^afl ttciuntt ftc^'S unter biefem One dreams briskly (much) under Saum," this tree. Ea fa^tt fic^ gut auf biefent SBagen. This is a good wagon to rids in. (&i getit^tt ^ij ttic^t baa jU l^«n. It is not proper to do that. le Ernte, -, pi. -n, the harvest; ge'^Icn, to fail, be deficient in; Sriercn, to be cold, freeze, 1. 2; ®ifttg, venomous ; |>ciligen, to hallow; Imngern, to hunger ; (s. 1. & 2.) iDte Snfcl, -, pi. -n, the island; a;<»«3«Ittnb, -ti, (the) Iceland; Seib t^un, to be sorry ; 3)ie Scute, pi. the people ; ®a« TOalta, -«, (the) Malta; 35er 5Btut^, -ea, the courage'; ©et 3lnb, -ei, the envy; S)er Dtt, -e8, pi. -e, (Derter) ()laoe; ®a^©arbi'men, -3, (the) Sardinia; 3)ie ©c^Iangc, -, pi. -n, the serpent; Sc^neien, to snow ; Ser ©onittag, -ei5, pi. -e, Sunday; Ueberjeu'gen, to convince- SJetfloin'big, sensible; Sutragen, to h,appen, (see 8.) IMPERSONAL VERBS. 213 Exercise 114. Jlufgaie 114. 1. ®s ijl t'^m eniti^ gelungen, fetncn greuni ju uBerjeugen, 2. •Eein 5)Ian iji gelungen, unb io6^ i(l er unjufricien. 3. ®3 fragt p(^, o6 roir morgen gc^en tiinnen ? 4. Ss geprt [\&i, ben ©cnntag JU ^eiligen. 5. ®3 fi^icft fli^, iiltere Seute ju oc^ten. 6. S3 crelgs net fic^ felten, bo^ gute, serj^iinbige Seute fld^ cntjiueten. 1, S« t^ut hnt ^KoBen fe'^r leib, bap er [o nac^Iagig gemefen tjt. 8. @a wiirtc micf! fe^r freuen, i'^n wtebcrjufe^en. 9. Durjtet ®ie ? 10. Sfletn, ate- ml(^ '^ungert unb friert. 11. @3 serjle'^t jic^, bag er l^cute nld^t fommen wirb, benn bie 2Bcgc |tnb ju fc^Iei^t. 12. di trdgt fi^ juwetler ju, bap on'^attpuber SKegen bie ganje Srntc BcrbirBt. 13. Sluf ber 3nfel Ttalta giBt eS f eine ©i^tangcn ; in ©arbtnicn giit eS !eine SBijIfe ; in Ileutfc^Ianb gift e« !eine ^rolobile ; auf 3«Ianb giBt a nid^ti ®lftige3, akr in ber ganjen SBett ifl tetn Drt, iuo tS feinen 9lelb gitt. 14. Sin SJlann, tceli^em es an SJlut^ fe^^It tjl lein guter ©olbat. Exercise 115. Sluf gate 115. 1. I would be very glad to accompany you home, tut I am afi'aid it will rain ; do you not see how it lightens, and hear how it thunders ? 2. I think it will snow to-morrow ; it is questionable whether our friends will be able to come as they have promised. 3. The peasants have finally succeeded in sell- ing their horses. 4. I am very sorry not to have seen them, but it was so cold while they were in the city that I could not go out. 5. It sometimes happens that lazy people are very rich, but never that they are wise, learned, useful or happy. 6. This man is not hungry, but he is very cold. 7. Of course you will visit us as soon as you can, will you not? 8. It is questionable whether he can do that. 9. Is there any thing more useful in the world than cold water 1 10. They say thej are very sorry that they did not succeed in convincing us that we were wrong. 11. What is the matter, why are all those people running into the house ? 214 LESSON LVm. LESSON LVm. 1. PARADIO?! O* ©elicfct werbcn, INDICATIVK SUBJUNCTIVK PRESENT TENSE. PRESENT TENSE. 8 3 id) tterbe lam i(^ wetbe I may bu wirjl ^ thon art bu werbejl ^ thou mayst rs er tSitb % he is . ? er wcrbe 'S he may ? S (3 wit werben 5 we are s tttr werben « we may ■.s i^r merbet *" you are '"' t^r werbct '^ you may ^ lie tteibcit they are fie werben they may IMPERFECT TENSE. IMPERFECT TENSB. d (1 tc^ Buibe I -was icb wurbe I might M^ bu rourbejl J thou wast rr^ bu wiirbe|l ^ thoumightat "S = (3 er wurbe >§ he -was S er ttiirbe >S he might 1 ii2 »ir tturben 5 we were % wir wurben ' -5 we mi^ht "^ you might ■ c i^r tturbet '^ you were i^r wurbet ,13 S (3 jie wurben they Were . fie wiirben they might PERFECT TENSE. PERFECT TENSE. tf (1 ic^ Bin I have t^ fel 1 g I may t M2 buMfl » thon hast bu fciejl ■e thou mayst rj - (3 eriii gS he has er fei 1 he may s M2 toil (tnb ^ S we have ■^ wir feien — we may .a i^r fetb "2 you hare a i^r feiet ^ you may fe S (3 jtc finb they have. Xi fie feien 1, they may ^ PLUPERFECT TENSE. PLUPERFECT TENSE. ^- (1 t(^ war I had -6 > ii) ware g I might 1^ B l2 bu tuarjl ^ ^ thou had bu warefl ■g thou mightst ■^ >" [3 er war >SS he had _o er ware g he might § iJ2 »tr waren i^r waret ■ S S we had "•e you had wir waren i^r woret — we might JH you might '.Q > S (3 (tc ttaren they had •a fte waren "g, they might FIRST FrrrlTRE TENSE. FIRST FUTURE TENSE. rf (1 t^ tterbt g I shaU ii) werbe tt (if) I shaU I12 bu wirjl -e thou wilt ■s bu werbefl ■e " thou wilt 'i 3 (3 er »trb 3 he wiR > er werbe g "he wUl 9 > i\l roir weibcn ** we shall ■ wir werben — " we shall ■ iljrujcrbet ^ you wiU ^ i^r werbct S " you will i ^u fie tocrbcn "§, they will Tic werben "= " they will J SECOND FUTURE TENSE. SECOND FITUUE TENSE. rf (1 ic^ merbe . I shall :=' i* werbe J (if) I shail :!^ i« bu wir|l „ •§ thou wilt ca bu werbc|l ^ " thou wilt ~ er wtrb ■S*^ he will L <» cr werbe 4 " he will 1 i\i wir imerbeit "5 £ we shall ^.i3 wir werben ' S " we shall - " y»u^ll S i^r werbet " g you will ^ they will . sis jie werben c; (ie werben ■g, " they will i PASSIVE -VERBS. 215 lutmi Lvm. A PASSITE T£KB. TO BE LOVED. CONDITIONAL. IMPERATIVE. INFINITIVE. PARTICI PRESENT TENSE. IMPERFECT TENSE. PRESENT TENSE. werbe in twrbe er tterben Wir Werbet i:^r ttetben (le IMPERF. TENSE. PRESENT TENSE. gelteit wetben, to be loved. IMPERF. TENSE. PRESENT IMPERWECl PERFECT TENSE. PERFECT TENSE. PERFECT TENSE. PERFECT gelteit Worbcn feini gclietit, , to have been loved, loved. PLUPERFECT TENSE. PHIPERF.TENSp, FIRST FUTURE. f^ wftrbe bu WitrbEJ} tr tuitrbe wir wurben i^t tturbet fie ttiirben SECOND FUTURE. iij wiitbe b« ttjurbe)} tr wittbe Wit ttiirben l^r tturbet Pe ttiJtben FIRST FUTURE. SECOND FUTURE, PLUPERF. TENSE. FIRST FUTURE. tterben gelieij tterben/ to be about to be loved. SECOND FUTURE, PLUPERF. IsiFUTUHS 2d. FUTURK. 216 LESSON LVni. 2. The passive voice is formed Ly connecting the auxiliary tu c r b en, through all its modes and tenses, with the^os^ parti- ciple of the main verb : ®aa 3)fcrb totrB befi^Iagen. Tht horse is being (becoming) shod. "Dai 9)ferb wurbe befc^Iagcn. The horse was (became) shod. Soa SJferb i|l tefi^Iagen tteiben. The horse has been (become) shod. 3. The form of the perfect, with om^ission of to c r b e n, is ased to indicate a present state or condition, as the result of a pri vious action ; as, ®a« 3)ferb i|l Bef(^Ia8en/ the horse is shod — is now in a state resulting irom the act of shoeing (i. e. in a shod condition) ; baS STttb i|l Befc^tagen to c t b e n, on the contrary, merely indicates a like previous act, while the result (namely, a present shod condition) may no longer exist 4. Passive verbs are often used impersonally to denote an action or event in progress : E« ttirb gefungen. There is singing ("going on"). te Stiit'terungr -, pi. -en, the ani- mosity ; Erflet'tein, to climb; Srnjl, earnest, stern; FASSIVB VERBE. 21T (Sx^tVntnt to appear, p. 348 ; Etf^te'ien, to snoot, p. 354; Sortf^lewen, to di-ag away; Bw (^emftitjagcr, -i, pi. -, the cha- mois-hunter; S5a« ©ettc^t', -ti, pi. -t, tribunal ; OiinfKg, favorable, propitious; |>Er6ei fii^tcn, to bring on; Btt Supiter, -8, (the) Jupiter; Wiilitn, to announce; 3lliif)imt after; T>tr 5>rome't5citf, (the)Prometlieu9; 25et' ©c^mctc^tEr, -S, pi. -, flatterer- et EHen He bought an cU of cloth and two ©etbe, ein 9)fiinb J!ttffee unb jtuei ells of silk, ™e pound of cotee SJfutib BuSer. and t-wo po mds of sugar. PROPER AND COMMON NAMES. 219 34 '^ft'6e eine neite JTrt 3>a|)ter, I tave a new kind of paper. St 5fl' i"" StiiiJ SStc^. He has three head of cattle. 4. When, however, the latter noun is qualified by some other word, it usually stands in the genitive ; in a few phrases, also, the genitive occurs when not thus qualified : Sringe mir ein ®Ia« biefeS fiaren Bring me a glass of hat clear wa- Sffiafferg. ter. 6inc unjapge SDfengc SJelfa war ^et* A countless multitude of people had SeiqeflrSmt. — ©. flocked together. 5. SKonrt, when referring to organized bodies of men, re- tains (like sail, horse, etc., in an analogous use) the singular form, with the plural signification : etnfc^tt)eMf($er®enerttt,bertttit Etnem A Swedish general, who had re- ac^t taufcnti SKonn jiarten 4>eere an mained on the Elbe with an ar- tier ®l6e juruiIgeHtefeen war, ^telt myof eight thousand men strong, bie ©tttbt SKagbeiurg auf « engjle held the city of Magdeburg close- eingefi^lofTcn.— ®. ly invested. 6. Sin ^ aar {literally a pair) often answers to a few, and IS used, undeolined, before nouns in any case : SBarten ©ie no(^ ein 3)aar ©tonben. Wait a few hours yet. Scifpiefe. Examples. ttnb fammelten aHe ©tieifen ber fteBen And he gathered up all the food ol Sa'^re fo im Canbe ®g?t)ten waren. the seven years which were in — Gen. XLi, 48. the land of Egypt. S)ie Unfc^ulb ^at eine iKenge Sfnnc'^m' (The) innocence has a multitude of licl)feiten. — 5S$. graces. ©in neueS swanjigfaufTOb SJlann |larle3 A new army twenty thousand men $eer entjlanb in Surjem untcr feinen strong soon came into existen. a Ba^nen. — ©. under his banners. vocabulary to the exercises. Sl6fa'|ren, to set out; Eer SllJril', -i, (the) April ; ®ie Strmee', -, pL -n, the army; ®ie Slrt, -, pi. -en, the kind; Sai^Satern, -i, (the) Bavaria; Sag Sremen, -it (the) Bremen ; 33te eHe, -, pL-n, theell; ®er gebruar', -i, (the) February; Die grttcf)t, -, pi griiilte, the fruit; ©ie •^aupt^abt, -, pi. -liable, the cap- ital, chief city; Ser Sitnuar', -8, (the) January , ®er Suni, -i, (the) June; tiai fliinigretc^, -8, pi. -e, kingdom 9?eultc[), recently; tiai 9>aar, -ti, pL -e, the pair, Sag 5>rc«gen, -i, (the) Prussia; I)ai3 ©a(^fen, -i, (the) Saxony; ©edjg, six; Tiai ©tiid, -ea, pi. -e, piece, head ; ®er Scaler, -i, pi -, the thaler ; 1)tr Sie^pnbler, -i, pL -, drover 220 LESSON LS. ExEMisE 118. Slitfgatc 118. 1. 2l»-, erjlen 3uni tDtrb bte 2lrmce in tie ©tatt jte^en. 2. 'Cet fllte SSte^^atiJkr ^at ^ntert ©tiid SSie^ gctauft. 3. (Sr truift jetcn SKorgen jmci ®k3 SBajfer. 4. SBoEett ®ie mir ein ©Hict Skoti erten ? 5. 3c^ Witt 3^nen jiBei ©tittf gleifc^ geben. 6. SBir fu|s rcn im fiinf uni jtBanjigjlcn 3t Sremen an. 1. ©et aJlonat 9Jlai ifl »iel ongcne^mct aU Uer SRonat 2tprit. 8. Sie ©tatt Berlin iji tic ^auptflalt teg ^onigreic|S |)reu^en. 9. 1;a» iji cine 2lrt grud^t, tie i* nic gefe^en ^Be. 10. Sr ^at jwei 3)aar ■■^antf^u^e unS fcd}S Stien Zv6^ gctauft. 11. S5er Som in Jer ©tatt SKagbcburg ijt fe^r f^Bn. 12. Dag ^bnigreic^ ©o^fcn ijl fe^r fletn. 13. Sr ^ot no^ ein irenig ®elt, tenn ein guter greunS iiat i^m neulii^ ein 3)aar JL^aler au3 SSoiem geft^iit. ExBRcisK 119. StufgaBe 119. 1. Here is a little piece of paper for you. 2. Our friends live in the city of Vienna. 3. The shoemaker has sent you a pair of shoes. 4. I have bought three barrels of flour and a hundred pounds of coffee. 5. The kingdom of Prussia is larger than the kingdoms of Saxony and Bavaria. 6. We were in the city of Dresden in the month of June. 7. The city of Dres- den is rich and very beautiful. 8. This man says he has a new kind of paper. 9. Will you give me a glass of water? 10. Will you not take a glass of wine? 11. I have already drank a glass of wine. 12. We remained only a few days, and did not see much. 13. On the sixteenth of August we were in the eity of Cologne. LESSON LX. Cectiott LX. PREPOSITIONS WITH THE GENITIVE. I. The following prepositions are construed with the geni tive; namel'-, PKEPOBITIONS. 221 Sfnfiatt or Patt, instead; SI II i cr I a J 6. outside of, without ; S) i e f f e i t («), on this side ; ^alii :^alben or ^alber, on ac- count (oi ) ; 3nner^alb, inside, within ; 3 1 nf c i t {i)i beyond, on the other side; .S r tt f t, by virtue of; S a 11 1> according to ; Dter^ali, above; llm— WtUen, for the sake of; U It 8 e a 1^ t c t , notwithstanding ; Unter'^ali, below; Itnicrn, unrocit, not far from, near; Sermittelft, mittclp/ by m«an« of; S e t m ii g e, by dint of; SCd^venb, during; SEB e g e tt/ on account of; Coinga, along; S r ^, in spite of ; 3 u f 1 g e, according to. In German grammars the list is sometimes found as follows ©te^en mtt bem ® c n i 1 1 »i SDbcr auf bie grage, weffen?- 2)0^ ifi ^ier ni^t ju mcrgelfcn, Sap iiei biefenlcjten S)rel, 3lu^ bei 2) a t i (J tic^tig fet. Unweit, mtttclfl, traft unb wa^renb, Sttut, Dctmijgc, ungeai^teti D6er^ttl6 unb unter^al6, 3nner:^al6 unb aupEt^ali, ©ieSfeit/ jcnfeit, Saltern wegen, @tatt, au^ Icings, sufolge, tto^f 2. £ S n g 3 and t r o ^ may be used also with the dative • £ang8 bem (Seflabe (or beS ®ef}ttbc^) Along the shore of the ocean. Xroft meiner Slufjic^t, meinem Parfcn In spite of my inspection, my close Bnijtn no^ Soffiaxhittn, miS) gc scrutiny still valuables, still so- ^cime ©djcije. — ©. cret treasures (are concealed). Sltfolge preceding the noun, takes the genitive; following it the dative : Sufolge be« SBefe^Ia (bem Stfe^Ie iW In conformity to the order I shall folge) 6lei6e ii^ ^iei. (L. 38. 1. «.) remain here. 3. Sntlang, before a noun, also requires the genitive, after a noun, the accusative : 9i(>ufi|e giup baa S^at entlang.— ®. Rustle river along the vale. SSSit :^attcn ben ganjcn Slag gejagt ent» We had hunted all day along tk« lang be« SEBalbgetirge*.— ©. woody mountains. 4. JpalB, ^ol6en or |al6cr must follow the noun ; utt* g e a C^ t e t and w e g e n may precede or follow it : Wi^t bee SBeif))ieIa 1)a.litn, fonbetn bet Not on account of the example, but 8)(lt(^t wegen foK man in bet (Sefett" on account of duty should on« fc^aft IJiiflii^ fein. be polite in society. 222 LESSON LX. 5. The genitire is placed between U nt and » I It c it J Um feineS fttcunbe^ mitten ^ai er d On his friend's account he has done get^an. it. 6. Jp ft I b e n, it e g c it and » i 11 c n are often compounded withpronounSjt being substituted for the final r, or added after n: SKetne t Wegen (instead of meinc r Wtgen), for my sake ; ©elite t^ttlJen (inirfeodo/ fetner^alScn), for his sake; Um belTerttlnitten (instead o/um beffentoiKcn), for the sake of whom or which. ^. 31 n fl a 1 1 may be divided ; (I a 1 1 taking its original char- acter as a noun : 6t btenl an feincS SJaterS ©tatt (or He serves in his father's stead (or anjlatt feineg SSattti). instead of liis father). 8. SB e 9 c n, preceded by » o n, yras formerly employed as a substantive ; hence certain expressions like the following still occur : Son fUti^ti » e 9 e n. On account of justice (right). ®eSt Siec^enff^aft son ttejen bca Give account of (in reference to) the DergolTnen Slutc^. — ©. spilled blood. Setfptclc. Ex SBfan mug bie a;H9enb um t^rer fel6|l One must love virtue for its own toillen UeJen, obcr fie gans aufgcJen. sake, or give it up (renounce it) — ®. entirely. StibienS wegcn ^atte mon bie fpanifi^en For the sake of India the Spanish fidnber entsorEert. — ©. territories hadbeen depopulated. Snittelfl reined SBeijlanbed fe^te tc^ ti By means of his assistance I accom- i>ur($. plished it. VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. Slnlangen, to arrive; 9tu«fu^ren, to accomplish; Stuger^atSi outside of; 5Dtt ©cfe^t', -eS, pL -t, command ; aSegrei'ftn, to comprehend, 350; Senitoc^, notwithstanding; ©ielfeit^, on this side; Bte Sunfel^eit, -, the darkness ; ©ie greunbfc^aft, -, pL -en, friend- ship; ^ttlben, falter, on account of; Snnei ^alS, w ithin • SenfeiW, on the other side, £dng^, along; SDitr^ali, above; ®te 9)c|i, -, pL -en, the pestilence 5)rci(^tig, magnificent; S>cr SRJctn, -e«, the Rhine ; SroJ, in spite of; 1>ai Ufer, -«, pL _, the shore; Um-miUen, for the sake of • Unfcm, near, not far from Ungeai^tct, notwitlistandimt Unter^al6, below PREPOSITIONS WITH THE GENITIVE. 223 Itnttcit, near, not far from; S5ermittelil( by means of; Sermoge, by dint of ; 53et Setflanb', -eS, understanding; Dei SBatmbrunnen, -it pi. -, the warm-spring ; Exercise 120. 35ie aBatnung, -, pi. -en, -warning , SBegctt, on account of; SBiit^en, to rage ; Sufotge, according to; ButiicE'fe^ren, to return. (ufgate 120. 1 . 3(n|iatt iti §crrn tarn iev £)lcner. 2. Sntcr^flK Src ©tatit , wiit^cte tie 95ejl, unJ auf er'^dfi terfelben fccr geinb. 3. 2Ba3 ties* feita iti dH^nmi tiegt ge^ort ju l;eut|'d)tant), toai JenfettS liegt, ju granfreic^. 4. Oeien ®ie i^tn ias ©elJ, ber greunbfd)aft ober ber Slrntut^ |alben ? 5. SGBir fcgelteit tdngS beS Uferi3, big luir an ber ©tabt aniangten. 6. Sr er'^ictt bie SBcIo^nung fraft einea Sefe^IeS ber Sftegierung. 1. Dier^db ber 53rucEe auf bem SSergc fie^t ein ^Jtac^tiges ®^Iof. 8. Zxoi, attcr -SCarnungen sor ben ©efa^ren wagte er ti bcnnoi^. 9. Urn feiner Sttern tciflen !e^rt er batb ju* riid. 10. Ungeac^tet ber !Dun!eI'^eit ^obe i(^ i^n erfannt. 11. Sr wo^nte unter^db ber ®tabt, untneit beg gluflTeS. 12. Unfern iti SUleereg lag ba« ©c^Io§ auf |o^em gelfen. 13. Unrocit ber ®tabt ijl ber berii^mte SBarmbrunnen. 14. (£r fann eg sermittelfl feineg ©elbeg augfii^ren. 15. !Dag !annfl bu sermoge beineg 35crjlonbeg begreifen. 16. ©iefer Wann iji wS^renb feineg ganjen Cebeng nie' !ranf gewefen. It. SCegen biefcg Unglitdfg ijl er fe^r betriibt. 18. Sufolge blefeg Sefe^^Ieg ift er gtei^ abgereiji. Exercise 121. Slufgabe 121. 1. The servant came instead of mj- friend. 2. The pestilence raged within the entire state. 3. That which lies on. this side of the river belongs to the rich merchants, and that which lies on the other side, to poor fishermen and day laborers. 4. Do you visit him on account of his money or his poverty? 5. We walked along the shore of the river. 6. He received this re- ward by virtue of a command of the king. 1. We saw the black douds above the city. 8. In spite of his promise he did it nevertheless. 9. For the sake of his poor mother he still re- mained in his native country. 10. Notwithstanding the deep snow and the cold weather he went. 11. The building stands below the city, near the stream. 12. The castle lay upon lofty 224 LESSON LXI. rocks, not far from the sea. 13. The oolebratei Warm-spring in Germany is near the Giant-Mountains. 14. He can accom- plish it by means of his friends. 15. He did it by means of his diligence. 1 6. He saw his friend during his journey. 17. He is so sad on account of the death of his friend. 18. Accord- ing *» the officer's command he remained. < !■ » ■♦»— LESSON LXL Ccction LXL ADJECTIVES WITH THE GENITIVE. 1. The following adjectives are construed with, and usually follow, the genitive : •Sebiirf tig, in want, wanting ; Setuit^'igt, necessitated, needing; SScmugt', conscious, aware ; Stngebent, mindful; gai^tg, capable; gro5, glad; (see 4.) . (SmSxt'icf, expecting; ®eB)tg'/ sure, certain ; fluniiig, having knowledge; Sebig, free, single, void; SBloic^tig, powerful, master of; Quitt, clear, rid; ^^eil^afttgi participant, sharing; Ueietbtiifig, tired, disgusted; Serba^tigi suspected, Buspicioag; 3)erlu|l'tg, deprived of, hariuglost; JDiirbigf worthy; ©etua^r', aware; ® elDo^nl', accustomed ; Soi, fi-ee, rid; SDfiibe, tired, weary; @att, satiated ; Son, full; SfBertJi worthy. Sotte, bte eine gtogc SBo^It^at gleti^, People who can at once, without o^ne SSebcnfen, onnel^men fonntn, hesitation accept a great kind- (tnb bet So^tt^at feltcn tsiirbtg. — ness are seldom worthy of the £. kindness. ©0 6ifl bu itiXKi ®ibe8 quitt. — Gen. Thou shalt be clear from this thy =dv, 8. oath, Die mcifien aJetlulJe ftnb eine« Erfaje« Moat losses are capable of a rep«- fjillg.— ©, ration. 2. The last seven adjectives of the above list are more com- monly used with the accusative : SDen flanjller »trb man nt(|l getoajr. The artist is not perceived. (On* — ®' does not become aware o^ etc.) Eet SBtutel ill soD ®ctb. The purse is fuU of money. ADJECTIVES WITH THE GENITIVE. 225 S)tt« 'f)tnllst ©efdjte^t' Wirb btefen The present race -will not get rid Samntci ni^t Ui. — ®. of this misfortune. SJet akr fagt er fet ti miib'. — ©. He, however, says he is tired of it 3. 33 n, as employed by many writers, often takes, with the accusative, the ending c r : B'e war giilhfii^, vnUtx XaUntt.-®. She was witty, full of talent(s). 4. Si^ol is often followed by liter with the accusative; g etr if, leer and soil by Bon, and fd^ig by 3U : Bit finb ju allem Sofen fci^ij. They are capable of every thing bad. 5. © (^ u I b i g with the genitive signifies guilty ; with the accusative, indebted: ie etn gequal* I go about at night as a tormented tet ®et|i, -©. spirit (goes). 9. The genitive, denoting possession, frequently precedes the governing noun : •iDct STItcn atat^, bcr Sungen The advice of the old, the action Ibot mai^t Srumme* grab," of the young makes crooked straight. 10* ?26 lEssoir Lxi. ?.i^3ni|lbt8 50fontie«llriIfcttcSIar' Beautiful is the moon's milder ^ett Hntei ber ©ttrne JIttcnbem clearness amid the darting glow ©lanj; f^6n iflbei SJluttei Ue6* of the stars; beautiful is the lic^c ^o^eit swiften bet ©o^nc feu<= mother's lovely majesty amid the tiger fltaft.— ©. fiery strength of her sons. •SlUer Seute gteunb ijl allcr (To be) every body's friend is (t« Scute ®etf ." be) every body's fool, 10. The genitive of personal pronouns, when -iS(A part (lively, precedes the governing word ; as does also, frequently, that of nouns : £)er SlrieUerin bem SJBetnlcrge The laborers in the vineyard of bc^jenigen, bcr ben Ie|tett So^n et* him who gives the last rewaid t^eilt, finb aBenige. are few. Unfer (Siner mug son aUen ©orten Oneof us (our race) must live upon 3)!cn|"(l)cn Icben. — 8. all sorts of people Sill e r guten Singe jtnb brei- ©pri^* All good things are three. Adag& ttjort. ("Three is the charm.") 11. The genitive is often used partitively with omission of the governing word : ©orgfttm irac^te bie SKuttet iti tltt* The mother carefully brought (some icn ^trrlic^en SBcineS. — ®. of) the clear excellent wine. ffir trant bti fSadjti. — 1 Kings He drank of the brook, xvii. 6. 12. Formerly the genitive was often used as the predicate after the verb f e i n, but now seldom occurs : ©ie Erbe tfl be« |>ernt. — 1 Ck)r. x. 26. The earth is the Lord's^ ©cbt bem Satfer vaai iei flttifera tfl. Render to Caesar the things thai — Mark, xii 17, are Csesar's. SSeifpietc. Examples. ■Eiefci SKenfi^ ifl etne« 33ic6jii-i^t« fe^r This man is strongly snspeoteu of perbdi^'ttg. theft, {fr tfl fcine* SRongeS serlu'jltg ertlatt' His rank has been declared fop- »»!''«• feited. Ber Strme, bet einet ©ac&e bebiitftig The poor (man) who is destitute ijl, ifl gewo^n'Iii^ au^ einet anbern of one thing is commonly also ^f"°'^'3t. (needy) in want of another. 2)c3 gtt^ien« gewo^nt', bin ^ balb Accustomed to ride, I am soon tired be« ®e^en3 mube. of walking. Etc SaSelt ill soUet fflibctfjinid^.-®. The world is full of oontradiction(8). ADJECTIVES WITH THE GBNITIVB. 22T VOCABULART TO THE EXERCISE6, tai Stmt, -ti, pi. Stemter, tlie office ; Slnscrttaucn, to intrust ; 5)er 3lufent|a(t, -ti, the sojourn; SBdnbigen, to break, tame ; Seburf tig, in need of; SBenii'tfiigt, in want of; Bit Sepim mitng, -, pi. -tn, destiny; Semuft', conscious; SDet Srfat', -e«, the restitution ; Srmci'c^en, to soften ; Etuig, eternal; , Sii^ig, capable; gto^, glad; fiinEr BaA)t ftD| werbcn, to en- joy a thing ; ©ema^r', aware; Stt« Oliiii, -ea, «, the fortune ; 35er ^ttber, -a, the quarrel ; lieirfij^en, to rule ; S3ie 4>ulfe/ -, pi. -n, the aid, help ; Srttft, by virtue of; Die Stone, -, pi. -n, the crown; 5!Uci($U3, master of; ®et ©init, -ti, pi. -e, the mind; 'Sni ©tabtlcten, -i, the city life ; Die ©tcitfe, -, the strength ; Set Sell, -«, (the) Tell; Ueterbtiigtg, tired, weary, X)te tteterei'lvng, -, pi. -en, the pre- cipitancy ; Unetngebent, unmindful ; Ungewo^nt, unaccustomed ; Untteu, faithless; S5er6rin'gen, to spend, p. 346; 33etba(^'tig, suspected; ®er^af'fen, to arrest; 33er 3JerIu|i', -cS, pi. -e, the loss; 3)er SJervat^', -t«, the treason; SBiirbtg, worthy. Exercise 122. Slufgflbe 122, 1. SBcnn iai $ferb feiner ©tiirte Bewupt wart, fonnte Slicmani ti Bonbigctt. 2. 3(^ Bin Bid ©eli fi^utbig, aitx i&i Bin fcineS 55cr* Brec^en^ fc^utlig. 3, Sr miirbc Btefe 3trBett, terett er ganj ungewo'^nt ijl, ni(^t f^un, wcnn er nid)t bcS ®elbcs Benijf^igt tcare. 4. 3|i tetn SSruter tclner ^iilfe Bebiirftig, fo frage nic^t, oB er BerfelBen wiirbtg tft. 5. 'Man&itx SKcnfc^ BerBrtngt feln SeBcit uneingeBenI fcinet eroigen Sejlimtnung. 6. ©olc^e SSerlufle ftnB elneS Srfa^cS fal|ig. 1. ^ein ©eijiger fann feines 2eBen« fro'^ tBcrben. 8. ®r ifl fcincr UeBereilung gewa^r getrorten. 9. 3(^ Bin beS SeBetiS unb ^err* \6fini miibe. 10. ®er tapfere 3;eII iji frei unb feine« 2lrme« tnad^= tig. 11. ®r lot metnen §ut anjlatt bc« feinigen genommen. 12. SBii^renb nteine^ StufentBaltS in 2). wurbe i&i beg ©tabtleBcu^ gana uBerbriipig. 13. ^va\t feines 2tmte3 ser^aftete er atle, bie er bea Berrat^g Berbdc^ttg :^ielt. 14. Urn feineS 33aterS SBiEenBIeiBt er in blcfer ©teHe, oBgleic^ er einer Bcffern wiirbig ijl. 16. " !Der ^5nig unb bie ^aiferin beS langen ipaber^ miibe, ermeic^ten i^ren ^arten ©inn unb mai^ten cnblic^ griebe." 16. Diefer Zag, wax ti, um kejyentreiUen er ^rone unb SeBm bem unh'euen ©iiicEe ansertraute. 228 tEssoN Lxn. Exercise 123. Stufgaie 123. 1. We live on the other side of the city. 2. During the cold weather we remained at home. 8. He has taken your hat instead of his cap. 4. Those people are destitute of money, and in want of help. 5. They are not tired of walking, but they are weary of the road. 6. This is a labor to which I am entirely unac customed, and I do it only because I am in want of money. 7. Men often become guilty of a crime because they owe much money. 8. I am sure of his innocence, for I know that he is not capable of such a crime. 9. Every industrious man who is mindful of his destiny does not become tired of his life. 10. Our friends live within the city. 11. During our sojourn in Berlin my friend became master of the language. 12. For his friend's sake he remains here, although he is tired of city life. 13. He is conscious of his strength, sure of his aim, and certain of his cause. 14. This scholar is in want of money, and in need of good books. 15. By virtue of his office he has at length arrested the criminal. 16. He is not conscious of his strength. It. This young stranger is worthy of a better situation. LESSON LXn. Section LXn. REFLEXIVE VERBS WITH THE GENITIVE. 1. The following reflexive verbs require the genitive after the accusative (or dative) which they govern ; namely, Sfnmogcn, to usurp; EntHo'ben, to dare ; ^ett5'|le«, to be assured; Stnne^mcn, to protect; Snttrti^'en, to forbear, Siu^menf to boast of ; SBebic'nen, to avail; (Ent^ortcn, to abstain; ©(^amvit, to be ashamed-. SBeflei'Ben or Je(Iei'|tgen, Entf^Ia'gen, togetridof; Ueber^eien, to boast; to endeavor; (Entjin'ncii, toremember; Untcrfangen, to attempt; SBegt'ben, to yield up; (Ertar'men, to pity; Uitterminben, to venture; ©ema^'rigen, to seize ; (Erfre^'en, to presume ; SJcrmerfen, to vaunt; SBemei'jlern, to master; Erin' nein, to recollect ; Slerfe'^cn, to expect; Sefi^ti'bcn, to concede; ©rfu^'nen, to dare ; SBe^ren, to resist; Sejtn'ncn, to consider; £i»eVrenf to keep off; SfBeigern, to decline; £ntd«'petn, to abstain ; greuen, to rejoice ; SCunberni to wonder ab REFLEXIVE VEIiBS WITH THE GENITn'E. 229 -f Snt^altcn is often followed by » o n; txlaxmm, freuen, fi^Smcn and tounlern by ufi er; and beflnnen and freuen by auf : Deinet ^eiligen Bnijtn, O SCBa^i^eit, Thy holy signs, Truth, deception ^at bet Setr«9 fi^ angemapt. — ®. has usurped. 3^ benf iti ^uihxMi noi^ rec^t Woljl I still very well remember the ex- beg ctnfi btt fetter bi^ »on i|m Sc» pression that you once used in b'.entell. — 8. reference to him. ©ie ertnnert ftc^ i^tti SSetft)tei!^en^. She remembers her promise. Bet Sanbmann tu^nte jtc^ be* 9)ftu8a. Let the peasant boast of the plow. — ©. Obs. — © e ^ a 1 1 e It( when referring to a thing learned, answers ; o re- Buember: » Sc| tttim bie 9!amen nic^t 6 e ^ a 1 1 e n, I can not remember the names. 2. (£s gelii^et (or e3 tu|lct),e« iaminert, c3 reuet, ti to^nt fi(^, also take a genitive after the accusative : So^nt (t(|'a ber 3)!it|e ju ^ojfen unb ju Is it worth the trouble to hope and llteSen ?— ©. to strive ! Unb btt er bai SJoIt fa:^ iommerte t'^n But when he saw the multitudes, beffetJen. — Matt ix, 36. he was moved with compaEsion on them. »on feiner Unfc^ulb uicrseugt. "We are convinced of his innocence. • Dei Sob entbin'bet Bon ctsiuung'nen Death releases from compulsory 9)ftt(6ten. — ii ®e^ot'fam« 3>flic^tcn. — ©. from the duties of obedience. VERBS WITH THE GENITIVE AND ACCUSATIVE. 6. The following verbs, though sometimes construed with the genitive, oftener take, except the last two, the accusative : Sebiit'fen, to need; ErWci^'nen, to mention; SSergePfen, to forget; SBegel'ren, to desire; ®ente'|en, to enjoy; SBa^ren/ to preserve ; StuU^en, to need ; ©emaVten, to perceive; SBa^me^mctt, to per Cntte^'ren, to lack; SJflegen, to take care of; ceive; Sntrat^'enf to dispense ®c^onen> to spare ; Srman'gelH/ to lack, with; SJerfc^'ten, to misa; 6r bebarf bc8 ®elbea (or bag ®elb). He needs (is in need of) money. (Erwd^nte er bcr (or bit) ©ac^e ? Did he mention the matter f ©i^one ben {or beg) STrmen. Spare the poor man. Er fann biefe (or blcfcr) ©ac^en teiii^t He can easily do without (lack) entbe^rcn. these things. 6. 31 1^ t e rt and w a r t e n govern the genitive or accusative : 3c| o(|te l^n (or feiner). I regard (esteem) him. With a u f, tt c^ t e n signifies to pay attention to, to observe ; and to a f t e n, with a u f, to wait for : 3c^ a!l)te ttuf bttg taai cr fagt. I attend to what he is saying, ©ie warten auf un«. They are waiting for us. 7. barren governs the genitive, or is foUewed by the v> cusative with a u f : SBir barren beiner (or auf bi$). TVe wait for (depend on) thee. 8. ©ebenten (orienfen) governs the genitive, or is foL lowed bi " the accusative with a n ; ®cbciite meiner \or on ml^). Think of (remember) me. VERBS WITH THE GENITIVE AND ACOnSATIVE. 231 9. Sa^en, fpotten and to a It en govern the genitive, or are followed by the accusative with ii b e r : 3c^ ftjotte i^tcr {m ubet [tc). I mock (deride) them. 68 finb ni(|l StUe ftci, bte i^ter Scttcn They are not all free who deride fpotten. — ®. their chains. 10. Many other verbs and adjectives were formerly followed by the genitive, spme of which are still retained : They are dying of hunger. ©ie jler6en §ungeta. Bte |tnb bea 3)relfc8 etmg. ^tet tfi mcine^ SlcitenS m(|t. SKan ^at i^n be« Sanbea DeiwiEfen. They are agreed aa to the price. Here is not my abiding-place. He has been banished from the country. Verbs governing the genitive, when used passively, take the imper^ lonal form : Seiner toitb no^ gebac^t. . You are still remembered. gSeifpiele. Examples. ©i^ome btc^ ntc^t ber ©(jarfamtett. Be not ashamed of frugality. SWe^t nM JE, ^e6t i:^n baa ®IiiiI, bentt More than ever, does the man of fctncr atten ffreunbe ber S^renmann. honor, if prosperity elevates him, — S. think of (remember) his friends. Set greunbe Wirb vx^X we^r gebac^t'. The (your) friends are no long-^r — ©, remembered. aCir fatten feiner ©efefff^tft entBey- We could have dispensed with his ren fonnen. D fc^onet mein !^©. ®enie'pe be« Ce6en«» ttSet mtt company. 0, spare me. Enjoy (the) life, but with honor. SBcnti i(| feineS Setra'gen^ aud) ge* Even if I would be silent concern fi^wei'gen WoIIte, belt tabeln. mup i(| feine SRe* ing his behavior, his talk. I must blama VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. sBerau'Sen, to rob; ffiU Et^at'tung,-, the preservation; Erin'nern, to remind; Srtta^'ncn, to mention ; ®eben'fen, to think o:^ p. 346 ; §et6, harsh, bitter; 5Dei ^ami>f, -e8, pi. fiawpfc, contest; flaunt, scarcely; iDer ftijrijer, -i, pi. -, the body; Set .ffumwer, -i, the grief; Stflegen, to take care o^ nurse ; ©(^oncn, to spare ; 3)te ©cete, -, pi. -v., the soul; Sit ©orge, -, pL -n, the care; ©orgfdltig, careful; Sic ©D^^avc, -, pi. -n, the spher jj ©pottcn, to deride; Set Sob, -eg, the death ; Sie SJereb'Ittng, -, pi. -en, the im provement, ennoblement ; Serfe^'ten, to miss; Set S!Bcii)feI, -8, pi. -, vicissitude; Sie SBtege, -, pL -n, the cradle; Sie SCitrje, -, pL -n, the seasoniiig 232 LESSON LXII. EXEECISK 124. SlufgaB 124. 1. ga (L. 28. 9.) fi^ont ber ^ricg auc^ (§ 156. 2. k.) nic^t iea ^inllcin^ in ier SBtege. 2. Der ^ran!e sergap feiner ©(^merjtn, t>cr Srauemie feincg ^urnmer^, bte 2lrmut| i^rcr ©orgen. 3. SHani^er Tlm\&i (iflegt fo forgfaltig feiner ^orperS, ia^ er feiner ©eele !aum getenfh 4. ^^v fiirc^tet Jcr ©p^re ju tierfeiten, tie cures ®eijlei3 rouriig ijl. 5. ®eniegc teg £e6en«; ater getenfe auc^ leS lolea. 6. !Dtc greuben ber Srbe iebiirfen ber SJiirje bc3 ^ttf Jen SBec^felS ju i|rer ®r:|artung unb SSereblung. 1. SBcr beS Un« gliidlii^en ni^t fc^ont, fonbern bejfeltcn fpotten fann, ber serbient, co^ man auc^ feiner im Ungliid sergcjfe. 8. 3t)rf« greunbeg toaxf tet no(^ ein fc^tuercr ^ompf. 9. 3)eS KonigS wurbe ^cute gar nic^t crttjfi^nt. 10. Sr erinnert fi(^ ber ®itte biefes grembcn. Exercise 125. 3lufga6e 125. 1. He often thinks of thee, hut them he has forgotten. 2. Among others, he mentioned his cousin. 3. Do not forget the poor, while you are enjoying so many pleasures. 4. He who ridicules the poor shows a bad heart. 5. Never forget the love and kindness of those who instructed you in your youth. . 6. Your friend does not need your assistance. 7. We should for- get our sorrows and remember our joys. 8. He spares the guilty and punishes the innocent. 9. The matter was not men- tioned. 10. He has taken care of his sick friend. 11. The good man does not forget his friends. VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. Stnflagtn, to anouse ; S(nf(%ulbigen, to accuse; Slnwefenb, present; 9lustnHictli(|« instantly; Sefici'icn, to be studious of; Scgc'ten, to renounce, p 348; S8c|at'tcn, to retain, remember ; iBcrcit^', already; Sefc^ul'btgen, to accuse ; aSfSfidj'tigen, to convict; EntbloBt', destitute; Gnt^e'ten, to exempt from, 350 ; gntle'btaen, to release ; emfi^la 8en» to divest, p. 354; (Srfiar'men, to pity; SrHtt'Tcn, to declare; S5ic Scffel, -, pi. -n, the chain; 3)ie greifprcdjung, -, pi. -en, thp ao- quittal ; 33cr (ScDonfe, -n8, pi. -rt, thought ; ©eWttti'gen, to pass over in silence, p. 354; Sebo^', however ; ■Det Setter, -S, pi -, the prison; ■Die Sanbfhage, -, pi. -n, highway; 3)a« aifittcl, -«, pi. -, the means ; Ser Slat^, -ti, the counsel, ad rice; I)er fRmi, -ti, the robbery: VERBS WITH THB GKNITIVB. 233 fier mSnUr, -i, pi. -, the robber; 3itt'i)men, tj boaat of; @;^dmm (|°!i$), to be ashamed; Die 3;^at, -, pi -en, the deed; Ueierfit^'ren, to convict, SSklmtfjT, rather ; SJorig, last ; SBurbijen, to vouchsafe. ExEhcisE 126. 21 uf gate 126. ], ©ic crinttern fJi^ wo^t (§ 151.) noc^ iti jungen Wlannti, itx im Bovigen 3a'^re ics Stlauks angefiagt wax. 2. Sr war 6e* ((i^uftigt einen reic^en 35ie^|anMer auf ter 2ont)(lvo§e fetneg ©elSca hvauU ju '^aben. 3. 5JJlan tonnte U)n jebo(!^ bicfc^ Berbrei^enS nii^t iiterfu^^rcn. 4. Sr :§atte jic^ kreits alter Jpoffnung einer grcifpre* c^ung Begekn unb ftc^ tee ©etanlcns cntfc^Iageii, ol4 unfc^ulJig er* tliirt 3U rcerten. 5. i)er Sflii^tcr jeioi^ ent^ob i^n aKer ©orgc. 6. SRa^sent er ben Stngetlagtcn aufgefortert ^attt, guteS URutiitd j« fein uni ftc§ aUti Summers ju entf(^Iogen, erflarte cr: 3^ Hn ber soUen Sl'leinung, bag man biefen Jungen SDJann nic^t bc3 3laitBe3 bejiti^ttgen fann. 7. 3Denn nic^t 3fkr, ber [i&i bes Setteln« fc^amt unb aHer Wittd entU'i^t ifl, tcirb ein a^auber. 8. 3^ witt feineS gutcn S3etragen3 gefi^iueigen, benn er |at fic^ immer eines orbentti* c^en Sebeng Befliflfen. 9. 3c^ crtnnere euc^ oier ber a;l)aten im le^* ten Jtriege, beren er jl^ mit Slcc^t rii'^men fann. 10. grcuct c«^ feiner gretfprec^ung unb wiirbiget it)n curer greunbfc^aft. 11. ©pot* tet feiner nic^t, tueil er im Verier rear, fonbern erkrmet eu(^ Bielme^r feiner unb gebenlet feiner Ceiben. 12. 3cber, ber feiner U6^t, i&j'amt fic^ feiner eigenen SSetragenS. IB. Sllle 2ln»efenbcn freuten fii^ bte* fer 5lebe, unb man cntlebigte augentlidHc^ ben 2lngef(^utbigten feiner geffelrt. 14. 31^ fan" mi^ bicfer Seute erinnern, aber i^ fann i^re ?(Jamen nii^t bc^Iten. 15. ®r freute ft^ beS Hugen SHaf^S unb ging '^inau^ unb fcegab |t^ an bie 2Irieit. Exercise 121 3lufgate 12t. 1. The old soldier boasts of his valiant deeds. 2. Do you lemember the promise that you gave me? 8. 1 do not remem- ber that I gave you a promise. 4. Can you remember all the long words that you have found in this book ? 5. Have you accused any one of this crime ? 6. Who has robbed the traveler of his money 1 1. He has been convinced of his er- ror but convicted o'no crime. 8. The tyrant avails himself 234 LESSON Lxm. of his poT.ei 9. An honest man would be ashamed of such an action. ] 0. Do you remember the old man whom we met in the city'? 11. Do you remember the old gentleman with wliom we traveled from Berlin to Bremen? 12. Yes, I still remember him. 13. It is difficult for those who have a bad memory to remtmber the rules of a language. 14. Are you of the OQJnion that he is guilty of this crime ? 15. I remem- ber the man who accused your servant of robbery. 16. We rejoice to leave the country of the tyrant. IT. Our enemies have robbed us of our money, but they can not rob us of our hoi or. 18. The happy parents greatly (fe^r) rejoiced to sse their lost child again. 19. He remembers still the happy days when he went to school with these children. LESSON LXm. Utiian LXUI. ADJECTIVES WITH THE DATIVE. 1. The dative is governed by many adjectives, and is then usually rendered by our objective preceded by to or for; some- times by other prepositions. The dative generally precedes the adjective by which it is governed : <^i ijl ben 3Renf(^cn letc^ter ju f^mei«' It is easier for man to flatter than (i)eln aU ju loben.— SR. to praise. SSe^' ®cm, ber su bet SBa^r^ett gc^^t Woe to him who eomes to the truth bur^ ©(^ulb ; |te Witb i'^m nimmcr' through guilt, itoan never he a mc^r erfreulic^ fetn. — ©. . source of pleasure to him. .68 tfl mtr erinnerlic^. I can remember it. <£i ifl mil unscrgegltc^. I can not forget it. "SBJef) bcm armenD})fet, mm betfelie Woe to (woe is) the poor victim, if SKunb ber baa ®tfe^ gab, au§ ba3 the same mouth that gave the Urt^eil |Vrt(^t." law also pronounces the sentence. SBd^I Sent, ber fret son ©c^ulb «nb Happy he (well to him) who, free ge^le bewa^rt bie tinblii^ reine from guilt and error, preseifves ©cele. — ©. his soul pure as a child. 2. The dative is often substituted for a possess! ee pronoun, or for the gen.'tive of a noun : ADJBCTIVKB WITH THE GENITIVE. 235 Sttr rcfljn tit ber ^aUt §elm unb My helmet and my shield are rust- ©i^ttb (/or meln |)elm ic). — ©. ing in the hall. ©Er Oott bea ©tegeS toanbelt i^i }ur The god of victory walks at her ©eite. — ©. side. 3. The first and second persons of pronouns, in the dative, ai e often used to indicate, in an indefinite manner, some special participation or sympathy on the part of the individuals which they represent : 6* jinb (Bui) gar tro Jlge Jtamera'ben. They are right insolent fellows (for — ©. yon). •SamaU roaxm wir bir fe^r set' At that time we were very joyous. Snugt'." 4. The dative, with Bet, »on and ju, often denotes one's place of residence or business, and is rendered by our possess- ive preceded by at, from or to : Set SBiantel til be im ©(|neibet» The cloak is at the tailor's. 6t ge^t i u fctnem D^etm. He is going to his uncle's, ©ie fommt son t^tet S^ante. She is coming /row her aunt's. The dative of the personal pronouns is used in the same manner ; usually rendered by the possessive case of our pronoun followed by a noun: ©ie too^nen bet uitS. They live at our house. SBit ge^ett ^eute ju i^m. "Wo are going to his house to-day. Selfpiete. Examples. Unb ettegt i^m ben ®ttmm In bet And excites rage (anger) in hia ©ecle. — ©-g. souL ffit ijl bet fetnent gteunbe. He is at his friend's. SBo^nen ©ie bet tbnen? Do you live at their house ? ©et beinen Sfteunbcn etge'ben tinb bei» Be devoted to thy friends and oblig- nen getnben gefol'Ug. ing" to thy enemies. Sebet tec^ttt^e SKann t|l bem ®uten Every upright man is inclined to geneigt' unb bem SSfen jbgeneigt. (the) good, and disinclined t« (the) eviL VOCABULABT TO THE EXERCISES. 3)et E'^fttat'tet, -i, pi. -te'te, the character ; ©antbar, thankful, grateful; Die gatf^:^etl, -, pi. -en, falsehood; ©efajr'Ii^, dangerous ; "Dai ®egent^ett, -«, the contrary , ©ebot'fam, obedient; ®fl*®cmflty, -cS, pL -et, mind ®Iei^, liktr, equal; ©noibig, gracious • 236 LESSOV Lxm. Dei ®ninbfa|, -«8, pL -fci^e, the principle; t>te 4)tu4tIti>-» pL -tH/ hyrocriay; ■Bit ^onigin, -, pL-nen, the queen; Safier^aftr wicked, vicious; fiaj^tg, burdensoine, trouble- some; Cebig, free; &iti, dear, pleasant; SttS Sot, -ei. the praise; 23it 9fctgung, -, pL -en, inclination ; S)et SRang, -e«, pi. 3{dnge, the rank ; ©cjmeic^et^aft, flattering; Exercise 128. ®er ©onnenfActn, -«, the "mshinei ®aS©j)anien, -8, (the) Si-din; X)er 3;(ftel, -«, tlie blame ; Ucberle'gen, superior ; Unertroglii, intolerable; llnteit^an (adj.), subject ; UnBcrgepUf^, memorable; ei ifl mix — , I can never forget ; SJere^'ren, to honor; ffler^agt', hateful; 1>ai SBaifi^t^um, -ea, vegetalioii • SCert^, worth, dear ; SBibrig, repugnant; SIufgaBc 128. 1. Sin guteS ^int tfl feinen gitern gc^orfom unb ian!Bar. 2, J)aS SRauc^cn tfl benen fe^r unangene^^nt, tie e3 nt(^t getoo^nt jint'. 3. Wlir iijt a lieB, ba§ ii^ tir in biefer ©ac^e nii^Ii^ fein fann. 4. T)ai SBcttcr war un3 gejlem fck giinjlig, ater |eutc ifl ei ganj baa ©cgent^etl. 5. ®ut p werben ijl bem Sa^er^often fdjwcr, bcnn cr bleifct gemb^nli^ feinen Stetgungcn treu. 6. Sem ^ijnigreii^ ©pa* nien ijl granhreic^ iiBerlegen. 1. 3CoS i|n cuc^ wibrig mad^t, tr>ac^t i^n ntir ttett|. 8. 3^r feib biefer ^Bntgtn nii^t untert^an. 9. 55iete«, roai un« nii^t gefdlrtic^ ijl, ip un8 bo^ fe^r liijlig. 10. 3nt SRange i^ er feinem Sniber gleic^, im S|aratter feinem 35ater a^n* n^. 11. SRii)ti i^ mix fo fc^r scr^a^t ak Salf(^^cit unb ^eud^clcl. 12. Du Hfi be« SciScs Icbig, ®ott fei ber ©eclc gnabig. 13. SSa* rum ijl bicfeg alte 33uc^ unfern greunben fo lieb? 14. Ss ijl mir unserge^Iii^, wie fe^r ic^ bir Berbunben bin. 15. IDen ©olbatcn tear bas Sob i^reS Bere|rtcn gelb^crm fe^r fc^mci(^et^ft. 16. !Dic« fer Stufcnt^It ijl i|m fofl unertraglii^ getuorbcn. 1 1. Sabel unb Sob ftnb bem ©emiit^c beg 9Jlcnf(^en, was ©turm unb ©onncufii^'etn bem SBac^gt^um jinb. 18. 3c^ too^ne bei mcinem DnM. Exercise 129. Slufgobe 129« 1. These things may be useful and agreeable to you, aul they are very unpleasant to me, and injurious to my friends. 2. Every good man is grateful to his benefactors. 3. This weather is very unfavorable for us. 4. It is very unpleasant to me that I am obliged to remain here so long. 5. Every good citizen is obedient to the just laws of his country. 6. VERBS WITH THE DATIVE, 231 Will this happy country ever be subject to a king ? 1. What is more hateful to a good man than hypocrisy 1 8. I am much obliged to you that you have been useful to my friends in this matter. 9. The soldiers were with blind obedience devoted to their leader. lO.'This house is very similar to the one in which you live. 11. No country in the world is superior to ours. 12. The few friends that this man has are very dear to him. 13. Many things are burdensome which are not dangerous to as. 14. ITiose are to be called good, who remain true to their principles. 15. The praise of a good man is very flattering to ns. 16. He is gracious to those who are obedient to him. It. Is he at his brother's ] LESSON LXIV. £«clion LXIV. VERBS WITH THE DATIVE. 1. The dative is governed : ■ a. By transitive verbs, which in addition to the direct ob- ject (in the accusative), require the object to be specified, for or in relation to which an action is performed. In this use, as also with ge^ijren, fc^einen and toeic^cn, the dative is rendered by our objective with a preposition expressed or implied: £t na^m e^ i^nen tueg. He took it awajfrom them. SJiefej |)ut ge^iitt mtr. This hat belongs to me. b. Many German verbs are called intransitive, and govern the dative, whose English equivalents are transitive, and gov- em the objective ; as, antworten, 6efe'§Ien, Begegnen, banlcn, iie* Itcn, tro|cn, fe^Ien, fluc^en, folgen, frii^nen, frommcit, gcM^ren gefatten, ge'§or^cn, gereii^en, glci^cn, Iclfen, '^ulbtgcn, Io|nen, man gein, na|en, nu^cn, paffeit, ratten, fd§abcn, fd^mcic^cln, trauen, tros^ ^cn, we^ren, jicmen: SBet bit fc^mel($elt, fi^^abet bir, wenn He -who flatters you injnrea you, bu i^m glauJIl. if you believe him. e. With the impersonally used verbs ti a'§net, ti biiuc^t, ti 238 LESSON LXIV. biinft, e« cMt, ti grant, ei fc^winbclt, ei trSumt, as also ti »ftb c^ ijl, the dative is frequently rendered by our nominative : |)5ret, »aa mit getraumt ^at. — Gen. Hear what I have dreamed (hear, xxxvii. 6. I pray you, this di'eam which I have dreamed). d. Intransitive verbs, governing the dative, take, whep used passively, the impersonal form ; the logical subject being pu n the dative, in which position (like the impersonal verb* ee c.) it is rendered by the nominative : E« tturbe t^m (or i^m wurbe) gefc^abct. He was injured. Dennoi^ tuurbe bem Slbel mc^r gefi^mel' Still, to the nobility, there was ao- ijcU, ali wtrflt^er Sinflup gegeten. corded more of flattery than of — ©. actual inflnence. 2. Some verbs govern the dative or the accusative, accord ing to their signification : 2Btr rtefcn i^nen, ater (It pttm nni "We *alled them (to them) but they ni^t. did not hear ns. SBir riefcn fte in bai |iau8. We called them into the honse. 3. ^ jl ett is generally used with a dative and accusative; sometimes, however, with two accusatives : ' Si wtiibe %xn^nt rave unb Ztitn It would cost me freedom and life, toflcn." SSctfpielc. Examples. SnbU(^ idans' ti i^m fetncm greunbe Finally he succeeded In opening bie Slugen ju Bjfnen. his friend's eyes. Iraue nii^t jebem tDZenfi^en, unb am Trust not every one, and least of aHerBenigilcn bcnjcnigen, bie bit all those who flatter thee. f^meii^cln. Bie Siina^'nung etne« gteunbea gilt The admonition of a friend is of mir i>tcl, unb ii) folge i^t gem. much value to me, and I folluw it gladly. VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. SCJfogen, to renounce; Sln^angen, to adhere to; Slngc^oren, to belong; antworteni to answer; ajeifomraen, to get at; Setfle^cn, to assis •. Seijlimmtn, to uaaent to; Befla'gen (f5(5)f to complain; Sein^o^nen, to be present at, tr take part in ; 3)anten, to thank; Sbelmiit^ig, noble; (Stgenjinnigi obstinate; IDie geinbfcligftit,- pi -en, hostility lERBS WITH THE DATIVE. 239 T)«a Deflerreicf;, -3, (the) Austria.- 3)affcn, to fit; ©c^abeil, to injure; SSetpflic^'ten, to bind (by oath), Saa SSor^aden, -i, the design; SBe^ ttjun, to hurt ; SBtberfprec^'cn, to contradict; liiren, to belong to. ©e^ct'c^en, tc obey; |>elfen, to help, avail ; t>tx lietsgg, -c«, pi. -e, the duke ; X)a«3ntete|f'c, -«, pL -n, interest; I>et Sowe, -n, pi. -n, the lion: Slf(ic|ttg, po-werful, mighty ; 2)et aBiniflet, ~i, pi. -, minister ; Deifnen, to open; Exercise 130. Slwfgobe 130. 1. 3^^ tantc S^Jien, tag @ic mir gc'§oIfcn ^aten. 2. (St tuutte mlr geiBtg fc^aten, wcnn er tnlr Beilommen fonnte. 3. Diefer $ut Sapt mir Beffer al« jcner. 4. 2Ba3 feljlt 3^nen, warum witerjprc^ d)Crt ©ie 3^'cin greunie ? 6. S^ fc^tt mir ntd^t« ; ob i^m itmai ■ fe|Ien mag, wcig ic§ nl(|t. 6. ®cr .Knaie I)at ffi^ in len ginger gef^nttten. 7. ©anj Dcflerreic^ lag bem etelmiit^igen Ungarn ju giif en. 8. Dicfem eigenfinnigen 9)Jenfc^en iji gar ni^t ju :|etfcn. 9. (S3 t:^ut mir fe^r leib, tog er fii^ tuct) gef^an ^at. 10. tm M' nig, weli^er ftc^ iiber biefe geinifeiigtcit Betlagte, murbe geantmortct, "ber ^aifer ^oie ber ©olbaten p uiel; er mitffe fetnen guten greun* ben bamit ^(fen." ll.Snbli^ gelang c« bem 2J!inijler, bcm Jlonig iiBcr fein wa^ni Snterep bie 2lugen ju offnen. 12. SCenn in alien Seiten ein SSJfiii^tiger bem anbern feinb tear, fo fagte er bemfelBcn a6. 13. 2lu« alien Drten, bie i^m angeprten, fammelte biefer mSifctige Jperr bie 9JJanner, bie i^m an^ingen. 14. 9tad)bem fic feincm SDor* t;aBen Beigejiimmt fatten, »er})flid)teten fit f!(| i^m tcijufte^en unb bem ^riege Bei3uroo|nen. 15. @ot(^ ein miidjiiger §c'rr mar §ein* ric^ ber i'imt, ^erjog son Saiern, tnetc^em grope Sanber jugeprtcn unb Soufenbe »on ^riegern geprc^ten. Exercise 131. SlufgoBe 131. ] . Why do you not answer him ? 2. I have answered him, but he has not answered me. 3. Do they wish to injure their friends ? 4. They have assisted us, and we will assist them. 5. Will you not help this boy ? he has hurt himself. 6. The soldiers that adhered to him, bound themselves to take pan in the war. 7. He calls them obstinate, becauss' they will not assent to his design. 8. Do you know what ails thoy«, people'? 9. This hat fits me better than the other one. IC, Tie does 240 LESSON LXIV. not contradict them, though he thinks that they are wrong. 11. Howwas the king answered when he complained of certain hostilities 1 12. Is it my duty to obey such men, and to help them? 13. Have you succeeded in finding them? 14. Do you succeed in learning Spanish ? Seifpt'te. f tn flebtei ^amt, etn gtsge^ $feib; etn fHrjer Slrnt, ein langea ©i^wctt, mup tiai bem anbein I^elfen. — U. einc grau, bet bie ©tfuttung i^ter aJjlii^tcit om lierjen liegt, itigt t^te Ciebe jum ©^onen nidjt in einem lojibaicn SlnjUgc, fonberit in bet gu* ten £inti(^tun3 i^xti ^miat^tni. —as. ExAMFI^S. A small man, a large horse, a shor arm, a long sword must help each other (t. e. ought to go together). A woman who has at heart the falfillment of her duties, shows her love of the beautiful, not in costly apparel, but in the appro- priate arrangement of her house- hold. VOCABXTLAKT TO THE EXERCISES. ©ct Scfcp, -ti, pi. -e, the com- mand, order; S)ie Slc^t, -, pL -en, the outlawry; Stolen, to threaten ; ©aa Stenb, -tit -ii the misery ; StUe'gen, to succumb, p. 350 ; (Etwei'fen, toshow, render,358; S)ie gami'lie, -, pL -n, the family; giu^en, to curse ; giigen (jic^), to submit.; QSebii^'ren, to be due; Ocfal'len, to please, p. 348; Qilnijtn, to resemble, be like ; Oenii'gen, to suffice, satisfy; ©et $etjog«^ut, -ei, pi -^iite, the ducal hat; Der fltiegajug, -eg, pi. -iSge, cam- paign; SRtglingen, to £u], miscarry; ©d^iieben, to wave; ®er ©tolj/ -c«i the pride; Stauen, to confide in; Stolen, to defy ; Uebel aoUtn, to bear a grudge; Uebergie'^en< to invade, p. 358; S)«a SJetlan'gen, -i, the demand; SJie SJernunft', -, the reason: SBibetfle'^en, to resist, p. 856; SEStberflie'ben, to oppose, to struggle against; 3ntnen, to be angry; 3u»st'fommen/ to anticipate. Exercise 132. SIufgaBe 132. 1. S;oc^ tie ^rone dnti ^atfer^ fc^tteitc f^m Immer Bor Stugcit. 2. Cicr Jperjog^^ut gcnitgte i^m nic^t. 3. ®r traute feincr eigncit ^raft unK tro^e Jem ^aifer. 4. Der ^aifcr forierle i|n auf fK^ fetiien SefeMen ju fiigen, unb tro|tc i^m ntit tcr 3ld)t. 6. 'Ba&i trm Jperjogc, ter einem imtn gli^, gait weJer Semunft noi^ giitcr Sftol^. 6. ^\}m gepcl nur feine eigne 9)ieinung, un6 er tuiberfteette bcm SSerlangcn, tern ^aifer cine S^re ju ermeifen, lie lemfetten DJDKFINITE NUMBRALB. 241 flc6%tE. 7. Der JJalfer, bcr beat ^crjoge f^on fctt langer 3dt ixM tooUte Uttb i^m tocgen fctnc2 ©toljcs jiirnte, !am t:|m jutior unb fiBcrjog i^n tnit ^rieg.- 8. ®er ^riegsjug mtflaitg bem ^oifer nic^t. 9. 'Ltv §erjog fonntc ber felnblld^en SUfa^t itii^t tuiberjle'^cn unb eriag bem ^dfcr in ber ©c^Iai^t. 10. ®r mufte nac§ Snglanb flie^en unb nur fctne gamilie unb eintge greunbe folgten t^nt. 11. ^ter entfagte er Jebcr §offnung unb flu^te bem ©toljc, ali ber Ur* fac^e fclnca glenbS. ExBRcisE 133. SlufgaBe 133. 1. Threaten them as you will, they will never succumb to you. 2. Will no one render them this service? 3. These men will not submit to his commands. 4. What does not please them is of no value to them. 5. All that he has heard and seen does not satisfy him. 6. They will not be able to resist so powerfiil an enemy. 7. The laws of nature are opposed in vain, there no resistance avaUs. 8. Why do you defy him ? 9. He is angry at his friends. 10. Those people wiU injure you if you confide in them. 11. He anticipated us in every thing. 12. So great an honor is due to no man. 13. These children resemble their parents. 14. He struggled against the demand, but could not resist his enemy, 15. Your advice is of no value to him, for he can not renounce his evil company. LESSON LXV. £ection LXV. DTDEFINlTK NUMEBALB. I. SI n b e r, with words denoting time, signifies next, following aud never refers, like other, to indefinite past time : ttt gejt Permorgcn unb tttr ben a n* He goes the day after to-morrow bent Sag. and we the next day. iDet SRann, ber »*r einigcn lagctl Jier The man that was here the othei Bar, i^ franf. day (a few days ago) is sick. o. Instead of a n b e r, as the equivalent of other, in denot- ing something additional, the adverb n c^ is employed : Stimm It 1| etttetl SKarttet, eitier ifl Take another cloak (in additioij Vs ni^t gettug. this), one is not enough. 11 242 LESSON JCV. SKatmclnen mbtxn SKatUel, btcfer ijl Take another cioak(uiBtead if this), {u biinn. this is too thin. b. The adverb anitxd, otherwise, differently, else, sometimes occurs in the signification of namely, that is : SBet einen SwecE tutH, ntttg auc^ tie He who wishes a result mnst also 3)Uttcl woEen, menn et ttnbti« set* wish for the means, that is, il ftiinbig ijl. — ®cl. (provided) he is judicious. 2. S3 e i 6 e, unlike 6o{cle. Examples. aju SBa^tl^cit unb bie 3{ofe |inb fejr (The) truth and the rose are very fi|tn, abet ieibe 1)(ibtn Somen. beautiful, but both ha\e thorns. 3(^ ^abe i^n nte mit itgenb etnem I have ^lever offended him by a SBotte Selei'bigt. single word. Sutsetlen eflTen bie 0iennt^iere ntc^t« Sometimes the reindeer ea. noth- anbere^ al8 3)Joo8. ing but (else than) moss. (Stin'nere bi(^ fcer tiieUnSaJc^lt^aten-Remember the many good deeds bte ii) bit erwie*. (favors) that I showed you. Sluf fol^e Sltt loitt ic& nic^t retc^ I do not wish to become rich in aerben. such a manner, ttnfei 51 U e « t|i ouf bem S))iel. Our all is at stake 244 LESSON LXT. VOCABULAKT TO THB EXBKCISES. 9[Iltrte|l, very best; 3(udSeiett, to spend, p. 348; aSctbe, both; S)et Sefotm'te, -n, pL -n, the ac- quaintance; (Siniger, some (§ 62. 3) ; SinfleQen, to appear; iD« Smjil'ttt, -S, pL -, the rebel; Siben, to inherit; t>U glafi^e, -, pi. -n, flask, bottle ; S)ie Solse, -, pL -Mi cenBeijnence; t>tt ©etj^ala, -fea. pL -^alfe, th« miser; ®aS aifatns, (the) Mayence ; Daa ^arax^nm, -i, (the) Manheim , ©d^Iimm, bad, sad; S)er Ueberroil, -ti, pL -rBic, th« overcoat ; ®tt8 SJersnu'gen, -3, the pleasure ; ■ SSsrfefien, to place before. i Exercise 134. SlufgaBc 134. 1. ®r '^ctpt aHeS " gcitibc unb gmpBrcr, toai nt^t mit i'^m ijl. 2. Serjlc^jl Bu atteS, wag i(^ iir fage ? 3. 5Blr allc « wollcii mit btr ge^cn. 4. S5er SBaucr fe|te ung ben atterbeflen * SBein »or. 5. ®r »ttt noc^ Slepfct unb cine anbere glafc^e SBcin. 6. SCotten ©le Slicker laufcn? 7. 2^ %aU fd^on welc^e * gcfauft, oBer i(^ will noc^ cinigc faufcn. 8. Scibca crelgncte (id^ unb btc f^Kntmen got gen »on Seibcm jlettten ^i) etn. 9. T)ai SBetter ijl fc^on ctira« (or eln Benig) latter gcttorbcn. 10. SBer l^Stte fo etwas gcgtouBt ? 11. ^enn|t bu irgenb Stntanben, ber fo ettoag f^un wiirbe? 12. Sin Seber " Bon feinen grcunben '^at i^^n serloffen. 13. Sr f^at »iel SBein gctrunfen unb sici ®elb bafiir ausge^eBen. 14. 5)a« stele ®etb, bag er erBte, ^at er ouggcgeBen fiir ben stctcn SBein, ben er gctrunlen '^at. 15. Seme niSt ouf etnntal SStctc3, fonbern »icl. 16. 3eben3;ag, ben ©ie gu una !ommen tootten, lootten tttr 2llte mtt 3^ncn fpajteren ge'^en. 11. Stefer UeBerroct tjt ju Ccin, ne^men ©ie t^n weg unb Brtngen ©te mix etnen anbem (see 1. a.). ExERoisB 135. SlufgaBe 135. 1. The weather is so cold that I must have two overcoats, bring me another one (see 1. a.). 2. As soon as my money was all gone I had no longer any friends, 3. Which of these car- riages shall you buy ? 4. 1 shall not buy either of them, for neither of them pleases me. 5. If you wait another day we will aU go with you. 6. Do you wish to buy any thing more 1 a. § 68. 3; ii L. 39. 4; c. L. 43. 3; d L. 32. 7. PREPOSITIONS WITH THE DATIVE. 2H 1. 1 have a little money and he has a great deal. 8. Many of my acquaintances reside in this city, 9. The few friends that he has are more powerful than his many enemies. 10. Who has more enemies and fewer friends, more trouble and less pleasure than the miser 1 11. I understand all that you say and can read all the letters that you have written. 12. I would like to buy a few pears and a few more apples. 13. To-moi ow I shall go to Manheim, and the next day to Mayence. ] 4, Every book that I have is in this room. 15. Do you wish to buy some more horses ] 16. The weather is becoming some- what warmer. LESSON LXVl. Cecticrn LXVI, * PREPOSITIONS CONSTRUED WITH THE DATIVE. 1. 3tuS, § 112. Stu 8 ben Stugett, «« 8 beat ©iiine. Out of Bight, mt of mind. St tfl au 8 SBerlin. He ia from Berlin. 3c^ tl^at e8 au 8 ©e^otfcim jegen ©ie. I did it through obedience to yon. St u a Jlogem SJerbftc^t folt man tii^t On mere suspicion one should not fo ^onbelti. act thus. 33o8 fie^t man a« 8 bem Srlefe. One sees that iy the letter. Stu 8 biefem Otunbe ileibt er. For this reason he remains, ©r lief a u8 alien JfiSften. He ran roith all his might. Sa}a8 ijl au8 i^m geworben? What has become o/him? SIh8 greunben toetben oft Seinbe, Friends often become enemies, eno- feltener Sreunbe ttu8 JJetnben. mies less frequently Mends. Et t^at e8 au.8 fteien ©tutfen. He did it of his own accord, ©ie tttjfen ttebet ani noc^ ein. They are entirely at a loss. Er ^at ft^ au8 bem ©tauie jcmac^t. He has run away ("out sticks"). ®8 i|i a a 8 mtt t^m. It is all over with him. lEr fd^rieS feinem Stubei Don SWitno He wrote to his brother from Mu c^en au8. nich. 2. 9tufer, § 112. 2. 9?ii|t8 ifl fo fe'^r unfer tx^m, al8 unfere Nothing is so much (so completely) (Sebanfen; aHeS SInbete ijl augei our own as our thoughts; all Mn8. — W. . else Is without {exterior to) us. SBer nti^t8 tteien will aI8 fein ®6en« He who will love nothing but his bilb, |at auper \iS) nii!^t8 p tic own image, has except (beside) Ben. — fR. himself, nothing to love. @t tsar anger (Iii^ijor STOut^. He was beside himself with rage. 3c^ bin gans an ^ et Stt^cm. I am entirely mtt o/ breath. Son biefcr ©ettoBn^eit ge^t et ni^t ab From this custom he varies not, «av auger i»enn onnibe beif^mflnb. cepi when strangers are with him 246 LESSON LXVI. 8. 33 ei, § 112.3. 3^ ^OlU teltl ®eli S e i mit. I have no money with {about) me. ©« jlanben i e t mtt. They stood near (by) me. ^eSj lele nic^t gem itiitx Sam))e. I do not like to read i?^ the lamp. aSei blefei 5ltbcU gettimtt man nii^l One earns (gams) but little at tLia Siet. -work. . (E« i|l nt^t ©ittt J e i un*. I* is not the custom atrumg (itttt) us. (Et ifl ni^t 6 e i Sinnetl. He is not in his senses. S8ei aller feiner fi:[ug^eU lap et 11^ 1^««A all his prudence he aUovh jur S^ojleit DcrUitcn. himself to be seduced into folly. » c i bcra (Jarfcn SBinbe griff ba? 5$euer /» consequence of the high wind the f^nett um p*. fii's spread rapidly. (£i seibot e« lie t 8e6enS|hafe. He forbade it on pain of death. SfBit fiirac^en i e t i:^m ein. "We called on him. Sc^ Iteg mi(^ b e i t|m amiielben. I had myself announced to him. aBenn Semanb bef^etben bteiOt, nlc^t If one remains modest, not under betm 8o6e, fonbetn ieim %oi>tX, praise, but under censure, then i|l er ti.—ta. he (really) is so. 4. Sntgcgen, § 112. 5. &8 ifl Hug tttib tu'^n bem untjenncibli- It is prudent and bold to go toward ^en UeSel entgegen ju ge^en.-®. (to meet) imavoidable evil 2)em atten 3)lannc, bet in swanjls B"t> *« ^^^ °^^ ™*" '^'"' '"^ t'wfenty ©i^la^tenbemS^ob pit ©ie entge' battles e«<;o«»itere(i (wm^tojTie^ gen gingi faUt ea boc^ ^att M fo '^- tl* f*"' yo"- •*• ^«^™8 ^^''^ *° enlfcmt ja fe^ett. ©. fi- himself thus remoTod. 5. ©cgcniiitr, § :12. 6. 5Die Siic^e (le§t bem alten@c^lo(fe gc The church stands oppomte to (am genuier. against) the old castle. Sometimes g e g e n precedes, and iii e r follows tlie dative : E« fle^t gcgen bem ©i^Ioffe iibet. It stands opposite the castle. 6. 2Rit, 112. 1. (£r fpielt mit ben fiinbem. He plays with the children. @ie f(^ret6t mit bet gteber. She writes with the pen. ©t na^m e8 mit Oewalt. He took it 6j force. split ®ott Wolfen wit S^aten t^un. Through God we shall do valiantly. Ps. Is. 12. Wl i t Sage^anbtai^ reiile et ab. At the break of the day he set out. 2)iefc8 Silb ^at grope Scl^ttlii^teit mit This picture has (bears) a great re- bem Stemben. semblance to the stranger. (Et arbettete mit mit. He worked (in company) with ne. 6t blieb bet mtt. He remained with (6y or near) me. (Et tua^te m i t mit b e I bem firan* He watched with me (helped me {£(t. ' watch) with the sick man. 3(^ lemte m i t i^m. I learned with him (when he did) 7. AJier mit compounded with verbs, a pronoun is often re quired to be supplied in translation : Bttnge ibn m 1 1 wenn bu fommfl. Bring him with you, if yon come, ®enn Sie ge'^cn, gc^e '4 mit. If you go, I will go with you. PREPOSITIONS WITH THE DATIVE. 241 SSJeim et ge^t, ge'^e ic^ mi t. If he goes I shall go with him. SSJoUm ©it una ni^t mi mermen? Will you not take us along? ®a3 gc^t nic^t ju wit red^ttn ^Jingen. There is some witchcraft in it 3(i& win e3 mit i^m aufne^mtn. I do not fear him. Et ftcl mit gteip niebct. He fell down intentionally. aUtt nti^ten. % no means. ©ic mat^t alle SKoben mit. She follows all the fashions. •eile mit Sfetle." "Slow and sure" (hasten slowly). 8. 9la4 § 112. 8. Ct i|l bet i£t|ie n a c^ S^nen. ©ie fcfeicEten n a (^ bcm Slrste. ©it burjlet n a c^ 8iu^m. (Et eifutiblgte fi(| n a c| i'^ncn. Sll« i^n bc« StmteS 3)flii^ten talb bar- auf n a 4 granfreic^ riefen, funbte er mit^ n a ^ Sft^eim^. — ©. ©ie f(|offen na(^ i|m. SBic fc^ielt er n a ^ ben 4>cinben ! — £. 32 a (| ber SBefc^reiBung mug d fe^r f^on fein. He is the first after you. They sent /or (after) the physician She thirsts /oj- fame. He enquired after {for, aJoaQthem. As the duties of liis office soon af- terward called him to France, he sent me to Rheims. They sliot at liim. How he looks (peers) at my hands I According to the description it must be very beautiful. 6r ^anbelt n a c^ feiner ttcSetjeugung. He acts in accordance with his con- viction, ©ie fpielt nic|t nnij 9foteit, She does not play by note(s). ©ie jeic^net na (^ ber SJatur. She draws /rom nature. S)a? Sleifc^ fi^meiit n a c| SwieJeln. The meat tastes of onions. 9. 511 ^ frequently follows the word tJiat it governs : Seiner SRciming n a c^ ^aten wir ganj According to his opinion we are re^t. perfectly right. 3(^ tenne fie nur bem SZamen n a ($. I only know them by name. 10. D 6 is generally construed with the dative; sometimes with the genitive : 63 iji mein ®ei|l ber ungefelcn oi It is my si^rit that, unseen, hovers beincm ©(|eitei fi^weit, — 3). over (the crown of) thy head, ©ie e^rten i^n o 6 feineS 3Rut|e3. They honored him on actount of his courage. 11. ©eit. Seit bem 3;age, ba ic^ bie ^inbct /Since the time that I brought up tha S^rael au3 Steg^lJten fii^rte. children of Israel out of Egypt. 6r ip f e i t einem Sal^re trant. He has been sick /or {since) a year. 3i^ |aie i^n feit je^n Sa^ren nic^t I have not seen him /or (au9. ee gcttic^t i^m s « I S^rt. ©it jie^cn i^n jut aJerontwortung. 3$ ge^e j u meinem SBtubet. Ct fag no^ ; n Sifi^. ©ie lagen i^m 5 u gfigcn. ©ie fionb i^m jut ©eite. Cr fob ein Sref en j u r ©ee. SJir fomen j u r tei|ten 3eit. (Er bient s« {(ofe. ©ie ifl no(^ 3 u |>aufe. L. 43. 2. er tauft Su^ J n einem SRod. Sa« fann jum Setteifc bienen- ea ifl bir J u m ©eflen gefc^ejen. ©a ^afl ijn junt le^ten 5Wal gefe^en. ©ie flarben ja Saufenbea. Wtcm fangt fte ; u taufen. Cr teifl 5 a SBafTer, x6j j a Sanbe. ©ie reifen j a 3)ferbe, i^ } a gap. He oomes from the market. I come from (md of) the opera. What is said of him I They sing of spring-time and Icr* This table is (made) of ebony. And were baptized 0/ {by) him. He is a Swede In/ birth. By whom is this painting? He was intoxicated idth delight. He is small in stature. Thou shalt love the Lord thy Gol with all thy heart. He lives on his income. It went off (succeeded) well. He did it of his own accord. Blue-eyed (blue of\ white-browed. The one in golden locks, the other gray-haired. He is going to market^ to table. They beg from house to house. It redounds to his honor. They call him to account. I am going to my brother's. He was still sittmg at table. They lay at his feet She stood at his side. He saw an engagement at sea. We came at the right time. He serves at court. She is still at home. He buys cloth for a coat. That may eervefor ( LESSON LXVn. Certion LXVn. PREPOSITIONS WITH THE ACCUSATIVE. 1. Surd^. fer gtng iuri) ben SBalb. SBit ftnb no^ nii^t burc^. Strm an ®en«6 unb mHj firmer bur^ ben ®enu^, woa ^aien ttir anber^ al8 ^offnungen?— S. ©r metnt, er tonne ea burc^ ®£lb au?- rt^ten. ^ u r ct) nic^ta Sejcic^nen bie 3Bcnr<^en me|r i^ren S^arattcr al* b u r ^ ba^, B)tt« |te la(|erltii& jtnben.— ®. He went through the woods. We are not yet through. Poor in enjoyment, and still pooret thtrcmgh enjoyment, what have we but hope(s) ? He thinks he can accomplish it by {means of) money. In nothing do men more (perfectly) indicate their character, than in that which they call ridiculous. 2. giir. JBtr nur fur fJ^ unb nic^t tt«c| fiir He who lives only /or himself, and ^nbert Ititt i(J nie gliiStii^. not/or others also is never happy Si^ fii^Ie Beber Sieie noi^ l>ag fur I feel neither love nor hate for i^n. 3er(auft e^ nur gegen ®elb. JDa« SeBen glei^t gegen bie (Swig* teit, bem fe^ncDen |)tt«(^ bet bem ©tetienben entflie^t.— S. SBemt i^ mtc| gegen fte Detpfli^ten foil, fo mujfen \\Ci au^ gegen mi^. — ®. He is polite to {tmnard) them He left ns toward evening. They are united against me. Is no remedy known for (agairui^ the bite 01 a mad dog! He sells it only /or money. Life compared toiih eternity resem bles the fleeting breath that es- capes the dying man. If I am to pledge myself to them, they must also do it to me. 4. D|ne ^ii^ti 3Sert^»oIIed tjl o^ne Slibeit Nothing valuable is to be obtained ju erlangen. withmit labor. D ^ n e i^n ware ii) gliidlii^. But for him I should be happy. £) ^ n e is sometimes substituted for alit (Ea ijl fein etttt lagert jl^ U m The angel of the Lord eneampetL bie ^er, bie i^n fiirc^ten. round about them that fear him. 6r Eommt urn fiinf U^t, He is coming at five o'clock. U m iBic»iel U^r (ttel^e Sett) gel^t bie At what time (what o'clock) doe« ©omte ttuf? the sun rise? SSerbiene i^ baa urn bic^? Do I deserve that /row you? SBie jle^t ea um i^n? How stands (is) it roith him? 6r iji nm jc^n Sa^re alter. He is older by ten years. iEtauet war noi) in 3ttaiorra u m ben There still was mourning in Zamo- Stob bca gropen fiijniga, — §. ra /or the great king's death, 61 ftcl fetnem grcunbe u m ben ^ola. He fell upon his friend's neck. U m fo (urn befio) befTer fur una, S)te Beit tflum, Cr fommt einen Sag u m ben anbern, @ie fommen einer um ben anbern. So much the better for us. The time is up (past). He comes every other day. They come on alternate days. 6r ^at fti^ um baa SJaterlanb serbient He has earned the gratitude of hi gemai^t, Et fptic^t mic ea ijm um'a lietj i|}, ^i baiibelt fii$ ui^t u m Jileinigfeiten. ©ie laufen um bie Siettt, country. He speaks as he thinks (feels). It is not a trifle that is under con- sideration. They ai'e running /or a (the) wager. UmbteSetteia often equivalent to e i f t i 3 tealausly, with all one's might. PREPOSITIONS WITH THE DATIVK AND ACCUSATIVB. 251 G. Um in compounds frequently marks loss or privation : %{ tarn um fcin ®etb. He lost his money. 9lam ttac^te il^n «m. He was destroyed. £)te ganje SSannfi^aft tarn um. The whole crew perished. 7. The accusative with um is sometimes best rendered by our nominative ; ii iP cin tijfiliilei? SSiitg um bie Qif The health is a precious thing (as funi^eit. to the health it is, etc.). LESSON LXVin. Uaion Lxvm. PEBPOSITIONS GOVBENING THE DATIVB AND ACCUSATIVB!. 1. Sin. (Et llelt am genfler, on bet %^x, ffir fagt cr fei trani a tn ^etjcn (L. 20.4). (£t tc|nte ftc^ an bie SBanb. ©et SiW fanb an bet SBanb. Si) ettannte i|n an bet ©timme. Gt naf m fte a n bet |ianb. Ct leibet a n Sotjfwe^. Stm S^oge itc^t man i|n nic. Cr if! teid) an ^offnung. 3^ t:^ue ea an feiner ©tatt. (Et fiatt an einet SBunbe. 9[ rt i^n i>a(S)tt ic^ nidjt. S)te ©tabt Kegt a n bem glulTe. Set $ut ^angt an bcm Sftagel. (Et ge^t tt n tie Spre. ©%ei6en ©ie an t^n? (SaBen ©ie e« an il^n a6 ? lEt i(i an je^n Sa^te alt. He stands at the window, a< the door. He says he is sick at (the) heart. He leaned against the wall. The table stood agairist the waU. I recognized him by his Toice. He took her by the hand. He suffers /rom headache. During the day one never sees him. He is rich in hope. I do it in his stead. He died of a wound. I did not think of him. The city lies on the river. The hat hangs on the naiL He is going to the door. Are you writing to himf Did you deliver it to him S He is about ten years old. 2. Idioms with an. ; mit. S)aa i|l nii^t a n bem. 6* ijl a n bem, bap id) ge'^en mup. Et ging t^nen a n bie $anb. ffit |at ea tt n ben SWann gei)tad)t. SJon je^t an wetbe id) (leipig fein. (Et |lel;t o6en an. Sie wojncn neteii a n. He is still alive. It is his way (custom). I care nothing about the malf^ The affair is of no consequence. He is disgusted with every thing, The dog is chained. It will come my turn to-roorrow. It is your tarn ; no, it is minsi I« 46. 2. That is not true (is nothing in it) It is time for me to go. He assisted tliem. He has found a customer. From now on I will be diligert He stands at the head. They live next door 852 LSSBOH LXvm. 3. 21 uf. ©ie fpieit a u f bem glfigel. •Si^ serlap mtc^ auf ©te. er it^t a u f ben (jie^t auf btra) ^figel. Sr tjl a u f ber ^oi^jeit. aSaa fanben ©it auf ber 3)i)fl? aSaretauf bemSaU? Er i|i Sijfe auf una. 5i^ ^oie auf baa was er fagt. Sie ge^tn auf ber SSiiefe. Siuo^nt auf bent ©(^log. Sini fie auf bem fioube ? Slttf biefe 3Beife ge^t ea nii^t. 5r Heibet fii^ auf englifc^e Strt. Sr ttartete auf mii^. Cei^en ©ie ti mix auf einige Xage. (Setter auf ben 3Raitt? &x tretbt baa Sie^ au f bie SSSeibe. (Er ijl flolj aaf f^in ®elb, unb eifet' ju^tig auf felne Sloc^bam. (Er ^olt »iel (grope ©taie) cuf fie. Ea toflet auf sierjig (Sulben. ea liegt auf bem (er legt ea oufien) Sif*. He insists upon ih. Slie plays on the piano. I depend upon you. He goes on (stands on) V e hill. He is at the wedding. Wliat did yon find at the po3bK)ffi(gal Was he ai the ball? He is angry at us. I listen to what he says. They are walking in the me»<)aw. He lives in the castle. Are they in the country. In this way it will not suioaqd. He dresses in the English iaahioi.. He waited /or me. Lend it to me for a few days. Is he going to market f He drives the cattle to the pasture. He is proud o/' his money, and jeal- ous of hia neighhors. He thinks a great deal of them. It costs about forty florins. It lies (he lies it) on the table. 4. 3n. ®r ifj in bem ®arten. SBaa ^at er jejt t m ©imte ? £r geft in ben ®arten. ©ie jtnb in bem Eonjert, ©ein aJermogen tefle^t i n ©runbjlfitfen. ©rt^tttea in biefer abft^t. ©ie ge^en in baa Sonjcrt. (Er jagte fie in bie glu^t. (Er fsvang t n bie 4iii|e. (Er tltttfe^te i n bie ^cinbe. 'Siai faHt in bie Slugen. 3c^ ^abc i^n i n SJerbai^t, Sr Ic6t in ben Sag ^inein. Er fc^Iug bie Slrme in etnanber. ©ie brangen in i'^n ft^ iu erfldren. Tiai (ann i(§ in ben Sob ni^it leiben. ■^ie ttttnctt in'a ®cbriingei aier er legte fii) for fie tn'a 3)IiUel. it fagte fie in'a Stuge. (Er liegt i n ben Icftten Sugen. ©ie liegen jti^ i n ben $aaren. ©ie rtbete i n einem fort. (Er reijle i n aUcr gru^e ab. fir ifl no^ nl(§t i m Steinen boriiber. (Ec fagt, fie ^abe fi4 in i^n serliebt. He is in the garden. What has he in mind (on foot) nowl He is going into the garden. They are at the concert. His property consists of real estate. He did it with this iatenticn. They go to the concert. He put them to flight. He sprang up. He clapped his hands. That attracts attention. I suspect him. He lives extravagantly. He folded his aims. They pressed him to declare liimsalC To that I have a mortal aversion. They were in a dilemma, but h« interposed in their behalf. He looked sharply at them. He lies at the point of death. They are together by the ears. She spoke without cessation. He started very early. He has not yet decided (is not clear} in reference to it He says she has fallen in love with him. PRKPOBITIONS WITH THE DATIVE AND ACCUSATIVE, 253 ©l( tterbeit in ben ctjien 3;tt8en ai- They will depart in a, very le-n teifen. days. Er Ijl in i>tx Icjten Beit fe^r ttaurij For some time past he has ooen gcwefen. very sad ©t^8 SEBotrtetn ne^mett mi($ in Sin* Six words ei/iim my attention everj ftjruc^ jeben Slag. — SBt. day. . Sie ftaitn i^n i n ©(|u6 genommen. They have taken him under theu protection. 5. Ueber. Sit Samiie ^ngt it J e t bem 2;if(^e. Sr fap ii i e T mit am £if($e. ©ie 8«^' fl 6 e r bie Sr&ie, Da« ifl fiber SWenf^en JBetmSgen. St befommt Srief u 6 e t Stief. Sajfet bie Sonne iiber euren 3orn nic^t unterge^cn. — ^Eph. iv. 26. §iei fiber fat er ni^t na(i|geba(|t. Unb woilen, Bag mein SJoIE metnea JJa- aiena tJcigcfTe fiber ibtcn SIroumcn, gleic^Wie i^re aJdter meineS JfomenS Dergagen fi b e r ben Saat.-Jer. 23. U e b e r biefe langweiUge SRebe fc^Iief er ein. Itebet btt8 ©iumnig l^aben cuc^ bie ©paniet ba« JleJ fiber bie D:^ren gejogen.— ®. 5!Rofe8 aber M i^^et biefe SRebe. ©ie iji bijfe fiber ntein Ca^en. So »ir Jeute wetben gerii^tet fiber biefer Sffio^If^at. 3Jtatt bat ijn fi b e r bet 3;^at ettttpbt- Et batte ftd^ getrojiet fiber Slmnen. — 2. Sam. xiiL 39. ^eute fiber ac^t Slage fommt er. Sieifen Sie fiber aSremen? Iteber ben Semmer tssl^nt er auf bent fianbe. Ueber htrj sber lang bmrnt er an ben ®algen. ©ei ibm ge^t bie SRebHi^feit fiber 3iIIe«. Er fonnte ii nic|t fiber bai $erj bringen. Bie ftnb fiber Selb gegangen. Ueber ben faulen fieri ! D, fi b e r bie SUnben; bie nic^t fe^en trotten !— £. The lamp hangs over the table. He sat aboae me at the table. She is going across the bridge. That is beyond (aiove) human power He receives letter after (over) letter. Let not the sun go down upon your wrath. On this he has not reflected. Which think to cause my people to forget my name by their dreams, as their fathers have for- gotten my name /or Baal. Under (during) this tedious speenb he fell asleep. During the delay the Spauiarda have drawn the net ove?' your ears. Theu fled Moses at this saying. She is angry at my laughing. if we this day be examined of this good deed. — ^Aots, iv. 9. He has been caught in the act. He was comforted concerning Am- non. A vreekfrom to-day he is coming. Po you go by way of Bremen ? During (through) the summer he lives in the country. Sooner or later he will otme to the gallows. With him honesty is prized above every thing else. He could not find it in hia teart (make up his mind to it). They l>ave walked intc the countrj'. 0, the 2»i.y fellow! (0,) shame on the blind that wiB not ec« I 6. Unter. SBir fafen untet bem fBaam. Er fag ttnter miram lifc^e. 2)08 ijl nnter feiner SBfirbe. Untet biefer Sebinjtirg tbue ii) e«. We sat ur4v the tree. He sat belom me at the table. That is be.ieeth hi" d»gnitv. On this condiUoii I wJl ai» it. 254 LESBON LXIX. tJntet feincn ©B^nen^ttBe ic^ mit,ei« ncn flonig cma|U. 6i iefUeg untet bent ©^alle bet SiromntEten ba« 3lo§. ©0 lange ttr (St6e ein Ainb ifl, fo t|l unter i^m unb einem flne^te fetn Untctfc^ieb. — Gal. iv. 1 SBJan teiuiti^tt nur antei biefem 5la» men. Aomme mltnie iniebet untet bie,3Iu' sen. 6r t|? ant et bet Sftieit eingcf^Iafcn. SDag SBuc^ t|i untet bet 9)reffe. 64 iji unmiigltc^ aUt Sopfe untet tx- nen ^ut ju btingen. (£t bat um eine Untettebung untet »iet Slugen. 6t ging untet bic ©olbaten. £« Uegt SlOeS untet einanbet. Et jledt untet etneiSede mit i^nen. I have provided me a ting among his sons. — 1 Sam. xvL 1. Amid the clangor of trumpets he monnted the steed. As long as the heir is a child there is no difference between him and a servant {Zileral). He is known only by (under) thii name. Never come before my eyes again. He has fallen asleep at his work. The book is in press. It is impossible to make all men ci one opinion. He sought a private (secret) inter- view. He became a soldier. Every thing lies in confusion. He is in coUusion (under one cover) with them. 7. as r. ©ie lle^t sot bet S^flt. ©ie toeintctt set gteube. Et flatb sot ^unget. 6t mat aupet jii^ so t Sonu Se Jt finb wit pi^et sot i^m. ganb Et ©c^u§ sot i^m ? "Bai ©i^ijf liegt sot Stnfet. 3(^ fa^ t^n s 1 einet ©tunbe. Sag i^ s 1 bet 4>anb ^tntei(^enb. S)ie liinri^tung ttitb bolb sot ge^en. She is standing before the door. They wept /or (with) joy. He died of imager. He was beside himself mtk anger. Now we are safe /rom him. Did he find protection against himi The ship lies at anchor. I saw him an hour ago. That, for the present, is sufficient. The execution wQl soon take placa <•«»«.» LESSON LXIX. Ceition I-XEX. ADVERBS AND CONJUNCTIONS. 1. S 68 ifi gut, ttiet met)! fii^on. 6t, a b e t, woltc nii{)t gc^en. ©ie tann eg t^im; tLnlffie abet? ttnb abet eiftang bic 2)rDmmcte. (Et ji ^od||J a b e r -(»" e. ul'er)gldu6tg. nx. It is good, hut not bcautifhL He, however, would not go. She can do it; will she though/ And again the trumpet resounded. He is exceedingly superstitious. 2. Slltetn. ©ie (inb jwot leid^, a It ein fie nujen They are, it is true, wealthy, but tbten SRetdH^um nii^L they do not use their wealth. 6- t|l ni(^t ol'ttn teii^, fonb:tn au^ He is not only (alone) rich, but also ttojltptij ben'^ficent. ADVERBS AND CONJUNCTIONS. 255 3. 31 Is. ©et SWaj 'tIelJt un« at 8 ®et§el.-©. Max remains (to us) as (a) hostaga 6i )ic^t aui, uli o6 ei tran! ware. He looks as though ho were sick. Super tfi ntc^ta, al« Siete; ^onifl Sweeter 4« ber lebte SKann gefaffen ifl. -©. Wait till I return. He went as far as (to) the bridgf They went in to the water up to their necks. He is sick even unto death (dying). I have paid him to the last far- thing. He had received the moLicy within (except) a few groats. All hut (except) you are satisfied. The end of the contest did not come until the last man fell (had fall- lea> 256 LESSON LXIZ. 8. ®0. S a noi^ Wlti lag in ueiter ^tna . . . » a fatten Su (Sntfc^Iug unb mnt^ unb ie^t, ...1)0. bet Srfolg setilc^ett ift ba fansji S>u an ju jagen.— ®. Su jianbefi l^iet, i(| jianb b a. S a bi»t^ f^on wieber. SeKg finb, bie b (t Setb trasen. As {rinee) he does not go, I go. As (when or while) all yet lay in the distance, {then) yon had resolu- tion and courage, and now that the result is secured {noa) yon begin to despair. You stood here, I stood there. ffere I am again already. Blessed are they that mourn. 9. Sagte er, bag tx i)tate gefje ? 2Bie lanje i|l t8, bag er ^iet ttar ? SBarte bi« bag ct tommt 2) a g ic& i^« nur fe^en tonnte ! ® a g bu tiid^t son ber ©telle ge^it S) a g tc^ e^ nt^t tsugte ! Slttf bag et ea balb sergeife. Did he say th^tt he goes to-day! How long is it since he was here I Wait till (that) he comes. ITiai I might only see him t Do not move from the spot. As though I did not know it I In order ^Aa< he may soon forget iL 10. 'Dcnn. SJantm ge^t et b enn ni^t mit un« ? 3^ mug t'^tt'ac^ten, benn er ijJ ein aafri{i^ttget 5Wann. ©ie ejfen nic^W benn Srob. (Er fle^t ^S^ei aU firieger, benn aW ®taat«mann. S)et aJienW farai nii^t aa^r'^aft glftil- Ui$ fein, e« fei benn, bag er tw genb^aft fet. Man can not be truly happy imless 11. ®aa t|l b (% fonbetBar. 3d^m8c^te bod^ tuilfen, warttmctba' ®c5ett ©ie b ^ mit mir. 3a, b c^ ! SRein, b c i^ ! Why does he not go with us thent I must respect him, for he is an upright man. They eat nothing Imt bread. He stands higher as a warrior than as a statesman. Man can not be truly happy (i e. unconditionally), be it then (as the condition), that he be virtuous ; or, he is virtuous. That is really singular. Why, I should like to know, why h» goes there. Do (pray do) go with us. Yes, indeed/ No, indeed! You do not know them. yes I da He has no book. Yeshehaa. 12. (Sictt. ©ie t|l eJen fo alt wie er. acir ge^en e 6 en (or fo eScn) ani. Tai bai^te i^ e b e n nic^t. 6 b e n bantm t»itt i^ n'c^t mc^t fd^rei* ben. 13. 3i^ fa'^ i|tt, e^e et mtii^ faS. 34 moc^te ejet 0iebet) jierben, aW fo iebcn. (Er ging nic^t e ^ e t , ali Hi et jle alle gcfe^n ^atte. She is just as old as he. We are just going out That is not exactly what I IIiougLt For that very reason I will not write any longer. 1 saw him before he saw me, I would rather die than to thus. He did not go till (before) he had seen them aU. live ADVERBS AND CONJtrNCTIONB. 251 14. grfl. 6 r (i Jete, iann atJeite. ©ie til e t fl jc:^n Sa^re olt. ffir ^al e t |l ongcfangeit. aSit Berber, e r |i morgen ge^en. J'Vrsi pray, then work. She is only ten years old. He has only just begun. "We shall not ge till to-morrow. 15. etwa. Et i|J t ttta fttttfjis Sa^re alt. |>tEi( ii$ @ie e t to a ieleibigt ? He is ahowl fifty years old. Have I (perhaps) offended you I 16. ©or. §au§, upon tlie house ; as, tetnt SSater, with the father j as, bur^S SBajfer, through the water ; as, furS ®elb, for the money ; D. tm, for in bcm, A. iita, for in bo§, D. bom, for Don bcm. A. borS, for Dor baS, D. Dorm, for uor bem, D. uBenii, for titer bem, A. lUerg, for iiBcr ba§, D. uttteriit. for untcr bent. D. sunt, for ju bcm, D. Swr, for 5u ber. D. :^intcrm, for l^inter bem, as, :^interm >gaufe, behmd the house 5 as, im >§tmntel, in (the) heaven ; as, inS "gauS, into the house ; as, Sent UcBet, from (the) evil ; as, BorS genficr, before the window; as, borm ^^oxe, before the door ; as, tifcernt ffeucr, upon the fire; as, uhaS Sanh, over (the) land ; as, unternt SBaffer, under (the) water ; as, 5um Sluffe, to the river ; as, jur (Stjre, to the honor. § 5. Nouns. (1) In German, as in English, the nouns, that is, the namei of persons and things, are divided into two great classes • viz : Common nouns, which designate sorts, kinds, or classes of objects ; and Proper nouns, which are peculiar to indi- viduals. (2) Under the head of common nouns * are commonly ' I. In German all Nouns, as also all parts of speech when used aa nouns begin with a capital letter. Ex- : 1. 5)ev ©obii, the son ; bie Xocfeter, the daughter, 'i. Sec ®iitf, the good (man) ; bit @ute, the good (woman). 3. SaS "©tltgeii, the singing. 11. The Indefinite .Pronouns. Ex.: 3tmanb, (any body, somebody). Sfbcrmanii, (eveiy body). (StmnS, (anything, something), and SJi^ltS, (nothing). Note, tliat when (Stti) (i 8 and 9J tc^tS are connected with a noun, or with an adjective used as a noun they do not begin with a capital. Ex. : (Sr Iwt ctnjaS SBtob, he has some bread; cc t)at ili(^t8 @uU'8, he haa nothing good. III. The absolute Possessive Pronouns (when used substantively. L 35. 2.) Ex. : 5)ie iUifiiiifitii, (my family) ; iaS iDfeinijie, (my property). IV. The Indefinite Numerals, when used without a substantive. Ex.; fflUfS, 211k, (aU. ; eiuifle, (some) ; Wanttl^r, (n.any a); ^UU, (many). S68 esNDER. S 6. included seieral subdivisions; as Collectiie nouns, which are the names of a plurality of individuals considered as unity ; and abstract nauns, which are the names of certain qualities, or attributes regarded as separate from any given substance. (3) The nouns, both common and proper, as before said, are regularly inflected : exhibiting thus by means of termina- tions the several modifications of gender, number, and case. The numbers and cases will be made sufficiently clear imdei the head of declension of nouns. We here introduce the sub- ject of S 6. Gender. (1) Strictly speaking, the masculine gender belongs ex- clusively to words denoting males ; the feminine to those de- noting females ; and the neuter to such only as, are neither male, nor female. And in English, accordingly, with very little ex- ception, this is found to be actually the case. (2) Not so, however, in German; for there the names of many things without life, from their real, or supposed posses- sion of qualities pertaining to things with life, are considered and treated as masculine, or feminine. Often, moreover, words indicating things without life, are deemed masculine or feminine merely from some resemblance mform to those designating things properly male or female. Hence arises, in Grammar, the distinction between the natural and the grammatical geaAet of words. (3) Were the natural gender alone regarded, it would be necessary only to know the meaning of a word, to know its gender ; but since this is not the case, we are often obliged to determine gender chiefly by the form. We give below, therefore, the principal Rules for determining the gender in V. The Personal Prmunina, 33u, 3&r, (thou, you), &c., when we would listinguish thereby the peraon addressed. VI. ©in, when an adjective, and Ukewise, when pronoun as distinguished i-om th(! article. Ex.: 3* f)§«cr ; &c. adjectives used as nouns; (4n an abstract, and indefinite way;) as, bo8 @ute, baS ®(^onej &c. (3) To the NsuTBB belong a. Those secondary deriva- tives formed by means of the suffixes, d^ en lein fa I, fel, nip, t^unt. 6. Those nouns having the augment g e. § 8. Gender of compounds and foreign words (1) Compounds in general adopt the gender of their last component : as, bie^cff^e, I ^'Z,%7X:it \<^'^-'<^^-'^^-' ber Jltrd^'^of, the church yard ; bcr Q.ii)iaum, (from bie Sid^e, the oak, and ber aSaum, tree;) the oak-tree ; bie SBiJibntu^If, (from bet SCBinb, the wind, and bie SDlu^Ie ; mill ;) the windmill ; iaS diaf^^aui, (from ber Uiafi), council, andbo8<§au8; house ;) the council-house. (2) Foreign words, for the most part, when taken into the German language, retain their original gender. Those, how- ever, that have become fairly Germanized, often take a dif- ferent gender as they take a different form : thus, Ccrpui, (the body,) which, in Latin, is neuter, becomes, in German, ber ^Otper, which is masculine. § 9. Derivation of nounb. (I) To what has been already said (§ 2. (3 ) ) concerning th<5 derivation of nouns, we add here, before entering upon thf subject of Declension, a brief view of those (the secondarv BO-mXES [JSED IN FORMINQ NOtJNS. §10. §11 2Tl ceminfodves) Umt are made by significant suffixes. And that the matter may have the most practical shape, we subjoin a list of the leading suffixes of this class : putting in brackets the equivfjent English terminations, explaining severally their force and use, and illustrating the whole by suitable examples. § 10. SoiJIXES USED IN FORMING NOUNS. SoFPiXES. English etfaivalents. er [e? ier, or, i/er, sen ;] designates (male) persons,' also, agents, or instruments ; ItlQ, oiUnQlJing, astet ,] denotes (often contemptu- ously) persons, animals and things ; tn or inn [ess, ix ;] designates {female) persons ; ti \]/> i"y> '^I'Vi ^'>"y> ^y y] indicates the act, practice, or place of business ; ung [ing, ure, um, ;] signifies the act, or the e !ett fc^aft fal fcl Uin \ing, ure, um ;] \ness, ity, th ; \ness, ity, th ; \ness, ity, th ; [ship, hood, ity ; ) [dom, hood, ity ; ) ■e, cy ; \ ■«. «y ; \ !S, cy ; ) 'tide, cy ; ude, ness. kin, ule, et, let; \ kin, ule, et, let ; ) S 11 " ©anger, aSftrger, Soger, ft -i^ ©c^neiber, IKStner, * eeipjlger,! SBienev, continuing to act; ^lQUO^ qualities, or attributes; express rank, grade, office ; also, unumberoi things taken collectively; often, merely the quality; denote the state, or condi- tion ; also, the quality ; sometimes the result ; indicate diminutiveneas. Examples. a singer ; a citizen ; a sawyer a tailor ; a Roman; a resident of Leipzig ; a Viennese ; Appellatives derived from the names of people often have the tenuina- don c ; as. ber .§? fff. the Hessian ; bet Xmtt, the Turk ; &c. •+ Nouns derived from the name of a city or town, are often used indecli- nably as adjectives. Ex. : 5)a8 Seipjigtc SBier, the Leipzic b«jer. Gren. SJeJ Stipjiger SBierS. S72 EXAMPLES. $11. Kna glu^tlmg, aRieti^Iing, JDit^terltng, ^anfl;ing, l©d|0f[mg, r®rofln, 1 ^elbin, in or inn -^ Jtonigin, ^Profefforin, .Sotoin, JDieBerei, •geud^elei, Sifc^erei, .aSrauetei, iaSete^naig, ©rBouung, ^onung, ness ; a little book' a little boy ; a little stool; a little eggj MCLBNSZOU or COMMOK NOUNS. § 12. 273 (1) It should be observed, in forming derivatives of the Older illustrated above, that when a, o, or «, is contained in the ladical part, it is modified into a, 6, or u, upon receiving any one of the suffixes e r, ling, in, d^ e n, I e i n, e, n 1 1 and f e I; as, in the case of Sanger, (from ?ang,) 3?iirger, (from SBurg,) and others of the V.ke kind. (2) Often, moreover, in forming secondary derivalives certain euphonic letters are inserted between the suffix and the word to which it is added ; as, i g in SJeud^tigfeit, humidity. Other letters employed in this way, are c n, n and t. These euphonic parts are easily distinguished from those having an influence on the meaning, by merely resolving the derivative into its elements. (3) Here, too, may be noted the particle g e, which being prefixed to certain primary words, forms a class of nouns denoting either frequence/ of action, or a collection of things. These words, also, most commonly suffix the letter e j Oercbe, constant talk; ®tl]evil, frequent crying; ©cBtrge, a range of hills, are examples. § 12. Declension of common nouns. (1) In German there are two declensions, distinguished aa the. Old and the If'ew. The characteristic of each is the termi- nation of the genitive singular. In the former, the genitive is formed from the nominative by adding e 8 or 3 j when other- wise formed, the noun is of the new declension. (2) To the old declension belong almost all masculine and neuter nouns ; that is, by far the greater part of all the nouns m the language. (3) ■ In both declensions, the nominative, genitive and accu- eativc plural are, in form, alike ; while the dative terminatea always in the letter n. Unless, therefore, the word under de- clension already ends in that letter, it is, in the dative^ uni- formly assumed. (4) All feminine nouns are invaiiable in the singular ; in the plural, they are, for the most part, inflected according to the new declension. 12* J i THE OLD DECLENSION. § 13. y5) In compounds, the last word only is subjected to the nations of declension. § 13. OLD DECLENSION. TERMINATIONS. Singular. Plural. NOMINAIIVB 1 (5; -»), GENITIVE ti or i, (see 3). e. DATIVE e or like nom. en (9). ACCUSATIVE e. SINGULRR NUMBER. (1) Feminine nouns in the singular number are not m. fleeted ; those of the other genders ending in e, cl, en, er, ^cn and Icin, add i in the genitive ; the dative and accusative being like the nominative : N. ter ©potcn, the spade; tag ffiiic^Ieln, the book; G. ieS ®))aten-g, of the spade ; ieg 33u(^Iein-3, of the book ; D. iem ©paten, to the spade; bent 35u(|(eln, to the book; A. ben ©paten, the spade ; tai Siic^letn, (L. XXIV. 1) (2) Nouns of the oM declension which do not end in e, et, en, er, d^en and lein, add a (see 3) in the genitive, and e (see 3) in the dative ; the accusative remaining like the nominative : N. baS Sd^r, the year ; bcr Saum, the tree ; G. beg 3a|r-e3, of the year; beS Saum-eS, of the tree; D. bem3a^r-c, to, for the year; bem S3aum-e, to, for the tree; k. bag Sii^i", the year ; ben Saum, the tree. N. bag 9)utt, the desk ; ber ©tat)I, the steel ; Gr. beg f)urt-eg, of ';he desk ; teg ©tal)l-eg, of the steel ; D. bem $ult-c, to, for the desk; bem ©tat)t-c, to, for thestoel; A., bag ?)urt, tha desk; ben ©tat)(, the steel. (3) The e of the genitive and dative is often omitted in words not ending in el, en, er, d)en, lein. Its omission or re- tention is to be determined by euphony a] "-^e. In nouns of THE OLD DECLENSION. § 13. 215 two or more syllables, unless the last one he under the full accent, c is commonly omitted in the genitive, and sometimes also in the dative ; as, bcS ^onigS, tern ^ijnig, instead of bc3 Konlgc^, iem jliinige. FORMATION OF THE PLURAL. (4) Nouns ending in c, cl, en, et, c^en and leitt, have ihe «ame form in the plural as in the singular : Singular. Plurul. Singular. Plural, bcr ©paten, tte ©paten ,• baa SSiii^Wn, Me Siic^tein; Icr ©c^Iojfer, Me ©i^Iojfer; iasSKittel, Me SJlittcI. Exceptions, a. The following take tlie umlaut (L. 2. IL) : Sttjfel, liatttntel, ^anbcl, SPtangel, mxiAtl, 9J«tti; Jtagel, ©attet, ©($na6et, SJogel, gaben, Oarten, ®ta5en, liafcn, Dfen, ©c^aben, SCcfer, Sruber, ^lam- met, ©c^waget, SSater, ^lol^tt; as, ber Slffct, the apple; bU Stepfel, th« apples etc. 6. ^lagen, 3)lagen and SBagen, also, sometimes take the umlaut in the plurah (5) Neuter nouns not ending in e, el, en, er, i^en, tein, form their plural by adding e : oas 3a|r, tie Sci^r-e ; ta? ©tiid, bie ©tiicf-e ; fcaag)ult, Me55urt-c; baa ©e^af, bie ©c^af-c. Exceptions, a. gtop and Sllo'^r take the umlaut ; Soot has the regular form SSootc, or SBote. b. The following neuter nouns add er in the plural, and those capable of it take the umlaut : 9ta«, Stmt, Sttb, SBilb, Slau, Su(|, ®a(|, 2)orf, ®t, Stt#, gap, %d\>, ®elb, ®emut|, ®t\&,\t&it, ©eftcnjl, ©!««, ^'ieb, ®r(i6, ®ra«, ®ut, «irt«i)t, |)aue, |)»fpttal, $ufn, SaI6, Jfaraifol, Jftno, wlcib, Sotn, firaut, Camm, t'itb, 8c($, 3RauI, 3?e|^, 3)arlawEnf, f fanb, SRob, ajcgiment, SKeia, SRinb, ®^Ii!§, S^wert, ©Dital, S|al, Self, SBett ; as, ba« Stmt, the office ; bie Stemtir, the offices, etc. " All nouns, also, ending in l^um, masculine as well as neuter, add er and take the umlaut ; as, ber SJlet^t^um, bie gieid)tpm e t jc. (6) Masculine nouns not ending in e, el, en, er, form thew plural hy adding e, and taking the umlaut, if capable of it: 276 THE OLD DECLENSION. § 13. icrSaum, iicSaumc; terStu^l, Me ©hillej ttxStoii, klc^^e; ber SBaH, tie Sattc. Exceptions, a. The foUowing add er : Sofemtii^t, Horn, ®ei|l, dim, Stii, 3Kttmi, Drt, SRaiib Sormunb, SBalb, Sutm; as, bn £)OTn, the thorn; bie 3)5rneT, the thorns etc. 6. The foUowing reject the umlaut : STal, Star, Sltenb, Stmbog, Stnttalt, Sinn, tiaijt, S)oI^, Sorf^, €ibttm, ®t- nu^l, ®tab, §oMc§t, Sialm, liauc^, |>erjog, §uf, $unb,fiai)ttan,So6oIb, flotf, Btanic^, Saat, Seid^nam, 8uc^«, 3WoIc^, aKonat, SDJonb, 5Ki)ri), 3>ftti), 9)ropf, 9)ul«, g>untt, ©olm, ©^aft, ©^u^, ©taor, ©toif, log, StuntEtiioIb, Hn^ott, aJielprag, SEBiebe^ct)f, Soil (inch); as, in %al, the eel; tie tale, the eels; etc. (*!) Feminine nouns ending in futtft and Itif , as also iliose of the following list, form their plural by adding e, and taking the umlaut, if capable of it : Slngfl, 3lu«flu(^t, m, Sanf, SBraut, Sntjl, %an% gruc^t, ®ani, ■#ruft, ©ef^wulfi, ipanti, §aut, ^luft, «roft, ^ui, ^un^, 2ou«, Suft, Sufi, ma6^t, a«agB, SiKaug, 5«adit, 5Ra^t, 5Rot|, sRu^, ©au, ©(^tittr, ©tait, aSanb, fBcft, aBurji, Sunft, 3ufammcnlunft. (8) The two nouns SHutter and Soi^ter form their plural by- taking the umlaut. DECLENSION or NOUNS IN THE PLURAL. (9) Nouns whose plural ends in en, have all cases in this number alike ; those of other terminations have the genitive and accusative like the nominative, and add n in the dative : N. Me ©paten, the spades; Me 33ii(^Ietn, the books, L. 24 ; G. bcr ©paten, of the spades; ber S3tt(|Ietn, of the books; I), ten ©paten, to the spades ; ben Su(^Icin, to the books ; A. bic ©paten, the spades; btc Siii^Iein, the books. N. bte S85ume, the trees ; Me 5^ulte, the desks , (t. ber Siiume, of the trees; ber 55ulte, of the desks; D. ben SSiinnte-n, to the trees; ben ^Julte-n, to the desks ; A. ble Siiuine, the trees ; bie 9)ulte, the desks. IHK NEW DECLENSION. § 14. m S 14. The new declension. TERMINATIONS. Singular. Plural. Nom. . {11 or n. Gen. en or n. * en or n. Dat. en or n. — ^ — en or n. Ace. en or n. en or n. Singular. i. 3er ®raf, the count ; Gr. ieS ©rafen, of the count; D, bem Orafen, to the count; A. ben ©rofen, the count. N. ber ffaffe, the falcon ; Q. beS Sdlf en, of the falcon ; D. bcm ffallen, to the falcon ; A. ben Salfen, the falcon. (1) Feminine nouns which are indeclinable in the singular, are, for the most part, of this declension, f Those ending in the suffix t n, in the singular, double the n in the plural. These last are, also, often written with the double n in the singular : as, .gelbmn, a heroine. Plural. bte ©rafen, the counts ; ber ©rofen, of the counts ; ben ©rafen, to or for the counts; bie ©rafen, the counts. bte 5(iH«n, the falcons ; ber ffalfen, of the falcons; ben Salfen, to the falcons ; bie SciHen, the falcons. Singular. N. bteS^uIb, J the debt; G. ber ©d|ulb, of the debt ; D. ber ©djulb, to the debt ; A. bie ©d^ulb, the debt. Plural. bie ©d^ulben, the debts ; ber ©c^ulben, of the debts ; ben ©djulben, to the debts ; bie ©c^ulbcn, the debts. » When the smg(ilar ends in c, e I, a v or e t!, the plural takes rt only. t S£R II 1 1 c r, mother, and S 4 1 c t, daughter, are the only feminine nouns tha' have the terminations of the Nom., Gen. and Ace. plural Uke the singu- lar- They add n to the dative. % Feminine nouns, it will be remembered, have no variations of declension in the singular. As exceptions to this rule, however, some examples remain (vestiges of the ancient mode of declension), in which the Gen and Dat. ap- pear under the government of a preposition and varied by tenninations._ Thus : mit or in ©ferfit, with or in respect or honor : @bren, from (Site j auf ©vken, on earth: ©rbcn, from ®rtc ; niit Steuben, with joy: gveubeu, from gccube ; »on or (liif ©etttn, on the part of: ©eiten, from ©tite. The ending of the Gemtive ia sometimes, also, retained, when the word is under the goverrmient of a noun succeeding. Thus, SieS ijl meinet Staufo gitmeftcr, mis is my wife's sister. 2*<8 OBSERVATIONS ON THE DECLENSION, ifeC. § IS. N. bie'girtin, the shepherdess; bte •§irtlnncn, the sheperdesses ; G. iev <§lrttn, of the shepher- ber >§trtinneit, of the shepher- dess; desses; D. bev •§irtin, to the shepher- ben >§n:tinncn, to the shepher- dess ; desses ; A. bie ■girtin, the shepherdess. bie<§irtmneit,theshepherdesses. $ 15., Observations on .the declension op common nouns (1) Some have ko singular : as, 5leltern (©Item), parents. 5[^nftt, ancestors. 5IIl3cn, alps. 5tnnaten, first fi-uits. 93ein!Ieiber, small- clothes. Slattern, small-pox. a3vieff(^afien, letters, papers. Stnfunjte, revenue, gajicn, Lent, fasts, gericn, Holidays. f?uf jia^jfen, footsteps, ©ebriiber, brothers. ©cfciUe, rents. ® efci^ttiifler, brothers and sisters, ©tiebmof en, the limbs. •§anbel, quarrels, ^cfen, dregs, yeast. •§ofcn, trowsers. Sn^gnien, marks, badges. iRalbaunen, entrails. .ffojien and Unfojien, costs. .ffriegStaufte, events of war. Seute, * people, folks. 33Jafem and SRot^cIn, measles. SKcItcn, whey. Djtern, Easter. 5Pftngjien, Whitsuntide. JRanfe, tricks. JRetireffalien, reprisals. ©c^raulen, bounds. @^3efen, expenses. ©Jjortein, fees. ©))oIien, spoils, ©tubien, studies. !J!ra6er or !?re6er, husks, lees. STriimmer, ruins. SruiJ^jen, troops. SBei^nac^ten, Christmas. 3eitlaufte, events of the times. 3tnfen, interest of money. * ?fntc merely expresses plurality of persons. In this it differs from 9)!cii= fd)sii, {.human beings) whicn has regard to the kind or epecies, as also from SDliinutr (men) which denotes particularly the sex. Those compounds, how- ever, of which, in the singular. SJinuii fonns the last part, take generally, ic the plural, SJciite instead of iBlnniicr; thus. Singular. Plural. SltbfitSmiimi, workman ; SltbEitSltiitf. workpeople, ©bfliiiiimi, nobleman ; (Sbelleulc, noblemen. Jtaufnuiiiil, merchant; J?rtiiflciite, merchants. Sanbmaim. countryman ; Saubleitte, counti-ypeople. The distinctive diflerence between Sf life and 9JJ(in«cv may be forcibly shown by reference to the words (Sfcelciitc and GljeuiSiiner: )feu, hops ; ^reffe, cresses ; &c. d. All infinitives employed as nouns, as also all neuter ad- jectives so employed; as, SeBen, life; SSerlnngcn, wish; baS SGei^ white; &c. e. Nouns, for the most part, denoting quantity, number, weight or measure ; * as, Sunb, bundle ; §ont, ^orne, sorts of horn; .gorner, horns (more than one). baS >gcl5, 'Solje, sorts of wood ; •giiljer, pieces of wood * It should be noted that words expressing quantity, number, weight or measure, even if qualified by numerals signifying miyre than one, are rarely found in the plural. Thus, in German, we say, m'llii .(llnfrtr, nine fathoms; (junbcrt (^kai, a hundred degrees; Sec, where, though the numeral expresses "iiore than one, the noun of measure is still in the singular number. Note, however, that feminines ending in e and words denoting periods of time, as also the names of coins, are, in general, excepted from the rule given in the note preceding. t The singular of this is bii8 {neuter) SBani. Irom bet S3(ini, we have an- other form; Snilbe volumes. 280 FOREIGN K0UN8 OF THB OI.B SKCLENSION. § 16. § 1^« bcr Cabeit, Soben, shutters ; CSben, shops. baS i2anb, S?anbe, regions ; Sanbcr, states. baS aSo^, 3Ka^Ie, marks, seasons ; 3Jttt^Ier, meals, ber 3Monn, aWaniwr, men ; aKanncn, vassals, ber 3Kanb, 3Konben, months ; SRonbe, planets, ber Drt, Orte, places (any) j Dertct, places (parti- cular), bte ©au, ©auen, wild boars ; ©Sue, swine, ber ©c^itb, ©d^ilbe, shields ; ©djilbcr, * sign-boards, bie ®^nur, ©d^niire, tapes ; ©c^mtren, daughters- in-law. ber (Straufl, ©trau^e, nosegays ; ©trau^en, ostriches. bo8 SBort, SBoiter, words (more than SBprte, words (in con- one) ; struction) bet 3»tt/ 3cHe, inches ; QbUt, tolls. § 16. Foreign nouns. (1) Some nouns introduced into the German from foreigo languages, retain their original terminations unaltered : as, bet 5IRebicu3, a physician ; plur. STOebici, physicians ; factum, deed; Sacta, deeds. (2) Some masculines and neuters from the French and tha English, merely affix 6 to the genitive singular, which is re- tained in all the cases of the plural ; as, bet ?orb, gen. beS SptbSj plur. bie SotbS ; bcr K{;ef ; gen. beg 6^ef3 ; plur. bie K§ef§. (3) But foreign nouns, for the most part, drop the termi- nations pecuHar to the language whence they come, and sub- stitute those characteristic of the German. Some, accordingly, are found to be dechned after the old declension, some after the new, and others, again, partly after the one and partly af- ter the other. § 17. Foreign nouns of the old declension. (1) Foreign nouns of the neuter gender, as also most of tha masculines, are of the old declension. * k the singular, ita @$iU. rORBIOK NOUHS OF THE NEW DECLENSION. § 18. 281 (2) Among the masculines must be noted those appella ticms of persons ending in ol; as, .Karbinol, cardinal, or; as, SRotor, notary. an ; as, .Rojiellan, casteUan. oner; as, JDpminifaner dominican. iner; as, aScnebiftiner, benedictine. To which add mt, mxoiii% 5Pa^)fl, JBifdEiof, SWn^or, r3; plur. ©octoren; — thirdly, neuteral ending in o t, it and u m, which, also, often have t before the e n of the plural ; as, ^ajjttal, plur. Jtctpttalien ; Sofftl, plur. Soffitten; ©tubium, plur. ©tubtcn; — fourthly, the following masculines, QtjiertSf, 3)tainant, ffafati, ^apaun, 3m^)ort, .Rcnful, fflfugfel, spantoffcl, SPrafcft, 5PfaIm, aiuBln, ©taat, S^or, Sraftat, 3in3 ; to which add Snfeft, Qltont, SPronom, ©tatut and SBert which are neuters. § 20. Declension of proper nouns, in the singular number. (1) Names of males and females, except when the lattei tei-minate in e, take S to form the genitive, which is their only vaiiation ; * as, N. ^einrid^, (SlifaBet^, G. ^cinri^S, ®fifa6et^8, D. ^einrid^, glifatet^ A. <§einri(^. glifatet:^. (2) Names of females ending in e, as also of males ending in 8, ^, f (f), r, or 5, form the genitive in e n 6 ; f as, N. Suife, MM% iBo^, G. :2utfen3, fet6ni^en§, SSojTenS , % D. Suife, Mlm%, SJo^, A. Suife, IS?et6iii^, SSpf. * It is customary with same Vritere to ai]ix c n to the dative and accusative jf proper names ; but a better usage distinguishes these cases by prefixing the article; as, tiffing; gen. ?effiiifl«; dat. fctm Sefftng (instead of Sefftngcn) ; ace. >fn ?efitii() (instead of Scffinflcii). t The genitive, dative and accusative of names ending in a, are sometimes formed by adding respectively c 11 « and e n, after dropping the a ; as, 33iana : gen. 5>iniieu8 ; dat. 'Siniien ; ace. SJiancn. t The termination e n e sometimes suffers contraction ; as, SBjg'J, 8et6ntt'«, PROr'F.R NAMES OF COCKTllIES, CITIES, JiC. § 21. § 22. 289 (3) Names whether qf males or females, when preceded 6y an article, are indeclinable ; as, N. ber ©d^itter, ble J?ulfe ; G. beS iiroi>e§; a piece of fn^sb bread. In a few adverbieil phrases, however, the old foj m is still generall) ised ; as, guteS 3J!iit^6 ; of good courage. 288 Bulk. $ 30. § 31. declinable (see L. XIV. 3) it follows the Old form of dadenfflon • thus, N. G. D. A. N. G. D A. Masc. Sing. gutcr Soter, guteS (en) aSatcrS gutem aSater, guten aSater. Plural., gutc 9}dter, guter SSoter, guten aSatern, gutc aSater. Fern. Sing. gute anuttcr, gutcr abutter guter SKutter, gute SKutter. Plural. gute SKutter, guter 3JJittter, guten SOliittcrn, gute SMittter. Neut. Sing. gutcS ®clb, guteS (en) ©clbeS, |utem ©elbe, guteS ®elb. Plural. gute ®clbet, guter ©elber, guten ©elbcm, gutc ©clbcr. (1) The following are examples, in which the adjective in •each instance is preceded by a word, either undeclined or in- dwlinable (§33): (StmaS guter SBcin, some good wiue. aSiel ftifd^e SKitd^, much fresh milk. aCBenig falteg SBolTcr a little cold water. ©e^r gute SWenfd^cn, very good men. ®enug rotter SBein, enough red wine. ffiinf langc Sa^re, five long years. 9iaerlel fu^c %xu^t, all kinds of sweet fruit $ 30. The nbw declension. TERMINATIONS. Singular. Plural. Masc, Fern. Neva. For aU gender* Nona. t. t. e. en. Gen. en. en. en. en. Dat. en. en. en. en. Ace. en. e. e. ea S 31. Rule. (1) When immediately preceded and restricted by the de- ft>dte article, by a relative or demonstrative pronoun, or by an RULE. S 31, 289 indefinite numeral {declined after the ancient form *J, the ad- jective follows the new form of declension : thus, Masc. Sing. Fern. Sing. Neut. Sing. bie gute grau, baS gute Jliitb, ber gutcit grau, beS guten .ffinbee, ber guten iJrau, bent guten Jltnbe, bte gute grau. bag gute. Jlinb. Plural. Plural. bie guten jjrauen, bie guten JJinbet, ber guten Srauen, bet guten ^tnber, ben guten ffrauen, ben guten Jltnbecn, bie guten ?h:auen. bie»guten Jtinber. N. ber gute SWann, G, beg guten 3Hanne8, D, beni guten SDlanne, A. ben guten aWann. Plural. N. bie guten 3KSnncr, G-. ber guten 3Kanner, D. ben guten 3Rannern, A. bie guten 3KSnner. Singular. Plural. Masculine. N. biefer fd^one ©arten, biefe fd^onen ©arten. G. btefeS f^onen ©artenS, biefer fc^cnen ©arten. D. biefem fd^oncn ©arten, blefen f(f)6nw ©arten. A. biefen fci^6nen ©orten, biefe f(^6nen ©orten. Feminine. N. mUit fc^one astume, toetd^e fdEjonen f aSIumen, G. hjeld^er fd^onen Slume, toeld^er fi^onen SBIumen. D. metc^e* fd^onen SSIume, meld^en fc^onen SBIumen. A. mlii' fijbm aSIume, ' toelc^e f(f)6nen f Slumen. * 5) n 8, )Mewever, the neuter of the definite article, differs from the old form, in having §aug, unfre guten .gaufer. * See note page 105, also 2d note, page 289. 292 FUBTHKR OBSERVATIONS ON ADJBCTIVES. $ 34. Singular. Plural. S. bit gutc SKutter, i^r gutcn STOutter. G. belner (ber*) gutenSKutter, euer guten SWutter. 0. bir guten SKutter, eucf| guten SKuttem. 4.. bi^ gute SWutter, eud^ guten SWutter. § 34. Further observations on adjectives. (1 ) When several consecutive adjectives come before and j[iialify the same noun, each has the same form, which accord- ing to the preceding rules, it would have, if standing alone; as, guter, rotter, lautrer 9Bein, good, red, pure wine; bie relfe, fd^6ne, gute Sru^t, the ripe, beautiful, good fruit. (2) But when of two adjectives which relate to the same noun, the second forms with the noun an expression for a single idea, which the first qualifies as a whole, the second adjective takes (except in the nom. sing, and in nom. and aoc. plural) the new form of declension ; as, niit trodht e m tod^ c n ©anb, with dry white sand ; where white sand, that is, sand which is white, is said also to be dri/. (3) When two or more adjectives termmating ahke, precede dnd qualify the same noun, the ending of the former is occa- sionally omitted ; such omission being marked by a hyphen ; as, eiii rctf;= (for xot^tS) unb iteif e§ ©cfid^t, a red and white face; bit fd^hjars'tot^^golbene ffa'^ne, the black red golden banner. (4) Participles are declined after the manner of adjectives : thus, bcr geliette 33niber, the beloved brother ; gen. beS geliet" ten 33ruber8, &c. (5) Adjectives, in German, as in other languages, are, by ellipsis, often made to serve in place of nouus. They then be- gin with a capital letter, and, excepting that they retain the forms of declension peculiar to adjectives, are in all respects treated as nouns. Their gender is made apparent either by their terminations or by the presence of an article or other defini- tive : as, ein JDeutf^cr, a German ; biefer 35eutfd;e, this Ger- * Note that aTter the personal pronouns, in the genitive case, the article must he used ; as, bfiiicr, bcr gutcu SUsitter ; of thee, the good mother. EUPHONIC CHANGES. § 35. § 36. 293 man ; bie 5)eutfd§e, the German woman ; baS ®d^5ne, the beauti- ful; baS ®Ute, the good; that is, that which is beautiful ; that which is good. So, also, ba3 5Bei^, the white ; baS Orim, the green ; ba§ fRot^, the red ; &c. (8) When of two adjectives preceding a noun, the fii-st is employed as an adverb to qualify the second, the former is not declined : thus, ein gang neucS <&au3, a house entirely new : not cin g o n 5 e 8 neueS <&au8, which would mean, an en- tire, new house. § 35. Comparison of adjectives. (1) In G-erman, as in English, the degrees of comparison are commonly expressed by means of the suffixes e t and ( jl ! thus. Positive. Comparative. Superlative. totib, wUd; totlber, wilder; hillbefi, wildest feft, firm; fcftfl^j firmer; fefiep, firmest, orcij^ bold; brei|ier, bolder; brelpejt, boldest, to 8, loose; I«>f«l, looser; Ioftnfai) or bterfaltig, fourfold or having four folds, &c. S 48. Vaeiative Numerals. Variatives, which answer to the question ; " Of how many kinds ? " are formed from the cardinals by affixing I e I (o sort or kind), the syllable e r being inserted for the sake of eupho- ny ; thus, einerlei, of one kind ; feiererlel, of four kinds ; p>mxh\, of two kinds ; fiinferlei, of five kinds ; brcierlei, of three kinds ; inand^erlei, of many kinds ; &» § 49. DiMIDIATIVE NUMBIIALS. The dimidiatives, which answer to the question : " Which. n. e. which of the numbers) is but a half? " are formed from the ordinals by annexing the word '^alfi (half) ; thus, 5h)eite^ot6, f the second a half, that is, one whole and a half; li. btitte^ot6, third a half, i. e. two wholes and a hait ; 2^. 'akxt(f)ali, the fourth a half, i. e. three wholes and a half ; 3^; &c. * @inf(iUtg is applied to what is simple, artless or silly. t Instead of jmeitefiafb, the word in common use is anssrt^ntlj ; the par a 11 1) e 1 1 being from ber aiibere, the second. The word trould be ait* in e ^t tiit, one valued at three, i. e. a coin of 3 pfenniga Prussian ; 6 1 f e r, eleven-er, i. e. wine of the year 1811 ; 3 tD i I H n g, two-ling, i. e. a twin, &c. • 3JJ a I is Bometin-.es separated ftom the numerals, and is then regularlj declined as a neuter i 3un. 806 ifUMBEALS. S 52. S 63. S 52. Paetitives or Fsactionals, UnJer this name (partitives) are embraced a class of neutei tmxms, answering to the question : " What part ? " wHct are formed by affixing to the ordinals the suffix t { I f (part) : thus, 3) r i 1 1 e r, a third ; a §, some ; which is indeclinable. g a n 5, the whole, as opposed to a part ; declined generally like an adjective ; mdeclinable, however, when placed be- fore neuter names of places and not preceded by an ar- ticle or pronoun ; as, ganj 3)eutf(^Iattb, all Gei-many ; (with the article or pronoun preceding) baS ganje 3)eutfd^Ianb, the whole of Germany ; fcin ganjer Sleid^t^um, his whole riches. 6 a ( 6, half, follows the same law, in declension, as the word gan5 above. t !E f I is sioiply a rontracted form of the word SI f) e i I, a part. From 20 DBwards, note that (i e I (instead of t c I) is added ; as, jWanjigjlel, the twea- tenth, &c. INDEFINITK NUMEBALS. § 53. 307 (3) Those denoting number and quantity both, are a 1 1 e r all t, al\ ^ i, all ; applied to quantity, in the singu- la • only ; as, alkr SHeldEit^um, all riches ; alle aWati^t, all power J aHeS (Sofe, all gold ; biefeS oHeS (not oHe) tBttl iii) geten, all this will I give ; toeld^eS oHeS, all which. Pla- ced before a pronoun, which latter is followed by a noun, the terminations of declension are often omitted ; as, all (for aEe§) btefeS ®elb, all this money ; aH (for oiler) biefer SBein, all this wine. In the neuter of the singular, it often denotes an indefinite number or amount ; as, aEeS, tottS relfen f ann, reifet, all that can travel, do travel ; er fd^eint otteg ju triffen, he seems to know everything. In the plural, the word denotes number ; as, oHe 3Menfd§cn, all men ; on ollcn Drten, in all places : — it is never used in the sense of whole, which is expressed by gonj ; as, bet gonje !tag, the whole day ; nor is it followed, as in Eng- lish, by the definite article ; as, ollc§ ®elb (not oHeS boS ®elb), all the money ; — finally, the phrases " all of us," " all of you," &c., are in German : Ujlr oUe, we all, &c. The plural is used like our word every ; as, id^ ge^e otte Sfoge, I go every day. flnlger, elnige, einlgeS, some ; few ; applied to num- ber in the plural only. ( 1 1 i d^ e t, — e, — eS, some ; synonymous with einlger. J e i n, I e I n e, f c i n, no ; none ; declined Uke etn, elite, etn ; as, f ein 3Soter, feme UKutter, fein Jliitb ; when employed as a noun, it takes the old form of declension ; as, felner ttx olten 3Sere^rer, none of the ancient worshippers. fammtltd^cr, — e, — eS, entire ; ) regularly declined like gefommter, — e, — e8, „ ) adjectives. Kiel, mu^h ; (in the plural) many ; when it expresses quan- tity or number, taken collectively, and is not preceded by an article or a pronoun, it is not declined : aSj tjlel ®olb, much gold ; but, bfl§ iJtelc ®olb, the quantity of gold ; — when applied to a number as individuals, it is regularly declined : as, tiieler, »tele, DieleS, &c. ; thus, biele Channel 808 TABLE OP THfi PKOKODNS. § 54. § 55. finb trage, many men are mdolent ; er f)at fe^r Sieli Sreunbe unb ic^ ^o6e aud^ » i e I e, he has a great man) friends and I have also a great many. m e It i g, little ; (in the plural) few ; follows the same rules of inflection as bid above. m e ^ r, more ; ) are indeclinable ; for the plural of me^, h) e n t g e r, less ; j however, see above. g e n u g, enough ; sufficient ; never declined ; ®elb genug, mo- ney enough. ( a u t e r. merely; only; never declined ; tautet Jli^jfci:, copper only or nothing but copper. It t d^ t 3, nothing. § 54. PRONOUNS. In German, as in other languages, vrill be found a nimiber of those words, which, for the sake of convenience, are em- ployed as the dh-ect representatives of nouns. These are the pronouns. They are'divided, according to the particular o£Scea which they perform, into six different classes : viz. : Personal, Possessive, Demonstrative, Determinative, Relative and Inter- rogative. § 55. Table of the Pronouns. Personal Pronouns. Possessive Prtmouni. Singular. Plural. Singular. Plural 3c^, I. SBtr, We. SKein, My. Unfet, Our. JDu, Thou. 3:^r, Ye. JDein, Thy. ffiuer, Your. ®r, He. @le, They. ®ettt, His. 3^r, Their. ©te, She. ®le, They. 3^r, Her. @8, It. ©ie, They. ©eitt, Its. Indefinite Pronouns. Reflexive and Red^troeal SDtan, one ; a certain one. Pronouns. Scntanb, someone; somebody. @ld^, Himself, Herself, SRlemaitb, no one ; nobody. Itself, Themselves Sebmnantt, every one ; everybody. ©ttaitbet, one another. PERSONAL PRONOUNS. $ 66. 80fc Demonstrative Pronouns. Determinative Prcmmms. 3)tefer This. f0 (old gen. plural of et, he), were used instead of (San (.your) and 3br (.her) ; as, 3^ro aUajc^at, her majesty, &c^ Gutv was Formerly written eWft, and the syllable (5w. as an abbreviation is used in address to persons of high rank, with the verb in the plural. Ex. @i». Sltajcilat baben ficfo^Ien, your majesty has ordered. t Note that in declining utifct and ciicr, the e, before t, is often struck ouf Uius, unfvev (for iiufcrcr), unfrc (for uiifctc), utifreS (for uttfetfS), &c riivfr (for euciet), eutf (for euere), tures (for tueteJ), Sm. POBBBSSITE FBONOUNS. $ 68. Slj Singular. Plural Masti. Fern. Neul. For all genders N. meln, ratine, meln; metne. Q. melneS, meiner, metneS ; melnet. D. meinem, melner, meinem ; meinen. A.. meinen, meine, meln; melne. (4) When, however, these pronouns are absolute, that l., when they stand alone, agreeing with a noun understood and demanding a special emphasis, the terminations proper to the three places noted above, are of course affixed : thus, biefer •Sut iji mcin e r, nid^t bein e r, this hat is mine, not thine ; bte« feS a3ud^ i^ meln e §, this book is mirw. (5) But when a possessive pronoun absolute is preceded by the definite article, it then follows the New form of declen- sion : thus. N. G. D. A. Masc. ber meinc, bc8 meinen, bem meinen, ben meinen, Singular. Fern. ble metne, ber meinen, ber meinen, ble melne. Neut. baS melne ; beS meinen ; bem meinen ; boS melne ; (6) Often, too, in this case, the syllable I g without any change of meaning : thus, Shigular. Masc. Fern. Neui. N. ber melnige, ble melnlge, baS melnlge ; G. beS mclnlgen, ber melnlgen, beS melnigen ; D. bem melnigen, ber melnlgen, bem melnlgen ; A. ben melnlgen, ble melnlge, baS melnlge ; (7) When, finally, a possessive pronoun is employed as a predicate, and merely denotes possession, without special em- phasis, it is not inflected at all ; thus, ber ©arten Iji meln, the garden is mine ; ble ©tu6e Iji beln, the room is thine ; bad ^au8 Iji feln, the house is his. 14 Plurau For all genders. ble meinen. ber meinen. ben meinen. ble meinen. is mserted, but Plural. For all genders, ble melnigen. ber melnlgen. ben melnlgen. ble melnlgen. 314 INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. % 59. (8) It should be added that tue Germans, when no cA Jti rity is likely to grow out of it, often omit the possessive pro- noim, where in English it would be used : the definite article seeming sufficiently tc supply its place ; as, Sd^ ^afce e§ in ben •§anben, I have it in the hands ; that is, I have it in my hands (Sr naf)m eS auf bie ©c^ultmt, he took it upon the (his) shoul ders ; Sr ^at ben Sinn ge6roc^en, he has broken (the) an arm or his arm S 69. Indefinite Pronouns. (1) Pronouns employed to represent persons and things in a general way, vrithout reference to particular individuals, are called indefinite pronouns. Such are these, Wan, one ; a certain one. Sentanb, some one ; somebody. SJiemanb, no one ; nobody. Sebennann, * every one ; everybody. (2) The German man (hke the French on) is used to in- dicate persons in the most general manner : thus, man fagt, one says ; that is, they , people say, it is said, &c. It is in- declinable, and is found only in the n( .inative ; when, there- fore, any other case would be called for, the corresponding oblique case of e t n is employed : thus, er h)iE e i n e n nie ^Oren, he will never hsten to one, i. e. to any one. (3) Semanb and 9iiemanb are declined in the following maimer : Singular. N. Semonb, somebody. yikman'ti, nobody. G. SemanbS or 3emanbe§. SiJiemanbS or DliemanseS, D. Semanb or Semanbem. aiiemanb or Sliemmbem. A. Semonb or Semanben. ^Jiemanb or SUiemanben. * The followins, which also belong to this list of indefinites, hav« a!ieGd| »eni treated of unaer the head of indefinite numerals : viz. StrooS, something. 3cglici)ev, each; everyone. SlicJtS, nothing. (Sintjje, somewhat; some. Reiner, no one; none. ©tlidpe. some; many. (Siner, one ; some one. SlUcr, every one ; aU. Srter, each; every one. SKatiltiet, many a; itany ; sereisL 3fbwebet each; every one RKFUSXINTE AND RECIPROCAL PRONOCKS. $ 60. 3iS 3tbenitann is declined thus : N. Seberntann, everybody. G. SeberaionnS, of eveiybody. D. Sebeniiaim, to everybody. A. Stbermann, everybody. ^4) Note that the second form of the dative (I3emarJ)etn, (Rtemanbem) is seldom employed except when the other fcrm vould leave the meaning ambiguous. Thus, eS ift SItctnanbem nii|Iid^, it is useful to nobody ; where, were „3licmanb" used, the sense might be, nobody is useful. This remark applies, also, to the accusative : as, fie lieJt dtientonben, she loves no- body : in which instance, were the other form (0ltenianb) sub- stituted, it might mean, nobody loves her. § 60. Reflexive and Reciprocal Pronouns. (1) When the subject and the object of a verb are iden- tical, the latter being a personal pronoun, the pronoun is said to be reflexive ; because the action is thereby represented as reverting upon the actor : thus, er ril^mt ff(^, he praises him^ self. (2) When, however, in such case, the design is to represent the individuals constituting a plural subject as acting one upon another, the pronoun is said to be reciprocal : thus, fie Sefdjim* >)fcn ftd^, they disgrace one another. (3) But, as (for example) fie Befd^imipfen fld^ may equally mean, they disgrace themselves, the reciprocal word einanber (one another) is added to or substituted for ffc^, wherever there is danger of mistake ; as, fie serjie^en ffd^ einanber, or fie t)erficl;cn einanber, they understand one another. (i) In the dative and accusative (singular and plural) the German afferds a special form for the reflexives ; viz. flc^, him- self, herself, itself, themselves. The personal pronouns, there- fore, in all ths oblique * cases, are used in a reflexive sense ; except in the dative anil accusative (third person), where, in- stead of i^m, i^n, i^r jc, the word f i d^ is employed. Re- • All cases, ijcept the nominative, are called oblique cases 316 DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. % 61. garded as reflexives, the personal pionouns are declined thus : Singular, Plural First person. N. None. None. Q. meiner, of myself unfer, of ourselves. D. mir, to myself. un8, to ourselves A. mic^, myself. un9, ourselves. Second person. N. None. None. Q. beincr, of thyself. euer, of yourselves. D. blr, to thyself. eud^, to yourselves. A bi^, thyself. eud^, yourselves. Third person masc. N. None. None. Q. fclner, of himself. l^rer, of themselves. D. fid^, to himself. fid^, to themselves. A. f i (f|, himself. f t c^, themselves. Third person fern. N. None. None. G. i^xn, of herself. i^rer, of themselves, .0. fl(^, to herself. ftd^( to themselves. A. f i ^, herself. f l S), themselves Third person neuter. N. None. None. Q. felner, of itself. i'^rer, of themselves. D. fid^, to itself. fld^, to themselves. A. ficEi, itself. fld^, themselves. § 61. Demonstrative Pronouns. (1) The peculiar office of a demonstrative pronoun is to point out the relative position of the object to which it refers Of these there are three : btf fer, this (pointing to something near at hand) ; {ener, that (indicating something remote") ; bet, this or that (referring to things in either position)^ OBSERVATIONS ON THE DEM0N8TBATIVES. % 62. 317 (2) a)kfer and icner are declined after the Old form of ad- jectives : thus > Singular. Plural. Masc. Fern. Neut. For all genders. K. btefer, blefe, btefeS (bieS), this ; biefe, these. G. bUfcS, btefer, biefeS, of this; biefer, of these. D. biefem, biefer, biefem, to this ; biefen, to th°se, A. biefen, biefe, biefeS (bteS), this ; biefe, these. (3) 5Der, when used in connection with a noun, is inflected (like the definite article) thus : Singular. Neut. baS, this or that ; be§, of this or that ; bent, to this or that ; baS, this or that ; Masc. Fen N. ber, bie, Or. beS, ber, D. bcni. ber. A. ben. ble. Plural. For all genders. ble, these or those, ber, of these or those ben, to these or those, ble, these or those. (4) When used absolutely, that is, to represent a substan- tive, it stands thus : Singular. Plural. Masc. . Fern. Neut. For all genders. N. ber, ble, ba8 ; ble. G. beffen (bef ), beren (ber), bcffen (bcf ) ; bercn. D. bem, ber, b;m; benen. A. ben, ble, baS ; ble. § 62. Observations on the demonstbatives. (1) The neuters biefeS (contract form bleS), jeneS and baS, are, hke cS (§134. 1.) employed with verbs, without listinc- tion of gendftr or number : thus, bieS Ifi eln 2)tann, this is a man ; bteS finb 2Kenfcf|en, these are men ; j[ene3 ijl elne ^rau, that is a woman ; &c. (2) JDlefer, when denoting immediate proximity, agnifies "this ;" as, in biefer SBelt Ifi ntteS bergnngll^, in this world all b transitory. More generally, however, it answers in use to Hhat." 3cnet always denotes greater remoteness than Ht^it, 318 DETERMINATIVE PRONOUNS. § 63. Bnd signifies 'Hhat" '■'■ymi" "ymder ;" as, Jener ©tciTt If f aum fld^ttar, that (or yonder) star is hardly visible. Scner and biefer, when employed to express contrast or com- parison, often find their equivalents in the English expressions "the former" — "«Ae latter ;" "that, that one" — "this, this one." (3) The demonstrative ber, tie, ba8, is distinguishable from the article, with which it is identical in form, by being uttered with greater emphasis, as in the following example : b e r SWarni l^ot e§ gefagt, nt(^t iener, this man has said it, not that one. (4) The form bef is chiefly found in compounds ; as, bef » tocgen, on this account. (6) Sometimes ber is, for the sake of gi-eater clearness, employed in place of a possessive : as, er malte feinen SSettcr uiib beffen ©o^n, he painted his cousin and his son ; literally, and the son of this one, i. e. the cousin's son. (6) The pronouns, both demonstrative and determinative, are frequently made more intensive by the particle ibm, even ; very : ete'n biefe 3SIume, this very flower ; eBeit baS .JlLnb, that same child ; e6en berfelBe, the very same. § 63. Determinative Pronouns. (1) The pronouns of this class are commonly set down among the demonstratives. Their distinctive feature, however, is that, of being used where an antecedent is to be limited by a rel!>*r'.ve clause succeeding, and so rendered more or less pro- min*"- 1 or emphatic : thus, ber, ttrfd^cr Hug ^anbclt, Serbient SoB, he ('hat man) who acts wisely, deserves praise. From this use they derive the name determinative. They are ber, that ; that one ; he ; berimigc, that ; that person (strongly determinative) ; berfcBKc, * the same (denoting identity^ ; felBtgrt, the same (seldom used) ; fcIdj'T, such (marking similarity of kind or nature). (2) 3)cr, when used in connection with a noun, is decL'ned Hue the demonstrative ber ; that is, like the definite article : * Where two words precede, ather of which might be taken for the ante- KELATIVE PRONOUNS. % 64. 310 when used absolutely, it differs from the demonstrative bet on- ly in the genitive plural : taking b e r e r instead of b c r e n. (3) 3)erienlge and berfcIBc are compounded of ber and the parts jentge and feI6e respectively. In declining, both parts of each must be inflected ; bcr, like the article, and jenige and fet6< after the New form of adjectives : thus, Singular. Plural. Masc. Fern. Neui. For all genders. N berjenige, biejenige, baSjeittge ; bieienigen. G. beSieiiigen, berjcnigen, beSjenigen; berjenigen D betnjenigcn, berjenigen, bemjenigen ; benjentgen. ^ benienigen, biejenige, baSjentge ; biejenigen. (4) ©el6igcr, ®eI6ige, ©effitgeS and ©old^er, ©cld^e, ©ctc^eS, are declined after the Old form of adjectives ; the latter, however, when the indefinite article (ein, elne, ein) precedes, takes the Mixed form : * thus. Masc. Fern. Nemt N. ein fohfier, f eine fold^e, ein foId^eS, such a. G. eineS fotd^en, eincr fold^cn, eineS fcld^en, of such a. D. einent fclc^en, etner folc^en, einem fold^en, to such a. A. eincn folc^en, elne fcld^e, ein fct^eS, such a. § 64. Relative Peonoxjns. (1) Tbe proper office of a relative pronoun is to represent an antecedent word or phrase ; but, while so doing, it serves also to connect the different clauses of a sentence. The Rela- tives in German are these : cedent of a personal pronoun of the third person, betfelte is used to prevent doubt: thus, bev sUnttr ftfctieb feinem ©o()nc, berfelbe miiffe tiac^ SonbDii vttfeit, the father wrote the son, that he Cbeifclbe, the last one named, i. e. the son) must set out for London. * When ein comes after fol4)ec, the latter is not inflected at all; as, fblc^ tin SDJaiiu, such a man. + Nearly s]^onyraous with ©o((f)er are the words, lieSglct'^crt, beri;Iejifien, ffine8g!eicf)tn, ibreefllcic^cn, all which are indeclinable ; as, i^ ^obe tetntii Uin» jiing mit bcraleidjeii Seuteil, I have no mtercourse with such people. 3Bei iintet ettc6 ip feincggletc^en ? Who among you is his equal 1 320 OBSKRVATIONS ON THE R£J.AT1VBS. § 65. SSJeld^er, wlio, which. JDer, that. SBer, who, he who, or that, or she who. ©0, * which, (nearly ohsolete, and indeclinable.) (2) SBelc^er is dechned after the Old form ; thus. Singular. Plural. Masc. Fern. Neui. For all genders. N. iueld^cr, tocldEje, toeld^eS ; mlijt, who, which. G. tceld^eS, hjeld^er, tnellieS ; tceld^er, of whom, whose. D. hjeld^em, inetd^er, hjeld^cm j iueld^en, to whom, to which A. roetdien, toel^c, loeld^eS ; toel^e, whom, which. (3) 35cr is declined, thus : Singular. Plural. Masc. Fern: Neut. For all genders. N. ber, bie, ba§ ; bie, that, who, which. G. bejfcn, bcren, bejfen 5 beren, of whom, or which, whose D. bcm, ber, bem ; bencn, to whom, or which. A. ben, bie, baS ; bie, that, who, which. (4) 2Ber stands thus : Singular. Plural. Masc. Fern. Newt, N. v»cr,t toer, rvaS; G. htejfen (or mef ,) tcejfen (or tocf ,) tocf; D. tncnt, mem, wanting % A. toen, keen, woS; § 65. Observations on the Relatives. (1) Of the pronouns declined above, tocld^er, ioeldie, Wili^ti, is the only one that can be used in conjunction witli a noun, after the manner of an adjective : thus, weld^er 9Jfann, • rm of the Present Participle, (Idjenb) thus, jU toBenb, which means to-be-praised, that is praiseworthy. (4) The Particle ® e mentioned above, as being generally prefixed to the perfect participle, was origmally designed, it would seem, to indicate completed action. It is commonly accounted merely euphonic, or at most intensive. The instan- ces in which it is altogether omitted, are these : First : in the case of all verbs compounded with inseparable prefixes ; (See § 94.) as, Selc^rt, (not ge6etel;rt) informed : Second : in the case of verbs from foreign languages, which make t7 e infinitive in i r e n or i e r e n : as, fiubirt, (from jtu^ biren), studied ; instead of gejiubirt : Third : m the case of the verb hj e r b e n, when joined as an auxiliary to another verb: as, id^ Bin geloBt hjorben, (.not geivorben) I have been praised. § 70. Adxiliart Verbs. {\) In German the auxiliary verbs are usually divided into two classes. (2) The first class consists of three verbs, without which no complete conjugation can be formed. They are ^nBcn, to have, fein, to be, and ttjcrben, to become. These verbs, though chiefly employed as auxiliaries, are often themselves in the con- dition of principal verbs. In that case, they aid one another in the formation of the compound tenses. A glance at the paradigms wUl show, how this is done. (3) As auxiliaries, these three verbs enter into the composi- tion of the compound tenses, active and passive, of all classes of verbs. (4) <§ a 6 e n is used in forming the perfect, pluperfect and second future tenses in the active voice : thus, from 2o6en, tc praise, we have Perf. cE| ^ a 6 f getott, I have praised. Plup. i6)^ai\ i gelott, 1 had praised. 2. Fut. id^ hjerbc gelcBt '^ a 6 e n, I &\iaW.JiMve praised. 32t) REMARKS ON THE USB OF fjaittl AND fcljL § Yl. (6) © e in is used in forming tlie perfect, pluperfect and Bei oud future tenses, both in the active and passive ; thus, from [cSen, to praise and toa^^m, to grow. Active. Passive. Perf. id§ 6 1 n getoad^fen, Id^ 6 i n geMt hiorbcn, I have * grovra. I have * been praised. Plup. id^ in ar gemacEifen, td^ tuar gelofit ioorben, I Aac^ grown. I had been praised. 2. Fut. i^ trerbe gemadifen fetn, td^ mcrbe geto6t tccrben f ein, I shall have grown. I shall have been |)raised. (6) SB e rb e n is used in forming the future tenses md the conditionals f : thus, from Io'6en, to praise, we have Futures. Conditionals. 1. id^ w e r b e Mm, i^toux'oi loBen, I shall praise. I would praise. 2. id^ icerbe geloH^ien, id^wiirbe gelofit fjaien, I shall have praised. I should have praised. §71. Remarks on the use of ^ a 6 c n and f e I rt. (1 ) A^ the Perfect and Pluperfect tenses of verbs must be conjugated, sometimes with i)aitn and sometimes with fetn, it becomes important to know when to use the one and when the other. The determination of this question depends chiefly upon the signification of the main' verb. The general rules are these : (2) >§a6cn is to be used in conjugating all active transitive verbs, all reflective verbs, all impersonal verbs, all the auxiliaries * It will be noticed here, that wherever, in the formation of these tenses, my part of f c i n occurs, it is Englished by the corresponding part of the verb i) a ti e n : thus, ict b i n gewn^fen, I have erown, &.c. This grows out of the necessity of suiting the translation to our language, which in these places re- quires the verb have. t It is, also, employed with the perfect participle of a principal verb, to form the Passive voice ; (See §84). I^ote, also, above that tutrbf and wiirbe are rendered Ijy iieir equivalents (shall and should) in the conjugation o< the EligUsh verb. REMARKS ON THE UBK OF ^aBctl AND ffltt § 71. 3ii7 of ihe second class (viz. burfen, ISnnen, mogen, moHen, foKen, luiilfeii and laffen), and many intransitives. (3) ©etn is to be used in conjugating all intransitives, sig- nifying a change of the condition of the subject ; as, gcbci^en, to prosper; gencfcn, to recover; rcifen, to ripen; fc^irinbcn, to dwindle ; jierfien, to die ; all those indicating motion towards or from a place ; ctlen, to hasten ; ge'^en, to go ; rcitcn, to ride ; finfcn, to sink ; and, also, all verbs in the passive voice. (4) Some verbs take, in the formation of these tenseb, either !^oBen or fcin, according as they are employed in one sense or in another. This, however, will be best understood by practice in reading and speaking. The following are ex- amples : ®r ift in feinent nexicn SBagcn fertgefa^ren. TOeiii aSruber i]at fortgefa^ren bciitfci^ 5U Icfen. S)aS SSaffer ift gefroren. S>en armen SKonn f)at eS in beni fatten Siiitmcr gefroren. S)te S^ranen finb iifier bte 3Ban» geti gercnnen. ®aS ®t'faf ^at geronnen. iDag ©cf)tff iji aiif einen gels fen gcftofen. DaS aSoH ^t ben RMq Bom 3;'6rcne gepopcn. S)a3 ©rfjtjf ifi anS Ufer ge' trtetcn. Oer aSaum ^at neue 3'mdQi gctriefccn He has driven off in his new carriage. My brother has proceeded to read German. The water is (has) frozen. It has chilled the poor man in the cold room. The tears have flowed over the cheeks. The vessel has leaked. The ship has struck upon a rock. The people have thnist the king from the throne. The ship has been driven up- on the shoie. The tree has shot forth new branches. 328 PARADIGMS OF THE AUXILIARIES § 72. PAEADIGMS OF TKE A.UX , (1) ^ofecit. INDICATIVE. PRESERT OENSE icl) Tjnbc, bii bciji, cr l)at, wir babett, iljr bobct, it' ^aben, I hav. thou hast, he has. we have, you have, they have. IMPERFECT TENSE. tc^ balte. bu battel cr bg. fie tuctbcii i a> I shaU ■) . thou wilt I "3 he ^vill i-o we will f 9^ yAi will _g they will J SUBJUNCTIVE. PRESENT TENSE, iej babe, bu bobefi, ct babe, mit babsn, ibr babet, |te baben. I may have, thou mayst have he may have, we may have, you may have, they may have. IMPERFECT TENSE. t($ biiffc, bu battcfi, cr battc, mir bntten, ibr bfittct, jtc bSttcit, I might have, thou mightst have, he might have, we might have, you might have, they might have PERFECT TENSE. icb babe bu babcfl er babe mir batcn ibc babct fie baben I may have Uaa, &c. PLUPERFECT TENSE. icb bSttf bu b'ittefl ct b'itte luir biitten ibr battel fie Ijatten I might .jave had, FIRST FUTURE TENSE. i(% luerbe I bu lucrbcjl 1 - rr rocrbe ( ^ iiiir njcibcu ; = ibr n'trbct fie lucrbeii J (if) I shall have. = i.vh X sliall tiavt ^ Dart &c. SECOND rmjRE TENSE icb wcrbe bu mcrbefl er lucrbe luir rocrben ibc mcrbet fie merben , OF THE* FIRST CLASS. § ^2. 329 ILIAKIES OF THE FIEST CLASS. to have. CONDITIOKAL. IMPERATIVE. INFINITIVE. PaRTICIPLK, tmST FTTTBRE. er tt'iirbe niit ttjuvbcn i^r miirbet fie miivben . >^ ■si SECOHB rOTUEE. i^ mfivbe 1 g £ ku VDiirtefi I >2 J 2 tr njfirbe I >=■ ts'*" mix iBiirbcn f s "i-o ibr wiitbet «■ -fl.^ Re u>uvbeu J £, m PRESENT TENSE 1. wanting. 2. ^abe bu, have thou. 3. Jobe cv, let him have. 1. baben tuti:, let us have. 2. l)abet if)r, have ye or you. 3. I)ttbcn jtc, let them have. PRESENT TENSR. l)aiea, to have. PERFECT TENSE. (je^abt bate", to have had. FIRST rUTUEE. baben aetben, to be about to hav«. PRESENT. babeiib, bavinp PERFEcr. 330 FABADIOMS OF THE AUXILIARIES § 72. (2) (Scttt, INDICATrVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. PKESENT TEKSE. PRESENT TENSE. 14 bin, I am. id) fft, I may be. bu biji, thou art. bu f«ic(i, thou mayst be. ev fei, he may be. er i% he is. roir ftiib, we are. mir feint, we may be. ibv fftb, you are. t^v feiet, you may be. fte feieti, they may be. ue ftub, they are. IMPERFECT TEHSE. IMPERFECT TENSE. i(i W)ar, I was. id) ttSte, I might be. ^u wavji, thou wast. bu warefi, thou raightst be. n- wnv, he was. cv toSvc, he might be. wir lunren, we were. mir Wiivctl, we might be. tbv ttarcf, you were. ijv tunrct, you might be. fte warcii, they were. fte wnten, they might be. PERFECl TENSE. PERFECT TENSE. id) bill 1 have been. id) fei I may have been, bu bifl a thou hast been. bu fcijl s &c cv tfi •^ he has been. ev fei ,y luir ftiib a we have been. wir fcien 1 il)V ffib a you have been. tf)t fcict <3} fie ftub they have been. fte feicn PLUPERFECT TENSE. PLUPERFECT TENSE. iti) mac I had been. i^ raSve I might have been bu tuaifi tf thou hadst been. bu mnvcfi = &c. cv lUdV *^ he had been. '2 we had been. cv ttSi-c ( "g- luiv TOdveii miv mSven f g iliv wavtt =5 you Jiad been. ijv wSvet « fie waven they had been. fte wiiven FIRST FUTURE TENSE. FIRST FUTURE TESSE. id) merbc 1 I shall be. id) tBcvbc ) (if) I shall be, Sic bii tuiiji thou wilt be. bu wcrbefl ex win , ,c he will be. luiv loerben '.iL we shall be. et mevbc 1 g roit njcvben ' £. ibr lucvbft you will be. fie uicvbeii J they will be. ibv iBcvbct fie wcvbeu . SECOND FUTURE TENSE. SECOND FUTURE TENSE, irf) ttevbe .5 I shall i id) wcvbc ) s (if) I should havs bu mivfl S- thou wilt bu rocvbcji £ been, &c ev luirb 1 _. he will s ev wcvbe ( 5- loiv iDci'bcn C SL we shall itiiv wevbett (^ ibv tDcibct e you will 5 • ibv njcvbet a fte weibEU J Sj they will' J JS fte luevben . is, OF ^HB FIRST OlASS. % 12. 331 to be. OONriTIONAL. FIEST rUTURE. id) roiitbe bu tturbcji ec iDiivbe wtv wikbcti ifcr miirbct ftc tuiitben . SECOND FTJTUKE. IMPERATIVE. PRESENT TENSE. 1 wanting 2. fei b«, be thou. 3. fci c(, let hun be. 1. feien mil, let us be, 2. fcib ii)r, be ye. 3. fcicn fte, let them be. £ -3" MM id) atirbe 1 = tu wiivbefl | '" n njiirbe L „ - „ toir ttiiitben i -^ f g" iftt toiirbet I s .a S Be toiirben J S, „ INFINITIVE, PRESENT TENSE. fein, to be. PRESENT. feienb. being. PERFECT TENSE. gewcfeit fein, to have been. PEKFEd gewefen. FIRST FUTDBK. fein tuctbenr to be about to be. PAKTICIPLK. 332 FARAOIOMS OF THE AUXIUaRISS § 72. (3) 3a5cr&cii, INDICATIVE. PRESENT TENSE. id) ttevbc, >u Bjicfi, cc loirl), luiv njcrbcn, 'i\)x tutrtct, fte tuevbttt, I become, thou becomest he becomes, we become, yoii become, they become. IMPEEFECT TENSE. t* wurbe,* bu murbcji, ev iDurbe, roic njuvben, j^t iBiirbet, fie wuvben, I became, thou becamest he became, we became, you became, they became PERFECT TENSE. ii) bin bu I)ijl er tfi 11) ic ftnb ifjv feib fte pnb I have become, thou hast become, he has become, we have become, you have become, they have become. PLUPEKFECT TENSE. I had ) thou hadst [ g he had ! | we had f g you had 1 .2 they had j FIRST FUTURE TENSE. id) ant 1 bu mavfl ec WOT I luir iBnren f i\)X waret fte luaten J t(^ werbe 1 bu tuivfi I ^ cv roitb i^ tuic njcrbcn f " it)r iDctbet fte ujcvben I shaU thou wilt he will we shall you will they will SE'lOND FUTXJRE TENSE. 1.: id) tDcrbe bu luicfi cr wirb roir merbcn ibr ircvbet {t( uietben I shall thou wilt he will we shaU you will they will SUBJUNCTIVE. PRESENT TENSE. i(^ tBcrbe, bu nietbcft ct itictbc, wir iBcrbcn, ib» rucrbct, fie iDctben, I may become, thou mayst become, he may become, we may become, you may become, they may income. IMPERFECT TENSE. ic^ miicbe, bu tDiirbefl, er (Biivbe, mirwiitbcn, tftr tuiirbet, fte murben, I might become, thou mightst beuime he might become, we imght become, you might become, they might become. PERFECT TENSE. tcb fci bu feifi et fei tuir fcten tfer feiet fte fcien > o S I may have be come, &c. PLUPERFECT TENSE. i(^ iDore bu warcfl ct ware mir tvaten i^t Mjiitet fie wiiren I might have be come, &C. a FIRST FUTURE TENSE. Of) I shall become &c. id) toerbe 1 bu luetbefi j ^ et iDCtbc ( S ttiit mcrben [ S il)r merbet i ^ fie wetbcH J SECOND FUTURE TENSE. i^ mcvbe 1 .g' bu mctbefl I 2. cr wcrbe 1 g iriv iDctbcn j-S tf)r tucrbet ( f fte reerben J g, (if) I shal' hat* oecone, &c. * OriBatb, L.46 3. OF THE FIRST CLASS. $ 72. 333 to become. CONDITIONAL. IMPERATIVE. INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE. PRESENT TEHSE. 1. wanting. 2. tuerbe ia, become thou. 3. rucrbe et, 1st him become. 1. roerten wir, let US become. 2. toetbet t^r, become Ve. 3. wetben ftc, let them become. nUST FUTURE. '.ti) wi'trbe "• i . eu njiirbtfl 1 e •" a « Biirbe I? ^ ^ tutc toiivbcn ( g o B 'bt roiitbct I B ^ - fit wiirbfii , SECOND FUTURE. (4) toiirbe bu toutbeji cr tuiirbc VDtt tuiirbtn it)r raiirbet ite miirbeii PRESENT TENSE. tvecben, to be- PRESENT. tueibenb, becom- ing. 2 2 2 PERFECT TENSE. gewotbcn fcitt, to have become. PEEFKOT. getsotben.beco FIRST FUTURE. WEtben werben, to be about to become. 334 SYNOFiicAL VIEW, &e. $ 73. S 13. SYNOPTICAL VIEW OF THE THSEE TENSE AUXILIAEIES S e n, to Oe. ^aben, to have. INDICATIVE MCOD. Pbesent Tense. nj e r b e n. lo ieeome am, / have. I become. icb bin bubifl erift mir ftnb ibr feib fte ftitb. t<$ ^abe bu ^afl cr bat roir baben ilir babct or ^abt fte ^aben. Impebfect Tense ii^ rocrbe bu tuirfi er roirb roir rocrben ibr fficrbet fic rocrben. I was. I had. / becaine. id) mar bu watcfl (or tvarjl) er roar ait roarcn ibr roavet (or roart) (if roarcn. i(* batte bu battcjl cr i/Mt roir batten ibr battel fte batten. Pebfect Tense. id) routbe bu rourbefl ct rourbe roir routben ibr routbet fte rourben. / have been. / have had. I have become. icb bin bu bifi cr ifi njiv finb ibr feib lie ftnb ■ gcwefctt. i(i) babe bu ^aji er ^at roir baben tbt Jabet fte Jaben . fle^abt i^ bin bubifl crifl roir ftnb ibr feib fte ftnb. geworben ci ivorben. PLiitiiiFECT Tense. / had been. I had had. I had become. icSj war bu roareil ct roar roir juarcn ibr roarct fte roarcn geroefttt id) ^attc bu battcfl Si?ttt.ni8'*«*'- ibrbattct fte jatten . id) roar bu roatefi er roar roir roarcn tbr roarct |5t roarcn acrooricn m roprbcn. FmsT FDTtrEE TEHsa [shallbe, / shall have. I shall become. \&i rocrb bu roirfl cr roirb roir rocrl ibr rocrb (tc rocrbe en .n n feil icj) rocrbe bu roirfi cr roivb roir rocrtien i^t werbet fte rocvben ■ 5aben. i ^abeti. Ujv lucrbet [ (JjO I shall Have aeeam ig) wcrbe ' bu werbejj et merbt i getuork.. ttit merbcn Hwortc*/ tftr Wcrbct I («». fte uecbcn J irt) tuutbe iu roiivbefl cv iDitvbe luir roiirbcit ibr roiirbet fie Miivbeii fetn. i should have been, tcft luiivbc 1 bu wiirbcli cr raiitbc I ..„„f,„ miv miirben f B«3" il)r TOiirbtt '""• Re wurbcti J CONDITIONAL, First Conditiokal I should have, i(S) njiivbe bu wurbEfi cc iDurbe i i.„t..„ mix wiiibcn ' ?"°™- iiic miivbet f!e wiirben Second Conditional. / should have had, ii) wiivbe ") bu ttjitvbe^ I er wiitbe i Befinbt ^(i= wtr wiivbcn f ben. ibr miirbet j jle wiirbcit J i should become, iS) wiitbe bu tiiiitbc^ et wiitbe wit wiitbett tbt wutbtt fte wiitben wettOL I should have become 4* wiitbe "1 buwiirbejl | et wiitbe ( aeuvrbtt wit wiitbeit f (w«tb»« t^t wiltbet feia. fte wiitben J IMPERATIVE MOOD. Present Tense. Be thou. Have thou. Become thou. teanting, wanting. wanting. feibu ^(ibc bu wetbe bu $ei, et, f5( or e8 babe ct, fie or es ^abeit wit wetbe et, f!e or e« fcieii wit werbcn wit feib i^t babct tbt wetbct ibt wetben fte. feten fie. jabiu fie. INFINITIVE MOOD Pkesent Tensk. to be. to have. to become. fete. l^aben. Perfect Tense. wetben. to have been. to have had. to have become. jewefer fete. gejabt ^oben. Fdture Tense. gewotbcn fete. to be about to be. to be about to have. to be about to M< rein wetben. baben wetbciu wetben wetben. AUXILIARIES OF THE SECOND CLASS. § 74. 38| PARTICIPLES Pbeseht. Jeing having, becoming. Perfect *''«"> had, become, gcwefeit. ge^aSt. fleworten. § 74. Auxiliaries of the second class. (1) The second Class of au.xilknes embraces the folio (ving : Stf) mag, I am allowed ; {may ;) 3d) barf, I am permitted ; I dam, 3(1) M)ill, I will ; (purpose ;) 3(i) mu^, I am obliged; (must.) 3ci) foa, I am obliged ; (shall ;) Sd) toffe, I let. 3d) fann, I am able ; (can ;) (2) These verbs are, for the most part, very irregular in conjuga. tion, and serve simply the purpose of modifying with the ideas of liberty, possibility, or necessity, other verbs ; which latter are in thai case required to be in the infinitive mood ; thus er mag ladien, ho may (has permission to) laugh ; id) £ann fd)rei6en, I can (am able to) write ; where lod)eu and fd)reil)cn are both in the infinitive, governed respectively by mag and fann. (3) In the perfect and pluperfect tenses, however, the past par ticiple of these verbs is used only, when the principal verb is not ex Dressed. Its place is supplied, in such cases, by the infinitive, the translation of course being the same in either case, as : 3d) l)oBe i^n fe^en fonnen (instead of ge!onnt) ; I have been able to see him. (gr ^at worten muffen (instead of gemupt) ; he was obliged to wait, SJlan ptte uBer i^n iaiitn mogen (instead of gemod^Q ; one might have laughed at him. @t l^ot bcm 33ffel)te md)t ge^ord)en WoHen (instead of gcWoltt) ; he has not been willing to obey the command. 3d) !;obe fcin (Sel;cimni^ toipn biirfen (instead of gebntft) ; I have been allowed to know his secret. &e fjatte e« t^n foKcii (instead of gefottt) ; she ought to have done it, 15 338 CONJUGATIONS OF VERBS. J 76. ®ie ^aBen i^^n Qzf)m laffert (instead of gelaffen) ; they have suffered him to go. For a full display of the forms of these verbs * uid for fothei remarks on their uses, see the Section on the Miaed Conjugation .^83. § 75. Conjugation or Verbs. J (1) There are two conjugations of verbs : the Old and the jVeia The difference between them lies mainly in the mode of forming thi Impprfect Tense and the Perfect Participle. (2) The verbs of the Old form are commonly denominated "Ir- regular Verbs." But, as nearly all the primitive verbs in the lan- guage are conjugated in this way, and few, except the derivative verbs (now the larger class), ever assume the other form, it is the custom of the best German grammarians to adopt the classification which we have given. This will occasion no confusion or incon- venience to those who prefer the common classification : since it in only necessary to remember that the things are the same, though tne names have been changed. (3) In order to afford the ready means of comparing the tcrmv- national differences between the Old and the New forms of conjuga- tion, we subjoin the following tabular view of the sitnple ien^i'S ard participles, in which alone differences of this kind c.in exist. (4) In the compound tenses, the auxiliary alone being subjected to terminational variation, the mode of inflecting these tenses be- comes of course perfectly uniform in all classes of verbs. Hence tc secure a complete acquaintance with the forms of the compounc tenses, little more is necessai-y than a bare inspection of the para- digms. * Except laffcn (to let) which is not there, because it does not belong to thr Mixed coi^ugation. This verb is used either in permitting or commanding : «8, icft i)abt t^n geVn laff'"' I have allowed him to go ; ttf) l)abe tfin tommeii Inj^f n, I have ordered him to come, which two meanings are near akin. When used with a reciprocal pronoun, it has its equivalent in such phrases as, is to, ought to, may ; as, irns I56t (t(6 iiit^t tbnnthatis not to be done ; literally, doei not allow itself to be done. The i liinitive active xfter laffett, must often bd translated passively. TBRMINiTIONS Or THE SIMPLE TBNSBS. SV6. 339 § re. TERMINATIONS OF THE SIMPLE TENSES. Old Conjugation. New Conjiigaticm. INDICATIVE. BUBJUNC. INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. m d d ID a a Di ^ ^ z S B S B £ £ on e Q £ a n O Q ^ 1 - <« S B f - S H £ ,^ Hum n H 0) n S o z tf O B M a OB Qj OK tf b p H » O H H s OH a O M u Hi « H B. « e- £ B a f " M H S . [in = . im S <3 — .y et, t — e (1 — e — C s — li eft ]? - *i *ft Z 1 1^ V — .s" c (3 — .f et, t «■ g a ■g » a (1 — a en, n — , a en _ S (t (1 — g en, n — s en fa 3^2 — ^ et, t ^2 — s jt ( _ 8 ,t &i £ (3 — eii,tt — en <3 — en,n — en w r «• o — — — e (1 — t or et + e — t or et + c 11 - ^ '^' = > f ^2 — t or ct - - eH — t or et 4- t(l M 3 — t or et 4- e — t or et 4- e ft a {: a! ( 1 — g en — 1 en (1 — t or et J- en — t or et -4- en ih - ^ et - S J, 12 — t or et - - et — t or et - - ct £ < 3 — en — en <3 — t or et -j- en — t or en -1- en IMPERATITE. INFINIT. IMPERATIVE. INFINITIVE. m Q DO a g ^ £ B 5 £ o o (k. a a ^ ? s d Jii ? g a B e.- S , H 2 n H S i •: E S O Z ci! o a a O B K o a b C H Q O B & O H H o sa K rt E^ 9. BS H B K H S M H a I- " ( 3 .8 c — en (1 <3 - 1 ^ — td fa «<•' g en g^i - S et, t !i — g en — ^ el, t h t>\ - en <3 — en PARTICI PLBS. PARTICIPLES Present. Perfect. Present. Peri'cct, — ent Se— en — enii fie— ct or t RviVAitE. The Bign + in the table above is iwed as in Arithmet that the parts et ^ e are to be united ; as, ete. 540 rEBBS OF TUB OLD COITJUOATIOH. § 'll. Observations on the preckbing table. (IJ Observe, in the table above, that the teiininaticns in all pla». ces, except the Imperfect of the New form, are to be added directly to the root. In the place excepted (^Imperfect of the New form), there comes between the root and the personal ending, a sort of tense-sign (ct 01 t), which is not necessary to verbs of the Old form : because in tliem the Imperfect is made by means of a change in the radical vowel. (2) It may, also, be noticed that a characteristic difference in form, between the Indicative and the Subjunctive (3d person sing) is that the former ends in et or t, the latter always in e ; and that the personal ending in the first and thu'd person sing, of the Imper- ' feet of the Old form, is wholly omitted. (3) It may further be observed, that the e in the terminations ejl and ct, of the Indicative, is retained or omitted just according to what is demanded by euphony. In the Subjunctive, for the most part, the full termination is preserved. (4) For the same reason, also, that is, for the sake of euphony, when the root of a verb ends in el or n, the vowel e of any termi- mation beginning with that letter, is commonly omitted ; as, '^oms mmi (not ^dmmeten}, to hammer; fammelii (not famtneten), to col- lect. Sometimes, however, the e of the root is rejected: as, i(^ (■ammie (not famm c te), I collect § 77. Verbs of the Old Conjugation {commonly called irregular verbs). (1) In the Qld Conjugation, the Imperfect Tense and the Perfect Participle are distinguished from the Present, chiefly by a change of tlie radical vowels. Thus, in some verbs, a different radical vowel is found in each of these three parts : Present. Imperfect. Perfect Participle. Sitteii, beg. 33 at, * begged. ®eBcten, begged. §elfen, help. §atf, helped. ©e^olfett, helped, ©iniien, reflect. ®onn, reflected. ©efonncn, reflected. Srinfen, drink. ittaut, dranlc. Oetfinifen, drunk. * When in the cojrae of the changes noted in the text abo^'e, a long yoviei or dipht)iong becomes short, the final consonant of the root ia doubled, as ; SRcitcn, to ride. 9Jitt, rode. ®ciit(fii, ridden. 8f itiEii, to suffer. Sitt, suffered. ® clitten, suffered. In tlie case of Sciben, note also, that b is changed mto its cognate t. TBRBS OF IHB OLD COKJUQATION. § 77 341 (2J In soma the vowel or diphthong in the Imperfect and the Participle, is the same, but is different from that in the present : as, Present. ®tinimen, glimmer. fyitn, lift. JJlimmen, climb, fiuven (tu[)ren), choose, ficiben, suflTer. Sauijen, suck, ©diiebcn, shove. @il)teid)en, sneak. ®cl)nau6en, snort, ©(fcreiben, write. ©tiebett, scatter. Sreiien, drive. Sriigen, betray. SBcben, weave. ImperfecL Otoiiim, gliramered. §ob, lifted. .Rloiiim, climbed. .Kor, chose. £itt,* suffered, ©og, sucked. @(t)ob, shoved. @c[)Iid;, sneaked. ®il)nob, snorted. @d)rieb, wrote. @tob, scattered. Srieb, drove. Srog, betrayed. Sffiob, wove. Perfect Participle. ®eglciminen,glimmered. ®et;oben, lifted, ©etiommcn, climbed, ©eforeii, chosen. @etitfeu, suffered, ©efogcn, sucked. ®ef(t)oben, shoved. ®efcl)li(^en, sneaked. @cfcl)nt>ben, snorted. ®efd)rie6-.n, written. ®efioben, scattered. ®ctrieben, driven. ®ettogen, betrayed. ®e»oben, woven. (3) In others, the vowel or diphthong of the Present is changed in the Imperfect, but resumed in the participle : as, Present. 93(ofcn, blow, (sound) galten, fall, gangen, catch. ®cben, give, •gangen, hang, ^ommen, come. 8aufen, run. ©djajfen, create, ©dflagen, beat. ©e^en, see. ©tog en, pusn. Sreten, tread. Imperfect. SUe«, blew, giel, fell, ging, caught. ©ai, gave. .§ing, hung. Mam, cams. Sief, run. ©ci)ttf, created. ©djlug, beat. ©o§, saw. ©tief, pushed. Stat, trod. Perfect Participle. ®eblafeu, blown. ®cfatlen, Mien. ®efongen, caught. ®egeben, given. ®rf)Ongen, hung. ®e!ommen, come. ®etaufen, run. ®ef(i)af['en, created. ®efct)Iogen, beaten. ®efel)eti, seen. @ejlo^en, pushed. ®cttefen, trodden. When, on the other hand, a short vowel is Ihus made loTig, the eeconi oi iwo radical consonants is ommitted : as, iBitten, to beg ; SSat, begged ; ©ebeten, begged. Roininen, tti come ; JSam, came ; OeEomm * See tb J Note above 342 VBRBS OF THE OLD CONJUGATION. § 7V. (4) Beiides the vowel changes indicated above, verbs of the an. eient (Conjugation have the following characteristics : a. The Perfett partciple ends in e n orii, and is thereby dis. tinguished from that of the New Form, which terminates in e t, oi t, thus : Old Form. ®e§olf en, helptd ; from §etfen. ©efaUen, fallen; from gaQeii. ®etrag e n, borne ; from SEtagcn. ten, bid' .en; from JBieten. New Form. ®elo6 e t (gelobt), praised ; from fioben. ©eliei e t (geliebt), loved ; from fiieben. ®ela6 e t (getait), quick< led ; from Saben. ®ctauf(I) e t (gctaufd)t), exchanged, from Saufdjen. b. Those having a in the first person singular of the Present In- dicative, assume the Umlaut in the second and third persons ; thus, Indicative. Present. id) fdjloge, I strike, bu f d) t a g ji, thou strikest. er f d^ I d g t, he strikes. tBit fd^tagen, we strike, i^r fdfelagt, you strike, jte f(^logeu, they strike. Indicative. id) faiige, I catch, bu f d n g jl, thou catchest, er f d n g t, he catches, Wir fangcn, we catch, ifjv fangt, you catch, fie fangen, they catch, u. Those having e (long) in the ^rs< person singular of the Pre- sent Indicative, tsike, in the second and {hird persons, ie ; those, in like manner, having e (short,) take in the same places, the vowel i ; and in both instances, the Imperative (second person singular') adopts the vowel-fonn of the second person of the Indicative, thus : Indicative. Present. id) tefe, I read, bu n e f e fl, thou readst, K li e f ; t, he reads. Imperative. wanting. Ilea bu (for liefe).* lefe cr, let him read. * • The verbs that thus adopt the vowel-form of the 2. pers. of the Indie, loaa also the characteristic c final: giving, as above, lieS, for licff ; ^tlf for ^i(fe, Sua. 't should be noted, fiirther, that the unaccented e final, is, in other instances, siso sometimes omitted. VXRBB OF THE OLD CONJUOATIOH. S"- 343 Indicative. Present. toit lefeii, we read, tt)t lefet, you read, fie lefen, they read. id) l^ctfe, I help, bu ^ i I f |i, thou helpest, ui)il^t,he helps, U'it l)Blfcn, we help, fl)v ^elfef, you help, \it t;etfeu, they help. Imperative. lefen knit, let us read, tefet (§r, read ye or you. lefen jte, let them read. waniivg, ^ i I f bu (for ^itfe),* help tnou. l;elfe er, let him help. l^etfen Wit, let us help, l^elfet i^t, help ye or you. ^elfen fie, let them help. d. The final e, of the first and tliird persons singular of the Im- perfect Indicative, is always omitted, and in this tense the radical voweL if it he capable of it assumes the Umlaut in the Subjunctive thus : Indicative. Subjunctivk. Imperfect. Id) fptad), (for fvtadje,) I spoke, ic^ f)5tSd)e, I might speak, bu f^jtadlii, thou didst speak, er fjjvacl), (for fprad)e,) he spoke; loir fpradien; we spoke, H)t fvtact)et, you spoke, fie f()rad)en, they spoke, bu fjjradiejl, thou mightst speak, er fprddie, he might speak, luir f)>rdd)en, we might speak, i^r fi)rdd)et, you might speak, jle fljrddjen, they might speak. Idi fdilug, I struck, bu fd)(ugfi, thou didst strike, er f4)hg, he struck, irit fdilugen, we struck, ii)x fd)tuget, you struck, jic fdjiugen, they struck. id) fdjluge, I might stiike. bu fd)Iiigefi, thou mightst strike, er fd)ti;ge, he might strike, toir fd)lugen, we might strike lt;t fcfeluget, you might stiike. fte fd^liigen, they might strike. * See Note page 348. S44 PABASIGM OF A. V£RB § /8. § 78. PAEADIGM OF A 11 ill INDICATIVE. i(6 f*[aac, bu fc^laflji ec ft^Kgt, mir fdjlagen. fie fcblagcn. PKESENT TENSE. I strike. thou strikest. he strikes, we strike, you strike, they strike. IMPERFECT TENSE. 11$ f*iua, iU f*(U8fi, tx ftblug, roit fc^lugcn, ijt f(f)Iu8ct, (te fc^Iugcit, I struck, thou didst strike, be struck, we struck, you struck, they struck. PERFECT TENSE. " ^ 3 ci- ^at ^ ( 1 roir ^olcn I I 2 i6i- 6"( strilw thou. 3. Mlnjje er, let him strike. 1. fc^lageu tuti;, let us strike. 2. Wlflfjet i^r, strike ye. 3. fd^lagen f!e, let them strike. PRESENT TENSE, ft^lflgtn, to Strike. fc^Iagcnb, striking. PERFECT TENSE, aef^Iagcn t)n6cn, to have struck. FIRST FUTURE. f(^Ic. iO) bratt, bu brntcfi or btStfl, bratet or bvat i* breeze, bu brtdjjl, ct Bvtcfef icp bvcniic, k. i£^ bringe, jt. id) bcnte, jc. t(^ biuge, :c. ic^ bveft^e, bu bvift^ejl, cr btift^f id) bringe, tc. iih biivf, bu bavfp, ctbavf; wit bitrfcn, JC. ic^ emVfauge, bu cmpfSngfi, et cmpfiingt ic^ cmijfe^Ie, bu emvpcjlil, et empftei)lt t* empjinbe, jc. tgled^tcn, to twist, Bliegen tc), to fly. Jlie^en x), to flee, gltc^cn y), to flow, ^ragen, to ask, ' — ^rejfen, to devour, ^rteren, to freeze, @(tl)i'en z), to ferment, ©ebnren, to bring forth, ®c6tB a), to ff-re, ©ebteten 6), to command. --®cbEtl)«n c), to prosper, @ef alien, to please, ®cicn (J), to go, ■^^Selingtn, to succeed, @eU(n e), to be worth, valid^ dStntfttt, to recover, tdb eiitfvtc^c, !C. t4 entf^rat^ it? erbleti^e, jc. ii? crbltt^ i(^ etfcteve, !C. ii erfcot icj erovcife, ic. icp evfltiff icfe etficfe, jc. ic^ etftefte i^ ertu^te (ettiirc), ic, ic^ eiCo^r (etEoc) W etfnufe, ba etfaufejl, cr erfaiift ti^ etfojf H erfc^alie, sc i* cififloll b crftieme, jc. tcfe crf(Jicti ^ crf(!)recfe, bu erfitirf jl, tr er= i<^ erfi^tal fdictat t4> crtvtiife, ic. i(6 crtranf i(6 crwSge, ic ii) ecivog it^ effe, bu iJTeil/ « iJTet or tft ii^ (ig i($ fo|e, bu fa^cft, M fa^et — i$ fnfire, bu fabtii, er fa^tt t* fujt tci faUe, bu fallil, « fSUt i4 pel tc^ falte, >c ti$ faltett t($ fonnc, bu fttitflil, er faugt ■ ici) fing ii) recite, bu fti^tfl, er fid)! i* fot^t ic^ finbe, ic. t^ fanb t* jlcc^te, bu flt^tft, er flt^t i* fie^t id) fliege, bu flieafi, ev piegt ti^ flog icjl Hie^e, it. id) fltcgf , JC. id) fraje, bu fvSajl, et frSgt i*fceffe, bufriiTcfiorfi-tpt ic^ fciere, tc. ic^ flSSrc, JC. , __ . ic^ gcbiire, bu jcbSrfl (gcfcietii) i* gebdt et aeiSvt (oebtevt) i($ gebe, bu gtbli, ec gibt td^ gab id) gebtcte, ic. id tc^ gebet^e, :c. itd t(^ gcfalle, bu gcfSHfl, ec gcjS'It ii^ id) gc6e, JC. es geltngt iA geWc, bu gitt^, ec gilt in genefe, ic geiof gebfe' gcflel I gebfeb i* gtng ti gelang ■•)ga(t ) graag OF THE OLD FOKU. Sirs. 34» IMl". S0UJ. IMPERATIVE. PARTIOIPLB. i4) entfpcSc^e iti) evblti^e t(^ crfvBve i* ergriffe ic^ evficfete an erfii^re (evtute) ill; tif6ife iii) crWiciu id) cvfAvSft ii) cttvaute i^ cvmBge i4 ii^e tcb ful)te i* fiele i^ faitete i* ffnje id) fijcfetc t(fe fSnbc i(^ floitte ■41 fl6fie i* ffiJiTe i* fviifle i(i ftiiSe ic$ frore id) acbiive (gc' bove) i* fliibe i^ geljiite id) gebiefje icj gepcle :* Bin8« e8 geliinge ic6 giilte li^ geB&f( entf))ri(^ etbleidje erfvicue etgreife orergieif e'ltiefe evtii^te (ttfiiw) etfaufe erfd)aUe crf^ciiie erftiiii cctiint ttmogt f«6« faUe faltt fangt fi4t finbe Ud}t liege flie^e or pic^ flie^e ftnge fricve ve gebiite (gtbier) gib gcbiete gebei^ gefalle gefie or gej gelinge genefe entfproSett. blic^ett. erfvotcn. ergiiffert. evfofen. etto^ren (etfocen) etfoffett. evf(iolIen. ttf^iciien. etfc^votfen. ertrunten. MtBOjen. gegeffen. gefniiren. gefaUen. gtfoltcn. gefangeit. gcfotitett. gefunbcn. geflot^teK, geflogcn. gejlo^en. geffoffen. gefrngt. gefteffen. geftorcn. gego'^rcn gcboten, gegebeii. geBotcn. gebie^en. gefoUcn. gegnngen, gelutigcn gegoltetu genefen. m) Derived from llei^ett, to whiten, as in ctie sun, wiiich is regular. n) It is used in sublime style and in poetry. o) Tliis verb is very seldom used. p) Like t>erI8f4cn and (IU8» lofc^en, irregular only wlien intransitive. SBft^eil is al- ways transitive and regular. 9) Irregular always as an intran- sitive verb, but regular wlien transitive. r) More often used as a regulat verb. 8) Tliis poetical word is rarely used, and in the imperfect nol at all. t) All the compounds of fa^reit are irregular except Xoi\i- falreit. u) Irregular only in the partici pie now, for which gefaltet is often used. V) The forms pellg and fiettge are obsolete. So also einpfieng and emvftciige. to) i$le«gfl and flcilgt in tlw present, and Peug in the im peralive are forms used only in poetry. X) gleiK^il, iletttit and fleuct), poetical. y) gleu^efl, fleupt and fleu^, poetical. z) Sometimes regulur, gti^ttc. a) Some writers prefer giebfl, gtebt, gteb, to gibfl, gibt, gib. b) ®ebcutfi, gebest, poetical c) ®ebiegell is but a strength- ened adjective form of \be past participle. d) @ieng forging is saitiquated. e) Formerly golt, gilite, wer» used in tike imped Aidic. and BUbj. 350 ALPHABETICAL LIST OF VERBS $ 78. IKFINIIIVE. PKESBNT INDICATIVE. IMF. INDIC. _.^eiltc6f n J), lo enjoy, ©trat^Cll, to hit upon, ©cfl^eljeil, to happen ©emiuiien, to gain, to win, ©ts^Ell e), to pour, ©Ui^en'A), to resemble, ©Iftten i), to glide, ®!immen k), to shine ©vuben. to dig, ©veifen, to seize, ^abcit I), to have, fallen, to hold, attgeii m), to hang, ^(lucn n), to hew, peben, to heave, ,gei5etl, to be named, igclfcn, to help, ficiftii 0), 10 chide, tReuiien, to know, J?'liebcn, to deave, ,Elimnieup), to climb AliUfjcn, to sound, ,Kneifen, or Jiueipcu g), to pinch, ■Eomiiicii, to come, ^onncn, to be able, Jtfict()En r), to creep Kii^fen «), to choose Satocit, to load. Snffeit t), to let, Saufcn, to run, Stiben B), to suffer, Seidell, to lend, Cefen, to read, Sicgen, ta lie down, Giigta, 10 ie, t« gcnicfc, jc. it| gecat^e, i>u geviit^fi, ecgerat^ tS gefi^ie^t xdj geminne, u. i^ flUf e, >c. ii^ glei^e, :c. i^ gleite, sc. \& gliinme, ic. t(? grabc, bu grabjl, w gtSfit t(i gveife, >c. i(^ SaBt, bu ^nil, ct ^at tct) ^alte, bu ^iiltfi, ei' pit t4 ^nngr. bu pngfl, ei: pngt life fiflue, ic. i4 pebE, ic- id) oct^e, bu Sciicfl, et ^cigt t(^ (iclfe, bu iilfji, er ^tlft itj feifc, JC. id) tcune, jc. i^ tlicbc, JC. id) tlimine, jc. i(J Hinge, IC. ic^ tticifc, or tncipc, ic. t(^ fomme, bu tommfi, tr tomrnt; or bu fiimmji, cv fiimmt id) {aun, bu Eating, et fantt t(? Eriecje, ic. \6) Eii^ve, JC. ic^ labe, bu labcfl or \eil, to send, Skbenp), to boil, ©tiiseii, to sing, ©infeii, to sink, ©illiieil, to think, to luse, Siftftl, to sit, ©oUell, to be obliged ©Ijallcn q), to split, @i)eien, togpit, eviuiien, o gpin. PEESBNT INDICATIVE. ic^ fc^eltc, bu fi^ilt^ tx ftfitU icj fiiiebe, K. i4 f<9ie$e, jc. ic$ f^inbe, ic. t4 f*(afc, bu f*isra, tc f*iaft itS fdilngc, bu f^Iiiflfi, er fi^laBi t(^ fi^lcic^e, ic. i<^ f^Icife, JC. icS) fcSIeipt, It. ■ tci filicfe, JC i(| Mttepe, JC. t($ fcSIinge, ic. ic^ Winet^e, JC. tij fc^melje, bu fc^mefteii (f(imil= jcji), et f($metst (pinilst) id) Mniebe or f^uoube tc^ Miietbc, JC. id) fc^vaube, jc. ic^ ft^retbc, jc. id) fd)reic,"ic. i* fc^reitc; jc ic^ ft^tcte, JC ^ ft^wavc, !c icbftfeiDciae, ic. i(^ fdjttjeue, bu ((^Willfl, et fd)n)iat i^ [(^raimmc, jc. i4 fc^iiBinbc, JC. t4 fc^rainge, jc. i($ ft^more, jc id) fel)c, bu Ite^ii, et fiejt id) bin JC i(9 fenbc, jc i^ ftebe, It. icb ftuge, t. ii) (intc, JC. id) jinne, jc. i* fi^e, JC i* foU, bu foU(l, et foU icb fpalte, jc i« fpcic JC i4 fpinne, x. IMP. INCIC. i(^ ft^alt (fAoir . f*ot icb fcftob t(|i fd)uiib tct) Mlief i* Wlug ict f*li(i ><* f*ttff ic* f*IiS icb fdjiof i^i f(blos i4 ftjlang iib fcbmij itb f(bmolj i(6 f^noS id) f^nitl id) fibraubtc (fcbcoB) id) fd)rieb i* fcbrie i^ ft^ritt i(^ fcbvpfete i(5 febwot i* ftbtDiea i(b fcb»oU i^ fcbwamm i(b fdjtoanb icb fcbuiang oi fitoung ic^ fcbWDt or f(^tt)UT i*fab icb vuat, ic. i^ fanbte and fcnbcte i* fort tcb fanfl |i(b fnnf i^ fann i4faS i* foUte iA fpaltete i* fpie ii9ft)aBn or THE OLD FORM. § %8. 355 IMP. SUSJ, IMPERATIVE. PARTICIPLE. ic^ fcbalfe (fdjMte) itt) |4)obe t* fdjoffe id) fc^iiiibj !* fdjticft id) fc^lic^e id f*lifff i* ftfjliffc ic5 fcbliiffe id) icbloffc ic6 fdjlSiiae icft fcimiffe id) fc^mijlie left fiiiBie ic^ fdjuiftc ic^ fdjiaubete (fd)viil)c) i(t fdji'icbe iti) ffbvitc i(^ fdjrittc id) fctivotek i(^ fijreijre id) ft^roienc id} f(|n)6lK id) fd)TOnmme id) fd)waiibc i4 ft^wSnfle i(t f^iuove or fAroiirc id) fnlie ic^ wSrc ic^ fetibete t* fottc i(^ fniige i4 fiinfc ^d) fiiime (fiimie) id) fage id) foUfc icfi fpaltch ,!b fpSnne feSevc or f4)ier fit)iEbe fcticfe jd)inbe f*fafe fd)Icife i« )of itif fd)lcif« f*liefc fcblif^i fdjlingt fdjmei^v fi^milS ur fc^ncibe fc^rnube fc^veibe fircie fdjrcite fc^rote f^iucittt fd)Wi(r or fcjraellc fcftroimme fiitDinbt ((^rainflt flefc^olfen. geftfeoteit. gefcioben. gefcfcoffcii. gcf^iuiiben. gcfijlafen. gcfdilngcn. 9ef4)Ud)tn. geWUffcn. flfWIiffen. gefiloffcn. gefc^loffen. gefdjlunjeii. gef(|mijfen. gef(6mo(seii. gfWnoIien. gcfinitten. 9cfd)raubt (gcft^voben). gcfd)titben. gcfc^i'iecn. gefcjritten. gefi^coten. fictie gefeften. in geroefen. feubc gcfnnbt and gefenbet. gcfoMctt. tebc tnge finft gc ungen. gefuiiten. time gefonncn. ft*e gefcffcit. gc m. "volte gcflialten. gcfvieen. Ipcie iVtnne gefvonnen. gcfc^wotcn. (|)ioiegen. ■(^ttioUen. gtfi^tBotnmen. geWmunbtii. gcfcjwuugen. gefdiwoven. REMARKS. A) 3Jatif^tage« and 6etat^« f^lagen, to consult, are re gular. t) Regular in all other eignlfiea tions, as, to demolisk^ or ta k) As an active verb it is regu lar. 2) Commonly regular, ft^t^AUbtc it. gef4)caub Regular now except in the parti ciple; and this is frequently gcfijrotet. m) @^tt)ieif} It. in the present is provincial. n) Regular, when active. 0) ©(^ivung is less in usage tlian f(|)tt)attg* p) When active it is mostly r»- gular. q) Irregular only in the parti* eiple, and this is sometimei gefpaltet wlien the verb la active. S6« ALPHABETICAL LIST OF VERBS § 78. IKMNITIVE. Splcijicn, to split, ©Vrccjen, to speak, ©i)tic|cn r), to sprout, ©Vvingen, to spring, (Stet^eil/ to sting, to prick, @te(fen «), to stick, to be fast- ened. ©tc^en, to stand, Ste^Un, to steal, ®leijjen,-to ascend, ©tcvUElI, to die, @tie6en t), to fly (as dust), ©tint™, to stink, ©toBcn, to push, ©ttet^en, to stroke, ©tveiten, to contend. ZI)iin, to do, Icaacit, to bear, ivcffcn, to hit, Srctbcn, to drive, Sreten, to tread, Sriefen, to drop, to trickle, Stinten, to drink, iviigen, to deceive. 3Jtrbctgen, to conceal, aScrbieten, to forbid, ajcrblciben, to remain, SB«rblci4)tn, to grow pale, SBerbcibcn u), to perish, aSerbricf en, to offend, SSergcffen, to forget, iBei'^e^Ien. to conceal, aScrlicrcn, to loose, lBci;l5f($en, to extinguish, Secrfeftnllen w), to die away in sound. SJevfc^ntnben, to disappear, tUeTOicrctt, to perplex, Set)ii|(n, topaidon, PKBBENT INDICATIVE. IMP. INDIC. id) fplcipe, !c. itj f})rfc^c, bu fpttciil, er f»vi(tt id) fptiegf, jc. id) fvringe, jc. id) ii?d)e, bu jiti^fi, ei fitc^t t($ fiecfe, ic id) jJe^Ie, bu ilie^tjl, et jlic^It id) flciae, ic. i4 flevie, bu jiitbfl, et flitbt id) jiiebe, ic. iib flinEe, ic i* fioge, bu iiegejl, et: (iSgt id) fireid^e, ic. t4 (Iteite, JC. i* t^ue, bu ttiuil, er tl)ut tc9 trnge, bu tiSijl, er ttngt id) trcffe, bu tttfffl, er trift, id) treibe, ic. id) ttete, bu tvittft, er ttitt id) tricfc, jc. i(( trinEe, 2C. ii^ tritge, Vu (riigfi, er trugt id) oerierge, bu berbirgft, er uer^ birgt i^ ocrbiete, jc. iA netbleibe, jc ia nerbici^e, jc. i* Dcvberbc, bu scrbirbjl, et »ct= bftbt ti oecbrief t id^ ocrgejfe, bu ucrgijfcfl et ret= i^ Det^c^le, JC. id) tjetliete, JC. id) ucrl6f(^c, bu »etIi)fc^cilor»fc= lifi^c^, et Detlijfc^t orbetlfcbt i* oetf^alle, ic. ic^ setfc^minbe, jc. id) tetttiictc, jc ii$ vetiei^e, ic t(S fpIieO or fvlig it^ fVrae^ i* fprog ic^ fprnng ic^ |l«cb i(^ flecCte or fiat, id) fian; lf}an>l t4)^4l So^I) i* (iieg i(^ fiatb id) ftob id) naat id) liicf iti fitid) t(| ficitt ic^ t[)at id) ttug id) traf (4 ttieb i* (rat t* ttoff t($ ttanf i^l ttog i^ tetbatg ti^ Dctbot i(6 ocrilifb id) Dccblti vetbaio cs setbtoS id) ttcvgap i(^ set^e^ltc i(^ octlot i<$ oeclofcf} t^ tJCrfc^oH id) liecfdjtKalU t(^ »etaittt« id) Miiie^ OF THE OLD FORM. %18. 361 IMP. SUBJ. IMPERATIVE. PARTICIPLE, id) fproife id) furiinge id) ^a^e id) pati or fiflte id) licinbe (iiiiube) i!^ pble '.ftij^le) id) l^lege id) (Invfcc (iliiibc) id) liijbc id) jlSriFc ift ftitSe ici jltirtie t(i (ittttc id) t^iifc id) triige ict irSfe ici tnebc id) tviifc id) tviiffc icj troiitc i(^ tiiige ic^ bcvBSrge itj fievljiife id) sn-blteBe ici DCirbtitie id) DcvbiiiJbc (ufvbiiibe) c6 oevbrojft id) Dd'anpc id) Dcibt^ktc t(ft Ocrliitc i§ bevlofc^c id) l)er|$M)Siiiie ii^ berwinte fptci^c frti* ft)vie9c Tji^inflf fti* jiede fiie^I fteige ilicB fticbe iiinfc flrtie^e ^ceite trone tciff tteibe tritt trief or ttttfc triiife tciige scrtirfl uerttetc Berblfibf sevbleii^c Bcrbivb Devbvie^e sevflifi vexi)tl)k DCiIiere octliif(t)f or ocvltfc^ l)e):f(5winbe Derwirire Isetsei^e gcfpliffcK. flef))ro4)en. gefDvoffen. gcfijrangcn. gefiod)en. gtjicdt. gejlonbtn. gejio^Ien. gefltcgcn. gefiotben. geflobcn. gcftmiEctt. flcftogen. gefirit^eit. g(^i;itteit. get^an. gftrngen. getrofftit. getvteben. gctrefctt. gettoffcn. gcttuntcn. getrogeit. Ocriotgcn. setioten. Dcrbticben. I>ci:bli(ftcn. . setborieti. Detbroffen. Dctgcffcn, bet^eilt or »cr|oPen. Dcrlorcii. ocrlofc^en. Becf(5oUctu oetfc^wunbcn. Derttirrt or I Octffiorren. tttiie1)(n. r) This must not be confounded (in the imperfect) with tlie re- gular verb fVlOffelt. «) This verb is commonly regu larj when active it is always so. i) SoScrflitiben, tabeicstM«4 as dusL u) SQerbetten, to destroy (act ive), is regular, e) aSei'bteupt, IC, nearly obm- lete. 10) But little used, exoept in tiK imperfect and participle 358 ALPHABETICAL LIST OF VERBS $ '!$■ INFINITIVE. PKESBNT INDICATIVE. IMP. INDIO. aSad^ftii, to grow, iHj »a4)f«. *u iBS^fc[l, ct wSc^il i^ wu$> SBagcn or SBiefltn x). to weigh, t$ toaat or ntege, bu luagfi or wiegjl, et ttdgt or wtegt ic^mog SIBaf^eE y), to wash. id) mafc^e, tc. i($ niufi^ SBcbmz), to weave. ic^ ttc6e,:t. i(^U)ot SBcit^cn o), to yield, i^ ireli^e, it. 1$ tVt($ SBctftlt, to show, id) netfe, )c t($ tviei SBenben 6), to turn, fficrbett, to sue for, t(i tDeiibe, je, t^ tuerte, bu wiibil, et wirtt iH) tvenbete or wanbte SBerben, to become, SIBetfcn, to throw. tc^ wetbe, bu witfl, et »itb i$ wetfe, bu wtrffl, etwivft t($ hiaib or wutbe, bu ttjutbcjl, ct warbornjuttt, tt)itn)uibett,» a roatf Sffiinbeu, to wind, tc^ iDinbe, jc. ici roanb SBiffcn, to know. iH) mcif, bn wtift, ct weig t<$ wuite SBoHen, to will, i$ tviO, bu tviUjl, et wiQ ic| rooQte StH)tn, to accuse of, t(^ jei^e, je. i* Sie* 3ie^en c), to draw, t(^ jie^e, »c i*»08 SiBtnden, to force. ii^ jwiitge, le. ic^ jroaufl § 79. Verbs of the New Conjugation (commonly called "regular verbs"). {1) In verbs of the New, or simpler form, the Imperfect Tense and the Perfect Participle are not produced, as in the Old conjuga- tion, by a change of the radical vowels ; but by means of the siuffix « t or t, which serves as a tense characteristic : thus, taking th* rad OF THE OLD FORM. ) 78. 359 IMP. 8CBJ IMPERATIVE. PABTICIPLE. REMARKS. id) xsHHj^t wa*fe gcwocjfen. i* tD6gt wage or tviege B)af(^e geiBOgen. gctrofi^tn. *) SBMgen ia active, and haa wage in the itnperf. subj. : Wtcgen » neuter, and haa wicge. aSSicgcn, toroclt; is regiilar. ■y SBiifi^eil and wSf^lt are also 1 used. s) Regular except with the pocte^ or when used tisurativsly a) 3Bci4cn, to soften, to moU fy, is regular. ic^ tuicfe wcbe mctfe get»o6en. gcwi^Eti. gtwteftn. iij wcnfcetc ic^ ffiiivbe tuenbe gewcntct oi gewanbt. geiMOtbcn. h) Regular wlien activ« t(6 tturiit wcrbc gctvorben ; (and as an auxiliary) IBOtbCB. (roiirfe) mirf tBtiibe gcwotfen. gcwunScn. id) VBu5te roiffe gcwu^t. ti^ tuoQte - gewoHt. i* jie^t jci^e 8e8'«5«"- ic^ jttjonge jie^e jminge gcjogen. gcjwungen. e) 3eil<(>|l «■ antiquated, ami only in poetical usage '.c.il part (loB) of loben, to praise, and affixing thereto tt or t, w» get lo6 e t or hi t ; to which add the personal endings and we have letete or Uitt (toB +et + e), I praised ; lo6eteji or lobtcji, thoii didst praise, &c. (2) The verba of the New form differ again from tfc^se of the Old, in that the former have in the Perfect Participle the termination et or t, instead of en : as, getoB e t or gelob t, praised. See th« table of teiminations S 76. 360 PARADIGM OF A TERB $ 80. § 80. PARADIGM OF A Soften, INDICATIVE. " h S(3 f 3 '■is w " (3 PRESEHT TENSE. i* lobe, i\x lobcft, cv lobt, roir lobet), ijr lobct, lie loben, I praise. thou praisest he praises, we praise, you praise, they praise. IMPERFECT TENSE. i(^ lobte, 1)» lobtcfl, ct lobte, roic lobfen, tbv Tobtet, fte lobtcn. I praised, thou didst praise, he did praise. we did praise you did praise, they did praise. PERFECT TEKSE. I'll bafl ei- ^iit - i»iv bnbtii ibi- bnbet ftf l)abcii I have thou hast he has we have you have they have S PLUPERFECT TENSE. idi bntte ^u batttii cv ^attc iiiiv batten ibr b'dttct fie fatten r-2 I had 1 thou hadst | he had we had you had they had FIRST FDTURE TENSE. ii^l iDcrbc Ml iBtril . cc tuiib ivir luerbeii f ; ibt luerbct I ' I'ie wevtiEn J I shall thou wilt he will we shall you will they will SECOND FUTURE TENSE. trb iDcvbc ] g- bu roicfl .§ rait raerbtit f - ibr raevbct | o f?e iijcrbrn J Si I shall thou wilt he will we shall you will they will SUBJUNCTIVE. PRESENT TENSE. i^ lobe, bu lobcji, et lobe, tvii- lobeit, ijt lobet, ite lobeit, I may thou mayst he may we may you may they may IMPERFECT TENSE. iS) lobetc, bu lobctefl, cr lobetf, rait lobcten, ibr lobetet, fte lobcten. I might thou mightsl he might we might you might they imght lift 5«be bu pibffl ec ^abe mir ^aben ibr Jobct fte ^aben PERFECT TENSE. 1 may have ^ praised, &c. PLUPERFECT TENSE. bfttte bu Mttefl cr 5Stte tuir ptten ibr ^fiftct fte ptten : I might have praised, &c. FIRST FUTURE TENSE. (if) I shall praise. kc. i6) »cibe bu racrbcfl cr Mjetbe luir weibcn [ o ibr metbct ~ fte werbcn SECOND FUTURE TENSE. te^ wcrbe bu ttJcrbejl er luerbc wir merbcn ibr raevbet fie wetben ^ (if) I shall ha'e praised, be. OF THE KEW FORM. % 80. VEEB OF THE NEW FOEM. to praise. 861 CONDITIONAL. IMPERATIVE. INFINITIVE. PAHTICIPLE, PRESENT TENSE 1. wanting. 2. lobe t)u, praise thou. 3. lob? ct, let him praise. 1. loben vutt, let us praise. 2. lobct t^r. firaise ye. obcn pc, let thera praise. PRESENT TENSE. toim, to praise. PRESEBT. loSenb, praising; PERFECT TENSE. to have praised. TZRJtOS. gclodt, praisaoL FIRST FUT'JRE. i(% isflrbc er njurbe VBic roiiiben i^r tuiitbet fie wiicbtn . FIRST FUIIIRE. loden tverben, to be albout to praise. SECOND FUTURE. W Biivbe bu roih'bcjl er tuiirbc wit wurbcn ihv wittbet Re tviicbett ,z°- 16 362 LIST OF VERBS OF THE iOXED CONJUGATION. § 81. § 82. S 81. The Mixed Conjugation (embracinff the irregular verbs properly so called). There are a few verbs (sixteen in all), which have a sort of mixed conjugation : partaking of the Old Form, in that they change their radical vowels to form the Imperfect Tense and the Perfect Parti, ciple ; and at fhe same time, partaking of the New Form, in that they assume, in the same parts, the tense-sign te and the participial ending t. These are they which, strictly speaking, are the irregular verbs of the language, and accordingly, they are here so classed. They will be foimd, also, in the general List of (so called) " irregular " verbs (page 346), which, for the sake of convenience, we have ther** inserted. S 82. LIST OF VERBS OF THE MIXED CONJUGATION, INFINmV^ PRESENT fff tie indicative. IMPERFECT. PAST PAHTI- CIPLE, S JndicaL SubjuncU 0* SicnntHf to bum, JStingcn, to bring, Iienfen, to think, S>iitfen, to be permitted, $aben, to have, SEennen, to know, «3nnen, to be able, can, Vi'Htn, to be allowed, may, ^iiffcn, to be obhged, must, 9tennen, to name, fRfnntn, to run, eenben, to send, eoOtn, to be obliged, shall, 3Gmben, to turn, S5i{fen, to know, XGoae^ to be willing) iAbfltf, bubfltfp, «rbatf i4 I)abc, bu baft, n 1)at iA tann, bu fannfi, cc fann 19 mag, bu niag^, cr mag i(^ mufi, bu niu^t, cr nm^ iify feD, bu foSp, w foO i± ntif, bo rotter, ct raiifi i4 viS, bu »m% cr »ig. i(^ branntc ii$ brad)tt i^ bad)tc iA burfte t4 batte id) tanntc idi fonntc icff mot^te i<^ iiiu^te id) nanntt ic^ ranntc ii^ fanbte i(fa ivonbtc i4 mu^tc id) brenntf id) br^c^tt t4 bnd>rt [t^ biirfte icf) tjntte id) lennte id) fBnnte t4 mid)tt id) niii^tc id) nennte i^ rennte i(^ fenbctf i^ tvenbctt i4 wfi^tc gebrannt. gebract)!. gebad}t. geeurft. gebabt. jefannt. gefonnl, geniot^t. gemuftt. genannt. getanat. gefanbt. geroanbt genu^ brinlif pabadioms of irregular verbs. § 83. 365 § 83. Paradigms of ibrbgular verbs. (1) In order to a better display of the irregularities of some oi these verbs, we append the following paradigms. They will be found exceedingly coavenient for ready reference. Some of these verbs, also, have certain peculiar uses, which require special attention. For this reason we have, immediately after the paradigms, added a series of explanatory remarks, with copious examples illustrating toe veral wa/s in wluoh they are employed. f34 PABASIGMS OF IRBEOULAB TEBBS. $83. (2) S)«rfc«, to be permitted, INDICATIVE. PRESENT TENSE. ic^ bnrf, bu barfjl, cc barf, n>tr biivfeti, ibi biivffl, (te buifcn, I am thou art he is we are you are they are ic^ fcUtftJ, ba burftc^, er buvfte, wtr buvften, it)r bnrffct, jte burftcti, IMPERFECT TENSE. I wa3 thou wast he was we were you were they were ys PERFECT TENSE. i6) f) ftc ^nttcn J I had thou hadst he had we had you had they had FIRST FUTURE TENSE. id) IBfVbC bu mirji cv toirb roir iBctbcn ibr mevbet (ic TOcrben I shall thou wilt he will we shall you will they will SECOND FUTTTEE TENSE. i(6 wcrbc bu ii)ir|i er luitb iBtr mctbttt if)r ttcvbet Re uerbetl I shall thou wilt he will we shall you will they will 1 g-^ id^ bfirfe, bu biirfefl, ec bfirfe, wtr biirfcn, t^t bfirfet, fte burfcn. i^ biirfte, bu biirftejl, cr burfte, wtrbfitften, i6r butftet, fte biirften. SUBJUNCTIVE. PRESENT TENSE. I may thou mayst he may we may you may they may II IMPERFECT TENSE. I might ) -g thou mightst S he mi^ht ['§ we mi^ht f S you might i "■ they might J £ PERFECT TENSE. t(^ Sale bu Qabefi er ^abe roir Ijabcn ibr ^abet fte ^oben I may have oeec ^ petmitted, tie PLUMIRFECT TENSE. I might have beea pennltted, fcc. i(^ batte bu ^attefi er l)Stte mtr ^niten i^r \fatM fte pUeit FIRST FUTtTRE TENSE. t(6 toerbe ") (if) I shall be per- btt roerbefi I .. mitted, &c. er Mjerbe [§_ wit iDcrbcn fs il)r rocvbet I ■ fte werbeii J SECOND FUTURE TENSE i6) luerbe "1 g bu njerbefl ( ^ cr roetbe 1 i«s- toiv werbcn j ■£■ i^r roetbct = fte tuetbcu J Si (if) I shaU havi been permitted. PARABiaUS 01 ISBEaULAR TURDS. § S^- ^^^ to dare. (See Eemark 9.) CONDrriONAL. IMPERATIVE. INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE, Wanting. PKESENT TENSE. biivfctt, to be per- mitted. PRESEHT. biivfenb, being permitted. PERFECT TENSE, geburft ^o6en, to have been peimitted. FERTKCT. grtatft, peimittad. FIRST f TJTtTlE. {^ tvitrbe bu miirbc|i tc Bjurbe toil: ivili'beii ijr luiitbet ftc iBiirbett , h^S. SECOND FUTURB. id) wiii'be bB n)iivbe(i « tDiirbc mm iBumit f *& g * ittc toiirbet ftc t«Jirb«n . S I"? ■s S66 FARADiaUS or IRREaCLAS TSRBS. $ 83 (3) Si&nma. INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. PEESENT TEHSE. PRESEHT TEHSE. i(l) Eonn, I am ii^ !6nne, I may bu faiittjl, thou art bu tonneft thoumayst « cr !ann, he is Jj er tonne, he may ■9 tuit foiincn, we are •§ wit {6nne«, we may s i^r tonnct, you are i^r lonnct, you may jtt tiinnen, they are fie Knncn, they may ; IMPERFECT TEHSE. IMPERFECT TEHSE. t($ fonnte, I was i* tonnte, I might ■) bu tonntejl, thou wast bu tonntefl, thou mightst «j n tomti, he was A er tonntc, he might 1 ■§ mil tonnten, we were ■s wit tonnten, we nught f „ i^t tiinntet, you might -^ if)r fonntet, you were fie fonnten, they were fie tonnlen, they might . PERFECT TEHSE. PERFECT TEHSE. i^ 5«ie I have t<^ iaie bu ^abefi I may have been bu fenfl *f thou hast 3 ^- able, &C. et ^ttt . s he has •a er iabt mir t)aim £ we have s rait ^aten il)t \)abet <= you have 4) i^r ^abet a jte Jabtn . they have . fit ^aicn . PLtlFERFECT TEHSE. PLUTBRFECT TEHSE. t* {ifltte -) I had 1 . US) b&ttt 1 I might have been able. &c bu ^attefi ■»j thou hadst s bu pttefl et ^otte g he had ea et 6atte g wit fatten ■£ we had ' B rait fatten <** ipr §attct <= you had J if)t ^(ittct t» He fatten J they had fie patten . FIRST FUTURE TEHSE. FIRST FUTURE TEHSE. iit wrrbe I shall icj werbt (if) I shaU be bu tttrfl jj- thou wilt jj btt raerbefl J.- able, &c cr mitb iBtr luerben S he will ■« weshaU .-§ et tijcrbe rait racrbcn ■1 il)t «Derbet •" you wiU J tl)t roerbet 52 fie Mjerben they vriU J fte wcrbcn SECOHD F-JTURE TEHSE , SECOHD FUTURE TEHSE. id) »erbe 1 S I shall J. t^ racrbe " 5 (if) I shaU ha«« >S been aUe. ftc bu luirfi •§ thou wilt V bu ttcrbefi « wirb If he will -°ji er raetbe »a- rote roetbcn f g we shall 8;« rotr roetbcn "a tjt wetbct £ you will 5 ibt raerbet £ fie wetben S, they will J J3 fte roetben . ^ PARADIGMS OF IBBEanLAR -VAKBS. $ 83. 307 to be able. (See Remark 10.) OONDITIOJiTAL. IMPERATIVE. INFINITIVE. PAETICIPLB. Wanlins- PRESENT TENSE. PRESENT. Knncn, to be able. E6nncnb, being able PERFECT TENSE. PERFKOT. jetonnt ^aSen, to have been able. gcfonnt, beenaUe. FIRST FUrtTRE. ((^ Wflrbc tu mSrbeit cc wiirte iric njiirben tSr ttiitbct fte Wiitbftt , fiitinen, 1 should be able, &c. SECOSD FUTURE. fc^ tuiirbe b« wiitbejj er raiirtc wtr wiivbeit i|t wiirbel fte uiitben . 868 FABADIGMS OF IBRSaULAR VERBS. $ 83. (4) ^lo^ctt, to l»e allowed, " (3 INDICATIVE. PRESENT TENSE. id) mag, bu mngft cr^ mng, mil- mogcn, i^t moget, lie mpgen. I am thoa art he is we are you are they are teg moc6tc, bu mo^tefl, cr moi^te, uti iiiD($len, ijr mo^tct, fie mvHttn, IMPEErECT TENSE. I was thou wast be was we were you were they were i4> Jnic ■ bu $a(l ct ^at xoit ^«icn i6r fiabtt fif Jaben . PERFECT TENSE. I have thou hast he has we have you have they have fi PLUPERFECT TENSE. ic^ bfttte bu fiatteji er ^ntte tuir fatten ibr ^aftct (te ^nttett «• ■i I had !■< thou hadst I | he had I i we had f ^ you had I 8 they had Ji! FIRST FUTURE TENSE. t^ wtrbe 5U wtrjl ct luirb ^ tuir Bjcrbcn [=2 ijr rocrtet fte rocrbcn I shaU thou wilt he will we shall you will they will SECOND FUTURE TENSE. 1^ i(^ werlit bu wjtrji et ratvb luir njetbfti i]Jt werbet fte uiecben I shaU thou wilt he will we shall you will they will SUBJUNCTIVE. PRESENT TENSE. t($ moge, bu mogefi, ct miigc, roir mbgcn, ibt mBflct, jie mogcn, I may j ^ thou mayst | » he may ^ § we may , | you may _ they may a* IMPERFECT TENSE. ic^ mo^te, bu moc^tcji, er iiiot^te, roir mSittcrt, ijt moe^tct, fte mot^teii, I might thou mightst ne might we might vou might they might PERFECT TENSE. ii) |aie bu ^abe^ cc ^be tuit ^(iben ibt Jabet fie ^aben I may have been allowed, &c PLUPERFECT TENSE. t^ ^atte bu tiatteft ct ptte roit IiSttcn if)t pttet fte patten I might have been ■s! allowed, dtc FIRST FUTURE TENSE. ii) ttjecbc bu Bjcrbefi ct iBctbe roit tocvben ibt njcrbct (te werbcn (if) I shaa be tl lowed, &c. yi SECOND FUTURE TEHSB. (if) I shall hav* i^ Mccbe bu tserbefi et ttetb'e nit metben i^t wetbet fte tsetben s been allowedi PABAOIOMS OF IRRBainJLB VERBS. $ 83, S69 Jo liave liberty. (See Remark 11.) CONDITIONAL. IMPERATIVE. INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE. Wanting. PRESENT TENSE, m5gen, to be allowed, mSgenb, being allowed. FIRST rUTDRE. f^ iBiirbe "l ■Ss bu miirbcjl > -a ft ttiirbe Bit wiirbcn HI l^t ttiirbct jje tuui'bcn . ^'^ SECOHD F [ITURE. i(6 Bjiivbc ] Ill bu luiirbcP tv luiiibe •S -a^ iDtr tuuvben ■«■ -Si il)t njiicbet gemo been fie wuvicn J PERFECT TENSE, to have been d- lowtd. PERFECZ. alliwed 3 70 FABADIOMS OF iRBEGULAR TEBBS. $ 83. (5) ajliiffctt, to be obliged; INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. ic^ mu|, bu mu^t, cr muS, mit muffeit, rtc ntiiffet, fte miilfcn, PRESENT TENSE. 1 am thou ait he is we are you are they are IMPERFECT TENSE. I was thou wast he was we were yon were they were . id) muSte, bu mugte^, cc mu§te, njir miilJtcn, tftt tnugtct, fie mu^ten. >-^ ii^ f)a6e bu ()o^ lutr ^aittt ifcr %ab(t fte ^abcn PERFECT TENSE. I have thou hast he has we have you have I they have J , PLUPERFECT TENSE. I had thou hadst he had we had you had they had i(^ ^(ittc 1 bu tntteji ^ cv latte I'S mir batttn f S i^r ^attet 1 => fte fatten J ^•S FIRST FUTURE TENSE. tc^ tDCVbe bu mtvjl er njirb roil' ujeibcn il)r toevbft fte Kietben ^ f --a S IshaU thou wilt he will we shall you will they will ^1 SECOND FUTURE TENSE. i(^ tuctbe bu luirfi cr mitb mir mcvbcn ibr Bjerbet f{e wetbcn . I shall thou wilt he will we shall you will they will PRESENT TENSE. i^ iniiffe, bu muffefl, ec miiffe, ttiir miiftett. i^r muffet, fte miif|cn. I may diou mayst he may we may you may they may IMPERFECT TENSE tc5 ittii^te, bu mujtcli, et mugtc, ttjtr mii^tcn, i^r miiSfet, fte inii^ten, I might ■" thou mightst I he might we imght you might they might PERFECT TENSE. iS) BnBe bu $aleft er Jabe mir ^aBen il)t ^abct |te ^oben I may have been obliged, &c. PLUPERFECT TENSE. ic^ fiiitte bu pttefl ec ifitte wit ptten ibt \}atttt fie ^(itten I might have been ->; obliged, &c. 1 FIRST FUTURE TENSE. t* wcvbe bu aerbeft ct tuevbe wtr Bjcrben tl)r njcrbct fte iBcrben (if) I shaU be obliged, &c. SECOND FUTURE TENSE, (if) I shaU have been obliged i(J tuerbe bu toerbeji er wecbc rair wcrbcn t^r ttetbet fte werben &c. FAKASlaUB OF IRRSanLAB VXBBS. i 83. ninsti (See Remark 12.) 871 CONDITIONAL. IMPERATIVE. INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE. Wanting. FRESENI TENSE, mujfeit, to be obliged. FSESENT. mitffeni), being obliged. PERFECT TERSE to luTO been obliged. FERncT. gemiigt, obligisd. FIRST FUTURE. bu wurbeji er toflrbe tlJU' iBflrtcit i6« ttitrbet fie ttfitbsn . ■IS SECOND FUTURE ill) miirbe bu tijittbed ev wutbe wir wiirben i6t tviicbet fit tvfltben 972 PABADIOMB OF IBREtlULAK TERBb % 83>. (6) Gotten, to iM INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. i* foU, tu foUfl, ct'foa, iBtr foUen, t^c fpQet, fte foUen, PEESENT TEHSE. I am thou art he ia we are you are they are HHPEEFECT TENSE. i* fotttc, bU foatc^, cr foUtc, mir foDten, i^t foUtet, f5e follten, I was thou wast he was we were you were they were , PERFECT TENSE. i($ i)abt bu ^afi rair ^aben i^c ^abet 1 have 1 • thou hast 1 he has ( : we have f you have 1 they have J . PLUPERFECT TENSE. i^ fjatU bu bnttcji ct ^otte ruiv batten ibt WM fie bettsn I had thou hadst he had we had you had they had >-S FIRST FUTURE TENSB. id) luerbe bu IBttjl er mirb rait tBftbcti ibr tocrbet jie metben f" IshaU thou wilt he will we shall you will they will SECOSC FUTURE TENSE. i^ racrbe ] g bu rairjl | >g er Bjirb I 'o- ibr werbet I s. :e uetben J ^ I shall thou wilt he will we shall you will they will PP.ESENT TEHSE. i4) foUe, bu foUejl, er foUe, iBit foUcn, ibr foUet, jte foUeit, I may thou mayst he may we may you may they may i^ toUte, bu foUtcil, cr folltc, rait foUten, ibt foOtct, fte foUten, PERFECT TENSE i(^ babe bu bobcjl er babe rait boben ibr babet f!e ^abeu IMPERFECT TENSE. I might thou mightst he might we might you might they might ^3 I ma^ have been > obhged, &C. a PLUPERFECT TENSE. i(^ batte bu bittejl er bStte rair ^iitten ibr battet fte ^iittett I midit have been ^ obuged, &c. a FIRST FUTURE TENSE. i(S ttctbc bu raerbefl er ractbe roir raerben ibr raerbet fte wetben (if) I shaU be obliged, &c .a V aj-3 SECOND FUTURE TENSE, t4) ractbe Id' (il) I shall have been obliged, bu raerbefl cr raetbe rait raerben ibt raetbet fte raerben &C. FiRASIOMS Of IRBEGULAS TBRBB. § i obliged. (See Eemark 13.) 373 CONDITIONAL. IMPEfiATIVB. INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE. Wanting. PEESENT TENSE, folJen, to be obliged. PRESENT. fpUenb, being obliged. PEBFECT TENSE. aefoUt Mim, to have been obliged. rsuncz. obligsd. riRST FUTURE, Jd) wfirbe ' ku ttiirbeil n roiirtt wtv wurbtn tSr wurbet Pe tuiltbfn J „■» ^ S « ^3 SECOND FUTURE 11% miirbe btt tDucbeji er toiirbt wit ttiirbcn tit loiitbet fif ttficben .B Si " J 03 1-4,2 874 PARADIOUS OF IBBEQULAR VERBS. % 83 (7) aajiffctt, i\\ ! Sr ( (2 ' »f ! ill |i5 INDICATI^'B. PEESENT TEKSE. ill tt)ei|, i>u tveif t, ct meip, «)ir ttiffm. ifei tBtffet, jt( »iffeB I know, thou knbwest. he knows, we know, you know, they know. IMPERFECT TENSE. \ L e. my purpose is to go. The expression of mere futurity would, be, id) Itsetbe gc^en. Kindred to this is another signification of tooUeit: as, er Will bii^ gefet;en ^aben, he wills to have seen you, that is, he will have it or affirms, that he saw you. 880 EXAMPLES ON THE USB OF buifeit, foniien, mogen, ac. S 83 (15) Examples, further illustraling the uses of the preceding verba. 3ci) barf c6 ■:^un. (Si butfte Biettetd)t toa^r fein. (Se burfte too^ gefdje^en. iDu barfji eg nur forbenu (Sx lann ioeber lefen nod) f^rei6en. 3ct) fann mt^ i«en. 3d) lonnte i^n nic^t t)etjiet;en. ^onticn @te l^eute ju mir tommen ? 3d) mag baa nic^t. 3t^ mod)te geme ttiffeit, tote»tel U^r cS ijL 5d) moc^te toc^l etoas ba»cn l^(u ben. ®g mag fein. 3d) niod)te IteBer. £Koge et tange le6en ! 3c% mu^ ea tt)un. ®r milf te fic^ feineS SSeirogcnS f^Ss men. TOupfe eg nid)f fo fommen ? SBenn iii flerben mupte, fo Wftrb» ii) r« nid)t t^un. 3§ he may . -g •s we may ( a "^ you may » they may J ■" IMPERFECT TENSE. IMPERFECJ TENSE. ill t\i t(t ttutbe bu WUfbefl cr tuutbe ti)tt muvbcit tjv wuvbct fte ttjutbcu _ I was ^ tliou wast •g he was ■3 we were "^ you were they were , 13 i($ ttiiirbe bu tturbejl ec roitrbe roir roiicbeti il)c roiicbet fte (uiirbeti . I might ^ thou mightst •g he might "S we maght '^ you might they might -6 PERFECT TSNSE. PERFECT TENSE. 6li ill icj bin ■) c I have 1 bu bijl e thou hast et iil 1 1 he has roic ftiib ( £ we have ijc feib 3 you have fie ftnb a, they have . a 1 i(b fci bu feieji er fei roir fcicn ibr feiet |le feien g I may have been ■g praised, &c •S PLUPERFECT TENSE. PLUPERFECT TENSE. it^ war 1 c I had bu niai'ji -g thou hadst ec tunc , g he had mit wavcn ' .:: we had ibr watct o you had fte luareit J "g, they ha''. 1 t^ Ware bu roiirefl ec roiire rote roSven t^c wiicet fte wiireB g I might have bevfl ■g praised, &c. FIRST FUTURE TENSE. FIRST FUTURE TENSE. ill i(J tDcrbe I g I shall m tuirll -g thou wilt ec mivb IS he will l»ic merbcn f^ we shall ibr roerbet 3 you will fte merbcti J Sj they will 1 1 i($ roerbe bu roerbefl ec roecbe roir roevbtn t'bc roerbet (tc werben c (if) I shall b« S praised, &c. SECOND FUTURE TENSE. SECOND FOTiraE TENSE. Ili ic^ ttierbe bu ttirfl er niirb loir tterben ibr raerbet fte werben , = I shaU 1 t « thou wilt 1 g_g he will [■' ^'S- we shall ' ; a you virill 1 a, thev will J ■* i' it§ roerbe bu rocrbrfi er roerbe roir roecben ibr roerbet [te roerben g (if) I shaU have ■S been piaisrd, g_= &c. PARADIGM OF A FABSIVK TEBB. $ 85. 883 A PASSIVE VEEB. to be praised. CONDITIONAL. IMPERATIVE. INFINITIVE. PAKTIO, ^2 FIRST FVTURE. ic^ TOiirbc bu ivucbefi er iDUtbe Mjtv iBuvbeii ibr rourbel fte BJiirben . SECOND fUTUKE, f<^ iDiirbc >u wiivbefi er miirbe •Bit wiirbcn iSr ajiitbtt Re isurben PRESENT TENSE. 1. wanting 2. wevbe btt 1 3. luerbe n I ^ 1. wetbenwii; J-° 2. mevbettbt | «, 3. ujcrbett fie J be thou praised. PRESENT TENSE. geloBt wcrbeit, to be praised, PERFECT TENSE. gcIobtiDPVbcnfein, to have been praised. gclobt, pnueed FUTUKE TENSB. irci-betifleloStmet" iKD, to he about to be prai0ed. 984 RXFLEXIVE VERBS. % 86. S 86. Rbplbxtve Verbs. (1) A ^erb is said to be reflexive, when it represents the subject as acting upon itself. We have several such in English ; he deports ninse.f well; he bethovght himself; they betook themselves to the woou ^nfi bii^ cv ^iit fid) mit ^abcn und i6v 6abct curt) fie fallen fti^ f-l I have thou hast he has we have you have they have id) ^abe mt($ bu ^abcfl bi(^ cv ^abc ft(^ roit ^abcn uiiS f ibr bil>ct cu(^ I ftc babcn ftt^) PLUPERFECT TENSE. i^ ^attc mid) MJ biiftcjl bic^ fv ^attc ftcfe roir batten im} ibv ^attct ciK^ (le fatten fid) I had »; thou hadst S he had ■5" we had "= you had they had J. FIRST FUTURE TENSE. t(^ wetbc int*' ou mivfi bic^ cv luirb fi(4 miv luevbcii uti8 ibv rocrbct cuc^ fie itcrbcn ft(^. I shall - ihou wilt § he will ^ we shall "^ you will they will SECOiro FUTURE TENSE. id} tncrbe mi^ bu ttitfi bic^ ct tuivb ft(6 rait metbcn un« ibr ttcrbct md) ftc wcvbcii fti^. g- I ahaU »» thou wilt •a- he will ~ we shall ^ you will S, they will i<^ fvcue mid), bu fvcucji bic|, ev fvfuc fi*, niic fveuen unS, ibv frciict cu4), ftc ficucn fid). I may 1 thou mayst / ^ he may i S we may [ £ you may " they may J IMPERFECT TENSE. t($ freuete mid), I might bu fteuctcfi bi^, thou mights! | „ er freuete ftt^, he might . .a M)ir ftcurten un8, we might |-g i^r fteuetct cucb, you might | '• fte frcucten ftt^, they might > PERFECT TENSE. I may hai e re« joiced, Stc. PLUPERFECT TENSE. i(^ [),itte mi(^ bu ^iittefl bi(^ er pttc fic^ roir fatten unS ibr pttct eucfe fie Ijiitten fic^ 1 migtit have »» rejoiced Sic 1-2 FIRST FUTURE TENSE. it^ rocvbe mirt)") tif) I shall re- bu rocvbefi bitj | . joice, &c. er roetbc fiib i S luir roevbcn un§ f § ibc TOftbct tnd) "- fie rocrben ft(^. SECOND FUTURE TENSE i^ roevbe mid) bu roevbefl tid) er rocvbe ficft roiviDcrbenunS ibv roevbet euc^ ftc roctbeii 84, (if)IshaUhave rejoiced, &c. PARADIQM OF A REFLB2IVS VERB. J 87. 387 REFLEXIVE TERB. to rejoice. CONDITIONAL. FIESl FUTURE. ic6 (riirbf mii^ bu iBiirbcft iiib tv luiivbc ftcfe iDtr louvbcn un8 fie miivben fii^ "^ "a o SECOND FUTURE, lc6 njuibc micS) bu reiitbfji bicj et roiiibc ft(S tuir tuflrbsn unS ihr wittbft cuc^ Re miitben ftcj 5 5.2 Q3 k»4 S IMPERATIVE. INFINITIVE, FKESEHT TENSE. 1. wanting. 2. fveuc (Ml) bii, rejoice thou, &;c. 3. fveiie (et) ftct), 1. frcucit (wii) uns, 2. ftEuct(i6r)fU(J, 3. fveueii (fte) ft(^. PRESENT TENSE, fift fveiien, to rejoice. PERFECT TENSE. ft* flefi'cut J^dBcn, to nave rejoiced. PAETIC. PRESENT. ftc^ frrafttt. rejoicing. FESFECl. Wanting. 388 COMPOUND VERBS. § 88. S 89. S 88. Impersonal Verbs. (1) Tlii impersonal verb, properly so called, is one destitute o( the ^rsi and second persons: being confined to the third person sin- gular, and having for its grammaticaLsubject the pronoun ei, without definite reference to any antecedent, as, tg regnet, it rains ; ti tpi't, it lightens; 10 fdjneit, it snovi's ; e« ft xt, it freezes ; ti bonnett, it thunders; e« t jut, it thaws; e« ijaQilt, it hails ; eS togt, it dawns. (2) It must immediately appear, that a verb may be impersonal) and yet belong to any of the classes of verbs described in preceding 'sections. Thus some are transitive: some are intransitive; some are passive ; some are reflexive ; &c. Examples. Sg dtgert mi(6, it vexes me, i. e. I am vexed; c« fiiett i^n, it chills him, i. e. he is chilled or frozen ; eg fjungert mitti, it hungers me, i. e. I am hungry ; eg veift, there is a hoar frost; 66 ^cipt, it is said ; es Witb Diet boBon getebet, it is much talked about; e« »erjief)Et fict), it understands itself, L e. it is understood ; &c. eg ftagt jtd), it asks itself, i. e. it is asked, it is the question ; ee gicbt SDlenf^en, it gives or yields men, i. e. there are men, % 89. Compound Verbs. (1) Various derivative verbs in German are produced by the union />f simple words with prefixes. * Most of these prefixes are separalle, that is, may stand apart fi-om the radicals ; some, however, are found (o be inseparable; some are either separable or inseparable, according to circumstances. (2) The prefixes are themselves, also, either simple or compound ; IS, ^ e t toinineti, to come Aere or hither; l^erub ertommen, to come ' Under the name of Prefixes are here comprehended all those invariable wirds, (as adverbs and prepositions,) which are combined with other words to vary or modify their simincation. They are, also, often called Particles. The simple words with which they are tmited, are generally verbs ; but often nouna End adjectives are, by prefixes, converted into verbs. SIMPLE PREVlXaa SEPARABLE. §. 90. S8» mer here, or liilTi sr. In most instances, the prefixes mflj be trans, laffij severally as above ; but often they are found to be merely ut tensive or euphonic. * m, fiom, off, down; an, to, at, in, on, towards j 9luf, SIU8, S3ci, 2)0, on, upon, up ; out, out of, frot ; by, near, with ; there, at ; Sat, there, at ; eitt, (Smpot, Sott, in, into ; up, upward, on high ; onward, away, forward ; ®eflen. 3n, in, within; home, at home ; •§«, hither, here ; ma, thither, there, away; with; fHad), after; 06, down, downwards, under j on, over, on account of; S8er, for, before ; away, off; lo, towards ; It, to set or put aown ; tc depose, ^ufiinorn, to catch at, i. e. t< begin. Slufoelicii, to go up ; to rise. 8lu8iiebmcu, to take out ; to choose. SBcifie^eit, to stand by; to assist. IDableiben, to remain there, or at, to stay ; to persist. 33avrei(!)cit, to reach there, i. e. ta offer. Sinfaiifcn, to buy in ; to purchase. ©mvov^cbeii, to lift up. 8i>ttfnl)tcn, to drive or bear on; to continue. @egeii^alten, to hold against ; to resist ; to compare. SnuJoTjiim, to dwell in. •&simEe^vcti, to turn homewards ; to return, .geibringcn, to bring hither, or along, .^{nflctjcn, to go thither, or away. 3}2itne^meit, to take with, or along. 0lo^folgcii, to follow after; to succeed. SJtrtcrreifen, to pull down. £5bliegen, to lie on, i. e. to apply one's self to ; to be incum- bent on. Scvgetjcn, to go before; to sur- pass. 3S5cgblcificri, to stay away. Suflcbcn, to give to ; to grant. * This is likewise often the case in English : thus, f.jc (which literally signi- fies out or out of,) has, in some words the signification very, exceedingly or the like ; as, exasperate, to make sen/ angry: so a, (literally, «o, a i ;) in the word ameliorate, is merely euphonic ; the derivative form (ameliorate) nnan- ing nothing more than the siit pie one, meliorate. S90 COMPOUND FBSFIXES SEPARABLE. $ 91. § 91. Compound Prefixes separable. Sln^eim (aii + ^tim, to-home) ; 5)(iBci (ba + iei, there-by) ; 2)al)tc (ba + |cr, there-hither) ; 23a6in (ixi -f |in, there-thither) ; 33agegeii (ba + g gen, there-against) ; ©aiiifi-er (ba -|- uieber, there-below) ; S>at«n (bar -I- an, there-to) ; ijjaiauf tbar -f- auf, there-on) ; ®artiii (bai + ein, there-in) ; 55a»on (bn -t- Son, tbere-from) ; 5)«oor (ba -l- soi:, there-before) ; 53a»ibe( (bo -|- Wibev, there-against) ; ©aju (ba + ju, there-to) ; ffiainjifi^ n (ba -|- jwifcten, there-between) ein^et (ctn -I- ^er, into-hither) ; (etlt -f- flcgen, apart-towards) ; gntjiwci (ent + jwct, apart-two) ; §eto6 (^et -1- ab, hither-down) ; 5etan (^er + an, hither-to) ; i^etauf (^er -f aiif, hither-on) ; ^ctau3 (tier + nuS, hither-out) ; .gcrbei li)tt + bn, hither-along) ; .^creitt (^et + tin, hither-into) ; •^ecmebet (in + uiebtr, hither-down) .gcriitcr (dec -f iiOci', hither-over) ; .gcrum ([)er -(- urn, hither-around) ; .gerunfev (^cr-l-unter. hither-under); .^ctsor (f)cv + nor, hither-forward) ; .gccju (ber -f jn, hither-to) ; tginab (Mn -f nb, thither-down) ; .ginnn (fitn + an, thither-to) ; .§iunaf (bin -|- auf, hither-on or up) ; .ginaus (I)in + au8, thither-out) ; &in«tn ({)in + ein, thither-into) ; 6intan (§int(en) -|- an, behind-to) -, 2tnl)cimflcUen, to put home to i. e. to refer to. Dabeijiefjen, to stand close by. Sn^cvf(^lei4)en, to sneak along ©abif.eiltn, to hasten away. Sagegenfein, to be against, ©aniebei'ft^lagen, to beat down. Snranfetcn, to put or lay there- to, i. e. to risk, to stake. Saraufgcbcn, to give there-on, i. e. to give an earnest ; Sarcinvcbcn, to talk there-in, i. e. to interrupt. SJaoonlaufeii, to run off or away. Savioiiicgcn, to lie before. 5)a»ibei'l)obcn, to have (objections) against. tDajut^un. to do (in addition) thereto ; to add. 5)ajiDif(^envEbcn, to speak there in the midst, ©inbcvste^en, to draw along. gntgefltngebcn, to go towards ; to go to meet. Sntjweibiei^En, to break or burst asunder, .^cvabfctm, to v>ut down ; to lower. .gcranfii^rctt, to bri;:? on or alon^ .gerauffa^tcn, to dr e or urge on. .gcronSfo^ren, to dr e out. .gevbcitufen, to call ^ or towarda .gereinfaljren, to dn- ai or into. J^etntebcrblitfen, to look under, .gtriiberfommen, to come over, ^trumgcbcn, to give or hand around, cgcruntcrfaljrcn, to drive down. ■getuottrcten, to step forward. ^Eijnttcttn, to step towards, .ginabtvetfn, to step down, .ginnntvcten, to step up to. .giunufjietjen, to pull up. igtiinuStBfvfcii, to throw ouu .gineingie^cn, to pour into. .gtutaafe^en, to put behind; to undervalue. OOISPOC/ND PREFIXES SEPARABLE. % 91. 3d] gfnttr^er (Sinter + Jet, after-hither) ; i^tniifiet (tin + fiber, thither-over) ; Milium (^in -I- uin, thither-around) ; ginunter (^iii + unter, thifher-under) ; •ginmeg •&in8U Uebeveiii Uni^er Um^in aSoran ajoraiif aSovaus SBotSet SSoi^er SBovubcr (^n -I- weg, thither-away) ; (6in -I- jU, thither-towards) ; (fiber -f- eiii, over-into) ; (urn -t- ^cv, around-hither) ; (urn + l)irt, around-thither) ; (»or + «n, before-to) ; (»ot + auf, before-on or up) ; (oor -t- auS, before-out) ; (oov -f- bei, before-by) ; (Dor -1- 5er, before-hither) ; (sor + iibev, before-over) ; SSi^rnicg (tor -1- weg, before-away) j 3»uor (ju + DOT, before-to) ; b.iiucf (jU -I- tfid, back-to) ; 3u(ammen (|b + fammen, to-seth<,-r) ■^intev^n^^^tn, to see afterward* i^iiiubcrtraflcn, to carry over. ^inumfiottcrn, to flutter there about. .ginuntevfijttuacn, to leap down there. .ginwegne^meit, to take away .giiisucilcn, to hasten away. UebcieinEommeil, to come over into, i. e. to agree. Umberfc^nitcn, to gaze around. Umbiittonnen, to be able there- about ; to forbear. SBovnnlielleii, to place before. SSovttuffleigett, to mount on be fore ; to ascend. SSornuSfe^cn, to see or spy ou< before hand ; to anticipate. SBorbcireiten, to ride along before , to ride past. SSor^erfeben, to foresee. aSorfiberfabren^ to drive along past in a coach SSorwegne^mcn, to take away be- fore ; to anticipate. gutortblitl, to do before ; to etcel, Sututfte^rcn, to return. SufammflifeS'ii. to P"' together, 392 FAfiASiaM OF A COMPOUND VERB SEPAKABLE. J 92. § 92. PAEADIGM OP A COM INDICATIVE. PRESENT TENSE i6) fange an, bu fatigji an, ct fStigt on, tcic fangen an, i^c fanget an, fte fangen an. I begin, thou beginnest. he begiiis. we begin, you begin, they begin. MPERFECT TENSE. t(6 fing an, bu ftngll an, er fing an, roit ftngen an, ifit finget an, (te fingen an, 1 bemn. thou didst begin, he began, we began, you began, they began. SUBJUNCTIVE. PERFECT TENSE. t>H ftajl tc ^at rair Jabcn ibr Jabet jte ^aben I have thou hast he has we have you have they have J ill PLUPERFECT TENSE. t(| Wit 1 jj 1 had bu battefi ^ thou hadst Et ^ofte g he had rait batttn (■&- we had i^t ^altct W you had |?e fatten J " they had FIRST FUTURE TENSE I shaU thou wilt he will we I itft racrbe bu rait^ ct ttiitb mir roerbcn ijlit wcrbet jie ttctbtn ■£ we shall f ^ you will they will PRESENT TENSE. ii) fangc an, bu fangefl an, et fonge nn, rait fougen an, ibr fanget an, fte fangcn an. I may thou mayst he may we may you may they may IMPERFECT TENSE. SECOND FUTURE TENSE. it6 raerbc "j c bu raiiji .S ct raivb 1 JS- roir rattbcn [us. tff raetbcn J § I shall thou wilt he will we shall you will they will M i(i) pngc on, bu fiugcfl an, ct fingc an, rait fingen an, itt finget an, fie Piigcn an. I might thou mightst he might we might you might they imght i^ babe bu babcfl ct ^abe raic ^aben ibt ^abet fie l;aben PERFECT TENSE. I may have be- , gun, &c PLUPERFECT TENSE. isb bath bu ^attefl ct battc rait fatten ifet liattct f^e batten I might have be- gun, &c. FIRST FUTURE TENSE. (if) I shaU gin, faj. i(& raerbc bu ractbejl ct raeibe rait njcrbcn il)t raetbct ftc raerbcn SECOND FVTURE TENSE. be- tel racrbe ) bu rame^ et raerbc miv ractben i6v roctbet fte wetben (if) I shall haw- begun, &c S" FARADiaU OF A COMPOUND VERB 8EPABABLB. § 92. 393 POmSTD "VEEB SEPAEABLE. to begio. CONDITIONAL. IMPERATIVE. INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE, C3 'T3d rmsr future. ici) iBiirbt bu iDi'irbcfl tr tviirbe roit roiirbfn ._ . ^ i6r miivbet g -as jt ■ roiitbcn J i_i SECOND FUTURE. i(b ttjiirbt "I = S bu roilrbefl er miirbe rait iBur'-irn ibr miubet f!e t^uvlien •2 .S=!!l j:> t3 ^ *tr 2 Si PRESENT TENSE. 1. wanting, i. faiidc (bu) an, begin thou, &.c. 3. fniijie (cr) an. 1. fiiiiijenCnjitjau. 2. faiiget (tl)r) an. 3. fangen (jtc) an. PRESENT TENSE. oufangen, or anjufangen, to begin. PERFECT TENSE. nnflefanfltu 6a= 6en, to have begun. FIRST FUTURE. aiijjefanflen «)cr= ben, ' to be about to begin Iafen, to sleep away, i. e. lose by Bleeping. SBibet against ; StBibcrjleften, to stand against ; tc resist 3tt, apart, asuiiu-er ; SttfcSxieibcil, to cut apart, or in pieces. § 96. Compound Prefixes inseparable. 31u6« (an + 6c, tt — near) ; Slnbettcffen, to hit or touch near to ; to concern. Slnet ((in + er, t( — for) ; 9lnct£tuiiEii, to acknowledge ; to own. Slufet (auf + er, UD — for) ; Slltftviaucn, to buildup for; to erect. Sluecr ((i«6 + cr, out — for); SluScrnja^leii, to choose out for; to elect. SSnttt (an + set, to — away) ; Slnuevtroucn, to give away in trust ; to confide to. iBcauf (6e + auf, near — on or up) ; SBcauftrngcn, to bring (duty) upon, i. e. to commission. 3JH$»tt (nttS + set, wrong — away); 3Jli^BevjlE^en, to understand wrong, i. e. to mistake. SBorie (sot + be, before — near) ; SGor6cJaltcn, to hold or keep ahead i. e. to put off; to reserve. § 97. Observations. (^1) S3 e has in German the same pov^er which it has in English. It is, therefore, in most cases, better transferred than translated. Its uses will be easily learned from examples. Thus, from .Stogen, to moan. SBeHagen, to ftemoan. ©tfitten, to strew. Scjireuen, to iestrow. gotgen, to follow. fflefotgcn, to follow after, i. e. to obey. ieten, to play. gufjTcn, to carry, or lead. @atjen, to salt. PREFIXES SKPAKABLE AND ISSKPABABJUB. % 98. 397 (4) (S V and » e r are, also, both employed in co iTerting nouns «nd adjectives into verbs expressive of transition from one state or condition into another : thus, er!alten, (fait, cold) to take cold. JBetebeln, (ebcl, noble) tc ennobja etKfmcn, (iul)n, bold) to become SSergcttetn, (®ott, God) to deify. bold, dare, eitat^men, (laf)m, lame) to become aSeralten, (alt, old) to grow old or lame. obsolete. Srftdren, (flat, clear) to make SBereinen, (eiii, one) to make ones plain. unite. In some instances, moreover, e r and u e r are only euphonic or iiUensive. § 98. Prefixes separable and inseparable. (1) The Prefixes of this class, when separable, are always under the full accent ; when inseparable, the accent falls upon the radical. (2) Their effect, when separable, is, in union with radicals to produce certain intransitive compounds *, in which each of the parts (prefix and radical) has its own peculiar and natural signification. (3) Their eifect, when inseparable, is, in connection with the ra- dicals, to form certain transitive compounds; which, for the moat part, are used in a "figlirative or metaphorical sense. (4) We subjoin a list of the prefixes of this class : illustrating each by a couple of examples ; the fii-st being one in which the pre ix is separable ; the second one in which it is inseparable. ~ . ,, , S iDurdi'btinqen, to press or force through ; ®urci), through; ] rQ^ri,Mn'tm, to penetrate. ^ ,. , 1, , . J < Sin'terqcfien, to go behind; Winter, behind; \ $^nUxi^>i^n, to Leive. ,, , 5 Ue'berfc|en, to set or put over ; ueBer, over; ^ Ueberfe^'ra, to translate. Um nroimd • \ Um'ger^en, to go around; Urn, around, j ttm9ef)'en, to evade. „ , , 5 Un'terfdjieben, to shove or push under ; unter, under; ^ Unterf(l)te'6en, to defer; alsc, to substitute. _,. , • L I S SBie'bertiolm, to fetch or bring back ; ffiiebet, agam ; br.=k ; | ggij^er^o'len, to repeat. Tliere are, however some compounds ot b u v cfe and u m , in whichj though these particles are sr-parable, the verbs are, nevertheless, transitive; Still, it vrill be found, that in such cases the signification of the compound ia figurative ; as, uinJjcingcn, to oring about (one's death;) i. e. to kill. 398 ADVERBS FOAMED FROM NOUNS. § 99. § 100. $ 101. S 99. Yekbs compounded with nouns and adjectives. (1) A vaiiety of compounds is produced by the union of verba ■vithniuns ai.d adjectives. These follow the same general lawa which govern those produced by means of prefixes. Some of them, accordingly, are separable ; as, i^eljtfclilagen, to miscarry ; greifpvechen, to acquit ; ®lcid)tcmmen, to equal ; 8cgreipen, to tear away ; ©tattftnbeit, to take place ; ^2) Some are inseparable; as, gtot^tottfii, to exult ; gruljfliicEen, to breakfast ; ^udi^fttiwdiijen, to fawn; ^anbt;aben, to handle ; fiicbdugeln, to ogle ; 8ie6tcfen, to caress ; 9)lut(;mafcn, to suspect; SSoUjie§en, to perform ; SBiUfatiren, to gratify; SBciffageii, to foretell ; (3) These verbs take tlie augment syllable g c in the perfect piirticiple : except scKjie^eit, which has Sott^ogen. In some cases, however, verbs compounded with Bolt, also, take the augment; as, uoKgcgoJlen, from Boltgicpen, to pour full. § 100. THE ADVERBS. (1) Adverbs in German, as in other languages, serve to modify the signification of verbs, participles, adjectives and, often, also that of one another : denoting, for the most part, certain limitations of time, place, degi-ee and manner. Hence are they usually classified according to their meanivg. (2) They are indeclinable ; and formed, either by derivation or composition, from almost every other part of speech : of some, how- ever, the origin is wholly unknown. Arranged according to derivation, advei'bs are divisible into the following classes : § 101. Adverbs formed from nouns. Adverts am formed from nouns by affixing the letter g. This Serminatii jn g is r othing more than the sign of the genitive singufei ; from fe^I and fd&fagen. „ ftei „ fpreii)eiu tf gi"'^ n fommen. ,, to« „ reipen. „ m V jinbett from frol; and lodfen. „ m « jiilcEeu. „ f«d)« „ fdjnjdnjen. „ ^anb „ tjoBcn. „ ties „ dugelii. „ lieB „ fofen. „ mut| „ mafeiu „ »oa „ jiel^en. „ hJiU „ fa^rett. „ wci« „ fagen. ADVERBS FORMED FROM ADJECTIVB3. §102. 399 rhicli ease, not only of nouns, but also of aJjectives, particif les, &c. is often made to perfonn the office of an adverb. * Exam pies: SJloigeng, in the morning : SCbenbg, in the evening ; Sags, in the day ; !£{;eitg, in part, or partly ; glitgS, swiftly; 3)urcl)get;enb8, generally ; Sitfe^enbS, visibly; from ber 5Korgeii, morning. „ ber SlBenb, evening. „ ber Sag, day. „ ber %'i)eil, part. „ ber gtug, flight. „ bur(i)gef;enb, passing through. „ jufe^enb, looking at. § 102. Adverbs formed from adjectives. (1) Adverbs are formed" from adjectives by the addition of the suffixes lid), ^ a f t and ti n g 8 ; which, except the last, are also regular a^ective terminations. These endings are cMefly expressive of mjrnuer ; and may be translated sometimes by a corresponding iaffix (,.18 the finglish ly or ishly), and sometimes by some equi- -alent phrase. Examples : 2Bat|rIic6, truly ; verily ; S3oe§aft, maliciously; aBeiSlici), wisely ; iJvciOcf), sure; to be sure; Slinbtingg, blindly; from tBat;r, true. „ Sofe, evil ; wicked. „ Weife, wise. „ fret, free; sure. „ Btinb, blind. (2) The letter i, also, as above sta,ted, added to adjeetivea, givei 1 ?e to a class of adverbs : * thus, SRecfctiS, on the right ; fiints, on the left; Sliiberg, otherwise; S3creitS, already; !8efonber3, pai-ticularly ; ©fctg, continually; from redji, right. „ lint, left. „ anbcr, other. „ Scveit, ready. „ Befonbet, particular. „ jJet, continual. (3) Here note, also, that almost all Oerman adjectives, in the absolute form, that is, in the simple form without the terminations nj ' The letter S is, also, sometimes affixed to adverbs ending in m ii I ; aa, oovniiilS formerly; biimalS, at the time : oiclmnlS, many times. For nu- meral adverbs ending in ninl, lei, &c. See the Section on Numerals. 400 ADVERBS FORMED FROM PRONOUNS § 103. declension, are employed as adverbs : thus, er xeimi fd^neH, ht runs rapidly ; er ^anbett e^tliii, he acts honestly. § 103. Adverbs formed from pronouns. (1) These are, chiefly, ba, there; from bcr, bie, iaS, this or that; »o, where ; from Wer, xoaS, who, what ; (jer, hither, and ^in, thither ; from some corresponding demonstrative pronoun no longer found. (2) The pronominal adverbs in combination with other words, give rise to a number of compounds. Thus ba and U)o, unittd with prepositions, serve often instead of the dative and accusative (neuter) of the pronouns ber, tan and wetdjer, respectively. It will be no- ticed, that when the other word begins with a vowel or with the let- ter n, ba and too are wi-itten bor and w?r ; that is, that x is inserted for the sake of euphony. The following are compounds of ba and Wo: 3)abci. thereby, i. e. by this or that ©afiit, therefor, i. e. for this or that, ©amit, therewith, i. e. with this or that. S)atin, therein', 1. e. in this or that. 'Davuntcr, thereunder or among, L e. under this or that, ©arum, thereabout or therefor, i. e. for this or tliat; therefoi 5>oran, thereon, i. e. on tliis or thai Sarauf, thereupon, i. 0. upon tliis or that. IBavauS, tlierefrom, i. e. from this or that. 5)a»on, thereof, i. c. of this or that. iDaju, tliereto, i. e. to this or that. Slaburd), there-tlirough or thereby L e. through or by this or that SBobei, whereby, i. e. by which. SfBofur, wherefor, L e. for which. SSomit, wherewith, i. e. with wliich- iJBortn, wherein, L e. in which SBoniuter, \vhereui><3«r, mnoi g, L e. under this "r ibat. SBoruin, whereabo'it. 1. e. about or fa- wJ^ch; wherefe \ ^kj. SBoraii, whereto, L e. to which. QBoraitf, whereupon, i. e. upon which. 3Bcrau3, wherefrom, i. e. from wliich, Sfiouoit, whereof, i. e. of which. SBoju, whereto, i. c. to which. SBobutit), whereby, i e. by or through \»Wi»»' ADVERBS F0RM3D BT COMPOSITION. § 104. % 105. 401 (3) In like manner I)er and t)in appear, also, combined with ether Afords. Between these two particles a distinction exists, wherever they are used, whether alone or in composition with othei words, wliioh should be well understood and always remembered. They are, in signification, exact opposiies : t)er indicating motion or direction towards the speaker; t)in implying motion or direction away from the speaker. The following are examples : ■^ercib, down hither (i. e. wliere •§tna6, down thither (1. e. away the speaker is). from iha speaker). ■§etauf, up hither. "^tnouf, up thither. >§erau«, out hither. ightauS, out thither. herein, in hither ; into this place. ■&tnein, into that place. •&iert;er, or ^iet;er, hither here; '&ierl;in, thither; this way for- tius way. ward. •§eru6er, over hither. ^iniiber, over thither. .^entnter, under hither. ^inunter, under there. ®a^er, from, there hither, i. e. Sa^in, from thither (to) there, thence i. e. thither. SBoI^er, from which p.ace hither, 2BcI;in, from wMch place thither, i. e. whence. i. e. whither. (4) We have no words in English, coiTesponding exactly in use a nd force with ijex and I)tn ; and therefore, though everywhere in German their force may be felt, it cannot always be expressed by single words, in translation. Hence are they often treated as ex- pletives. § 104. Adverbs formed from verbs. (1) Adverbs are foimed from verbs by suffixing to the radical part the termination I i (i). All adverbs so formed, howe^'er, are equally employed as adjectives : thus, ©taubttd) (from glouS+en, to believe), credibly, ©ferblid) (from jicrb+en, to die), mortally. .Rloglitt) (from flag+en, to lament), lamei.tably. aUerftic^, (from iuet£+en, to note; perceive), perceptibly. § 105. Adverbs formed bt composition. (1) Besides the classes given above, a numerous list of adverba in German is produced by the union of various part* of speech. Thus, the word SB e t f e (mode, manner), combined with nouns, forms a class of adverbs employed chiefly in specifying things indi- iO"? COMrAEISON OF ADVERBS. § 106. vidually or separately: thus, fc^tittoeife, step by step; t^eilloeifci part by part ; trp)>fentoei|"e, drop by drop ; toogentBcife, wave by wave, like waves. IDeife is also added to adjectives; as, bieBifdiertoeife, tiller shly ; glurfUcbemeife, fortunately. (2) Sometimes an adverb and a preposition are united ; examples of which may be found above under the head of adverbs formed from pronouns. (3) Sometimes adverbs are formed by the union or the repetition cf prepositions : as, burdjaiig, throughout ; thoroughly ; burc^ nnb bimt), through and through. (4) Sometimes a noun and a pronoun joined together, serve as an adverb ; as, meinetfcit^, on my side ; btepita, on this side ; aUin biiigS, by all means. (5) Sometimes one adverb is formed from another by the adA'- tioLi of a suffix ; as, tudlingS, backwards : sometimes by the unioi of another adverb ; as, nimmermc()r, nevermore. (6) Sometimes the several words composing a phrase, are, by being brought into union, made to perform the office of an adverb : tlius, fiit»a(;r (for fiit toa^r), verily ; fonfl (for the obsolete fo ne iji, if it is not), otherwise; else. § 106. COMPAEIBON OF ADVERBS. (1) Many adverbs, chiefly, however, those expressive of manner are susceptible of the degrees of comparison. The forms for these are the same ia adverbs as in adjectives (2) It must be observed, however, that, when a comparisoTi, strictly speaking, is intended, the form of the superlative produced by prefixing a m (See Obs. § 38.), should always be employed ; as, er fct)reibt am fcljonjien, he writes the most beautifully (of all). (3) If, on the other hand, we purpose, not to compare individuals one with another, but merely to denote extreme excellence or emi- nence, there are three ways in which it may properly be done : first, by using the simple or absolute form of the superlative ; as, et gruf t fteunblictift, he greets or salutes in a manner very friendly, very cor- dially ; secondly, by employmg ouf« (auf+baS) vnth tlie accusative, or jum (ju-j-bem) with the dative, of the superlative; as, auf8 fveunbtidifte, in a manner very friendly ; jum fci^oiifien, in a mannef very beautiful ; lastly, by adding to the simple form of the super- lative, the tei-mination e n 8 ; beftpng, the best or in the best manner l;(jd)jie«j, at the highest or at the most. TABLE or THE PREPOSITIONS. $ 107. § 108. 403 § 101. THE PKEPOSITIONS. (1) The prepositions in German, that is, the words employed merely to denote the relations of things, are commonly classified ac- cording to the cases with which they are construed. Some of them are construed with the genitive only ; some with the dative only ; some with the accusative only ; and some either with the dative or accusative, according to circumstances. (2) They may also, on a different principle, be divided into two general classes ; the Primitive and the Derivative. The primitive prepositions always govern either the dative or the accusative : the derivative prepositions are found, for the most part, in connection with the genitive only. § 108. Table of THE Prepositions. (1) Prepositions 1 construed with (2) Prepositions construed with THE GENITIVE. THE DATIVE. Slnjlatt, or DBet^alB, 9lu3, m% tiatt. Srofe, Slu|er, Slufer^otb, Um — witlen, Set, 06, ©iejfeit, or Unfent, Stnnen, biejfcifiS, Un^taifM, (Sntgegen, ®ammt, §alb, fatten, oi Xtntet^alB, ®egenitBet, ^alber. UnttJett, ®emdf, ©elt, 3tmeri)at6, aBetmtttclji, o Senfeit, or mittelji, a»tt. Son, jenfeita, 3?ermo jt, Stxa^t, SBa^renb, stm, 3u, Sdiigg, SBcgen, Saut, Sufolge. mm, Sutotbet (3) Preposit ons construed with the ^cdusative. Surd), (Kegeti, or ©ember, Um, aSibet. (4) Prepositions construed witi THE dative or ACCUSATIVE, S(n, UeBcr, Sluf, Unter, ^intct, aSot, 3n, 3»if*««. SleBen, t04 OBSEKVATIONS. § 109. § 110. § 109 Prepositions cokstrued with the G£nitivb. We novt givij again the prepositions governing the several cascit respectively, with their proper definitions : subjoining, also, some few observations on such of them as seem to require further expla- nation. And first, we mention those construed with the genitive. SInjiott, or jiatt. instead. Urn — ttiaeti. for the salM of. Slitfet^oH), without; out- Ungead)tet, notwithstanding. side. ' Uutert)at6, below; on the SJiejfcit, or btefj on this side. lower side. feita, Unfem, near ; not far §alben, or ^ol* on account of. from. 6er, Unmit, near ; not far 3nnerl)atb, within; inside. from 3enfeit, or j[eiu on that side; aSermitfeljl, or by means of. fe««, beyond. mittclfl, *:aft. by virtue of. aSermoge, by dint of. SaitgS, (also along. aBft^renb, during. gov. Dat.) Sauf, according to. Sffiegen, on account of. £)Ber^at6, above. Stc^, (also in spite of. Sufolge, (also in consequence gov Dat.) gov. Dat) of. § 110. Observations. (1) Slnjlattis compounded of on (in) and ©tatt (place;) and these components may sometimes be separated : thus, an beg StuberS ©tatt in the brother's stead. In this case the part, ©tatt, takes its proper character, which is that of a noun. (2) ^nlBen, like tnegen and nm — toiUen, expresses motive. Strict, ly speaking, however, ^ a IB en seems to point to a motive that ia direct, immediate and special ; IB c g e n indicates an object less definite and more distant ; while urn — toillen looks to the wUl, wish or weU fare of that which is expressed by the genitive. These distinctions, however, are not always regarded even by writers of reputation. (3) •§aIBen or fatter is always placed after the noun which it gov- erns : the form, l^ali e n being preferred, when the noun ha? an article or pronoun before it; and Ijalfeer, when it has not : thus, jieS ®elbeS ^alben, for the sake of money ; SSetgnugeng ^olber, for the sake of pleasure, fatten is often united with the genitive of the personal pronouns; in which case the final letter (r) is .emitted and its place OBSERVATIONS. §111. §112. 405 •applied by t: tnus, meinct^atten, (instead of metitcv'^atSeii,"J fw my sake ; ti£inet§ot6en, for thy sake ; feinet^atben, for his sake, &o. Soi too, it occurs ,in the compounds bep^att, on account of that ; tue^s tjalb, on account o.'' which : wherein, as in aupev§att, innerfialb, oSers IjolB, unterljalb, the form ^ a lb en is shortened into ^alb. In the last four, I) a I b has the sense part or side ; as, auperijalb, outside, &c. (4) SBegen may either come before or after its noun : as, wegen ber grofeit Ocfa^r, on account of the great danger; feiner ©efuub^eit wes geii, on account of his health. (5) Urn — ttsiUen is always separated by the genitive which it gov- erns : thus, um ©oftcg iuiUen, for God's sake. (6) Ungeadstet may either precede or succeed its noun: as, unge« adjtet alter .ginbefniffe, notwithstanding all hindrances ; feineS glei^f* ungead)tet, notwithstanduig his industry. (7) SSetmoge, hy dint or means of, indicates physical ability : as, termoge beg SleipeS, ]jy means of industry. It thus differs from fraft, which points rather to the exercise of moral power : as, fraft meincS SJlmteS, by virtue of my olBce. (8) 3ufolge, when it comes after the word which it governs, takes the latter in the Dative : as, bent SSefe^te jufolgc, in consequence of (or pursuant to) the order. (9) 8dug3 and ixe^ may, also, govern the Dative. § 111. Prepositions construed with the dativb. aug, out; out of. mail, after; to; ac- Slu^cr, vrithout; outside cording to. of. mm, next ; next to. m, by; near; with. mei% together with. Sinnen, within. Di, over; at. Snlgegcn, towards ; oppo- ©amnit, together with site to. ©eit, since. ©cgcnilber, over against. ason. from; of. @emd{i. conformably 3u, to, at. with. Sutoiber, against; con- •Kit, with. trary. §. 112. Observations. (1) SI u 6 indicates the place, the source or the materitd whence any thing is produced ; as, au« bent ■gaufe, out of the house ; Mi giebe, out of love ; aai 9Ji*t« ^at ®ctt bie SBeW gemod^f out of uo- thkg has God made the world, ■ 408 OBSERVATiOjrs, S 112. • ^2) H u f e t diifers from ou«, in that it denotes situation rather than transition : thus, auS bent ■§aufe marks motion from or out of the house, while aiif er bem -^aufe signifies position iti respect to the house ; that is, outside of the house ; abroad : henee comes, also, the signification, besides ; exclusive of; as, Sliemanb ouger niir tear jugegen, no one besides, or except me was present. (3) S3 e i shows the relation oi proximity or identity in respect to persons, places, times, &c. : as, cr Ko^nt Be: feinent ©ruber he resides with his brother ; bei bem •^aufe, by or n£ar the house ; bei ber @cbo« ^fiing, at the creation ; bd iiieiner Slufunft, at or upon my arrival ; Bet bem 5piato, in Plato, that is, in the works of Plato. Set is also used in maldng oath or protest ; as. Bet @oft ; Bei meiner (Stjre ; by God ; by, or upon my honor : a use easily derived from the primary signification of the word. It should be added that the German bei (unlike the English by) is not properly employed to denote the cause, means or instrument of an action : tliis is don» by the words bur(^ »on, or mit : id) folate mit ber ©ifenba^n. (4) ffl i n n e n is used in denoting a limitation of time ; as, Bin> nen adit Sagen, vrfthin eight days. (5) @ n t g e g e n always comes after its noun ; and denotes the relation of parties moving towards one another so as to meet : hence it gets the significations opposite to, over against : thus, ber ^naBe Iviuft feincm 33ater entgegen, the boy runs toumrds, that is, to meet his father ; bem SBtttbe entgegen, against the wind. (6) @ e g e n u 6 e V marks an opposite position of things ; and like entgegen, comes after its noun ; as, bem §aufe gegeniiBer, oppositt to, or fronting the house. (7) 5K i t signifies sometimes the relation of union ; sometimes that of instrumentality ; as, e; arbeitet mit feinem SSater, he works with his father ; mit einem Stcffer fdjneiben, to cut vnth a knife : some- times, also, it indicates the manner of an action ; as, mit ®et»att; rvit Sijl. (8) 92 a d), in all its uses, has its nearest equivalent in the Eng- lish word after ; as, jeJin ailinuten nad) »ier, ten minutes after four ; nvld) engltfd)er 5Kobe, after the English fashion ; bet Kafe nod), after (that is, following after) your nose ; bem ©trome nad), after (that is, in the direction of) the stream ; ber S3efd)reibung nad), after (that is, according to) the description ; h)it ge^en nad) bet @tabf, we are going after (that is, in the direction of, toioards, or to) fhe city ; bag ©diifl tft nad) Slmetitu beflimmt, the ship is bound after (that is, for) Ame. rica, &e. (9) When direction towards a person, instead of a plac(, is Indi PREPOSITIONS OOKSTBUED WITH THE ACCUSAriVB. J 113. 407 eated, 5 u is employed ; as, id) Knit j u meinciti SBater gc^en, 1 siiall go to my fatlier. Sometimes n a c^ is used in connection with j u ; as, er lief nad) in Sfabt }u, he ran (literally, after to) towards the city. When it denotes direction with, as in the phrase, bem ©ttome nad), following, or going with the stream, it is put after the noun which it governs : so, also, wlien it has the kindred sense, according to ; as, meiiter SKeinung nod), according to my opinion. If, however, in the latter ease, a genitive depends on the noun under the govern- ment of the preposition, nod) precedes ; as, nod) ber SBefc^teiiung be3 ©diilkr, according to Schiller's description. (10) 9leBji and fotnmt have the same general signification, together with ; but, strictly speaking, differ in this, that fammt not only indicates conjoint, but, also, simultaneous action : thus, Slorcn fonimt fcitien @o§nen fotlen ii)xe .ganbe ouf fein ■iQauft (egen, Aaron to- gether with (i. e. simultaneously with) his sons shall lay their hands upon his head. (11) £) 6 is seldom used except in poetry. (12) SS n marks the source or origin of a thing, and has the Rame latitude of signification as its English equivalent from : thus, bcr SBinb Wel^et Bon Often, the wind blows from tlie East ; boS ®e« bidlt ift Bon i^m, that poem is from {by) him. With on or ouf fol- lowing, it indicates the extent 0^ a period of time: Bon ber erften .(Jinbticit on, from earliest childhood on ; Bon feinet Sugenb ouf, from his youth up. (13) 3 u primarily is a mere sign of transition ; but is made to denote a variety of cognate relations, from a state of motion to a state of rest. Examples best illustrate its use : thus, id) iBill ju mei« ucm ajatct gel)en, I will go to my father; Irir rcifen ju aBaffcr unb ju i'onbe, we travel by land and by water ; ju $ferbe, on horseback ; jU tfuge, on foot ; 5U •§oufe, at home ; jtt jener 3eit, at that time ; et ^o( midi jum (for 5U bem) 9Jovten gemodit, he has made me [to become) a fool ; er tl)ut eg mir jn £ieBe, he does it to {show) love for me. It ia sometimes used as an adverb ; as, ge^ jU, go on ; 5U Bid, too much ; nmdie bte S^ilr ju, shut the door to. (14) 3uW)tber, against, contrary to, comes after the woni, which it go yems. § 113. Prepositions construed with the accusative. 5)urd), through. ©onbct apart; vrithout. %m, for ; in place of. Urn, about; around. ©egen or gen, towards. Sffiiber, against O^ne, without. 408 observations. § 114. § 115. $ 116. § 114. Obsekvations. (1) 2) u r d& has its exact equivalent in the English word througk i as, b'iifd) Me ©tabt ge^en, to go through the city ; burd) 35«n S3eU ftaitb, through your aid ; baS gottje Sa^r bur^ (where, as often in English, the preposition comes after the noun), the whole year through. (2) @ c y e n (contract form, gen) indicates motion towards; and hence,oftun has the signification opposite to ; but whether it marks direction towards, in a manner friendly or otherwise, must be deter- mined by the context. Li this respect, it differs from tniber, against, which denotes an opposition, doing or designing e^il. (3) O ^ n c and f o n b e r are of the same import ; but the latter is seldom used, and then only, when the substantive has no article before t. (4) Urn, like the English word aboid, indicates the going or being of one thing around another ; and hence denotes also near- ness, change of position, succession, &c. : thus, um ben %i\ii ji^en, to sit about the table ; Wirf beinen SDlantel um bid), throw thy cloak about thee ; um jWei U§r, about (literally, close about, i. e. exactly) two o'clock ; eiuen Sag um ben onbern, one day about another, that is, every other day ; c6 ift um f^n'gef^e^en, it is done about him, that is, it is all over with him ; um ®elb f^ielen, to play about (Jor) mo- ney ; um jel;n Satjrc junget, younger about (by) ten years, &c. Be- fore an Infinitive preceded by ju (that is, before the Supine, as it is sometimes called), um denotes purpose ; as, um S^nen ju jeigen, in order to show you ; um ju fdjveiben, in order to write, or for the pur- jiose of writing. S 115. Prepositions construed with the dativk or ACCUSATIVE. an. on ; at ; near. UeBet, over; above. Sluf- on ; upon. Untet, under; among. Winter, behind. fflcr. before. 3n, in, or into. 3U5tf(!^en, ' betwixt ; be- SReben, beside. tween. § 116. Observations. These prepositions govern either the .iccusative or the dative ; bnl not without a difference of signification : for, when motion towards, that is, motion from one point to another, is indicated, the accusative OBSERVATIONS. $ 116. 409 is required : when, however, motion or rest in any given place or condition is signified, the dative is used ; thus, in Rnabe Iduft in ben ®artcn, the boy runs into (motion towards) the garden ; ber ,Rna6e Iciiift in bem ®ai'ten, the boy runs in (motion within) the garden. This is the general principle ; which will be found, with more or lese distinctness, everywhere to prevail in the use of the pre- positions of this class. We subjoin a list of examples. Dat. Sin cinem Drte tBoIjncn, Ace. 9(n einen S«unb fdjreiben, Dat. Sr orBeitct mi einem ffludje, Ace. Sin etwag benfen, Dat. @r ifl on bet Slugjet^rang gcs jlorBcn, to dwell in or at a place. • to write to a friend, he is working on a book, to think on (i. e. turn mte'a tTumgkts towards) something, he died by consumption. Aoc. 3tt| Mp i>"i 3;if* an *>« I put the table against (towards) Sffianb, the wall. Dat. ®4lt)0(i) on aSerjlonbp, weak in understanding. Ace. SBig an ben SlBenb, even to or until evening. Dat. 9lin SJlotgen unb am Sffienb, in the morning and in the evening. Dat. Sluf bent S^urme, on (i. e. resting on) the tower. Ace. Sluf ben St^urni, upon (i. e. climbing) the tower. Dat. Sluf bem Sanbe Wol^nen, to live in the country. Ace. Slnf bas 8anb rcifen, to travel into the country. Dat. Sluf ber !Pcfc at the post-office. Dat. Sluf bev @d)ute, at school. Ace. Sluf etne ®aci)e benfen, to think (turn tlioughts) on a thing. Ace. ©0 Biel auf ben SKann, so much for a, or per man. Ace. 93is ouf »tev Scoter, even to four dollars. Ace. Sluf bcutftl)e Slrt, in (i. e. following after) the Ger man way A'lo. 9lufa3efe(;r, pursuant to an order. Ax Sluf aHontag, next Monday. Oat. (Sx fle^t Sinter mir. he stands behind me. Ace. (Sr trat f;infer mid), he stepped behind me. Dat, 34 Wol)ne in ber ©tabt. I live in the city. Ace. 3c!) ge^e in bit Stabi, I am going into the city. Dat. dr |ianb neben mir. he stood near to me. Ace. (Sr jleKte jid) neBcn nii^. he placed himself near me. Dat. Ucfter ber SlvBeit, over (i. e. while at) the work Ace. Ue6er ineine Mt^fit, 18 beyond my strength. 410 THE CONJUNCTIONS. J H'- Acc. UeSer hot 3a^r, Aec. ®cn Sag u6er, Dat. 3d) jlanb untet einent S3oume, Acc. 5)er §unb ftiet^t untet ben xm, JMt. @o tvin id; miii mijt Dot btr Berbetgen, 3c^ iianb Dot bent <&aufe, 3^ ge^e »or bie it^fir, 3d) fag jioifi^en jtoet Sreum ben, 3d) ftettte mi^ jwifd^en Seibc, Dau Aec. Dat. Acc. beyond tlus (i. ci nea;/) year. the day over, i. e. during tlie day I stood under a tree, the dog creeps under tlie table. then will I not hide myself from thee. I stood before the house. I go before the door. T sat between two friends. I pliiced myself between the two 8 117. THE CONJCTNCTIONS. (1) Conjunctions are words used in connecting sentences. As, Lo wever, there are various kinds of eoimections existing among sen- tences, it has been customary to classify the conjunctions according lo tho nature of the connection which they are employed to indicate Hence we have (among other classes] the following : Copulatives: as, unb, and; and}, also. Diy'unclives : as, entweber, either; obec, or. Adversatives : as, aber, but ; however ; aKein, but ; bod), yet. Negatives: as, toebet, neither; nod), nor. Concparatiws : as, tote, as; fo, so; thus; aU, than; gleid)tBie, just as CoidiLvmals • as, ttenn, if ; falt3, in case that ; toofern, provided that. Causals: as, benn, for; Weil, since; because. Conclusives : as, barum, therefore ; batjer, hence ; ixffsali, there- fore Concessives : as, oBwo^I, obfdjon, oBgleid), Wenn; although. Finals : as, bap, that ; auf bag and bamlt, in order that ; um }«» in order to- (2) We give below a list of the conjunctions that most commonly occur in German : premising only that some of the words here set down as conjunctions are also employed as adverbs ; for it vyill of co«rse be kept in mind, that the office performed by a word, deter-' mines its name and character. For numerous examples illustratiiij their uses. See Lesson 69. nmsBjECTiONS. S 118. 411 Slber, but. SHlein, Irat SKs, as ; than ; when. SHfo, so then ; consequently ; also. Stud), also;,eD«r. Sliif bog, in order that. 33 ig, until. 35a, since. Slater, therefore; hence. ©afertt, in case that ; if. ©af , that ; in order that. 35ainit, in order that Sarum, therefore ; on that account. S)enn, for; because; than. !Denno^, still; nevertheless. !Degt)alB, therefore ; on that ac- count. a5e|io, the (L. 32. 10). S)o(t), yet; however; still. (Sf}(, before-that; ere. (Snfttjebcr, either. Salts, in case that, golgtid), consequently. 3e, — befic, the— the Sebei, yet, nevertheless. Siibem, while ; because ; since. SRit^in, consequently. •)'Jact)bem, after-that ^oi). nor; ror yet. 9Juii, therefore; then. Slur, but; only. £)b, whether; if. 06gtei(l), though; although. £)bf4)on, though; although. Obwol)!, though; although. Dbet, or. O^ne, without; except O^ngeat^tet, notwithstanding. ®o^ thus; therefore; if. ©onbern, but. Unb, and. Ungeaci)tet, notwithstanding. aBdt^VEiib, whilst. SBa^renb bcin, whilst. Sffid^tenb bap, whilst that SCeber, neither. SSenn, if; as. SBcit, because. SSenngtetd), although. Sffiennfdjon, although. 3Bte, as; when. SSieWo^I, though. 3Bo, if. Sffiofern, if, in case that § 118. INTERJECTIONS. (1) Interjections, as the name implies, are commjnly thrown into a sentence ; without, however, changing either its structure or its signification. They are merely the signs of strong or sudden emo- tion ; and may be classified according to the nature of the emotion which they indicate : some expressing joy ; some sorrow ; some surprise, and so on. The list below contains those only that mosl oommonly occur. ad)! alas! t^l o! oh! o! a"^! ah! Jjfui! fy! ei! eigh! ))ft! hist! :^a! ha! tee^e! wo! alas! ^el ho! ^eifa I hurrah ! 412 BTTSTAI or THE AR11CLE. § 119. § 120. ^e ba ! ho there ! judi'^ctfa! huzzal tjalt! hold! woi^tan! well then! ^olla! holla! l^ui! hoa! quick! ^uf*! hush! fic^! lo! leiber! alas! ^um! hem! (2) It may be added that other parts of speech and even whole phrases, are often employed as interjections, and in parsing are treat- ed as such. § 119. SYNTAX. Syntax is that part of Grammar which unfolds the relations and (oS^ees of words as arranged and combined in sentences. The essential parts of every sentence are the subject, which is that of which something is affirmed ; and the predicate, which is that which contains the affirmation. The subject is either a noun or that which is the representative or equivalent of a noun ; the predicate is either a verb alone, or a verb in conjunction with some other part or parts of speech. All other words entering into a sentence, are to be regarded as mere adjuvcls. The folloviring sentences exhibit the subject and the predicate under several varieties of form : Subject. Predicate. God exists. Man is mortal. * To be, contents his natural desire. Throwing the stone was his crime. Sentences are either simple, that is, contain a single assertion oi proposition ; or compound, that is, contain two or more assertions oi propositions. Of the various parts of a sentence whether principal or adjunct, we come now to speak more m detail ; so as to show the relation, agreement, government and arrangement of words in con- structioa § 120. THE ARTICLES. Rule. The article in German, whether definite or indefinite, is generally employed wherever the corresponding article would be used in Knglish. * In the sentence God exists the verb exists is the predicate : affinning, aa it does, existence of the Almighty. But in the sentence, man is mart aJ, mortal- srntax of the article. § 120. 413 Observations. This nile is of course founded upon the presumption that the student is familiar with the usage of the English in respect to the article. In the specifications that follow, therefore, he is to look only for the points in which the German differs from the usage ol our own language. (1) The Germans insert the definite article : (a) Before words of abstract or universal signification ; as, b e t SBlenfd) iji jierBtid), man (i. e. every man) is mortal; b a « ®olb iji betjn^ 601:, gold is ductile; bag 8el)en iji lux^, life is short; bie Sucjcub fu^vt jitin ®titcfc, virtue leads to happiness ; (b) before the names of certain divisions or periods of time : as, ber ©onntag, Sund.ay; berSWonfag, Monday; ber iDejcmbet, Decembe'; bet Sliiguji, August ; ber ©ommer, Summer : (c) before certain names (Jeminines) of countries ; as, bie Sitrtei, Turkey; bie ©djWets, Switzerland; bie Sombarbei, Lombardy: (d) before the names of authors, when used to denote their works ; as, id) lefc ben Si'jfing, I am reading Lessing: (e) before the proper names or titles of persons, when used in a way denoting familiarity or inferiority ; as, gritpe b i e SKarie, greet (or remember me to) Mary; fage betn 8utt|er, ba^ il) i^n ju fe^en Wiinfdie, tell Luther, that I wish to see him : also, when connected with aitriiulive sidieetivea: as, bie Heine ®o()t;ie, little Sophia: (f ) before words (especially proper names of persons) whose cases are not made known either by a change of termination, or by the t'esence of a preposition; as, ba^ Seicn ber ^^iirflen, the lite of ;jinces; bie grou beg @oaote8, the wife of Socrates; bet !£ag 6er 3iad)e, tlie day of (the) vengeance : (g) before the names of ranks, bodies, or systems of doctrine : as, bae Sparlamcnt, Parliament; bie Kegierung, government; bie SKonars d)ie, monarchy; bag (St;rijlenW)um, Christianity: also in such phrases: as, in bet ©tabt, in town; in bet^ird^e, atchm'ch; bie nieijien 2Jlenfd)en, most men. (h) before the words (signifying) half ani both: as, bie ^alii (not ^albe bie) Sal)l, half the number; bie Seiben (not Bciben bie) SBriiber, both the brothers : (i) before words denoting the limit, within which certain specifiefl numbers or amounts are confined ; wherein in English, th» indefinite article would be used: as, jloeimal b ie SBociie, twice a wout; ity is what is afiinned of man ; and the verb (.is) is ihe mere link that i-iMiecta Iw subject and ih>- predicate together. It is thence called the co]m.a. ^ 158 414 SYNTAX OF THE NOUN. § 121. (2) AiiiB, further, that the German differs from the English in omitting the definite article, — (a) before certain law appellatives, as: SSeKagfer, {(he) defendant; fitdger, (the) plaintiff; 9l))t)ellant, {the) appellant; @uip))ticant, {the) petitioner : (b) before certain common expressions such as, in Bejler Orbnung, In {the) beat order; UeBetbringer biefeg, {the) bearer of this; and cer- tain adjectives and partiaples treated as nouns; as, erjieret, {the) former ; le^terer, {the) latter ; Bcfagtet, {the) before-said (person) : (c) before certain proper names of places: as, Ojiinbien, (the^ East Indies ; SBeflinbien, {(he) West Indies ; and before the names of the Cardinal points: as, iDjien, {(he) East; SBefien, {(he) West; ©iiben, {(he) South ; Kovben, {llie) North : (d) before a past participle joined with a noun, which, ia English, •precedes the participle: as, ba^ vertoteue ^atabieg, {literally, the lost Paradise) Paradise Lost. (3) Note, again, that the Germans in using certain collective terms preceded by adjectives, employ the indefinite article where the English would use the definite : as, cin ^odjtoeifet diatf), the (lit a) most learned Senate ; eine loBtii^e Uniscrjitdt, the {a) honorable Uni- versity. (4) In German, also, the indefinite article stands before (not after, as in English,) the words, svch, half: thus, cin fcldjet 3Rann, (not fclcl)er ein 3Konn), such a man ; ein ifaVbeS ^a^t (not ^oIBeS ein 3o§r), half a year. In questions, direct or indirect, like the following: (Sincn toie Jangen ©tJajietrttt ^at er gentad)t, how long a ride has he taken; it must be noticed that the article stands before Wie : thus, einen iuie langcu (a how long) and not, as ia English, how long a. (5) The German differs again from the English in not using an article at all in the phrases answering to the English ; a few ; a thou- sand ; a hundred. S 121. THE NOUN. Bulk. A ncun or pronoun which is the subject of a sentence must be ui the nominative case : as. Set aJlcnfd) benft, ®oft tenft, man devises, God disposes £)ie Serge bonnem, the mountains thunder. Observations, < I) The subject or nominative in German, is seldom omitted, ex trSE OF THE NOMINATIVE. § 122. J 123. 413 eept in the case of the pronouns agreeing with veiba in the second person (singular and plural) of the Imperative : as, £efe (bu), read ! Oe^ct unb foget (3t)r) il^m, go and tell him. See, however, § 136. 2. § 122. EuLB, A noun or pronoun which is the predicate of a sentence, must be in the nominative case : as, ©t hjar ein gtof er .Rontg, he was a great king. Siefer MnnU iji ^aufmann getocrbcn, this boy is become a merchant. Slfaanber t;ieg ber ®to^e, Alexander was called the Great. Obsbrvations. (1) This rule applies, where tlie subject and the predicate are connected, as above, by such verbs as fein, to be ; toetben, to become; ijd^m. to be called ; ileiben, to remain, &e. (2) So, also, the rule becomes applicable when any of those verbs wliich in the active govern two accusatives (§ 132. 2.), ai-e em- ployed passively : as, Sicew touvbe bet SSatet be? SBatetlanbeS genannt, Cicero was called the father of his country ; (5r iji Slleranser getouft toorben, he has been christened Alexander. From thi' remark, how- ever, must be excepted the verb I e I^ t e n ; since '., nas no passive. § 123. Rule, A noun used to limit * the application of another noun signifying a different thing, is put in the genitive ; aj, Ser 8a«f ber ©oime, the course of the sun. 5)cr ®ot;n meine« greunbe^, the son of my friend. SDic Srjie^ttng bev JJinber, the education of the childi-en. 3)ie SBatjl etne« greunbeS, the choice of a friend. Obsekvati'jns. (1) If, however, the Kmitivg noun (unless restricted itself by an adjective or some other qualifying word) signify measure, num- ber, weight or quantity, it is then put in the same case with that which it limits ; as, jWet @Ia« SBetn (not Sffieine«), two glasses (of) wine ; fe^« !Pfunb Xiju (not 'XijiiS), six pounds (of) tea : but (with • How the limitation is made, is easily seen : thus, ber Sauf bee ©oniie, the course of the sun. Here we speak not of any course indefinitely, bul of the sun's course definitely: the word ber ©otine, is the genitive, liinit ing bet 8aiif, whidi is the governing word. 416 SYNTAX OF THE NOUN. § 123. a restrictive tenn), fed^S SPfitnb i 1 c f e 3 3:t;cc« ; jtoei @\ni b t e f « « SffitineS. (2) It should be observed that the two noun3 under tliis Rule must be of different significations ; for two nouns standing for the same thing, would be in the same case, forming an instance of appo- sition. See § 133. (1). (3) The noun in the genitive, that is, the limiting noun, is com. monlj said to be governed by the otlier one. This genitive is either 'subjective or objective ; subjective, when it denotes that which does something or lias something : objective, when it denotes that wliich suffers something, or which is the object of what is expressed by the governing word. To illustrate this, we have only to take the ex- amples given above : bet Sauf ber ScnnE, the course of the sun ; bie Stjie^ung bet .Rinber, the education of the children ; where, in the first example, the sun is represented as performing or having a course, and is consequently subjective ; and, in the second example, the children are represented as being the objects of education, and the word is consequently objective. This objective genitive, it should be added, occurs only after verbal nouns, and chiefly those ending in the suffixes e r, which marks the doer, and u n g, which marks the doing of an action. (4) It seems hardly necessary to observe that under this rule come all words which perform the office of nouns ; as, pronouns, ad- jectives used substantively, &c. ; thus, bie ®nobe ber Orofien, the fa- vor of the great. (5) We say often in English, He is a friend to, or an enemy tc, or a nephew to any one ; where, were these phrases put into German, we might expect the dative to be used. But, in such cases, the Ger- man always employs the Genitive : thus, et Ijl cin geitib fcineS SBatetJ tanbcg, he is an enemy of his native country. (6) We say in English, tJie month of August, the city of Lon- don, and the like : where the common and the proper name of the same thing are connected by the preposition of. The Germims put the two nouns in apposition. See § 138. (2). (7) So, too, in English we say, the fifth of August ; but, in Ger- man, the numeral is put in direct agreement vrith the name of the month : as, ber filnfte Slugufi, the fifth (_of) August, or August fifth, (8) In place of the genitive, the preposilion » o n, followed by the da,tive, is, in the following instances, generally used : a. When succeeded by nouns signifying quality, rank, measure weij'ht ace, distance iind il.e like; as, ein SKann s»tt I^o^em ©tanbe, USE OF THE GENITIVE. § 124. % 125. 41*? » man of liigh standing ; etn ®^ijf Bon jtoet '^unbert Sonncn, a ship of two hundred tons; ein Oeluidjt Bon funf SPfnnb, a weight of five pounds ; ein SJlann von oc^tjig Sat^ren, a man of eighty years ; eine SJeife oon ixnMeiha, a journey of three miles; ein (Snglanbet B-ja ©eburt, an Englishman by birth, &c. b. When followed by nouns denoting the material or substance of whish any thing is made : as, ein ffledicr son ©itbet, a cup of sil- va ■, i. e. a sUver cup ; eiue Ut)v son Oolbe, a gold watch, &o. c. When followed by nouns whose cases are not indicated by tlie terminations of declension nor by the presence of the article : as, ber igdiein son 3ieblid;feit, the appearance of honesty ; ein SBater Son fe(^« Jtinbem, a father of six childi-en ; bie .ftonigin Son Snglanb, the queen of England ; bie ®tenjen Bon granfrcid), the boundaries of France ; ber fflifdiof Bon Jtonjimis, the bishop of Constance d. When followed by a word indicating tlie uliole, of which the word preceding expresses but a part : as, einer Bon ineinen JBefannten, one of my acquaintances ; iBeld)er son beiben ? which of the two ' § 124. KuLB. A noun limiting the application of an adjective, where in English the relation would be expressed by such words as of or from, is put in the genitive : as, bie meijien SSettufle jinb eineg (Srfa^eS fa^ig, most losses are capable of reparation; bie ®rbe ijl BoH ber ®iite beS igetm, the earth is full of the goodness of the Lord. Observations. (1) The adjectives comprehended under this rule are such as follow SSi'biirftig, in want; needing. £eer, void. ©cnotfjigt, needing; wanting. £o3, free; rid. 93e»u^t, conscious. 3)ldd)tig, having; in possession, Sitigcben!, mindful. SKiibe, tired; weary. gat)ig, capable ; susceptible. ©att, satiated ; weary, grol), glad. ®(i)ulbig, guilty ; indebted. ®e>sa()r, aware. !£^eit^aft, partaking. ®ett)dtttg, waiting; in expecta- Ueberbritfjtg, tired; weary. tion. SDerbddjtig, suspicious. ®cttip, sure; certain. fflertujiig, having lost ; deprived of ®en)ef|nt, used to ; in the habjt SSoH, full. Rnnbig, haiiing a knowledge; SBert^, wortli; worthy. skilled. aBiirbig, worthy. Eeblg, empt) ; void. Ouitt, rid ; free from. 18* <18 SYNTAX OF THE NOUN. J 125. % 128. (2) After gctool^r, getoo^f, log, mube, faft. Boll and toetti), tha accusative is often used: as, er ttatb feinen Sruber gewa^t, he was aware of (the presence of) his brother, Le. he observed his brother. § 126 A noun limiting the application put in the genitive : 8lct)ten, to mind, or regard, ffiebutfeit, to want. Ssgeljren, to desire. SBtaucfeen, to use. ®iitbet;ren, to need (Sutratt^cn, to do without Srmangeln, to want, or be vidthout. (Scwd()neii, to mention, ©cbcnten, to think, or ponder. ®eniep«n, to enjoy. ®mai)xm, to observe. KULE. of any of the verbs foUovring, is •barren, to wait Soi^en, to laugh. 5PjIegen, to foster, ©djoneit, to spare, ©gotten, to mock. S3etfe()ten, to miss, or fail. SSergeffcn, to forget SBa^ren, to guard. aBa^rne^men, to observe. 2BaIten, to manage. SBatten, to attend to, or mind. Observations. fflebiitfen, Begetjren, I)raud)en, entbe^ren, er«5oC;nen, geniegen, ^JJIegen, fc^onen, »erfe§ten, sergeffen, lua^tne'^men, warren and ttorten, take more frequently, in common conversation, the accusative. Slijten, tjaitev and Wiirten are more commonly construed with a u f, and tac^en, |)Jotten and Bjottcn with ii B e t , before an accusative. § 126. KtJLE. The following reflexive verbs, take in addition to the pronoun peculiar to them, a word of limitation in the genitive : Kid) anmajen, to claim. „ annet^men, to engage in. „ Bebtcnen, to use. „ Bejieifen, to attend to. „ Beflcipigen, to apply to. „ BegeBen, to yield up. „ Beiiiaditigen, to acquire. „ BemciftEvu, to seize. „ BefdlEiijen, to acquiesce in. „ beflimtn, to ponder. , eiitau§;n>, to abstain. @tt^ entBBben, to dare, or be bold „ entBrcd)en, to forbear. „ ent^attcn, to refrain. „ entfdjiagen, to get lid „ entfinnen, to recollect. „ etbavmcn, to pity. „. erfcedjen, to presume. „ erimiern, to rememl«r. „ eriu^nen, to venture „ Ettoe^ren, to resist VSE OP THE GKNiriVB. % 127. 4lB Kid) freuen, to rejoice. ©td^ nntertolnben, to undertake. „ getrojien, to hope for. „ sermeffen, to presume. „ tubmen, to boast „ Betfeljeti, to te aware. „ fdionien, to be ashamed. „ xoe^tm, to resist. , «Berl)eben, to be haughty. „ toeigerti, to refuse. , ttnterfangen, to undertaka „ aunbewt, to wonder. Observations. (1) The genitive is in like manner put after the following impe*' onals : (Ss gelujiet mid), I desire, or am pleased with. (Ss jammert mi^, I pity, or compassionate. (Si xmtt mid), I repent, or regret. e« IoI)nt ftd), It is worth while. § 127. KuLB. The verbs following require after them a genitive denoting a thing and an Accusative signifying a person. SluHagen, to accuse. ©ntlool^nen, to wean. [)ren, to inform. ici^pwiim, to acquit, fflerauBen, to rob. SKo^nen, to remind. S3ef4)utbigen, to accuse. Ueberfii^tert, to convict. @nfbtnben, to liberate. Ueber^eBen, to exempt Gnfblo^en, to strip. Ueberjeugcn, to convince. (Snt^cben, to exempt aSerftd^ern, to assure. (Snflaben, to disburden. SSevtrejlen, to amuse, or put off GntHciben, to undress. virith hope. (SntlajfEn, to free from. SBiirbigen, to deem worthy, ©iittebigen, to free from. 3ei^en, to accuse; to charge, ©ntfe^en, to displace. Examples. (Sr i)ai mid) meineg ®elbeg bcraubt, he has robbed me of my money. S)er SBifc^cf ^at ben SPtebiger feineg Stmteg entfe^t, the bishop hag removed the preacher from his office. Observations. (IJ The verbs above, when in the ^asjiue voice, take for their nominative the word denoting the person: the genitive of the thing remaining the same : as, er i(i einea 93erbre^en« ongeflagt toorben. b* has been accused of a crime 420 STUTAX or the noun. § 128. j 129. § 128. KuLE. Nouns denoting the time, place, manner, intent or cause of aa !h> tion, are often put absolutely in the genitive and treated as adverbs • as, ®e8 2)lorgenS ge^e id) auS, in the morning I go out. SDlan fucfct il)n aKer Often, they seek him everywhere. 3(^ 6in SCitteiig ^injugel^en, I am willing to go there. Observations. (1) This adverbial use of the genitive is quite common in Ger- man. See § 101. In order, however, to express the partioulax point, or the duration of time, the accusative is generally employed, or a preposition with its proper case ; as, 3i) wetbe ndthjien SJlontag aug bet ®tabt ge'^en, T shall go out of town next monday. § 129. Rule. A noun or pronoun used to represent the object, in referemee to which an action is done or directed, is put in the dative : as, Sd) banfe bir, I thank (or am thankful to) you. @r gefdllt Dielen Seuten, he pleases many people. @t i^ bent £obe entgangen, he has escaped from death. Observations. (1) The dative is the case employed to denote the pe. son or the thing, 171 relation, to which the subject of the verb is represented as acting. Compared with the accusative, it is the case of the remote object : the accusative being the case of the immediate object. Thus, in the example, i^ fArieb meiiiem SBater cinen ?3ricf, I wrote (to) my father a letter, the immediate object is a letter; while /oi/ier, the per- son to whom I wrote, is the remote object. The niimbei of verba thus taking the accusative with the dative, is quite lai-ge. (2) On the principle explained in the preceding observation, may be resolved such cases as the foUovidng : es t^ut mir leib, it causes me sorrow, or I am sorry ; eS loitb mit Im ^erjen Kt^ tljnn, it will cause pain to me m the heart, (it will pain me to the heart,)&c. (3) A right regard to the observation made above, name!}', that tie dative merely marks that person or thing, in reference to which an action is performed, will serve, also, to explain all such examples as these : 3t)nen Bebcutct biefeS Ojjfer uid)t«, to you (}. e. so far ss yon UBE OF THE DATI-VE. $ 130. § 131. 421 lire concerned) this sacrUioe means nothing ; bfe StjrSnen, bie (Sureiti Stteit gejlDlfeti, the tears which have flowed in relation to (i. e. from} your dispute ; mit: tobtete cin @cl)ug boS i|Jferb, a shot killed a horse for me, i. e. killed my horse ; fallc mit nict)t, jtlcinev, fall not for me, little one. In such instances as the last two, the dative is often omitted in translating. (4) The Rule comprehends all such verbs as the follovnng : ants tocrten, to answer; binfen, to thank; bienen, to serve; broljen, to threaten ; fe^Ien, to fall short ; jlu^cn, to curse ; folgen, to follow ; fio^iitn, to do homage ; geBii^ren, to be due ; gefaften, to please ; ge« iji'Tt, to pertain to; ge^ord^en, to obey; geniigen, to satisfy; gcreis 4)1 ', .0 be adequate ; gleic^cn, to resemble ; ^elfeit, to help, &c. (5) This Rule, also, comprehends all reflexive verbs that govern the dative : as, \ii inaf e mix !einen !£itel an, Wetcl)en id) uict;t ^abe, I claim to myself no title, which I have not ; as, also, all impersonala requiring the dative : as, eg Betiebt mir, it pleases me, or I am pleased ; cs tnongett mir, it is wanting to me, or I am wanting, Slc. (6) The dative is, also, often used after passive verbs : as, i§neii Iturbe Mjlbcrjianbeti, it was resisted to them, i. e. they were resisted ; won Ocijietn ttiitb ber SDcg baju Befdjit^t, the way thereto is guarded by angels ; i^m Wixb geloljnt, (literally) it is rewarded to him, i. e. he is rewarded. § 130. Rule. Many compound verbs, particularly those compounded with e t, » e r, e n t, an, o B, a u f. Bet, n a c^, iox, 5 u and vu i b e t, require after them the dative ; as, 3i^ ^aBe i^m Oelb ongeBoten, I have ofiered liim money. § 131. Rule. An adjective used to limit the application of a noun, where m English the relation would be expressed by such words as to or for, governs the dative : as, @ei beinem ^etrn getteu, be faithful to your master. ®ag Sffiettet i^ una nidjt giinfltg, the weather is not favorable to ua Observations. (1) Under this Rule are embraced (among others) the following adjectives : d^ulicft, like ; ongemeflien, app-opriate ; angenel;m, agree- able; anjiiifig, offensive ; Betannt, known ; Befdjieben, destined; eigen, peculiar ; fremb, foreign ; gemdi, according to • gemcin, common ; *2I2 tSE OF THE ACCUSATIVE. § 132. gewa^fdi, competent; gitabig, gracious; ^eilfam, healthful; IteB agre3al)le ; na[;e, near ; uberfegen, superior ; Willtommen, welcome h)ibiig, adverse; bienjiBar, serviceable; ge^orfam, obedient; itit^n(i^, useful. § 132. Rule. A noun or pronoun which is the immediate object of an active transitive verb, is put in the accusative : SaSir Keben unfeie greunbe, we love our friends. 3)er .&unb Beiviacljt baS •&aug, the dog guards the house. Observations. (1) The accusative, as before said, being the case of the direct or immediate object (§ 129. 1.) is used with all verbs, whatever their classification in other respects, that have a transitive signification. Accordingly, under this rule come all those impersonal and reflexiv* verbs that take after them the accusative ; all those verbs having a uiusative signification, as, fallen, to fell, i, e. to cause to fall ; as also nearly all verbs compounded with the prefix Be.* (2) £et)rcn, to teach ; nennen, to name ; l^cipen, to call ; fd^elten, to reproach (with vile names) ; taufen, to baptize (christen) ; take after them two accusatives : as, er le^rt mtdi J)te beutfdbe ®t!rad)e, he teaches me the German language ; ev nennt it;n fcincn SRetter, he calls him his deliverer. See Lesson LIII. (3) The accusative is used with such terms as Id i f g e n, to weigh ; t o ft e n, to cost ; g H t c n, to pass for ; to e 1 1 ij, woi-th ; f d) to c r, lieavy ; r e i d), rich ; tang, long ; to e i t, wide ; to mark definitely the measure or distance f indicated by these words ; as, biefer ©tocE ift einen gug laug, this stick is a foot long ; er iji sict Sdonate olt, he is four months old. (4) As words expressing time indefinitely are put in the genitive (§ 128. 1.), so those denoting a particular point, or duration of time, ere put in the accusative ; as, id) Wartcte ben jtociten %aQ, I waited two days. (.5) A substantive construed with a participle, is sometimes put absolutely in the accusative ; as, bicfen Utnftanb auggenommen, jinbe Id) U((e3 redit, this circumstance excepted, I find all right. * The exceptions are btgcDUCii, bt^aijtn, bcflt^fn, bctu§cn, bcbnrren and t In the ea: ier German, these words of measure or distance were piK in the genitifo : as, fiiifi' fepanue rocit, a span wide. APPOSITION. § 133. § 134. 423 S 133. Rule. A noun or pronoun used merely to explain or specify that which is signified by a preceding noun or pronoun, must be in the same case : as, Siccro, ein grof et SRebner, Cicero, a great oratw. 3t)m, meinem Sffictjtt^dter, to him, my benefactor. JTfr SRat^ meinea SSruberg, beS Stei^tisileifxten, the advice of my brothe-, the lawyer. Observations. (1) The explanatory noun is said to be in apposiiion with that which it explains . the latter being called the principal term. Be- tween these two, that is, between the principal and the explanatory term, there often intervenes some connective particle. Thus, er f)at jtct) ats Oefe^gcber »crbient gemadjt, he, as a lawgiver, has rendered himself meritorious ; mein 9latl)Bar, namlid) ber SSauct, my neighbor, namely, the farmer. This latter mode of specifying (that is, with the word iiSnilicb), is far more common in German than in English. (2) The proper names of months, countries, towns, and the like appellatives are put in apposition with their common names ; where, m English, the two words stand connected, for the most part, by the preposition of; as, ber SKonat Stuguji, the month (o/) August ; bie ©tabt Sonboit, the city (of) London ; bie Uni»erfitat Orfotb, the uni- versity (of) Oxford. § 134. THE PRONOUNS. Rule. A pronoun must agree with the noun or pronoun which it repre- sents, in person, number and gender: as, 3)cr SKonti, tuetcher toeife iji, the man who is wise. Ziit grau, \vd6)t jicipig i\\, the woman who is diligent. iBag .Sinb, weldjeg Hein ijl, the ^liild that is small. Obsbevations. (1) The neuter pronoun, e « , is used in a general and indefinite way to represent words of all gender and numbers : as, eg ifl ber artann, it is the man ; e« ift bie gtau, ii is the woman ; e« ifi bo3 .Rinb, U is the chUd ; ti finb bie -Kanner, they are the meji, &c. In like manner, also, often are used, the pronouns bag, (that); b i e «, (this) It) OS. (what); as also the neuter adjective (xilzi, (all); as, iai jlnb mcinc 3lid)tct, thase are my judges- 424 SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. § 135. (2) When the antecedent is a personal appellation formed by ona of the diminutive (neuter) terminations, 4) en and lein, the pro- noun instead of being in the neuter, takes generally the gender natural to the person represented: as, too ijj i^t ®6§ncbeii ? 3ii et (not ei) im ®ortett ? Where is your little son 1 Is fte in the garden 1 The same remark applies to Sffieffi (woman) and gvauenjinimet (lady)- When, however, a child or servant is referred to, the neuter is often employed. (3) A collective noun may in German, as in English, be repre- sented by a pronoun in the plural number: as, bie ©eijilidjfeit Wat fur ii^re dttifte fel^r beforgt, the clergy were very anxious about their rights. (4) The relative in German can never, as in English, be sup- pressed:* thus, in English, we say, the letter (which) you WTote; but in German, it must be, ber ffltief, ttclcben bu fditiebeji. (5) The neuter pronoun eg , aX the beginning of a sentence, is often merely expletive, and answers to the English word "there" in the like situation : as, e3 l»ac nientanb t;iet, there was no one here ; c3 fommen Seute, there are people coming. (6) The English forms, he is a friend of mine; it is a stable nj ours, &e., can not be literally rendered into German; for there we must say, er- ifl mein ^leunb/ he is my friend; or, et ifl einer meinei gteunbe, he is one of my friends, &c. See L. 28. 3. (7) The definite article in German is often used, where in Eng- lish a possessive pronoun is required : as, et Whifte t^m init ber ^aiib, lie beckoned to him with his (the) hand. (8) The datives of the personal pronouns are often in familiar style employed in a manner merely expletive: as, iij lobe tuir ben SR^elntuein, I like Rhenish wine for me, i e. 1 prefer Rhenish vnne See § 129. 3. § 135. THE ADJECTIVES. Rule. Adjectives, when they precede their nouns (expressed or under stood), agree with them in gender, number and case ; as, Siefe frf)one ®ome, this handsome lady, ©in gutiger uub gercttiter 93ater, a good and just father. Sen jtoolften btefeg SKonatg, the twelfth (day) of this month, &c. ^ier ill ein aJlipBerjianb, — e:n ^anbgveiflic^ev, here is a misunder. standing, — a palpable (one). » Tl« antecedent is loiDetiraes omiUed, nnd udmetimes folluws tlie reiaUve : aa, C < fs tinlin. t>it>« iu nnjl^ ((Adth each and varied in form accordingly ; as, ein gcletjrter ©o^n unb einc gelel^rtc Sodjtet, a learned son and a learned daughter. The adjectives are, also, often repeated, though the nouns be all of the same gender. § 136. THE VERBS. Rule. A verb agrees with its subject or nominative in number and per- son; as, 3ebet 9lugenBlicf i^ Jojibat, every moment is precious. 5)ie S3duine blii^en ttn gtiil;ling, the trees bloom in spring. Observations. (Ij When the subject is the pronoun cS, b a 3 or b t e 8, used in- definitely (See § 134. 1.), the predicate, if a noun, determines the numbei and person of the verb; as, eg jtnb bie gtu^te 3t)re6 Sl^unS, these are the fruits of your actions. (2) In the secimd person (singular and plural) of the imperative mood, the pronoun which forms the subject is commonly omitted ; s, grf;et ij'm unb faget So^anni hitcbet, was 3^r fe^et nnb ^oret, go and hill J< hn what ye see and hear. (3) VTien the verb has two or more singulai" subjects connected 426 gTJTTAX OF THE VERB. § 137. by It n b, H is generally put in the plural ; as, #a^ unb (Siferftt(^ jinb tjeftige Seibenfchnften, hatred and jealousy are violent passions. (4) When the subject is a collective noun, that is, one conveying the idea of many individuals taken together as unity, the verb must (generally) be in *he singular; as, ba3 englifdie SBolf ijat grope greit^eit, the Englisii people have (has) great liberty. In a fevy cases only, as, ein ^JJaar, a pair ; eine SKenge, a number ; ein ®u^enb, a dozen, the verb stands in the plural. (6) When a verb has several subjects, and they are of different persons, the verb agrees vidth the first rather than the second, and the second rather than the third ; as, bn, bcin SSiTtber unb id) WoUen fVajiereii gc^cit, thou, thy brother and I will go take a walk ; t» unb beiu SBrubet Betmcget »iel, you and your brother avail much. § 137. USE OP THE TENSES. Rule. The Present tense properly expresses what exists or is taking place at the time being ; as, bie »oI)te !EcH)fet£eit bef(i)ittt ben @(f)U)ad)en, true valor protects the weak. Observations. (1) The Present in German, as in other languages, is often, in lively nan'ative, employed in place of the Imperfect ; as, S>ie Sonne ge^t (for ging) unter, bo flel^t (for jianb) er am J^ot, ic, the sun goes dovra, while he stands at the door, &c. (2) The Present is not imfrequontly used for the Future, when the true time is sufficiently clear from the context ; or when, for the sake of emphasis, a future event is regarded and treated as al- ready certain ; as, 34) reife morgen 06, I start (L e. will start) to morrow. SBet toeip, Wet morgen liBer un« befte^tt, who knows who commands (i. e. will command) us to-morrow 1 SBalb fe^en &immel, may heaven grant it! bieft-r 33ouin trage nie Wiebet gnicfct, let this Cor may this) tree never again bear fruit ! er tljue h>a3 er toill, let him do what he will ! § 144. Rdlb. The Conditional mood is used, where a condition is supposech which may or may not be conceived to be possible ; as, SBare id) reid), fo wurbe id) i^nt feine SSifte nid)t aBgEfd)Iageii ^abm, were I rich, I would not have refused his request. 9Benn cr nod) lebte, fo toiirbe er 60 Sa^re att fein, if he yet lived, he would be fifty years old. Observations. (1) Besides the two tenses ranged in the paradigms (See p. 328 and following) under the head of thfe Conditional, it must be observ- ed that the Imperfect and the Pluperfect of the Subjunctive are equally often employed in expressing conditional propositions. In point of time, indeed, there is no difference between the Imperfect of the Subjunctive and the flft Conditional, and between the Plu- perfect of the Subjunctive and the second Conditional. Ordinarily, where both forms are employed in the same sentence, the Subjunc- tive will be found in the clause expressing the condition, while the form peculiar to the Conditional appears in the other ; as, id) hjurbe eS ttjun, WEtin eg mogtid) wore, I would do it, if it were possible ; toenn er ^icr ttidve, tourbe er bid) 6efud)t ^oBen, if he were here, he would have visited you. (2) When the condition is assumed and treated as a fa I, it ia expressed, not by the Conditional, but by the Indicative ; as, 6i)i bu reid), fo gieS »ie(, art thou (i. e. if thou art) rich, then give much. (3) Sometimes the ^erb expressing the condition is merely un- rterstood ; as, id) i^dtfe bie ®adie anberg gemad)t, I should have dona >t otherwise (if it had been committed to me) ; in feincr 8age ^tte i(ft nSB or THE CONDITIONAL AND IMPERATIVE. §1^5. 431 H ni(6t get^an, (if I had been) in his situation, I would not have donfi it. (4) Sometimes, in the way of exclamation, the condition is ex- pressed, while that which depends upon it is omitted : in which case the whole expression being of the nature of a wish, or petition, is often introduced (in translation) by " O, " "Iwish that, " and the like : as, ^citte ici) bod) biefen Ttaim nte gefe^en ! as, O, that I had never seen this man! literally, had I never seen this man (how happy i should be) ! ware cr bod) om Seben ! O, that he were yet alive ! (5) The Conditional is frequently employed in questions designed to elicit a negative answer ; as, U'dre eg benn IBO^t ? could it be true ) (it could not be true ;) bu Wdreji fo falfd) getuefen ? would you have been so faithless ? (you would not.) (6) Not unlrequently the Conditional of the auxiliaries miigen, biirfen, foden, fonncn and iBoKen, is employed to render p,n expres- sion less positive, or to give it an air of diffidence ; as, id^ hiottte, ®ie (jegletteten mid), I could wish (instead of, I vdsh) you would accom- pany me ; id) mod)te fd)Wer ju itBerreben fetn, I should be hard to be persuaded, or, it would be difficult to persuade me ; biirfte id) ) preceding, is used to represent the being, action or passion, in a manner unlimited: as, ©tcrlben ifl Slii)te, bod^ teben unb ni(f)t fe^en, bo8 ijl ein Uiigtiirf, to die is nothing, yet to live and not to see, that is a misfor- tune indeed. S)pt 5ffiunf(i| gefcbt ju Wcrbcn, the wish to be praised. Obsbevations. (I) The Infinitive wiihovi ju, (to) appears, a. When, as a verbal substantive (§ 146. 3.), it is made either tne subject or the object of a verb : as, Oeben ifl fetiger aU Ste^mtn, to give is more blessed than to receive; ba« neiint er orbetten, that he calls working. i. When it stands alone, as in a dictionary : as, loben, to praise • Ueben, to love. c. After the verbs ^eifen, to bid: as, id) l^ief i^it ge^en, I bade him go. ^clfen, to help : as, cr ^itft wtr fdjrciben, he helps me to write. U()xen, * to teach : as, et Ut)tt bag ,Kinb tefen, he teaches the child to read. /einen, * to learn : as, hiit Icmen tanjen, we learn to dance. ^■?vcn, to hear: as, id) I;6re fie ftngcn, I hear them sing. fe^?n, to sec : as, id) fet;e itjn fommen, I see him come. fu()len, to feel : as, id) fu^Ie ben ^uU fd)Iagen, I feel his pulse beat, finbeii, to find: as, id) fonb bag SBud) auf bent 3:ifd)e Regen, I found the boolc lying on the table. o, After the auxiliaries of mood, mogen, tonnen, laffen, biitfen, fotten, (BoUen and ntiiffen, and after Mjerben, when employed as an auxiliarv in forming the future tense. e. After the verbs foUowdng, in certain plirases, bleiben, to remain : as, er btcibt fi^en, he continues sitliwr. fasten, to aro in a carriage : as, id) fat;te f))ajteren, I ride out for an airing. » Sebtcn and Ictncn form exceptions to the observation in the text : admit- iing, as they do sometimes, the particle jii between them and an Infinitive succeeding The student will note, also, that the Infinitive after all these verbs, Is, in English, often best rendered by aparticiple' as, ft fiiljllc feiu SBlut (jS^veti ae felt ids blood boiling. to g» ot walk to have: fflen. to lay: ma^en. * to make : nenneit, tetten. to name : to ride: t^un,* to do: (2) The Infinitive i, rSK 01" THE INFINITIVE. § 146. 433 as, cr getjt Beftein, he goes begging, as, et ijat gut reben, he has easy talking, i. e. it is easy for him to talk, as, ii) lege mid) fc^lafen, I lay myself down to sleep, as, ex mat^fe mt^ lad^en, he made me laugh. fca« nemte i^ ffjlelen, that I call playing, as, iii teite fpajieren, I ride out for exer- cise. as, er tl;ut ntc^ts all fdfjftten, he does nothing but scold, ju is employed : a. After nouns and adjectives, wliich, in English, are followed either by the preposition to with the Infinitive or by of with a participle : as, id) war ^e'ij iljn ju fe^en, 1 was glad to see him ; @ie t;aben 8ujl ju f^jietcn, you have a desire to play ; id) 6in mube eS ju tjmm, I am tired of hearing it : 6. After verbs, to express the end or object of their action : as, ic^ fomme mit S^nen ju fjjredjen, I come to (i. e. in order to) speak with you : in which case also, the particle utn often comes before JU, to render the expression more forcible : as, liebet bie Sugeiib, «m gludftid) 5U fein, love virtue, in order (urn) to be happy. t. After the verbs following and others of like import : Stnfangen, to begin. Sogern, to delay. Sluf^oren, to cease. ®elD0^ncn, to accustom. 58efet)ten, to command. Sieneii, to serve. IBitten, to beg. ^inreidjen, to suffice. Srworten, to expect. SBarnen, to warn, ^ojfen, to hope. SBeigern, to refuse, giitdbten, to fear. Srtennen, + to acknowledge. 2)ro^en, to threaten. SSelcnnen, t to confess. ©id) fteuen, to rejoice. ©djeinen, to appear, ©id) fd)dmeu, to be ashamed. aBiVnfd)en, to wish, ©id) tubmen, to boast SSerlangen, to desire. * TlaSjen however, cannot, as in English, be used to signi^ to make or cnuse by force: thus, to translate the English phrase, malce him go out, the Germans say, l(i6 (not maift) ifen binauSgeheii The Infinitive vrithout ju comes after t^un, only when Iii4t8 al8 precedes, in the example above. t @rEeuuctt and ietenntn are construed mainly with the preterite of the In- finitive : as, ev crtcnut, ftc^ getn't ju \sAt\\, he acknowledges that he has been in error. 19 434 8TMTAX OF THE PARTICIPLE. § 147. S3e«uen, to regret. SrlouBtn, to permit SPjIegen, to be wont. ®c)iatten, to allow, gottfa^ren, to proceed. SSerbienen, to deserve. Untcrlaffen, to neglect. aSagen, to venture. §aben, to have. aBifeii, to knovF. ©ciit, to be. Sdu^en, to be of use. ^elfen, to help. grommcn, to avail. SBetmeiben, to avoid. d. After the prepositions o^ne (withouC) and jiatt or aiijloM (wfc $lead of) : as, cfjne ein SQoxt ju fagen, without saying a word ; cntftati j« fcliretben, instead of writing. (3) The Infinitive in German, as intimated before, often performs the office of a verbal Substantive. It is then commonly preceded by the neuter of the article, and has all the various cases: as. boS Sugen fcftobet bem fiugner am meijien, lying injures the liar most; itb bin bea @ei)enS mait, I am weary of walking; sumSReifen biji bu nidjt gcfdt)icft. you are not tit for journeying. (4) The Infinitive active, in German, after certain verbs, as, feiii, lafen, setbieten, befe^len, &c. is not unfrequently employed passively : thus, la^ i^n rufcn, which (literally) means, let him call, may, also, signify, let him be called ; ei iji tcine 3eit ju »cvlieten, there is no time to lose, or to be lost. (5) The Germans often employ the Indicative or Subjunctive, preceded by ia% where, in English, the Infinitive, preceded by to, is used : as, id) itieig, bag er bet -3lann i)l, I know him to be (literally, ] know that he'is) the man. (6) The Infinitive, in English, preceded by the words how, where, what, when, and the like, after such verbs as, tell, know, say and teach, cannot be rendered literally into German : the Germans, in such cases, always using the Indicative or Subjunctive of such verbs as fotlen, muffeti, tonnen : aa, id) weip, Wie id) eg fliuti mug, I know how to do it, or (literally) I know how I must do it ; le^ren ©ie mid), B)a» Id) fagen foU, teach me what to say. For the use of the Infinitive of mog"!!, Woden, foUen, &c., in place of the past Participle See § 74. 3. § 147. THE PARTICIPLES. (1) The Participles, in German, are varied by cases : foUowing the same rules of inflection as the adjectives. Having the nature of adjectives, the Present in a. few, and the Preterite in many instances, TeadUy admit the degrees of comparison. (2) The use of the P.irticiple, as such, however, in German, ia rSE OF THE PARTICIPLES. § 148. 436 far more restricted than in English. For, in English, it is commonly used to form a distinct clause of a sentence ; and is thus made to indicate the time, cause or means of effecting that which is expressed in the main clause : thus, we say : Walking (that is, by or when walking) uprightly, we walk surely. This mode of expression can rarely, if ever, be, adopted in German ; into which language, if we desire to translate the above sentence, we must say : wciin wir aufs vidjtig manbelti, fo wanbeln »ir ftd)t-t, that is, when we walk uprightly, ve walk surely. (3) So, too, we say in English : Having given him the money, he went away ; but, since there is nothing in German to correspond to this English compound Participle, it would be a gross error to at tempt to render the sentence literally Resort must be had, as in the other case, to a different structure : thus, ills cr it)m bas ®elb gegeSen ^atte, ging er ttjcg, that is, after or when he had given him the money, he went away. In this way must all similar eases be managed : we must employ a verb in each clause and connect the two together by means of suitable conjunctions; such as, Weil, trcnn, aie, ba and inbem. § 148. Rule. The Present Participle, lil feiibe, the reader, (literally) the (one) reading ; bie ©terbenbe, the dying (female). (3) This Participle, however, cannot in German, as in English, be, by means of an article, turned into an abstract verbal nmm. But in order properly to render such phrases as, the reading, the tcriting, into German, we must use the present of the Infinitive : thus, bag £efen, bag @d)reiben. (4) The Present Participle, as stated in the Rule, may govern .tlie case of its own verb ; but it must be noted that the word so gov- erned, always precedes the Participle : bag unS »erfolgenbe ®ef(t)icf, the us pursuing fate, i. e. the fate that pursues us. In some instances, the words are actually unitfd, forming compounds : as, E^vtiEbeitO, honor-loving, that is, ambitious ; gefc^gebenb, law-giving, &c. (6) The Present Participle is sometimes used with the power of an A Iverb ; that is, to express some circumstance of manner or con- dition : thus, weinenb f^tad) er ju mir, weeping,(i. e. weepingly) he spoke to me ; er fe^te m f(i)Wetgenb nteber, keeping silent (L e. si- lently) he sat down. § 149. Rule. The Preterite Participle is not only used in the formation of the compound tenses, but may, also, be construed with nouns, after the maraier of Adjectives : as, 3tl) ^oBe ^eute bag SSud) getefcn, I have read the book to-day. Gin gelietteg .Rinb, a beloved child. Set aUann ifl gele^rt, the man is learned. Observations. (1) This Participle, in its chai-acter as an Adjective, is fiix mora frequently employed in German than in English. Indeed, many Pre- terites in Gei-man, having lost all character as Participles, are now used exclusiv ily as Adjectives. (2) The Preterite, like the Present Participle, is sometimes used h an adverbial manner: thus, ba« !Bit(^ i(l Berlpren gegangen, the book is lost (literally, gone lost). (3) This is especially the case with certain Participles employed with the verb Icmnten ; as, er fommt gefaljten, he comes driven, i. e. driving in a carriage • er fommt getitten, he comes ridden, i. e. riding 8TNTAX OF TBS ADVERBS. § 150. § 151. 43) eu horseback ; cr ffimtnt gcjicgcn, lie comes flying ; er fommt geloufen, he comes running, &c. (4) Kindred to this, is its use, when connected with a verb, to express the condition or state of the subject : as, je^t jlerb' id) Se< nif)igt, jiow I die content ; in feiite JEiigcnb gc^tlt, fro^t ev bet SSew leumbung, wrapped in his virtue, he defies calumny. (5) The Preterite Participle usually in connection with the accii. sative, is in some phrases employed absolittely : as, bie Slugcn gee §immel geridjtet, his eyes being directed towards heaven ; ben OeWinn abgercdjnet, the profit being deducted ; biefen gall auggcnommen, tliia case being excepted. (6) This Participle is sometimes elliptically used for the Impera^ tive. (See § 145. 3.) § 150. Rule. The Future Participle is used, when the subject is to bo repre> rented as a thing that must or ought to take place : as, Sine ju loBenbe S^at, a deed to be (i. e. that ought to be) praised. Observations. (1) What is called the Future Participle in German, is produced by placing ju before the present participle as above. It can be formed from transitive verbs only, and is always to be taken in a passive sense. It is chiefly to be found hi the case of compound verbs : thus, ^djjuf^renber <§err, the-highly-to be-honored L e. the honorable, Sir. S 161. THE ADVERBS. Rule. Adverbs qualify verbs, participles, adjectives and other adverbs : aa, (St fc^teiBt feltcn, he writes seldom. @T Ijat ben @egenf}anb fiortt^fflic^ Be^anbelt, he has treated the suk ject admirably. Siefea 93ud) iji fe^t gut, this book is very good. Sr at6eitct xdijt getti, he works unvrillingly. Observations. Almost all adjectives in the absolute form are, in German, em- ployed as Adverbs. See § 102. 3. For remarks on the position of Adverbs in sentences, see the section on the arrangement of words §158. 438 SrNTAS OF THE PREPOSITIONS AND CONJUNCTIONS. $ 162. § 152. THE PREPOSITIONS. Rule. The Prepositions anflatt, aufetl^alB, bicffeits, &c. (See the Liat S 109.) are coiistrued with the genitive. Observations. (1) When the same Preposition governs several noons in the same construction, it is put before the first only ; as, id) Bin son metJ ner -^einiat^, meinem SBatevlanbe unb lueiiicii gveuiibcu getrcimt, from my home, my country and my friends, am I separated. (2) For the right use and position of some of the Prepositions, much attention is required. See the Observations on those con- Btrued with the genitive : § 110. § 153. Rule. The Prepositions o««, aiiptr, bei, &c. (See List § 111.) are am- Btrued with the dative. (See Obs. § 112.) § 154. Rule. iTie Prepositions buvdi, fiir, gegen, &c. (See List § 113.) are con- Btnicd with the accusative. (See Obs. § 114.) § 155. Rule. The Prepositions an, auf, l^tiiter, &c. (See List § 115.) govern the uative or accusative : the accusative, when motion or tendency iawaras is signified, but in the other situations the dative. (See Oils. § 116.) S 156. THE CONJUNCTIONS. Rule. Conjunctions connect words and sentences in construction, and bIiow their mutual relation and dependence ; as, Scfiann unb aBit^cIni ge^en jnr Si^ute, John and William are goin{( to school. 34 fa^ e« ; ba^er toei J id) zi, 1 saw it ; therefore I know it ®r iji 4Hc» oI« ic^, he is older than L Observations. (1) Under the general name of Conjunctions in this Rule, mnst be included all words performing the cffice of Conjunctions, ivhether trSK OF THE CONJUNCTIOKS. § 156. 439 properly such or not. Of these connective words three olasaeH aio to be distinguished : 1. those that do not affect the order of the words of a sentence in which they occur (§ 160. 8.) ; 2. those that always remove the copula to the end of the sentence (§ 160. 7.) ; 3. and finally, those that do or do not remove the copula to the end- according as they stand before or after the subject (§ 160. 8.). (2) The true force and use of the Conjunctions is best learned from examples ; of which see a large collection in Lesson 69. We subjoin, however, a few remarks in explanation of the foUoviring : a. SHier, attein, fouberu. Stber is less adversative than either of the others. It is often merely continuative. SlUein always intro- duces what is contrary to what might be inferred from what pre- cedes : as, er iji fe^r jlciptg, aUein er lenit fe^r Wentg, he is very in- dustrious, but he learns very little, ©oiibern serves to introduce what is contradictory. It is used only when a negative precedes ; nict)t ebel, fonbern flciimmtWg, not noble, hut pusillanimous ; eg iji Vueber fcbwarj, nod) iraun, foixbeni griiit, it is neither black nor brown, hut green. J. 35of , also auf baf , introduces- a clause expressing the end, ob- ject or result: as, id) lueif, baf et !oinmt, I know that he is coming. This form of expression is more common in German than in English. When baf is left out, the copula comes immediately after the sub- ject. See Note, page 445. c. 35o(6 introduces something unexpected or not properly proceed- ing from the antecedent : as, er ifl fe^t veid), unb ^at bod) inenig geavBeitet he is very rich, yet has he worked little. It is sometimes elliptically employed to indicate certainly, entreaty and the like : as, fagen @i« niir bod), tell me, pray. d. 3e, like the definite article in English, is put before compara- lives to denote proportion. It, then, has bcjlo for its correlative : thus, ie feijiger er iji, bejio gelei^rtcr loirb er, z?ie more diligent he is, the more learned he becomes. iDejlo sometimes comes before je : as, ein jtiinjlwerf ip bejio fdjoner, je BoUtommener eg iji, a work of art is the more beautiful, the more perfect it is. Sometimes je is employed before both comparatives : thus, je tne^r, je 6ejfer, the more, the better. Sometimes oefto stands before a comparative without je answering to i; : as, id) enrart^te nid)t meinen greunb ju finben, bejio grower aSet (BCir nieine Swiib;, al8 id) i^n fa^, I did not expect to find my friend, but the greater was my joy, when I saw him. « Obgteitl;, c6fd)on, ottoo^t, indicate concession. The parts are »lt«n separated, especially by monosyllables : SucL as, id) bu, er, et t40 SYNTAX OF THE LNTEItJECTIOBS. § 157. toir, il^r, jte. Often two or three such little words corae \)etween : aa, ob er glei^ alt iji, k., aWumgh he is old, &c. ; eb ii^ nii^ steic^ fteue, Jfc, although I rejoice, &c. /. @o, after such conjunctions: as, teeil, aU, ba, weun, nad^bem, o6» gleid), o6fd)on, otoo^l, weiingtcid) and ioiewol;!, introduces the subse* quent clausa This is cliiefiy the case, when the antecedent clause is long, or consists of several members : Ex. SBeil bid) ®ott bie^ 9l(te4 gewa^r werben lief, fo i|l Siemanb fo weif; aU bu, since God hath given thee to know all tliis, so (therefore) is no one so vrise as thou. @o commonly, however, denotes comparison : as, bet .ffnabe ijl fo gut, aU baa 3Jlabii)en, the boy is so (as) good as the girl. So in the phra^ ses, fotuo^l als aud), or fowo^l aU, so (as) well us : fobalb atiS, so (as) soon as, &c. With aud) (fo — audi) follo-iving, it signifies however ■■ as, fo gtcg bie .il!|ie, pope. 3)crrii(J'enma(^cv, hair-dresser. 3)farrcr, m. -i, pi. -, vicar, parsoA S)fer'be^«nbler, m., horsedealer. 3>^itifol)y, m -en, philosopher. 3)re'btgcr, m. -i, pi. -, preacher. 9)rie)ler, m. -i, pi. -, priest. 3iebncr, m. -i, pi. -, orator, ©iittlev, m. —i, pi. —, saddler, ©c^au'fpielet, m. -i, pi. -, actor, ©(^loffer, m. -i, pi. -, locksmith. ©d)mieb, m. -es, -i, pi. -e, smith. ©c^netber, m. -3, pi. -, tailor. ©4ovn'|leinfegei, chimney-sweep. ©c^rift'ileUcr, m. -i, pi. -, author. ©(^u^'flidcr, m. -i, pi. -, cobbler, ©i^ul'te^ri r. m. -J, schoolteacher, ©eiler, m.-i, pi. -, rope-maker, ©pecerei'^dnbler, grocer, ©tid'erin, pi. -nen, embroideress. S^ag'Io^ner, m. -i, day-laborer. 3;o))e}i'ver, m. -S, pi. -, upholsterer Srobler, m. -it pi. — , fripperer. Xui)'fjarii)Ur, m. -i, pi. -, draper. Utjx'maijtt, m. -i, watchmaker. SBiifc^'erin, pi. -nen, washei-woman. 5Bet)Ct, m. -i, pi. -, weaver. 2Bec^aler, m. -I, money-exchanger. SBunbttrst, pi. -atjte. See Sljiruvj. 3a|narjt, pi. -arjte, dentist. SucPctbailer, confectioner. II. Man. 25 er 5Kcn)'(^. 5lltei, n. -S, old age. Slmmc, /• -, pi. -n, nurse. aSraut,/. -, pi ©riiute, bride. SPrau'tigam, m. -i, bridegroom, fe'^cfrau, /. -, pi. -en, wife. S'^eman", pi. -manner, husband. Snfet, m -i, pi. -, grand son. Kn'felin, pi. -nen, grand daughter. gami'Iie,/. -, pi. -n, famOy. ®cburt',/.-, birth. OemaH', m, -ei, pL -e, ) ®ema^'Hn,/.-,/Hten,h'""°"' ©vog'mutter, -mutter, grandmothei ®ro9'»(iter, -ijaler, grandfather. Sugenb,/. -, youth. Sungfrau, /. -, pi. -en, virgin. Siingttng, m. -i, young man. .Rinb^eit,/. -, childhood, infancy. SUac^fommen, pi. descendants . ^iiiju m. -n, pi. -n, godfather. * For declension and formati m itderuions, page 104> oi plural, see p. 80 ; connected nev ^. Savte, beard. S'ein, n.-e«, -«, pZ. -e, leg. Slut, 71. -eS, -«, blood. Svufi,/. -, i)^. ©rujlc, breast. SSufcn, m. -i, pi. -I bosom, ©aunien, m. -i, pi. -, thumb. ©I'ljcgen, m. -S, pi. -, elbow. gevfe,/. -, p/. -n, heel, gleifi^, n. -ti, flesh, ©atte, /. -, gall. Oauinen, m. -i, pi. ~, palate. ®c'^irn', n. -Z. -n, tongue. IV. Maladies, Remedies, ^rant^ eit en, § e ilml tt cli SlnfaH, m. -ti, -i, pi. -foille, fit. ©alfam, «t. -«, pi -e, balm. Slattern, pi. the small-pox. SBlinb^eit,/. -, blindness. Sranntnjcin, m. brandy, fflrcc^'mittcl, n. -8, pi. -, vomitive giebet, n. ~i, fever. ®cf(^»ulii', ®ef(|wiil|lc, swelling.- "iSefd^miit', ». -««i -«, pZ. -t, ulcer. ®ti$t, f. -, gout. |)eilung, /. -, pi -m, cure. ^ei'ferteit, /. -, hoarseness. |>u|len, m. -8, cough. Selajjpe,/. jalap. Solif,/.-, colic. .Rranivf, m. firttmijft, cramp. flreia, »». -eg, pi -e, cancel. 9)lafein, pi measles. 452 WOKDS FOB EXERCISES SJftttel, «. -i, pi. -, remedy. fHaxiti f. -, pi. -n, soar. Kci'scnileber/ ». -s, uervous-fever. D^nmad^l, /. -, fainting. >PoiIcp, pi. (See Slattern.) Duetfiljung, pi. -en, contusion. SRtcept', n. pi. -t, preseription ©alliCfyi -, pi. -n, salve, ©c^arlat^fiebcr, scarlet-ferer. ©c^ielcn, n. -«, squinting. Si1)itupfcr., m. -i, cold. ©c^lDtnbct, m. -i, dizziness, ©^winbfuc^t, / -, consumption. ©tammtln, n. -g, stammering. ©Summ^sit, /. -/ dumbness, ©u^t, bie faHenbe, epilepsy. Saub^ett, /. -, deafness. Mt'btlliitif. -, nausea. Un'l>a9li(^fEit, indisposition. , aSevven'fung, pi. -en, dislocation. SBarfcrfiK^t,/. -, dropsy. ?lBimbe,/. -, pi. -n, wound V. Articles of Dress, etc. .^letfcurtg^jlucfc, ic. Sterniel, m. -i,pl. -, sleeve. Strmionb, pi. -liiinber, bracelet. SHtloa, m. -iTcd, pi. -lie, satin. SBarc^cnt, m. -i, pi. -e, dimity. Satt|V, m. -ti,pl. -e, cambric. Saum'wolle,/. -, cotton. ®ein'fletber, pi. pantaloons. S8efo|', m. -e?, pi. -fdjc trimming. SSeutcI, m. -4, pi. -, purse, bag. SBrillc, /. -, p.. -n, spectacles. Srufliiabcl,/. -, pi. -n, broach. Surfle,/. -, pi. -n, brush. ®egen, m. -i, pi. -, sword, ©tamant, m. diamond. &'^mintt, n. -ti, -a, ivory. 8raci)et, m. -a, pi. -, fan. glor, m. -ti, -i, pi. glore, crape. grai, m. pi. gfrcitfe, dress-coat STiflnfe,/. -, pi. -n, fringe, gutter, n. -i, lining, ©efc^mci'be, n. -i, jewelry, ©ranat', m. -tn, pi. -en, garnet. ®urtel, >n. -i, pi. -, sash, ^aarnobel, /. -, pi. -n, hair-pin. ^ttlabanb, n.pl. -boinber, neok-Iace. $ittlStucf), n. pi. -ti:(f)er, neck-cloth, ^aube, /. -, pi. -n, cap. 4>emb, n. -eg, -i, pi. -en, shirt, .©ofcn, pi. breeches. Iw'fentrager, m. suspenders, fiamafc^'en, pi. gaiters. Ramm, m.pl. Simmt, comb. Xapptif. -, pi. -n, cap. jfleib, n. -ii, dress, gown. fiopfpug, m. -ti, head-dresa .f ragen, m. -i, pi. -, coUar. Cein'isanb, /. -, linex Scide,/. -, pi. -n. curl. SUuiTcim', !«. -i^,pl. -e, muslin. 3)fu5e,/. -, pi. -K, (See ^nwe.) SJa'bcItirfen, n. -i, pin-cushion. SUa^'nabel, /. -, pi. -n, needle. D'berroct, m. pi. -rbtfc, frock-coat Dl^trtng, m. -eg, pi. -r. ear-ring. 5>el;»erf, m. -eg, i, pi. -e, far. 3)erte, /. -, pi. -«, pearl. SJoma'be,/. -, pt. -n, pomatum. 3Jic(^'f[afd|(^en, a smelling-bottle. SRing, m. -ti, -i, pi. -t, ring, ©animet, m. -a, pi. -e, velvet, ©c^eere, /. -, pi. -n, shears, ©citofrolf, m. dressing-gown, ©(^leicr, m. -«, pi. -, vaiL ©c^Iog, n. -ti, pi. ©cfiliiffer, clasp. ©c^nalle, /. -, pi. -n, buckle, ©c^niirbrufl,/. -, pi. -briijle, stayav ©c^niir'nabet,/. -,pl. -n, bodkin ©4oog, m. -ea, pi. tcI, n. -ti, chime. ®o(fe,/. -,pl.-v.t kennel. ^aujjtftobt, /. -, pi. -jicibtc, metrop- olis, chief town. ^tSt, f. -I pi. -lit hedge. |)of, m. pi. |)ofc, court, yard. iiuttc, /. -, pi. -^^, cottage, hut. Salt, m. -ea, -8, lime. ftamin, «, -e?, jii. -c, chimney. Rammer, /. -, pi. -n, chamber. Jtcflev, m. -i, pi. -, cellar. ©^oritflettt, m. (See flnniin.) ©petc^er, m. —i, pi. — , loft, garret. ©))ttal', n, -ciipl. -talet, hospitaL ©tabttpr, n. -e8. pi. -e, city-gate, ©tftbt'siertel, m.quarter of (the) towr. ©tail, m. -ti, pi. ©tciflc, stable, ©totfmerf, n. -eg, -8, pi. -e, story, ©tube,/, -r pi- -n, chamber. Zxtii^anir n. hot-house. Irelj'ljengelttnber, n. stair-case-raiL £|urm, m. SEIjutme, tower, steeple. Umge'liungen, pi. environs, ffior'simmer, n. ante-chamber. 35or|iubt,/. -, pi. -jlcibte, suburb. .Riri^lof, m. -ei5, pi. -pfc, burying- iffianb,/. -, SSJcinbe, wall (of house) place, church-yard. SBetntevg, m. -ti, pi. -t, vine-yard itirilfpiel, n. -ti, -a, pi. -c, parisK SBtefe,/. -, pi. -n, meadow. Rixi^l^mm, m. -eg, -i, pi. -tljiirme, 3eug^nua, n. pi. -^dufer, arsenal tower, belfry of a church. Sifgtl, to- -^, P^- —< tile. ^lo|l"r, n. -a, pi. J?lSpcr, cloister. Sie'gfifleirt, )«. -ftopfeiijic|cr, m. cork-screw. VIII. Dishes. Eonfect', n. comfit, sweet-meats. (£i, n. -eg, pi. -er, egg. Si'ertu(^en, m. — g, pi. -, omelet. Srfrififj'ung, /. -, refreshment, gletfd^'bru^e, /. -, pi. -n, broth. ®fljlma^[, n. -eg, -md|Ier, banquet ■fiarn'mclfieifc^, n. -eg, mutton. |)am melfeulc, /. -, leg of mutton. Ml'jleifrf), n. -eg, veaL fialfcgcotelet'te,/. cutlet. g)fii.5I, m. -g, ^l 5>fa5Ie, bolster. 9)olfler, n. -g, pi. -, bolster. 9)ult, 71. -eg, -g, i)J, -e, desk. ■ Sla'^men, m. -g, pZ. -, frame, ©al^fag, K. ^Z. -fdlTci', 'Salt-ceUar ©i^a^tel,/. -, (See flcifl*eit.) ©c^aufel,/. -, pi -n, shoveL ©^aum'lBffel, m. -g, skimmer. ©(^iTW, >«• -^^1 -^1 pl- ■*' screen, ©errant, m. pi. Sd)rant , cupboard ©c^ub'tabc, /. -I pi. -n, drawer. Sc^ur'eifcn, n. -g, pi. -, poker. ©c^tue'fel^iJUiicn, n. match, ©eife, /. -, pi. -n, soap, ©enftopf, m. -tijpfe, mustard-pot. ©ersiet'te, /. -, pi. -n, napkin. Ste6, n. -eg, -g, pi. -t, sieve. ©o))|a, «. -g,i)l -g, sofa. ©tetn'EcPe,/. -,i)i. -n, coaL ©ulj'penrdjurfel,/. -, tureen. XtfipiHj, m. -g, pi. -c, carpet. Jtegel, m. -g, pi. -, skillet. Sif§tu(|, n. pi. -tfii^er, table-clot) Sopf, m. -eg, pi. Stiiljfe, pot. %xiijttx, m. -<-, pi. -, funnel.' SBanb'teuc^ter, m. -g, pi -, sconce. aBarm'ftttf^e, /. -, warming-pan. 33afdj'l)C(Ien, n. -g, pi. -, washbowi SBiege, /. -, pi. -n, cradle. Sud'crbofe,/. -, pi. -n, sugar-box. Sunber, m. -g, tinder. Ser ic^te. Slop, m. -eg, pi. filiife, dumpling. 9tubel, /. -, pi. -rt, vermicelli. Dd^'fenbtaten, m. roast-beef. Di^'fenfffifi^' -*^' beef. ^fann'tu(^en, »«. -g, pan-cake, ©c^inten, m. -g, p? -, ham. ©djinei'nefleifcf), n. -eg, pork. ©uppe,/. -, pi -n, soup. 3;ovte,/. -, pi. -n, tart. SBurjl,/. -, pi iI8ilt|le, eausags. IX Grain and Vegetables, ©etrcile unC ®£mu)\. SSIu'mentD^I, m. -eg, cauliflower. jfnoblaui^, m. -eg, -g, garlic. So^ne, /. -, pi -n, bean. Erbfc,/. -, pi -n, pea. ©crflc, /. -, barley. ®uife,/. -, pi. -n, cucumber. |)afer, m. -g, oats. ^rfe, w. -n, miUet. fio^t, ws. -eg, -g, cabbage. jforn, «. -eg, pi Sbriiev, corn, grain jitaut, n. -eg,.-g, pi. ^rd 'ter, hnrb JJrejfe,/. t, cress. Cinfe,/. -, pi -n, lentil 3)t()ig, >i. -eg, maize. DT COMPOSING GERMAN. 4i 55555 Ktet rettig, m. horse-radish. 3)a|iina'Fe,/. -, pi. -n, parsnip. 3>£tetft'lie,/. -, parsley. 9)flan5e,/ -,pl. -n, plant. 3)itj, m. — cS, pi — Ci mushroom. OIiiMcp'^en, n. -i, turnip-radish. SJctp, m. -ii, rice. Sfettig, m. -c3, -4, pt -e, radish. DtoggcR, m. -i, rye. ^ittc, /. -, pi. -tij (brassiea rapa); gclbf Stube, carrot, rot^e SRiibc, bee( ; weipe Sluie, turnip. ©dlSei,/. -, sage. ©ttu'etamt)fer, m. -i, sorrel. ©c^wamm, m. -ii, (See 9Jiti). ScU'erie, m. -i, celery. ©VHtrgcI, m. -S, asparagus. ©))tnat', m. -ii, -i, spinage. £^))'mtan, m. -i, thyme. Stiiffel, /. -, pi. -n, truffle. SBeijcn, m. -i, wheat. SSBurjel, /. -, pi. -n, root. Swtetel,/. -, pi. -It, onion. X. Fruits and Fruit-Trebs. D B ft u n S D B ft 6 ii u m e. 31'nana^,/. -, pi. -fe, pine-apple. 3lp'fell''"in'» in. apple-tree. SIpfclfi'ne,/. sweet-orange. Slprifo'l'E,/. -I, pi. — n, apricot SBirnl'dum, m. pear-tree. SSvom'litere,/. black-berry. Gitto'ne, /. -, pi. -n, lemon. 3)attcl, /. -, pi. -n, date. Svb'bcere,/. -, pi. -n, strawberry. ^a'fElnug, /. -, pi. -niiffe, hazelnut. |)ei'bcH)eere,/. -, pi. -en, bilberry. ^m'httn, f. -, pi. -It, raspberry. So^an'niaSeeie/ /. -, pi. -n, currant. ^a\to.'xAtt f. -, pi. -n, chesnut. SKanbet, /. -, pi. -n, almond. SKauI'beerc,/. -, pi. -n, mulberry. Stcto'ne,/. -, pi -R, melon. SDti^pel,/. -, pi. -n, medlar. 9)fir'|tcl)E, /. -, pi. -It, peach. 5)tlerling, m. -g, sparrow, ©totc^, m. -eg, -«, pl ©torc^e, stork. ©tmup, m. -eS, pl. -e, ostrich. 3;aube, /. -, pl -n, pigeon. Urut^a^n, m. -eg, turkey. Sut'teltaube,/. -, ti'jtle-dove. SBac^tel,/. -, pl. -n, quail. 3BaIb'f(^nepfe, /. -, wood-cock. SBalf er|u^n, n. moor-hen. S5Saifetf^ne)>fe, /. -, -, pl. -n, snipe. Sttun'fonig, -eg, -g, pl -e, wren. XIV. Quadrupeds. S5icrfu^ige2::^icrc. affe, m. -n, pl -n, ape. f&dxt m. -en, pl -en, bear. SBiter, m. ^-g, pl -, beaver. Sac^g, m. -eg, pl " '^ ' Sacpg, m. -eg, pl -e, badger. ©td/^orni^cn, n. -g, pl -, squirrel, gtett^en, n. -g, pl -, ferret guc^g, m. -eg, pl giii^fe, fox. giillen, b. -g, pl -, colt. Oeiftfe, /. -, pl -n, chamois. ^afe, m. -n, pl -n, hare., k>\xSki '"<■■ -«*i pi -«» deer. Sgel, m. -g, pl -, hedge-hog. flanin'c^en, n. -g, pl -, rabbit £amm, n. lamb. SiilDC, m. -n, pl -n, lion. SKarber, m.— g, pl -, pole-eat SDJaul'efet, m. -g, pl -, mule. SKautourf, m. -eg, pl -tuiirfe, mole. SRe^, n. -eg, -g, pl -e, roe. ©c^wetn, n. -eg, -g, pl -e, hog. Jtger, m. -g, pl -, tiger. aBoIf, m. -eg, -g, p(. saSoIfe, wol£ Siege,/. -,pl-n, goat XV. Fishes, etc. g i fd^ c , jc. Stat, m. -eg, -g, pl -e, eoL ?lu|lcr,/. -, pl -n, oyster. iBarfi^, m. -eg, pl. -e, perch. SSuifling, m. red-herring. gorel'Ie,/. -, pl -n, trout Oarne'lc, /. -, pl -n, shrimp. ^o\, m. -eg, -g, pl. -e, shark. Iidring, m. -eg, -g, pl -e, herring. i)e(^t, m. -eg, -g, pl -e, pike. Rummer, m. -g, pl -n, lobster, ffa'eeliau, m. -eg, pl -e, haddock. .Rarf fen, m. -i,pl. -, carp. .Rrebg, m. -eg, pl -e, craw-fish. Ca^g, m. -eg, p/. -e, salmon. sBfufii^el,/. -, pl -n, shell. ©aim, m. -eg, -g,p'.-e, (SeeSac^. ©^ellftfi^, m. -eg, pl -e, haddock, ©a)tlb'tr6te, / -, pl -n, turtle. ©c^Iei^e,/. -, pl. -n, tench. ©tor, m. -eg, -3, p/ -e, sturgeon. fflaDpfd^, OT. -eg -g pl -c, whal& READING LESSONS, The folloTring selections are from various Bouroes; all excellent, ho'wever, and embracing a great diversity of style and matter. The ■tndent, therefore, %vho has become familiar with the grammatical course laid down in the preceding part of this book, will enter upon those reading lessons with no little pleasure. With the aid of the vo- cabulary, which is sufficiently full, and the references to the grammar, which are quite numerous, he can, indeed, find no serious difficulty. Many more references might have been made ; but he who duly coa- Bults those already given, will not, it is believed, be in want of further guidance in the use of his grammar. I. g a l» S H W» 1. Set §trfi|. Der ?>irfi^ fa]^ ""P '" »"«!« H""" S"i^e fe*" Si'''- S!a:|tlic^, fagte «t, i(^ fiSertreffe aHe J^^icre an STnflani) unb ^vaijtl SBic ^etrli^ tagf ba«' ®ewet^ ennjcr! — Soc^ metnc Suge, tote magtr unb ^aglid)! ^aum '^attt et iai (L. 44. 1.) gcfagt", fo erMiifte er^ einert SiJtBen, ber' auf i^n logflinfl. tSlit griiptei-'' ©i^netfe tntgcn t^n fetne oeta^tettn Suge in ben na(||len SBalb ; atet |)lbjltc^ ^iclten bir®e|lrdu^e feine iretten hornet a«f, «nb et tonnte P^ ni({)t loawtnbeE ®ei ?«we ettet(^te unb tobtete t^n. einer gewjorben? ertoieberte bie Saube. Aeinelwegeg ! 3(b fi^eint imr fo ; icb roerbe aber nii^t fo bleiben! Unb fie blieb aucb nic^t ' fo. ©ie babete, fte reinigte [l^, unb loat loiebtt fo glttnjenb loeii, aU juDor ; aber bie Siti^t blieb, toie |te iDar, unb ttutbe^ ti ' au^ geblieben fein, »enn fie auib ein Sa^t lang gebabet unb gejiuy.t bdttc. ^altet bie |)crsen nur rein; gcgen bie SJerloiumbung toirb \^m SRatb, unb bie Unfi^utb gc^t am ®nbe bennor^b gerec^tfcrfigt unb geloutert ^erijor. Cij^r. » L, 28.5; » L. 42; • L. 59. 3; P L 48. 2; q L. 45. 15 ' L. 21. 8; • L. 29. 10; « L. 49. 4; ° L. 65. 3; ' L. 19; » L. 41. b; ' L. 28. 13-, » li 56. 1; • L. 28. 10. READING LESSONS. 45 S 7 S>et Einftebter unb be; SAt. Sin ©infttblet '^mtc ctnen jungen Sciren aufsejogm" unb butc^ 5?uitcr, Sd^Iage unb man*e sKii^e i^n fo ja^m wte Eitten |iunb geitwc^t. Dft 6raftt< min ber Sar'feinem Erjie^er ein anfe^nliiiieg ©tiitt SBilbpret'' '^eim, trug IijjIj unb SBalfer |et6et, Sewac^te feinc ^iitte, furj, er leiflcte ii)m llienftt nllcr attt. einfl lag an cinem ©ommertagc ' ber fitnfiebler tm ®rafe btt^im geflrecEt unb fc^Iief. 9?e6en i'^w faf fein SBcir unb » e |) r t e bte glicgcn « i, Mf f*aarcn»eift J ben ®vei« umfc^rocirmtcn. fflorjuglicl qucitte i^n eine; wt^t elnmal" ^atte ber Sot fie fortgejagt, unb tntmcr tant fie wit ber. Ser anbere SJogel ifi fe^r unSebeutenb. aBa|rf(5einIic& i|l er ber ©iener. 3)ian brangte fid) immer neugieriger um ben fc^on bcficbcrfen OSimpel ^cr, unb brangte bie SJa^tigaU fo aUntali^ in eine unbeo6a(|tete ScEe. Enblii^ erfuilten bie SSogel ben Oimpel, er moge bod) au^ einmal feint ©timme '^iiren laffen. ' X)enn man »ermut|ete, bag fein ®efang feinem ^leibe glcic^j fcmmen muffe. ®r Iieg>fi(^ bcrcben • unb fang. Stber bie Siiigcl, bie i^n sorbin tewunbert fatten, lai^tcn in«ge:^eim unb fagten fid)° ^albraut in'^ • D'^r! SBelil' elenbe ©timme ! SBenn er nur lieber gefd)Wiegcn ptte. Se^t er^oi bie JJa^tigall in i^rem seriorgenen SSBintel i:^rc ©timme. SSJaa if} baa ? riefen bie SJiJgel mit Sewunberung unb greube. SBJeli^ q ^ertliiler ®t' fang I SfBie ? ber «nf(|einbare grembling fingt fo fc^iin ? D, Sreunb, bu tiBertrtp alle ©anger an fiietlidjteit unb ©tarfe bea ©cfangea. Deine ©timme Iiefd)cimt bein Stuafe^cn. Urt:^eile nic^t nai$ bem Sfeufern. 3n cinem unfi^cinbaren ffileibe ifl oft ba* feltenfle 2a(ent »er6orgen. ®rimm. ■ L. 51. 3 ; '' li. 59. 3; • L. 24. 4 ; "i L. 52. 5 ; • § 60 ; ' L. 38 ; « L, 49; ''L.42./; ' L. 29. 5; JL.64.6; ' L. 49. 5 ; "L.49.6; ° L. 63 • L i'i. 6; ° L. 42 k; f L. 66. 7; 1 L. 13. 3. 160 REAuIKG LESSOSS. II. f^araf^lMo 1. S)etro|e®bEliletii <&M rojer (SbelRsin lag tm ©anbe swifc^ert »ielen attbeten gemcinen ©tetnttt Ein Snak fammellc Don biefen su feinem ©fid unb itaite pe nac| § L. 27. 2 ; « L. 43. i; ' T.. 28 S ■ • L. 24, 2, •■ L. 61. 8; ' L. 63. 3: j L. 33 ' RBACINQ LESSONS. 46] 4. Bie brei Slide. 8in frimnt.r SKann tturbe* dn|l gefragt, wo^er e« fontme, bag er, troj * (iDtr 3)rangra(i b;a ' Cekn^, bo^ fol^en ©IciiJjmut^ in ft^ ima.'S)xtn Knnc. S)tr ^ antwovtete: 1)ai fommt ba|er, bap ' id) meine Slugen »o^I in 9lc()t ntlme, benn aHeS ©ofe tommt burd) bit Sinne sum $erjcn, akr aucS) bai ®iite. — 2liif bie wcitere grage, wie er bui ma^t,' fagte et; 3cbcn 3)?orgett, t^e ic^ an bic Otfi^dfte unb untcr bie SKenWen gele, ri^te ii^ mtine Slugea bebadjtfam auf brei Singe; Srjleni? » 1)eU id) ftc gen $immel unb ertnnere mii^,* ap raein $aul)tgcfd)aft unb ba^ 3iel meinEi3 Ceben^ mib Strcl'ens butt oiii ,ei. 3tttitcng « fenf xSj fie jur ®rbe unb bcbenfe, wie wenig 9ia«m i^ if barf, urn ' einjt mein ©rob barinj ju ftnben. Sritteni5 cnblic^ fc^au tc^ urn mi^ unb tetradjte bie SKengc berev, '' benen ti nod) fd)ltmmer erge^t, ' aU mir. Sluf bicfe SBeife getr^i^e ii^ mi^ attea 8eibe« unb lebe mit ffielt unb 3)Jcnfi|ett iufrieben in ®ott. 3lu£r0ai|er. 5. ®ieSorna^rcn. (Sin Sanbmann gtng mit feinem fteinen ©o^ne auf" ben SlcEet |inau3, um JU fe^en, »b ba« florn iaib rciffei. ©ie^, fHattt, fagte bet unetfa^rene Snaie, trie aufrec^t einige $atme ben ^o))f* tragen! Sicfe muffen n)o|l rei^t uornc^m fein; bie anbetn, bie pd) sot i^nen fo tief bitden, finb gewig »iel fc^lc^tet. 3)et fflatcr ))pdte ein 9)aat Sle:^ten° ab unb ffro^: Sptiditea Sinb, ba fie^ tinmal ! ®iefe Sle^te ^ier, bie fl^ fo flols in bie §i)^e fited te, ifi ganj taub unb leet; biefe abet, bie fic^ fo bef^eiben neigte, i|i doUp bet fc^iinfien hornet, Ktoigtq cinet gat ju ^oc^ ben ^off, ©0 iji et too^I ein eitlet Stcijf, ©c^mib. 6. Set etfle ©abbat^. Set fec|ste S^ag bet ©d)oi)fung neigte fti% ju feinem £nbe. Die ©onne ^atte i^tc Sa^n solfenbet. S)a« ©unEel be« Slbenba begann fi^ ubet bie jugenbliii^e (Etbe JU ijetJteiten. !Det etflgebotene ©o^n bet ©c^ofifung jianb auf " einem |)uge[ Sben^i neben i^m Eloal^, fein ©^u^engel unb Segleitet. S« watb' immet bunflet unb buntlet ting? um ben ^iigel; bie iJcimmctung tsanbelte fic^ • in 9fac^t, unb ueipllete wie ein buftiget ©c^Ieiet bie ^lo^en unb a:plet. — S)ie Ctebci bet fflogel unb bit ftol^en Saute bet St|iete metpummten. ©clbjl* bie fpielenben Ciiftc^en" fc^icncn einjuf($Iummern. Wi\i ifl ba« ? fragte bet SBtenfi^ mit leifet ©timme feinen ^immlifi^en Se* glettet. SBitb bie junge ©c^Bbfung auf|6ten unb in i^t alteS Sfiiita »et* finfen ? Sloa^ Idc|elte unb fpta(^: L. 60; ' L. 42; ^ L. 44. 3; " L. 50. 6; ' L. 55. b; « § 51 ; ■ L. 29. 9; ' L. 49. 5; L. 28. 6; ' L. 41. 3; ' L. 47. 7; " § 11(5; » L. 26. 10; » L.59. 6; P L 61j q L. 53. 3. Obi.; ' L. 46. 3. 4; • L. ih -0 « 1. 29 5; • L.24. 462 BEADING LESSONS. 9Jun etPienen bie ^immlifdjcn i?id[itet: ber SJortb gtng auf mi bai §cf! bw Sterne trat |etvor in JeitErem ©lanjc. ®er Sfenfi^ faj auflDntto" gen 4>tmmet nttt fu§cm (Er|launcn; bcr gngtj iti ^txxn dtier MicEte mtt Sffiol^IgefuHen auf ben ewporfi^auenben rai| ber freunblii^e Sngel bea ©c^Iummera. 3'^n fa:^ ber XobeScngel mit iliHer SBc^mutJ an, unb eint S^roinc, ttie bie Un|lcr6tiii|en fie' tseinen, •52.6; '§116; 'L. 23. 5; ■> L. 33; ' L. 64; ' L. 24. 4- » L. 46.4; "'L.29. 9; 'L. 20. 3; J § 120; kL.24. 2; '1.53; » L. 65 2- Ii.39; •L.62.5; » L. 61 9; q 32. 5; 'L.3S. l.c; • L 41. 7 ' READING LESSOKS. 453 rittt in fein grogta, bunftca Stuge. „^S),« furac^ et, „bag 1$ nic|t, ttie bu, bc8 ftij^tii^en 2)anfe« mt(| freuen' taiw. 3)Hc^ nennt bie Srbe i^ren ijeinb unb greubenfliirer! — ■■ . „D, mctn Srubcr," eiwiebertE b«r Engel be3 ©(|lafe«, ..toirb ni(|t ouc^ ieim ©twacSen'' ber ®«te in btr feinen gtcunb uttb SBcptptec ' eitennen unb banttat bic^ fegncn? ©tnb wit ni(|t Stiiber, unb Sotcn ©inea* SJater« ? " ©0 ftjrad) er ; ba gloinste ba« Slugc bee Kobeaengcl*, unb jdrtltdjcr untpnjen B(^ bie briiberlic^cn ®enien. fitummac^et. III. §l0gld©J«ro» 1. i£iner tbet ber Slnbete. 3«r Beit ^einric^a rv., ^ijnig* son fjjantrei^, ritt einmol ein Sctuctlem son feinem S)orfc na^ ^irii. SBic^t mefr Wcit son ber ©tnbt tegcgnete er einem fiattlic^cn Sieiter.* ®a war ber flonig. ©ein ©efolge wax ' ab|ta)tti(§ in ciniger ffimfernung geilteben. »S!Bo^cr iti Se3«, mein greunb ? $abt 3^r ©efc^cifte 5U 9)ari« ? " »3a," antttortetc ber ©auer ; „auc^ miii^te ii) gem einmal unfem gutttt Sonig fe|en, ber fein SolE fo sfirtUi| Itett." ®er ifontg Idi^elte unb fagte: n'SDaiV. fann Euc| SRaf^ tterben." ,9tbcr wenn tc^ mtr witfte, welc^er ea i|l unter ben stelen liBfKngen, son benen er umgeben fein toirb." « „I)aa win i(| euc| fagen : 3^r bitrft nur Stii^tung geien, toiJi^er ben' $«t ttuf bem fio))fe Se'^altcn t»irb, toann alte ^Inbern jtc^ e^rerbietig werben cntblSgt ^aben." SItfo ritten fie mil einanber in S'ttria ^inetn, unb jwor ba« SttjierTjin anf ber rec&ten ©eite bea fliinigS i benn t»a« bie liebe Ginfalt, eS fei' mit Sbfic^t ober bur(!^ Sufatt, lIngefcI)itItcSJ t^n tann, ba3 t|«t fte. Ser Souer gab bem .Sonig auf itte feine Sragen gefprdc^ige Stnttoort. Er erjd^Ite i^m 3Kttnd^e8 uber ben Selbiau, mxi feiner |»au«5altung unb wie er juweilen beS ©onntagS auc^ fein ^u^nin bem lopfe ^ctbe, unb merfte lange nic^ta. Sta er 'abet foil, »ie otie genfier fic^ offneten unb atte ©trapen fti$ mit SKcnfc^en attfitfften, wie Sebermann ei^rerbietig '^ augmic^, ba ging t^m ein 2i(|t ouf. „5Wein ^err,"' fugte er ju feinem unbeknnfen Segleiter, ben er mit SfengPlic^feit unb SSertsutt' herung anfi^aute, „entn>eber feib 3^r ber Siinig ober ic^ bin'a ; benn wir Beibi ^cben ttllein noi| ben Iwt auf bem fio))fe." Da Id^elte ber Sijnig unb fagte ; »3(| bin'?,"* SCann 35r ®uer SRiiglein in ben ©taH gejieEt unb ®uer Oef^dft ieforgt ^nbt, fo tommt ju mir auf mein ©c^lof ; \attt auf, mcincm ^aufstt jSp ; an bie giittU^c Stiofung »on alien meinen ©finben, unb an ein ewig felige« Seben nac^ bem' Sobe." ,Saa glttubt i^t° wiitlicb?" fagte bet Sonig, »ba3 gtaubt et fo tec^t mU SoIetSueetjlc^t?" ,Stt, wa^rbaftig, S». Wlaitflat." Set flcnig fagte bemcgt ©c^mettau'a $anb, briidfte fief ijm' ftaif unj fagte; .St ifl ein gKdli^et 9JJenfd| ! " Sann ging et nact)bentcnb mciter, un6 nie, fcit jenet ©tunbe, but et ©^mettau'a tcligiofe 8tn|id)tcn uerfvottet. •L. 60; ■> 20.4; «L.53. 5; '• L.49. 5; • L. 29. 9; 'K 44.3; ' L. 27. 3. note; >■ L. 56. 6; ' L. 49; J L. 49. 4; ^ L. 42; ' L. 64; - L 27. 4; • L. 28. 6; • L. 27. 3. Obs.; P L. 28. 5; q L. 41. 4 6. ; ' § ]29i 3. BEADING LESSONS. 46{( iv a 1. £ie einjige te, feine* Srei^eit ju te^auDten, fccl^e^t barin, nie itwa« anberc* ju WoHen, aU man foBi bann barf man t^un, mai man win. 2, (£tn 8Utt« (SewiiTen ifl 6e|fer alS swei Seusen. ®a uerje^rt Scinen flummer, wie bit ©onne ba« fitg. S« t|} ein SBrunnen, wenn ®t(i ' biivjlet, Jin ©tab, wenn ®u rmfe|l, ein ©i^trm, wenn 2)i^ bit ©onne jiii^t, ein 0Ju^e' UlTrn im 3'obe. ^ijjjjel. S. J?Itinc greuben Men, wic $a«Sbrob, immer o^ne Stel; grope « wle Suiievbrob, jeitig mil ®fel. Stickler. 4. 2Dcr Xrieb be« ®e»i|Ten«, unb bie tnnerli($e ©^am^aftigfeit »or bem aSofen ftnb bie ©c^ujengel be« ®uten.* D^ne ©emut^ ijl ber 5Wenf(| eine ewige Siigc. (ScHert. 5. giiri^te bie Sinfamtcit nic^t. ©ie iji ^armloa ft)ie ber retne SKonbf^ein, befren« ©ilbcrflreifen im 9>altt|le bes (Sottlofen ^iitlirilje ©efrenlier, unb in ber 4iiitte be« gfrommen fpielenbe Sngel be8 |)immel« abbilben. SfBogner. 6. 92imm mtt e^rfur(|t bie Sibel in bie |)anb, benn fte ent^tt ®otte« SQort. 2Bip, bie ' teincn gii^rer fatten auf bem gefa^rsoKen SBege beS Cc Bens, bie fcinen Jrolt l^attert in Sitterer S^of^, unb feinen Seiftanb in i|rcr IeJ< ten ©tunbc, benen ' war bie Sibel Qit^rer, 3;ro|} unb Seijlanb. ©ic^e, bie Si6e[ if} eine SHutter, toeli^e aHe gtaubigen Sinber n&ljxtt unb fiiHet, iii fie errci^en b«S reifere « Sllter einer ^o^eren * SBelt. |>arm«. 7. xt Sim\t ifllang, baa Seben furj, iai Urt|eil fd()Wier{g, bie ©elcge* 6(il pt^tig. ®6l^i. 10. SJteleS ' wunff^t \ii) ber SWenfr^, unb bo^ bebarf er nur Wenig; 2)enn bie Slage jtnb furj, unb ief(i)rantt ber ©terbli(|en " ©diicEfal. ®6tfe. 11. EinS re(|t wiffcn unb au«iibcn gibt ^o^ere SSilbung al« |)alb^eit im fiunbertfdltigen. ®i)t^e. ■ L. 19. 2 "■ L. 57. 2; ' L. 10. 3; ^ L. 33; ■ L. 39. 3; ' L. 40. 6; « L, 82. 5; k L. 53 8; * L. 34. '; J § 116; ' L. 53 2; ' L. 65; » L. 61. 9- 466 READING LEabOiiB. 12. a3cr gurc^tfame erf^tedt »Dr bet ®tfa^r, bet Snge in t^r,* bet 3R«» t:^igc nac^ iji. SRic^tet. 13. SBit Ijciiu Sine fc&o« gewetnt! jebcr ®tuSIti§e eiitmal »rt SBc^, iebet UBaliifflt^e einmal »or £u|i. Slic^ter. 14. e^tfurc^t teftep bte Sugenb au^ •" im Settlettleib. ©critter. 15. SS5ei« auf bet Etbe o^nc Se(itmmung Uit, glei^t cinem ©(i&ifFe,'' auf tfm ttodnen Sanbe; unb toet nic^t in baa giogc SRab bet 3Renf(%5eit eingtelfl, bet' iUiiSjt ben jinnernen 3;af(^enu^ten bet flinbei, bie wo^Igeiget unb Siffet* ilaittx, a6et teine mec^anifi^en Eingeweibe ^aten. Sepng. 16. Bhi StweiSung einea ®luSe3 gc^oit gteiB unb ®eBuIb, unb jut Sf l^altung belfeltien" ge^ott SKaftgung unb SSox^^t. Sangfant unb ©c^ritt fiit ©dlritt fieigt man eine Eteppe ^inauf ; abet in einem Sfugenblide fdUt man ^inab unb btingt SBunben unb ©(^metj geaug mil auf ble £ibe. |»elitl. 17. ©0' gcwip bet ©c^atten bent £ic|te folgt," f» gewig folgt bie S^at bem SSillcn, wenn ei ■> nut tein iji. Siitne. 18. SBenn Du wit Seinen ®efairigfeiten luaitefl, Ui Tiii) bet gteunb an* fpiti^t: fo einiebtigjl S)u bte ®efdlligtelt sum Stlmofen nnb betnen gieunb jumt Settlet. ftleijl. 19. 3m Ungltitfe etf^etnt bie Sugenb in intern ^ellficn ®Ianje. Wlor alien ©tttgett WaS)e Hitx S)tc|, bag X)u ttit bit inttcre 3u»erfJc^t jH S)tT fetter, * twS SJertrauenauf Oottunb guteSJJenfilen serltcrfl! ©oialb'' S)?in (Sefd^rte obet ®eptfe auf ©etner ©tirn aUigmut^ unb Setjwciflung Uefl — fo ill %Uii wi. ©e^r oft atev t|l man im UngliicE ungetcc^t scg.n bie 3)Jen- fc^en. Sebf ^ctne Siife Caune, jebe Heine SRiene »on ffatte beutet man auf jlc^; man meint jcbtt fe^e° e« un«i an, bag n>i« leiben, unb mii)t'' son bev SBitte wiW *t» t»ir i^m t^un Bnnten. 1. 9»atlieb. Sie ^etrlii!^ leuil)tet ttnb taufenb ©ttmmen mx bie Slatur 1 3tm3 bem ®e|lrau4 SBie glanjt bie ©onne ! SBic Itt(i^t bie Slur ! Unb greub' unb SBonne 9tua jebet Srufl. 6« bvingcn bie SSliit^en D ®rb' unb ©onne, SIu« iebent 3»elg, D ©tiid unb Su|l. 2. Sie a;^eituns bet (Srbe. Ke^mt ^in bie Sell! rief Seu8 Don feinen l>6^en Sen SKenfi^en ju, ne|mt, fte ^ foil euet fein. (Euc()-fc|en!' ii^ fie sum* Ert' unb ett'gcn Ce^en; ©o^ t^eilt euc^ iritbctlic^ bartin. ' Va cilt, teas ^anbe ^at, fi^ etnjurt(^ten, (Sa » regie ftc^ gefi^aftig Sung unb Sttt. 25er 3tcfer«:nann grijf nai| be9 gelbe3 griii^^ten Ser Sitnter iix\isit burc^ ben Salb. 2)er Saufmann nimmt xaai feine ©pei($cr faffen, ' Set 9lbt ttci^It fic^ ben ebcin girncwein. ®er fiiinig ftierrt bie Sriiffen unb bie ©tragen, Unb ffiricit ; ber Se^ente ' i|l ntein. ®an8 fpft, nac^bem bie S^eilung langll 8efd|e:^cn,j SRa^t ber 3)oet, er tarn au8 weitev gem'. ^i)'. ba war ttSctall mijti nie^r ju fel&en, '' Unb aKeS |atte feinen $errn 1 • L. as. 3; i" L. 69. S.noif; ' L. 55. 6.j '' L. 28.5; • 42.;.; ' LSd 6; «L28. 9; i-L. 38. c- '§45.2; 1L. 40. 8- ► L. 49. 6, 468 READING LESSOKS. SBSeS' mit ! fo foil benn i^ nllcin son Slllen SJergejfen fcin, ic^ idti getreu'fler ©I'^n? ©» lieg er laut ber iflttgc 9tuf • crfc^aHeni Unb warf jt^ ^(in »or Sosia 2;^ion. SBenn bu im Sanb ber Irciitmc bic^ sertteileti ' SJeifcfet btr ®ott, fo ^ab''re nic^t mit mit. SBo ttttril bu benn, ala man bie SEBelt flet^eilet? • 3^ »*r, fpra^ bet 3)oet 6ei bit. !Plein 9t«se ^ing an beinem Sln3eft($te, Sin beinc* ^immel^ #atmonie mcin DBr; SSetjei^' bem ®etj}e,' bet oon beinem Cic^te SSetaufi^t, ba8 Stbifc^e'' setlor!" ffiaa t^un?' fpric^t 3eu8 — bie SBcIt i|i tteggcseJeitr Set ^etifl, bie Sogb, bet SKarft ip niii^t me^t' mein. SiSiKIl bu in meinem ^immet mit mit Icien, ©0 oft* bu lommfJ, et "■ foU bit offen fein. ®($ilrr 3. Iicifnung. £8' teben unb ttaumen bie J SKenfc^en »iel Son ieffetn funftijen S^agen; 3tai Stmen ber a riefen rings im Sl^al »tel tanfenb ©timmen ; Stmcn, e^rwitrbiger SSater, SImen, 9lmen ! 33er SmV erfc^rat ; reumut^ig tniet er niebci Unb ici(|tete bent lieingen bie ©iinbe. .©o^n," fprac^ ber ®reia, »^a|l Su bennnic^t gelejen* SBenn 3Renfc^en fi^weigen, luerben ©teine fc^rei'n? — 9^ic|t frotte fiinftig, ©o;^n, mit ®ottea SBort ! Seienbig ijl eg, traftig, fc^neibet ffiarf, SSSie ein jweifc^neibig ©c^mert. Unb fottte gleic^ a3a« SJfenfc^en^ers ff^ i^m jum 3;ro5 serfleinern, ©0 Witb im ©tein ein 3)lenf(|cnl|erij fi^ regen." JCofegarttt 6. 'Die SBotte be« ®lau6cna. iDtei SBorte nenn'' ic^ eu($, in|attf(|»er, ' ©ie ge^en son SBlunbe ju 3JJunbe, Iioc^ flammen fte ni(|t son aupen ^cr ; Sa3 $ers nur gteSt bason ^unbe. ©em SKenfiien i|i alter SSBerf^ gerautt, ^ SBcnn er ni(|t me^r' an bie brei SSSorte glauit. - L. 24. 4 ; ' L. 20. 3 ; • L. 29. 9; ■" § 129 ; • L. 57. 6: ' L. 40 8; » L. 24. 7; >■ L. 64. 1; ' L. 34. 10. IT) READING LESSONS, X)er SHenfd^ ifi fret gefc^aifeii, ifl frei, Uni iriivb' • er in Xtttm geBsren. Sttpt euc^ ni^t trren iei ^oitli GSefi^tei, Mic^t ben SJfipbraui^ rafenbei'' 2;^orent SSor beat ©clasen, wenn er bie flette iric^tt ffisi bem freien SDJenfc^ett erjittcrt ni(i^t ! Unb bie Sugenb, jte ' i|i tein leerer S^aU, 2)er aSenfi^ lann jtc^ ufcen im Seben ; Unb follt et au^ ' lirauc^eln uieraH, Er fann na^ ber gottlii^en |lrel>en, Unb Kai tein®er(lanb ber ajerflanbigen' fielt, S)a8 it6et» in Sinfalt ein finblic^ ®emiitj.» Unb ein ®ott i% ein ^etliger SBillc Uit, SBie ttuc^ ber menfi^Iii^e wonfe ; "• 4io(^ iikr ber 3eit unb bem SRaumc ttett . Setenbig ber ^o(^|le Oebante, Unb 06 Sltteg in ewigem aBe(^fel treiPtf e« ' Be^ftrrct im SSJei^fel ein ru^tger ®eij}. Die brei SfBorte Bewol^retj euc^, in^altfc^wer, ©ie ))flan5cti son SBJuube ju SKunbe, Unb ftammcn fte gleic^ nic^t son augen iper, (Euer Snn'reS giefct batjon Sunbe. ®em SRenfii^ett ifi nimmer fein Sert^ gcranBt, ©0 ' lang er nsi^ on bie brei SBorte glauSt. S^iDo. 7. ®efunben. SiSj gins iw SBatbe ©oil i^ jum SSSellen ©0 fitr mii^ :^in, ®e6ro($en fein ? Unb nic^ta JU fuc^en, Soa War mtitt ©inn. 3i^ grub's mit alien Sen SBiirjIein mi, 3m ©(fatten ^af ic^ Sum ®arten trug ii^'a Ein Sliimc^en |le^n, 9lm pBf^en 4)au«. SBie ©teme ieu^tenb, ©ie Sleuglein f(^5n, Unb (jflnnst e« loiebei am fliUen SDn ; 34 WoHt' ti ixeijtn, Vlrni jtteigt ti immer Da fttgt e« fein 5 Unb Bliijt fo fort. ■ x56. 2; ''L.32 9; -L.28. 12; *L.28. 5; ' L. 69. 5; ' L, 3.!. » L. 63. 5; >■ L. 55. a. ; ' L. 28. 9; J L. 50. 5 ; ' L. 69. 3. note. VOCABULARY •fOR THE EXERCISES Ai\D READING LESSONS. ABBREVIATIONS. adj adjeotiTe. pi. pluraL adv. adverb. prep. propositi an. art. article. prn. pronoun. c. or conj '. conjunction. V. c*. active verb. eormp. comparative. V. a. & n. active and neuter verb /■ feminine gender. V. aux. auxiliary verb. imp. imperfect tense. V. imp. impersonal verb. int. interjection. v. ir. irregular verb. m. maaouline gender. 1). n. neuter verb. n. neuter gender. V. r. reflexive verb. P- participle. Stal, m. -ti, pi. -e, eel. SlliMlben, v. a. to portray, represent. fflbent)/ m. -i, pi. -t, evening, eve, west ; -jtijcf^cn , n. -«, pi. -, vesper-bell, evening-bell; -rot^, n., -xii^t, f. evening-red, even- ing-sky; -tBuib, m. -ii, -i, pi. -tt evening-wind, zephyr. St6er, eonj. but, however. jlfiermal or oAtxmM, adv. again, once more, anew. 3t6fa|r£n, see faljren, p. 348, v n. ir. to set off, set out, depart. ^[fcgtroimien, v. a. ir., to win from, gain SlbfommtTi; i;. n. Ir., to eome oflF, de- viate, lose. Slbmatten, v. a. to harass, weary. Sr6()flii(ten, v. a. to pluck off, gather. StJitetfen, to depart, set out. Sltifagcit, to countermand, refuse, decline, renounce. S6f%ei'6en, see fc^reibcn, p. 354; v. a. ir., to ccpy, transcribe 5Cf>itc6t, /. -I pV -txii view, inten- tion. ?lbft^tU^, adj. designed, purposely (see L. 34. 1). SIblieigcn, see fictgen, p. 356; v. ir. n., to descend, dismount, put up. 3l6t, m. -tiipl. 9febte, abbot. Stbwe^rcn, v. a. to keep off, ward off. ?[c^! int. ahl 01 ohi alasl Sl^fc, /. -, pi. -n, axle, axis. Stdlt, eight. %iit,f. -, care, attention, outlawry; in 3J(|t nc^men, to take care. SliJjtet, n. -i, pi. -, eighth. Stc^ten, V. a. to regard, attend to, value, deem, esteem, take for. Slc^tung, /. -, esteem, respect, esti- mation, regard, attention. STdltjetin, eighteen. %i(\, m. -i, pi. Steder, field, acre. 3liieri3mann, m. -c8, pi. -teute, hii» bandman, tiller. SIbler, m. -i, pi. -, eagle. Stbolrt, m. Adolphus. adj. genuine, authentio. ' \ adj. like, similar. 412 3tc^— 2InI Slnl— 5lrm Ste^re, f -, p ■ -«» ear (of grain). Stengfili^feit, /. -, anxiety, unear sinees. Stlbern, adj. silly, foolish. Sribrccjt, m. Albert. Sniein, adv. alone, only; c. but. Sitter, all (L. 65. 11), every. StIIcrtefl, best of all, very beat. Sltterlet, adj. various, of all sorts. SMma^ltg, by degrees, gradually. Stttju, adm. too, too much, over, SJtaofen, n. -i, pi.-, alms charity. Sfl^, conj. than, but, when, as, like, except, besides, namely, otS e6en, just as. Sltfo, adv. thus, so; c. therefore. SJtfbSttlb, immediately, directly. 9ltt, adj. old, ancient, aged. Slltct, ft. -i, pi.-, age, old age. Stnibop, m. -ii, pi. ~-t, anvil. Stmen, int. amen. 3tme'rifa, -6, America. Stmerifa'net, m. -8, pi. -, American. Stmt, n. -t^, pi. Slemter, charge, of- fice, employment, business. Sin, prep, in, at, on, by, to, unto, with, up, about, against. Slnbcr (bev, bie, ba^ Stnbere), adj. sec- ond, other. (L. 65.) SInbetiJi adv. otherwise, differently. Slnbert^alb, ac^. one and a half. Slnetbo'te, /. -, pi. -n, anecdote. Stnfangcn, see fangen, p. 348 ; v. ir. a. & «,, to begin, act, open, do. (L. 61. 4.) 9lnflet;en, v. a. to implore, entreat. StnfuIIen, v. a. to fill up. Slngeloren, v. •«. to belong. Slngel, /. -, pi. -n, fishing-hook, angle. Slngene^m, a^. agreeable, pleasant. 3lnge(t(^t, n. -ei, -i, pi. -cr, face, countenance. 9(ii|altenb, adj. constant. Sln^angen, see fangen, p. 360 ; v. ir. m., to be attached to. adhere to. Sinter, m. -i, pi. -, anchor. Stntlageit, v. a. to accuse. Stntommen, see fommen, p. 350; v. ir. «,, to arrive; - duf, to depend upon. Slnfiinben, antiinbigcn, v. a. to pro- claim, announce, declare, publish. Slnhtnft,/. -, arrival. S[nl.ingen, ti. n. to arrive, como £■» S(nfc()auen, v. a. to look at, regard. SInWuIbigen, ». ». to charge with, accuse of Stnfc^en, see fe^en, p. 354; a. ir. a, to look at, behold, view. Stnfe^nlid), adj. considerable, import- ant, of consequence. (L. 34. 7.) 3tnrt(I)t, /. -, pi. -en, sight, view, opinion, prospect. Sfnfptc^en, v. a. ir., to accost^ ad dress, speak to, beg, ask. Slnfijrud), m. ~ti, pi -fpruc^e, claim, demand; in -ne^men, to call for, claim, request. Slnllalt, /. -, pi. -en, preparation, institution; Slnflalten or Stnfittt) nitti^en, to make preparations, prepare. Stnjlttnb, rn. -c3, gracefulness, sta- tion, stand, behavior. Slnflatt, prep, instead of, in lieu. Stnjlrengenb, adj. toilsome. Sltitwort, /. -, pi. - en, answer. StntWcrten, v. a. to answer. Slnsieitrauen, a. a. to intrust to, confide to. Slnwanbeln, v. n, to come upon. £3 njanbette i;^n bie Cuft an, the desire came upon him ("he took a fan- ay," "he took it into his head.") SliitBcnben , v. a. to apply, employ, make use of, apply to. Slnwefenb, adj. & p. present, those present. Stnjic^en, see jie^ett , p. 358 ; v. ir. a. to draw, put on, attract, interest. Kpfel, m. -i, pi. Slepfcl, apple. Stfifelbttum, m. -zi , -i, pi. -Mnmt, apple-tree. Slprifo'fe, /. -, pi. -tt apricot. Slprifofenbaum, m. -ti, -i, pi. -btrf' me, apricot-tree. Sfpril', 1IU -i, April. Sirbeit, /. -, pi. -en, work, labor. Sfrbeiten , v. n., to work, labor. Slrbeitcr, m. -i, 2>l. -, woikman, ok borer. Strg, adj. bad, wicked. Sfrm, adj. poor, indigent Slr.n, rn. -ca, pi. -e, arm. SIrmee',/ -, pi. -n, army. 9f ermel , m. -i, pi. -, sleeva STrmuf^, /. -, poverty. Strt— 3lua gius— Sau 113 Slttf / ■ t pi. -tVt species, kind, na- ture, quality, propriety, way. Strtig . adj. polite agreeable. Strst, ».i. -ti , pi. 5levjte , physician, doctor. W^i,f. ashes. atlag, m. -ffeg, pi. ITe, satin. SttBioflJp're,/. -, atmosphere. SIu^i conj. also, too, even. Shifj prep, on, upon, in, at, to up ; -einmal, at once, all at once; -bai, in order that. Slufenrtalt, m. -ti, stay, sojourn, dnlay. SlufforSein, v. a. to summon, chal- lenge, ask, invite. Slufgalie , /. -, pi. -n, exercise. Slufge^cn, see gc'^en, p. 348. «. ir. n. to rise, open, see Sic^t. Stuf^attctlj V. a. ir. to stop, hinder, detain. 9tuf^bren, v. n. to cease, end. SlufitiEttfam, adj. attentive. Slufmetffatntett , /. -, pi. -en , atten- tion. STufpflansen, v. a. to plant, mount, set up. Stufrec^t, ado. upright, erect. auffi^neiben, see fc^neiben, p. 354; v. ir. a. to cut up, cut open. Stnffljei^etn, -a. a. to store up. Stuffie^en, see jle^en, p. 356; v. ir. n. to arise, get up, stand open. Stufjleigen; see flelgcrt, p. 356; v. ir. n. to mount, ascend, rise. StitfwattS, adv. upward, upwards. Slufwarteni v. n. to wait on, attend, serve. Stufjte^en, v. a. ir. to bring up, ed- ucate draw up. 3(uge, n -i, pi. -n, eye, bud; -n* 6lti> m. twinkling, moment; -n ilicEIiii^i instaneous, instantly. Keuglein, n. -g, pi. -, eye (L.24. 2). i&ai I prep, out, out o^ from, o^ bv, on, upon, in ; adv. over, out, at an en4 finished. tHuii/ttjnm, v. a. d: r. to stretch, ex- tend, expand. Stuatirtf(|cn, see brefc^ett, p. 346 ; v. to thrash out. SluSpnbeit, see pnben, p. 248; v. ir. a. to find out. $(u^fU$ren> v. a. to accomplish. see gcien, p. 348 v. > a., to give out, spend. e^cn, see gc^en, p. 348; v. ti n., to go out, go abroad, proceed. SluSgrttlicn, ». a. ir., to dig out, ex cavate. SluS^oUett, «. ir. »., to hold out, sus tain. Sluaruftn, «J. n. jr., to call out, cry out, exclaim. 5(u^fe|en, m. -g, face, appeaiance, Slujseil, adv. out, on the outsid^ without, abroad. S(e«5ere (btr, bie, bag), arf/. outward, exterior, outside. Sluper'^all), prep. & adv. abroad, without, out of, outside, beyond. 3(ui«ft)vec&tu, see ftref^en, ^. 356; v. a. & n. ir., to pronounce, utter, ex- press. Stuilra'Uen, n. -i, Australia. Stu^utcn, v. a. to exercise, practice, execute, perpetrate. SluSWanbcvn, v. n. to emigrate. 8lu^»etd)en, v. a. ir., to give way, turn aside, evade, avoid. Sljt, /. -, pi. Sterte, ax, hatchet. s SBac|, m. -tir pi. Sa^e, brook. S«den, V. ir. v., to bake, dry, p. 346> Sader, m. -g, ^Z. -, baker. Sobett; V. a. to bathe. Sa^n, /. -, 7)2. -en, way, road, ca reer, course, SJaicr, m. -n, pi. -n, Bavarian fflttiern, n. -a, Bavaria. Sfllb, adv. soon, early, nearly. Sail, m. -e«, pZ. mat, ball. SBalfam, m. -^, pi. -e, balm, balsam Sanb, n. -ei3, jdZ. Sanbct, ribbon string; m. pi. Scinbe, volume. S3anbigen, v. a. to tame, break. Sunt,/, -rpl. SBcinfe, bench, seat. SBonner, m. -it pi. -, banner. Siir, m. -en, »C-en, bear. Savte, /. -, ^7. -n, bark, barge. Sart, »». -ei3, -i, pi. Scirte, beard. Sciuen, V. a. to build, raise ; Jig. au| einen -, to rely upon one. Sauer, m.-i, pi. -n, peasant. Soiueriein, n. -i, pi. -, peasant \a 24. 1. aSauWv »i- -e*/ pi- S«ume, tree. 474 Smt— Sel Set— Scf SaitmeiPcr, m -4, pi -, architect. ©aumwottf, /. -, cottoQ. ©edcn, n. -I, pi. -, baain. Sebti(^t'r«m» oij- considerate. Sebai^t'jamfett. /. -, circumspection, caution, prudence. SBcbau'ern, v. a. to pity. SBebecf en, v n. to cover, shelter. SBebetiFen, «. a. ir., to consider, re- flect upon, mind. Sebicn'te, m. -n, pi. -n, seryant. Ctbitt'fen, see biirfcit, ;». 346; v. ir. n. ti need, want. Sscbiirf tig, ac^. wanting, in want o£ SBcfe|l'. m. -ti, pi. -t, command. SBcfe^'litt, V. ir. a., to command, or- der, charge, desire, p. 346. Seftc'bert, plumaged. SBcfin'ben, see ftnbEn, p. 346 ; v. ir. a. to find, think; v. ir.r., to be; tuie - jic |i^, how do you do ? Seflei'een, v. ir. r. to be studious of. ©efrei'en, v. u. to free, deliver. ©ege'lien, see geben, p. 348; v. ir. r., to betake. SBcgeg'nen, ». n. to meet. SBegc^'cn, see gefeii, ^. 348; «. a. ir., to commit. ^'ven, s). a. to desire, demand. Iter'be, /. -, pl.-n, desire, lust. itiegin'ncn, ». a. & n. ir., to begin, do, undertake. SBeglci'ten, v. a. to accompany. SBcglci'ter, m. -i, pi. -, companion, attendant, follower, guide. SBegra'l'en, see grabcn, p. 850; v. ir. o., to bury. Segrei'fen, see grcifen, p. 350; v. ir. a.,- to feel, comprehend, under- stand. Se^at'ten, see |atteu, p. 350 ;w. ir. a to keep, retain. Se^an'bclri, v. a. to treat, manage. fdiifit'nn, V. n. to continue, persist, insist, persevere. SSc^nuv'tcn, v. a. to affirm, maintain, pretend. Sti, prep, at, near, beside, by, on, with, to, in, in the presence of. SSei(f|ten, v. a. & n. to confess. SBeicitsater, m. -i, pi. -sdter, con- fessor. Seibe, t<^". botb tw« ; tfinet son -, neither of W 'WO SEtfommen, see fommcn, />. 350; » ir. »., to get at. Sein, n. -t§, pi. -e, leg, bone. SBciftjiet, n. -t&, pi. -e, example, in- stance, pattern ; jum -, for exam- ple, for instance. Scipen, p. 34C ; v. a. to bite, SBeifianb, m. -eS, -i5, assistance. Seifte'^en, v. n ir., to assist. Seil^immcn, v. n. to agree with, as- sent to. Seiwo^iitEn, v. n. to bo present at, assist. Sefann'te m. 9' /• -i pl- -« «» view, con- sideration. ©etia'gen , see trngen , p. 356 ; v. ir. a. to amount to ; v, ir. r. to be- have one's self. Setra'gen, n. -8, conduct, behavior. Setrii'bt, adj. afflicted, sad. Setrit'gen, p. 346; to cheat, deceive. Sett, n. -ti, pi. -en, bed. SBetteIn, v. n. to beg. SBettlet m. -i, pi. -, beggar. SBcttlerfleib , n. -ti, -i, pi. -er, beg- gar's dress. Sewa^'en, v. a. to watch, guard. SBewaff'nen, v. a. to arm. Setta^'rcn , v. a. to keep, take care of, preserve, guard. Sewe'gen, v. a. to move, excite. SBewcgt, adj. moved, touched. Sewol'ner, m. -i, pi. -, inhabitant. SBewun'bern, v. a. to admire, wonder. SBetBun'berung,/. -, admiration. SetDUpt , adj. known, conscious o^ -fein, n. consciousness. Sejicb'tigen, ■«. a. to oliarge, accuse. Seju^'tigen, see bejic^ttgeiu ©ibel, / -, pi. -n, Bible. ©iene, / pi. -n, bee. 9Sier. n -ii, -it pi- -e, beer. SBUb , n -ii , pi. -er, image, idea, repi-e-ientation, portrait, picture. Silben, I/, a. to form, oulti»ate, oi'?> ilize, improve. Silbung,/. -, pl.-tti, culture, Uarn- ing, accomplishment. Stnbe, /. pi -n, band; -mtl, n. conjunction. Stnben, p. 348 ; v. ir. a. to bind, tie. Sirne, /. -, pi. -n, pear. SBirf(^cn , v. a. to shoot, go a shootv ing, shoot with a rifle. Sis, adv. & conj. till, until; i\i an -auf, -JW, up, to, as far as SBitte,/. pi. -n, request, entreaty petition, suit, fflitten, jD. 346 ; v. ir. a. to beg, pray, request, entreat, invite. Sitter, adj. bitter, sharp. SBlaftn, p. 346 to blow. ©Idtt, n. -ti, pi. Slatter, leat Slattcr, /. -, pi. -n blister ; bie -n, pi. the small-pox. Slau, adj. blue. Ski, n. -ii, -i, lead. Sleiben, p. 346; v. ir. n. to remain, continue, perish. Stetcb, apj. pale, faded. SBIeil^ift, m. -ii, pi. -t, pencil. SlicE, m. -eS, pi. -e, look, glance. SBlicEen, v. n. to glance, look, ©linb, adj. blind Sli^en, V. n. to lighten, flash, gleam. SBlume, /.-, pi. -n, flower; -ngartett, m. flower-garden. Stitmd)eu, n. -S, pi. -, floweret. Sliit|e, /. -, pi. -n, bloom, flower. Stutig, adj. bloody. Sobcn, m. -i, pi. Siiben, ground, soU, bottom, loft, garret. SBogcn, m. -i, pi. -, bow. S5ol)ne, /. -, pi. -n, bean. SBo^rer, m. -i, pi. -, auger. Siife, adj. & adv. bad, ill, wicked, hurtful, angry, sore. SBoa^flft, adj. malicious, wicked. SSotc, m. -n, pi. -n, messenger. SBotfd^ttft, /. -,pl. -en, message. SBottciet, m. -«, pi. -, cooper. ©rau^en, v. a. to want, need, use. Srauer, m. -^ pi. -, brewer. SBtflUn, adj. brown, ffiraufcn, v. n. to rush, roar, buzt ©rec^en, p. 346 v. ir. a. d; n. ta break. Stcit, adj. broao, large, wide. 416 Srem— Da'^ Da'l— Dcm SBiemen, n. ~i, Bremen. Stcnnen, p. 346 ; i . ir. a. & n. U burn, scorch, parch, distil, cau- terize, brand. SDrett, n -e8, pi. -er, board. ' aSrief, »;. -e3, pi. -e, letter; -paptci, letJer-paper. Srtngen , 7). 346. w. ir. a. to bring carry, convey, bear; an ftc^ -; ts acquire, get possession. Srob, n. -eg, pi. -t, bread, loaf. SBriitfe, /. -, pi. -n, bridge. ©ruber, m. -« , pi. Sriiber, brother SSriiberlid^, adj. brotherly, frater iial ; -urafc^Iimgert, in fraternal em brace. ©riillcn, v. •«. to roar, low. Srunnen, m. -i, pi. -, -well, spring fountain. Srufi,/. -, pi. Sruflc, breast. Stu|incibel, /. -ipl- -Hi breast-pin. I8u^, n. -e«, pi. Siid)er. book , quire- -fiinber, m. bookbinder; -^atiiler, m. bookseller, stationer. SPuc^e,/. -, pi. -, pi. -, servant- girl. DtcSfett^, adv. on this side. Diefer, 3)tefe, ®iefeg , prTi. demons. this (L. 10). Ding, n.-ti,-i,pl.-<:, thing, aflfair, matter. Do^, conj. yet, however, never- theless but. (L. 69. H). !Dol(^, m. -t8, pZ. -t, dagger, ©om, m.-eS,p?.-s, cathedval, dome. Bonnertt, v. n. to thunder. EotJpEtt, adj. double, twofold; adv. doubly, twice. SJorf, n. -tS, jt)?. EBrfcr, village. Born m. -eg, pi. -en, odj able, apt, fit, capable. ga|rtn, p. 348 ; v. it. a. to drive, carry, convey ; v. ir. n. to move quickly, run, starts rush, to go in a carriage, to sail, navigate. Sttttcn, p. 348; v. ir. n. to fall, de- cline, fail. gaird)[)cit, /. - pi. -en, falsehood. J?ttmi'Ue, /. -, pL -n, family. gangen, p. 348 ; v. ir. a. to catch, take, seize. gatlie,/. -, pi. -n, color. fViirl>En, V. a. to color, dye. gdvbev, m. -i, pi. -, dyer. gap, «. -Ifeg, pi Sttjfer, cask, barrel. ga(l, adi;. almost. gaffen, v. a. to seize, contain ; v. r. fast to collect ones sel^ recover. gaut, adj. putrid, lazy, idle. gaul^cit, /. -, laziness, idleness. gctruft V, m. -i, pi. -c, February. gc(i)ten, p. 348 ; v. ir. n. to fight, fence. gebcr,/ -, pi. -v., feather, pen. gcgcn, V. a. to sweep, cleanse. ficilcn, V. n. to fail, miss, err, mis- take, to be wanting, want, to be deficient ; «3a3 fe^It S^ncn ? -whal; ails you ! gel)ler, m. -i pi. -, fault, error. §etg , adj. coward, faint-hearted. gein, adj. fine, delicate, pretty. geinb, adj. hostile, inimical. getnb, m. -f^, pi. t, enemy. 6'cint)Iii6, adj. hostile, inimicaL geinbfettgleit,/. -i pi. -en, hostility. gelb, «. -c8, pi. -tt, field, plain; -Slume,/. wild-flower ; -fru^t, pro- duce of the fields ; -^etr, m. com manderin-cMef; -ttetfl, m. ser- geant. • gtlbiau, m. -e«, -8, agriculture. gel«, m. -fena, pi. -fen, gelfen, m. —i, pi. —, rocl^ e\\S. genjier, n. -i, pi. -, window. gem, adj. far, remote, distant. gerne, /. -, pi. -n, farness, distance gertig adj. ready, prepared, done. ge(fel, /. -, pi. -n, fetter, chain. geffeln, v. a. to fetter, shackle, chain, captivate. gcjl, a<^'..fast, fixed, steadfast. gctt, adj. fat, greasy. geuer, «. -4, pi. -, fire. gtnbett, p. 348; v. ir. a. to find, think ; ©ttttt -, to take place ; «. r. ir. to be found, offer, com- prehend. ginger, m. -«, pi. -, finger; -^ut, m. thimble. gitnemem , m. -ti, pi. -c, wine oi the last year, old wine, ptn, ff om the root of »orn, fern. gifc|, m. -ti, pi. -t, fish. gtii^en, V. u. to fish. gifdier, m. -ii pi. -, fisherman. glac^, adj. flat, plain, level. gldc|e, /. -, pi. -n, plain, flatness^ tract, surface. glai^a, m. -fcS, flax gtafdje, /. -, pi. -n, flask, bottle. glei|ten, p. 348 ; d. ir. a. to braid. glcifc^, n. -eS, flesh, meat. gtetfc^Er, m. -i.pl. -, butcher gleip, m. -ti, diligence, industry. gleipig, adj. diligent, industrious. gliegcV. -, pi. -n, fly. gtiegett, p. 348 ; v. ir. m. to fly ; ^oit -, to soar. glie^en, p. ZiS ; v. ir.n. to flee, shun. . glitijcn,^. 348; «. ir. n. to flow, run. %mt, f. -, pi. -«, flute. glU(|cn, to curse, imprecate. glu4tig» adj. flying, transient. glug, m. -c«, -i, pi. gliige, flight. glugel, m. —i, pi. -, wing. gluv, /. -, pi. -;i\, field, plain, florr glMg f m. -|Je8 , pi glttlTe , rivet stream ; -^ferb, hippopotamug. Stu— Srctt grctt — ®« 481 glut^, /. -, pi -etlr flood, deluge, inundation, tide. golge, /. -t pi. -n, sequel, oonse- quenee. Bolgen, v. n. to follow, succeed, obey. golglt^i <""*/ consequently. goteHe,/. -tpl. -n, trout. gori,- am), forth, gone off, away. gortilit^eni v. «. to continue oloa- soming. Sortfa^ien, to continue, go on -witli, drive off, depart. Sfortfltegen, v. n. ir. to fly away. Scrtjagen, v. «. ctly, just, a aotly. ©etber, m. -g, pL -, tanner. ©EtE^t, od;'. just, righteous. ©erEi'd&cn, v. n. to tend, redouno. ©eri'cjt, n.-tv, pl.-e, judgment, tr bunal. ©era, adv. willingly, gladly, cheei r— ®et» ©eiB— ®ra« 483 fully, -with pleasure; -^aitn, to like, be fond of. ®er|lt./. -, barley, ©efang, m. -ti, pi Ocfcfnge, song. OtfdidtX, n. -ei5, pi. -e, business, employment. ®efd)af'tig,a(//.busy,busied,bastling. ®i\ijt')jm, p. 350; D. ir. n. to happen, take, place, chance, be done. @ef(^£nt', 11. -ti,pl. -c, present, gift. ©efcl)id)'te,/. -ipl. -n, liistory, story. ®tfc^iitt, adj. fit, apt, skillful, ©tfc^bpf , n. -ti, pi. -e, creature. ®ef4vei'( n.-ei, cry, clamor, scream, lamentations. ®t\i)n^'r n. -ti, pi. -e, artillery, cannon. ©efc^tBet'gett, see filtteigen, p. 354; V. ir. n. to pass over in silence. ®efd)iBtrtti', ady. swift, fast, rapid, quick. ®efd)»iir', n. -ti, pi. -t, sore, nicer, ©efeil'f^aft,/. -, pi. -en, company. ®Efe|', n. -ii, pU -t, law, decree. &t\pttt]i't «• -e«/ pi. -er, ghost, specter, spirit, phantom. ®c|pra'i^tg, ad/, affable, talkative. ©Ej'ta'Ue, «.. -e^, jji. -e, shore, coast. ®t\la.h',f. -,pl. -en, figure, form. ®e|l£in', n. -li, pi. -t, stone, rook. ®e|iern, adv. yesterday. ®e|irciud)', n. -ti, pi. -e, bushes, briars, thicket. ®efunb' adj. sound, healthy, ©efunb'^eit, /. -, pi. -en, health. ®etrei'be, n. -i, corn, grain. ®etveu', adj. faithful, loyal, true, honest, devoted. ®etro|y( confident, courageous, with confidence. ®etro'j}en,-w. r. to console One's self, trust in, to be not afraid of. ®cn)(i|t', adj. perceiving; -werben, to see, perceive. ®eit)alC /. -, pi. -en, power, force, ©ewal'tig, adj. powerful, mighty, very large, prodigious. ®eH)anD', n. -eS. pi. ©emanbet, gar- ment, drapery cloth, dress. ®ett>ei§', n. -ti, pi. -c, horns, bran- ches, antlers. ®ei»in'iten, p, 350; to win, earn. ®EWip', adj. jertain, sure, fixed, ©ewif'feri/ n, -it pi. -, conscience. ©ewij^n'Iic^, usual, common. ®ett)oI;nt'( used, accustomed. ®en>iirbe, ». -8, pi. -, &-Xt vault, arch, ®c»urs', n. -ii, pi. -e, spice, aro- matic, ©esie'men, v. imp. to become, be- seem, be fit. ®ie[!en, p. 350; v. ir. a. to puur spill, cast. ®iftig, adj. poisonous, venomouc. ®tnH)et, m. -i3, pi.-, chaffinch, sini. pleton. ®Un'„ m. -ti, splendor, luster, brightness, glance. ©Icinjen, v. n. to glisten, glitter. ®Ia«, n. -ei, pi. ©lafer, glass. ®lafcr, m. -i, pi. — , glazier. ®Iafent, adj. glass, glassy. ®latt, adj. Bmooth, even, plain. ®Iaul)e, m. -H^, faith, belief, credit. ®laul>en, v. a. to believe, think. ®IauHg, adj. believing, faithful. ®Ittul)tgc, m. &f. believer. QHni), adj. like, alike, equal, level, plain,straight, just, immediately ®Ieic^tommcn, to equal. ®lEt(^cn, p. 350; v. ir. n. to equal, equalize, level, resemble. ®leid)gultigfeit, /. -, ^l. -en, equal- ness, equivalence, indifference. ®leid)mutf, m. -ti, equinimity, calmness. ®luiJ, «. -eS, fortune, happiness, prosperous condition. (jHiiifUii, adj. happy, fortunate, prosperous. ®luiIfeUgtcit,/.-, happiness, felicity ®nubig, adj. gracious, merciful. ®oIb, n. -ci, gold; -fd)inieb, m.gold smith. ®olbcn, acy. gold, golden. ®ott, m. -ti, God. ®i)tttii't), adj. divine, godly, godlikeL ®Ottlol, adj. godless, impious, wicked. ®tab, n. -ti, pi. ®ia6er, grare^ tomb, sepulchre. ®rttl)cn, m. -i, pi. ®raSen, ditch, trench, canal. @r(t6ett, p. 350; v. ir. a.&n. to dig, cut ®taf, m. -en, pi. -en, earl, count. ®rdnje, see ®ienie. ®ra«, n. -fea, pK ©Mifer, grass. 184 ®vau- ^aitf ^an^—^tx ©rail, adj. gray, grizzle ^ ©teifcn, V. a. & n. ir. to gripe, grasp, seize, lay hold of. ®reig, adj. gray, noary; - m. -^ii, pi. -fe, an old man. ®r?n5C, /. -, pi. -n, limit, border. ©rtec|enlanb, ». -ir Greece. OroB, adj. oroarse, clumsy, gross, rnie. Oropr adj. great, large, vast, huge, high, tall, eminent, grand. Brute,/. -, pi. -n, pit, oarity. ©riin, adj. green, verdant, fresh. ®runb, m. -e«, pi. ©viinbe, ground, bottom, foundation, reason. ^Ounfiig, adj. favorable, propitious. ®u|la», m. Gustavus. ®ut, adj. good, well, sufficiently, good-natured, kind, pleasant, convenient ; -, ». -ti, pi. ©titer, good, possession, estate, commo- dity. 6)utC,/. -, goodness, kindness. (Suttg, adj. kind, benevolent ^a, int. ha I iaax, n. -ti, pi. -t, hair, wool. ^abett, V. ir. aux. to have, possess. C)abi(^t, >/i. -tit pi. -t, hawk. I'at'^fcurg, n. Hapsburg. |)aber, m. -^, quarrel, brawL 4>abeiit, V. ii. to quarrel, brawL 4>afen, m. -i, pi. ^cifen, harbor. 4)afer, m. —i, oats. iJttger, adj. haggard. ^atli, adj. half ^alt, |al6en, ^al6er, prep, by reason o^ on account of. §ttlb^ett, /. -, fl. -en, mediocrity. fcalMdut, adv. in an under tone. fialm, m. -ti, pi. -e, stalk, halm. E>alten, p. 350; v. ir. a. to hold, keep, support, contain, stop, maintain, manage, value, deem, estimate, think, celebrate, treat. jammer, tn. -i,pl. jammer, hammer. ^dmmern, v. a. to hammer. hdnbif. -, pi. $anbe, hand; -fi^u^, m. glove, gauntlet. £>anbeln, u. a. to handle, treat; v. n. to act, trade, deal. 4>anblung,/. -, pi. -en, action, deed. ?. -manner, -Icutc, captain. ^anptjiabt, /. -, pi. -jldbtc, capital, metropolis. $au«, n. -fe«, pl._ ^iufer, house, household, family ; - frau, /. housewife. ^auabvob, n. -ti, pi. -c, household bread, domestic-bread. |iau«^altung, f. -, pi. -en, house- keeping, household, family. |)el)en, p. 350 ; v. ir. a. to Hfti, raise, elevate. $eer, n. -ti, pi. -e, army, host. |>eil, adj. healed, sound, unhurt; «. -tit welfare, health. $etlig, adj. holy, sacred. ^etligen, v. a. to hallow, consecrate. ^etmbttngen, v. a. ir. to bring home. Iieimlic^, adj. secret, private. ^einrid), m. -i, Henry. |)eip, adj. hot, ardent, torrid. |)et^en, p. 350 ; v. ir. a. & n. to call, bid, enjoin, to be called, be said, mean, signify, be considered; taai foU btt^ -? what does that mean ? what do you mean by that! e* ^cipt, it is said, they say ; btt? ^eipl, that is to say, that is; iDte ^eipen ©tc ? what is ycur name ! §eiter, adj. serene, clear, fair, bright, cheerful. ^elfen, p. 350 ; v. ir. n. to help, atv sist, save, avail. ^cll, adj. clear, bright, light §er, adv. hither, hitherward. ^erat', adv. dosvn from, down, downward. Iieran', adv. on, near near to, ur upward. ^iX—SOMt §iin— Jipu'^n 485 terttn'rmttn, v. n. to advance, ap- pi'oach, march on. ^eraufj adv. up, upward. 4>evauftieil)eni v. a. ir. to force or press up. ^erau^'fommen, i: n. ir. to come out. ■Sevaug fc^veiten. v. n. ir. to step forth. ^crt, lettci adj. acerb, bitter, eager, harsh, sour, fir'ljei', adv. hither, near, on. Iierbei'bringcni v. a. ir. to bring for- ward, pi-od-aoe. 4i;vbc'.'futu'ttl, V. a. to lead near, bring on. 4>erlici'lraaen, v. a. ir. to bring or fetch to or in. ^etbft, m. -Eg, harvest, autumn. 4)ernie'l3cr, adv. down, downward. |)eruic'Dei'l)U(fen, u. to look down. ^einie'Dcvfommca, i'. /i. ir. to come down, ^err, m, -en, pi. -tn, master, gentle- man, lord, sir. 4)CttUd), adj. magnificent, glorious, splendid. ^crrlitltcit, /. -, pi. -en, magni- ficence, glory, splendor. 4ierrfci)en, v. n. to rule, reign, govern, prevaiL $er|lammen, v. n. to descend, issue from, come from. 4)evut>er, adv. over, across. 4)erunter, adv. down. |)ev»or'3e^ett, v. n. ir. to go forth, proceed, follow, ^ersor'^olcn, v. a. to fetch out. ^cvsot'tveten, «. «. ir. to step forth, appear, ^et}, n. -mi, pl.-txi, heart, courage. $crjlic^/ adj. hearty, cordial ^etjog, m. -ei3, pL. -e, duke. 4)erso3«^ut, m. -ti, pi. -pte, ducal hat. ^eiTe, m. -% pi. -n, Hefsian. $eu, m. '-ti, hjy. |)euc^elei',/. -,pl. -en, hypocrisy. ^leulen, v. n. to howl, ^leute, adv. to-day, this day ; - s« Sage, now-a-days. .pier, octo. here, in this world ; -^et, hither, here. <)tct^et'£oirttien, v. n. ir. to come hither. {itmaul, m. -3, pi. -, heaven, hea- vens, pi. sky, zone, climate. ^tmmlifd), adj. heavenly, celestial. $iin, adv. thitlier, away, gone, losl^ on, along, down. (L. 52.) §tnfil)', adv. down, down there (see ^eruntet, Ijinuutcv). 4>inab'fallen, v. n. t/., imp. ^o fall down. ^inauf, adv. up, up there. ©inauf'ftciijen, '"• ■«■ «»". to step of climb up. $iliau«', adv. out, out there. ^inauS'gc^en, v. n. ir. to go out. |)ineiil'vcttcn, v. n. ir. to ride into, ^lincin'reagen, v. r. to venture in. |)imiel)men, v. a. ir. to take, receive. 4>inictd.)en, -o. a. to reach, hand ; -, v. n. to suffice. $infi(i)t, /. -, view, respect. ^tntev, prep. & adv. behind, after, back, backwards. Minuter, adv: over, across, beyond. Ijinju'fiigeii, v. u. to add to, join, adjoin. $irfd), m. -ti, pi. -e, stag, hart. ^obel, m. -i, pi. -, plane. |)Dd), adj. high, lofty, sublime. ^ijdjtl, adv. most, extremely. 4>ojten, V. a. <& n. to hope, expect^ trust. 4)ot]nun9,/. -, pU -en, hope, ex- pectation. Roping, m. -g, pi. -e, courtier. |)6|e, /. -, pi. -n, hight, highness, elevation; in-|>D^e, up, upward ^o'tjX, adj. hollow, concave. Im^nliidjen, v. n. to laugh in scorn, scoff. §bllif(^, adj. hellish, infernal. Iioten V. a. to fetch, go for ; -laffen, to send for. |)olj, n. -ca, pi. -e h $6Ijer, wood timber ; -|auet, woodcutter. ^blsern, adj. wooden. Iionig m. -eg, honey. ' |)ontgto))f, m. -eg, pi. -, -tfpfti honey -jar. ^iiten, V. a. ds n. hear, give ear. |)otit, M. -ei3i pi. Corner, horn. Subfc^, adj. pretty, fair. iuf, m. -ti, pi. e, hoo£ liiigel, m. -i, pi. -, hillock, hill. ^ujn «. -til pi. ©u^ner/ fr wL 18G ^lul— 3aa Sag— ^auf ^iilfe,' /, -, aid, help, Buocor, as- sistaniKs relief tiulfloa, »i;. helplbss. |>unb, -n. -ii, pi. -e, dog. Iiunbc^eit, (L. 24. 1). |>unberl, see § 45, (1). Iiunbertfaltig, hundredfold, a hun- dred things. fcxmgenti v, n & imp. to hunger. ^iipfen, w. «. to leap, hop, skip. ^ut, m. -ii, pi. Iittte, hat, bonnet; -matter, m. -i, pi. -, hatter. &iittc, /. ■ , pi. -n, hut, cot, cottage. Si$, prn. L Sfir, prn. your, to her, her, its, you, their. Smmer, adv. always, ever. Sn, prep, into, in, at, within, to, o£ Snbriinjitg, adj. ardent, fervent. Snbem', conj. while, when, because, since. 3n^alt«f($n)ei, adj. significant, full of meaning. Snnere, adj. inner, interior, intrinsic, fig. heart, soul. 3nner^alb, prep, within. Snittrlic^, adj. inward, internal, in- trinsic, hearty, mental. Snfel, f. -, pi. -It, island, isle. Sn^gt^eim', adv. privately, secretly. SlUtrcffant', adj. interesting. Sntercfft, n. -&, pi. -n, interest Srbifc^, adj. terrestrial, earthly; bag 3rbtfc|e, eartlily portion, posses- sion. Svten, V. n. to err, go astray ; v. r. to mistake,- commit an error. Sirlic^t, n. -i, pi. -cr, ignis fatuua. Will-o'-the-wisp, Jack-o'-lantern. 3i3Ianb, n. -a, Iceland. Stalic'net, m. -g, pi. -, Italian Stalie'nifc^, adj. Italian. 3 (Sonfonant). 3bl«~ man, squire. Supiter, m. -i, Jupiter. .Saffce, TO. -i, coffee, flciftg, m. i, pi. -£, cage. ^af)n, m. -i, pi. Sd^ne, boat. .ffaifer, to. -i, pi. -, emperor. ^fliferin, /. -, pi. -nen, empress. fialb, n. -i, pi ildU'ET, calf ^alf, m. -eg, pi. -e, lime. Salt, adj. cold, chill, frigid. BaUe, f. -, cold,"coldQ0S3. Sameel', -ti, pi. -e, camel .ffantMab', to. -en, pi. -en, comrade Samin', n. -eg, pi. -e, chminey, fire place, fire-side, flamm, to. -eg, pi. Samme, comb. .ffamtjf, TO -eg, pi. jfdmpfe, combat. .ffanne, /. -, pi. -n, can, jug. ffanicl,/. -, pi. -n, pulpit. Jfapitiin', m. -i, pi. -e, capitain. Man, TO. -a, Charles. Soife, m. -g, joi. -, cheese, .ffaufen, v. a. to buy, purchase. Xavfxfomm ^ .Mcute, merchant Staam — ^or6 ^orn— Sag 487 il'ftuai adv. scarce, scarcely. fle^ten, v. a. to brush, sweep. fleic^cn, V. n. to pant, gasp. fieta (Eeittet, feine, Uiwi), adj. prn. no, not any, no one, none. Seine^WegS, aih. in no wise, ty no means, not at all. •fleltet, m. -a, pi. -, cellar. fleUner, m. -i, pi. -, waiter. ffiennftt, p. 350; v. ir. a. to know, M acquainted with. fieimtni^, /. -, pi. -t, knowledge, science, acquirement. better, m. -3, pi. -, prison, dungeon, ifeffel/ m.-g, pi. -, kettle. Settc, /. -, pi. -n, chain. Seuci)eni see Setc^en. JJcuIe, /. -, pi. -, club. i?inb, m. -e^, pi. -et, child, infant. fiinbtfc^, adj. childish, childlike. .Kirc^e, /. -, pi. -n, church. Bix^itbmm, m. -ti, pi. -Soiume, cherry-tree. jJtrfd)e, /. -, pi. ~xit cherry. Slagen, v. n. to complain, lament. ^luge /. -( pi. -«, complaint, lamen- tation, plaint. fllaglic^, adj. lamentable, mournful, pitiful. Slax, adj. clear, bright, fair, plain. Jfieit), «. -e8, pi. -er, garment, dress, garb. gown. S'tin, adj. little, small, trifling. S .empiter, m. -a, pi. -, tinman. S ettern, v. n. to climb, scramble. ft(u3/ adj. prudent, ingenious wise, judicious, skillful. Snafie, m. -n, pi. -n, boy, lad, Snec|t, m. -ti, pi. -e, servant, slave. SnDpf( m. -eSf ^2. .ffnopfe, button. fittoape, /. -, pi. -n, bud, eye, ^oc^, m. -ti, pi Aii^c, cook. mdim (L. 23. 5.). jtojfcr, m. •-$, pi. -, coffer, trunk. fiofle, / -, ^Z. -n, coal. fiommeiv, jo. 350; v. ir. n. to come, arrive at, get to. Mttis, m. -a, pi. -t, king; -ret^, 1. kingdom. itcntgin,/. -, pi. -;ten, queen. .(?i)nticn, V. n. ir. to be able, be per- mitted, know. (L. 45. 5. & p. 350). ftopf, TO. -e8, ^i Sopfc, head. flot J, TO. -e«, joZ. ftijrbei basket. flora, «. -tiipl. fliirner, grtin, com. -ct^re, /. ear of corn. flijrpcr, TO. -8, pi. -, body. jfoilcn, V. n. to cost. flvftft, /. -, pi. fltdfte, strengti, force, vigor, faculty, power. Sraft, prej\ by virtue of. flrcifttg, adj. strong, powerfuL flrageii, m. -s, pi. flragen, oollai flra|e, /. -, pi -n, crow. flrant($, to. -,eS, yi -e, crane, Stanfi adj, sick, ill, diseased. .Rrcinfcn, v. a. & r. to grieve, vex. flreibe,/. -, chalk. flreifenr «. ?t. to move in a circle^ turn round, revolve, whirl. flreu^, ». -e8, p^. -e, cross, crucifix; -jug, TO. crusade. Sriec^tn, p. 350; ». «■. ». to creep, crawl. flrteg, to. -ea, j)Z. -e, war. Stteger, to. -S, pZ. -, warrior. SviegSjug, to. -c«, JfriegSjitgei cam- paign. Rrotobil', ire. & ™. -e§, ^i -e, cro- codile. flrone,/. -, pi. -n, crown, coronet, head, top (of a tree). flrug, m. -«, pZ. flritge, pitcher. flitfer, TO. -8, pi. -, cooper. flui, /. -, pi. fliife, cow. fluil, adj. cool, fresh, cold. fiuin, adj. bold, hardy, dauntless. Summer, to. —8, sorrow, griet iJuttbe, /. -, pi. -n, knowledge, in formation, news, notice. fluttfttg, a(M. future, next, coming; inS ftiin^tge, for the future. flunft, /. -, pL fliinfle, art, skill. J?un|Ker, m. -g, p/. -, artist. flupfer, M. -§, copper. flujfertt, adj. copper, of coppej- flurj, adj. & adv. short, brie^ short ly, in short. &ut(i)tx, TO. -i, pi. -, coachman. Cttieiti •«. ct. to refresh, recreate. Sa(|eln, «. ». to smile. Cai^en, to laugh, smile. Sac^erltc^, adj. ridiculous. Sac^^; TO. -fe«, ^Z. -e, salman. Sager, «. -«, ^i. -, & Caget, ooucn, bed, camo. 488 2o9— 2eit 2elli"-2o3 Sdgetn, v a. to lay do-wn, store, en- camp, lie down. Sa^m, ac^'. lame, halt, halting. Samm, n. -eg, pi. gcimmer, lamb. Sanb, n. -iiipl. Sanbct, land, ground, soil, country; -luft, /. country- air; -mann, m. peasant; -ilrftpe, /. high-road, highway. CcinbUif, adj. rural, country-lite. Sanbfcjaft, /. -, pi. -en, landscape. Sixng, adj. long, tall, during; -roiU lig, tedious, tiresome. S'iliije, adv. long, a long time. 8ange»eile, /. -, ennui, heaviness, tediousness. SangS, adv. along. Cangfam, adj. slow, dull, heavy. Sdngfl, a^v. long ago, long since. Saffcn, to let, permit, allow, give, suffer, fit, become. (L. 45. 11. & p. 350.) £afit^ier,n.-e?,^Z.-e,beast of burden. Eajler^aft, adj. vicious, wicked. Sttjlig, adj. burdensome, trouble- some. Sauf, m. -ea, pi. Cciufe, run, course, currency, current. Saufen, p. 350 ; v. ir. n. to run. Saune, /. -, pi. -n, humor, temper, whim, freak. Saut, m. -ei, pi. -t, sound, tone. Saut, adj. & adv. loud, aloud. Siiutetn, v. a. to purify, refine, clear. JJelettj v.n to live; n.-i, life, vivacity. Stitn, n. -3, life. SeSen'big, adj. living, alive, quick. Sebcr, n. -i, pi. -, leather. Sebig, adj. empty, void, vacant, free. Seer, adj. empty, void, vain. fiegen, v. a. to lay, put, place ; v. r. to lie down. £c|cn, n.-i,pl.-, tenure, possession. £e|ren, v. a. to teach, instruct. £c|rer, m. -i, pi. -, teacher, instruc- tor, professor, master. £e:^retirt (L. 23. 5). Be^vling, m. -li, pi. -t, apprentice. Ztijxxtii), adj. instructive. £ei6, m. -eg, pi. -er, body. Seic[)t, adj. light, easy, fickle. fieicl)t(tnmg, adj. light, light-minded. £eib, adj. sorrowful, troublesome; ti ifi mlr -, ti tfjnt mit -, I am Borry for it. Ceib, n. -eg, hurt, pain, Boriow. Seiben, p. 350; v. ir. a. er, n. -v, pi. -, ner-'oug fever. 9?e|i, n. -g, pi. -er, nest. iUeu, adj. new, fresh, recent, modern, aufiJ Sicwe, Don 3!cuera, anew afresii, again. Jfcuerfi^atFcn, adj. neW-crcated. SJcugiertg, adj. curious, inquisitiv* SReuli^, adj. late, recent. SJeunjig, §45.(1). ««t^t— Dcjl f)a«r— gjreu 49i 9{tAt, adv. not. ffiidjti, prn. nothing, naught. Site. adv. never at no time. 3?teberpic(ieit, v. n. ir. to flo-w down, or under. SJtebevfr.teen, ■&li, m. -fen (or D^fe -n), pl.-ti, ox. Dber, conj. or, or else, either, or. Dfen, m. -8, pi. Defen, stove. Offen, arf?. open. Dfftiter', m. -i, pi. -e, officer. Defnen, v. a. to open. Oft, adv. oft, often, frequently. O^eim, m. -«, /)'■ -e, uncle. SD^ne, without, destitute of. D^r, >i. -g, ;p/. -en, ear. Cel, m. -ew, i)i- -e, oil. Dntel, m. «, pi. -, uncle. Drbentliil, adj. orderly, regular. Drl, m. -tiipl. -c, & Derter, place. Dfl, m. East. D|len, m. -«, East. Dejlerielc^, n. -i, Austria. Defterreti|er, m. -i, pi. -, Austrian. 9)aat, n. -t8, |)?. -e, pair, couple, a few. 9)alatt', m -eS, p?. -Ia|le, palace. 9)apta:', n. -eg, »Z. -e, paper. 9)ara'l)el, / -, p. -n, parable. 3)aviS', n. Pans. 5)affen, u. a. & n. to fit, suit. |)atrio'ttfc(), adj. patriotic. 3)a»ici, «. Pavia. iJcilc, /. -, pi. -en, pearl. i)e|},/.-, ^r.-en, pestilence, plague. JSetfqtift, n. -eg, pi. -tt seal. i)fab, m. -e«, -«, /)i. -e, path. 9)f(iu, m. -eg & -en, pi. -e & -en» j)eacock. 3)tcffev, m. -i, pepper. 9)feif£n, p. 382; v. ir. a. & n. to pipe^ whistle. 3)feil, m. -eg, jo?. -e, arrow. 3)fevb, «. -eg, ^/. -e, horse. |)jirftc^e, /. -, pi. -n, peach. Sffituje, /. -, pi. -n, plant, veget- able, 9)flanjen, v. a. to plant, set, trans. plant. 3)flaume,/. -, pi. -n, plum. SJflcgen, V. a. to take care of, nurse, attend to ; ». m. to be accustomed, indulge. 3JPtd)t, /. -,pl.-tn, duty, obligation. 5)fliiiien, v. a. to pluck. S)funb, n. -eg, pi. -e, pound, gjtifcn, ». -g, Pilsen. 9)tnfel, m. -g, pi -, paint-brush, pencil, gjian, m. -eg, pZ. -e & 5>K»e, plan. 'Plc JH$, (H^'. sudden, instantaneous, on a sudden, at once. 9)6()el, m. -g, mob, populace. $oct, m. -en, pi!, -en, poet. §ple, OT. -n, pi. -n, Pole. 5)oli'ren, «). a. to polish. 3)otieEa'n, «. -8, porcelain, china. 9)racl)l, /. -, pomp, state, splendor ^xaijlii, adj. magnificent, splendid. 5Jraftifii, adj. practical. 3)rebigen, v. a. & n. to preach. ^rebigt,/. -, pi. -en, sermon. |)reifen, p. 352 ; v. ir. a. to praia^ commend, call. 3)teupe, m. -t!, p/. -n, Prussian 492 3>fcu— ateg 3leg— 3lu6 9)reupen, n. -§, Prussia. 9)rome'4euS, m. Prometheus. ^«lt, n. -ci, pi. -e, desk. g)ul»er, n. -i, pi. -, powder. 9>u5cn, V. a. & r. to dress, attire, trim, clean. CitSleti/ V. a. to pain, torment, plague. SRate, m. -it/ pi -n, raven. Staijt, f. -, vengeance, revenge. 3Jac^cn, v. a. to revenge, avenge; V. r. to revenge one's selii take vengeance. Slab, n. -eS, -3, pi. SRcibcr, wheeL Slanti, m. -eS, -i, pi. Stcinber, edge, brim, brink, margin. Slang, m. -t.i, pi. Sicmge, rank, order, rate, dignity, quality, roTv. Slafttt, m. -3, pi. -, tnrf, sod, clod. SRafen, v. n. to rave, rage, bluster. Siatlj, m, ti, counsel, advise, means, expedi-ent ; feagegen K>irb fc^on 3Jat^, for that there is redi'ess (a re- medy); baju fann t^m iRat^ wcrbcn, in this he can be helped, this he can do, Slauli, m. -til robbery; -Dogcl, m. bii-d of prey. SRaulien, v. a. to rob, spoil, steaL Siauber, m. -3, pi. -, robber. 3{au^cti, V. a. & n. to smoke. gtaum, m. -ti, pi. aidume, room, space.. SRei^tf a^. fight, just, true, real, legitimate, rightly, Tvell, very. SJedjt, n. -ti, pi. -i, right, claim, title, privilege, immunity, law, justice. SRec^tfertigen, v. a. to justify, vindi- cate, exculpate. Siebe, /. -, pi. -n, speech, harangue, oration, discourse. Stebenr v. a. & n. to speak, talk, dis- course. Btebncr, m, -$, pi. -, orator. tSita,t\,f. -t pi. -n, rule, principle. Wegclmdgig, adj. regular. Slegen, v. a. it r. to stir, move, rouse, be active. . gicgcn, m. -i, pi. -, rain, shcwer , -fc|trm, m. umbrella, giegic'rcn, v. «,. ride, go on horseback. Siciter, m. -i, pi. —, horseman. Sieltgicn', /. -, pi. -en, religion. SReligtiJS', adj. religious. SRemien, v. n. ir. to run. race. 3Je)>ul)lil',/. -, pi. -en, republic. SReumiif^tg, adj. repentant. SRcBotutio'n,/. -, pl.-in, revolution. SU^etn, m, -ti, Ehine. SRic^tcn, V. a. & r. to direct, raises arrange, adapt, judge, execute^ criticize; ju (Srunbc — , to ruin, destroy. SStdjter, m. -i, pi. -, judge. 3Jid)tig, adj. right, exact, just, true SRicrc m.-v., pi. -tt, giant ;-ngcMrge, n. Giant Mountains. 3?ing, m. -ci,pl. -e, ring. 9itng3, adv. around. gjod, m. -ii, pi. SRocEc, coat. SRoggen, m. -i, rye. gio|, ad}, raw, crude, rough, mia, Sffoir, ii. -:i, pi. -e, reed, cane. SRom, n. -i, Rome. Dtofe, /. -, pi. -n, rose. SRofenilod, -eg, pi. -fiiitfe, rose-b isn, SRoji, n. -\Jti, pi. ife, horse, steed. aioptctn, n. -}, pi. -, horse. fL. 24) 3Jojlig, adj. rusty. 0lot^, adj. red. Siuttn', m. -S pi. -e, ruby. Slttd— ®d)aff ©(^aK— ©d)I 493 (RjxS, IB. -ti,pl. -t, stroke, imll, fit, joll^ jerk. SRitSen, m. -8, pi. -, back, ridge. 3ludtfi, pi. -t, sheep. SiSja]ttn, p. 352 ; to create, procure, carry, amyey. ther-in-law. ©d)iDagcrtn, /. -, pi. -nen, aister-in law. ©djraaU't,/. -, pi -n, swallow. ©c^iBamm, m ci, pi. ©(^womnKr sponge. ©4n)on, m. -ti, pi. ©i^Wiiine, swan, ©c^wanfen, v. n. to stagger, fluc- tuate, waver, hesitate, ©f^wavm, m. -ti, pi. ©i^ttcitmei swarm, crowd, throng, cluster. ©^Wai;, adj. black, dark. ©d)wai'5cn, v. a. to blacken, black. ©djrocben, v. v. to wave, to hang, to be suspended, ©(^mebe, m. -n, Swede. ©d&weben, n. Sweden. ©djroebtfd), Swedish. ©^weif, m. -ci, pi, -t, tail, train, ©djroeigen, v. n. ir. to be silent, keep silent, stop. ©^toeHen, v. a. to swell, make swell, raise ; v. n. p. 3S4 ; to swell, rise, heave, ©corner, adj. heavy, difficult, hard; ti fallt -, it is difficult, ©i^wermutl, /. melancholy, sadness. ©d)n)Ert, n. -ti, pi. -cr, sword. ©djSBfjIer,/. -, pi. -n, sister, ©djwicrtg, adj. hard, difficult, ©djmicitgtctt, /. -, pi. -en, hardness, difficulty. ©d;n)iram»i)gel, m. web-footed-bird. ©djmimmen, ^. 354; to swim. ©d)»6ren, p. 354 ; to take an oath, swear, vow. ©clasc, rn. -n, pL -n, slave. ©ed)S, six. ©ce^unb, m. -ti, pi. -c, seal ©ccle, /. -, pL -n, soul, ©egcln, v. a. & n. to sail. t, V. a. to bless. ©e|cn, p. 354; to see, look, v7eTr, behold. oi)l, adj. & adv. unwelL Unjtt^l'tiar, adj. innumerable. Unjd^tig' see Unsaljlficrt. Unsufi'iebcn, adj. discontent, discon- tented, dissatisfied. Urqueff, m. -ti, pi. -tn, fountain head, original source. Urfac^e,/. -, pi. -^l, cause, reason. Urt^eil, n. -eg, -c, judgement, sen- tence, verdict. Urt^eilcn, v. a. & n. to judge, be oi opinion, decide. SiaitT, m. -i, pi Sater, father. ajdtert^En, n. -i. (L. 24. 2). SSatEvIanb, -i. native country, father laud. SJaterim'fer, n. -i, Lord's Prayer. SSene'big, n. Venice. iBeraS'fdumen, v. a. to neglect 2!erad)'ten, v. a. to despise, scorn. SSetan'bevung, /. -, pi. -en, change, alteration, variation. SJeratt'Iaffung, /. cause, occasion. SSertei'gen, v. a. ir. to hide, conceal V. r. ir. to abscond. Serberfetung, /. -, pi. -en, amend- ment, improvement. SSerbin'Den, v. a. ir. to bind up, tie up, unite, join, oblige. iBetbot'gen, adj. hidden, retired. 3Jer6rE'd)En, n. -i, pi. -, crime. 2Jerbre'd)cv, m. -i, pi. -, criminal. SBcvbrei'tEn, v. a. to divulge; v. r. to spread, be propagated, extend. 3Ser6ittn'gert/ v. a. ir. to spend, c;.ii- sume. SSetbac^'tig, adj. suspected, suspi- cious. ajerbEr'ben,^. 356; to corrupt, reniet unfit, spoil. SSErbie'nen, v. a. to gain, earn merit, deserve. SBErbrie'pen, v. imp.p. 35fi ; to grieve, cause, disgust, trouble. SJerbriep'tid), or ucrtriip'U^, adj. morose, peevish, tr« ublesome^ irksome, vexatious. 5U0 Serb— Sen SScrf— SSicl Sere'belii, v.a.&r. to improve, en- noble SJereb'Iung, /. -, pi. -m, improve' ment. SJete^'ren, v. a. to honor. SSeret'nigen, ». a. to imite SJerei'nigt, united. SJevfayven, v. a. n. to act, proceed. SSerfcyScn, v. a. to miss. Serfei'ttgen, v. a. to make, perform. SJergef fen, p. 356 ; to forget. SJergnii'gen, n. -i, pi. -, pleasure, diversion, delight, comfort SJcr^af ten, v. a. arrest, imprison. SJer^iiit'nigwort, n. -tit pi. -wiirter, preposition. ffler^arit', adj. hated, hateful. SSerpi'Ien, v. a. to veil, cover over, wrap up. SJertal ten, v, t. to take cold. SJertau'fen, o. a. to sell, vend. SJerlan'gen, v. a. & n. to ask, demand, desire, long for; eg Bcilangt mtc^ ju Wijfcn, I long to know ; n. -g, desire, demand. SJctlag', m. -ffeg, reliance, inherit- ance, succession. SSerlaffen, v. a. ir. to leave, forsake; 3). r. ir. auf einen -, to rely upon, depend on; adj. destitute, aban- doned. SSctleum'tiung, /. -, pi. -en, calumny, slander, defamation. SJerlie'rcn, p. 356 ; to lose. SSerlufi, m. -ea, pi. -e, loss, damage. SJetmie't^en, v. a. to let. SJcrmit'telft, prep, by means of. SSermo'ge, prep, by dint of. SJermo'gen, v. a. & n. ir. to be able, to have the power; cincrt ju ettoai — , to prevail upon one to do ; «. -i, ability, power, faonlty, prop- erty, wealth. Scrmu't^en, v. a. to suppose, pre- sume, think. 3>crnunft',/. -, reason, sense. SJcrnunf'tig, adj. rational, reason- able; sensible, judicious, discreet. SBerpfltt^'ten, v. a. to bind by duty or oath, to oblige. SJertat^', m. -eg, treason. SJem't^er, m. -g, pi. -, traitor. SSetfam'meln, tn'ben, v. n. ir. to disappear, vanish. SJerfe'j'en, v. a. to answer, leply respond. 55crjtn'fen, v. n. ir. to sink down. SScrjppt'ten, v. a. to scoff, deride. SJerlprc'djen, v. a. ir. to promise. 3}tr|>anb', m. —a, understanding, intellect. SJcjrftan'f ig, adj. sensible, inteUigenl^ judicious. SJcrfte'^en, v. a. & n. ir. to under- stand, apprehend, mean. SJcrilei'ncrti, v. a. & r. to petrify. SScrficI'Iung, /. -, pi -en, dissimu- lation. 3Jer|tam'mcn, v. n. to become silenl^ cease to sound. SJcrfu'c^en, v. a. to try, attempt, ex- perience, taste, tempt. SJert^et'bigen, v. a. to defend. SJertrau'en, v. a. & n. to entrust, confide ; n. -g, coiifidenoe, trust, SJertret'ben, v. a. ir. to drive away, chase, expel. SJerur'fac^en, v. a. to cause. Serwanb'te, m. &f. -y^ pi. -n, rela- tion, kin, kinsman. SJcrmci'ten, v. n. l. -xi, witness. itui, m. Jupiter. 3tEt)cn, u p. & 11. ir. to draw, pull, culiiiate, to go, march, migrate 3iel, n. —:■:, pi. -e, term, Umit, aim, butt, scope, goal. Bielcn, V. n. to aim, take aim. SiifevliIiUt, n. -ti, pl.M-iUna, dial, dial-plate. 3tmmev, n. -i, pi. -, room, appart- ment ; -mann, m. carpenter. 3inn, n. tin, pewter. Bittitern, adj. tin pewter, made of pewter or tin. 3ittern, v. n. to tremble quake. 3oIIncr, m. -g, pi. -, toll-gatherer. 3n, prep. & adv. at, by, to, tor, in, on. Sutler m. -S, sugar , 3ucEer6ri)t>, n. -ti, -i, pi. -c, sugar - bread, sweet biscuit. Sufall, m. -ti, pi. 3«fiiltc, chance, accident, adventure; bmd) -, by chance. Bltfol'ge, prnp. according to. Sufric'ben, adj. content, contented, satisfied. Sltge^iiren, v. n. to appertain, be- long to. Sugleic^', adv. at the same time, at once, together. 3ugt|iet, n. -ti, pi. -i, draught animal. 3utommen, v. n. ir. to come to, ap- proach ; V. imp. to belong to, be- come. 3ule^t', adv. at hvst, lastly, after all, finally. 3um.td)en, v. a. to shut, close. 3iirn£il, V. n. to be angry. 3ururl:', adv. back, backward. 3uvit£t'ftt)ien, V. n. to return. 3uviiif'iBcid)cn, v. n. ir. to recede, retire, withdraw. 3«rafcn, 0. a. &. n. ir. to give a call, call to. 3«|am'menjie|en, v. a. ir. to dran together, contract. 3ufe^en, ('. n. ir. to look at, behold, connive at. 3tlttagen, v. a. ir. to carry to, to bring ; v. r. ir. to lia ppen, chance, come to pass. 3u»etlaf|t3, adj. positive, reliable. 3u»er|tc^t, /. -, confidence, trust, assurance. 604 3«»— SWE^ 3»ei— 3»5IF BlltJor', aao. oclore, first, heretofore Bw^fftni v. n. to doubt. formerly. Swetg, m. -t3, pi. -t, branch, bougl^ Susot'tommen, v. n. ir. to anticipate. twig. prevent, obviate. Sweigen, v. a. to graft, branch. Suwcilen, adv. Bometimes, at times, Swetfc^netbtg, adj. two-edged. occasionally. Sweite, second. SuMJt'bev, prsp. & adv. contrary to, Sweitena, adv. secondly. against, offensive. Swtefa^, two-fold. Stuanjtg, twenty. Swingen, p. 358 ;_ to constrain, force 8n)an5ig|ie, twentieth. compel Swar, cmij. certainly, it is true, lo 3tBtf(^en, prep, between, among. \ie sure, indeed. 3»olf/ twelve.; -mali twelve time 8t9(i< two -mat/ adv. twioe. VOCABULARY FOR TEANSLATIIfG ENGLISH INTO GERMAN. *.ble, foi^lg, gefc^tdt, seet6nnen (LAS). ibove, oicn, Per. A.ooompany, Beglelletl. A-ccomplish, auafu^reni auSric^ten. According, nai|, gemcif , jufolgc; -as, ie nac^bcm. Account, bit gtec^nung ; on - ot j»e- gen, auf StSffilag. Accuse, antlagen, Befc^uIMgcn. Acquaintance, bie Setunntfi^aft, ber SBcfannte. Acquainted, Sefannt, »Mtrfl«t, toblg. Across, freajweife, ftSer, queritJn. Act, ^anbelnT ft4 Sene^men. Action, bie ^anblung. Actor, bet ©c^aufpieler. Adage, ba8 ©iJttii^iBort. Adapt, ft(i^ fijiSttu Adhere, att^angen. Adherent, an'^angenb, Stn'^cinger. Advice, bet Stat^, bie 5fa(|tic^t. Affair, bag ®ef(!^ttft, bie ©ai|e. Afraid, fut^tftttor iange, to be -; futc^ten. After, ncii), n«($bem; -noon, bet Sfai^mtttag. Again, tuieber, no^ elnmaL Against, tuiber, gegen. Agreeable, ttngenefm. Ail, fi^metscn; what ails you ? tt)«8 fepS^nen? Aim, ba«SieIr bcr QmS, bie 3[iP(|t; gtelcn. Air, btc Suft AH, al[ea,-ganj, Per^aui)'. filly, bet Sunbe^geneg. Almond, bte SRanbel. Abnost, fajl, Umdljt. Alone, aitetn. g, langs, entlang Already, Bereita, [(^ott. Also, auc6, gletc^faW. Although, oSgletc^. Always, tminer» jiets. American, ametitttnifc^, Staterltonet. Among, untet, jWifc^Ctu Anchor, bet Stntet. And, Htib. Angle, bie StngeL Animal, btt8 2;:^ier. Another, ein anbetct/ noc^ eitter. Answer, bie Stntwott, antwottett. Anticipate, juDotfomnten. Anvil, bet Slmfiog. Any, -body, Semanb ; -thing, ettta». Any one, Semattb, itgcnb Semanb. Appear, etf^etncit, f^etnen. Apple, bet Stpfel. Apprentice, bet Ce'^tling. Apricot, bie 3[t>tttofe. Architect, bet Sauffiet(lct. Arm, bet Sltnt. Army, bie Sltntee, ba« ^riegS^eet. Around, ^etuw, uw, uw'^er. Arrest, set^aftett. Arrival, bie 3tnfunft. Arrive, anfommcn. Arrow, bet 3>feil. Art, btc Sttttji Artist, bet fifln|llet. As, ali, ba, toeil, wie, fo. Ashamed (to be), fli$ fc^iSmcit Ask, ftagen, iitten. Asleep, etngefillafett. Assent, ietfiimmett. Assist, Setfie^en, l^elfen. Assistance, bet SBeijlanb, btc 4'llfei Assistant, bet Oeplfe. At, ju, an, Bei, in, ««f iiBe? »or, mt, ntit, gegen. Attentive, aufmerlfant. Auger, bet Softer. 22 506 AUG BUT SIR CAL August, ber Stuguji Aunt, bie 3Bu^me, Zarttt Austrian, ber Deflcnetc^ci. Arail, ^elfeit, nu|e», fic^ tebienen. Avoid, meiben, Dermeiben. Away, weg, fort Ax, bit ait, baa Seil. Axis, bie a^fe. B Bad, fc^lcc^t, tbfe, fc^iSbli* Bag, ber ©ttdE. Baker, bet Scidet. Ball, ber Sail, ba« SEanjfefl Bark, bie ©arfe ; icKeiu Barley, bie ®er(le. Barrel, bai gag, bie 3:onne Basin, ba^ Sedeti Basket, ber Sori. Bavaria, Saijem. Bavarian, ber Sailer, 6atcrif(!^ Bean, bie So^ne. Bear, ber Soir; ertrogen, geidren. Beast, bui 3;^ier ; - of burden, Sajl* t^ier ; - of prey, SRaubt^ier. Beat, fc^lagen, Hopfcn. Beautiful, fi^on. Beauty, bie ©^on^eit Because, nsetl, befwcgen. Become, tterben, ^c^ fi^tdEen, gejiemen. Bee, bie Siene. Beech, bie SSu^e. Beer, ba« SBier. Before, sot, 6e»»r, e^e, sorn, sorl^er, 6ereit«, fritter. Beggar, ber Settler. Begin, Seginnen, anfangen. Behave, ^S) Jetragen. Behavior, ba« Setragett. Behind, :^imer, ^inten, jurfid. Believe, glaubcn. Belong, ge^oren, ange^orcn. Below, uttter, untet^ali. Bench, bie SBanf. Beneath, utlter. Benefactor, ber SBoptf dter. Berlin, Serttn. Beside, Besides, ncBen, «u§er, augers beat; to be- one's sel^ aupei fi^ fein. Between, jt»if(i^en, unter. Beyond, itber, ienfeit«, auger, ^inaua. Bind, btjiben, (by oath) »er))ili4ten. Bird, ber Sogel; - of prey, bei 3iouBBogel. Bite, beigen. Black, f^warj, buitfel; -smith, bet ®ro6f(^mieb. Blame, tabeln; ter Sabel. Bleal^ bBten. Blessing, ber ©egen, bie SBo^UIjat BUnd, blinb. Blotting-paper, bai Sofftrabiit. Blue, blau. Board, ba« SBrett Boast, grog t^un, pra^Iett, fl($ tiil^mes Boat, ber ^a^n. Body, ber Seib, fiorpet. Book, baa Su^. Bookbinder, ber Suii^blnbet. Bookseller, ber Su^^dtiblet. Boot, ber ©tiefeL Bow, bet Sogen. Boy, ber Snabe. Braid, flec^ten, mebett. Brass, adj. mefjtngeti. Brave, tapfer, ita», ebel Bread, bai3 Srob. Break, bre^en, jerSrec^eti. Breastpin, bie SrujhtabeL Bremen, Sremen. Brewer, ber Srauer. Bridge, bie SBriicEe. Bring, bringen. Broom, ber Sefetu Brother, bet ©ruber ;|- inlaw, btt Brown, btaun. Brush, bie Siirfle. Bud, bie Snoape, ba« Siuge. BuUd, bauetu Building, ba^ ®ebaube. Burdensome, Ittflig. Burn, brcmtcn, Burjr, iegraben. Business, baa ©ef^dft, bie er, fi^ttletig. Dig, graSen. Dignity, bie Surbe, ber SRong, baa Stmt Diligence, ber glelg. Diligent, flei§ig, emjtg. Discontented, unjufrtebetl. Distinct, beutlt^. Disturber, ber ©tBrer. Ditch, ber OraJen. Do, t|un, wac^en, setrtc^ten, ftiJ^ Sc pnben. Dog, ber ^mb. Door, bte 3:pre, or X^tu Doubt, jweifcltu Down, unten, nteber, ^tnaS, ^iimnter, §erunter. Draught-animal, btt? Buflt^let. Draw, litljm, jei^nett. Dresden, SreSben. Dress, ba« flielb. Drink, ber SErattf, ba« ©etrSnfe; fau- fen, trinfen. Drive, JretBen. Dry, troSen. Duck, bie Ente. Due, geiii^^renb, ttttgemclTeti. Dull, bumnt. During, ttci^renb. Duty bie 3)jlii^t, ©($Mlbtgfeit Dyer, ber geirJer. E Kagle, bet OTbtet. Ear, baa £i^r. Earn, scrbieneit, gewltmeji. Earth, bie ®tbe. Easy, -ily, leti^t, rul^igi fret Eat, effcn, frelfen. Eel, bet Star. Eight, ai^t. Either, ctner »on ietbett, entwebei. Elephant, ber ^tftjarU. Emerald, ber ©niaragb. Emperor, bet ^atfet. End, baa Snbe. Enemy, ber geinb. English, bte Engtcinber; englifc^ Englishman, ber Engtattber. Enjoy, ftc^ erfreuett, geittegetu Enough, gcnug, ^intangltc^. Entire, ganj, SoBjiiittbig. Envious, neibtfi^. Envy, benetben. Escape, entrittnett, entfommea Esteem, fc^a Jen, tt^ten. Eternity, bte Swigtett. Europe, EuriUja. Even, tUrir gerabe, fogat, feI6|i Evening, ber Stdenb, bie Stienbjeit. Ever, jc, iemala, iatmer. Every, -where, altent^alJenr flierttH Exercise, bie Ue6ung» bie SlufgaJe; iiSen. Expect, erwttrten. Eye, baa Stuge, De^t. F Fail, fe^Ien, nntetlajfett. Faithful, tteu, rebll^ Fall, ber gall; fatten; to - asleep. elttfc^Iafen, entfi|lafett. Fan, ber gainer. Far, entfernt, fetn. Fast, feji, gcfc^ttjinb, [S^ntU. Father, ber SJater; - in law, bet ©c^wtegettjater ; -land, baa ©olet* lanb. Fault, ber ge'^Ict, bie ©$ulb. Favorable, gUttfltg. Fear, bie gurc^t; fitrc^tett. Feather, bie geber. Fellow-scholar, bet SKltfc^illet. Few, ttenig; a-, eintge. Field, baa gelb. Fifty, fttnfsig. Fifteen, fitnfje^n. Fight, fe^ten, (Iteiten. Final, -ly, enbli^. FIN aEM Gt^N HAS 509 Find, finbcn, antrejfen. Fine, fein, fdjoiu Finger, ber ginger. Fire, iai geuer. First, et|le. Fisli, ber8ifi|;ftf(|tn. Fisherman, ber 8lfi|Er. Fit, uoffen. Flatter, fi^nietc^eln, lieitofen. Flatterer, ber ©c^mei(I)ter. Flattering, fi$meti^et|aft, f($mei(|clni Flax, ber giai«. Flee, flie^en. Florin, ber ©utbeti. Flour, ba« 3Ke^I. Flow, fitegen, ilrijmen. Flower, bte SBlume, SBIittfe. Flute, bte glijte. Fly, tie gitege ; fKegcn, flie^en. Foam, ber ©c^aum ; fi^duniert. Follow, fotgen, na^fotgen. Fool, ber Sfor, Starr. Foolish, t^ijrid)!, narrif(|. Foot, ber gup; on-, ju guf. For, fiir, naSj, mtt, «m . . . toilfcit, an, ana, woi^renb, auf, ju, bcnn. Forest, ber gorfi, SBalb. Forget, sergeffetu P. 356. Fork, bte ®a6eL Four, »ter. Fowl, baa ^u'^rt. France, granftetc^. Francis, granj. Frankfort, grantfurt Free, Befreien, frei. French, franjoftfc^, ble granjofen. Frenchman, ber granjofe. Friend, ber greunb, bte greunbtn. Friendly, freunbUi^. From, son, au8. Fruit, bit gru^t, ba« DSjl ; -tree ber Oi^imxm. G Gain, getulnnen. Gallant, tapfer Bras. Garden, ber ®arten. Gardener, ber Ocirtner. Gather, fantmetn, tefen. General, aUgemein; ber gelbjen ®eneral. Generally, gewS^nltc^; im STOge metnen. Goneroua, jroBu-fit^Jg, fteigeMg. Gentlenwin, lierr, ber getitbete, feine 3»ann. German, beutfii^, ber S)e«tf($e. Germany, Seutfc^Ianb. Get, erl^alten, betommen, Jommen, ge- langcn, gerat^^en, lalfen ; to -rid o^ loS werbcn; to - at, tetfommen. Giant, ber Siiefe ; -Montains, SJiefen* gef)iv.-e. Girl, bo 3 SRnbc^en. Give, gcBen, fi^enfen. Glad, fro^, letter, sufrleben; to te -> ftci) freiien. Glass, ba« ®laa, ber ©(jiegeL Glazier, ber ®lafer Glove, ber ^aubfi^uf. Go, ge^eit P. 348. Gold, baa ®Dlb; golben; -smith, bet ®oIbf(i)mteb. Gone, »eg, fort. Good, gut. Goose, bie ®an3. Govern, regteren, lenten, Sc^crrfi^ji. Gracious, gnabig, gtittg. Gradual, -ly, nac^ unb mi), jluf^ wetfe. Grain, bai itorn, ®etreibf Grass, bag ®raa. Grateful, banfbar. Grave, bag ®ra6. Gray, grau. Great, grog. Greece, ®rtfc^enlanb. Green, grun, frifd), unreif. Grieve, fronten. Grind, ma^Ien. Grow, waclfen. Guide, ber gu^ret. Guilty, fi^ulbtg. H Haggard, ^ager." Hal^ |ttI6. Hamburg, |>antiurg. Hammer, ber liammer; ^tameta Hand, bie $anb. Handkerchief baS 2:«PentU(|. Handle, ber ©tiel. Hang, iangen, Be'^angen. Happen, fid) creigPWL gefi^eljen Happy, gliittttc^. Harbo', ber ^afen Hard, :5(!irt, flatter Hasteu, eiletl. 510 BLiVT IF -LAM Hat, bet tint ; -maker, ber ^tttmaijtx. Hate, ^affen, scrotfi^etten. Hateful, set^ugt, gepfjtg. Hatter, ber |)utma($Er. Hare, ^aten. Hay, ba? -Jieu. He, er, berjcntge. Head, bet Beff. Health, bte ©efunb^eit Healthy, gefunb. Hear, ^iiteie Hearen, bet ^immeL Heavy, fc^mer. Help, bie^ttfe; ^elfcn, see fi!nnen(L.45). Helpless, pljlog. Hemp, ber $anf. Here, ^^tet '^ter^er. Hers, ber, bic, bai i^tige. Hessian, ber ©effe. High, ^o4 Him, i:^m, bent, t^n, ben. Himselt feH)|1, p*- His, fetn, ber fetntge, or fetne. Hit, p^Iogen, treffen. Hold, '^dlten. Hole, bag £o(|, bte liB^Ie. Home, nail ©dufe ; at -, ju |)ttufe. Honest, efrlid), rcii|tf(|afFen- Honey, ber $onig. Honor, bie E^re; e'^rcn. Hope, bie ^offnung; ^ofen. Horse, bai SIferb, SRop; on -back, ju ^ferbc. Hostility, bte ^einbfeltgfett. Hotel, bet (Satl^of, baS ®ajl^ait«. Hour, bte ©tuilbe. House, iai |)aua. How, wie, auf welc^e 3lrL Howl, ^eulen. Hundred, ^unberL Hungarian, berUngor; ungartfi^. Hungry, ^ungrtg ; he is -, e^ ^itngert i^n, or t^n ^ungert Hunter, ber 3ager. Hurt, wc^ f^un. Husbandman, ber Saitbmann. Hypocrisy, bte ^cuc^elei I I, ic^; I say! ^oren ©te bo^! Wren ©ie einntaL Idl& witgtg, trcige. Idleness, bie Xroig^ett, Saul^eit. li toenn, fall*. ni-natured, iofe. Image, ba* SBtlb. Immediate, gle'^i augeniltdlitS, f«' gleii^. Immortal, unfiertiti^. Impolite, uttpjlt^. Improbable, unwa^rfi^einltil. In, in, bet, an, isu, ttuf, wit, unter, naft, ii6er, herein, ^inein. Indol3nt, tttlTtg, trage. Industrious, fteigig. Inhabitant, ber Einroo^ner. Injure, f(|aben, Beleibtgen, ieeintra** ttgen. Injurious, ungere^t, nac^t^etlig. Ink, bie Sinte ; -stand, bo« 3;tntenfaS. Innocence, bie Unfi^ulb. Innocent, unWulbtg. Inquire, fici ertunbigen, fragen. Insecure, unfi^er. Insist, bejle^en. Instead of, |iatt, anjiatt. Instruct, unterrtc^tcn. Instructive, bele^renb, le^rreic^. Interesting, anjiellenb, interefiant. Into, in. Iron, btt« Eifen ; eifern. It, eg. Italian, italienifi^ ; ber Stalienet. Jacket, bte Z aai Sageglic^t tommen. Lighten, leuc^ten, blijen. Like, glei(^, a^nlid); gefalten; the -, bergleti^cn ; he would - to, et nto^te gern. Lime, bai Rail Little, tlein, gering, Wenlg. Live, leJen, wolnen. Lock, bag ©djiop; }«fi|Iie6en, fc^Itef- fcn; -smith, ber ©(ItSITer. Lofty, 1)0^, ct^oten. Long, lang, lange. Look, bag Slnfe^ett ^aien; augft^en; to - for, fudjen. Lose, serltcrcn. Lond, -ly, taut. Love, bic 8ie6e ; Kef en. LoT^, niebvig, Briitten. M Magdeburg, SJZagbeJurg. Maize, ber SKaig. Make, ntac^en, »erii(^ten, laflTen. Man, bet aJIenfd), Sltann. Manheim, 3)lann^eim. Many, Kiel ; L. 65 ; - a, manc^er. Marble, bei STOarmot. March; ber SRarj. Mark, bag Setc^en, 3iel. Mason, ber SKaurer. Mast, ber 3»ait. Master, ber 2(fetjicr, $err; - of a language, einer ©|)rac|e ntoif^tig. Matter, bie ©ac^e ; what is the -? wag gibt eg ? May, ber Wlai. May, miigenr fonnen, biirfen. Mayence, SJJainj. Meadow, bte SSJiefe. Mean, gemetrt, WIe(i|t; bag SWittel- by means of, sermittelfl. Measles, bie ffl'iafern. Measure, bag 3Ra5; ntefTcn. Meat, bag gletfi^. Meet, to go to -, entgegen ge^en, tttf* fen, begegnen. > Melon, bie SRelone. Melt, fc^meljcn. Memory, bag ®eba(i&tnt^. Mention, etttia^nen. Merchant, ber Saufmann. Messenger, ber Sote. Migrate, jie^cn. Milk, bie 3)tilc^. Miller, ber 2)JuI[er. Mind, bag ®emut^, ber ©inn. Mindfal, aufniettfttm, eingebent. Mine, mein, mcinige. (L. 36). Miser, ber (Seij^alg. Miserable, elenb, erJdrmlic^. Misfortune, bag Ungliid. Miss, bag gtauletn. Misunderstand, falfd) oerfle^eni mif« »cr|le|en. Modest, 6e[c^eiben. Money, bag ®etb, bie fSHmit. Month, ber 3)lonat. Moon, ber 3Ronb. More, bag 3Bel^t; me^r. Morning, ber SUorgen. Mother, bie SRutter. Mountain, ber Serg. Much, stet, fe^r. Mule, bag SRttult^iet. Munich, 3)liinc^en. Murder, ermorben. Music, bie SDZufiJ. Must, miifTen. (L. 46). Mustard, ber ©enf. My, mein, weine. 512 BAI — OLD OLD ^PBO N Wail, in gJogel. Name, bet 3Jame. Karrow, cngc. ITatiTe-oountry, bai SSatMlanb Natural, natil»lt(|. Nature, bie 9Jatut. Near, naljt, ieina^e, fa(i, Sel Need, bjbiirfctt, not^ig ^aten. Needle, bie SJabeL Neighbor, ber SJai^tat, Sioi^jle, bit Negligent, nac^Ioifftg. Neither, tsebcr, mHj nid^t; - . . . nor, tteber . . . no^. Nephew, bet ?iefe. Nest, btt« 9iefL NeTer, nie, niemal^. Nevertheless, nic^t^befloweniset, bef' fennngea^tet, bentu)i|. Neiv, neu, frtfc^. News, bie SJeuigJeit, Slac^riii^t. Newspaper, bie Seitung. Next, nd(I)fi, folgenb. Night, bie 9Ja(^t. No, rein, nic^t, tein. Noboay. STtiemattb. (L. 18. 5). None, feinet, feine, teineS. Nor, nod), and) niSjU North, 9torben. Norwegian, bei Slotweget. Not, nidjt. Nothing, nic^tJ. Notwithstanding, ungeac^tet, ben* noi|, boi$. Now, nun, jegt, foeJen. O Oak, bie (£i(^e. Oaia, ber $afei. Obedience, bet ®e^orfam. Obedient, ge^orfant. Obej, ge^erc^cn. Oblige, serpjli^ten, (nerHnben, see ntUffen (L. 45). Obstinate, eigenjinnig. O^ son, toegcn, sermittcljl - course, natiirlic^, (i »er|le^t ft4 Offend, beieibigen. Office, bttS 2lmt. Officer, ber Dfftciet. Often, oft, Bfter*. Oil, iai JDel. Old, alt. On, an, ouf, in, Jet, ju, mit, unter, sot, u6et, sort, roeg, weiter, f»ttf gegen, jufolge. Only, einjig, altein, nut, erjt Opinion, bie 3)Jeinung. Oppress, nnlenbtitrfen. Or, ober. Oration, bie Dicbe. Orator, ber fllebnei. Orchard, ber Dbjlgaitett Order, 6ejicHen. Orphan, bet, bie SBaife. Ostrich, bet ©traug. Other, bet, bie, baS onbete; every - day, einen Sag um ben anbftnj -wise, anber^, fon|i. Our, itnfer, bet unftige. Out, au«, btonicn; - oi, aui, auger. Outside, augetlalb. Over, itkt, auf, :^i:iii6et, '^eriiierf sorittet, sortei, oUju, ju fe^r, tseitt bteit, iibet^in, butc^, sot. Owe, Wulbig fein, seibanten. Ox, bet Ddji. Pain, ber ©(|mei5. Paint brush, ber 3)infel. Painter, bet 3J!alet. Painting, ba^ ®emalbe. Pair, iai 3)aat. Palace, bet 9>ala|l. Pale, bleii^. Paper, bai 3)a))ier; pa^letttu Parasol, bet ©onnenfi^itnu Parents, bie Eltetn. Paris, 9lari4. Part, bet S^eit. Passion, bie Seibenfc^aft. Past, setgangen, sotlJei. Patient, gebulbig; bet Jtranfe* Sif tient. Patriotic, (jattiolifc^. Pea, bie Erbfe. Peace, bet griebe. Peaceful, ftiebfam, fiiebli^. Peach, bie ^Jptftt^e. Peacock, ber 3>fa«. Pear, bie Sitne. Peaii, bie $etle. Peasant, bet Sanbmann, Sauci. Peculiarity, bie Sigen^eit. PEN P0N PUB RUB &18 Pen, bit gcber, ©i^tclifebei; -knife, baS fJcbermelTet. Pejioil, bcr 3)tnfel, SSIeijHft. People, bai aSolt/ bie Seute; JeuSl" tern. Pepper, bet SJfejfet. Perfect, seCtommtn. Perhaps, »tet[cti|t. Perish, umEommcn, j« Orunbe ge^en. Pestilence, bte 9)e|l. Physiciaii, bet SltjL Piece, baS ©tiicE. Pigeon, bte Saute. Pink, bie SiZetfe. Pit. bie ®vubc. Pit^ner, ber ^rug. Pity, hii sKitleiben- it is a -, c« i|i ©c^abe; temitleiben, fcebauern. Plan, ber 95l9tt, Sntwurf. Plane, ber ^DitU Plate, ber Seller. Play, fpielen, fi^erjen. Player, ber ©pieler. Pleasant, -ly, angene^m. Please, gefoUen, ergii^en. Pleasure, bag ©ergniigetu Plum, bie 9)flaume. Pole, bet 3)ole. Polite, feiit, attig, ^o(Iic^. Poor, arm, biirftig, mager. Porcelain, bag ^Porsellan. Post-mark, ber Stein)jel. Pound, bag 9)funb. Pour, gitgen, einft^enten. Poverty, bie Slrmut^. Powder, bag S)ul»er. Power, bie SUJacflt, ®tmU, Sraft. Powerful, -ly, niai^ttg. Practical, praftifc^. Practice, bie Uebuag. Praise, bag Cob; loben, pteifcn. Preposition, bog a}£rl)almiB>»ott. Pretty, \)ubfi), nett, sietU4 Prince, bet 9>rtnj, gutjl. Principle, ber ©runbfaf. Prison, bag Ocfangnig. Probable, »a^t|"c^cinlii|. Pronoun, bag giiriDort. Promisxj, bag SBerfprci^en; »frfprec|cn; geloben. Prooonnee, augf))re(|cn. Proud, jlols, trojlg. Prussia, 3>reu5en. Punish, beftmfeit. Pure, rein, tauter. Purse, ber Seutel. Put, liellen, legen. Q Quarrel, janfen, flreiteit Queen, bte ^onigtn. • R Rage, rolit^en. Ram, bet Stegen; regnctt Raise, ^eben, auf|eien. Rapid, fdjneH, gefc^toinb. Rather, Kefcer. Raven, ber SRaOe. , Read, lefen. Really, ttitfltd), in ber S^at Receive, emsfangcn, er|alten. Recommend, empfefjien. Recover, gefunb loerben, genefen Red, roti. Rejoice, fi[| freuen. Relation, bcr, bie Serwanbte Reliable, suoctldfflg. Remain, Bleil'en. Remember, fic| ctinnetn. Renowned, betii^mt. Resemble, gtetc^en, a^nliil feitu Reside, toolnen. Resistance, bet Sffiiberjianb. Respect, ad)tcn, fi^d^en, ^o^ai^ten. Result, bie gotge, ber Srfofg. Return, juriitffc^ten, juriicEgekn, su> Reward, sergelten, 6elti|nen. Rice, bet Jlieip. Rich, reii$. Ride, tettcn, fasten. Ridicule, lac^erli(| mac^en, fti^ iitei . . . auf^altcrt. Ring, bcr King, treig, .fflann Ripe, rcif, jettig. Ripen, reifen. River, ber gtui, ©trom. Road, bie ©tragc ; ber SBeg. Rob, raubeii, krrtu6en. Robbery, ber 3iaub. Rook, ber geig, gelfen. Roof, bag Sa^. Room, bet Siaum, bie ©tutie, bat Simmer. Rope, bag ©eil ; -maker, bcr Seile» Rose, bie SRofe. Ruby, bcr Sfuiiin. 514 RUL— SHI SHO SPA Rule, bit gjegcl, ^errfc^aft. Run, laufen, rcnncn, riimen; - a-way, bur^gtl^etu Russia, 9iug[ttnb. Russian, ber Sftuffe ; rufftfc^. Rusty, to|Wg. Rye, itx SKoggen, ba« Sotn. S Sad, trtturig, 6ctrit6t. Saddle, bet Sattcl. Saddler, bcr ©attter. Sailor, btr SUatrofe. Sake. (L. 60.) 8alt, ba« ©alj. Same, berfelbe, biefelbe, baffelbe; the very -, ber noimlti^e. Satin, bcr SMai. Satisfied, jufvicben. Saxony, Siic^feit. Say, fagett. Soarletfever, bii8 ©i^arta^fteber. Scholar, bet ©c^iilet, ®ele^rte, bie ©c^itlertn. School, bie ©d)ute. Scold, fc^elten. Sea, bie ©ee, ba« 3Keer. Seal, ber ©ec^unb. Seal, bai g)etfc|aft, ber ©tempel Sealing--wax, ba^ ©iegellad. Season, bie 3tt|reSseit, recite Seit Season of the year, bie Sa^re^jeit. See, fc^en. Seem, fi^eincn. Seize, etgreifcn. Seldom, frtten. Sel^ felbf}. Selfish, eigennii^ig. Sell, serfaufeiu Send, fenben, f(|t(Ien; to -for, ^elcn laffen. Sense, ber ©imt, Serflttnb. September, ©cptcmter. Sergeant, bcr gelbmebel. Servant, bcr 35iencr; - girl, bttS Sienftmoi^en. Several, »erfi^icbene, me|rere. Se-w, nci^cii. Shall, folten, werbert. Sharp, -ly, fcl)arf. Sharpen, fc^oirfen, f(I)lelfcn, wf))i^en. Sheep, iai ©c^af. Shine, fc^cinen, Ieu(|ten. Ship, ba« ©^iff. Shoe, ber ©c^ii^, ba8 ?>ufeirett; - maker, ber ©^U^mci^et. Shoot, f^iegcn. Shore, ba« Ufci. Shriek, fi^reietu Short, turj. Shovel, bie ©c^aufeL Show, jeigcn Sick, Erant, unwo^L Side, bie Seite; on this -, bieafeit* on the other -, jenfeit*. Siege, bie SSclagerung. Sight, bag Oertd)!; out of -, Mi bea Stugcn. Silk, bie ©eibe; feiben. Silly, einfalttg, alberru saver, iai ©itber; filbern. Similar, ci^nlic^. ' Since, feitbem, Server, toetl, bo. Sing, fingetu Singer, ber ©cinger. Sister, bte ©d)»e|"tcr ; - in law, bie ©c^wcigerin. Sit, ftBen, tJflffen. Situation, bie ©telle. Six, fec^a. Sixt«enth. fc^gjc'^ntc. Skillful, gcfc^idEt. Slaughter, fij)lac^ten. Sleep, ber ©c[)lcif; fd)lafen. Sleeve, ber SIcrmel. Slow, iangfam. Small, flctn, gcving; -pox, bie Slattern. Smile, UHjdrx. Smith, bcr ©c^mieb, ©c|mib, ©c^mibt Smoke, ber fHauij ; raudjen. Smooth, glalt. Snow, ber ©i^nee; fi^aeien. So, fo. Sojourn, bcr Slufent^alt. Sofa, baa JIfuIjebett, ©op^tt. Soft, iBcii^, fanft, Icife. Soldier, ber ©olbat. Some, -body, jemanb ; -thing, tVtoai, -times, juweilett, manifmal; - where, irgcnbwo. Son, ber ©o|n. Song, ber (Sefttng, baS 8ieb. Soon, balb, frii^. Sorrow, ber jfummer. Sorry, traurig, betrubt; I am -, rt l^ut mir leib. South, ©iibctu Spade, ber ©paten. SPA SWO TAB — TO 515 Bpaiish, fpunirc^. Spare, f^onett. Sparrow, ber ©(jctling. Speak, f)3vc(|en, reben. Spin, fpinntn, brefien. Spirit, bcr ®etfl, cte ©ccle. Spite, ber OvoII ; in - o^ tto^. Split, ftjalten! Sponge, ber ©Awamra. Spoon, ber Cbffitt Spring, ber ©(jrung, bie DucUe, ber Srit^Ung; fjaringen. Stable, bcr ®tat[. Stand, bcr ©tanb, bte ©telle ; fle^en Start, fa|ven, ttbreifen. State, ber ©tttttt ; -'a-inan, ber ©taaf^« wann. Stay, ber 9lufent]|alt ; JleiBen. Stead, bie ©telle. (L. 60.) Steal, fle^Ieit. Steel ber ©tn^l; |M^len, jJa^tetn. (L. 15. 5). Steep, jleil. Still, liiU, ru'^tg, noc^. Sting, ber ©ta^el ; pecfjen. Story, bie ®efc^tc|te, bad 3Kii^icf).Tc. Stove, ber Dfett. Stranger, ber grembc, Ui'.f efaiuitc. Stream, ber ©trom. Street, bie ©trape. Strength, bie ©tarfe. Strike, Wlagen, fioeen, lauen. Strong, jlarf, frciftig, bevb. Study, llubiren, ntti|btnten. Stupid, bumm, at6ern. Subject, bet Unterf^an; itntettl^ait Succeed, nac^folgen, gelingetu Succumb, erliegetl. Suffer, leiben. Sugar, ber Qttdtx. Summer, bcr ©ommer. Snn, bie ©onne. Superior, uberlegett/ Borjiigti^ei Supply, erfe^en. Sure, fic|er, gewip. Sargeon, bcr SBunbarst. S^'allow bie ©c^HjallJe. Svran, bei ©c^miin. S^i'ede, bcr ©cbtuebe. Sweep, fe^rctt. Swell, fi^welleti, auffc^weCen. Swim, fclwimmciu Sword, iai ©i|-B)ert Table, bie Safer, ber ZifsSj. Tailor, bcr ©c^neiber. Take, nel)men, maiden; to - cold, (Idj etfalten; to - off, atne^mett. Tanner, ber Oerber. Tea, ber S;|ee. Teach, le^ten, uitterric^ten. Teacher, ber Ce^rer, bie Se^reritt Tedious, langtDcilig. Tell, jd[)lcn, erja^len. Than, ali, bcitn. That, prn. jencr, wtli^tx, ber. That, conj. ba§. The, ber, bie, iai, je . . ., be|To ...,nm fo ; - more, - better, je Bte:^i, bejio bcffct. Thee, bir, bi($; of- beiner. Their, i^r, i^re. Them, t|nen, ftc- Themaelres, fic fcltfl, |t(| feI6|l. There, ba, btrt, bafeltil, ba^in, c«; - fore, ballet, barum, ttlfo, They, ftc. Thief, bet Sieb. Thing, baa Sing, bte ©ad^e. Think, bcnfen, meinett, gtauSettj to - of, gcbcittcn. Third; britte ; ba3 S)rittel. This, bicfer. Thirty, bret§tg. Thorn, bet Sorru Though, jbfc[)on, oigIei(§. Thought, ber ®cbantc. Thousand, taufenb. Thrash, brcfi^cn. Thrasher, ber SJrcfiler. Threaten, bro^ett. Three, brct. Thresh, see Thrash. Through, bur(|. Throw, tDcrfcn. Thunder, bonncm, wettern. Thus, fo, tttro, aufbtefeSttt. Thyself, bu fel6|i, fettf}, bt*, kit Tiger, ber Sigcr. Till, bi«. Time, bte Sett, baS Widt Tin, ba« Sinn. Tinman, ber fltcmpner. Tired, miibe, uberbritfjtg. To, j«, urn, an, auf, mtt, nad), fut, gegen. Hi ; - and fro, Jin unb 1)tx 516 TOB TJPO USE ^WHl Tobacco, bet Xtiiat tJseful, nuJU^ To-day, ^eate. Toilsome, anjlrensenb. Toll-gatherer, bet 3olInet. To-morrow, motgen. Too, 5«, all5U, au4 Tooth, bet 3ols; -cutter, ber ^lolS' ^auer Wooden, ^oljern. Wool, bte SBoIIe. Word, bag aSort. WorkjbieSlttett, ba« Sett; arktten. World, bte SCBelt, Srbe; -renowned, welt6eru|mt. Worm, ber SBurm. Worst, ^djUHjitftt, argfle. Worth, ber Sffiert^; wert^, tnUrbig. Worthy, wiirbig. Wretched, elenb. Write, f(J)reiben. Writing-book, baa ©^reiiiuc^; - desk, baa ©^rci^ljult ; -paper bat ©i^ret6i)a))tet. Wrong, unrei^t, falf($. Yarn, baS ®arn. Tear, bai 3a1)x. Yellow, gelb. Yes, 3a. Yesterday, ge^ertu Yet, boi|, bennoc^, noc^. Yonder, bort. You, i^r, etc. (L. 27> Young, iung, fttf4 Your, euer, bein, 3^t. Youth, bit Sugtnb. ERRAT_i.. Bed, ba« Sett, Citizen, ber Sitrger. Evil, ba8 Uetel ; eab'. itiel, 6ofe. Pupil, ber Sogling, ©cottier. Benoimcse, entfagen. Service, ber S>ten|l, Spear, ber ©peer. Tain, ettel ; in— ^ setgeJen*. Weak, fc^tta^. GENEEAL INDEX. SI, 0/ tt chaaged to the umlauts, &, b, u, L.* 2. II., in derivative form^ I 11. 1. Abbrevi itions, p. 261. Stbct, ttUcin, fonbern, distinguished, g 256. 2. a. L. 21. i. Abstract nouns, § 5. 2. Accent, § 2. 10. L. 2. VI. Stc^ten, L. 62. 6. Accusative or dative after certain prepositions, § 116. Rule for the use of, g 1.32. Verbs requiring two, § 132. 2. Used to denote measure, distance or time, § 132. 3. Construed absolutely, § 132. 5. Adjectives, formed by suffixes, g 25. § 26. Predicative and attributive, p. 44. (Note). Declension of, §27. Old form of, § 28. 8 29. L. 14. New form of, § 30. f 31. L. 15. Mixed form of, § 32. L. 16. Com- parison of, § 35. L. 32. Used as nouns, § 34. 5. L. 33. 1. Com- paratives and superlatives, § 37. Irregular and defective forms of, g 39. Compared by means of ad- verbs, g 41. Their agreement with nouns, g 135. L. 14. 4. Re- petition of, for different genders, § 135. 5. Requiring the gen., L. 61. Requiring the dat., L. 63. Adverbs, § 100. Formed from nouns, §. 101. From adjectives, g 102. From pronouns, § 103. From verbs, g 104. By composition, g 105. Comparison of, g 106. Nouns used as, §. 128. L. 61. 8. Syntax of, g 151. Siller, prefixed to superlatives, g 38. 2. £. 32. 7. Applied to number and quantity, g 53. 3. Peculiar use oi; g 134. 1. SlU, L. 69. 3. SOfo, L. 69. 4. 2lin, with the positive of an adjec- tive used for the superlative, § 38. 1. L. 32. p. This form 0i% its use, § 156. 2. b. L. 69. 9. Dative, after certain prepositions, § 116. Peculiar uses of, § 129. 1. 2. 3, , bejjJBegen, L. 53. 6. t)t\ls>, L. 32. 10. Determinative pronouns, § 63 L. 41. 25i£fer and jcner distinguished, § 62. 2. ®icfc?, bieS, peculiar use of, § 62. 1. § 134. 1. Dimidiative numerals, how formed, §49. Diminutives, § 10. L. 24. 1. 2. Gender of pronouns referring to, § 134. 2. L. 28. 4. Distinctive numerals, how formed, § 51. 1. 2. Diphthongs, sounds of, L. 2. III. Distributive numerals, how formed, §46. ®i)<^, § 156. 2. c. L. 69. 11. Srei and jwci, when declined, § 44. 4. Surfeit/ conjugation of, § 83. 2. Re- marks on, § 83. 9. EOen, before a demonstrative, § 62. 6. ®i, termination, § 10. eigem, L. 16 3. Ein, one, how declined, § 44. 2. 3 fitnanber, its use, § 60. 3. einige, etlic^e, etiua^, § 53. Emp and cnt, § 97. 2. ®n, suffix, forming adjectives, § 2\ L 15. 5. Entgegen, § 112. 5. Sr and ijer, § 97. 3. 4. Eiinnern, L. 62. 1. ®r|l, L. 69. 14. £S, peculiar use of, § 57. 8 § 134 1. 5. ®« fci benn, L. 69. 10. (Elwa, L. 69. 15. ®tn)a«, L. 65. 4. ©TO., L. 27. 3. (Note.) Etymology, § 1. Euphonicletters, § 2, 8. § U. 8 520 GENERAL OtDEX. ge'^Ien, L. 57. 5. Feminine nouns, indeclinable in the angular, § 12. 4. Exceptions to this, p. 277. (Note). Foreign nouns, § 16. Old declension of, § 17. New declension of, § 18. Partly of the old and partly of the new, § 19. grau, grauUin, L. 70. giit, L. 67. 2. Future tenses, observ. on the use ot § 141. 1. 2. L. 38. 4. (Sans ^^^ ^aVii before names of pla- ces, § 53. 2. ®anj unb gar, L. 19. 3. ®at, L. 69. 16. ®e, prefix of nouns, § 2. 3. § 11. 3. Prefixed to the past participle, § 69. 4. Inserted between the prefix and the radical in com- pound verbs separable, § 93. 3. § 99. 3. Excluded from the per- fect participle of compound verbs inseparable, § 94. (Seien, L. 57. 4. OSegen, L. 67. 3. @egenu6er, L. 66. 5. Gender, the natural and gramma- tical, § 6. 1. 2. Rules o^ § 7. Gender of compounds and foreign words, § 8. Genitive, limiting a noun, § 123. Limiting an adjective, § 124. With the verbs a^teti, (fee, § 125. After reflexive verbs, § 126. After the impersonal ii geliiltet mi(^, alb, § 53. 2. Iialben or $aI6cr, § 110. 3. L. 60. 4. |)allien, wegen and urn - miHen with the genitive of personal pro- nouns, § 57. 1. L. 60. 6. ^MXi, nai^ or ju, L. 43. 2. kn'im, L. 49. 1. ob». $ett, suffix, § 10. §er and ^in, § 103. 3. 4. L, 52. hm, L. 70. |)in, li. 52. ^oi), form o^ in the eomparatiTa § 40. 1. |)elen lafftHf L. 49. 6. |i«ntictt and taufent) as collective^ §44. 6. S^ro and £)£to, p. 312. {Note). Smmet, L. 69. 19. Imperative mood, observations on the several uses o^ § 145. 1 2. L. 50. 5. Past participle, a place o^ § 145. 3. Imperfect, observations on the use o^ § 138. 1. 2. 3. Impersonal verbs, § 88. L. 57. 3n, L. 68. 4. 3n or inri/ feminine terminations, § 10. Indefinite numerals, how formed, §53._ Indefinite pronouns, § 59. Indicative mood, for the imperative § 142. 2. L. B8. Infinitive mood, use of^ in place ot a past participle, § 74. 3. Without JU, § 146. 1. L. 49. With ju, § 146. 2. As a verbal substantive, § 146. 3. Active form used pas- sively, § 146. 4. L. 49. 6. Position oi, § 15S. £). Answei-ing after blet* ben, ge^en len, §■ 83. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 1. 8. Pas- sive, §84. Paradigm of a passive, g 85. Reflexive, § 8fi. Paradigm of a reflexive, § 87. Impersonal, § 88. Compound, § 88. 89. Paradigm of a compound, § 92. Syntax of, § 136. aStel, when declined, § 53. 3. L. 65. 7. 8. 9. SSkUti^t, L. 69. 30. SJon, § 112. 12. L. 66. 12. Before names, g 23. 3. With the dativ* instead of the genitive, § 123. ? SJot, L. 68. 7. Vowels, classification and pronai ciation o^ L. 2. 1. SfBa«, § 67. 3. § 134. 1. L. 13; 40. SBaa, for roamm, % 67. 3. SBita fiir etn, § 66. 4. 5. § 67. 1. 2 L. 13. n, L. 60. (er (relative), genitive o^ when used, § 65. 1. SBentg, when declined, § 53. 3. L. 66. 7. 8. 9. SBer and Kai (relatives), their use and position, § 65. 3. 4. 5. L. 40. As interrogatives,, § 66. 3. L. 13. SSSeiben, auxiliary of the first class, S 70. 2. Paradigm of, § 72. 3. § 73. L. 46. SlBett^ fein, L. 61. 6. 2Ctc, L. 69. SBte Seftnben ®ie ft(|. L- 29. 10- Sie DtEl, § 45. 5. SEBilfcn, conjugatioi J* | 83. 7. Placed before an .rfinitive, It 49. 7. SBo, compounded W;'. ; .ner words, § 103. L. 52. SSo% L. 69. 34. SBoften, conjugation of, § 83. 8. Remarks on, § 83. 14. L. 45. 10. SEBotben, for geworben, § 84. 2. • 3«, § 112. 9. 13. L. 66. 13. Wher between the parts of a oompounij verb, § 93. Sufolge, § 110. 8. L. 60. 3u ®ninbt gtlen, xxi)ttt[, L. 43. 6. Su l>ttwft, L. 43. 2. Btvei and breii when decliutd, § 44. 4. EEBL'S SERIES OF ENGLISH GRAMMARS. Pur freshness, analysis, scientific method, and practical utility, this series of En^lisli Graminais is unrivaled by any other yet published. nasi LSSS0N3 in gbammab. cokuon school gbaumab. COIIFS£H£NSIV£ GBAXMAK. HITCHCOCK'3 ATTATOMT. HITCHCOOK'S GEOLOGY. KIDDLE'S NEW ASTKONOMT. SILL'S TSKW SYNTHESIS. THE AMERICAN DEBATER. THE HUMOROUS Sl'EAKEE. OUTLINES OF OBJKCT TEACHING. OE, ALDEN'S CHRISTIAN ETHICS ; SCIENCE or DUTY. GOODISON'S DKA WING-BOOK. FEOBISHER'8 TOIrE AND ACTION. ELIOT & STOEEE'S INOEGANIO CUEMISTEY. PASQUELLE'S FRENCH SERIES. Fasquelle*s Introductory French Course. Fasquelle*s Larger French Cv^urse. Re- vised. Fasquelle's Key to the above. FasqueUe*s Colloquial French Reader. Fasquelle's Teiemaquc, Fasquelle*s Dumas* Napoleon. Fasquelle's Racine. Fasquelle's Manual of French Conversa- tion, Howard's Aid to French Composition, Talbot's French Pronunciation. WOODBURrS GMMXE SERIES. Wbodbury*s New Method with the Ger- man. 'Woodbury*s Key to above. Woodbury's Shorter Course with the German. Woodbury's Key to the Shorter Course. Woodbury's Method for Germans to learn English. Woodbury's Elementary German Reader. Woodbury's Eclectic German Reader. Glaubensklee's German Reader. Glaubcnsklee's Synthetic German Grammar. Woodbury's German English Reader. Kuhner's Elementary Greek Grammar. Questions on Kuhner's Elementary Greek Grammar. Kendrick's Greek Introduction. BUSH'S NOTES ON GENESIS. 2 volumes. BUSH'S NOTES ON EXODUS. 2 Tolumes. BUSH'S NOTES ON LEVITICUS. 1 volume. BUSH'S NOTES ON NUMBERS. 1 volume. BUSH'S NOTES ON JOSHUA. 1 volume. BUSH'S NOTES ON JUDGES. 1 volume. KITTO'S CYCLOPEDIA OF BIBLICAL LITERATURE. 2 vols., half calf, only complete edlUon, fully illustrated. PROGRESSIVE ' SPAinSH READERS. SCHOOL RECORDS. BRADBURY'S SCHOOL MUSIC BOOKS, &c. SPENCEEIAN SYSTEM OF BUSINESS WEITING. THE NEW STANDARD EDITION OF THE SPENCERIAN COPY-BOOKS REVISED, IMPROVED, AND NEWLY ENLARGED. IN FOUK DISTINCT SERIES. COMMOIT 8GS00L SERIES. Ms. 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5. JiUSIJ!f^ES3 SERIES. Ms. 6 and 7. LADIES' SERIES. Ms. 8 and 9. EXERCISE SERIES. Ms. 10, 11, and 13. The particular points of excellence claimed are l SIMPLICITY. 2. PRACTICABILITY. S. BEAUTY. SPENCERIAN KEY TO PRACTICAL PENMANSHIP. SPENCERIAN CHARTS OF WRITING AND DRAWING Sist in Nwnib&r. In Size, 24 &y 80 incites. THEY ARE SO PKINTEO AS TO PRESENT THE APPEARANCE OF SUPERIOR BLACKBOARD WRITING. OOMPEXDIUM OF THE SPElSTCEEIAlSr SYSTEM 60 pages, lUuslrating Chirography in its Analytical, PracUcal, and Ornamental Forms. SPENCERIAN DOUBLE ELASTIC STEEL PENS. These Pens combine elasticity of action witli smoothness of point not fpund in other pens, and are a nearer approximation to the real SWAN QUILL, than anything hitherto invented. THEY ARE THE BEST PENS MANUFACTURED. CAUrFION. — We Caution Booksellers and Stationers against purchasing any " Spencerian '* Pens which have not our Initials, "I., P.,B. & Co.," or "Ivison, Phinney & Co.," on each Pen. These FENS will be sent by Mail to any address in the United States, poetage paidt on receipt of price annexed. No. 1 No. 2 per gross 81 50 1 50 1 60 150 1 50 1 SO 200 No. S No. 9 per^^oss $1 CO No. 3 No. 4 No. 5 No. 6 ti No. 10 No. 11 No. 13 No. 13 No. 14 " 2 00 " 2 00 " 2 75 No. 7 ti " 2 00 Sample gross, 4 kinds assorted, excepting No. 12, $2 00. Sample Cabds containing all the Fourteen Numbers, PRICE TWENTY-FIVE CENTS. A Liberal Discodht to the Trade. N. B. — One of the strongest proofs of the great popularity of these Pens, and an undeniable confession to their superiority, is that no less tJiaii ten firms ha/oe tnan- ufacbwredy or caused to be made^ Pens simitar i/n style^ under diflferent names, for which they claim the same qualities and favor as the still unapproached SPEMCEHIAN. ^p ^ Teachers and Superintendents are invited to send for our Catalogue or Circulars. Address the Pubushers, IVISON, PHESnSTEY. BLAKEMAN & CO. p. 0., Box 1478, New York.